0% found this document useful (0 votes)
6K views506 pages

Allen Physics 2 PDF

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
6K views506 pages

Allen Physics 2 PDF

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 506

(

(
\

( ..

l.

( .

(
r
\.
1
( I CONTENTS~
c
( .
GEOMETRICAL OPTICS
"

( Fonnulae and Basic Theory 1


• Key-Concepts
( Conceptual Subjective Problems . 9
~.
• Exercise (S)
r ~'.
'." . • Exercise (0-1) Single Correct MCQ's 12
( II Exercise (0-2) Miscellaneous Type Problems
. 18
• ExerCise (J-M) Previous 10 years AIEEE Problems 23
• Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years IIT-JEE Problems 26
)
• Answer Key 36
~r
,r" '.

~J
,

(
".

{
".

'v#i-:.·..,:"'·.. ·• .............., .........

J
\

\
,,~'

. \!
/

1
)

: )

. )
.)

I .
C;eometrica".p'p·t,i~~

KEY CONCEPTS

1. LA WS OF REFLECTION :
(i) ,The incident ray (AB), the reflected ray (BC} and normal (NB) to the surface (SS') of
reflection at the point ofincidence (B) lie in the same plane. This plane is'called the plane of
,incidence (also plane of reflection).
(ii) The angle of incidence (the angle between normal and the incident ray) and the angle of
reflection (the angle between the reflected ray and the normal) areequaJ ~2f]

A c

In vectorform Ii' = e- 2(e.n)nl


S \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\«i<,\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\{\\\\ S·
B
"
2. OBJECT :
(a) ,~eaL: Point from which rays actually diverge.
(b) Virtual: Point towards which rays appear to converge"

3. IM.A G:E :
Image is decided by reflected or refracted rays only. The point image for a mirror is that point
(0 Towards which the rays reflected from the mirror, actmilly converge{real image).
OR
,
(ii) From which the reflected rays appear to diverge (virtual image).
! ~ ~
..,
~ 4.
Jl
CHARACTERISTICS OF REFLECTION BY A PLANE MI;RROR

C
d­ (a) The size of the image is the same as that of the object.

''>c
(b) For a reaVobject the image is virtual and tor a virtual object the image is reaL
J
.;::
(c) For a fixed incident light ray, if the mirror be rotated through an angle 8 the reflected ray
1 turns through an angle 28.
~
/
£
',- ­ ~
! 5.
0:. SPHERICAL MIRRORS:
1
~
( !!.
~"- / •....~••·•••··....•····..·· ..·•····.......M'
.....········....;......•·..········l'..M'
i
~ /
.'

~
'"S! principal ...............l .......................:..l.......
(i •.,,, /
'-, .3 axis
\ c F Eip (, c F
~ .... ...

';8

o
o ••·····..:...............................····M \·."':.••••.•.....;:•.::.,•••..•...•.•.•···M

~I

" 1 surface
concave mirror convex mirror

,E 1
t' '-,
'! '

-
v sicS
.,..At.. :Ft.A- X1AL RA YS :

~ays which forms very small angle with axis are called paraxial rays,

:XGN CONVENTION:

Ve follow Cartesian coordinate system convention according to which

I) The p~le ~f the mirror is the origin,

,) The dIrectIon
. of the incident rays is considered as positive x-axis, I
.!

:) VertlCal,ly up is positive y-axis. .. .


10 t:.e : AccordI~g to above convention radius of curvature and focus of concave mlITOnS negatl ve
od of conv~x mIIToris positive.
4:I8ROR FORMULA: .!. = ~ + ..!.. .
f v u
= coordinate of focus ;
X:- u =x-coordinate of object; =
v x-coordinate of image
lot:.e: Valid only for paraxial rays.
.. ~NSVERSE MAGNIFICATION

=
Y co-ordi nate of image h, =Yco-ordinate of the object
m =~
hI
=- ~
U
I

j
I
I

~o th perpendicular to the principal axis of mirror)

rELOCITY OF IMAGE OF MOVING OBJECT (SPHERICAL MIRROR)


~) Velocity component along'axis (Longitudinal velocity) .
I
When an object is coming from infinite towards 'I
J
the focus of concave mirror
1. 1 1 1 dv ljil ~t
'.' -+-=-
v u f ... -v- -­
2 dt

_ v2 _

==> v ix = -- 1,12 vox. =-m


2-
vox

'"
__ dt = -d v veI 't y
DCI 0 f Image
. ... v
along pnnclpal-axls; =-du =veIocny
' 0 f 0 b'~ect aIong pnnclpa
. . I-axIs
.] 1
!:;
:;;;0.- ox dt ~
. 8­
Yelocity component perpendicular to axis (Transverse velocity)
.) 1
~ =("fJ
2
m= h = --
v = -:::>h
f -- ho j
o u f-u f-u I '"
::f r

-dhI
dt - (.~
f
'J d't+
dh o fho du _
[- 2 m ho _
]'
(f-U)2dt =>Vjy= mVOY+-f-vox J
~
if (
'--"

(
.~

'.,

i
-~

dt I
dh = ve loCIty
" of image~ "1 '
to principal-axis
~
,v '.
o
dh' .
[ dtO = velocity of object ~ to principal-axis _
I {,
"--/

Note: Here principal axis has.been taken to be along x-axis, ~


....w'
__ .1s
2 E .
(' l__
Geometrical Optics

j 11. NEWTON'S FORMULA


; Applicable to a pair of real object and real image position only. They are called conjugate
d positions or foci XI' X z are the distance along the principal axis of the real object and real image
I' respectively from the principal focus.
I I'
IX X2=/21I

12. OPTICAL POWER:

Optical power of a mirror (in Diopters) =- f1 ; f =focal length


'
(in meters) with sign.

REFRACTION ·PLANE SURFACE


1. ,LAWS OF REFRACTION (AT ANY REFRACTING SURFACE)
Laws of Refraction
(i) Incident ray, refracted ray and normal always lie in the same plane ,

II J.l,
J.lz
l
In vector form I(e x n),? = 01

I (ii) The product of refractive index and sine of angle of incidence at a point in a medium is
constant. J.l 1 si n i = J.l2 si n r (Snell's law)

Sin i n 2 _ VI _~
-'-= n2 =---­ In vector form lillie x fil =112 1..x fill
Snell's law rSin r I n, v2 ""2

Note: ~requency of light does not change during refraction.

:a 2. DEVIATION OF A RAY DUE TO REFRACTION


'1
~
is
1~
2
<.'l Iangle of deviation, 0 =i - r I
1l A

2 3. REFRACTION THROUGH A PARALLEL SLAB AIR


i'5:t.~ GLASS

1
1
(I) Emerged ray is parallel to the incident ray, if medium
is same on both sides,
,_/
("
i
"
(ii) L atera: I'SIt
h'f
x =_t _si....,.;n(:.,..i
cosr
-.-...:..r)
1 I l'i\K::~·· ...

I
~
t = thickness of slab D
;ll
8
Note: Emergea ray will not be parallel to the incident ray if the medium on both the sides ftffi
1"8:'
different
.
E 3

(\..i.
j , , , •• ~~ _",.,,,,_,,._,,, •• k •••
~ Jl;E~Physics,
" I'"

4. APPARENT DEPTH OF SUBMERGED OBJECT

II
(h' < h) I
I jl'~ ~
...#~.~·7 1. h,=h h
h
h' .t'.~.~'
For near normal incidence
~LI L
~
Xl •••••....

Note: h andh' are always measured fromsurface.


, ' , ,
f

\
5. CRITICAL ANGLE & TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION ( T. 1., R.),
I
~ .

r'
\'

(0) Conditions of T. 1. R.
(i) Ray isgoing from denser to rarer medium

(ii) Angle of incidence should be greater than the critical angle (i> C). I.
Cd tical angl,e C='sin'! ~
I
n·I

I
(b) Some Illustrations of Total Internal Reflection
(i) Sparkling of diamond
i
The sparkling of diamond is due to total internal reflection inside it. As refractive index for $
diamond is 2.5 so C= 24°. Now the cutting of diamond are such that i > C. So TIR will take!
place again and again inside it. The light which beams out from a few places in some specific :!
directions makes it sparkle. ' ' j
I'
(ii) Optical Fibre . f
~ t' '

In it light through multiple total.internal reflections is propagated along the aXis of a glass]

. 'fibre of radius of few microns in which index ofrefraction of core is greater than that of t

'II. surroundings. f

~ '\../
~

(~
!f.
'"
~
)1,>)1, ~
i1E
;jl

~,
aNn 'if 1
4 E
Geometrical Optics

(iii) Mirage and looming,


Mirage is caused by total internal reflection in deserts where due to heating ofthe earth, refractive
index of air near the surface of earth becomes lesser than above it. Light from distant objects
reaches the surface of earth with i > ec so that TIR will take place and we see the image of an
object along with the object as shown in figure.
...................:;;,v.r.;y
~:;.

SkY=:~<~::~
cold air

'~~H~'
i~~~~~~~" " 'i~~~;~~~::~~'~~J,:
,j

)Y,,"
Similar to 'mirage' in deserts, in polar regions 'looming' takes place due to TIR. Here ).l.
decreases with height and so the image of an object is fonned in air if (i>C) as shown in
\ /

figure.

6. REFRACTION THROUGH PRISM:

Li,
(i) a=(i + i') - (r + 1")

l (ii) r + I" =A

~ (iii) Variation of a versus i (shown in diagram) .

~0­

:;:
W t
i
0. jiS:...."'!
". . . ' Q
........,..:....'"
.........._
. .",,.. .

I
,
1 E
"t:I!
.....
~
oCI) Utnin
I
I

I
j
J
-.::
.......... ••"........
~.: I

E
-:::>.
v, !!
,. !I

~ g i·
!!
I I
I
~
i=ig i=e e=ig
1
~.

. e=90° i=900
~' angle of incidence -.. .

So . (iv) There is one and only one angle of incidence for which the angle of deviation is minimum.
!!!
'i0
= =
When a am then i = i' & r I" , the ray passes symmetrically about the prism. & then
--'"'"ia
a.!l . [Main]
sm -r­ .
e n = sin [1'1 ,where n =absolute R.I. of glass.

'"
l!!
0.'
z
w'
l c
Note: When the prism is dipped in a medium then n R.I. of glass w.r.t. medium! =
E 5
,
!'!"" ~T

JEE-:Physics
(v) For a thin prism ( A ~lOO) ; 0 = (n - 1 ) A

(vi) Dispersion Of Light

The .angularspl~tting of a ray of white light into a number of cqmponents whenit is refracted
in a medium other than air is called Dispersion ofLight.

(vii) Angle of Dispersion:

Angle between the rays of the extreme colours in the refracted (dispersed) light is called
Angle of Dispersion. 8 = 0v - or .
(viii) Dispersive power (<;0) of the medium of the matenal of prism .
I
'. angular dispersion
...
ro = deviation of mean ray (yellow) r I
For small angled prism (A ~lOO)
I
v
I
o -0 R
v _ n y -n R ny +n R
r
ro= 0y n-l ;n= 2

nv ' nR & n are R. I. of material for violet, red & yellow colours respectively.

(ix) Combination Of Two Prisms


,
(a) Achromatic Combination:

It is used for deviation without dispersion. Condition for this (n v - nr) A == (n' v - n~ r) A' . I
r~"

- 11A'.
....
[n~+n~
I

Net. mean deviation == [n v +n


2 R -1 ] A - 2
0()

j
0.
>
~
...- ;: .
!
"8
\'
or roo + ro'o' = 0 where ro, ro' are dispersive powers for the two prisms & 0,0' are the me,an .~ l:
. . r:, 2
deVlatlOn. " 9
J \- ."

(b) Direct Vision Combination: ~


~
."

~
It is used for producing dispersion without deviation condition for this :::::.

". 1 (
'<-j
~
:>.
1 = [n:+.n~ 1
nV.+n R -1 A -1 A' 2
o
w
;;> c
[ 2 2 ' '"
~
;; (J
" .
~
j (
Net angle of dispersion = (n v - nr) A - (n v' - nr') A' . ~ \/
~

~,
(
'-J

i (

',--,
6 E
L
Geometrical Optics

REFRACTION AT SPHERICAL SURFACE·

(a) J.l2 _ ~ = J.l2 - J.lI


1.
V U R

v, u & R are to be kept with sign

as v == PI o P\ C J _+ve

u=-PO
R =,PC
(Note: Radius is with sign)

III V
(b)
m = 112 u

2. Lens Formula:
1 1 1
(a) ---=­
v u f
,. + ve
1'1
fI =(Il- 1) (R1 R1)
./

(b) 1- 2

V
(c) m=­u
3. Power of Lenses
Reciprocal of focal length in meter is known as power of lens.

. . p_ 1 _ 100 .

81 unit :.dioptre (D) Power of lens: - f(m) - f(cm) dIOptre

t.. 4. Combination of Lenses


.ll
e Two thin lens are placed in contact to each other
/ ;3­
"(
e
power of combination. P = PI + P2 => F =r+r
111

Jjj
. 1 2

Use sign convention when solve numerical


(
"
~:
~.
-Ii
5. Newton's Formula.
/'
~ .!l

I ...............:...:.......:....... u......................../1\.............................. \I ..............................

..,
~
..............x/·..·......···.....·....·..,j....·..·..·..\·....·r......"·/··..·....·..........,..·......·x1·• ......••·....

(; . F/ • F1 j If =N.!
1i
c3
@
;z
o

(
.~

w' Xl =distance of object from focus; x2 =distance of image from focus.


i
E 7 ;. ............... ,

(
'<
JEE~Physics

6. Displacement Method
It is used for determination of focal length of convex lens in laboratory.

A thin convex lens of focal length f is placed between an object anCl a screen fixed at a distance D
apart..

.!\.........................v=(D-u) .........................

t ......·....·...... u..............

l".~~:~". ".._""n......"D"".. . . . . "-"".. . .".. }

I Q r
IfD > 4f there are two position of lens at which a sharp image of the object is formed on the screen

I I I 1 I _ 1
By lens formula ;-;= f we have D-u -::;;:- f

~ Du + Df =.O· => u.=. :-D ± JD(D-4f)


=> uu_ () there are tree
h POSSI'b'l' .
I Itles

(i) For D < 4f: u will be imaginary hence physically no position of lens is possible

(ii) For D = 4f: u= ~ = 2f so only one position of lens is possible

and since v = D - u = 4f - 2f = u =2f

(iii) ForD>4f: . u = D-~D(D-4f) d _ D+~D(D-4f)

I 2. ·· an . u2 - 2 .

So there are two positions of lens for which real image will be formed on the scr~en. .~ ./ -~
G

t
-:;
,- j

for two positions of the lens distances of object and image are interchangeable. !
(
" _/

so,
D-x
u 1 = - - = v2 and VI =--=u2
D+x·· 1 Ie,

9
]
2 2

i~ t ., ,
11 _ v1 _ D + X 12 _ v2 _ D - x

m = - - - - - - andm = - - - --­
~ r Cj
I 0 u1 D - X 2 0 u2 D + x ~ f'
v
~.

i
::J ,L "'­
I, .
D+x . D..,..x 1112
Now ml x m2 = - - x - - ~ - 2 - =:1 ~
0 ITT
=-..j1,12 j '-J

D~x D+x 0 . '"


::; ()
i<'l
@ (/
~ ,
~ ''..J.
Wi

1
."--..'
s':'E
\J

-"TC , :ij
.,
Geometrical Optics

EXERCISE-S

1. A light ray parallel to the x~axis strikes the outer reflecting surface of a sphere at a point (2, 2.0). Its
'center is at the point (0. 0, - 1). The unit vector along the direction of the reflected rays is xl + y} + zk .

yz
Find the value of - 2 .
x

2. A concave mirror offocal length 20 cm is cut into two parts from the IDem ~l
middle and the two parts are moved perpendicularly by a distance _______ lL_~___ Jlmm
1 mm, fr~m the previous principal axis AB. If an object is placed of a A~-_-_-_-_-_-_-.?_-_~--:-_-_~li~;;B
distance oflOcm from the mirror on the line AB then, find the distance 4" Ml
between the images formed by the two parts?

3. A thin rod,oflength d/3 is placedaJong the principal axis ofa concave mirror of focal length = d such
that its. image, which is real and elongated, just touches the rod. Find the length of the image?

4. A man places his eye parallel to rim of a cylinder. When the cylinder is empty. the man cannot see
anything inside the cylinder. Now, the cylinder is filled by tWo immiscible liquids to the top. Both the
liquid layers have the same width. Now from the same position, the observer can just see the base of
, the cylinder. The upper layer has refractive index Ji. If the height of the cylinder is 2H and the
diameter of the base is 3H then find out the refractive index of the lower layer.
.
,~:;

IIf
D
···········'~
I
I~,_~,
'"
'!I
t
..­Ji'"
".j 1l
-- ---­_­
.............
__................
~.....-........

.........._........... ..­
...........n . . . . . . . . . ._ • ..,•

( .~ .{
,~ 0

,)
t 1 5; , An opaque cylindrical tank with an open top has a diameter of3.00 m and is completely filled with water.
~
"-. , 'When the setting Sub reaches an angle of37° above the horizon, sunlight ceases to illuminate any part cif
Sl
i I
,~=
ill, the bottom ofthe tank.. How deep is the tank?
~
~
( ,.t
\;;..'';:;';; j 6. A rodmade of glass (j..L = 1.5) and of square cross-section is bent into semi circle
{"
~ 1g
,,-. , th.t?"shapeshown in figure. A parallel beam of light falls perpendicularly
$. ! "on the plane flat surface A. Referring to the diagram, d is the width of
(/ ~ , a side & R is the radius of inner semicircle. Find the maximum value of
~
0
..­><
'"
"
1,;.\•...-'
11 ..-~11 d,
4 c!: , ratio' - so that all light entering the glass through surface A emerge
C::l <::
\!!
'R " ' ,
<>

0 l!:
(
()
0
z, from the glass through surface B.

'~" ~

l:
/
~ i. .
E 9

,(
r
1
lEE-Physics
n
I
7. A thin plate of transparent plastic is embedded in a thick slab of
glass. The index of refraction of the glass is n::: 1.50; the index 1.50

.I
of refraction of the plate changes as shown in the diagram. A
i
beam of light passes through glass and strikes the surface of the

lAO

1.30

.!
I
I
I
plastic plate. The maximum angle of incidence 9max enables'
the
beam to pass through the plate. Find 9 max ' 1.20

···t·····
8. A fish is rising up vertically inside a pond with velocity 4 cmls and notices a bi'rd, which is
diving vertically downward and its velocity appears to be 16 cmls (to the fish). What is the real
velocity of the di ving bird, if refractive index of water is 4/3.

9. Water level in the tank is decreasing at a constant rate of 1 cm/s. A f


!
small metal sphere is moving downwards with a constant velocity !
5 cm/s. Base of the tank is a concave mirror of radius 40 cm. Find I
the velocity of the image seen [Take al-lw = 4/3J•.
(a) directly
(b) after reflection at the mirror.

10. A point object 'is placed 33 cm from a convex mirror of curvature radius =40 cm. A glass plate of
thickness 6 cm and index 2.0 is placed between the object and mirror, close to the mirror. Find the
distance of final image from the o b j e c t ? ' .
11. A prism of refractive index .y2 has a refracting angle of 30°. One of the refracting surfaces of the
prism is polished. For the beam of mo~ochromatic light to retrace its path, find the angle of incidence
on the refracting surface. I
12. An equilateral prism deviates a ray through 23° for two angles of incidence differing by 23°. Find )l of the I
prism?
13. A prism of refractive index n l & another prism of refractive index n l D
J
are stuck together without a gap as shown fn the figure. The angles I
of the prisms are as shown. n l & n 2 depend on 1.., the wavelength of
)
h
4 4
10.8x 10
light according to n l = 1.20 + -~ & n2 =1.45 + 1.80x 10
12 where - :$&. t "{
/'
~ ~ 60~ 40°!
I.. is in nm. [lIT-JEE 1998] A B 1 "-(
, , 0
C
1,,-,r
(i) Calculate the wavelength 1..0 for which rays incident at any angle on the interface BC pass through 1
without bending at that interface .(ii) For l~ght of wavelength 1..0' find the angle of incidence i on the / .

face AC such that the deviation produced by the combination of prisms is minimum. J (I
~,

14. A quarter cylinder of radius Rand refracti ve index 1.5 is,placed 0!l a
table. A point object P is kept at a distance of mR from it. Find the
~~
, ' 1 (
,

,.~.,.1)
-:::
~ "j

-6 '
value of m for which a ray fromP will emerge parallel to the table as •
-mrr~
:- _I
! 1
shown in the figure. [lIT-JEE 1999]
1;:; I
f
-.
'"~ (--"~
15. A double convex lens has focal length 25.0 cm in air. The radius of curvature of one of the surfaces 1 '-J

is double of the other. Find the radii of curvature if the refracti ve index of the material of the lens is ~ C
1.5. ,§
~I
1 /
10 E \...,

[\
~:-

Geometrical Optics
.
16. A plano convex lens (Jl=1.5) has a maximum thickness of 1 mm. If diameter of its aperture is
4 cm. Find (i) Radius of curvllture of curved surface~ (li) its focal length in 'air.

17. A point source of light is kept at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens. on its optical axis. The
focal length of the lens is 10 cm and its diameter is 3 cm. A screen is placed on the other side of the
lens, perpendicular to the axis of lens. at a distance 20 cm from it. Then find the area of the illuminated
part of the screen?

18.. A point object is placed at a distance of 25 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. If a glass slab
of thickness t and refractive index 1.5 is inserted between the lens and object, the image is formed at
infinity. Find the thickness t ?

19. A uniform. horizontal beam of light is incident upon a quarter cylinder

of radius R = 5 cm, and has a refractive index


2
J3' A patch on the table
for a distance 'x' from the cylinder is unilluminated. Find the value
~~ I.. R ~--.lt ­
*1
of'x'?

20. A parallel beam of light falls normally on the first face of a prism of small angle. At the second face it
is partly transmitted and partly reflected, the reflected beam striking at the first face again, and emerging
from it in a direction making an angle 6°30' with the reversed direction. of the incident beam', The
refracted beam (at the second face) is found to have undergone a deviation of 1°15' from the original
direction. Find the,r~fractive index of the glass and the angle of the prism.
21. A sphericallightbulb with a diameter of3.0 cm radiates light equally in all directions, with a power of
4.5n W.
(a) Find the light intensity at the surface of the bulb.
:.;;!
i"; (b) Find the light intensity 7.50 m from the center of the bulb.
(c) At this 7.50 ni distance,a convex lens is set up with its axis pointing toward the iJulb. The lens hilS
a circular face with a diameter of 15.0 cf!1 and a focal length of30.0 cm. Find the diameter of the
i image of the bulb formed on a screen kept at the location of the image.
t Cd) Find the light intensity at the image.
r
!
1 22.
e
Two rays travelling parallel to the principal axis strike a large plano­
J convex lens having a refractive index of 1.60. If the convex face is
! spherical, a ray near the edge does not. pass through the focal c
/
i point (spherical aberration occurs). If this face has a radius of curvature
\"
j of magnitude 20.0cm and the two rays are hi = 0.500 em and,
(
"
1 h2 = 12.0 cm from the principal axis, find the difference in the positions
J
~
where they cross the principal axis.
w
!O!

:Il
,;:;
~

l
!1!

~,
4
e-,--------~------------~171~--~-----------------
/
,..

JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (OMI)
I
!,

1." The distance of an object from a spherical mirror is equal to the focal length of the mirror. Then the

image:

(A) must be at infinity (B) may be at infinity (C) may be at the focus (D) none

2.' A convex mirroroffocallength 'f is placed atthe origin with its reflecting surface towards the negative .).
x-axis. Choose the correct graph(s) between 'v' and 'u' for u < O. [

.v v v v
"f.
........................."............., f.

(A) (B) (C) (D)


(J""U In IO~U u

3, "An infinitely long rod lies along the axis of a con"cave mirror of focal length f. The near end of the
,
rod is at distance u > f from the mirror. Its image will have a length­
. ul u/ 12 : /2
(A) u- 1 (B) u+ f (C) u+ / "", (D) u- /
,i
I,
1 "

4. The x-z plane separates two media A and B of refracti ve indices III =" 1.5 ~nd 1-1.. = 2, A ray of light I.

travels from A to B. Its directions in the two mediaare given by unit vectors ul = al + bj. and ul! = c.!.+ d}.
Then-

!!. =.± a 3 b 4 b 3 ~
(A)
c 3 (B);="4 (C) d =3 (D) d ="4 t
!
"8'0 [
!t A fish floats in liquid with its eye at the centre of an opaque walled full . (

tank of liquid of circular cross section. When the fish look upwards, it can
·'U::-:'
.

. . "
iJ
I.,,' i
\"" I """
,-"
.!:1
("
'1/
r'
see a fish-eye view of the surrounding scene i.e. itis able to view the entire d £ •
" ~

r
)

space above the liquid surface. The diameter of the tank is 30 cm, and the
critical angle for liquid is 37°. At what maximum depth below the surface t ---. ]
..­
l'Ii \J
\
1.
of the liquid, d, mustthe fish be floating? (Sin37'k ~) w
~
51
,2
(A) 16 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 11.25 cm (D) 25 cm
.'"
~

6$ 2 ("
'-../
If atmospheric refraction did not occur, how would the apparent time of sunrise and sunset be changed? ~
(A) sunrise would be later and sunset earlier" ",(B) sunrise would be later and sunset later ~,
(C) both would be later (D) both would be earlier l
,12 E

- ---'.
Geometrical Optics

7. . A ray RI is incident on the plane surface of the glass slab (kept in air)
of refractive index ..J2 at an angle of incidence equal to the critical angle
forthis air glass system. The refracted ray ~ unqergoes partial reflection
and refraction at the.other surface. The angle between reflected ray R3
and the refracted ray R4 at that surface is :
(A) 45 0 .i (B) 135 0
(C) 105 0 q (D) 75 0

8. Bottom face of the glass cube is silvered as shown. A ray of light is


incident on top face of the cube as.shown. Find the deviation of the
ray when it cOmes out of the glass cube.
(A) 0 (B) 90°
0
(C) 180 . (D) 270 0

9. What i~ the length oqhe image of the rod in mirror, according to the Eye G
observer in air? (refr~ctive index of the liquid is !J.)
L L
(A) !J.L + L (B) L + P
L

L L
(C) L!J. + P (D) None of these

1.0. Two thin slabs of refractive indices Jl 1 and Jl2 are placed parallel
to each other in the x-y plane. If the direction of propagation of
. a ray in the two media are al~ng the unitvectors ~ =a'i + b} and .'
x
/
\. .
r = c'i + c!i
2 then we have
2 2 2 2
(A) PIa =P2C (B) PI(a +b )=P2(C +d )

(C) Pla/../a2+b2 =P2a /JC 2 +d2 . (D) None of these .


( : 'i
t
~
j)

1,­

/
& 11. Consider the situation shown in figure; Water
~l>
(Pw = is filled in a \\\\ \ \\\\\\ \ \ \\ \ \ \, \\\ \ ' \ \ \ \ \
1
I,
E 5cm
2
beaker upto a height of 10 cm. A plane mirror is fixed at a height of
,­ ~
\.
~

;jii 5 cm from the surface of water. Distance of image from the mirror after
l-:: reflection from it of an object 0 at the bottom of the beaker is­ IDcm
(
~
.'2
(A) 15 cm (B) 12.5. cm
~ (C) 7.5 cm (D) 10 cm
~"
sw
w 12~ When a pin is moved along the principal axis ofasmaH concave mirror,
1--., . the image position qoinpides with the object at a point 0.5 m from the A
(;
mirror, refer figure. If the mirror is placed at a depth of 0.2 m in a -i.

.•-j:.:: .
N

--II transparent liquid, the same phenomenon occurs when the pin is placed
~
~.
0.4 m from the mirror.:The refractive index of the liquid is :­
~0
~,
W~ ~)~
..., ~ (C) 4/3 (D) 3/2·

i­ g
'-­
E, 13
,(
l'
JEE-PhysiCs I
13. An air bubble is inside water. The refractive index of water is 4/3. At what distance from the air bubble I.
should a point object be placed so as to form a real image at the same distance from the bubble :­
(A) 2R (B) 3R I
(C) 4R (D) The air bubble cannot form a real image
I
=
14. ,A paraxial beam is incident on a glass (n 1.5) hemisphere of radius

R=6 cm in air as shown, The distance of point of convergence F from

the plane surface of hemisphere is :­


(A) 12 cm . (B) 5,4 cm
(C) 18 cm (D) 8 cm

15. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm, separates two medium X and Y of
R.I. 4/3 and 3/2 respectively. If the object is placed along principa1 axis in medium X , then:
(A) image is always real
(B) image is real if the object distance is greater than 90 cm
x y
(C) image is always virtual
(0) image is virtual if the object distance is less than 90 c~

16. A beam of diameter 'd' is incident on a glass hemisphere as shown. If


the radius of curvature of the hemisphere is very large in comparison to
d, then the diameter of the beam at the base of the hemisphere will be

~d ~d
d
(A) (B) d . (C) "3 (D)

17. Optic !lxis of a thin equiconvex lens is the x-axis. The coordinates of a point object and its image are
(-40 cm, 1 cm) and (50 cm, -2 cm) respectively. Lens is located at'­
(A) =
x + 20 cm (B) x = - 30 cm (C) x =-10 cm (D) origin

18. A converging lens of focal length 20 cm and diameter 5 cm is cut along the line AB. The palt of
the lens shown shaded in the diagram is how used to form an image of a point P placed 30 em away
froin it on the line XY which is perpendicular to the plane of the lens. The image of P will be fomed. 1
.;,

em • t
2cm
t
~y
"8
X , 30cm'
'~
E
g

1~
~
, (A) 0.5 cm above XY (B) 1 cm below XY (C) on XY , (D) 1.5 cm below XY
.

i~

\, 19, Look at the ray diagram shown, what will be the focal l~ 2M 1
w
length ofthe 151 and the 2nd lens, if the incident light ray
passes without any deviation?
.
emergent
~
~

"'~ ;~i ~' .


;'(A) -5 cmand +10 cm

(B) +5cm and +lOcm


I J
(CJ -Scm and +5cm il ~ t!, • ;% e:
Scm Scm ~f~ ~
(0) +Scm and - 5cm ~""
:..,.
0

_ :Us. _. 1
14 E
.J.
Geometrical Optics
" ,

:' 20. The two lenses shown are illuminated by a beam of parallel light from the left. Lens B is then moved
slowly
,
toward
,
lens A. The beam emerging from lens B is : --+
f=SOcm f=-2SCnl
(A), Initially parallel and then diverging --+
(B) Always diverging --+
A
(C) Initially converging and finally parallel --+
(D) Always parallel --+
I--- 25cm-l
21. A point object 0 moves from the principal axis of a converging lens in

a direction OP. I t,fie image of 0, will move initially in the direction:

(A) IQ 'if (B) IR -,,{-,----'


(C) IS (D) IU

22. A point source oflight is placed on the principal axis between F and 2F of a concave lens. On the
~
other side very far, a screen is placed perpendicular to principal axis. As the screen is brought close
towards lens

"~I (A) the light.intensity on screen continuously decreases

(B) the light intensity on screen continuously increases


(C) the light intensity on screen first increases, then decreases
(D) the light intensity on screen first decreases, then increases

23. In the displacement method, a convex lens is placed in between an object and a screen. If one of
the magnification is 3 and the displacement of the lens between the two positions is 24 cm, tnen.
the focal length of the lens is :­
(A) 10 cm (B) 9 cm (C) 6 cm (D) 16/3 cm

24. When the object is at di$tances u1 and u2 the images formed by the same lens are rea) and virtual
respectively and of the same size. Then focal length of the lens is :
1 r.:::-
(A) 2"U IU2
u1 + u2
(B) - 2 - (C)
r.:::-
"U1U2 (D)
I
,/u +U
l 2)

25. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On
'-
immersion in a medium of refractive index 1.75, it will behave as a ' [IIT-JEE 1999]
(A) convergent lens of focal length 3.5R (B) convergent lens offodllength 3.0 R.
l (C) divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R (D) di vergent lens of focal length 3.0 R ,
.r
'~

!
j ;;
,~

~
E
26. , A diverging 'lens of focal length 10 cm is placed 10 cm in front of a
plane mirror as sho'wn in the figure. Light from a very far away source
falls on the lens. The final image is at a distance :­
:;

~
( 1 (A) 20 cm behind the mirror
(B) 7.5 cm in front of the mirror
.f
~
1
(C) 7.5 cm behind the mirror
(D) 2.5 cm in front of the mirror
+--d

L
~
:: 27. A slab of high quality flat glass, with parallel faces, is placed in the path of a parallel light beam before
j it is focussed to a spot by a lens. The glass isrotated slightly back and forth from the vertical orientation,
'~ about an axis coming out of the page, as shown in the diagram. According to ray optics the effect on
~
the focused spot is: '
-~----~
1 (A) There is no effect on the spot
~
(B) The spot mO\~'es towards then away from the lens.
~ lens
(C) The spot mOYiY,s up and down parallel to the lens. rolating glass
~I (D) The spot blurs out of focus.
!E 15

,'
"".l~

(A) Emerge at an angle .01 ......

(B) Not emerge out of the prism

(C) ~merge at an angle of emergence sin- (±seCAI4)


1

u
Z
I ~
(0) None of these W

~
...,
g

16 E

. ---' ~
JEE-Physics

")'!
EXERCISE (0-2)

1. If the equation of mirror is given by y = 2/1t sin1tx (y > 0,0 S;; x S; 1) then
find the point on which horizontal ray should be incident so that the
reflected ray become perpendicular to the incident ray,

""'- (A) [j, ~) (B)


./3 1)
[7'3 2
(C) [ 3.'7
./3) (D) (1,0)

:2. 'In the fig. shown consider the first reflection at the plane mirror and second at the convex mirror. AB
is object. R-12Ci<m

(A) the second image is real and inverted with magnification 115
(B) the second image is virtual and erect with magnification 115
i
ltJc.!TI
1\ - •
~ ~ c

(C) the second image moves towards the convex mirror


sOan
(D) the second image moves away from the convex mirror

F=30cm
3. An object 0 is kept infront of a converging lens of focal length 30 cm

behind which there is a plane mirror at 15 cm from the lens.

(A) The final image is formed at 60 cm from the lens towards right of it 0
A
(B) The final image is at 60 cm from lens towards left of it
(C) The final image is real 15cm 15cm
(D) The final image is virtual

'4. A converging lens of focal length f( is placed in front of and coaxial with a convex mirror of focal
length f2• Their separation is d. A parallel beam of light incident on the lens returns as a parallel beam }
from the arrangement- '
o
:l
(A) The beam diameters of the incident and reflected beams must be the same 1
!! (B) d =If,l- 2 If21 j

(
\ ..
=
(C) d If(I-1f21
(D) If the entire arrangement is immersed in water, the conditions will remain unaltered
, '
1
~,
j
I
/'
'i....- ,,5. A convex lens fonns!a,n image of an object on a screen. The height of the image is 9 cm. The 1
le!1s is' now displaced utltil an image is again obtained on the screen. Then height of this image is !
4 cm. The distance bet~een the object and the sc~een is 90 cm. j
(A) The distance between the two positions of the lens is 30 cm ~. N

(B) The distance of the object from the lens in its first position
.
is 36 cm j /

(C) The height of the object is 6 cm .;


(D) The focal length of the
,
lens is 21.6 cm ~ ~

--
(
I
1

/ '
-----------------------------1~8----------------------~----E

"r
c
,~ ./

,J
!
JE(Physics
,
,
.
'

EXERCISE (0-2)
,j!

1. If tlie equation of mirror is given by y = 21n sinnx (y > 0, 05 X$; 1) then


find the point on which horizontal ray should be incident so that the
reflected ray become perpendicular to the incident ray

[l ~) 13 1)
[7'3 13)
,[23,'7

2.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (1,0)

In the fig. shown consider the first reflection at the plane mirror and second at the convex mirror. AB
I
is object. IH20c,,'

(A) the second image is real and inverted with magnification 1/5 -L
(B) the second image is virtual and erect with magnification lI5 8 A
c
lOC'JhI ina,;
(C) the second image moves towards the convex mirror
50=
:;(D) the second image moves away from the convex mirror

F=30cm
3. An object 0 is kept infront of a converging lens offocal length 30 cm
pehind which there is a plane mitTor at 15 cm from the lens.
,(A) The final image is formed at 60 cm from the lens towards right of it o
(B) The final image is at 60 cm from lens towards left of it
(C) The final image is real 15cm \/ 15cm
A~D) The final image is virtual
\,
'4. A converging lens of focal length fl is placed in front of and coaxial with a convex mirror of focal
length f2' Their separation is d. A parallel beam of light incident on the lens returns as a parallel beam 1
from the arrangement- . ~
15
,
i"
(A) The beam diameters 6f the incident and reflected beams must be the same 1
" 'eB) d =Ifl l- 21f21 ~
/
"

(
(C) d = Ifll-Ifzl
(D) If the entire arrangement is immersed in water, the conditions will remain unaltered
. '1
1
t I
C" 5. A convex lens forms an image of an object on a screen. The height of the image is 9 cm. The 1
lens is' now displaced until an image is again obtained on the screen. Then height of this image is !
4 cm. The distance between the object and the screen is 90 cm. ~
(A) The distance between the two positions of the lens is 30 cm ~

(
(B) The distance of the object from the lens in its first position is 36 cm 1
(C) The height of the object is 6 c m ' ,~
o
(
\
(D) The focal length of the lens is 21.6 cm ~,
~"
\.
1
18 E
f
Geometrical Optics

6. A point object 0 is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a convex lens


of focal length 10 cm as shown in figure. At what distance x from the.
lens should a concave mirror of focal length 60 cm, be placed so that
final image coincides with the object- 0-'- - - + 1-+1- - - - - i ! B
(A) 10 cm
(B) 140 cm .-20 em ~)A4 x-..
(C) 20 cm
(0) final image can never coinCide with the object in the given conditions

7. The figure shows a ray incident on a plane boundary at an angle i == 1tf3. The plot drawn shows the

variation of I r - il versus 1:i


. . #'1.
=k (r =angle of refraction). Choose the correct alternative,
1 (A) The valu~
2
of k, is .jj a...............................___.......................
I r-i I
. (B) The value of 8 1 is 1tf6
(C) The value of 82 is 1tf3
(0) The value of ko is 1 k

8. A ray of light is incidentnorrnally on one faceof30° -60 0 -90 0 prism of refractive index 5/3 immersed
in water of refractive index 4/3 as shown in figure.

(A) The exit angle 82 of the ray is sin-I (%)


(B) The exit angle 8 2 of the ray is sin-I (4~) !
"'!lz
(C) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive index of water is increased to
5

2.jj by dissol ving some substance

(D) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive index of water is increased to
t 5/6 by dissolving some substance
l
! 9. The refracting angle of a prism is 90 0 • If y is the angle of minimum deviation and ~ is the deviation
l of ray which enters at grazing incidence. If J..t is refractive index of material of the prism, then which
~
~ of the following (s) is/are correct?
1
; J (A) siny =sin2~ . (B) siny =COS2~ (C) cosy =ttcoS~ (D) cosy =J..tsin~
\" ..'

flO. A ray is incident on the first prism at an angle of incidence 53 0 A A' '../

T . as shown in the figure; The angle between side CA and Bf A' for

L
i the net deviation by both the prisms to be double of the deviation

~ produced by the first prism, will be

~
'"~
(A) S.in-l~+530 (B) sin- I 3.+ 37o C'

I 3

~, (C) cos- I
. 3
3.+
53 0 (D) 2sin:- l 3.
3
:'. ,

1
.E 19
v

(
!

_________ 3'

,,
,,/
JEE-Physics .

Paragraph for Question 19 to 21


A turnip sits before a thin converging lens, outside the focal point of the lens. The lens is filled with a
f
transparent gel so that it is flexible; by squeezing its ends towards its centre as indicated in figure, I
you can change the curvature of its front and rear sides.
I
i-Squeeze
19. When you squeeze the lens, the image: I
(A) .moves towards the lens
(B) moves away fi'om the lens
(C) shifts up .
(D) remains as it is t
20. In above questions the lateral height of image :
(A) increases (B) decreases (C) remains same (D) data insufficient

21. Suppose that the image must be formed on a card which is at a certain distance behind the lens as
shown in the figure, while you move the turnip away from the lens, then you should: I
.(A) decrease the squeeze of the lens . - ...
(B) increase the squeeze of the.lens
(C) keep the card and lens as it is
(D) move the card away from the.lens
t

i
.i

::la.
o,
.Ii
-::
.~


"0
."
!
j
V>
-;:.

1f

-;:

-{j

J
'i
~

i
i
--0'"
--.!l'"II
~
..,
w
c
2,
~ '"
1
22
E

C\
t.---: 44 '7I"'V'*
Geometrical Optics

EXERCISE - JM

1. Which of the following is used in optical fibres? [AIEEE - 2002J


(1) Total internal reflection (2) Scattering·
(3) Diffraction (4) Refraction
2. A light ray is incident perpendicular to one face of a 90° prism and is totally internally reflected at
the glass-air interface. If the angle of reflection is 45°, we conclude that the refractive index n :
.[AIEEE·2004]
1
(1) n < J2

(2) n > J2
1
(3) n > J2
(4) n < J2
3. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvature 30 cm is silvered at the curved
surface. Now, this lens has been used to form the image of an object. At what distance from this lens,
an object be placed in order to have a.real image of the size of the object? [AIEEE·2004]
(1) 20 cm (2) 30 cm (3) 60 cm (4) 80 cm
4. . A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world, contained in a circular horizon. If the
(
\.
refracti ve index of water is ~ and the fish is 12 cm below the water surface, the radius of this circle

t in em is- [AIEEE-200S]
$
! (1) 36J7 (2) ~ (3) 3 6 $ ( 4 ) 4$
(
1 56 A thin glass (refractive index 1.5) lens has optical power of - 5D in air. Its optical power in a liquid
1
C! medium with refractive index 1.6 will be- [AIEEE·200SJ
ii
il-;:.
(1) 1 D (2) - 1D (3) 25 D (4) - 25 D
i.:
:; 6. The refractive index of glass is 1.520 for red light and 1.525 for blue light. Let Dl and D2 be angles

]
of minimum deviation for red and blue light respectively in a prism of this glass. Then~[AIEEE-2006]
1
i (1) Dl < D2
w
(2) Dl D2 =
j
(;
(3) D 1 can be less than or greater than D2 depending upon the angle of prism
'" (4) D1 > D2
,{
\l/ j
(
@
;8
7• Two lenses ofpower-15D and+5D are in contact with each other. The focal length of the combination
o
" ~
~1
is- [AIEEE-2007J
'- (1) - 20 em (2) - 10 em (3) + 20 em (4) + 10 em

E· 23
L ____
JEE-Physics

8. A student measures the focal length of a Clonvex lens by putting an object pin at a distance 'u' from·
the lens and measuring the distance 'v' of the image pin..
The graph
. between 'u' and
'v' plotted by .

the student should look like- [AIEEE - 2008J .

v(cm)
v(c.?, v(cm)l\ v.(cm)

(l)~(cm) (2)~(cm)
(3)
~(cm)
)1. (4) <'~
~(cm)

9. A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive index of ~. It is surrounded by air. A light ray
< v3

is incident at the midpoint of one end of the rod as shown in the figure. [AIEEE - 2009]

~- . .----..+.-­
The incident angle e for which the light ray grazes along the wall of the rod is :­

(1) sin-I (is) (2) sin- 1 ( .1 J (3) sin- i (~J (4) sin- 1( ~)
10. Direction:
The question has a<paragraph followed by tWQstatement, Statement-l and statement-2. Of the given '~ ,

four alternatives after the statements, choose the one that describes the statements.
A thin air film is formed by putting the Convex surface of a plane-convex lens over a plane glass plate..
With monochromatic light. this film gives an interference pattern due' to light reflected from the top
(convex) surface and the bottom (glass plate) surface of the film [AIEEE - 2011J
.. Statement-I: on
<>

When light reflects from the air-glass plate interface, the reflected wave suffers a phase change of J'~
n.
1
0

Statement-2: The centre of the interference pattern is dark :­


(l)Statement-l is true, Statement-2 is true and Statement-2 is not the correct explanation of Statement-l i
;Ii

(2) Statement-l is false, Statement-2 is true f


. (3) Statement-I' is true, Statement-2 is false
• • . •
i

.,..#

.·(4) Statement-l is true, Statement-2 is true and Staterrient-2 is the correct ~xplanation of stateme~t-l 1
. . .' . . ~ '-i
11. A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the :­
~

first car is overtaking the first car at a relative speed of 15 m/s. The speed of the image of the seconq·1
- ; . . . . " ~~, to
car as seen in the mirror of the first one is:­ [AIEEE- 2011), ~
. 0
1l
o
1 1 &l
(1) 10 rTIls (2) 15 mls (3) lO'm/s (4) 15 m/s . .:8
o

!f
<0
i
<f;.
24
Geometrical Optics

12. When monochromatic red light is used instead of blue light in a convex Ie.ns, its focal length will :­
[AIEEE· 2011]
(1) Does not depend on colour of light' (2) Increase
(3) Decrease (4) Remain same
13. A beaker contains water up to a height hI and kerosene of height h2 above water so that the total
height of (wate~ + kerosene) is (h, + h2). Refractive index of water is III and that of kerosene is 112'
The apparent shift 1;1 the position of the bottom of the beaker when viewed from above is :­

(1) (1_lJh
IJI 2+(1-lJh
. IJ2 l (2) (1 +:Jh 1+:Jh2
1 -( [AIEER- 2011]

(3) ( 1- ~1 Jh( +(1-!.,1,")


I2 h2 (4) (1+ :1)h2-(1+ IJ1 )h l
2

14. An. object 2.4 m in front of a lens fonns a sharp image on a film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass plate
.1 cmthick. of refractive index 1.50 is interposed between lens and film with its plane faces parallel
. jI to film. At what distance (from lens) should object be shifted to be in sharp focus on film ?
i (1)5.6 m . (2) 7.2 m (3) 2.4 m (4) 3.2 m [AIEEE- 2012]
!
15. Diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6cm and thickness at the centre is 3 mm. If speed oflight in material
of lens is 2 x 10& mIs, the focal length of the lens is : [JEE MAINS- 2013]
I (1) 15 cm (2) 20 cm (3) 30 cm (4) 10 cm
!! 16. The graph between angle of deviation (8) and angle of incidence (i) for a triangular prism is represented
by :- . [JEE MAINS- 2013]
I

I
.(l)fC 'ltl
. . 0 .
I
(2)
o .
1
(3)~~ ~l V, . .
I
(4)

;1
17. A thin con vex le~s made from crown glass (~= ~) has focal len gth f. When it is measured in two
i
'"
.:; '. 4 5
>;;
different liquids having refractive indices "3 and 3"' it has the focal length fl and f2 respectively.
~
"0
The con'ect relation between the focal lengths is : [JEE MAINS- 2014J
'gI
9
(1) h > f and f I becomes negati ve
j
on (2) f I and f 2 both become negati ve
f (3) fl = f2 <. f
1
\..
(4) fl >f and f2 become negative
j
1 w
18 A green light is incident from the water to the air - water interface at the critical angle (9). Select the

correct statement. [JEE MAINS- 2014]
~ (1) The spectrum ofvisible light whose frequency is more than that of green light will come out to
!!
~... the. air medium .
. , .
~
"

(2) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the water at various angles to the nonnal
~ill: (3) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the water afan angle of 90° to the nonnal.
( ~ (4) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency is less than that of green light will come out to
~.
\.

'0 the air medium.


-l!
g

E 25
( )
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE - JA

ALL ANSWERS OF THE QUESTIONS JEE-2007 ONWARDS ARE AS GIVEN ON


IIT..<JEE WEBSITE.
1. A convex lens offocallength 30 em forms an image of height 2 cm for an object situated at infinity.
If a convcave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed coaxially at a distance of 26 cm in front of convex
lens then size image would be [IIT-JEE 2003 (Scr)J
(A) 2.5 cm (B) 5.0 (C) 1.25 (D) None

2. A meniscus lensis made of a material of refractive ,index 1-l:2. Both its surfaces have radii of curvature
R. It has two different media ofrefractive indices J..I.) and J..I.3 respectively, on its two sides (see figure).
Calculate its focal length for J..I.I < ~ < J..I.3' when light is incident on it as shown. [IIT-JEE 2003J

J.!1<1i2<IiJ

iii

3. A ray of light is incident at the glass-water interface at an angle i, it


Air
emerges finally parallel to the surface of water, then the value of J..I.g
would be :- [lIT-JEE 2003]
(A) (4/3) sin i
Water
(B) lIsin i
Glass
(C) 4/3
(D) 1
'i
:i>

4. White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as shown in the figure.
If green light is just totally internally reflected then the emerging ray in air
J
g
'~
contains [lIT -JEE 2004 (Scr)J Air Green g

(A) yellow, orange, red


(B) violet, indigo, blue

;.:
J
So
1f
-.::
.{l
CC) all colou!s
j
<=.
CD) all colours except green
l
f c
5. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed on a horizontal table. For minimum ~
deviation which Of the following is true? [liT-JEE 2004 (Scr)] ~
< <

(A) PQ is horizontal i
<>
1
(B) QR is horizontal E
(C) RS is horizontal s' z~
(D) Either PQ or RS is horizontaL p~'
1
26 < E
.D

Geometrical" Optics

6. A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere of radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5. The
distance of the virtual image from the surface of the sphere is [IIT-JEE 2004 (Scr)]
(A) 2 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 6 cm (D) 12 cm

7. Figure shows an irregular block of material of refractive index 12 . A ray of light strikes the face AB
as shown in the figure. After refraction "it is incident on a spherical surface CD of radius of curvature
0.4 m and enters a medi urn of refracti ve index 1.S14 to meet PQ at E. Find the distance OE upto two .
places of decimal. [lIT -JEE 2004]

p
7 'l ". ':>./
_ IV
E
Q

J.l=1

8. An object is approaching a thin convex lens offocallength 0.3 m with a speed of 0.01 m/s. Find the
- L" magnitudes of the rates of change of position and lateral magnification of image when the object is at
a distance of 0.4 m from the lens. [lIT -JEE 2004]

9. The ratio of powers of a thin convex and thin concave lens is %and equivalent focal length of their
combination is 30 cm. Then their focal lengths respectively are [lIT-JEE 2005 (Scr)]
(A) 7S, - SO (B) 7S, 50 (C) - 15,10 (D) -7S, 50

_10. Figure shows object O. Final image I is formed after two refractions and one reflection is also shown
in figure. Find the focal length of mirror. (in cm) : [lIT -JEE 2005 (Scr)]

:a..
(
" " ..
.:i

1
!
~ 11.
(A) 10 (B) 15 (C) 20 (D) 25

Two identical prisms of refractive index -../3 are kept as shown in the figure. A light ray strikes the first
prism at face AB. Find, [UT-JEE 2005]
~
(

\.
~
-:::.
"'2" B D
1
:i

:li

(
£
~'"c;! ,-­ ~ ,-­ 'E
,~

'"S!
~
gz, (a) the angle of incidence;"so that the emergent ray from the first pris!D ha~ minimum deviation.
~ (b) through what angle the" pri sm DCE should be rotated about C so that the final emergent ray also­
~,-
~, has miniml,lmdeviation.

E 27

JEE-Physics

12. ' AB and CD are two slabs. The medium between the slabs has refractive index 2. Find the minimum
angle of incidence of Q, so that the ray is totally reflected by both the slabs. [lIT-JEE.200S]

~=..J2 IB

p c D

13. ' A point object is placed at a distance of20 cm from a thin plano-convex A
lens of focal length 15 cm, if the plane surface is silvered. The image
:/15cm
will form at
(A) 60 cm left 'of AB
' [IIT-JEE 2006]
r
Q............,.•.

(B) 30 cm left of AB E Il>f:L


20cm
(C) 12 cm left of AB
(D) 60 cm right of AB
R
14. Parallel rays of light from Sun falls on a biconvex lens of focal length f and the circular image of
radius 'r is formed on the focal plane of the lens. Then which of the followi ng statement is correct?
(A) Area of image 1tf2 directliproportional to f [IIT-JEE2006]
(B) Area of image 1tf2 directly proportional to r
(C) Intensity of image increases iff is increased.
. ,
7tr~
(D) IfIower half'part is converted by black sheet the area of the image is equal to ­
, 2
15. Some laws/processes are given in Column-I. Match these with the physical phenomena given in
Column-II' [liT-JEE 2006]
Column-I Column-II " j

(A) Intensity of light received by lens (p) Radius of aperture (R) ~ / "

Q.
.;,
(B) Angular magnification (q) dispersion of lens
'--./

(C) Length of telescope ~


"a to "
(r) focal length fo' fe ' o ',-_/

(D) Sharpness of image (s) spherical aberration g


'0

,:;;, j
16. ,The graph betwe~n object distance u and image distance v for a lens is given below. The focallengih j
of the lens is :- [liT-JEE 200,16]
,: ,
? t

v /:' 1
1 r,
'\J
i
w
, "
+11 w

'2 ~

~." !' "-,

+10 ~/
~II
tl ( ,

[,,)...,,- ~lIIl11l11l11l , I' ~u ~ .''--'


'" .:ll
c
I .J
I
oz
",' \~
(A) 5 ± 0.1 (D) 05 ± 0.05
(B) 5 ± 0.05 (e) 0.5 + 0.1 E
1~
J
'l(
:1
28 / .
!~-"

(~j
.
,_ ~fi!~'1;my.!~ I

17. A ray of light travelling in water is incident on its surface open to air. The angle of incidence is 0,
'which is less than the critical angle. Then there wiII be [IIT.JEE 2007]
(A) only a reflected ray and no refracted ra.Y
(B) on Iy a refracted ray and no reflected ray
CC) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle between them would be less than 1800 - 29
(D) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle between them would be greater than 1800 - 29

i
" !
18. ST A TEMENT-l
The formula connecting u, v and/fora spherical mirror is valid only for mirrors whose sizes are very
small compared to their radii of curvature. [lIT-JEE 2007]
because
ST A TEMENT-2
Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane surfaces, but not for large spherical surfaces.
(A) Statement-l isTrue, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct expianation for Statement-1
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-l
£
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False

CD) Statement-l is False, Stalement-2 is True

19. In an experiment to determine the focal iength (f) of a concave mirror by the u-v method, a student
places the object pin A on the principal axis at a distance x from the pole P. The student looks at the
pin and its inverted image from a distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA. When the student
shifts his/her eye towards left, the image appears to the right of the object pin. Then:- [IIT-JEE2007]
(A) x < f (B)f < x < 2f (C) x = 2f (D) x > 2f

20. Two beams of red and violet colours are made to pass separately through a prism (angle of the prism
is 60°). In the position of minimum deviation, the angle of refraction wi1l,be : [lIT-JEE 2008]
0
. (A) 30 for both the colours (B) greater for the violet colour
(C) greaterfor the red colour (D) equal bl,lt not 30° for both the,colours

~ 21. A light beam is traveling from Region I to Region IV (Refer Figure).The refractive index in Regions
f~
:'
" 1
i
I, II, III and IVare no' i '~ and ~ , respectively. The angle ofincidence 8 for which the beam just

misses entering B-egion IV is figure [!IT';J~h ~o08J


J ..
~ ';

~
( 1 Region I I Region III .Region III Region IV
.... '

1 I ~ no
( i ~I
no
E- Y12" 6 8
F'
Ii... i
;;;
~ o 0.2m 0.6 m
!
~
( :fl
o

!I
~
(A) sin-I (~) (B) sin-I (i) (C) sin~1
,.( 1)
'4 (D),sin- 1 (±)
i
:e 29
, ..
~

L,' 7 . --7 m 7". .-- f" .....- ...___ _


~'

JEE-Physics
22. An optical component and an object S placed along its optic axis are given in Column I. The distance
between the object and the component can be varied. The properties of images are gi ven in Column
II. Match all the properties of images from Column II with the appropriate components given in
Column I Indicate your answer by darkening the appropri ate bubbles of the 4 x 4 matrix gi ven in the
ORS. [IIT-JEE 20.08]
Column I Column II

s
(A) (p)' Real image :;"

s
(B) (q) Virtual image'
,

s
(C) (r) Magnified image

s
(D) (s) ,Image at infinite

23. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m ,above the surface of water in a lake. The refracti ve index of
water is 4/3. A fish inside the lake, in the line of fall of the ball, is looking at the ball. At an instant,
when the ball is 12.8 m above the water surface, the fish sees the speed of ball as [g::: 10 m/s2.J
[IIT-JEE 2009] ~
(A) 9 mls (B) 12 mls (C) 16 mls (D) 21.33 mls i
, , 0
1
24. A student performed the experiment of determination of focal length of a concave mirror by u-v ~
method using an optical bench of length 1.5 m. The focal length of the mirror used is 24 cm. The I '
maximum error in the location of the image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded by the {
student (in cm) are: (42,56), (48, 48), (60,40), (66, 33), (78,39). The data set(s) that cannot come ~
from experiment and is (are) incorrectly recorded, is (are): [IIT-JEE 2009J ~
(A) (42, 56) (B) (48,48) (C) (66, 33) (D) (78, 39) f
-!
25. A bicon vex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a plane mirror. The di stance between the lens and ;
the mirror is 10 cm. A small object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from the lens. TheJinal image is. 1
(A) virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror [lIT-JEE 201.0] ~
(B) real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror ' '~
<>
(C) virtual and at a distanc~ of 20 cm from the mirror !!!
:,'/ (0) real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror ~
I'
·:1
.!
Ii i
30 E
J
'~
:11
1'1
.~
I
.,,
Geometrical Optics
26. . A ray OP of monochromatic light is incident on the face AB of prism
ABCD near vertex B at an incident angle of 600 (see figure). If the· . B
refractive index of the material of the prism is J3, which of the
fol1owing is (are) correct? [IIT·JEE 2010J
(A) The ray gets totally internally reflected at face CD
(B) The ray comes out through face AD
(C) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent ray is 90 0
(D) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent ray is 1200 D

27. Two transparent media of refractive indices fl) and fl3 have a solid lens shaped transparent material of
refractive index 112 between them as shown in figures in Column II. A ray traversing these media is
also shown in the figures. In Column I different relationships between Ill' fl2 and fl3 are gi ven. Match
them to the ray diagrams shown in Column II. [lIT·.TEE 2010]
Column I . Column II

(A) )i) < fl2 (p)


~, ~ ~
h
(B) fl, > fl2 (q)
~, ~, t
(C) (r) -,=r­
fl2 =fl3
Il.t &. /.11

,
',,- .
(D) fl2> fl3 (s)
~1r~
~Il'·
( ~
q.
! (t)
( ,!:1 11,
'c
~
J 28. The focal length of a thin biconvex lens is 20 cm. When an object is moved from a distance of25 cm
..1.,; . 'm
... in front of it to 50 cm, the magnification of its image changes from m 2S to mso' The ratio ~ is
( ~ mso
"-.
j [lIT-JEE 2010J
c 1
1
29. Image of an object approaching a convex mirror of radius of curvature 20 m along its optical axis is

~ 25 m to 1"
observed to move from 3 50.m In 30 secon ds. What IS . 0f
. the speed ' in km per hour.?
.the object
j
:;;
<;
[IIT.JEE 2010]'
j
~ 30. A large glass slab (Il =~) of thickness 8 cm is placed over a point source of light on a plane surface.
~, It is seen that light emerges out of the top surface of the slab from a circular area of radius R cm. What
is the value of R? . [lIT-JEE 2010]
"\. .. 1
E 31
/
t, ~
JEE-Phys{cs '. .

31. A light my traveling in glass medium is incident on glass-air i~terface at an angle of incidence The a.
reflected (R) and transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of a, are plotted:The correct sketch is
. . . [UT-JEE 2011]

..............-................................
100%~....~
./J

T l
,I
.0 / .0
'Vi .... 'Vi
c
c(I) ...' B
(A) c .......'
(B) c
- R .•...
.........•••...••.
R.......
..................

o tI o e 90°

IOO%I::::::~r······· ..·..-····'·-··· IOO%~ ........·....·....····:::;;~;:·..-·..·

I T"'-.......
.0 .0
'Vi 'Vi
c
(C) B (D) §
.5 c

........~......
..."' -.

R .....
............
o e 90° o e 90°

. 4 7
32. Wa~er(with refractive index = '3) ina tank is 18 em deep. Oil of refractive index '4 lies on water

making a convex surface ofmdius of curvature 'R =6 cm' as shown. Consider oil to act as a thin lens.
An object'S' is placed 24 em above water surface. The location of its image is at 'x' cm above the
bottom of the tank. Then 'x" is [lIT-JEE 2011]

is
i
:
i
Ill'" 1.0
i; '"~ -j
.-.
..
!,
~'i '0
o g
"
.
1 E
.~
-it J
.:::;

33. ,A bi60nv~x lens isfonned with two thin plano-convex lenses as .shownin. the figure, Refractive ~
index n of the first lens is 1.5 and that ofthe second lens is 1.2. Both the curved surfaces are of ~ \1
=
. the same radius. of curvature R 14 cm. For this biconvex lens, for an object distance of 40 em, ~ f'~

the image distance will' be:- . . .[lIT-JEE2012] 1 '\...,1


.,;
:;.
!
w
C ?
'" ~

~
(~.

.
'"!:f/

~
;;

.8 C.
~ (~ .
R=14cm' ~ .~/

'CA) -280.0 em· (B) 40.0 cm (C) 21.5 cm (D) 13.3 em


3 ]
r •

i
----------~----~~~i32~~--~----~~------E
\...~..'

E
I •
L-J

.0
Geometrical Optics

Paragraph for Questions 34 and 35


Most mateIials have the refractive index, n>l. So, when a light ray from air enters a naturally occurring

sin 8. "'2
material, then by Snell's law, -so 8 = - , it is understood that the refracted ray hends towards the
. . In 2 nl

normal. But it never emerges on the same side of the normal as the incident ray. According to

electromagnetism, the refractive index of the medium is given by the relation, 11 ±~erJlr ,
= (.;) =

where c is the speed of electromagnetic waves in vacuum, v its speed in the medium, er and ~r
are the relative permittivity and permeability of the medium respectively.
In normal materials, both er and !1r are positive, implying positive n for the medium. When both
· er and!1r are negative. one must choose the negative root ofn. Such negative refractive index materials
can now be artificially prepared and are called meta-materials. They exhibit significantly different
. optical behaviour, without violating any physical laws. Since n is negative, it results in a change
· in the direction of propagation of the refracted light. However, similarto normal materials, the frequency
of light re~ains unchanged upon refraction even in meta-materials. [IIT-JEE 2012]
34. For light incident from air on a meta-material, the appropriate ray diagram is

Air

Air

(A) Meta-material (B) .


Meta-matenal

r

'"!.
t
',- , ·10
5
E
r ' ~ Air Air
~
;;1
( j
V)
Meta~material
'-.'
t (C) (D)
~
!
15
1
:!l
:::> 35. Choose the correct statement.
2
}!J• (A) The speed of light in the meta-material is v =clnl

'"<; c

j · (B) The speed of light in the meta-material is v = j;J

;ll '(C) The speed of light in the meta-material is v = c.


"z
Q

".1
(D) The wavelength of the light in the meta-material (A'm) is gi ven by Am =A~irlnl, where Aair is the
~
wavelength of the light in air.

i
'<.../;e

33

{
r
JEE-Physics

36. A ray,of light travelling in the direction ±U + FJ]) is incide~t on a plane mirror. After reflecfion, it
:'
H
'I
I

travels along the direction ±(i -,FJ]). The angle of incidence is :- [IIT-JEEi2013]
,
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 75°
37. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex lens at a distance of 8 m behind the lens, is real and "
;

is one-third the size of the object. The wavelength of light inside the lens is ~ times the wavelength

in free space. The radius of the curved surface of the lens is :- [IIT-JEE 2013]
(A) 1 m (B) 2 m (C) 3 m (D) 6 m
38. A right angled prism of refractive index III is placed in a rectangular block of refractive index Jlz'
which is surrounded by a medium of refractive index 1l3' as shown in the figure. A ray of light Ie'
enters the rectangular block at normal incidence. Depending upon the relationships between Ill' Jlz '
and 1l3, it takes one of the four possible paths 'er, 'eg', 'eh' or 'ei'., [IIT.JEE 2013J

e.. ,"- ~ I, g

Il, , Il,
.. ,

Match the paths in List I with conditions of refracti ve indices in List II and select the correct answer ~:.
using the codes given below the lists: f
List I List II 'j ~"
' e~f
'i
P. 1. Ill> fill'i ..:, 2'
9
~.
Q. e~g 2. 112 > III and 1l2> IlJ ~,~~

R. e~h 3. 1l1=~
i
;: lJ
S. e~i 4. Ilz < III < fill2 and ~ > 113 'B
~

~wJ
'~
Codes : w-··~
j,'
p Q R 's ~
~
(A) 2 3 1 4 [~
(B) 1 2 4 3 t
~
~--'
(C) 4 1 2 3 ...
l!l
G" ,
(D) 2 3 4 1 ~,
.,..
-:0

34 Er
, "
,;
,!

Geomefrical Optics

39.
A transparent thin film of uniform thickness and refractive index n 1 1.4 is coated on the convex =
spherical surface of radius R at one end ofa long solid glass cylinder of refractive index n2 = 1.5,
as shown in the figur.e. Rays of light parallel to the axis of the cylinder traversing through the film
from air to glass .get focused at distance f, from the film, while rays of light traversing from glass
to air get focused at distance f2 from the film. Then [JEE-Advance-2014]
nt

nl
Air

','i,

(A) Ifll = 3R (B) IfI I = 2.8 (C) If21 2R


R =
(D) If21 = 1.4 R
40. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a transparent block of height 1.0 mm and refractive
t~·,

index 2.72. It is immersed in a lower refractive index liquid as shown in the figure. It is found that
,..­ ~,

the light emerging from the block to the liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm •
on the top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is :- [JEE-Advance-2014]

I - - - u l v... k

s
(A) 1.21 (B) 1.3.0 (C) ,1.36 (D). 1.42
41. Four combinations of two thin lenses are given in List 1. The radius of curvature of all curved surfaces
is r and the refractive index of all the lenses is 1.5. Match lens combinations in List I with their
focal .length in List II and select the correct answer using the code given below the lists.
[JEE-Advance-2014]
List-I List-II

(
'-.
r,
.,<>

r
..
0..

.li
(P)
00..
(1) 2r

~
(~

'~

',­
g
'.5

J
~

-::
t
CQ) !Xl (2) -2r
~ i:i
I
') ,~
~
....

.§ ~) [] (3) -r
(ii. ,
,I, ....
i'
! 1:s.
c
Ll
ii
~
,JI ,.
,/l ;1
..
It.. . j,
~
J
~
~
'".2
.l!
.:::.
(S)

Code:
ill (4) r

tl
i!!
... 1
(A) P-l, Q-2, R-3, S-4 (B) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-l
~
0
~ z, (C) P-4, Q-l, R-2, S-3 (D) P-2, Q-l, R-3, S-4
~
/' ~
'1: 1
",., E 3S

(;~
,
JEE-Pnysics

ANSWER KEY

... '

. Exercise:(S)
1. (32) 14. m=4/3
2. 2mm 15. 7514 em, 7512 em
3. dJ2 16. (i) 0.2 m ,(ii) 0.4 m
17. (1tI4) em2
4.
J5

18. 15 em
2
19. 5em
5. 4m
13
=2
(~L =~

0
20. }.t;::; - , A
6. 8
21. .(a) 5000 W/m2 (b) 0.02 W1m2
7. e~53°
(c) 0.125 cm (d) 288 W/in 2
8. gem/s
52
9. (a) Vi =4 emls downwards 22. -cm
3
59 .
(b) "4cm/s upwards

10. 42 em
11. 45°

12.
J43
5
13: =
(i) Ao 600 nm, n 1.5 =
(ii) i ;::; sin-I (0.75) 48.59° =
~ ''-...-"
.,,;.;:.~:~: ,':. . ("" ;·:·~Y·~~'~r,.,>~~~·~·-,,· ;,:~:. "~:,";.>.:" ::',,::::', ~
~ f-'

I~~~ ~~~1{h it's; '.);Q} J:~Q:. ~


D CDC A 12
5i ~/ ~
.1 "--­
I - ~--- I - - I - I - I I - - I - I - I - I - I I ..- I .I~ ( ~
~

~
f '-"
1 .
I E;XERCI~E(O-2) II
l':l JT'l'\m·~'lh. q"r:":~"'~'r""f";~'m~I"~"l,rr'"p~r h.' 'A.".q"'''''''' J'fi<; \·r/::/ ,;.:'~' ;j6' C."" '. ·1 i cl
~ /,.,1

~, ~.'1
1 /'~ c...........1
. '.

36 E( .
'-";

~
a
Geometrical Optics

EXERCISE (JM), , ,,-~


'~~;1~,;'
1

'. . .'.
EXER,C1SE{JA)

t
(A)
18. (C)
R '19. (B)
f = v = J-l3
J.13 - J.11 20. (A)
p. (B) 21. (B)
22. (A) p, q, r, s (B) q, (C) p, q, r, s (D) p, q, r, S
23. (C)

~
. (A)
24. (C, D)
. (B)
25. (B)
.' (C)
26. (ABC)
~. 1.514 x 0.4 = 6.06 m correct upto two places of
0.1

127. (A)-pr, (B) -qst, (C) -prt, (D)-qs


28.6
decimal.

0.09 m/s ; Magnitude of the rate of change of 29. 3


lateral magnification is 0.3 S-I. 30. 6
(C) 31. (C)
(C) 32. 2

!
-::;
(a) i =60°, (b) 60° (atlticiockwise)
33. (B)
'i' 34. (C)
0 60°

1: 35. (B)
.
'C
(C) 36. (A)
j
f" i 4. (B) 37. (C)
" ~ 5.
-::
(A) (p) ; (B) (r) ; (C) (r) ; CD) (p, q, r)
38. (D)
39. ADS. (A,C)
~
" ] 6. (B) 40. ADS. (C)
1
~
0
7. (C) 41. ADS. (B)
:!
w

j
;;;
c ~
j
( §

~
\..-
lE ,' 37

( , I
I CONTENTS~ yt

ERRORS IN MEASUREMENTS

&
INSTRUMENTS

• Key-Concepts Fonnulae and Basic Theory 1


• Exercise (S) Conceptual Subjective Problems 18
8 Exercise (0) Miscellaneous Type Problems 20
• Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years IIT-JEE Problems 24
• Answer Key 30
~
$:;

"

(
~~

F;
I:

r
!:.
'"­ -_. ,-,. ---t,­
,"

i:
L
{
;
Errors in M-easurements & Instruments

KEY CONCEPTS

ERRORS
Whenever an experiment is perfOlmed, two kinds of errors can appear in the measured quantity.
(1) random and (2) systematic errors.

1. Random en'ors appear randomly because ofoperator, fluctuations in external conditions and vaci~bi Iity
of measuring instruments. The effect of random error can be some what reduced by taking ~he'averag~
of measured values. Random errors have no fixed sign or size. :'l
2~ Systematic errors occur due to error in the procedure, or miscalibration of the instrument etc. Such
errors have same size and sign for all the measurements. Such errors can be determined.
A measurement with relatively small random error is said to have high precision. A measurement
with small random error and small systematic error is said to have high accuracy.
The experimental error [uncertainty] can be expressed in several standard ways.
Error limits Q ± D.Q is the measured quantity and D.Q is the magnitude of its limit oferror. This expresses
the experimenter's judgment that the 'true' value of Q lies between Q - D.Q a.ndQ + D.Q. This entire
interval within which the measurement lies is called the range oferror. Random errors are expressed in this
form.

Absolute Error
Error may be expresstt4as absolute measures, giving the size of'the error tn a quantity in the same
(
units as the quantity itse'lf.
( ~
g. Least Count Error:- If the instrument has known least count, the absolute error is taken to be equal to
the least count unless otherwise stated.
(

" 1
.
(
I Relative (or Fractional) Error
, ~
~ Error may be expressed as relative measures, giving the ratio of the quantity's error to the quantity
" g itself. In general,
1~ absolute error in a measurement
..,;; relati ve error = size of the measurement
1
1

~s
We should know the error in the measurement because these errors propagate through the calculations

to produce errors in results.


t' .2
;;;
" ~ A. Systematic errors:
( ~
:0
They have a known sign. The systematic error is removed before beginning calculations. Bench error
('- ~ and zero error are examples of systematic error. '
E 1 ,,,,-'''''-,'',,~,
c
;(
,I:.

lEE-Physics :~:

B. Random error:
They have unknown sign. Thus they are represented in the form A ± a.
Here we are only concerned with limits oferror. We must assume a "worst-case" combination. In the
case of substraction, A - B, the worst~case deviation of the answer occurs when the errors are either
+ a and - b or - aand + b. In either case, the maximum error will be (a + b).
For example in the experiment on finding the focal length of a convex lens, the object distance (u) is
found by SU!;lfw;:ting the positions of the object needle and the lens. If the optical bench has a least
count of 1 rom, the elTor in each position will be 0.5 mm. So, the error in the value of u will be 1 mm.

1. Addition and subtraction rule : The absolute random errors add.


Thus if R::: A + B, r=a+b and if R =A - B, r =a + b

2. Product and quotient rule: The relative random errors add ..

r a bAr a b
Thus if R::: AB
'R
- = -+
A B
and ifR::: - then also -
B' R
::: -+:~
A '8

3. Power rule: When a quantity Q is raised to a power P, the relative error in the result is P times the

relative error in Q. This also holds for negative powers. IfR::: QP, ~ = Px ~

4. The quotient rule is not applicable if the numerator and denominator are dependent on each other.
XY .
e.g ifR::: X + Y . We cannot apply quotient rule to find the error in R. Instead we write the equation /
\

1 1 1 dR dX dY t
as follows R = X + Y . Differentiating both the sides, we get - R 2 ::: - X2 - y2 . !
~
c
~
.~
06
r x y <
Thus =X2
- +y2­ 1
I
Examples ~
.I
• J

A student finds the constant acceleration of a slowly moving object with a stopwatch. The equation

i
used is S = (1I2)AT2. The time is measured with a stopwatch, the distance,.S with a meter stick. What j
is the acceleration and its estimated error? . 'i
S =2 ± 0.005 meter. T =4.2 ± 0.2 second.
, 1
5- (',
. !Y v
Sol: We use capital letters for quantities, lower case for errors. Solve the equation for the result, a. j
. ""
~
tT2 Its random-error equatIOn
A =2S. ' ••
IS -
a
=2t-- +-.
s Thus A = 0.23 ± 0.02 mls2 . J
. A T S' :i:
~
~

2 E ("
'-J

' J,
C
" ~I
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

SIGNIFICANT DIGITS
Significant figures are digits that are statistically significant. There are two kinds ,of values in science:
1. Measured Values 2. ComputedValues
The way that we identify the proper number of significant figures in science are di fferent for these two
types.

MEASURED VALUES
Identifying a measured value with the correct number of significant digits requires that the instrument's
calibration be taken into consideration. The last significant digit in a measured value will be the first·
estimated position. For example, a metric ruler is calibrated with numbered calibrations equal to
1cm. In addition, there will be ten unnumbered calibration marks between each numbered position.
(each equal to 0.1 cm). Then one could with a little practice estimate between each of those marking.
(each equal to 0.05 cm). That first estimated position would be ·the last significant digit reported in the
measured value. Let's say that we were measuring the length of a tube, and it extended past the fourteenth
numbered
.
calibration half way between
.
the third and fourth unnumbered mark. The metric ruler was a
/.

meter stick with 100 numbered calibrations. The reported measured length would be 14.35 cm. Here
the total number of significant digits will be4..

COMPUTED VALUE
The other type of value is a computed value. The proper number of significant figures that a computed
value should have is decided by a set of conventional rules. However before we get to those rules for
computed values we have to consider how to determine how many significant digits are indicated in
the numbers being used in the math computation .

A. . Rules for determining the number of significant digits in number with indicated. decimals.
'igo 1. All nonzero digits (1-9) are to be counted as significant.
i~
2. Zeros that have any nonzero digits anywhere to the LEFT of them are considered significant zeros.
..
.2

l!
3. All other zeros not covered in rule (2) above are NOT be considered significant digits .
I'
\.
I§ For example: 0.0040000
E

.,
.~
ij
The 4 is obviously to be counted significant (Rule-I), but what about the zeros? The first three zeros
t

1.a would not be considered significant since they have no nonzero digits anywhere to their left
(
i-::. (Rule-3). The last four zeros would all be considered significant since each of them has the honzero
,. -!l digit 4 to their left (Rule-2). Therefore the number has a total offive significant digits.
\.. ~

(
Here is another example: 120.00420
",-.

The digit 1, 2, 4 and 2 are all considered significant (Rule-I). All zeros are considered significant
since they have non-zero digits somewhere to their left (Rule-2). So there are a total of eight significant
digits. If in t~e question, we are given a number like 100, we will treat that the number has only one
significant digit by convention.

\...
3
r
t
·i
~

JEE-Physics

B. Determining the number ofsignificant digits if number is not having an indicated decimal.
The decimal indicated in a number tells us to what position of estimation the number has been indicated
But what about 1,000,000?
Notice that there is no decimal indicated in the number. In other words, there is an ambiguity concerning
the estimated position. This ambiguity can only be clarified by placing the number in exponential

notation.

For example: If I write the number above in this manner.

1.00 x 106
I have indicated that the number has been recorded with three significant digits. On the other hand, if
I write the same number as: 1.0000 x 106
I have identified the number to have 5 significant digits. Once the number has been expressed in
exponential notation form then the digits that appear before the power of ten will all be considered
significant. So for example: 2.0040 x 104 will have five significant digits. This means that unit
conversion will not change the number of significant digits.
Thus 0.000010 km = 1.0 cm = 0.010 m = 1.0 x 10-2 m·= 1.0 x 10-5 km

Rule for expressing proper number ofsignificant digits in an answer from multiplication or division
For multiplication AND division there is the following rule for expressing a computed product or
quotient with the proper number of significant digi ts.
The product or quotient will be reported as having as many significant digits as the number involved
in the operation with the least number ofsignificant digits.
. For example : 0.000170 x 100.40 0.017068=
The product could be expressed with no more that three significant digits since 0.000170 has only
three significant digits, and 100.40 has five. So according to the ruJe the product answer could only
be expressed with three significant digits. Thus the answer should be 0.0171 (after rounding oft)
=
Another example: 2.000 x 104 /6.0 X 10-3 0.33 X 107 (

The answer could be expressed with no more that two significant digits since the least digit number} : ~.
invol ved in the operation has two significant digits.

I .
Sometimes this would required expressing the answer in exponential notation. !. "
For example: 3.0 x 800.0 = 2.4 X 103 , . 1
The number 3.0 has two significant digits and then number 800.0 has four. The rule states th~{!the I
answer can have no more than two digits expressed. However the answer as we can all see would be ';
2400. How do we express the answer 2400 while obeying the rules? The only way is to express the j
answer in exponential n'otation so 2400 could be expressed as: 2.4 x 103 ' i
1
Rule for expressing the correct number of significant digits in an addition or substraction: 1
The rule for expressing a sum or difference is considerably different than the one for multiplication of ~
division. The sum ordifferencecan beno more precise than theleast precise numberinvolvedin the mathematical ]
operation. Precision has to do with the number of positions to the RIOHf'of the decimal. The more ~
position to the right of the de~imal, the more precise the number. So a sum or difference can have no ~
more indicated positions to the right of the decimal as the number involved in the o~eration with the ~

4 Et
v"
{
Errors in Measurements '& Instruments

LEAST indicated positions to the right of its decimal. '

For example : 160.45 + 6.732 = 167.18 (after rounding off)

The answer could be expressed only to two positions to the right of the decimal, since 160.45 is the

least precise.

Another example: 45.621 + 4.3 - 6.41 = 43.5 (after rounding off)


The answer could be expressed only to one position to the right of the decimal, since the number4.3 is .
the least precise number (Le. having only one position to the right of its decimal). Notice we aren't reaJJy
determining the total number of significant digits in the answer with this rule.

Rules for rounding off d~gits :


There are a set of conventional rules for rounding off.
1. Determine according to the rule what the last reported digit should be.,
2; Consider the digit to the right of the last reported digit.
3. If the digino the right of the last reported digit is less than 5 round it and all digits to. its right off: '
4. If the digit to the right of the last reported digit is greater than 5 round it and all digits to its right off
and increased the last reported digit by one.
5. If the digit to the right of the last reported digit is a 5 followed by either no other digits or all zeros,
round it and all digits to its right off and if the last reported digit is odd round up to the next even digit.
If the last reported digit is even then leave it as is.
,
For example if we wish to round off the fol1owing number to 3 significant digits: 18:3682
\. The last reported digits would be the 3. The digit to its right is a 6 which is greater than 5. According
,to the Rule-4 above,. the digit 3 is increased ,by one and the answer is : 18.4
lg>
~ Another example: Round off 4.565 to three significant digits.
, ...1 The last reported digit would be the 6. The digit to the right is a 5 followed by nothing. Therefore
"­ ~ according to Rule-5 above since the 6 is even it remains so and the answer would be 4.56.
~
'­ ie EXPERIMENTS
r g
~

l 1i­... (i) Measurement of length


-; The simplest method measuring the length of a straight line is by means of a meter scale. But there
exists some limitation in the accuracy of the result:
(i) the dividing lines have a finite thickness.
(ii) naked eye cannot correctly estimate less than 0.5 mm

Por greater accuracy devices like


'1) Vernier callipers (b) micrometer scales (screw gauge) are used.
~.

( , .,
JEE~Physics

VERNIER CALLIPERS:

p Q Vernier Scale
/ " Main Scale
M /
~VlIlllllllllll!lllllltl N 7

C D

~~I,,1,\,I,W
Vernier Callipers

Princillie of Vernier 41h vernier


division
o .1 .2 em coinciding

~, 5
o 5 10 Main scale (8) Vernier scale

"--Vernier scale (V)
x
Reading a vernier with 41h division coinciding

50 60
mm scale ~
'!­

I I~ ! Imm scale !
! .1. . "
RIIII/il
~.
I "

vermer
If5
I I I' "
I II I . ~
!
Object '---,..;:'----' ,scale ! "
.,
It consists of a main scale graduated in cm/mm over which an auxiliary scale (or Vernier scale) can I/
slide along the length. The division of the Vernier scale being shorterthan the divisions of the main !
scale. .~
Least count of Vernier Callipers ~
The least count or Vernier constant (v. c) is the minimum "alue of correct estimation of length without ~
eye estimation. IfN divisiori of vernier coincides with (N-l) division of main scale, then 1
N -1 .
1
=> 1V8 = ~ ms ~
0

N (VS) =(N - 1) ms /.
, j ~

N -1) Ims ~
Vernier constant =1 ms - 1 vs =( 1- N ms = N ,which is equal to the value of the smallest ~
division on the main scale divided by total number of divisions on the vernier scale. '~
z

6 E ~
{
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

Length as measured by Vernier Callipers


The formula for measuring the length is L = main scale reading + least count of vernier
scale x Vernier scaJe division coinciding with a main scale division •

Main scale reading is,given by the zeroth division of the vernier scale as shown in the figure .
.',
Zero error:

Main scale Main scale


o t1 o Ii

~~'" ·:I I ~ i :
!I I J:
io 5 10!
t................................... #
to
.............. 5 (01
.................
"' .,
;0 5 101
f .................................. ..

Vern ier scale Vernier scale Vernier scale


without zero error with positive zero error with negative zero error
(i) (ii)

()

'"15 10
4'" division ~ 6,1. division
coinciding , coinciding

Positive zero error (+0.04 cm)


Negative zero error == (-0.04 cm)
and its correction
and its correction

(
If the zero marking of main scale and vernier callipers do not coincide, necessary correction has to be
made for this eiTor which is known as zero en'or of the instrument.
.
('
'~
l If the zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale the zero error is said to be

f
.€ 11, ~:
positive and the correction will be negative and vice versa .

The zero error is always subtracted from the reading to get the corrected value.
'" oil

1~ If the zero error is positive, its value is calculated as we take any nonnal reading. If the zero error
, negative (the zero of vernier scale lies to the left of the zero of main scale),

1 negative zero error = - [Total no. of vsd - vsd coinciding] x L.C.

~
1 Do not try to read the main scale at the point where the lines match best. This has no meaning. Read
f from ~he vernier scale instead. Sometimes it is difficult to,tell whether the best match oflines is for
f vernier marks 9,0, or 1: Make your best estimate, but realize that the final re~ult including the vernier
]
~
must round off to the resp.lt you would choose if there was no vernier. If the mark is close to 3.20 on
, \.,

~ the main scale, but the:vernier reading is 9, the length is 3.19 cm. If the mark is close to 3.2 on the
j
main seaJe and the vernier is 1, the length is 3.21 ern.

~
/
\.

'E' 7 ---.
JEE-Physics

SCREW GA UGE (OR MICROMETER SCREW)


In general vernier callipers can measure accurately upto 0.01 ern at:tQ.'for greater accuracy micrometer
screw devices e.g. screw gauge, spherometer are used. These con:sist of accurately cut screw which
can be moved in a closely fitting fixed nut by turning it axially. The'instrument is provided with two
scales:

R
p

E
Screw Gauge
~ f'

Direction-
of motion ~~

Principle of a micrometer

R , '

'"~
Thin sheet .5
~
~
.i
E '"
;t!

I~
.5

l
.-:. ~ ,; I
!l
" ] ",:

1 ~
~
f ~,

E ''''---':
~
Screw gauge with no zero-error
1
i
:Y' 8 E
.l
-~!
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

Line of
graduation

E
Negative zero error
(3 division error) Le.,- 0.003 cm

Circular scale

k 5 zero of the cIrcular


~ scale is above the
.
o zero of main scale
95
Main scale 90
reference line
85

~~


}'"
( !.i E
Positive zero error
(
.. (2 division error) i.e., + 0.002 em
/
1
!
'- .~

~
_-Circular scale

~115
( j
V>
->.
~
~
1 10
5 ............ Zero ofthe circular
1 o~ scale is below the
f 95 zero of main scale
c ~
Main scale

reference line
~
~

~
1
w
(i) The main scale or pitch scale M graduated along the axis of the screw.
'" ':0
~
2
(ii) The cap-scale or head scale H round the edge of the screw head.

E 9
(
JEE-Physics

Constants of the S~rew Gauge


(a) Pitch: The translational motion of the screw is directly proportional to the totai rotation of the head.
The pitch of the instrument is the distance between two consecutive threads of the screw which is
equal to the distance moved by the screw due to one complete rotation of the cap. Thus for 10 rotation
=
of cap =5 mm, then pitch 0.5 mm
(b) Least count: In this case also, the minimum (or least) measurement (or count) of length is equal to
one divisioil on the head scale which is equal to pitch divided by the total cap divisions. Thus in the
aforesaid Illustration:, if the total cap division is 100, then least count =0.5mm1l00 = 0.005 mm

(c) Measurement of length by screw gauge:


L::: n x pitch + f x least count, where n = main scale reading & f = paps scale reading. "
Zero Error: In a perfect instrument the zero of the head scale coincides with the line ofgradu~tion
along the screw axis with no zero-error, otherwise the instrument is said to have zero-error which is
equal to the cap reading with the gap closed. This error is positive when zero line or reference line
, of ,

the cap lies below the line of graduation and versa, The corresponding corrections will be just opposite.
t'"

eli) Measurement of g using a simple pendulum


A
A small spherical bob is attached to a cotton thread and the combi nation is
suspended from a point A. The length of the thread (L) is read off on a
meter scale, A correction is added to L to include the finite size ofthb' bob
and the hook. The corrected value ofL is used for further ca1culation. The
bob is displaced slightly to one side and is allowed to oscillate, and the
total time taken for 50 complete oscillations is noted on a stop-watch. B

The time period (T) of a single oscillation is now calculated by division.


. /.'
Observations are now taken by using different lengths for the cotton thread .,!Ii
LI .Jll'
.
.~

(L) and pairs of values ofL and T are taken. A plot of L vIs T2, on a graph,
•<p'
/41;'
} ~./
Ji (';
L Tl

..I
' . ' ?
is linear. g is given by g = 41t T2
w

The major errors in this experiment are


(a) Systematic: Error due to finite amplitude of the pendulum (as the motion is not exactly SHM). This ':
e
I
" 0

may be corrected for by using the correct numerical estimatefor the time pe~od. However the pr~ctice j
is to ensure thatthe amplitude is small. .,' " ~
~

,
(b). Statistical: En-ors arising from measurement oflength and time. g T+ 2(OT)
og oL
= T
,1
:i· ]

tlj

, :?
,';' 11
The contributions to oL, oT are both statistical and systematic. These are reduced by the process·of ~
averaging. The systematic error in L can be reduced by pioUing sev~r~1 values of L vs T2 and fitting ~
to a straight line. The slope of this fit gives the correct value ofLIT2'" ~
~ '-J

10 E
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

(iii) Determination of Young's Modulus by Searle's Method


The experimental set up consists of two identical wires P and Qof uniform
cross section suspended from a fixed rigid SUppOlt. The free ends of these
parallel wires are connected to a frame F as shown in the figure'. The length
TT.
Qi
.
I
I
I

!p


of the wire Q remains fixed while the loadL attached to the wire P through
the frame F is varied in equal steps so as to produce extension along ;the
length. The extension thus produced is measured with the help of spirit
level SL and micrometer screw M attached to the F frame on the side of the
experimental wire. On' placing the slotted weights on the hanger H upto a
<)
permissible value (half of the breaking force) the wire gets extended by
small amount and t~e spirit level gets disturbed from horizontal setting. This
increase in length is measured by turning the micrometer screw M upwards

so as to restore the balance of the spirit level. If n be the number of turns of

the micrometer screw and fbe the difference in the cap reading, the increase

in length M is obtained by f:.l =n x pitch + f x least count

In some situations, the ,change in length is obtained by vernier arrangement ins,tead of the screw

gauge.

The load on the hanger is reduced in the same steps and spirit level is restored to horizontal position.

The mean of these two observations gives the true increase in length of the wire corresponding to the

given value of load. This is to eliminate the effect of hysteresis.

From the data obtained, a graph showing extension (f:.l) against the load (W) is plotted which is

obtained as a straight line passing through the origin.

..
°
Theslopeofthehneglves tan = W = Mg
I I $

et········ ..·······f
Mg' I
'"'&. = 1tf
Now. stress - 2 and'strain = L
i
M
g. I

!!I
(
"- i
~
ML
Y ='Stressl strain = -g- = - ­
L
w Mg
(
.,,~ 1tf2[ 1tf2 tan
"ti With known values of initial length L, radius r of the experimental wire and tanO, Young's modulus
( ~
Y can be calculated.
Ic
f
'" ~ (iv) Specific Heat of a liquid using a calorimeter:
~
<Ii
r
The principle is to take a;known quantity of liquid in an insulated calorimeter and heat it by passing a
1
'..

known current (i) through a heating coil immersed within the liquid for a known length of time (t).
,
{' ~

" The mass of the calorimeter (m I) and, the combined mass of the calorimeter and the liquid (m2) are
measured. The potential drop across the heating coil is V and the maximum temperature of the liquid
is measured to 02'
The specific heat of the liquid (SI) is found by using the relation
Cm2 - m])SI(02 - 00) + m 1Se (02 - 90) = i. V. t
()t', (m2 - ml)SI + mISe = i. V. t 1(9 2 - 00) ..... (1)
I'
11

{'
~- .... -,- ._--­
JEE-Physics

Here, So is the room temperature, while Sc is the specific heat of the material of the calorimeter and the
stirrer. If Sc is known, then Sl can be determined.

On the other hand, if Sc is unknown: one can either repeat the experiment with water or a different

mass of the liquid and ~se the two equations to eliminate mISc'

The sources of error in this experiment are errors due to improper connection of the heating coil,

radiation, apart from statistical errors in measurement.

Error analysis:

After correcting for systematic errors, equation (1) is used to estimate the remaining errors.

(v) Focal length of a concave mirror and a convex lens using the u-v method.
In this method one uses an optical bench and the convex lens (or the concave mirror) is placed on the
holder.
The position of the lens is noted by reading the scale at the bottom of the holder. A bright object
(a filament lamp or some similar object) is placed at a fixed distanc~ (u) in front of the lens (mirror).
The position of the image (v) is determined by moving a white se:reen behind the lens until a sharp
image is obtained (for real images). :: i,
For the concave mirror, the position of the image is determined by placing a sharp object (a pin) on
the optical bench such that the parallax between the object pin and the image is nil. 0

A plot of lui versus Ivl gives a rectangular hyperbola. A plot of 1 vs _I_ gi ves a straight line.
• 0 0 0 Ivl lui

The intercepts are equal to If!1


,where/is the focal length.

1IIvll'."
<\l..,$.••
ljl·,lP" i (./
''$'"
1I1ul
f
..Ii
Error: The systematic error in this experiment is mostly due to improper posi tion of the object on the f
holder. This error maybe eliminated by reversing the holder (rotating the holder by 1800 about the r
vertical) and then taking the readings again. Averages are then taken. of
I

& ~ ~ ~
The equation for random errors gives: "if= u2 + v2 ~o

Theerrorsou, ovcorrespond to the errorin the measurementofu and v. Actually, we know the errors in the j
object position, lens position & image position. So, the errors in u & vare too be estimated as described before. 1
-<

Index Error or Bench Error and its correction: ~: ('


In an experiment using an optical bench we are required to measure the object and image distances f v
from the pole or vertex on the mirror. The distance between the tip of the needles and the pole of the ~: f

mirroris the actual distance. ;.0' ,--'


H
12 (: ~
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

But we practically measure distances between the indices with the help of the'scale engraved on the
bench. These distances are called the observed distances. The actual distances may not be equal to the
observed distances and due to this reason an error creeps in the measurement of the distances. This
error is called the index or the bench error. This error is estimated with the help of a needle of known
length placed horizontally between the tip of the needle and the pole.
Index Error = Observed distance - actual distance and
Index COlTection = Actual- observed distance
Note: Index correction whether positive or negative, is always added algebraically to the observed distance
to get the corrected distance.

Parallax
(
When two objects 01 and 02 are placed in such a way that both of them lie in the same line of sight
as shown in figure, then the object nearer to the eye covers the object farther from it. Their images on
\he retina are superimposed,nnd therefore, it is impossible to decide which is the nearer object. To
identify this fact, the observerdispJaces his eye to a position EI or E2 until he is able,to see two distinct
objects. '

,­ ~~

If.. ".....
: ............
",_"tJj

.""

.~~ -­
o2 ,,,,-
.,.".-0.. '.....".. . .
I ......... ~E
2
",.- .., y-
,
\...

( The more distant object 02 apparently moves in the direction opposite to the displacement of the
~.

'-
observer's eye with respect to the nearer object 01' This relative shift in the position oftwo objects

( due to the shift in the position of the observer's eye is called parallax.

(\. Parallax between the two objects disappear if they are at the same position.
(
\..
The figure shows the tips of two pins PI and P2 kept in the upright positions. The parallax between PI
and P2 is removed by shifting the position of observer's eye sideways. As the farther pin PI is displaced
towards the pin P2 the relative shift (parallax) between their positions decreases as the position of eye
c is displaced sideways. The relative shift vanishes when the pin PI occupies the position P' p that is ,

c when the tips ofthe two are just coincident. At this position thereis no parallax between the tips of the

two pins.

',­

13

JEE-Physics

P pI,

l' ! ~

iP2

(vi) Speed of sound using resonance column .


A tuning fork of known frequency (f) is held at the mouth of a long tube, which is di pped into water
as shown in the figure. The length (II) of the air column in the tube is adjusted until it resonates with
the tuning fork. The air temperature and humidity are noted. The length of the tube is adjusted again
until a second resonance length (12) is found (provided the tube is long)
Then, 12 -II ="A. / 2, provided II' l2 are resonance lengths for adjacent resonances. r;.:;:_ t ~,~..",.",

:. A= 2(12 -[1)' is the wavelength of sound.

Since the frequency f, is known; the velocity of sound in air at the temperature

-'
(6) and humidity (h) is given by C =fA =2(l2 -[I)f
It is also possible to use a single measurement of the resonant length directly,

but, then it has to be corrected/or the "end effect":

A(fundamental) = 4(1 1 + a.3d). where d = diameter


Errors:
The major systematic errors introduced are due to end effects in (end correction) and also due to
excessive humidity. .

OC
=0(12 -I)1 = 012 +011

;
;:
Random errors are given by _
C 12 -/1 /2-i1

(vii) Verification of Ohm's law using voltmeter and ammeter /- -.,

A voltmeter (V) and an ammeter (A) are connected in a circuit along with a resistance R as shown in
the figure, along with a battery B and a rheostat, Rh ~~
'1
Simultaneous readings of the current i and the potential drop V are taken by changing the resistance
in the rheostat (Rh). A graph of V vs i is plotted and it is found to be linear (within errors).
The magnitude ofR is determined by either

A'I ~.
;
'"i
,
;
R -oj
v !~
.j
.j
~j

I
~
. V a
(a) taking the ratio -:- and then (b) fitting to a straight line: V =iR, and determining the slope R. .;;~
1 ~

Errors: '!,
~ \..../

14 '=

Errors in Measurements & Instruments

Systematic errors in this experiment arise from the current flowing through V (finite resistance of the
voltmeter), the Joule heating effect in the circuit and the resistance of the connecting wiresl connections
of the resist~nce. The effect of Joule heating may be minimized by switching on the circuit for a short
while only, while the effect of finite resistance of the voltmeter can be overcome by using a high
resistance instrument or a potentiometer. The lengths of connecting wires should be minimized as
much as possible.

Error analysis:

8R
v is given by 1
The error in computing the ratio R == T R I_18VIIOil
-y- + T
where OV and oi are of the order of the least counts of the instruments used.

(viii) Specific resistance of the material of a wire using a meter bridge:


A known length (1) of f\lwire is connected in one of the gaps (P) of a metre bridge, while a Resistance
Box is inserted into the other gap (Q). The circuit is completed by using a battery (B), a Rheostat (Rh),
a Key (K) and a galvanometer (G).The balance length (I) is found by closing key K and momentarily
p l
connecting the galvanometer until it gives zero deflection (null point). Then, Q =100 -l .... (1)

~ '1

~
:l;
1 ~
(
.~
B Rh
'""~ using the expression for the meter bridge at balance. Here P represents the resistance of the wire while
/ E
\.. ~
Q represents the resistance in the resistance box. The key K is open when the circuit is not in use.
Ic
L 1tr2
1 The resistance of the wire, P =P - 2 => P = -'--L P ....... (2)

'"Vi
~ 1tr

r
"'- I where r is the radius of wire and L is the length of the wire, r is measured using a screw gauge while
L is measured with a scale.

I
~
Errors:
Q
0

><
The major systematic errors in this experiment are due tothe heating effect, end corrections introduced
-;;
/
~ due to shift of the zero of the scale at A and B, and stray resistances in P andQ, and errors due to
\.
'2
~
non-uniformity of the meter bridge wire.
~
\ 8
~
'-. ~' E 15
JEE-Physics

Error analysis' :

End corrections can be estimated by including known resistances PI and Q, in the two ends and

finding the null point:

PI I, +a
-=--'---­ ..... (2),
Q1 100-/1 +~
where a and p are the end corrections.
When the resistance Q, is placed in the left gap and PI in the right gap,
Q 12 +a
- I = -""---­ ..... (3)
P 1 100-/2 +/3
. which give two linear equation for finding a and /3.
In order that a and p be measured accurately, PI and QJ should be as different from each other as

. . P _ I+a _/~
possible. For the actual balance pomt, Q - 100 -I + P- I; ,

.Errors due to non-unifonnity of the meter bridge wire can be minimized by i~terchanging the resistances·

OP 0/; 0/;
in the gaps P and Q. . - = - , +-,­
.. P. 11 12

where, 01' I and 01' 2 are of the order of the least count of the scale.

The error is, therefore, minimum if [' I = [' 2 i.e. when the balance point is in the middle of the bridge.
op 20r oL oP
The error in p is - = - + - + ­
p r L P
(xx) Measurement of unknown resistance using a P.O. Box
AP.O. Box can also be used to measure an unknown resistance. It is aiWheatstone Bridge with three .~

arms P, Q and R; while the fourth arm(s) is the unknown resistance. F,i·and Q are known asthe ratio}
arms while R is known at the rheostat arm. At balance, the unknown resistance ~
S I
..
.S
(

1
I
1
1
~
~
~
i
~.
~
~
:r;
~
a
~
7.

16 •.".,....., - E
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

PJ R
s= (Q ..... (1)

The ratio arms are first adjusted so that they carry 100 n each. The resistance in the rheostat arin is
now adjusted so that the galvanometer deflection is in one direction, if R =Ro (Ohm) and in the
opposite direction when R:: Ro +1 (ohm).
h

This implies that the unknown resistance, S lies between Roand Ro + 1 (ohm). Now, the resistance in
P and Q are made 109:0. and 1000 n respectively, and the process is repeated.
Equation (1) is used to compute S.
The ratio P/Q is progn;ssi vely made 1: 10, and then 1 : 100. The resistance S can be accurately measured.

Errors:
The major sources of.error are the connecting wires, unclear resistance plugs, change in resistance
due to Joule heating, and the insensitivity of the Wheatstone bridge.
r !'l'
These may be removed by using thick connecting wires, clean plugs, keeping the circuit on for very
brief periods (to avoid Joule heating) and calculating the sensitivity.
In order that the sensitivity is maximum, the resistance in the arm P is close to the value of the
resistance S.

(
"- <l
!
.
(
'<- 1 E
.E
..
.~

;
~

/
\..
~
<

(.. !
C
l
i
j ~ tl.
1
~
:!.

~><
0

Ii>
I
~
\.
'2
8
~
2 ~ ". \

E..,l
17
(
JEE-Physics .

EXERCISE (S)

!i
1. How many significant figures are given in the following quantities?
(A) 343 g (B) 2.20 (C) 1.103 N (D) 0.4142 s
(E) 0.0145 m (F) 1.0080 V (G) 9.1 x 104 km (H) 1.124 x 10-3 V
2., Perform the following operations:
(A) 703 + 7 + 0.66 (B) 2.21 x 0.3 (C) 12.4 x 84 (D) 14.28/0.714
2.91 xO.3842
3. Solve with due regard to significant digits (i) J6.5 - 6.32 (ii) 0.080
4. The main scale of a vernier calipers reads in millimeter and its vernier is divided into 10 divisions
which coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When the two jaws of the instrument touch each
other the seventh di vision of the vernier scale coincide with a scale division and the zero of the vernier
lies to the right of the zero of main scale. Furthermore, when a cylinder is tightly placed along its
length between the two jaws, the zero of the vernier scale lies slightly to the left of 3.2 cm; and the
fourth vernier division coincides with a scale division. Calculate the measured length of the cylinder.
5. =
The VC shown in the diagram has zero error in it (as you can see). It is given that 9 msd 10 vsd.
(i) What is the magnitude of the zero error? (1 msd =1 mm)

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
I
I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I j I

on
~
w
(ii) The observed reading of the length of a rod measured by this VC comes out to be 5.4 mm, If the ~ I;r.

vernier had been error free then reading of main scale would be _ and the coinciding di vision of .,
vernier scale would be - - ' i
6. Consider a home made vernier scale as shown in the f i g u r e . : ; ig
E
c

J
~
l'
.ll
1"~
:5..
.~

~Q j
\1'",
'''--'' ,

In this diagram, we are interested in measuring the length of the line PQ. If both the inc 1i :!c.s are ~
identical and their angles are equal to e then what is the least count of the instrument. ~
'"f.l
18 __ "~_w,, Ie
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

7. The pitch ofa screw g~tlge is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on the circular scale. In measuring the
thickness of a metal pl*e, there are five divisions on the pitch scale (or main scale) and thirty fourth
division coincides with'the reference line. Calculate the thickness of the metal plate.
S. The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and there are 50 divisions on its cap. When nothing is put in
betw een the Studs, 44rh division of the circular scale coincides with the reference line zero of the main
scale is not visible. When a glass plate is placed between the studs, the main scale reads three divi­
sions and the circular scale reads 26 di visions. Calculate the thickness of the plate.
9. In a given optical bench, a needle of length 10 cm is used to estimate behch error. The object needle,
" image needle & lens holder have their reading as shown.
'I

xo=1.1cm x[=21.0cm xL=10.9cm


Estimate the bench errors which are present in image needle holder and object needle holdeI'. Also
find the focal length of the convex lens when.
Xo = 0.6 cm xI = 22.5 cm xL': 11.4 cm
to. Make the appropriate connections in the meter bridge set up shown. Resistance box is connected
between _ . Unknown resi~tance is connected berween_. Battery is connected between _ __

-
A
- -
B C D

IE F
I
11. A body travels uniformly a distance of (13.8 ± 0.2)m in time (4.0 ± 0.3) sec. Calculate its velocity.
12. Consider S = x cos (0) for x = (2.0 ± 0.2) cm, 0 =53 ± 2°. Find S.
13. Two resistance R, and R2 are connected in (i) series and (ii) parallel. What is the equivalent resistance
=
\;h, with limit of possible percentage error in each case of RI 5.0 ± 0:2 nand R z : 10.0 ± 0.1 n.
14:;;' 5.74 gm of a substance occupies a volume of 1.2 cm3. Calculate its density with due regard for significant
(r- -

'" figures.
( lIS. The time period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is given by T = 2nJiTi,. The length of the
( pendulum is measured as I: 10 ± 0.1cm and the time period as T = 0.5 ± 0.02 s. Determine percentage
1,:
~ 16.
error in the value of g.
A physical quantity P is related to four observables A, B, C and D as P =4nzA 3B z /(.JC D)
(

,
(
Ic

~
The percentage error of the measurement in A, B, C and Dare 1%,3% and 2%,4% respectively.
Determine the percentage error & absolute error in the quantity P. Vat'ue of Pis calcuiated 3.763.
~~

J 17. A glass prism of angle N= 60° gives minimum angle of deviation e =30° with the max. error of 1
0

when a beam of paralleLJight passed through the prism during an experiment. Find the permissible
t error in the measuremetltof refractive index ~ of the material of the prism. ~
C .j
1 18,. In a vernier calipers the main scale and the vernier scale are made up of different materials. When the
~ room temperature increases by/J.ToC, it is found the reading of the instrument remains the same.
:5.
Earlier it was observed that the front edge of the wooden rod placed for measurement crossed the Nth
(,
",-, ~
~ main scale division and (N + 2) msd coincided with the 2nd vsd. Initially, 10 vsd coincided with
(
'-~ ~ 9msd. If coefficient of Ii~ear expansion of the main scale is a l and that of the vernier scale is a z then
~ : what is the value of a/ a z? (Ignore the expansion of the rod on heating)
~
. 'i
\ ..
(A) 1.8/ (N) (B) 1.8 /(N+2) (C) 1.8/ (N-2) , (D) None

E 19
{
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0)

,:; -I
1. A vernier callipers having I main scale di vision::: 0.1 cm is designed to have a least count of 0.02 cm.
If n be the number of divisions on vernier scale and m be the length of vernier scale, then
(A) n:::10, m:::0.5 cm (B) n:::9, m:::OA cm
(C) n:::lO, m:::0.8 cm (D) n:::l0 , m:::0.2 cm

2. In a YernierCalipers (YC), N divisions of the main scale coincide with N + m divisions of the vernIer
scale. What is the value of m for which the instrument has minimum least count?
(A) I (B) N (C) Infinity (D) N/2

3. In the Searle's experiment, after every step of loading, why should we wait for two minutes before
taking the readings? (More than one correct.)

. (A) So that the wire can have its desired change in length.

(B) So that the wire can attain room temperature.


(C) So that vertical oscillations can get subsided.

CD) SO that the wire has no change in its radius.

4. In a meter bridge set up, which of the following should be the properties of the one meter long wire?
(A) High resistivity and low temperature coefficient
(B) Low resistivity and low temperature coefficient

CC) Low resistivity and high temperature coefficient.

(D) High resistivity and high temperature coefficient

5. Consider the MB shown in the diagram, let the resistance X have temperature coefficient a.) and the i
resistance from the RB have the temperature coefficient a.2• Let the reading of the meter scale be !
10cm from theLHS. If the temperature of the two resistance increase by small temperature liT then j
what is the shift in the position of the null point? Neglect all the other changes in the bridge due to ~
temperature r i s e . · . I '- ...~.

~
c
A D l

I
E _~~ F
1
f
,
\..<

c
IE
IOem I
(A) 9(a l - ( 2)liT (B) 9(a l + ( 2)liT . J
"'

CC) 9(a, + ( 2)liT (D)
1
9(a, - ( 2)b.T:
,i
I~
2 ~
20 E
!l (-"
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

6. For a post office Box, the graph of gal vanometer deflection versus Deflection (in division)
R (resistance pulled out of RB) for the ratio 100: 1 is given as
shown. A careless student pulls out two non consecuti ve values
R marked in the graph. Find the value of unknown resistance.
(A) 3.2 ohm (B) 3.24 ohm _1- '.. "RQ

(C) 3.206 ohm (D) 3.26 ohm

7. Identify which of the following diagrams represent the 'internal construction of the coils wound in a
resistance box or PO box?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

8. In the laboratory method for measuring the latent heat of steam, the steam is passed through the
device shown below. The function of the device is

Insulated walls

Steam from boiler

tF
;t,..

"
1
.5·'
(A) to prevent condd1sed steam from reaching the calorimeter

(B) to reduce the pressure of the steam

'"

I
f (C) to ensure that the pressure 0 the steam is equal to the atmospheric pressure.
(D) to control the rate of flow of steam
,S

l
i 9.
~
In a meter bridge experiment, we try to obtain the null point at the middle. This
(A) reduces systematic error as well as random error.
.Jl (B) reduces systematic error but not the random error.
(C) reduces random error but not the systematic error
l (D) reduces neither systematic error nor the random error
1~
( ~ 10. An approximate value of number of seconds in an year is 1t x 107 • Determine the % error in this value
j
(A) 0.5% (B) 8% (C) 4% (D) 15%
!
E 21
l .
JE.E-Physics

11. In a Searle's experiment for determination of Young's Modulus, when a load of 50 kg is added to n
3 meter long wire micrometer screw having pitch 1 mm needs to be givena quarter tum in order to
restore the horizontal position of spirit level. Young's modulus of the wire if its cross sectional area is
10-5 m2 is
(A) 6x 1O II N/m2 (B) 1.5 x 1011 N/m2 (C) 3 X lOll N/m 2 (D) None

12. On the basis of detail gi ven about two measuring instruments, select the CQlTect statement.

2.45
(i) Vernier callipers having main scale division = 0.05 cm and Vernier scale division = 5Ocm.

(ii) Screw gaugae having pitch 0.5 mm and its circular scaie division measures 0.01 mm.
(A) Both the instruments have same least count.
(B) Least count of screw gauge is lesser than that of vernier callipers.
(C) Both the instruments have same least count but screw gauge is more precise.
(D) Both the instruments have different least count and screw gauge is more precise.

13. A studentootained following observations in an experiment of meter bridge to find unknown resistance
of given wire:

S.No. R f. 100 - f. s= coo-e)

I!.
R

1 20 43 57 2.65

2 30 52 48 2.77

3 40 58 42 2.89

4 50 69 31 2.25

The most accurate value of unknown resistance will be


~
~~",

(A) 2.65 0 (B) 2.77 0 (C) 2.89 0 (D)2.25 Q J J


14. In which of the following instruments used in the lab there exists an error of random category known
1
.~
I" ,j
.,;

as back lash error


1
(i) Screw gauge
(A) (i) & (ii) only
(ii) Spherometer (iii) Searle's apparatus (i v) Vernier calli pers
(B) (i), (ii) & (iii) only (C) (i) only . (D) all four
.I
l
]
15. In Searle's apparatus, when experimental wire is loaded and unloaded, the air bubble in spirit level ~
~~~ 1
...
(A) towards reference wire while loading & towards experimental wire while unloading 1
(B) towards experimental wire while loading & towards reference wire while unloading 1
(C) towards experimental wire, both the times, during loading & unloading i
~
(D) towards reference wire, both the times during loading & unloading ~
1
!
22 E
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

16. A student performing experiment using optical bench observes that when concave mirror is at zero,
and tip of object needle is at 10 cm from the pole of the mirror, the fixture of object needle mark reads
x em, and it's image appears to cover the whole aperture of the mirror. Now, when the object needle
is moved to y cm, it's inverted image coincides with it and parallax is removed, then the bench
correction (index cOlTection) can be expressed as (Given bench elTor is positive for object needle)
(i)x-lO (ii) y-20 (iii) x + 10 (iv) y + 20
Choose the CORRECT option.
(A) (i) and (ii) (B) Oi) and (iii) (C) (i) and (iv) (D) (iii) and (iv)

17. A student is experimenting with resonance tube apparatus in Physics lab to find the speed of sound at
room temperature. He got resonating lengths of air column as 17 cm and 51 em, using tuning fork of
frequency 512 Hz. Find speed of sound at room temperature andspecify, whether the side water
reservoir was moved upward or downward to obtain the second resonance (51 cm)?
(A) 348 mis, downwards (B) 348 mis, upwards
(C) 332 mIs, downwards (D) 332 mis, upwards
(
f 18. Accuracy and precision are (i) and these are respectively linked with eii)
" & (iii) .Fill the blanks above in correct order.
(
(A) (i) same, Oi) systematic error, (iii) random en'or
{

" (B) (i) different, (ii) systematic error (iii) random error
( (C) (i) same, (ii) random error, (iii) systematic error
( (D) (i) different, (ii)random error, (iii) systematic error

( ~
q. ,
:t 19~; The vernier of a circular scale is divided in to 30 divisions, which coincides with 29 main scale
( ~ ;j'

.i
divisions. If each main scale division is (112)°, the least count of the instrument is
( (A) 0.1' (B) I' (C) la' (D) 30'
(

(
I
':g 20.. When the gap is closed without placing any object in the screw gauge whose least count is 0.005 mm,
1
;1i
the 5tl1 di vision on its circular scale coincides with the reference line on main scale, and when a small
(

( f
1
sphere is placed reading on main scale advances by 4 divisions, whereas circular scale reading advances
by five times to the corresponding reading when no object was placed. There are 200 divisions on the
circular scale. The radius of the sphere is
C i
4.10 mm (B) 4.05 mm (C) 2.10 mm (D) 2.05 mm
~
(A)
{
'-.­ ~
....
~
c ] Ii.

t ~
t E----------------------~23r---------------------
c
JEE-physics

EXERCISE - JA

1. The edge of a cube is a =1.2 x 10-2 m. Then its volume will be recorded as : [JEE 2003]
(A) 1.7 x 10-6013 (B) 1.70 x 10-601 3
(C) 1.70 X 10-7 m3 , (D) 1.78 x 10-6 m3
2. In a vernier callipers, n divisions of its main scale match with (n + 1) divisions on its vernier scale.
Each division of the main scale is a units. Using the vernier plinciple, calculate its least count.
[JEE 2003]
3. A wire has a mass 0.3 ± 0.003 g, radius 0.5 ± 0.005 mm and length 6 ± 0.06 cm. The maximUI?
percentage error in the measurement of its density is [JEE 2004]
(A) 1 (B) 2 ' (C) 3 (D) 4

4. In a Searle's experiment, the diameter of the wire as measured by a screw gauge of least count
0.001 Col is 0.050 cm. The length, measured by a scale of least count 0.1 Col, is' 110.0 Col. When a
a
weight of 50 N is suspended from the wire, the extension is measured to be 0.125 em by micrometer
of least count 0.901 Col. Find the'maximum error in the measurement of Young's modulus of the
material of the wire from these data. . [JEE 2004]

5. The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and there are 100 divisions on the circular scale. While measuring
the diameter of a wire, the linear scale reads 1 mm and 471h division on the circular scale coincides
with the reference line. The length of the wire is 5.6 cm. Find the curved surface area (in cm 2) of the
wire in appropriate number of significant figures. [JEE 2004]
l
6. Draw the circuit for experimental verification of Ohm's law using a source of vatiable D.C. voltage, f
a main resistance of 100 n, two galvanometers and two resistances of values 106 Q and 1O-3 ,Q .1
respectively. Clearly show the positions of the voltmeter and the ammeter. [JEE 2004] ~ ! '

:r.... ~
!t:·:J ;!o

7. In a resonance column method, resonance occurs at two successive level of l[=30.7 cm ait &
i
,!
l2=63.2 em using a tuning fork of f =512 Hz. What is the maximum error in measuring speed of J
sound using relations v =fA. & A.' =2([2 -It) [JEE 2005] ~.
(A) 256 cm/sec (B) 92 em/sec ' (C) 128 cm/sec (D) 102.4 em/sec 1
tf

,
1
j
8. The side of a cube is measured by vernier callipers (10 divisions of a vernier scale coincide with ~
9 divisions of main scale, where 1 division of main scale is 1 mm). The main scale reads 10 mrr. and ., J
first division of vernier scale coincides with the main scale. Mass of the cube is 2.736 g. Find the ~

C.~I'·

density of the cube in appropriate significant figures. (JEE 2005] ~


~
~
24 ----,-E .(
'<J

? '.
\.../
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

9. Graph of position of image vs position of point object from a convex lens is shown. Then, focal
length of the lens is [JEE 2006]

31
vern
30

20

i;::.. . . .~ . . . . 1 1'0
:
: "" '\
u cm I""'!II', J i······
I ''',1

-31 -30 -20 -10 0 (-9, +9)

(A) 0.50 ± 0.05 cm (B),0.50 ± 0.10 cm (C) 5.00 ± 0.05 cm CD) 5.00 ± 0.10 cm
(
\. 10. The circular divisions of shown screw gauge are 50. It moves 0.5 mm on main scale in one rotation.
The diameter of the ball is [JEE 2006]
(

(
:j

CI
I

(' (A) 2.25 mm (B) 2.20 mm (C) 1.20 mm (D) 1.25 mm


..
'"'"

c f~ . . ( 74n21) l~lm and he commits an error of


C ! 11. A student performs an experiment for determination of g =
1~

C ~

6.l. For the experiment takes the time of n oscillations with the stop watch of least count 6.T and he
.~ commits a human errorofO.lsec. For which of the following data, the measurement of g will be most
C ~
1 accurate? [JEE 2006]
c ~

f-II 6.{ 6.T n Amplitude of oscillation

1 (A) 5mm 0.2 sec 10 5mm

C 1Il (B) 5mm 0.2 sec 20 5mm

C 1 (C) 5mm 0.1 sec 20 1mm

~
C j (D) 1mm 0.1 sec 50 Imm

'"6
~
0 ~w

C
') '§"
() E 2S
C
; ,
JEE-Physics
12. In an experiment to detelmine the focal length if; of a concave mirror by the u-v method, a student
places the object pin A on the principal axis at a distance x from the pole P. The student looks at the
, pin and its invelted image from a distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA. When the student
shifts his/her eye towards left, the image appears to the right of the object pin. Then, [JEE 2007]
(A) x <J (B)/< x < 2J (C) x = 2J (D) x > 2J

13. Some physical quantities are given in Column I and some possible SI units in which these quantities
may be expressed are given in Column II. Match the physical quantities in Column I with the units
in Column II and indicate your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 x 4 matrix given in
the ORS. [JEE 2007]
Column I Column II
(A) GMeMs (P) (volt) (coulomb) (metre)
0 - universal gravitational constant,
Me ­ mass of the earth,
Ms ­ mass of the Sun
3RT
(B) (Q) (kilogram) (metre)3 (secondt2
M
R - universal gas constant,

T - absolute temperature,

M- molar mass
~
F2
(R) (metre)2 (secondt2
,l
(C) q2B2

F-force,

l
q ~charge, ,~

B - magnetic field

OM

(D)
_ _e
(S) (farad) (volt)2 (kilogram)-I 1
Re

0 - universal gravitational constant,


1.5

'"
Me - mass of the earth, f
Re - radius of the earth
I
, "~:
j
~

14. A student performs an experiment to determine the Young's modulus ofI a wire,,exactly 2 m long,py ~
. " ,.
Searle's method. In a particular reading, the student measures the extension in the length of the wire, 1
to beO.8 mm with an uncertainty of ± 0.05 mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The student also me13st:i~~ ,
1>

the diameter of the wire to be 0.4 mm with an uncertainty of ± O.0 1 mm, "n1aKe ~:;; fh':.

:?
g = 9.8 mls 2 (exac.o. The Young's modulus obtained from the reading is (JE L'" ?~)f"','l
JJ:.J'J I :3"
_~.;

(A) (2.0 ± 0.3) x 10 11 N/m 2 (B) (2.0 ± 0.2) x 1011 N/m 2 3'"
(C)(2.0 ± 0.1) x 10" N/m2 (D) (2.0 ± 0.05) x 1011 N/m 2 !
~
2

,,,-,
II

Errors in Measurements & Instruments


15. Students I, II and III perfonn an experiment for measuring the acceleration due to gravity (g) 'using
pendulum. They use different lengths of the·pendulum and/or record time for different number of
oscillations. The observations are shown in the table. [.lEE 2008]
Least count for length = 0.1 cm Least count for time::: 0.1- s

Length of the Number of Total time for (n) Time


Student
/ Pendulum (em) osciJItions (n) oscillations (8) period (8)
\,

I 64.0 8 128.0 16.0


(
II 64.0 4 64.0 16.0
(
III ;20.0 4 i 36.0 9.0
I - ~-.----~ .....• ------

(
IfE,. En and Em are the percentage error in g. i.e.• ( :g x100) for students I. II and III. respectivel y,
{'

"
F
(A) ~::: 0 (B) EI is minimum (C) ~ ::: ~I (D) EI! is maximum
\,

16. A student uses a simple pendulum of exactly 1m length todetennine g, the acceleration due to gravity.
c He uses a stopwatch with the least count of 1 sec for this and records 40 seconds for 20 oscillations.
( For this observation, which of the following statement(s) is (are) true? [JEE 2010]
( (A) Error LlT in measuring T, the time period is 0.05 seconds

(B) Error ~T in measuring T, thetime period is 1 second
" (C) Percentage error in the detennination of g is 5%
( (D) Percentage error in the determination of g is 2.5%
r I 17. To verify.Ohm's law, a student is provided with a test resistor Rf' a high resistance R a small
'\..:
! resistance R2 , two identical galvanometers 0t and 0Z' and a variable voltage source V. The" correct
( circuit to carry out the experiment is ;- [JEE 2010J
(, '"'&.

(
'j
!~
~ .,,~ ~Gl~
( II!
~
RT R,
J I (A)
Rl R!
(B)
2
~j 1
E

~I
v v
J
J f
~{(
10
~ L·
~
w
;;
~
~ Rl RT
'" (C) (D)
()
(~
i
~
l!S
0
v
Rl

v
R,

cI E
27
c
lEE-Physics

18. A Vernier callipers has 1 mm marks on the main scale. It has 20 equal divisions on the Vernier scale
which match with 16 main scale divisions. For this Vernier calipers, the least count is [JEE 2010]
(A) 0.02 mm (B) 0.05 mm (C) 0.1 mm (D) 0.2 mm

19. A meter bridge is set-up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance 'X' using a standard 10 ohm
resistor. The galvanometer shows null point when tapping-key is at 52 cm mark. The end-con'ections
are 1 cm and 2 cm respectively for the ends A and B. The detennined value of 'X' is [JEE 2011]

x Ion

A B

(A) 10.2 ohm (B) 10.6 ohm (C) 10.8 ohm (D) 11.1 ohm

20. The density of a solid ball is to be determined in an experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured
, with a screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on the circular scale. The
reading on the main scale is 2.5 mm and,that on the circular scale is 20 divisions. If the measured mass
of the ball has a relative error of 2%, the relative percentage en'or in the density is [JEE 2011}
(A) 0.9% (B) 2.4% (C) 3.1 % (D) 4.2%

, ( 4MLg)
21. In the determination of Young's modulus Y = rced 2 by using Searle's method, a wire of length

L =2m and diameter d =0.5 mm is used. For a load M :::': 2.5 kg, an extension l =0.25 mm in
the length of the wire is,observed. Quantities d and) are measured using a screw gauge and a micrometer, }
respectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale 1 ,
is 100. The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y measurement !
(A) due to the errors in the measurements of d and I are the same. ",\ ...;
'ff'l

(B) due to the error in the measurement of d.is twice that due to the,error in the measurement of I.
(C) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that due to the e~or in the measurement of d. 1
(D) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times that due to 'the en'or in the measurement 1
of I.
I
[JEE 2012]
?

l
~

C'I;
22. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a Vernier callipers with no zero error. It is found that i

~~
the zero of the Vernier scale lies between 5.10 cm and 5.15 cm of the main scale. The Vernirr 1
scale has 50 divisioris equivalent to 2.45 cm. The 24th division of the Vernier scale excatly coincides ~
e
with one of the main scale divisions. The diameter of the cylinder is :-
,
[JEE 2013]

S
0

(A) 5.112 cm (B) 5.124 cm . j


(C) 5.136 cm (D) 5.148 cm ~ )1
~
<J',
28 E j.'
("

~d
Errors in Measurements & Instruments

23. Using the expression 2d sin e = A, one calculates the values of d by measuring the con'esponding
angles e in the range 0 to 90°, The wavelength A is exactly known and the error in e is constant for all
values of8. As 8 increases from 0°:- [JEE-Advance 2013]
(A) the absolute error in,d remains constant
(B) the absolute error irtd increases
'-:;
(C) the fractional en'or ind remains constant
(D) the fractional error in d decreases
24. The current voltage relation of diode is given by I =(elOOOVrr - 1) rnA, where the applied voltage V
is in volts and the temperature T is in degree Kelvin. If a student makes an error measuring ± 0.01 V
while measuring the cuiient of 5 rnA at 300 K, what will be error in the value of current in rnA ?
[JEE-Mains 2014]
(1) 0.5 inA (2) 0.05 rnA (3) 0.2 rnA (4) 0.02 rnA
25. A student measured the length of a rod and wrote it as 3.50 cm. Which instrument did he use to
measure it ? [JEE-Mains 2014]'
(1) A screw gauge having 100 divisions in the circular scale and pitch as 1 mm.
,,­ (2) A screw gauge having 50 divisions in the circular scale and pitch as 1 mm.
"
(3) A meter scale
(4) A vernier calliper where the 10 divisions in vernier scale matches with 9 division in main scale
and main scale has 10 divisions in 1 cm.
26. During Searle's experiment, zero of the Vernier scale lies between 3.20 x 10-2 m and 3.25 x 1O-2m of
th
the main scale. The 20 division of the Vernier scale exactly coincides with one of the main scale
" divisions. When an additional load of2 kg is applied to the wire, the zero of the Vernier scale still lies
2 2 tl1
between 3.20 x 10- m and3.25 x 10- m of the main scale but now the 45 division of Vernier scale
coincides with one of the main scale divisions. The length of the thin metallic wire is 2m and its cross­
(
5
\
sectional area is 8 x 10-7 m2• The least count of the Vernier scale is 1.0 x 10- m. The maximum
~ percentage en'or in the Young's modulus of the wire is. [JEE-Advance 2014]
j
-;;
"''­

...1
"
(
I
'- I
.5
/'
~

('
1iii
\.. i'
~

( 1
1
~
:i

~,
,::l '!,

(
'.; j
"
~

u.
«i
:!::
0
"'- z

'~,.,
t; 29
!
l,

,(
JEE-Physics

ANSWER KEY

1. (A) 3, (B) 3, (C) 4, (D) 4, (E) 3, (F) 5, (0) 2, (H) 4 10. CD,AB,EF
2. (A) 711, (B) 0.7, (C) 1.0 X 10 3, (D) 20.0 11. v == (3.4 ± 0.4) mls
3. (i) 0.4, Oi) 14 12. S == (1.2 ± 0.18) em
4. 3.07 em 13. =
Rs 15;0 n ± 2%, Rp =3.3 ~l ± 3%
S. =
(i) x -0.7 msd, (ii) 6, 1 14. 4.8 glem 3
15. 9%
_ {I-cose]
6. L.C. - 16. 14%,0.53
cos e
17. 5x118%
7. 2.84mm
18. B
8. =
RI 3.64 mm
9. 5.5 ±0.05 em


1. C 2. A 3. A,B,C 4. A S. A 6. B

7. D 8. A 9. A 10. A II. A 12. A

13. B 14. ·B 15. A 16. A 17. A 18. B

19. B 20. D

1. A 10. C
a 11. D
2. ­
n+l 12. B
3. D 13. (A) P, Q; (B) R, S; (C) R, S; (D) R, S ~
4. !::. y== 0.0245Y == 5.379 x 109 N/m2 14. A,B
t
i
~
15. B ~
/ "

S. 2.6 cm 2 (in two significant figures)


16. AC
..
.~

" -------~.::...c- Voltmeter . 1~

17. C a

EQ

,,
' .............. _...... -.- ... '
,,
18.
19.
D
B
~
~
.S

~
;::
$
'"
....
Vl

20. C if
~

6. .1 ~ ~,A.,L 2I. A -ll


~
22. B 1.
~
23. D :. i :l.

24. (3) ~.!l f


~
"\

7. D ~
25. (4) --~'"
8. 2.66 glcm 3 '2
26. 4 ~
9. C w
f8
8z

30

E
I CONTENTS""
Modern Physics-1
• Key-Concepts Formulae and Basic Theory 1
~;,

~. :
,!
-Exercise (S) Conceptual Subjective Problems 5
- Exercise (0-1) Single Correct MCQ's 8
• Exercise (0-2) Miscellaneous Type Problems 15
• Exercise (JM) Previous 10 years AlEEE Problems 24
- Ex~rcise (JA) Previous 10 years IIT-lEE Problems 29
- Answer Key 36
cl '':"i
~.
/ ...~~
~.:~
, '.
~ ~

( ~
c}
.~

.~
(~

,!
/

, -~
~

!ill
~~~
-
.... .. -..•. ~ ..

c
'~

Modern Physics-l

KEY CONCEPTS

1. CATHODE RAYS ,
(a)
Generated in a discharge tube in which a high vaccum is maititained -.
(b)
They are electrons accelerated by high potential difference ( 10 to 15 k Volt)
, 1 p2
K.E. of C.R. particle accelerated by a p,d. V is eV = '2 mv =-­
2
(c)
2m'
(d) Can be deflected by Electric & magnetic fields

_2. ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM :


Ordered arrangement oft~e big family ofelectro magnetic waves (EMW) either in ascending order
offrequencies or ofwave iengths. SpeedofE.M.W. in vacuum c =3 X 108 mls = v A

3. PLANK'S QUANTUM THEORY :


A beam ofEMW is a stream of discrete packets of energy called PHOTONS, each photon having a
frequency v and energy = E = h v . h = plank's constant =' 6.63 x 10,34 Js
red(7.6x to-7m) violet(3.6>< IO-7 m)

3>< 104 m 3><10- 12 111

. infrared
.
Radio waves

....,

'&

oE

Micro waves
):
--­
X-rays

gI (e.g. radar)
(' w
""
~

1E'
106 10 8 J 010 10 12 10 14
Frequency (Hz)
1020

\'
t
"1 4 . PHOTO ELECTRIC EFFECT
.£:
The phenomenon of the emission of electrons, when metals are exposed to light (of a certain
~
(
minimum frequency) is called photo electric effect.
/ .-8­ Results:
"
(
\.., .'
t
~
ttl
;?'
(0
(ii)
Can be explained only on the basis of the quantum theory (concept of photon).
Electrons 'are emitted if the incident light has frequency v;;:: Vo (threshold frequency). Emission
of electrons is independent of intensity. The wave length corresponding to Vo is called threshold
wave length "0' .
J
~
(iii) Vo is different for different metals.

(
(iv) Number of electrons emitted per second depends on the intensity of the incident light,
\.

J
1Q:
(v) EINSTEIN'S PHOTO ELECTRIC EQUATION :
Photon energy = K. E. of electron + work function . h v =(l/2)mv2 + ~

§
~= Work function = energy needed by the electron in freeing itself from the atoms of the metal.

!
\.
.
'j
~= h Vo
E 1
I
~
)
(
JEE-Physics

(vi) STOPPING POTENTIAL OR CUT OFF POTENTIAL


The minimum value of the retarding potential to prevent electron emission is :
eVcutolT (KE) max =
Note: The number of photons incident on a surface per unit time is called photon flux.

S. WAVE NATURE OF MATTER:


Beams of electrons and other forms ofmatter exhibit wave properties including interference and

diffractio~ with a de Broglie wavelength given by').. =.!::p (wavelength of a praticle) .


.
6.. ATOMIC MODELS :
(a) THOMSON MODEL : (PLUM PUDDING MODEL)
(i) Most of the mass and all the positive charge of an atom is uniformly distributed over the full
size of atom (lO·IO m ) .

. (ii) Electrons are studded in this uniform distribution.

(iii) . Failed to explain the large angle scattering a - particle scattered by thin foils of matter.

(b) RUTHERFORD MODEL :' ( Nuclear Model)


(i) The most of the mass and all the positive charge is concentrated within a size of 10- 14 m

inside the atom. This concentration is called the atomic nucleus .

(ii) The electron revolves around the nucleus under electric interaction between them in circular orbits.
(iii) An a'ccelerating charge radiates the nucleus spiralling inward and finally fall into the nucleus,
which. does not happen in an atom. This could not be explainedI by this model.

(c) BOHR ATOMIC MODEL !


Bohr adopted Rutherford model of the atom & added some arbitrary conditions. These conditions are
known as his postulates :
. mv2 kZe 2
(i) The electron in a stable orbit does not radiate energy. i.e. --=--2­
. r r
tgo
(li) A stable orbit is that in which the angular momentum of the electron about nucleus w
'"
. h
=n '--2hK. ; n =1,2, 3, .......(n :;<: 0). .~ 'oj

is an integral (n) multiple of -2 . i.e. mvr' 1­"­


. ,K

j
\ ..... '"

(ill) The electron can absorb or radiate energy only if the electron jumps from it lower
(' .:
to a 'higher orbit or falls from a hrgher to a lower orbit .
Vl
(iv) The energy emitted or absorbed is a light photon of frequency v and of energy
E =
bv
i
....::

FOR HYDROGEN ATOM : (Z = atomic number ~ 1).

(i) L = angular momentum i~ the nth orbit = n.-!:.


f
~
/" ~

n . . 21t 5­
(ii) rn =radius of nth circular orbit ~ (0.529 A) n2 ; (lA. =1O. 'Om); rn ex: n2. ~
. - 13.6 eV 1 ~
i~
(ill) E Energy of the electron in the nth orbit = 2 i.e, E oC"2 .
n n n n
- :l
'i Note: Total energy of the electron in an atom is negative, indicating that it is bound.
13.6 eV
Binding Energy (BE)n = - En = n2
.' . ---------------2-.-------------- E

(
'-/
Modern Physics- 1

(iv) Enl - En, = Energy emitted when an electron jumps from n2th orbit to nt orbit (n 2
> n 1) •

1 1 ,]
ilE = (13.6
,
eV) [
n)
-2 - -2
»2 .

ilE = hv; v = frequency of spectral line emitted .

-1 = wave no. [ no.' of


~
waves in unit length. (lm)] = R [ _1___' - ]
, 2 2
.
fI, , . " n) n2

Where R= Rydberg's constant, for hydrogen = 1.097 x 10 7


m-I .

(v) Foi:- hydrogen like atom/species of atomic number Z :


. 2 Zi'
. • n
r nx =. Bohr ZradIUs n2 = (0.529 A) _Z E = (- 13.6) - 2 eV
nz n
R z = RZ2 - Rydberg's constant for element of atomic no. Z .
Note: If motion of the nucleus is also considered, then m is replaced by Jl .
Where Jl= reduced mass of electron - nucleus system mM/(m+M) . =
, . ' 2 P
In this case En = (-13.6.eV) ~.-;;;
, . n2 e

7. SPECTRAL SERIES :
(i) Lyman Series : (Landing orbit n = 1) .

Ultraviolet region v= R [+__ I n2


1_
2
] ; n2 > 1

(ii) Balmer Series: (Landing orbit n = 2)


"""~ "~?
'iii
'8. , Visible region V=R[_I__11 ; n2 > 2
i
,-
22 n 2
2
~ (iii) Paschan Series : (Landing orbit n = 3)
1-
[+- ~l
, Q.
(

" In the near infrared region V = R ; n2 >3

("
'-

/
\..
1
11
1
(iv)
. ,

~n the mid
"
.Bracket Series : (Landing orbit n = 4)

infrared region v = R[~


3

-~l
n2

; n2 >4
l' . 4 n2

1ll:l
(v) Pfund Series : (Landing orbit n = 5)

~
:.2 In far infrared region V::R[_I__
n
I] 52 2
; n2 > 5
"G; 2
~ In all these series n2 ' = n l + 1 is the a line,

! '. . =
n) + 2 is the ~ line
=
n l + 3 is the y line ..... etc. where n 1 =Landing orbit

~
\.,

E ,3
JEE-Physics

8. EXCITATION POTENTIAL OF ATOM

EIJ-t E11,
Excitation potential for quantum jump fro~l n l ----7 n 2 = electr~n charge

9. IONIZA TION ENERGY :

The energy required to remove an electron from an atom. The energy required to ionize hydrogen

=
atom is 0 - (- 13.6) 13.6 eV.
=
IO. IONIZATION POTENTIAL:

Potential difference through which a free electron is moved to gain ionization energy

-E n

= electronic charge

11. X· RAYS :
(i) Short wavelength (0.1 A.to 1 A) electromagnetic radiation .
(ii) Are produced when a metal anode is bombarded by very high energy electrons .
(iii) Are not affected by electric and magnetic field . ~ .
k,,- ~p.Characterislic Spectrum
(iv) They cause photoelectric emission.

Characteristics equation eV =hVm


. e = electr~n charge .I

V = accelerating potential
v m ;:.:: maximum frequency of X - radiation A

(v) Intensity of X - rays depends on number of electrons hitting the target . ,',
(vi) Cut-off wavelength or minimum wavelength, where V (in v~lts) is the p.d. applied to the
'\ 12400 AO
tu be ""min - • V>
'8.
V ci>
c
(\'ii) Continuous spectrum due to retardation of electrons. UJ

'"
(viii) Characteristic Spectrum due to transition of electron from higher to lower ,~
~
V = a (Z - b)2 [MOSELEY'S LAW] .r:::
"-

=
b 1 for k transition .
E

Note:
(I)
(l

Binding energy = - [Total Mechanical Energy]


)
'"
.1:
(ii) Velocity of electron in nth orbit for hydrogen atom == _c_
. 137n
c =speed of light. "­
~
]
1 . 2( 1 11 '"
(iii) For X - rays ? = R(Z -b) l-2 - -2) 1
..g
Il. nl
n2 !'UJS.
(iv) Series limit means minimum wave length of that series~
IJJ
/0
15
:.::
'"V>
0
N
'"
~
'"
@
'<l
w
8z

~.------------------------~-------------------------------------------------------------------------
4
E
Modern Physics-1

EXERCISE (S)

1. In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of the cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident
light is found to be 4.12 x 10- 15 V s. Calculate the value of Planck's constant.
2. A WOW sodium lamp radiates energy uniformly in all directions. The lamp is located at the centre of
a large sphere that absorbs all the sodium light which is incident on it. The wavelength of the sodium
light is 589 nm. (a) What is the energy per photon associated with the sodium light? (b) At what rate
are the photons delivereq to the sphere?
3. Estimating the following two numbers should be interesting. The first number will tell you why radio
engineers do not need to worry much about photons! The second number tells you why our eye can
never 'count photons', even in barely detectable light.
(a) The number of photons emitted per second by a Medium wave transmitter of 10 kW power,
emitting radiowaves of wavelength 500 m.
(b) The number of photons entering the pupil of our eye per second corresponding to the minimum
intensity of white light that we humans can perceive (-10- 10 W m-2). Take the area of the pupil to
be about 0.4 cm 2, aQd the average frequency of white light to be about 6 x 10 14 Hz.
4. 663 mW of light from a 540 nm source is incident on the surface of a metal. If only 1 of each 5 x 109
incident photons is absorbed and causes an electron to be ejected from the surface, the total photocurrent
in the Circuit is ____.
" .
~ 5. Light of wavelength 330 nm fal Iing on a piece of metal ejects electrons wi th sufficient energy which
o g.
!!:l requires voltage V0 to prevent a electron from reading collector. In the same setup, light of wavelength
~

.!.! 220 nm, ejects electrons which require twice the voltage V0 to stop them in reaching a collector. Find

r
~ 0­
the numerical val ue of voltage Yo'

j , (Take plank's constant,'h =6.6 x 10-34 Js and 1 eV =1.6 x 10- 19 J)

(
~ 6.
cf
..,...
When a m9nbchromatic point source of light is at a distance of 0.2 m from a photoelectric cell, the cut
" ~ off voltage and the saturation current are respectively 0.6 volt and 18.0 rnA. If the same source is
(
\"
i c:
placed 0.6 m away from the photoelectric cell, then find
(a) the stopping potential (b) the saturation current
i
~ A small lOW source of ultraviolet light ofwayelength 99 nm is held at a distance 0.1 m from a metal
-S 7.
l..:
;;::; surface. The radius of an atom ofthe metal is approximately 0.05 nm. Find
(
~
..,...
.9 (i) the average number of photons striking an atom per second .

.::::.
!;!:!.
(ii) the number ofphotoelectrons emitted,perunit area persecond iftheefficiency ofliberation ofphotoelectrons
>0
is 1%. ~
§ H

E 5
(
, ~~ t,
f
~
JEE~Physics

8. The surface ofcesium is illuminated with monochromatic light of various wavelengths and the stopping
potentials for the wav.elengths are measured. The results of this experiment is plotted as. shown in the
figure. Estimate the value of work function of the cesium and Planck's constant.

.5 1.0 1.5 v"10 15 Hz

9. Light of intensity 10-5 W m-1 falls on a sodium photo-cell of surface area 2 cm 2• Assuming that the top
Slayers of sodium absorb the incident energy, estimate time required for photoeiectlic emission in the
wave-picture of radiation. The work function for the metal is given to be about 2 eV. What is the
implication of your answer?

10. When photons of energy 4.2Se V strike the surface of a metal A, the ejected photoelectrons have
maximum kinetic energy Ta eV and de Broglie wavelength Aa' The maximum kinetic energy of
photoelectrons liberated from another metal B by photons of energy 4.7e V is T b=(Ta - 1.5) eV. If
the De Broglie wavelength of these photoelectrons is Ab =2Aa' then find
(a) The work function of a (b) The work function of b is (c) Ta and Tb

11. An electron of mass "m" and charge "e" initially at rest gets accelerated by a constant electric field E.

The rate of change of DeBroglie wavelength of this electron at time t is ................ .

12.. Assume that a particle cannot be confined to a spherical volume of diameter less then De-broglie

wavelength of the particle. Estimate the min'imum kinetic energy a proton confined to a nucleus of

diameter 10- 14 m may have. .

13. An electron joins a helium nucleus to form a He+ ion in ground state. The wavelength of the photon
emitted in this process if the electron is assumed to have had no kinetic energy when it combines with
nucleus is ......... mrl. .,.,
'8.
14. Determine the number of lines in Paschen series which have a wavelength greater than 1000 nm. $
15. Three energy levels of an atom are shown in the figure. The wavelength corresponding to three
1
~. r··

possible transition are AI' A2 and A3. The value of A3 in terms of Ai and A2 is given by ~
. /

~ n=3 J
E,' 1 1 ."'
~ ~
.
t
]
/
E(· n= I 1i
g
16. A single electron orbits a stationary nucleus of charge Ze where Z is a constant and e is the electronic ~
.charge. It requires 47.2eV to excite the electron from the 2nd Bohr orbit to 3rdBohr orbit. Find .W
(i) the value of Z, j
(ii) energy reqUired to excite the electron from the third to the fourth orbit S
(iii) the wavelength of radi ation required to remove the electron from the first orbit to infinity ~
(iv) the kinetic
.
energy, potential energy and angular momentum in the first Bohr orbit 2w
(v) the radius of the first Bohr orbit. .. '. ~
"" .8:z

-----------------~6;_--------------~E
('
\)
P'tP'" i!tWmrMi.ii\~;i/¢i t

17. A hydrogen like atom (atomic numberZ) is in higher excited state of quantum number n. This excited
atom can make a transition to the first excited state by sllccessively emitting two photons of energy
22.95eV and 5.15eV respectively. Alternatively. the atom from the same excited state can make
transition to the second excited state by successively emitting two photons of energies 2.4eV and
8.7eV respectively. Find the values ofn and Z ..

18. . Which level of the doubly ionized lithium has the same energy as the gr9und state energy of the
hydrogen atom. Findtne ratio of the two radii of corresponding orbits.

19. Obtain a relation between the frequencies of Ka' KJj and La lines for a target material.

20. A 20 keY energy electron is brought to rest in an X-ray tube, by undergoing two slIccessive
bremsstrahIi ng events, thus emitting two photons. The wavelength or the second photon is 130 x 1(J12 m
greater than the wavelength of the first emitted photon. Calculate the wavelengths of the two
photons.

21. . Figure shows Ka & !<Jj X-rays along with continuous X-ray. Find the energy of La X-ray.
(Use hc = 12420 evA). .

22. Photoelectrons are emitted when 400 nm radiation is incident on a surface of work function 1.geV.
These photoelectrons pass through a region containing a-particles. A maximum energy electron
combines with an a':particle to form a He+ ion, emitting a single photon in this process. He+ ions thus
formed are in their fourth excited state. Find the energies in e V of the photons, 'lying in the 2 to 4e V
range, that are likely to be emitted during and after the combination. [Take, h::: 4.14 x 10- 15 eV-s ]
V"l
'R
t
./

.~ 23 .
1- The wavelength ofKo: X-ray of tungsten is 21.3 pm. It takes 11.3 keY to knock out an electron from

E the L shell of a tungsten atom. What should be the minimum accelerating voltage across an X~ray
'1] tube having tungsten target which allows production of Ka X-ray.
Vi
~
Q..
" ,

ii 24. An electron, in a hydrogen like atom, is in an excited state. It has a total energy of - 3.4 eV.
.]
/ Calcualte: (i) The kinetic energy & (ii) The De-Broglie wavelength of the electron. (iii) What is the
=g
~ potential energy of the electron in this state? (iv) Which of the answers above would change if the
i '
LU
LU
choice of the zero of potential energy is changed?
{
\._,
j
tn 25. A potential difference0f 20 kV is applied across an X-ray tube. The minimum wave length of
~ i

, '0 X - rays generated is _!,.:..,".._ __


~~
~
:;!

E 7

.{.~

JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-1)

'Q./
~""
The Andromeda Nebula, at a distance of2 x 1022 m from the Earth, radiates 8 x 1027 W in the spectral
//"
line of frequency 1420:.MHz. The number of photons received per second when the nebula is observed
by a radio telescope of collectitlg area 100 m2, is
(A) 1.7 x 108 (B) 1.7 x 105 (C) 3.4 X 102 . (D) None of these

2. Let nr and nb be respectively the number of photons emitted by a red bulb and a blue bulb of equal ,
power in a given time.
(A) n f nb = (B) nr < nb I ~9)n f
........--
> nb
(D) data insufficient
'j

/"
3, 10-3 W of 5000 A light is directed on a photoelectric cell. If the current in the cell is 0.16 !:lA, the .­
/'
percentage of incident photons which produce photoelectrons, is
(A) 0.4% (B) .04% .(C) 20% (D) 10%
\

4. In a photo-emissive cell, with exciting wavelength lv, the maximum kinetic,energy of electron is K.
31v
If the exciting wavelength is changed to ""'4 the kinetic energy of the fastest emitted electron will be:
(A) 3KJ4 (B) 4KJ3 (C) less than 4KJ3 (D) greater than 4K13

5. If the frequency of light in a photoelectric experiment is doubled, the stopping potential will <t')

• /\""'(A) be doubled " . 0 " " " ( B ) halved l:


().J{~r: r,#~. (C) become more than doubled
'\""
• , __,.... c..../'
iJ-\....
• I•
(D) become less than double ~(-,
t;!\
..Jf::

/
. " ,,,,'
. v .
,
. "
Q..
5r '
") ~~[ . The maximum kinetic energy ~otoelectrons emitted from a surface when photons Of energy 6 eV ]'.,
(,:;) fall on.it is 4 eV. The stopping ~entia(in Volts is . ' • J(.'
.. /

. (a) 2 /-(6) 4
..,,/
(c) 6 . (d) 10 ?r ~'/

7.
l
The stopping potential for the photo electrons emitted from ~ metal surface of work function 1.7 eV 1"~
is 10.4 V. Identify the energy levels corresponding to the transitions in hydrogen atom which will i.e
result in emission of wavelength equal to that of incident radiation for the abov~ photoelectric e~fect ~C.

/
fAy-ii =3 to 1 (B) n =3 to 2 (C) n =2 to 1. (D) n =4 to 1 ~ i
5't'IC'",/'

,.
' .

8,) Wh:n a photon of light collides with a metal surface, nu:n~e: of electrons,(if any) ~oming ou.t is 1(:1
(jz
/:"';~P\J )A} only one
. .
(B) only two . (C) InfInite (D) depends upon factors i (J
§
C,._/ c·
,,' . " '.
' L
.- .',
rc
. ':, «I
;
,/ -,
1'7
./ 1 '
:;".,1
8 Ei
Ai."rlarn Phvs ics· 1
Modern Physics-l
::},
, '·l

9. The frequency and the intensity of a beam of light falling on the surface of photo eJectric material are
increased by a factor of two. Treating efficiency of photoelectron generation as constant, this will:
(A) increase the maximum energy of the photoelectrons, as well as photoelectric current by a factor of
two.
-",'r(B)increase the m~ximum kinetic energy ofthe photo electrons and would increase the photoelectric
current by a factor of two.
,.,Aenncrease the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons by a factor of greater than two and
will have no effect on the magnitude of photoelectric current produced.
(D) not produce any effect on the kinetic energy of the emitted electrons but will increase the
photoelectric current by a factor of two.

10. A point source of light is used in a photoelectric effect. If the source is removed farther from the
emitting metal, the stopping potential:
(A) will increase (B) will decrease
~rremain constant ' ' (D) will eitherincrease or decrease.

,~). point source causes photoelectric effect from a small metal plate. Which of the following curves
",._,./ may represent the saturation photocurrent as a function of the' distance between the source and the
metal?
J I I

l=,.b,~, ~,
_____tE»
(A) (B) (C)

~in a photoelectric experiment, the potential difference V that must be maintained between the

vt2i
, ~ illuminated surface and the collector so as just to prevent any electron from reaching the collector is
.t
/
determined for d~fferent frequencies f of the incident illumination. The graph obtained is shown. The
( ,

~ maximum kinetic energy of the electrons emitted at frequency fl is '


1­":: VI v, ................... .

( '~-

(
j (A) hfI (B) (f\ - fo) 1
l ' 0 'f
~ (C)h(f1-fo) (D)eV1(f1-fo) , -fo fl

(
tID
-Y ,'
Radiation oftwo photon energies twice and five times the work function of metal are incident sucessively
on the metal surface. The ratio of the maximum velocity of photoelectrons emitted in the two cases will
( 1 be

I
'-. '

1 (A) 1 :2 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 4 (D) 4: 1


'L I±l
:?o ,
~ 14. Cut off potentials for a metal in photoelectric effect for light of wavelength All A2 and A3 is found to
( .;:;
o
N: be VI' V2 and V3 volts if VI' V2 and V3 are in Arithmetic Progression and AI' A2 and A3 will be:
f /
\.. ~' (A) Arithmetic Progression (B) Geometric Progression
~ Jerffa~onic Progression, (D) None

~
"
E 9 \,
JEE·Physics 6,.- (

15. Photons with energy 5 e V are incident on a cathode C , on a photoelectric cell. The maxi mum energy
of the emitted photoelectrons is 2 eV. When photons of energy 6 e V are incident on C, no photoelectrons
will reach the anode A if the stopping potential of A relative to C is
. (A)3V .~_(tn"-3V \,;,/1 (C)-IV (D)4V.

,@ In a photoelectric experiment, the collector plate is at 2.0V with respect to the emitter pI ate m.ade of
'-~ . copper <p = 4.5eV. The emitter is illuminated by a source of monochromatic light of wavelength
200nm.
(A) The minimum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons reaching the collectoris O.
'1' ( ~) The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons reaching the collector is 3.7eV.
'" (C) lfthe polarity of the battery is reversed then answer to part A will be O.
(0) If the polarity of the battery is reversed then answer to part B ~ill be 1.7eV.

17. By increasing the intensity of incident light keeping frequency (v >v o) fixed on the surface of metal
(A) kinetic energy of the photoelectrons increases 'v'-"'b

......-(B) number of emitted electrons increases ___ .~ t, ".


Y
.r" ~;i'f " \"-"

(C) kinetic energy arid number of electr~ns increases .-'... ,


(D) no effect

18. In a photoelectric experiment, electrons are ejected from metals X and Y by light of intensity I anq
frequency' f. The potential difference V required to stop the electrons is measured for various
frequencies. If Yhas a greater work function than X ; which one of the following graphs best ill ustrates
the expected results?
.
"./'/
'
,,(A) vl2Z
0
x
Y
f
(B) Vi 7' y
OLef
(C)'vLL
o
y
f
(D) vLk.
o
x
f
:a
~ . t
(' (' 19.\ An image of the sun is formed by a lens of focal-length of 30 cm on the metal sUlface of a photo- ~
" electric ceJ1 and a photo-electric current I is produced. The lens forming the i~age is then replaced by I
another of the same diameter but.offocallength 15 em. The photo-electric current in this case is 1
(A) IJ2 (B) I (C) 21 (D) 41 1l ..I:;

~'
(20. 'Monochromatic light with a frequency well above the cutoff frequency is incident on the emitter in a ~
~

.....__ ) photoelectric effect apparatus. The frequency of the light is then doubled while the intensity is kept 4
constant. How does this affect the photoelectric current? _,fir- ' , J
(A) The photoelectric current will increase. ~he photoelectric current will decrease. ~
(C) The photoelectric current will remain the same. (D) None of these ~ ( ..
l><: "-'
. ' . 1 ~
21. In the experiment on photoelectric effect using light having frequency greater than the thre,shoJd .!5
frequency, the photocurrent will certainly increase when ~
, . /

(A) Anode voltage is increased /(B) Area of cathode surface is increased ~

.
j.e)"Intensity of incident
,
light
.
is increased (D) Distance
,.
between anode

and cathode is increased. 8z
10 E

i~,
{ .;
'.t:'.'!
,.:' I,) "1-1...
,._.~ Ci -\ "1, --~
0::...... Modern Phys ;cs-1
-~

22. If a parallel beam of light having intensity I is incident normally on a perfectly reflecting surface, the
force exerted on the surface, equalsF. When the sUrfa4e is held at an angle
\
e, the force is
(A) 2F tan e (B) F cos e (CYF cos2 e CD) 2F
,23~: A proton and an electron are accelerated by same potential
.
difference have.de-Broglie wavelength A
P
. \a,nd Ae' .}:l C. . .
=
(A) Ae Ap ~'?I (B) Ae < Ap ,.~(C) Ae > Ap (D) none of these.

6 An electron with initial kinetic energy of 100 eV is accelerating through a potential difference of
50 V. Now the de-Broglie wavelength of electron becomes -""l "'iV'" .~ "t.,! :;:; i
\".~A Jf-v'1.5 A (C) .J3 A f .,/' (D) 12.27 A"-'1.:,'. ~"
·25J If h is Planck's constant is SI system, the momentum of a photon of wavelength 0.0 1 Ais:
.'- (A) 10-2 h (B) h (C) 1q2 h (D) 10 12 h

26. Let KI be the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted by a light of wavelength AI and K2
)correspondin g to A2. If A) = 2A2 ' then:
r 1

~ -,' K2
\'\ (A) 2K) =K2 . (B) K, =2K2 ~ (C) K\ < 2 CD) K j > 2K2
127) Imagine a Young's double slit intelference experiment performed with waves associated with fast
~j moving electrons produced from an electron gun. The distance between successive maxima will
decrease maximum if
(A) the accelerating voltage in the electron gun is decreased
(B) the accelerating voltage is increased and the distance of the screen from the slits is decreased
(C) the distance of the screen from the slits is increased.
(D) the distance between the slits is decreased.

2~\ In a hypothetical system a particle of mass m and charge -3q is moving around a very heavy particle
(k..
" ..•. :having charge q. Assuming Bohr's model to be true to this system, the orbital velocity of mass m
1 $' ,when it is nearest to heavy particle is V -; ,~~~~:~ '.. .~~h . .~ r~J','.~.
. ~ .., 3q2 3q2 3q 'I''''' ~"]q l:l;, \~.~,.:~~::
!, j
~
...-/~A) 260h CB) 460h (C) 2E h
O .
CD) 4f:oh >,1.,(..

~ de-Broglie wavelength of an electron in the nth Bohr orbit is An and the angular momentum is I n•
m then:
.:f
. ""
.--::
:',';
.
]
/'
(A) Jn 0:: An (B) An 0:: Jn (C) An 0:: J~ (D) none of these

13.0.", Light comi ng from a discharge tube filled wi th hydrogen falls on the cathode of the photoelectric cell.
1(1l The work function of the surface of cathode is 4eV. Which one of the following values of the anode
{ ~. . voltage (in Volts) witli respect to the cathode will likely to make the photo current zero.
Ie
~ (A) - 4 (B) - 6 (C) - 8 (D) - ~
( R ". . 3h v
~ 31. The angular momentum of an el~C'fron in the hydrogenatom is 2n' Here h is Planck's constant. The
C o
g kinetic energy of this electron!,S:

" ~ (A) 4.53 eV


~
(BY1.51 eV (C) 3.4 eV (D) 6.8 eV

E 11

-\..~~
;;:.t,
JEE-Phys;cs ~ _(l..~v'L-)
-:::..
":::. "
32. Consider the following electronic energy level diagram of H-atom: Photons associated with shortest
and longest wavelengths would be emitted from the atom by the transitions labelled:
---------..-n "'co
A
--.--..------..If'-n '" 4
! I"" 0=3
B
J1·9 ~
!

------n=1
'f
n=2
J I o·l.. ((.v' }, .,
t.
).""
, './ , ....
~ l i2 :"~J

, k (A) D and C respectively (B) C and A respectively


.,
I'"
(::'~I«&')"C and D respectively . . (D) A and C respectively
''7' 33~/ In a hydrogen atom, the binding energy of the electron in the nth state is En' then the frquenty .of
t.' revolution of the electron in the nth orbits is:
..JA1'2En Inh (B) 2Enn/h (C) Einh (D) Enn/h

,"'-:34~ the electron in a hydrogen atom were in the energy level with n =3, how much energy in j~\lle
~~ould be required to ionise the atom? (Ionisation energy ofH-atom is 2.18 x 1O- 18J):
, :,;,' (A) 6.54 x 10- 19 . (B) 1.43 x 10- 19
(Ct2A2 X 10- 19 (D) 3.14 x 10-20
/~." ", /0"
(3~In hydrogen and hydrogen like atoms, the ratio of difference of energies E4n-E2n and E2n-En varies
ith its atomic numberZ and n as:
, / (A) Z 2 /n 2 . (B) Z 4/n 4 . (C) Z 1 n (D) ZO nO
.. . ,.,..
", ,~;., ' ...-"" "

, 36, a hydrogen atom, the el~ctron is in nth excited state. It may come down to second excited state by
rh
. 'emitting ten different wavelengths. What is the value ofn: .
""""'Y) 6 (B)7 (C) 8 (D) 5

37. Difference between nth and (n +l)th Bohr's radius of 'H' atom is equal to it's (n-1)th Bohr's radius.
The value of n is:
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 . i V'}
;'&,
38. An electron in, hydrogen atom after absorbing energy photons can jump between energy states nI and t
nin2> n l ). Then it may return to ground state after emitting six different wavelengths in emission i
spectrum. The energy of emitted photons is either equal to, less than or greater than the absorbed ~ .
photons. Then n I and n2 are: . 1
(A)n 2 =4,n 1 =3 (B)n 2 =5,n 1 =3 (C)n 2 =4,n l =2 (D)n 2 =4,n,=1 J-s:..
1f
. . <
39. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes transition from M shell to L. The ratio of magnitudes of initial 1
to final centripetal acceleration of the electron is i
(A)9:4 (B)81:16 (C)4:9 (D)16:81 i c:

~
40. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition n l n2 whose n l and n2 are the principal ~
-7
("

\.
",

. /
quantum numbers of the two states. Assume the Bohr model to be valid. The frequency of orbital ~
motion of the electron in the initi al state is 1127 of that in the final state. The possible values of n I and ~
. /

"2 are ~

(A) n l =4, n2 =2 (B) n l =3, n2'= 1 (C) n 1 =8, n2 =1 (D) n 1 =6, n2 = 3


~
••
12 E \.
'.

(
Modern Physics-1

41. The radius of Bohr's first orbit i~ ao' The electron in nth orbit has a radius:
(A) nao (B) aJn (C) n2ao (D) aJn 2

42. The ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 volt. The energy required to remove an electron
from the second orbit of hydrogen is:
(A) 3.4 eV (B) 6.8 eV (C) 13.6 eV (D) 27.2 eV

43. Electron in a hydroge~ atom is replaced by an identically charged particle muon with mass 207 times
that of electron. Now the radius of K shell will be
(A) 2.56 x 10-3 A (B) 109.7 A (C) 1.21 X 10-3 A (D) 22174.4 A
4~. Monochromatic radiatjon of wavelength A is incident on a hydrogen sample containing in ground
state. Hydrogen atoms absorb the light and subsequently emit radiations of ten different wavelengths.
The value of Ais
;.:,

r (A) 95 nm (B) 103 nm (C) 73 nm (D) 88 nm

( 45. An electron collides with a fixed hydrogen atom in its ground state. Hydrogen atom gets excited and
the colliding electron loses all its kinetic energy. Consequently the hydrogen atom may emit a photon
corresponding to the largest wavelength of the Balmer series. The min. K.E.of colliding electron will
be
(A) 10.2 eV (B) 1.9 eV . (C) 12.1 eV (D) 13.6 eV

46. The frequency of revolution of electron in nth Bohr orbit is v n' The graph between log nand
log (vn I VI) may be

• g>
:a '"'
,...,
,..., ,,".

!!:! .?:
~
.(
~ .?: i"".:
(- '0
(A) 1 (B) 1 (D) j ~r:...---l-og-n-..•
(
-I
"
(
."
ii 47.
logn logn

= =
Consider the spectral line resulting from the transition n 2 ~ n 1 in the atoms and ions given
'-"
<I)

/'. -;:., below. The shortest wavelength is produced by :


~.Jl
'--
(A) hydrogen atom (B) deuterium atom
(C) singly ionized helium (D) doubly ionized lithium
148.
~ In an atom, two electrons move around the nucleus in circular orbits of radii Rand 4R. The ratio of
~. . .
iti the time taken by them to complete one revolution is: (neglect electric interaction)

~ (A) 1 : 4 . (B)4: 1 . (C) 1 : 8 . (D) 8; 1 .

, ~~e electron in hydrogen atom ina sample is.in~"excited state, then the number of different spectrum
~ I~; obtained in its emission spectrum will be ~
'; ~

",", 8 \l +\
~ jA) 1 + 2 + 3 + .......... +(n - 1) . . ~ + 2 + 3 + ....................+ (n )
8z
(C) 1 + 2 + 3 + .......... +(n + 1) (D) 1 x 2 x 3 x ................... x (n - 1) :t,'

.;

(
E 13
"-'
,.
1..

E
lEE-Physics

SO. The total energy of a hydrogen atom in its ground state is -13.6e V. If the pOlential energy in the first

excited state is taken as zero then the total energy in the ground state will be :

(A) -3.4eV (B) 3.4 eV (C) - 6.8eV (D) 6:8eV


51. The magnitude of angular momentum, orbit radius and frequency of revolution of electron in hydrogen
atom corresponding to quantum number n are L, rand f respectively. Then according to Bohr's
theory of hydrogen atom,
(A) fr2L is constant for all orbits (B) frL is constant for all orbits
(C) f2rL is constant for all orbits (D) frL2 is constant for all orbits
52. Radius of the secorid Bohr obit of singly ionised helium atom is
(A) 0.53 A (B) 1.06 A . (C) 0.265 A (D) 0.132 A
53. An electron in Bohr's hydrogen atom has an energy of -3.4 eV. The angular momentum of the electron

is

(A) h / n (B) h / 2n
(C) nh / 2n ( n is an integer) (D) 2h /1t
54. In a characteristic X- ray spectra of some atom superimposed '"1:

on continuous X- ray spectra: ;!~."

(A) P represents Ka line ~


.~

(B) Q represents K" line -.;


~

(C) Q andP represents KCt and K" lines respectively


(D) Relative positions ofKa and KIl depend on the particular atom
,<
55. Which of (he following wavelength falls in a X-ray region? "

(A) 10,000 A (B) 1000 A (C) 1 A (D) 10-2 A


Sli. The penetrating power of X-ray increases with the i
(A) Increa8~> of its velocity (B) Increase in its intensity
(C) Decrease in its velocity (D) Increases in its frequency.

''{'he wavelength of the Ka line for an element of atomic number 57 is o.. What is the wavelength of the %.
K . line for the element of atomic number 29?
\J~
E P~ /'

(1\) a (B) 20. . (C) 40.' (D) 8a ~ .. ~.•

V
1-, j~:
lil
.... ~)" If the frequencies of Ko:, K~ and La X-rays for a material vKa ' v Kfl ' vLa respectively, then "­

(A) vKa =vKf) + vLa (B) vLo. =vKa. + vKp (C) vKp =vKa + V La. (D) none of lhese ji
1l . ~

'05 .~ .

59. .in X-ray tube, when the accelerating voltage V is doubJed, the difference between the wavelength of? ~.
}(:f. line and the minimum cut off ofcontinuous X-ray spectrum: ~. i
(A) remains constant (B) becomes more than two times ~
(C) becomes half (D) becomes less than 2 times..;. 1.~
!1
6{), A X-ray tube operates at an accelerating potential of20 kV. Which of the following wavelengths will ~ "
be absent in the continuous spectrum of X-ray. j 't
(A)12pm (B) 45 pm (C) 65 pm (D) 95 pm ~,~
.
...­N0
61. The "Ka" X-rays emission line of tungsten occurs at A, = 0.021 nm. The energy difference between K ~ ,
and L levels in this atom is about ~
(A) 0.51 MeV (B) 1.2 MeV (C) 59 keY CD) 13.6 eV §f
~"-.----------~------~---
14 E

',---",
Modern Physics-l,

.':
EXERCISE (0·2)
~'~J
}
"
!
I '.' In photoelectric effect, stopping potential depends on
(A) frequency of the incident light
(B) intensity of the incident light by varies source distance
(C) emitter's properties

CD) frequency and intensity of the incident light

2. The fi~ure shows the variation of photo current with anode potential Photo current
for a photosensitive surface for three different radiations. Let la' Ib
and Ie be the intensities and fa' fb and fe be the frequencies for the
a
curves a, band c respecti vely :
(A) fa =fb (B) Ia < Ib
(C) fe < fb (D)Ie>Ib o Anode potential

1
3. A small plate of area 1 cm 2 is placed at a distance of r m from an isotropic point source emitting
, v~

r
\ . of frequency 6.63
lIght 1 x 10 14 Hz, at a power of 2.00 mW. Assume the plate to be normal to the

"
incident photons. [where h = 6.63 x 1O-34 1-s]. Select CORRECT altemative(s)
"
(A) Energy possessed by each photon is 10-20 1
(B) Photon emission rate is 2 x 10 11 S-I
1 4
(C) The fraction of area intercepted by the plate is 4 x 10­

(D) The rate of photons striking the plate is 5 x 10 12 per second.


~
$ 4. A metallic sphere-of radius r remote from all other bodies is irradiated with a radiation of wavelength

("
1 E
A which is capable of causing photoelectric effect.
(A) the maximum potential gained by the sphere will be independent of its radius
1'] (B) the net positive charge appearing on the sphere after a long time will depend on the radius of the
m sphere
1­ Q.. (C) the kinetic energy of the most energetic electrons emanating from the sphere will keep on declining
j with time
\

(
\~
lii (D) the kinetic energy of the most energetic electrons emanating from the sphere initially will be
independent of the radius of the sphere.
UJ
?.gl~. Two electrons are moving with the same speed v. One electron enters a region of uniform electriC
C' ~r'.f

....-
V")
field while the other enters a region of uniform magnetic field, then after sometime if the ~e-Broglie
~
....- wavelengths of the two are Al and A2, then:
....­l
!fi: (A) A] = A2 (B)A, > A2 (C) Al < A2 (D) AI > A2 or A) < A2
I'
\, §
E 15

:,. ~ ~ ~ '", •• __ . w.
~ m!'!IH.ii.9i': Wkl1

7. An electron in hydrogen atom first jumps from second excited state, to first excited state and then,

from first excited state to ground state. Let the ratio of wavelength, momentum and energy of photons

in the two cases be x, y and z, then select the wrong answer/(s) !


!"
=
(A) Z 1Ix (B) x=9/4 (C) y=5/27 (D) z=5127

8. An electron is in an excited state in hydrogen-like atom. It has a total energy of-3.4 eV. If the kinetic ~ .
energy of the electron is E and its de-Broglie wavelength is 'A., then
(A) E = 6.8 eV, 'A. = 6.6 X 10-10 m (B) E = 3.4 eV, 'A. = 6.6 X 10- 10 m ,~ .

(C)E=3.4eV,'A.=6.6x 10-11 m (D)E=6.8eV,'A.=6.6x 10- 11 m

9. A particular hydrogen like atom has its ground state binding "energy 122.4eV. Its is in ground state.
Then:
(A) Its atomic n~mber is 3
(B) An electron of90eV can excite it.
(C) An electron of kinetic energy nearly 91.8eV can be brought to alm~st rest by this atom.
(D) An election of kinetic energy 2.6eV may emerge from the atom when electron of kinetic energy
125eV collides with this atom.

10. The energy levels of a hypothetical one electron atom are shown in; the figure
""''&.
c OeV
n=5 -O.SO eV
$
n=4 -1.45eV ~
1-
Q..
/' ­

l
n=3 ...:3.0SeV t" .,

n =2 "-5.30 eV -;:.
a:-::::
1
1
n=1 -'-15.6eV i
ttl
(A) The ionization potential of this atom is 15.6 V .:;::
(B) The short wavelength limit of the series terminating at n =2 is 2339 A ~
..... '

""'
(C) The excitation potential for the state n = 3 is 12.52 V ~
(D) Wave number of the photon emitted for the transition n = 3 to n = 1 is 1.009 X 107 m- t ~
g
.,'~
~--------~~----------~
16 ,E
Modern Physics-1

, 11. A beam of ultraviolet light of all wavelengths passes through hydrogen gas at room temperature, in'
the x-direction. Assume that all photons emitted due to electron transition inside the gas emerge in the
,'"
y-direction. Let A and B denote 'the lights emerging from the gas in the x and y directions respecti vely.
(A) Some of the incident wavelengths will be absent in A.
(B) Only those wavelengths will be present in B which are absent in A..
(C) B will contain some visible light.
(D) B will contain some infrared light.
~;Uj·"f

12. If radi ation ofallQW.:wavelengths from ultraviolet to infrared is passed through hydrogen gas at room
, ",

temperature, absorp~ion lines will be observed in the:


(A) Lyman series. . (B) Balmer series (C) both (A) and (B) (D) neither (A) nor (B)

13. In the hydrogen atom, if the reference level of potential energy is assumed to be zero at the ground
state leveL Choose the incorrect statement. '
(A) The total energy of the shell increases with increase in the value of n
(B) The total energy of the shell decrease with increase in the value of n.
(C) The difference in total energy of any two shells remains the same.
"(D) The total energy at the ground state becomes 13.6 eV.

14. A neutron collides head-on with a stationary hydrogen atom in ground state. Which of the following
" statements are correct (Assume that the hydrogen atom and neutron has same mass) :
(A) If kinetic energy of the neutron is less than 20.4 eV collision must be elastic.
(B) If kinetic energy of the neutron is less than 20.4 eV collision may be inelastic.
(C) Inelastic collision may be take place only when initial kinetic energy of neutron is greater
than 20.4 eV.
(D) Perfectly inelastic collision can not take place.

15. A free hydrogen atom in ground state is at rest. A neutron of kinetic energy 'K' collides with the
hydrogen atom. After collision hydrogen atom emits two photons in succession one of which has
energy 2.55 eV. (Assume that the"hydrogen atom and neutron has same mass)
~
i (A) minimum value of 'K' is 25.5 eV.
~ (B) minimum 'value of 'K' is 12.75 eV
',0

Cf (C) the other photon has energy 10.2 eV

""
'li. (D) the upper energy level is of excitation energy 12.75 eV.
(
\" ,'" ""
,
i "

:j 16. X-rays are produced by accele11!.ting electrons across a given potential difference to strike a metal
~ target of high atomic number. If the electrons have same speed.when they strike the target, the X-ray
~ spectrum will exhibit.
~ (A) a minimum wavelength
'- . 1 (B) a continuous spectrum
( & (C) some discrete comparati vely prominent wavelength
'--"
g (D) uniform density over the whole spectrum
( ~ "

~ 17. . In a Coolidge tube ~xperiment, the minimum wavelength of the continuous X-ray spectrum is equal
{
\. ~. to 66.3 pm, then ;
~ (A) electrons accelerate through apotential difference of 12.75 kV in the Coolidge tube
~ (B) electrons accelerate through a potential difference of 18.75 kV in the Coolidge tube
( ~ (C) de-Broglie wavelength of the electrons reaching the anticathode is ofth~ order of 101lm.
/'
E (D) de-Broglie wavelength of the electrons reaching the anticathode is 0.01A.
"'- 17

i"
"'_ ... I "/~I'-;)

18. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is increased. As a result, in the emitted radiation:
(A) the intensity increases .(B) the minimum wave length increases
(C) the intensity decreases CD) the minimum wave length decreases
Paragraph for Q. 19 to 21
During the study of cathode rays some invisible rays emerged out from the tube which were not even
stopped when tube was wrapped several fold by black paper. They were called as X-rays which
travel by speed of light. These rays are produced by bombarding highly energetic electrons on a
heavy target having high melting point. When electrons enter the target, they are decelerated by
lattice and according to electromagnetic theory they emit radiations which is called X-radiation. But
only a fraction (0.5%) of incident electron energy is converted into X-radiation and remaining con verts
into heat that's why target metal used is of high melting point. Study of X-ray spectra when linked
with quantum theory explain that there are two types of spectra 'continuous' and 'characteristic'.
There is existence of definite minimum wavelength in continuous spectrum which indicates complete
conversion of energy of electron in photon energy and characteristic spectra is because of knocking
out of electrons of the atoms from inner most shells by accelerated electron and subsequent fall back
of same electron or of another electron in gap created in inner shells. The tube in which this experiment
is carried out is having high vacuum. The X-rays are of order of 1 x 10- 10 m wavelength. They travel
in straight lines and cannot be deflected by electric magnetic fields. They can also ionize a gas.
19. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is increased. Therefore in emitted radiation
(A) Intensity will increase
(B) Minimum wavelength will increase .
(C) Intensity remains same and minimum wavelength decreases

CD) Intensity decreases and minimum wavelength increases

20. An X-ray tube operates at 3 x·10 4 volts and current through it is 2 rnA. The electric power input, no.
of electrons stliking target in one second and lower wavelength limit of X-rays emitted are respectively."
tA) 60 W, 1.25 X 10 16,0.41 A (B) 60 roW, 1.25 x 10 16,0.82 A }
(C) 30 W, 1.6 X 1019 ,0.82 A (D) 30 mW, 1.6 x 10 ,0.41 A
24
~

"I" ,
.",1 In X-ray tube, the beam coming out will be
"
s
(A) having all wavelength from zero to infinity }
(8) having all wavelengths from some minimum value to infinity l
......
(C) having all wavelength from some minimum value to maximum value ~
(D) having all wavelength from zero to fixed maximum value ]"
. ~
22. Some quantities related to the photoelectric effect are mentioned under Column I and Column II. ..
1]c
Match each quantity in Column I with the corresponding quantities in Column II on which it depends i
Column I Column II ~
.l2
(A) Saturation current (P) Frequency of .
light ~
."

(B) Stopping poten.tial (Q) Work function !~


-c;
(C) de-Broglie wavelength of photoelectron (R) Area of photosensi ti ve plate ~ '-_/

(D) Force due to radiation falling on the photo-plate. (S) Intensity of light (at constant frequency) '~
(T) None of these 2
~ 11:. tz
18 E

L" c
Modern Physics-1

23. When we write expression for energy ofelectron in nth orbit of helium ion (He+) we take zero potential
energy for n = 00, butithe potential energy depends on reference. If we take total energy of atom for
n = 1 orbit as zero then
Column-I Column-II
(A) Total energy of electron in n ::;; 2 . (P) 54.4 eV
(
\, .
(B) Ionization energy from ground state (Q) 40.8 eV
(C) Energy required to exit electron from n = 1 to n = 2 (R) depends on 'reference level

,
\
(D) Negati ve of potential energy of electron in n =1 (S) independent Of reference level.

(T) 70.3 eV

24. In each situation of column-I a physical quantity related to orbiting electron in a hydrogen like
atom is given. The terms 'Z' and 'n' given in column-II have usual meaning in Bohr's theory.
Match the quantities in column-I with the terms they depend on in column-II ;­
Column-I Column-II
(A) Frequency oforbiting electron (P) Is directly proportional to Z2
(B) Angular momentum of orbiting electron (Q) Is directly proportional to n

"- (C) Magnetic moment of orbiting electron (R) Is inversely proportional to n 3

(D) The average current due to orbiting of (S) Is independent of Z


electron (T) Noneof these

( 25. Match the entries of column-I with the entries of column-II ;­


" . Column-I Column-II

(I) Characteristic X-ray (P) In,verse process of photoelectric effect


(II) Photoelectric effect (Q) Emission of electrons
i (III) Thermo-ionic emission (R) Moseley's law
!

" t
/" (IV) Continuous X-ray (S) Emission of radiations
b
'~ Then choose the correct matching.
<E
.~ (A) (i) -+(RS) ; (ii) -+ (RS) ; (iii) -+(S) ; (iv) -+(PS)

~
\.

(B) (i) -+(RS) ; (ii) -+ (Q) ; (iii) -+(Q) ; (iv) ~(PS)


(
(C) (i) -+(RS) ; (ii) -+ (S) ; (iii) -+(S) ; (iv) -+(PRS)
l­....: (D) (i) -+(RS) ; (iji) -+ (Q) ; (iii) -+(Q) ; (iv) -+(PRS)
] ":

( "'"
126. j;; versus Z graph,Jor characteristic X-rays is as shown in figure. Match the. following:
.~
$. Column I Column II
tl:I
c. ';;>
j (A) Line - 1 (P) La.
..r; (B) Line - 2 (Q) L~ ..fV

i~3

(
'- g
.-0 (C) Line - 3 (R)

\,-/
2
~
'0

§
(D) Line - 4· (S)
Ka.
K~ ////

I,
:'
,
,,'
,
4

Z
(T) Both Ka. and L~
(. . ~ E---~---~~-
19

c
JEE-Physics

Paragraph for question nos. 27 to 29


The circuit shown is placed in vacuum. Both the capacitors are identical and they have the same
capacitance C. Light is incident on the left plate of the upper capacitor. When all the switches are
open then the hf versus KEmax is shown by the straight line (A). In all the cases, we are measuririg 'the
i
KEmax when the electron reaches the opposite plate. "

t
1
I i
4~

SIF~
,1
•,
~
4~
i
~

hf ~
~
When only SI the switches ~md S2 are closed, the graph becomes (B). EB···/.(J) 'i

'it
~
"", ..•..~)

When only S3 and S4 are closed then the graph becomes (C). .;. {l)
.......
~
-E max l
27. What is the work function of the cathode?
" .~
(A)E (B) El (C) E + E, (D) none of these
~
.~.
28. What is the value of eV?

(A)E (B) El (C) E + E\ (D) none of these

29. What is the value of El ?


. J."
(A)3E (B) 3E/2 (C) El2 (D) none of these
:ij'
'C
:'j;

Paragraph for Question Nos. 30 to 32

An electron is orbiting in a circular orbit of radius r under the influence of a constant strong magnetic
~~
field of strength B. Assuming that Bohr's postulate regarding the quantisation of angular momentum' i f
.holds good for this electron, find J f;i~
i,~1

j
30. The allowed values of the radius 'r'of the orbit ( here '0 = 2:eB ~ J 1
E

1
ll'i
" 1 ' :f
(A) r= Fn ao (B) r= 2 Fn ao (C) r = 2Fn ao (D) None of these ~]
....
31. The time period of revolution of electron in nth orbit is ;­ 1
i
(A)
3nm
cl3
nm
(B) eB
nm
(C) 2eB (D)
2nm
cl3 j
<0
o
32. The total magnetic flux due to the magnetic field B passing through the nth orbit ";:;
~
~
~ =2n h ~ =E..!: ~ =E..!: ~ = 4n h
~
(A) (B) (C) (D)
e e 2e e

W >i
>, E
,.!
Modern Physics-1

Paragraph for Q. 33 to 35
Whi Ie conducting his 'doctoral research in theoretical physics and with no experimental evidence to
go on, de Broglie reasoned by analogy with Einstein's equation E =hf and with some of the ideas of
his theory of relativity. The details need not concern us, but they led de Broglie to postulate that if a
=
material particJe of momentum p mv has a wave-like nature, then its wavelength must be given by

h h
A =-p = -lnv where h is Planck's
.
constant. This is called the de-Broglie wavelength.

de-Brogli e considered a matter wave to be a traveling wave. But suppose that a "particle" of matter is
confined to a small region of space and cannot travel. How do the wave-like properties manifest
themselves? This is the problem of "a particle in a box." Figure shows a particle of mass m moving in
one dimension as it bounces back and forth with speed v between the ends of a box of length L. We'll
' . .
call this a one-dimensional box; its width isn't relevant. A particle in a box creates a standing de
Broglie wave as it reflects back and forth .

.i

(
r mo i! 1
L

(
~
!!'
I~I· \ I
Matter waves travel in both directions,
~ ':. w
l.", .
-:::
1 E ..
1;~3. What should be de-Broglie wavelength of confined particle in the box [here nEN] .
'~:. 1
~ L 2L L
~ (A)- (B) - (C) - (D) nL
:;
2n n n
(
.'..

l
::::. 34. Confined particle's en;ergy is given by

I n 2 h2 2n 2h2
(B)-­
. n2 h2
(C) 8mL2
n 2 h2
(D) 4~L2
j (A) 2mL2 mL2

S 35. Consider an oil drop from Millikan's oil drop experiment having diameter 1 f..lm confined between the
~
j plates separated by 10 f..lm. Density of oil is 900 kglm3, What is minimum energy of such an oil drop?
.;:::::.
~ [Given: h = 6.63 X 10-34 Js]

~ (A) 2.4 x 10-42 J (B) 1.2 x 10-42 J (C) 3.6 X 10-42 J (D) 4.8 x 10-42 J

E--------------------~2Ml--------------------

{
JEE-Physics

Paragraph for Question Nos. 36 to 38


Let a pencil of electrons from a suitable gun G enter through orifice in an enclosed metal box A,
which has potential V relative to filament of the gun. Let these electrons emerge from A through
orifice b and enter through c to another box B, which is maintained at a potential V + f:j, V. The electric·
field between the two boxes changes the ~omponentof velocity of the electrons perpendicular to the
adjacent surface, and the electrons enter B with a change in their direction of motion. Let vA and va be
the velocities of the electrons in A andB, respectively,. and SA' Ss the angles between these directions
and the normal to the box faces at band c. Since the electric field does not change the horizontal
component of velocity,

sinS A =~
VA sin SA ;::: Vs sin Sa sin Ss v A

A v

B V+6.V

The "refraction" of a pencil of electrons

Now if wedealing with light waves undergoing refraction, or any other kind of wave, the relation
would be :a.g>
~nSA A u ~
--=f.l=- 13
sinSs Us I
. . E
where Jl is the relative refractive index bfthe two media and uA ' Us arethecorresponding velocities i
. . . 3
u v' 11
of light wave. Comparison of the last two equations gives the result -A = -1L. We may conclude ~
Us VA ~
that if matter waves follow the electron along its path, the wave speed u is inversely proportional ~

b 1
to the
. speed v of the electron, or u =-v . 1?
LU

u j
36. If we define the frequency of matter waves as f = A ' the /'

'"
g
/'
(A) Frequency of matter waves in medium A is more than that in medium B ~
Cl
(B) Frequency of matter waves in medium A is less than that in medium B ..­

(C) Frequency of matter waves in medium A is same as that in medium B -0

(D) Cannot be predicted ~


Z

22 . E

Ii'
V
Modern Physics- 1

37. Suppose VII == 20 volt and VB == 15 volt. Choose the CORRECT statement :­
(A) The speed of electrons as well as speed of matter waves inside box B is more
(8) The speed of electrons as well as speed of matter waves inside box B is less
(C) The speed of electrons inside the box B is more, but speed of matter 'w';lves i;. box B is less
(D) The speed of electrons inside the box B is less, but speed of matter waves in box B is more
c
38. The refractive index for matter waves can be defined as - where c is some constant. So refracti ve index
u
for matter waves
(A) is inversely proportional to A (8) is independent of A
(C) is directly propOitional of A (D) is proportional to Ji:
::··il

3;9. Figure shows a Coolidge tube being used to produce X-ray. Column-I shows change in various
parameters while column-II shows effects occurring due to change in the parameters. Match them
correctly

Electric filament
')"

r==: ,( I -?I­
VI = Vosincot

C
"" '
C»L
IIII[

I.ll ;.,
V2
'8."
m

W
/'

.~ Column-I Column-II
1
(A) On increasing frequency (00) of AC source (P) Intensity of X-rays increases.
ij (8) On increasing pressure of gas inside the (Q) Intensity of X-rays decreases.
OJ)
tube keeping temperature of gas constant
;i
il (C) On increasing peak voltage'(Vo) of AC (R) X-ray becomes harder.
]
-:::::. (D) On increasing emf (V) of battery. (S) X-ray becomes softer.
1l
(
"l (T) Temperature of coolant at output
would be higher.
i
.,.,
""
~
j
~
,~

§
E': 23
{
\'.....

(
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE' (JM)

1. If 13.6 eV energy is required to ionize the hydrogen atom. then the energy required to remove an

electron from n = 2 is~ [AIEEE 2002]

(1) 10.2 eV (2) 0 eV (3) 3,4 eV (4) 6.8,eV


2. Which of the following atoms has the lowest ionization potential? [AIEEE • 2003]

(1) i4N (2) t;;Cs (3) tSAr


40 (4) 16 0
S

3. A charged oil drop is suspended in uniform field of 3 x 104 VIm so that it neither falls nor rises. The
charge on the drop will be- (take the mass of the oil drop = 9.9 x 10- 15 kg and g = 10 m/s2)
[AIEEE • 2004]
(1) 3.3 x to- 18 C (2) 3.2 x 10-18 C
(3) 1.6 x 10- 18 C (4) 4.8 x 10-18 C
4. The manifestation of band structure in solid& is due to­ [A IEEE - 2004]
(1) Heisenberg's uncertain~y principle
(2) Pauli's exclusion principle

-(3) Bohr's correspondence principle

(4) Boltzmann's law


5. The diagram shown the energy levels for an electron in a certain atom.' Which tran'sition shown
represents the emission of a photon with the most energy? (AIEEE - ZOQS]
-
lg> \. ~

-+f..;..,_'.L.__-I-_ ~ '" ~ !!:!


"
1
"

_-I-_ _ _---,_--JJ~ 0 '" 2

I ~
(

I
0=1
I - II III IV
, ­

(1) III (2) IV (3) I (4) II ~ .'

6. Which of the following transiti ons in hydrogen atoms emi t photons of highest frequency? - j
~

[AIEEE - 2007]-g
~
(1) n =2 to n = 6 (2) n =6 to n =2 - ~
5.
ttl
(3)n=2ton= 1. ' (4)n= 1 ton=2 1;
, 0
7. An ex-particle ofenergy 5 MeVis scattered through 1800 by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance of 0
[AIEEE - 2004] 'j
. 0

the closest approach is of the ~fder of-


(1) 1 A (2) 10- 10 cm (3) 10- 12 cm (4) 10- 15 cm §
~

2
24 E

- (c._,
V
,,<'11")

Modern Phys;cs-l
,.,.:,
."" " 8. Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a force ~r where 'k' is a cosntant and 'r' is the
distance of the electron from the Qrigin. By applying Bohr model to this sytem, the radius of the nth
orbital of the electron.is found to be \ ' and the kinetic energy of the ekctmn to!-~ 'Tn'. Then which
of the following is tme? [~IEEE • 2008]

1 2
(1) Tn CC --r.rn CC n (2) Tn independent of n, ~n CC n
n

1 '
(3) Tn CC-, rn CC n (4) Tn cc!, rn CC n2
n n

9. The transistion from the state n :::: 4 to n = 3 in a hydrogen like atom results in ultraviolet radiation.
Infrared radiation will be obtained in the transition from :- [AIEEE· 2009]
(1) 4 ~ 2 (2) 5 ~ 4 (3) 2 ~ 1 (4) 3 ~ 2
10. Energy required forthe electron excitation in Li++ from the first to the third Bohr orbit 1s:­
[AIEEE·2011]
(1) 108.8 eV (2) 122.4 eV (3) 12.1 eV . (4) 36.3 eV
11. Sodium and copper have work functions 2.3 eV and 4.5 eV respectively. Then the ratio of the
wavelengths is nearest to- [AIEEE • 2002]
(1) 1 : 2 (2) 4: 1 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
, 12. Formation of covalent bonds in compounds exhibits- [AIEEE • 2002]
(1) wave nature of electron (2) particle nature of electron
(3) both wave and particle nature of electron (4) none.of the above
13. Two identical, photocathoqes receive light of frequencies fl and f2. If the velocities of the photoelectrons
~ . . ,

r
} (of mass m) comirig out are respectively VI and v2' then- [AIEEE - 2003J
UJ
" ---
J
,

r 2
(1) VI - v2
2 2h
='m (f1 - f 2)
". [2h
,(2)v 1 +v2 = ;;-(fI +f2 )
Jl/2

"
~
',- ~:.

J
/ ~
l (3) vl
2
+ v22 2h
(fl + f 2) (4) VI' + ,2m
v =
2h [2h
;;- (f1 - J1I2
~ :::: -
m f2 }

1l' 14. The wavelengths involved in the spectmm of deuterium (f D) are slightly different from that of

l
i:l1
hydrogen spectrum, because- [AIEEE • 2003]

~.
~
(1) sizes of the two nuclei are different
..;;
(2) nuclear forces are different in the two cases
( ~
"" ] (3) masses of the two nuclei are different
§
(4) attraction between the eiectron and the nucleus is different in the two cases
~
~
(
';..< E

l
Jt:t:-t'hysics

15. A radiation of energy E falls normally on a pelfectly reflecting sUlface. The momentum transferred to
the surface is- [An~EE - 2004]

(l) E/c (2) 2E1c (3) Ec (4) E/c 2


16•. According t~
Einstein's photoelectric equation, the plot of the kinetic energy of the emitted
photoelectrons from a metal Vs the frequency, of the incident radiation gives a straight line w90se
slope- [AIEEE - 2004]
,.
(1) depends on the nature of the metal used
(2) depends on the intensity of the radiation
(3) depends both on the intensity of the radiation and the metal used
(4) is th'e same for all metals and independent of the intensity of the radiation
17. The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause
photoelectron emission from this substance is approximately- [A IEEE - 20041
(1) 540 nm (2) 400 nm (3) 310 nm (4) 220 nm
18. A photocell is illuminated by a small bright source placed 1 m away. When the same source of light

.is place ~ m away, the number of electrons emitted by photocathode would- (AIEEE . 2005]

(l) decrease by a factor of 4 (2) increase by a factor of 4


(3) decrease by a factor of 2 (4) increase by a factorof2
19. If the kinetic energy of a free electron doubles, its de-Broglie wavelength changes by the factor­
[AIEEE - 200S]
1 1
(1)2 (2) 2 (3) .J2 (4) .J2

20. The threshold frequency for a metallic surface corresponds to an energy of6.2 eV and the stopping ~

potential for a radiation incident onthis surface is 5V. The incident radiation lies in- [AIEEE· 2006] i
"...

(1) ultra-violet region(2) infra-red region (3) visible region (4) X-ray region .~

21. The time taken by a photoelectron to come out after the photon strikes is approximately- {m
I

. [AIEEE - 2006] 1<:::


(1)lO-4s ·(2) 10- 10 s (3) 10- 16 (4) 10- 1 s 1:tJ
.
22. The anode voJtageof a photocell is kept fixed. The wavelength Aof the light falling on the cathode is ?
gradually changed. The plate current I of the photocell varies as follows: [AIEEE .2006] i;;;
1
(1) IlL.-
o I.
(2) lli
o A.
(3)1~
o j,
(4) III
o . A.
i
~
~
, If;::: ", tr;
23. Photon of frequency v has a momentum associated with it. If c is the velocity of light, the m!:mientqin,
'Fi
B0
is- 8
[AIEEE - 2007] ,::;.
\!:!..
(1) vIc (2) hvc (3) hv/c2 (4) hv/c
~

26 E ':,--/
Modern Physics-1

Directio.ns : Questions No. 24, 25 and 26 are based on the following paragraph.
Wave property of electrons implies that they will show diffraction effects. Davission and Germer
demonstrated this by diffracting electrons from crystals. The law governing the diffraction from a
crystal is obtained by requiring that electron waves reflected from the planes of atoms in a crystal
interfere constructively (see figure)

I",=~"","",
.Electrons~\d Electrons

Crystal plane

24. In an experiment, electrons are made to pass through a narrow slit of width 'd' comparable to their
de-Broglie wavelength. They are detected on a screen at a distance 'D' from the slit (see figure).

--->~: I + ..........1y • 0

) » - ..... d.........,..........

»» t
)» I
) 0

Which of the following graphs can be expected to represent the number of electrons 'N' detected as a

functio~ of the detector position 'y'

(y =0 corresponds to the middle of the slit) ? [AIEEE - 2008]

~
y y,

;"
:ag>
;::J
(1)N~l (2) N
-'r
d
. _.1.. (3)N-Ef1 (4) N
,
-1
_..L
"-, ~

r'

0..

\.
~ 25. Electrons accelerated by potential V are diffracted from a crystal. If d =1A and i =30° V should be
l
VI
i-.
about (h = 6.6
(1) 2000 V
x 10-34 Js, me =9.1 x 10-31 kg, e =1.6 x 10- 19 C)
(2) 50 V (3) 500 V
:
(4) 1000 V
[1\IEEE· 2008]

~ 26. If a strong diffraction peak is observed when electrons are incident at an angle 'i' from the normal to
] the crystal planes with distance 'd' between them (see figure), de-Broglie wavelength AdB of electrons

I
w
w
?
.-§ 27.
can be calculated bY.the relationship (n isan integer):
(I) d sin i =n AdB (2) 2d cos i = n AdB (3) 2d sin i = n AdB .
The surface of a metal is illuminated with the light of 400 nm. The kinetic energy of the ejected
(4) d cos i
[AIEEE - 2008] .
=n AdB
><:
c -u:;
photoelectrons was found to be 1.68 eV. The work function of the metal is : (hc = 1240 eV-nm)
~
c
(
!
'"
(1) 1.51 eV (2) 1.68 eV (3) 3.09 eV (4) 1.41 eV
[AIEEE • 2009]

\"
:,~:
§

E TI

,.
\ __ /
JEE-Physics

Directions: Question number 28 contain Statement-l and Statement-2. Of the four choices
given after the statements, choose the one that best discribes the'two statements.
28. Statement·l: When ultraviolet light is incident on a photocell, its stopping potential is Yo and the
maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is Kmax' When the ultraviolet light is replaced by
X-rays, both Yo and Kmax increase.
Statement-2: Photoelectrons are emitted with speeds ranging from zero to a maximum value becau,se
of the range of frequencies present in the incident light. [A IEEE - 2010]
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
(2) Statement-.1 is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is the correct explanation of Statement-l
(3) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is not the correct explanation of Statement-1
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true
29. If a source of power4kW produces 1020 photons/second, the radiation belongs to apart of the spectru,m
called:-. [AIEEE - 2010]
(l)y-rays (2) X-rays (3) ultraviolet rays (4) microwaves
30. This question has Statememtn-1 and Statement-2. Of the four choices given after the statements, .
choose the one that best describes the two statements.
Statement-l : A metallic surface is irradiated by a monochromatic light of frequency v > Vo
(the threshold frequency). The maximum kinetic energy and the stopping potential are Kmax and Yo
respectively. If the frequency incident on the sUlface is doubled, both the Kmax and Yo are also
boubled.
Statement-2 : The maximum kinetic energy and the stopping potential of photoelectrons emitted
from a surface are linearly dependent on the frequency of incident light. [AIEEE-20ll]
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true, Statement-2 is not the correct explanationof Statement-l.
(2) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true
(3) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
(3) Statement-l is true, Statement-2 is true, Statement-2 is the correct explanation of Statement-l
31. Hydrogen atom is exci ted from ground state to another state with pri nci pal quantum number equal to ~ 0)

4. Then the number of spectral lines in the emission spectra will be :- [AIEEE-20l2] ~
(1)6 (2)2· (3)3 (4)5 . 1 ".
32. The anode voltage of photocell is kept fixed. The wavelength A of the light falling on the cathodeis ~
gradually changed. The plate current I of the photocell
. varies as follows: [JEE Mains-2013]
, 1

(1)
IlLl (2):lc
t

o
.

A~ A~
(3)
tI~.
o

A~"
\(4)

i
tI~'.
0 A~
c

';
~~
i
i
. w
", ; w
33. In a hydrogen like atom electron makes transition from an energy level with quantum number n to .~
another with quantum number (n-l). Ifn»I, the frequency of radiation emitted is proportional to: 0
o
[JEE Mains-20131·~ . 0
o
~
I :\.-/
I I I
(1) ; (2) n7';; (4)
~
n2 (3) 03

28 E
i !,,'

,'-.. t)
~7'f\ Modern Physics-1

{'",i

"t i ~ EXERCISE (JA)


:Hi

ALL ANSWERS OF THE QUESTIONS JEE·2007 ONWARDS ARE AS GIVEN ON


IIT·JEE WEBSITE.
1. If the atom looFm 251 follows the Bohr model and the radius of lOOFm251is n times the Bohr radius, then find
n.
(A) 100 (B) 200 (C)4 (D) 114 [JEE2003]
2. The attractive potential for an atom is given by v =voln(r/ro)' Vo and ro are constant and r is the
radius of the orbit. The radius rofthe nth Bohrt~ orbit depends upon principal quantum numbern as:
[JEE' 2003 (Scr)]
(A) roc n (B) roc 1/n2 (C) roc n2 (D) roc lin
3. Frequency of a photon emitted due to transition of electron of a certain element from L to K shell is
. found to be 4.2 x 10 18 Hz. Using Moseley's law, find the atomic number of the element; given that
=
the Rydberg's constant R, 1.1 X 107 m- I • ' [JEE' 2003]
4. In a photoeJctric experiment set up, photons of energy 5 e V fall on the cathode having work function'
3eV.
(a) If the saturation current is iA =4JlA for intensity 10-5 W/m2, then plot a graph between anode
, potential and current.
(b) Also draw a graph for intensity of incident radiation of 2x 10-5 W1m2 • [JEE' 2003]
$~i In a photoelectric exp~riment anode potential is plotted against plate current (JEE-2004 (Scr.)] ,
:ail;;;
2';;'
!!:J
~

J:i
~ //~C
l
..J::
_._. . . . ~.;;s:.:/l -~
\.
::

~
~
]
(

"
1 (A) A and B will have different intensities while Band C will have different frequencies.

(
i (B) Band C will have different int~nsities while A and C will have different frequencies.

I'
'l
i
.;;
(5
, (C) A and B will have different intensities while A and C wilihaveequal frequencies.
(D) A and B will have equal intensities while Band C will have different frequencies.
I:
\ ..
~ 6~ =
A proton has kinetic energy E 100 keV which is equal to that of a photon. The wavelength of
8
~ photon is 11,2 and that of proton is AI' The ratio of 11,2 I AI is proportional to [JEE-2004 (Scr.)]
~

~
(A) E2 (B) EI/2 (C) E-I (D) E-2
".\ .

\.
E ih 29

(;.

,., .......... , "I.J'''''..I ~ ".

a:wr-mt'" ~n,L~,ur.by.,h~

7. In a photoelectric setup, the radiations from the Balmer series of hydrogen atom are incident on a

metal surface of work function 2eV. The wavelength of incident radiations lies between 450 nm to

700 nm. Find the maximum kinetic energy of photoeJectron emitted. (Given hc/e = 1242 cV-nm).

I"
[JEE·2004]
8.' The wavelength of Ka X-ray of an element having atomic number Z = 11 is A . The wavelength of t
Ka X-ray of another element of atomic number Z' is 4A. Then Z' is [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] .j'!~

(A) 11 (B) 44 (e) 6 (D) 4 !.


L'
9. A photon of 1O.2eV energy collides with a hydr~gen atom in ground State inelastically. After few
microseconds one more photon of energy 15 eV collides with the sam'e hydrogen atom.Then what +, .

.can be detected by a suitable detector. ' [JEE' 2005 (Scr)] L


(A) one photon of 10.2 eV and an electron of energy 1.4 eV ' I
r'
(B) 2 photons of energy 10.2 eV j.

(e) 2 photons of energy 3.4 eV


J;:
I'
(D) 1 photon of 3.4 eV and one electron of 1.4 eV }~

. 10. In Young's double slit experiment an electron beam is used to form a fringe pattern instead of light.
If speed of the electrons is increased then the fringe width will: [JEE' 2005 (Scr)]
t;
(A) increase (B) decrease
(e) remain same (D) no fringe pattern will be formed
[
11. ,Th,e potential energy of a particle varies as U(x) ,= Eo for 0 :5 x :s 1 and U(x) =0 for x> 1
For 0 S x S 1. de:-:Broglie wavelengths is Al and for x> 1 the de-Broglie wavelength is ,)'''1' t
r

;i
Total energy of the particle is 2Eo' Find A~ . [JEE 200S]

'0

12. The graph between VA and stopping potential (V) of three metals V '8.. i.
g.
metall metal2 metal 3 !!:l
having work functions <1>1' <1>2 and <1>3 in an experiment of

photo-electric effect is plotted as sh()wn in the figure. Which of the


J
following statement(s) is/are correct? [Here Ais the wavelength of
the incident ray]. [JEE 2006]
O.~04 III.. nm- I
1j "I'

j
=1 : 2 : 4
(A) Ratio of work functions
(B) ,Ratio of work functions
<1>1 : <1>2: <1>3

<1>1 : <1>2 : <1>3 =4 : 2 : 1


i
"1l
/

['
]
(e) tan 8 is directly proportional to hc/e, where h is Planck's constant and c is the speed of light ,~
/'

(D) The violet colour light can eject photoelectrons from metals 2 and 3. . 1
:!
,13. In hydrogen-like atom (Z = II), nth line of Lyman series has wavelength Aequal to the de-Broglie'~; ~
.i'
wavelength of electron in the level from which it originated. What is the value of n?,J
[Take: Bohr radius' (ro) =0.53 A and Rydberg constant (R) = 1.1 x 107 m- I ] [JEE 2()06];',~
, .~

14. The largest wavelength in the ultraviolet region of the' hydrogen spectrum is 122 nm. The smallestj
/'

wavelength in the infrared region of the hydrogen spectrum (to the neare~t integer) is [.TEE 2007] ~
\~~.,
i ~ ~
(A) 802 nm (B) 823 nm (e) 1882 nm :}[',:,CD) 1648 nm ~

30 .. ~
I
!
,,~
",if
Modern Physics- 7

. 15. STATEMENT-I: If the accelerating potential in an X-ray tube is increased, the wavelengths the of
characteristic X-rays do not change. [JEE 2007]
because
STATEMENT-2 : When an electron beam strikes the target in an X-rajl tube, part of the kinetic
energy is converted into X-ray energy
(A) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-l
(B) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-l
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-! is False, Statement-2 is True
16. Electrons with de-Broglie wavelength A, fall on the target in an X-ray tube. The cut-off wavelength of·
. the emitted X-rays is [JEE 2007]
2 2 2
2h (C) A,o = 2m c A,3
(A) A,o = 2mcA (B) A,o = mc (D) Ao = A,
h h2
17. Which one of the following statements is WRONG in the context of X-rays generated from a X-ray
tube ? [JEE 2008]
(A) Wavelength of characteristic X:-rays decreases'when the atomic number of the target increases
(B) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends on the atomic number of the target
(C) Intensity of the characteristic X-rays depends on the electrical power given to the X-rays tube
(D) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends on the energy of the electrons in the X-ray tube
Paragraph for Question Nos. 18 to 20
In a mixture ofH - H~+ gas (He+ is singly ionized He atom), H atoms and He+ ions are excited to their
respecti ve first exci ted states. Subsequently, H atoms transfer their total exci tation energy to He+ ions
(by collisions). Assume that the Bohr model of atom is exactly valid.
18. The quantum number n of the state finally populated in He+ ions is [JEE 2008}
(A)2 (B)3 (C)4 (D) 5
)9. The wavelength of light emitted in the visible region by He+ ions after collisions with H atoms is
:s. (A) 6.5 x 10-7 m (B) 5.6 x 10-7 m (C) 4.8 x 10-7 m (D) 4.0 x 10-7 m
.$ 20. The ratio of the kinetic energy of the n = 2 electron for the H atom to that of He+ ion is
.~
~.)
.. 1 1
• Q.
(A) 4 (B) "2 (C) 1 (D).2
~

1 Paragraph for Question Nos. 21 to 23


= =a, where a is of nanometer
~". When a particle is restricted to move along x-axis between x 0 and x
t'" dimension, its energy can take only certain specific values. The allowed energies of the particle
1· moving in such a restricted region, correspond to the formation of standing waves with nodes at its

1<{..
:H'j:f
ends x = 0 and x =a. The wavelength of this standing wave is related to the linear momentum p of the
particle according to the de Broglie relation. The energy of the particle of mass m is related to its linear
2
momentum as E = fm . Thus, the energy of the particle can be denoted by a quantum number 'n'
(
"- ..
j
Ilj.
~
taking values 1,2,3, ... (n = I, called the ground state) corresponding to the number of loops in the
(

~
standing wave. Use the model described above to answer the following three questions for a particle.
"
@ moving in the line x = 0 to x =a. Take h =6.6 X 10-34 1s and e =1.6 x 10- 19 C. . [JEE-2009]
~ 21. The allowed energy for the particle for a particular value of n is proportional to
!
\, ~ (A) a-2 (B) a-312 (C) a-I (D) a2

\... -~:
E 31
:~;

(
JEE-Physics

22. If the mass of the particle is m = 1.0 x 10,-30 kg and a = 6.6 nm, the energy of the particle in its ground

state,is closest to :

(A) 0.8 meV (B) 8 meV (C) 80 meV (D) 800 meV
23. The speed of the particle, that can take discrete val ues, is propoltional to
(A) n-312 (B) n- I (C) n l12 (D) n
24. Photoelectric effect experiments are pelformed using three different metal plates p, q and r having
work functions ~p = 2.0 eV, ~q = 2.5 'eV and ~r = 3.0 eV, respectively. A ,light beam containing
wavelengths of 550 nm,450 nm and 350 nm with equal intensities illuminates each of the plates. The
correct I-V graph for the experiment is: [JEE-2009] .

p
r
q q
(A) r (B) (C) //V ;p (D)
/ . / .Y
V ,.L</' V V ?/<tI V

25. An a-particle and a proton are accelerated from restby a potential difference of 100 V. After this,
A '
their de Broglie wavelengths are A.(l and \ respectively. The ratio / ' to the nearest integer, is
"
[JEE 2010]
Paragraph for Question Nos. 26 to 28
The key feature of Bohr's theory of spectrum of hydrogen atom is the quantization of angular
momentum when an electron is revolving around a proton. We will extend t)'lis to a general rotational
motion to findquantizedrotational energy of a diatomic molecule assuming it to be rigid. The rule to
be applied is Bohr's quantization condition. [JEE 2010] :gq.
26. A diatomic molecule has moment of inertia I. By Bohr's quantization condition its rotational energy E
, /

in the nih level (n =0 is not allowed) is ~



Q,. ~

(8: J, ~
2 2
1( h 1( h \ h2, )
(A) n2 81t 2j'
)
(B);- 81t 2 j) (C) n ( 81t
2j (D) n
2 22

~
, , J
27. It is found that the excitation frequency ,from ground to the first excited state of rotation for the CO ~
. , /

4 ~
molecule is close to -x 1011 Hz. Theil the moment of inertia of CO molecule about its center of mass ~
ff 1 /

is close to [Take h = 211: X 10-34 Js) ~.$.


1tI
(A) 2.76 x 10-46 kg m2' (B) 1.87 x 10-46 kg m2 (C) 4.67 x 10-41 kg m~ (D) 1.17 x 10-41 kg ml
28. In a CO molecule, the distance between C (mass = 12 a.m.u.) and 0 (mass = 16 a.m.u.),
j
to
o.
N·,
-0
5 x 10-~1k
where, 1 a.m.u. = '3 ..
- g, IS close to 8,
---S .
'-_..r­

(A) 2.4 x lO- lom (B) 1.9 x lO-lom (C) 1.3 x lO-,om (D) 4.4 x lO-ll m
~
32 E
( 'l
•• ! -"',.- '-·..4 · ...... ·:""\s:;'1"'oIS.·!;;D:.*,~:(,':'!,'.~:- ;~.,__ :,\ .... ,<>',.;.,:,:.;-'.: "' ,,'x' ,,':~',,),<t'l":"',~"'•. :

Modern Physics-l
6" ............-....................... ......................................,

·29. To determine the half life of a radioactive element, a s t u d e n t l ! I l I I


5" ··········.. !··.. .·. ··t····....···l.. · . ······!···..·····.. i·. . . . . . !
plots a graph of enldN(t)1 versus t. Here dN!!l is the (:nldN{tlI4 .............l'.. . . . i . . . . r.·
.·..I.. . . ·.·!·....·......l

dt dt· dt 3 ..............~...........~ ............;............. ·......i..·........ ·,·

.
rate of radioactive decay at time t. If the number of
. . 2" ............ L. . . . .L.. . . .1............L.. . . . i..
1 ! I I i
m ... ..!.

I
radioactive nuclei of this element decreases by a factor of· 12 ; 4. ~ 6 ; ~
p after (16 years, the val ue of p is [JEE 2010] Years

30. The wavelength of the first spectral line in the Balmer series of hydrogen atom is 6561 A. The
wavelength of the second spectral line in theBalmer series of singly-ionized helium atom is
(A) 1215 A (B) 1640A (C) 2430A (0) 4687A [JEE 2011]
. Paragraph for Question Nos. 31 and 32
A dense collection of equal number of electrons and positive ions is called neutral plasma. Certain
solids containing fixed positive ions surrounded by free electrons can be treated as'neutral plasma.
Let 'N' be the number density of free electrons, each of mass 'm'. When the electrons are subjected
to an electric field, they are displaced relatively away from the heavy positive ions. Jfthe electric field
becomes zero, the electrons begi ns to osci Ilate about the posi ti ve ions wi th a natural angular frequenc y
'ro p ', which is called the plasma frequency. To sustain the oscillations, a time varying electric field
!! needs to be applied that ryas an angular frequency ro, where a part of the energy is absorbed and a part

of it is reflected. As ro approaches ro p ' all the free electrons are set to resonance together and all the
energy is reflected. Thi~: \s the explanation of high reflecti vity of metals. [JEE 2011]
31: Taking the electronic charge as 'e' and the permittivity as 'Eo', use dimensional analysis to determine
the COlTect expression for ro p '
\'- .
""
. "&.g, I,
" (IV; ~mEO [Ne2 ~mEO
W
..-'

'"
(A) V~ (B)
,
Ne (C) V;;: (D) Ne~
'- J
a...
c
',' ?,'

j
,i

(
321; Estimate the wavelength at which plasma reflection will occur for a metal having the density of'

~

electrons N ~ 4 X 10 27 m-~. Take Eo ~ 10- 11 and m ~ 10-:<0, where these quantities are in proper·
0..
S1 units

(
1
"S
(A) 800 nm (B) 600 nm (C) 300 nm (0) 200 nm
\'"

1w
33
,
The activity of a freshly prepared radioactive sample is 1010 disintegrations per second, whose mean
life is 10 s. The mass of an atom of this radioisotope is 10-
9 25 kg. The mass (in mg) of the radioacti ve
;:J
·0 sample is [JEE 2011]
~
..-'
-n
~ 34. A silver sphere of radius 1 em and work function 4.7 eV !s suspended from an insulating thread in
( ..-'
.l'!
free-space. It is under continuous illumination of 200 nm wavelength light. As photoelectrons are
9g
emitted, the sphere gets charged and acquires a potential. The maximum number of photoelectrons
§ emi ned from the sphere is A x 10z (where 1 < A < 10). The val ue of 'Z' is [.fEE 2011]

Er n
~
JEE-Physics

35. A proton is fired from very far away towards a nucleus with charge Q = 120 e, where e is the
electronic charge. It makes a closest approach of 10 fm to the nucleus. The de Broglie wavelength
27
(in units of fm) of the proton at its start is (Take: The proton mass, mp = (5/3) x 10- kg;

. 1
15 9 15
hIe = 4.2 x 10- J.s/C; 4n-8 = 9 x 10 mIF; 1 fm = 10- in) [JEE 2012]
o

Paragraph for Questions 36 and 37


The ~-decay process, discovered around 1900, is basically the decay of a neutron (n). In the laboratory,
a proton (p) and an electron (e-) are observed as the decay products of the neutron. Therefore,
considering the decay of a neutron as a two-body decay process, it was predicted theoretically that the
kinetic energy of the electron should be a constant. Butexperimentally, it was observed that the
electron kinetic energy has a continuous spectrum. Considering a three-body decay procesJ. Le .
. n-)o p + e- + ve ' around 1930, Pauli explained the observed electron energy spectrum. Assumin'g the
anti-neutrino (vJ to be massless and possessing negligible energy, and the neutron to be at rest,

momentum and energy conservation principles are applied. From this calculation, the maximum kinetic
6
energy of the electron is 0.8 x 10 eV. The kinetic energy carried by the proton is only the recoil
energy .
. 36. If the anti-neutrino had a mass of 3.e VIc 2 (where c is the speed of light) instead of zero mass, what
.1

should be the range of the kinetic el1ergy, K, of the electron? [JEE 2012]

(A) 0~K~0.8x106eV (B) 3.0eV ~ K ~ 0.8 x 10 6eV

(C) 3.0eV ~ K < 0.8 X 10 6 eV (D) o.~K<0.8x106eV


~
37. What is the. maximum energy of the anti-neutrino? [JEE 2012] g> ~
;::J
(A) zero . (B) much less than 0.8 xl0 6 eV
(C) ~early 0.8 x 10 eV
6 6
(D) Much larger than 0.8 x 10 eV .
·a
l'
38. The work functions of Si I ver and sodium are 4.6 and 2.3 e V, repetiti vely. The ratio of the slope oi the}
stopping potential versus frequency plot for Silver to that of Sodium is. [JEE 201i~] ~
';, .£
39. The radius of the orbit of an electron in a Hydrogen-like atom is 4.5 ao' where ao is the Bohr radius. Its '1)
.i 1

3h
,orbital angular momentum is 2 . It is given that h is Planck constant and R is Rydberg constant. The
n '. .
1
i
possible wavelength (s), when the atom de-excites, is (are) :- [JEE Advanced 2013] ~

9 9 9 4 ~
.~
(A) 32R (B) 16R (C) 5R (D) 3R .
1o
~
-0
"-'
8z
';',-/

34 E
\ '
,
Modern Physics-l

40.
If Ac is the wavelength of Ka X-ray line of copper (atomic number
~ .
29) and AM 0 is the wavelength

of the K X-ray line of molybdenum (atomic number 42), then the ratio
a
~cu
~Mo
is close to

[JEE Advanced 2014]


(A) 1.99 (B) 2.14 (C) 0.50 (D) 0.48
AI.
A metal surface is illuminated by light of two different wavelength 248 nm and 310 nm. The maximum
!::"
speeds of the photoelectrons corresponding to these wavelengths are u1 and u2, respectively. If the
ratio u 1 : u2 =2 : 1 and hc = 1240 eV nm, the work function of the metal is nearly
[JEE Advanced 2014J
(A) 3.7 eV (B) 3.2 eV (C) 2.8 eV (D) 2.5 eV

. :.<
;,

.0
'&:
c:i>
c
W
,/

tJ
( 1­
Q..

~
(
,',
1...­
li
.c.
...­
V')

l:
1i
-0
~
( ~
\ ~

/'
\
i
w
w
" ~. ~
f
'L
b2
/

(
'"
..~
;..0­

" i:l
11
...­gr
-0
w
8z
E 35

'-.

{ .
JEE-Physics

ANSWER KEY

EXERCISE (S)
1. 6.59 x 10-34 1s
Ivllv2
2. (a) 3.38 x 10- 1= 2.11 eV
19 15. Iv +Iv
1 2

(b) 3.0 x 1010 photonsls 16. (i) 5, 16.5 ~V, 36.4 A, 340 eV, - 680 ~V,
3. (a) 3 x 1031 S-I (b) 104s- 1
h
4.5.76 X 10- 11 A 2n 1.06 x 10- 11 m
5. 15/8 V
17. Z =3, n::: 7
6. (a) 0.6 volt, (b) 2.0 rnA
18. n::: 3, 3: 1

10 20

5 =
19. fp fa + fa
7'16' 80n 20.62.5 x 10- 12, 192.5 X 10-12
21. 6210 eV
8.2 eV, 6.53 X 1O-34 1-s 22. during combination :;= 3.365 eV;
9. 1.6 X 107 s after combination = 3.88 eV (5~3) &
10. (a) 2.25eV, (b) 4.2eV, (c) 2.0 eV, 0.5 eV 2.63 eV (4~3)
11. - h/eEt 2 23.69.5 keY
24. (i) KE =3.4 eV, (ii) Iv = 6.66 A. (iii) 6.8eV
12.8.6 MeV
(iv) The potential energy, and the total energy of
13.22.8 nm
the state
14.0004
25.0.61A.

V")
'<l
C!­
O>
c:
tJ.J
/".

b

"'", ...
.EXERCISE (0-1) 0..
e.,

Q.1 A Q.2 e Q.3' B Q.4 D Q.5 e Q.6 B


,
Q.7 A 1
/"

11
..t:
Q~8 A Q.9 e Q.10 e Q.11 D Q.12 e Q.13 A Q.14 i;;e V'>
/"
;t
Q.15 B Q.16 B Q.17 B Q.18 A Q.19 B Q.20 B Q.21 ~
Be "U
]
.....
Q.22 e Q.23 e Q.24 A Q.25 D Q.26 e Q.27 B Q.28 A '§
c
0
Q.29 A Q.30 D Q.31 B Q.32 e Q.33 A Q.34 e Q.35 D
iUJ

Q.36 A Q;37 . D Q.38 e Q.39 D Q.40 B Q.4t . e Q.42 A


UJ
;;>
0
"0
:><:
Q.43 A Q.44 A Q.45 e Q.46 e Q.47 D Q.48 e . Q.49 B .....
or)

\:' 0
N

Q.50 e Q.51 B, Q.52 B Q.53 A Q.54 e Q.55 e Q.56 iD ......g


a
.....
Q.57 e Q.58 e Q.59 B Q.60 AB Q.61 e §:
'0
lU

36

( "
Modern Physics-l

EXERCISE (0..2)
Q.l AC Q.2 ABD Q.3 ABCD Q.4 ABCD
Q.5 AD Q.6 BD Q.7B Q.8B
Q.9 ACD Q. 10 ABCD Q.ll ACD Q.12 A
Q.13 B Q.14 AC Q.15 ACD Q.16 ABC
Q.17B Q.18 AD Q.19 B .Q.20 A

Q.21 B Q.22 (A) RS (B) PQ (C) PQ (D) PRS


..
Q.23 (A) QR, (B) PS, (C) QS, (D) PR
Q.24 (A)~(P,R) ; (B)~(Q,S) ; (C)~(Q, S); (D)~(P,R)

Q.25B Q.26 (A) ~ (S); (B) ~ (R); (C) ~ (Q); (D) ~ (P)

Q.27 A Q. 28 A Q.29B Q.30 A


Q.31 D Q.32 C Q.33 B Q. 34 C
Q. 35 B Q. 36 C Q. 37 D Q. 38 A
q Q. 39 (A) ~ (Q) ; (B) ~ (Q) ; '(C) ~ (P, T) ; (D) ~ (P,R,T)

EXERCISE (J-M)

Que:. ; f' 2 3 4 5 6 ., 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19120


Ans. 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3 I 21413121311
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 . 27. 2~:' ·29. -30 ";M'~ '/$2. • ~3 I;'·' . . . .
on Ans. 2 .. ? 4 _4_ 2 2 4
_ L ___
1 2 2 --.•.--­1 4 4
~
.~

.~-

!P
w
---i:l EXERCISE (J.. A)
IE

\. ~~
1
(
J!---
/. 1. Ans. (D) 2. Ans. (A) 3. Ans. Z = 42 . 4. Ans.
" E
---
~ .. 2V' Vp
1
-'

\. 1 5.10. Ans. (A) 6.. Ans. (B) 7. Ans. 0.55 eV 8. Ans. (C) 9. Ans. (A)
(
":,.
i
UJ
15.
Ans. (B) 11. Ans. -.J2 12.
Ans. (B) 16. Ans. (A) 17.
Ans. (A, C)
Ans. (B)
13.
18.
Ans.
Ans.
n=24
(C)
14. Ans. (B)
UJ
? 19. Ans. (C)
C ~ 20. Ans. (A) 21. Ans. (A) 22. Ans. (B) 23. Ans. (D) 24. Ans. (A)
---;:;on 25. Ans. 3 26. Ans. (D) 27. Ans. (8) 28. Ans. (C) 29. . Ans. 8
N

--- 30.
~
.,::::;,

Ans. (A) 31. Ans. (C) 32. Ans. (B) 33. Ans. 1 34 . Ans.7
l!:!.
35.
-0
Ans. 7 36. Ans. (D) 37. Ans. (C} 38. Ans. 1 39. Ans. (A, C)
w
0
40. Ans. (B) 41. Ans. (A)
~
E 37

{ ~i
'1'·
o
o
1""):
~

n
,,-)

I· CONTENTS~

I Modern Physics-2


l-
• Key-Concepts : Formulae and Basic Theory 1

C(
• Exercise (S)· : Conceptual Subjective Problems 3
• Exercise (0-1) : Single Correct MCQ's 5

~
• Exercise (0-2) : Miscellaneous Type Problems 10
(( 1
• Exercise (JM) : Previous 10 years AlEEE Problems 12
• Exerci~e (JA) : Previous 10 years IIT -lEE Problems 17
• Answer Key 22

••~I

?
~ l "

,~-:

'l ~ j

I
.i l
I ~ ! • Modern Physics· 2

KEY CONCEPTS

1. NUCLEAR DIMENSIONS :

=
R:::: R o A 1/3 Where R0 is an empirical constant = 1.1 x 10- 15 m;

=
A Mass number of the atom

2. RADIOACTIVITY:
The phenomenon of self emission of radiation is called radioactivity and. the substances which emit
these radiations are called radioactive substances. It can be natural or artificial (induced) .

3. a, p,y RADIATION:
(i) a - particle :
(a) Helium nucleus (2He 4) (b) energy varies from 4 Mev to 9 Mev;
6
(c) Velocity 10 - 10 mls 7 (d) low penetration
(ii) . P- particle :
(a) electron or positron . (b) Have much less energy;
(c) more penetration; (d) higher velocities than a particles
(ill) Y- radiation : Electromagnetic waves of very high energy and maximum penetration.

4. LAWS OF RADIOACTIVE. DISINTEGRATION : ..... ~.

(A) DISPLACEMENT LAW: In all radioactive transformation either an a or Pparticle


(never both or morethan one of each simultaneously) is emitted by the nucleus of the atom.
" !~

',,,",

(i) a - emission : . zXA - - 7 z 2yA - 4 + 2a4 + Energy'


'8.

ci>
ill
(ii) p -emission: zXA~ p+ z+ lyA + v(antit:lUetrino)

1Q. .
(ill) y - emission: emission does not affect either the charge number or the mass number .

j (B) S,TATIST.ICAL LAW: The disintegration is a random phenomenon. Which atom disintegrates first is
purely a matter of chance . Number of nuclei disintegrating per second is given ;
. ii
cJ'i
->.. (disintegrations /gm is called specific activity) .
~ dN N dN ,\N' actIvIty.
..
'J (i) --a :::::> -=-f\. =
~ dt dt

!
.H;i
Where N =Number of nuclei present at time t ; ').., =decay constant
~
.~ (li) N = No e- At ; No = number of nuclei present in the beginning

.;,;:;

~ (ill) Half life of the population T1/2 = O.~3


~m
~
= N2
~
o
at the end of n half-life periods the number of nuclei left N •
. n

E------~----------~l----------------~~

(
~ .
lEE-Physics

(iv) MEAN LIFE OF AN ATOM = LUfe time ofall atoms Tav


1
=i
total number of atoms (
(v) CURIE: The unit of activity of any radioactive substance in which the number of disintegration
(
I
per second is 3.7 x10 10 • !
i
(
I
5. ATOMIC MASS UNIT (a.m.u. OR U) ./
,
(
I

~ amu = 121 x (mass of carbon - 12 atom) = 1.6603 x 10-27 kg ;.)


(I
j
f
6. MASS AND ENERGY : ,\,

The mass m of a particle is equivalent to an energy given by E =mc 2 (


=
c speed of light. 1 amu 931 Mev =
C
""',
7. MASS DEFECT AND BINDING ENERGY OF A NUCLEUS
c
The nucleus is less ,massive than its' constituents. The difference of masses is called mass defect ,

=
/J.. M mass defect =
[Zmp + (A - Z) mn] - MZA . c
Total energy required to be given to the nucleus to tear apart the individual nucleons composing
the nucleus, away from each other and beyond the range of interaction forces is called the
c
Binding Energy of a nucleus: ,C
B.E. = {/J.. M)C2.
C
, (6.M)C 2
RE. per nucleon = '(

Greater the B.E. per nucleon, greater is the stability of the nucleus" . 'C

8. NUCLEAR FISSION:
. r
c:
(i) Heavy nuciei of A , above 200, break up into two or more fragments of comparable madses . ..., c
(ii) The total B.E. increases
,
and excess energy is released. 1 c c
{iii)The man point of the fission energy is liberated in the form of the K.E. ofthe fission ~
fragments. ego 2~~U+onl-72~~U-7t~~Ba+;~Kr+3onl + energy ~ C
,E
j C
9. NUCLEAR FUSION (Thermo nuclear react!on): l c
(i) Light nuclei of A below 20, fl,lse together, the B.E. per nucleon increases and hence the l- .
excess energy isreleased . '1i ~--
(ii) These reactions take place at ultra high temperature (== 107K to 109K) 1C
(iii) EnergY·released exceeds the energy liberated in the fission of heavy nuclei . ] ,
eg. i
41 P 0 e . (P
-7 24 He + 2+1 ' )
oSltron s.C
ttl

(iv) The energy released in fusion is specified by specifying Q value .


?
.~ C ­

~
i.e. Q value of reaction = energy released in a reaction . ;; C
N '
,-
Note : (i) In emission of p- , Atomic number{Z) increases by 1 . 1\ .,
(ii) In emission of p+ , Atomic number (Z) decreases by 1. 9
m (')
-0

~ C
:.;,'- E '
.... ·.... ·"··~2' C
Modern Physics-2
r
\ ..

(
EXERCISE (S)
c .
c
C 1. The binding energies per nucleon for deuteron (IH2) and helium (2He4) are 1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV
C respectively. The energy released when two deuterons fuse to form a heliuIp nucleus (2He4 ) is _ ..

c 2. A radioactive decay counter is switched on at t = O. A P:- active sample is present near the counter.
The counter registers the number of P - particles emitted by the sample. The counter registers
c ,,
1 x 10 5
P- particles at t =36 sand 1.11 x 105 P- particles at t = 108 s. Find T V:r of this sample
c 3. An isotopes of Potassium t8K has a half lifeof 1.4 x 109 year and decays to Argon tg Ar which is
c stable. (i) Write down the nuclear reaction representing this decay. (i1) A sample of rock taken from
c ~\ the moon contains both potassium and argon in the ratio In. Fi~d age of rock
c 4. At t =0, a sample is placed in a reactor. An unstable nuclide is produced at a constant rate R in the
c sample by neutron absorption. This nuclide P- decays with half life 1:. Find the time required to
produce 80% of the equilibrium quantity of this unstable nuclide.
c
c
Ct£.) .Suppose that the Sun consists entirely of hydrogen atom and releases the energy by the nuclear
reaction, 41H ~ iHe with 26 MeV of energy released. If the total output power of the Sun is
c , , assumed to remain constant at 3.9 x 1026 W, find the time it will take to bum all the hydrogen. Take
c the mass of the Sun as 1.7 x10 30 kg .
... -~'.""1
C /-
, 6. j The positron' is a fundamental particle with the same mass as that of the electron and with a charge
~)<
(, .E I' equal to that of an electron but of opposite sign. When a positron and an electron collide, they may
~
b annihilate each other. The energy corresponding to their mass appears in two photons of equal energy.
C ]-
a.. Find the wavelength of the radiation emitted. [Take: mass of electroR = (O.5/C2)MeV and

~
(~ hC = 1.2xlO-12 MeV.m where h is the Plank's constant and C is the velocity of light in air]

C Vi 7. When two deuterons (lIP) fuse to from a helium nucleus 2He4 , 23.6 MeV energy is released. Find
->..

1f the binding energy of helium if it is 1.1 MeV for each nucleon of deuterium.

Ci
j
/8· A n+ meson of negligible initial velocity decays to a ~+ (muon) and a neutrino. With what kinetic
() =g •

o J ~
energy (in e V) does the muon move? (The rest mass of neutrino can be considered zero. The rest
mass of the n+ meson is 150 MeV and the rest mass of the muon is 100 MeV.) Take neutrino to
o ~ .J2 = 1.41.
o ~~
behave like a photon. Take

j 9. Consider the following reaction : iH +i H =~He +Q. Mass of the deuterium atom =2.0141u. Mass of
C)
~ . helium atom.= 4.0024 u. This is a nuclear ....... reaction in which the energy Q released is ........ MeV.

;B
O· Cl

2 m
() E 3

( \
-'

L
fll
"~'..
','

, JEE-Physics

10. Nuclei of a radioactive element A are being produced at a constant rate a.. The element has a decay
,constant A. At time t = 0, there are No nuclei of the element
(i) Calculate the number N of nuclei of A at ~ime t.
=
(ii) If a. 2NoA, calculate the number of nuclei of A after one half-life of A and also the limiting
value of N as t -7 00.

11. A small quantity of solution containing 24Na radionuclide (half life 15 hours) of activi ty 1.0 microcurie
is injected into the blood of a person. A sample of the blood of volume 1 cm 3 taken after 5 hours
shows an activityof296 distintegrat~on per minute. Determine the total volume of blood in the body
of the person. Assume that the ra:dioactive solution mixes uniformly in the blood of the person.

(1 Curie =3.7 x 1010 disintegrations per second)


12. lJ238 and lJ235 occur in nature in an atomic ratio 140 : 1. Assuming that at the time of earth's formation
the two isotopes were present in equal amounts. Calculate the age of the earth.

(HalfHfe of u238 =4.5 X 109 yrs & that of lJ235 =7.13 X 108 yrs)

""'8.
g>
~
b
].

{..r;
en
:f

~
'"0

~
"1 CI
~
:$
w
w
~
...,l2
0
N

j
@:
~
~
.,;;';

4
E
"~
'-/

(
Modern Phys;cs-2

EXERCISE (0-1)

1. Let u be denote one atomic mass unit. One atom of an element of mass number A has mass exactly
equal to Au
(A) for any value of 4 ~(B) only for A =1
~C) only for A= 12 .. (D) for any value of A provided the atom is stable
~

2. The surface area of a nucleus varies with mass number A as


(A) A2I3 (B) AI/3 (e) A (D) None
3. eonsiderthe nuclear reaction X200 ~ A110 + B90 "
If the binding energy per nucleon for X, A and B is 7.4 MeV, 8.2. MeV and 8.2 MeV respectively,
what is the energy released?
(A) 200 MeV (B) 160 MeV (e) 110 MeV (D) 90 MeV
4. The binding energy per nucleon for e lz is 7.68 MeV and that for e l3 is 7.5 MeV. The energy
required to remove a rteutron from e l3 is
(A) 5.34 MeV (B) 5.5 MeV (e) 9.5 MeV (D) 9.34 MeV
5. The binding energies of nuclei X and Y are EI and Ez respectively. Two atoms of X fuse to give one
atom of Y and an energy Q is released. Then:
(A) Q =2E I-Ez (B) Q =Ez-2E I (e) Q = 2EI + E z ( D ) Q =2Ez + E\

6. If each fission in a U235 nucleus releases 200 MeV, how many fissions must occurs per second to
produce a power of 1 KW .
(A) 1.325 x 1013 . (B) 3.125 x 10 13 (e) 1.235 x 10 13 (D) 2.135 X 10 13
~
g> .
~ 7. A star initially has 1040deuterons. It produces energy via the processes
b lIP + 1HZ ~ IH3 + p and lIP + IH3 ~ zHe4 + n. If the average power radiated by the star is

Q. 10 16 W, the deuteron supply. of the star is exhausted in a time of the order of :
~
. (e) 10 IZ s
.J (A) 106 s (B) 108 s (0) 10 16 s
J
.~8. The binding energies of the atom of elements A & Bare Ea & Ebrespectively. Three atoms of the
~ element B fuse to give one atom of element A. This fusion process is accompanied by release of
1
11
energy e . Then Ea, Eb are related to each other as
(A) Ea+ e == 3Eb .(B) Ea = 3Eb (e) Ea - e =3Eb (D) Ea + 3Eb + e = °
f9.
~
The binding energies of the nuclei of iHe, ~Li, ~2e & ~4Nare 28,52,90,98 Mev respectively.
.g Which of these is most stable. '7 e.-i ~ t.J.~." "'. S '\.i,'l"·~~· ~"f J \""',·r\~ I' i,t"~',\\,l1'~ I ,
lo<:
~
g (A) i.He (B) ~ Li (e) ~2e (D) ~4N
]glO. The following nuelear reaction is an example of I; e + iH ~ IgO + energy
~ (A) fission (B) fusion (C) alpha decay (D) beta decay

E------------------~5~--~--------------

('
JEE-Physics
(

11. Fast neutrons may most easily be slowed down by which one of the following methods?
(A) passing them through a substance rich in hydrogen (

(B) allowing them to collide elastically with heavy nuclei (


(C) using lead'shielding
(D) passing them through an increasing potential' gradient space (

12. The rest mass of the deuteron , ~H, is equivalent to an energy of 1876 MeV, the rest masi of a C
proton is equivalent to 939 MeV and that of a neutron to 940 MeV. A deuteron may disintegrate to
C
a proton and a neutron if it :
(A) emits a y- ray photon of energy 2 MeV (B) captures a y-ray photon of energy 2 MeV (
(C) emits a y-ray photon of energy 3 MeV (D) captures a y - ray photon of energy 3 MeV (

13. A certain radioactive nuclide of mass number mx disintegrates, with the emission of an electron and y C
radiation only, to give second nuclide of mass number my. Which one of the following equation
conectIy relates mx and my? C
(A) my = mx + 1 (B) my = mx - 2 (C) my = mx - 1 (D) my = mx
'C
14. The number of a and P- emitted during the radioactive decay chain starting from ~~6Ra and ending :C
at 82
206Pb is . C
(A) 3a & 6p- (B) 4a & 5p- (C) Sa &4P- (D) 6a & 6p":
;C
15, Consider a-particles, p- particles & y -rays, each having an energy of 0.5 MeV. Increasing order of : C
penetrating powers, the radiations are
(A) a, p, y (B) a, y, P (C) p, y, a (D) y, p, a

16. In an a-decay the Kinetic energy of a particle is 48 MeV and Q-value of the reaction is 50 MeV. c
The mass number of the mother nucleus is: (Assume that daughteti1Ucleus is in ground state) c
(A) 96 ' (B) 100 (C) 104 (D) none of these ""
!C c:
l7. In the uranium radioactive series the initial nucleus is 9ZU238, and the final nucleus iS82Pb206. When ~ C
the uranium nucleus decays to lead, the number of a - particle~ emitted is.. and the number of p-particles £­
emitted... i C
(A) 6, 8 (B) 8, 6 (C) 16; 6 (D) 32, 12 ~ C
18. Binding energy per nucleon versus mass number curve for nuclei is shown in figure. W,X, Y and Z 1-
..c.
c
are four nuclei indicated on the curve. The process that would release energy is : i; ,
"
~ C
'N
~
t '\ ."
<L~ v ' ,C\)-"\ ('6
-() C'.
V YO·',C. ~ 8,0·-----
, 'V"'" gl~ 7.5 - - -
'" ~
UJ

'11 'f, I
~ ~..... 5.ot...·...·/:L1z
~
i:..') 'L
?.Q C
:.2
OJ :
C

] 0
I .

30 60
I

90 120 •
S
o
N
C
to Mass number of nuclei " ,

.e 'C.
8,
-:::::..
(A) Y -+ 2Z (B) W -+ X + Z (C) W -+ 2Y (D) X -+ Y + Z
~'C'
UJ
C.
I

2; ,
6 E 'C'
:0
Modern Physics-2

I r
,19. The radioactive sources A and B of half lives of2 hr and 4 hrrespectively, initiaJ.ly contain the same
number of radioactive atoms. At the end of 2 hours, their r~~~n.~~~~atio~ are in the rat~s:, "-1

I' (A)4:1 '(B)2:1 (C).fi:l ;~,t1" ("'CD)1:l 1,_.;.

\ ,Ii ., '
v\.~, t I ,,-,' (
I 20. In a radioactive element the fraction of initial amount remaining afterits mean life time is ,~ \ <::'. \\.,
I' ,//v\ . "L
1 1 1 \' \ \\,,' I \ \ '
(A) 1- - (B) "2 (C) . CD) 1- "2 "'1.:' t-3_~
e e e e .... ,
I ;\21. ~\
,I' The half-life of 131 1 is 8 days. Given a sample of 1311 at time t = 0, we can assert that:
=
(A) no nucleus will decay before t 4 days (B) no nucleus will decay before t = 8 days .' Nb
I (C) all nuclei will decay before t = 16 days (D) a given nucleus may decay at any time after t = 0 'l,.
I
22. Two radioactive material Al and A2 have decay constants of 10 Ao and Ao' If initially they have same
number of nuclei, the ratio of number of their undecayed nuclei will be (lIe) after a time
1 1
\+ ,
t.l '; l} " {:, -(
'
, ,).;" .1
(A) Ao CB) 9Ao t::~~\, ~~&·~'(C) 1O~.9 J CD) 1
(
~"~" • G ,,'
\ "f '.:f,' ~,,; ~ #I f'~ 1. t;;,.
23. 90% of a radioactive sample is left undecayed aftertime t has elapsed. What percentage of the initial
sample will decay in a total time 2t:
(
\.
(A) 20% (B) 19% (C) 40% CD) 38%
( 24. A radioactive material ofhalf-life T was produced in a nuclear reactor at different instants, the quantity
'.
produced second time was twice of that produced first time. If now their present activities are A J and
/
~ A2 respectively then their age difference equals:
( T AI Al T In-"­
A" I A2
-In-
( (A) In2 A21I (B) T lin A2 (C) ln2 2AI CD) T Iln
2A1

(
i 25. Activity of a radioactive substance is RI at time tl and R2 at time ~(t2 > t l ). Then the ratio ~~, is: I
c t
(::;j

'"
f"

"I
1 )j
"J
.;-,'
" !
,'"
~
(A) ~
t2
(B) e- A(tJ+t2) (C)e ( T-t2)
t
(D) e A(tl-t2)
(,
, ~

I~
1" 26. There are two radionuclei A and B. A is an alpha emitter and B is a beta emitter. Th~ir distintegration
\.,
( "

, .1
,
constants are in the ratio of 1 : 2. What should be the ratio of number of atoms of two at time
'

I~
V)

£,.;: t = 0 so that probabilities of getting a and ~ particles are same at time t = O.

li -:::
'"
. -u
Jj.
]- 27.
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2

A particular nucleus in a large population of identical


(C) e o\t'.. "., ""'~).., \l (D) e­ i

radioactiv~~I~i di~
survive 5 half lives of that
)' i isotope. Then the probability that this surviving nucleus will survive the next half life:

~n(
tf1 1 1 1 1 5
~~ ,r\(A)
,('
32 (B) "5 (C) "2 (D) 10 (E) "2
;:;:; . .<;'

~ 2~~/ , A certain radio active substance has a half life of 5 years. Thus for a particular nucleus in a sample of
I. '
g~.U~ the element, the probability of decay in ten years is
It ;e' \ I
§ /'
(A) 50% (B) 75% (C) 100% (D) 60%
) E, 7
)
x....1
.:

t
... /" ~t{ \,:, ( !; e ',\,'
"t..!

lEE-Physics"

49: The activity of a sample reduces from Ao to Ao/ Jj in one hour. The activity after 3 hours more will be .
!'j Ii
Ii: l Ao Ao Ao Ao
:;i '( (A) 3Jj (B) 9 (C) 9Jj (D) 27
;:: "\
~;! 3().
;Half life of radium is 1620 years. How many radium nuclei decay in 5 hours in 5 gm radium?
"f:;;Y (Atomic wdght of radium = 223)
(A) 9.1 x 10 12 (B) 3.23 x lOIS (C) 1.72 X 1020 (D) 3.3 x 10 17 I
I
31. The half-life ofsubstance X is 45 years, and it decomposes to substance Y. A sample from a meteorite
was taken which contained ?% of X .and 14% of -: by quantity of sub~t~nce, If substance Y is not
normally found on a meteonte, what IS the approXImate age of the meteonte? , '
I
(A) 270 years (B) 135 years . (C) 90 years (D) 45 years
32. The activity of a sample of radioactive material is AI at time tl and Az at time t2 (t2>t l ): Its mean life
isT.
A 1 --A 2
(A) AI t1 =Azt 2 (B) t _ tl
z
=constant (C) Az =Al e(tl-tl)/T (D) A z =AI e(111Tt2)

33. A fractionJ; of a radioactive sample decays in one mean life, and a fraction':; decays in one half-life.
(A)J; >1;

(B)J; <j~

(C)J; =1;

(D) May be (A), (B) or (C) depen~ing on the values of the mean life and half life

34. A radioactive substance is being produced at a constant rate of 10 nuclei/s, The decay constant of the
substance is 112 sec-I, After what time the number of radioactive nuclei will become 1O? Initially
there are no nuclei present. Assume decay law holds for the sample.
1

, (A) 2.45 sec (B) log (2) sec (C) 1.386 sec
(D) In (2) sec
35. The radioactivity of a sample is RI at time T I andR2 at time T2' If the half life of the speCimen is T.
Number of atoms that. have dis.integrated in time (T2 -- T I) is proportional to ~
m
(A) (RITI -- R2T2) (B) (RI -- R2) T (C)(R I -- R2)IT', (D) (R l -- R2)(T j -- T2) ~
N

.~
36. The decay constant of the end product of a radioactive series is I
(A) zero (B) infinite (C) finite (non zero) (D) depends on the end product. .
.
1 / '

=
37. At time t 0, NI nuclei of decay constant AI & N2 nuclei of decay constant A2 are mixed, The decay
,~

J
rate of the mixture i s : ' i
~

(~: } -{A,-A,),
';:1 ]
(A) NNe-(A1+A 2 )t (B) +
,~

I 2

(C) +(N1Ale-Alt +N 2 A2e-A2t) (D) + NAN Ae~(Ai+A2)t


I I Z 2
Ij
UJ

;:;:; '-..r
38. A radioactive nuclide can decay simultaneously by two different processes which have decay constants §o·
.A, and A2, The effective decay constant of the nuclidejs A, then: ., ~
(" @ :'~I
1 1 1 , . -0
i
I: =
(A) A AI + /\'2 =
(B) A 1/2(A) + AI) --+-
(C) A -- AI A2 (D) A =~AIA2 ': .~
., .
'.~\
8 E
:......
rII .,.-"
Ii ~ I
"'-...Y
Modern Physics-2

39. The radioactive nucleus of an element X decays to a stable nucleus of element Y. A graph of the rate
of formation of Y against time would look like

t,
(A)~C (B)~~ (C)~I~ 0))~I( (E)~I",-
tis tis· tis tis tis

40. A radioacti ve substance is dissolved in a liquid and the solution is heated. The activity of the solution
(A) is smaller than that of element
(B) is greater than that of element
(C) is equal to that of element
I (D) will be smaller or greater depending upon whether the solution is weak or concentrated.
I 41. In a certain nuclear reactor, a radioactive nucleus is being produced at a constant rate =1000 Is. The
I' , mean life of the radionuclide is 40 minutes. At steady state, 'the number of radionuclide will be
(A) 4 x 104 (B) 24 x 104 (C) 24 X 105 (D) 24 X 106

c: 42. In the above question, ifthere were 20 x 105 radionuclide at t = 0, then the graph efN vIs t is
(
(I
,I (A)
A

:[?:~,
.

(B) :~ __;, (C) :r:-"":,


~

(D)NL
o t

(
43. The half life of a neutron is 800 sec. 108 neutrons at a certain instant are projected from one space
(I
station towards another space station, situated 3200 km away, with a velocity 2000 mls. Their velocity
remains constant during the journey. How many neutrons reach the other station? .
(A) 50 x 106 (B) 25 x 106 (C) 80 X 105 CD) 25 x 105

,: 44.
;'-j,o
A radioactive source in the form of a metal sphere of diameter 3.2 x 10-3 m emits p-particle at a
constant rate of 6.25 x 10 to particle/sec. The source is electrically insulated and all the ~-particle are
1
w
--- emitted from the surface. The potential of the sphere will rise to 1 V in time
J (A) 180 Il sec (B) 90 Il sec (C) 18 Il sec (D) 9 Il seC

1
"i 45• An.energy of 24.6 e V is required to remove one of the electrons from a neutral helium atom. The
..t:
<n
~ energy (II} eV) required to remove Both the electrons form a neutral helium atom is

'ii (A) 38.2 (B) 49.2 (C) 51.8 (D) 79.0


]

J...
w

~
:9.
'iii

L3

.~
r E - - - - - - - - - q - 9- - - - - - - - ­

,( ;
JEE-Physics .

EXERCISE (0-2)

1. When a nucleus with atomic number Z and mass number A undergoes a radioacti ve decay process:
(A) both Z and A will decrease, if the process is.ex. decay 4

(B) Z will decrease but A will not change, if the process is ~+ decay
(C) Z will decrease but A will not change, if the process is ~- decay
(D) Z and A will remain u~changed, if the process is y decay.
2. When the atomic number A of the nucleus increases
(A) initially the neutron-proton ratio is cOnstant = 1
(B) initially neutron-proton ratio increases and later decreases
(C) initial1y binding energy per nucleon increases and later decreases
(D) the binding energy per nucleon increases when the neutron-proton ratio increases.

3. Let mp be the mass of a proton, mn the mass of a neutron, Ml the mass of a ;gNe nucleus and M2 the

mass of a i~Ca nucleus. Then


(A) M z =2Ml (B) Mz > 2M, (C) Mz < 2M) (D) Ml < lO(mn + mp)
4. The decay constant of a radio acti ve substance is 0.173 (years )-1. Therefore:
(A) Nearly 63% of the radioactive substance will decay in (1/0.173) year.
(B) half life of the radio acti ve substance is (110.173) year.
(C) one -forth of the radioacti ve substance will be left after nearly 8 years.
(D) all the above statements are true.

5, Which of the following statement(s) is/arecorrect?


'l)

(a) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is less than the sum of the rest masses of its separated nucleons. }
. ' . ~

(b) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is greater than the sum of the rest masses ofits separated nucleons. b
(c) In nuclear fusion, energy is released by fusion of two nuclei of medium mass (approx. 100 amu) 1
(c) In nuclear f~sion, energy is released by fragmentation of a very heavy nucleus.
6. .The graph shown by the side shows the variation of potential energy ~ of a proton with its distance 'j
1
·lP.'1
-'"
from a fixed sodium nucleus, as it approaches the nucleus, placed at ollgin O. Then the portion. ~

(A) AB indicates dominance of nuclear repulsion


B

(B) AB indicates dominance of electrostatic repulsion ']


oc .r-!
(C) BC indicates dominance of nuclear attraction ::f.
ttl
(D) BC represents dominance of electrostatic interaction ><:
i
7. A nitrogen nucleus 7Nl4 absorbs a neutron and can transform into lithiuinnucleus 3Li7 under suitable ~ Q
conditions, after emitting
.
: '~ .~0 ..~
(A) 4 protons and 3 neutrons
. (B) 5 protons and 1 negative beta particle ~
­
(C) 1 alpha panicles and 2 gamma particles (D) 4 protons and 4 neutrons ~
LU_ 2
i! 10 E
.':~~J'

Ii:
(
Modern Phys;cs-2

8. The instability of the nUcleus can be due to various causes. An unstable nucleus emits radiations if
possible to transfonn into less unstable state. Then the cause and the result can be
(A) a nucleus of excess nucleons is a active

.(B) an excited nucleus of excess protons is ()- active

(C) an excited nucleus of excess protons is ~+ active


(D) an nucleus of excess neutrons is ()- active
9. In ()-decay, the Q-value of the process is E. Then
(A) K.E. of a ()-particle cannot exceed E.
(B) K.E. of anti neutrino emitted lies between Zero and E.
(C) N/Z ratio of the nucleus is altered.
(D) Mass number (A) of the nucleus is altered.
10. . Consider the following nuclear reactions and select the correct statements from the options that follow.
Reaction I : n ~ p + e- + v Reaction II : p ~ n + e+ + v
(A) Free neutron is unstable, therefore reaction I is possible
(B) Free proton is stable, therefore reaction II is not possible
(C) Inside a nucleus, both decays (reaction I and II) are possible
(D) Inside a nucleus,reaction I is not possible but reaction II is possible.
11.. When the nucleus of an electrically neutral atom undergoes a radioactive decay process, it will remain
neutral after the decay if the process is :
(A) a decay (B) ()- decay. (C) y decay (D) K-capture
12.' In the following, column I lists some physical quantities & the column II gives approx. energy values
associated with some of them. Choose the appropriate value of energy from column II for each of the
physical quantities in column I and write the correspondi~g letter A, B, C etc. against the number
(i), (ii), (iii), etc. of the physical quantity in the answer book. In your answer, the sequence of
column I should be maintained.
~ Column I Column II
t
r:; (i) Energy ofthennal neutrons (A) 0.025eV

J: (ii)
(iii)
Energy of X-rays
Binding energy per nucleon
(B)
(C)
0.5 eV
3eV
(iv) Photoelectric threshold of rpetal (D) 20 eV
(E) 10 keY
(F) 8 MeV

:)

11 I'
.. II1II

(
"'IV"".",, I "),;1111..;;'-'"

8. The instability of the nucleus can be due to various causes. An unstable nucleus emits radiations if
possible to transform into less unstable state. Then the cause and the result can be
(A) a nucleus of excess nucleons is a active
(B) an excited nucleus of excess protons is ~- active
(C) an excited nucleus of excess protons is ~+ active
(D) an nucleus of excess neutrons is ~- active
9. In ~-decay, the Q-value of the process is E. Then
(A) K.E. of a ~-particle cannot exceed E.
(B) K.E. of anti neutrino emitted lies between Zero and E.
(C) N/Z ratio of the nucleus is altered.
(D) Mass number (A) of the nucleus is altered.
10. ,Consider the following nuclear reactions and select the correct statements from the options that follow.
Reaction I : n ~ p + e- + v Reaction II :p ~ n + e+ + v
(A) Free neutron is unstable, therefore reaction I is possible
(B) Free proton is stable, therefore reaction II is not possible
(C) Inside a nucleus, both decays '(reaction I and II) are possible
(D) Inside a nucleus, reaction I is not possible but reaction II is possible.
11. When the nucleus of an electrically neutral atom undergoes a radioactive decay process, it will remain
neutral after the decay if the process is :
(A) a decay (B) ~- decay , (C) y decay (D) K-capture
12. ,In the following, column I lists some physical quantities & the column II gives approx. energy; yalues
associated with some of them. Choose the appropnate value of energy from column II for each 'of the
physical quantities in column I and write the correspondi!1g letter A,'B, C etc. against the number
(i), (ii), (iii), etc. of the physical quantity in the answer book. In, your answer, the sequence of
column I should be m a i n t a i n e d . '
~ Column I Column II
~
<i' (i) Energy of thermal neutrons (A) 0.025 e V e
1: (ii)
(iii)
Energy of X-rays
Binding energy per nucleon
(B)
(C)
0.5 eV

. 1i (iv) Photoelectric threshold of lJletal (D)


3eV

20eV C
-c
(E) 10 keY
i
~
(F) 8 MeV C
] C
,;::,
1 C
i
~ C
~
.,;:; C

1
~
C
C
C
E~'~------------------~11------------------~--
C
L ,;:

(~

('"
,
J~E-Physics

c;..

!' t

EXERCISE - JM
\ '1-\ '\ ~ 1
\" -~ ..,) - \ "'-n.. ) '"...'~~.'-
' , •• •. I

\
r" '-,'
'. . ' \
.>' lj,..
J .v.:J

~) If No is the original mass of the substance of half-life period t1/2 = 5 years, then the amount of
substance left after 15 years is- [AIEEE . 2002]

No
(1) N.o
. .___.." ./ 8 (2) 16 (3) No (4) No .
2 4
2. At a specific instant emission of radioacti ve compound is deflected in a magnetic field. The compound
can emit­
(i) electrons (H) protons (iii) He2+ (i v) neutrons
The emission at the instant can be­ [AIEEE - 2002]
.","_J-l1-f:H, iii (2) i, ii, iii, iv
(3) iv (4) ii, iii
3. ' Which of the following radiations has the least wavelength? [AIEEE - 2003]
/' .
. ~~r) y-rays (2) l3-rays . (3) a-rays' (4) X-rays .
,,4.)' When U 238 nucleus originally at rest, decays by emitting an alpha particle having a speed u, the recoil
speed of the residual nucleus is- [AIEEE - 2003]

/r2~~
4u. 4u 4u
\.
(1) 238 (2) - 234 (4) - 238
.~

(5. )
" ... /
:A radioactive sample at any instant has its disintegration rate 5000 disintegration per minute. After
,

5 minutes, the rate is 125~4isintegrations per minute. Then, the decay constant (per minute) is­
[AIEEE - 2003]
(1) 0.4 In 2 (2) 0.21n 2 (3) 0.1 In 2 (4) 0.8 In 2
" 6. A nucleus with Z = 92 emits the following in a sequence: ~,a, 13-, p-, a,. f!:, g,/x, 13-, 13-, a" .13;, P,+~
( a. The Z of the resulting nucleus is- [AIEEE ­
'.
(1) 76 ~2}78 (3) 82 (4) 74
7; ~hich of the following carinot be emitted by radioactive substances during their decay?
[AIEEE ­
(
"....{r).Protons (2) Neutrinos (3) Helium nuclei (4) Electrons
\.

8. In the nuclear fusion reaction,


(

2H + 3H ~ 4He + n

112
f
'\.
given that the repulsive potential energy between the twe;> nuclei is 7.7 x 10-14 J, the temperature.
,(
\.
which the gases must be heated to initiate -the reaction is nearly [Boltzmann's cbns

k =1.38 X 10-23 IIK]- [AIEEE;~;;

(1) 107 K (2) 105 K (3) 103 K (4) 109 K .

12

Modern Physlcs~2

9. If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is 13.6 e V, the energy required to remove the
electron from the first excited state ofLi2+ is- [AIEEE - 2003]

(1) 30.6 eV (2) 13.6 eV (3) 3.4 eV (4) 122.4 eV

10. A nucleus disintegrates into two nuclear parts which have their velocities in the ratio 2: 1 The ratio of
their nuclear sizes will be- [AIEEE - 2004]

(1) 2 113 : 1 (2) 1 : 3 112 (3) 3 112 : 1 (4) 1 : 2 113

11. The binding energy permicleon of deuteron (~H) and helium nucleus (~He) is 1.1 MeV and 7 MeV

respectively.. If two deuteron nuclei react to fonn a single helium nucleus, then the energy released is­
[AIEEE - 2004]

(1)13.9 MeV (2) 26.9 MeV (3) 23.6 MeV (4) 19.2 MeV

12. The intensity of gamma radiation from a given source is I. On passing through 36 mm of lead, it is
reduced to 118. The thickness of lead, which will reduce the intensity to 112 will be- [AIEEE~2005]
;: ;

j"
(1)6mm (2)9mm (3) 18 mm" (4) 12mm

13. Starting with a sample of pure 66Cu, 7/8 of it decays into Zn in 15 min. The corresponding
half-life is- [AIEEE - 2005]

(1) 10 min (2) 15 min (3) 5 min (4) 721 mm


.

14. If radius of the gAl nucleus is estimated to be 3.6 fermi, then the radius of ~~5Te nucleus be nearly-
lg> lg>
~. w
..... [AIEEE - 2005]
Ii N
,~
1­.... 1 (1) 6 fermi (2) 8 fermi (3)4 fermi (4) 5 fermi
~ ~
1
1:
lIs. A nuclear transformation is denoted by X(n, a) ~ ~Li. Which of the following is the nucleus of
.".
.-: l
~ element X ? [AIEEE - 2005]

ti (1) "~2C (2) ~oB (3) ~B (4) lIBe


'../

j 16.
w
An alpha nucleus of energy ~ mv 2 bombards a heavy nuclear target of charge Ze. Then the'distance
I()

0 of closest approach for the alpha nucleus will be proportional to- [AIEEE - 2006]
....

~
.m: (1) v2 (2) 11m (3) lIv 4 . (4) l/Ze

~
E 13
'"1'I,1
It.
{
"-"
lEE-Physics

17. When 3Li7 nuclei are bombarded by protons and the resultant nuclei are 4Be8, the emitted particles
will be- [AIEEE - 2006]
(1) alpha particles (2) beta particles
(3) gamma photons (4) neutrons

18. The energy spectrum of~-particles [number N(E) as a function of ~-energy E] emitted from a radioactive
source is- [A IEEE - 2006]

6fN's bE Eo
(2)
N(EJ\
~E
Eo
.
(3)
N(EJ -
~E
Eo
(4)
N(EJ
LLLEf\

Eo

19. If the bindi.ng energy per nucleon in ~Li and ~He nuclei are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV respectively,

then in the reaction: p + ~Li ...,. 2~Heenergy of proton must be- [AIEEE - 2006]

(1) 28.24 MeV (2) 17.28 MeV


(3) 1.46 MeV (4) 39.2 MeV
".0. If Mo is the mass of an oxygen isotope g017, Mp and Mn are the masses of a proton and a neutron,
respectively, the nuclear binding energy of the isotope is- [A IEEE - 2007]

(1) (M.o:- 8Mp)c2 (2) (Mo - 8Mp - 9Mn)c2


2 (4) (Mo - 17Mn)c2
(3) :tv'!oc '"
.:t...
.'8.
1. In ga;mma ray emission from a nucleus [AIEEE-2007] ~ l.S J
(1) both the neutron number and the proton number change t -t
(2) there is no change in the proton number and the neutron number 1 i1i

(
(3) only the neutron number changes j. l7i
;t
(4) only the proton number changes
'I.
J -::::
.

-::::
1:
'- The half-life period of a radioactive element X is same as the meaI11ife time of another radioactive 1
element Y. Initially they have the same number of atoms. Then-
(1) X will decay faster than Y
[AIEEE • 2007]
;;:J
1
1
§ 1ttl
]
.~
..r;
(2) Y will decay faster than X -§
~
~
]
. (3) Y and X have same decay rate initially
. (4) XanQ Y decay at same rate always I
,,:::.
!1:!.
-::::.
!1:!.

~
\_­ § E
14 E
c
Modern Physics-2

23. This question contains Statement-I and Statement-2. Out of the four choices given after the statements,
choose the one that best describes the two statements.
Statement-I: Energy is released when heavy nuclei undergo fission 01' Hg~lt nur:'')i undergo fusion.
Statement-2: For heavy nuclei, binding energy per ntlcleon increases with increasing Z while for
light nuclei it decreases with increasing Z. [AIEEE - 2008]
(1) Statement-I is false, Statement..;2 is true.

(2) Statement-! is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-I.
(3) Statement-I is true, Statement-2 is true; Staterrient-2 is not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
(4) Statement-! is true, Statement-2 is false.

24. E"

The above is a plot of binding energy per nucleon Eb , against the nuclear mass M; A, B, C, D, E, F
correspond to different nuclei. Consider four reactions: [AIEEE - 2009]
(i) A + B --?- C + B (ii) C --?- A + B + B
(iii) D + E --?- F + E (iv)F--?-D+E+E
where E is the energy released 1 In which reactions is E positive 1:
l
g> (1) (ii) and (iv) (2) (ii) and (iii) (3) (i) and (iv) (4) (i) and (iii)
I ~
1. Directions: Questions number 25 - 26 are based on the following paragraph.
0.. .

~ c

I
i
} A nucleus of mass M + Llm is at rest and decays into two daughter nuclei of equal mass ~ each.
1
...r: .

~ Speed of light is c.
ii \.

1 25. The speed of daughter nuclei is :­ [AIEEE~2010]


?
~

i
I:J:j
:?
.~
(1)c~~
~m
(2) c M+~m (3) c)2~m (4)C~~
51
~ 26.
'f}
The binding energy per nucleon for the parent nucleus. is E J an that for the daughter nucl~i is~. f'

I
!!:!.
THen:-

(1) EI = 2E2 (2) ~ = 2E J (3)E J >~ (4)~>El


[AIEEE _ 2010] "J

~z
.E 15

f
c ,JEE-Phys;cs
C
27.1 A radioactive nucleus (initial mass number A and atomic numberZ) emits 3 a-particles and 2 positrons.
G
,'." The ratio of number of neutrons to that of protons in the final nucleus will be:- [AIEEE • 2010]
o
, (1) A-2-4 (2) A -2-8 (3) A-2-4 (4) A-2-12
Cl
-', 2-2 2-4 2-8 2-4

28. ,'The half life of a radioactive substance is 20 minutes. The approximate time interval (t2 - t1) between

the time t2 when j of it has decayed and time tl when OJ of it had decayed is:- [AIEEE • 2011]

(1) 20 min (2) 28 min (3) 7 min (4) 14 min


29; After absorbing a slowly, moving neutron of mass mN (momentum -0) a nucleus of mass M breaks
=
into two nuclei of masses ml and 5m l(6m l M + InN)' respectively. If the de Broglie wav~length of
the nucleus with mass ml is A., then de Broglie wavelength of the other nucleus will be:­
[AIEEE - 2011]

A.
(1) 25 A. (2) 5A. (3) "5 (4) A.

3.6~" Statement-I: A nucleus having energy EI decays be P- emission to daughter nucleus having energy
Ez, but the P- rays are emitted with a continuous energy spectrum having end point energy
EI-~'
, Statement·1: To conserve energy and momentum in p~decay at least three particles must take part in
the transformation. [AIEEE> - 2011]
(1) Statement-1 is incorrect, statement-2 is correct
(2) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is incorrect ~
l
(3) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 correct; statement-2 is the correct explanation of statement-1
(4) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is correct; statement -2 is not the correct explanation of statement-I.}
31. Assume that a neutron breaks into a proton and an electron. The energy released during this'process j'
is : , ' " ' [AIEEE - 2012] 1
<7i
(Mass of neutron = 1.6725 x 10-27 kg i
11
=
Mass of proton 1.6725 x 10-27 kg ]
1
"
j ; ~
Mass of electron = 9 x 10-31 kg)
,
"'\
(1) 5.4 MeV (2) 0.73 MeV (3) 7.10 MeV (4) 6.30 MeV i
Itl

~
r;;
~
j
@

~
16 E
Modern Physics-2.­

EXERCISE .. JA

ALL ANSWERS OF THE QUESTIONS JEE-2007 ONWARDS ARE AS GIVEN ON

Qj ~:·~o~:m::::::~fanUcle~: ~"'~~Q.~j ;~E;03(s:r~1~'-


, \ ' l \ ,.

Q",",M I
~~e,/{A) V 0: m (B) v 0: 11m
(C) v oc m2 (D) v 0: 11m2
2. The nuCleus of element X (A =220) undergoes a-decay. If Q-value of ~j!..eJ'~action is 5.5 Me V, then
the kinetic energy of a-particle is:
,
.i"V :,'-,' ,.,,) , ' [JEE 2003 (Scr)]
L~-'/
' (A) 5.4 MeV (B) 10.8 MeV ,/ , '
(C) 2.7 MeV (D) None
(r3:J
\ / A radioactive sample emits n /J-particles in-2 sec. In next 2 sec it emits 0.75 n /J-particles, what is the
--' mean life of the sample? [JEE 2003]
4. A 280 days old radioactive substance shows an activity of 6000 dps, 140 days later it's activity
becomes 3000dps. What was its initial activity; [JEE 2004 (Scr)]
(A) 20000 dps ,(B) 24000 dps
(C) 12000 dps (D) 6000,dps
5. The age of a rock containing lead and uranium is equal to 1.5 x 109 yrs. The uranium is decaying into
9
lg. lead with half life equal to 4.5 x 10 yrs. Find the ratio of lead to uranium present in the rock, assuming
initially no lead was present in the rock. (Given 21/3 = 1.259). [JEE 2004]
~
16•
.

If a star convert~ all of its Helium into oxygen nUcleus, find the amount of energy released per

,~ nucleus of oxygen. 0 =15.9994 amu and He =4.0026 amu [JEE' 2005 (Scr)]
.~
(A) 7.26 MeV (B) 7 MeV

~' (C) 10.24 MeV (D) 5.12 MeV


a.

j"
Highly energetic electrons are bombarded on a target of an element containing 30 neutrons. The ratio

t ' of radii of nucleus to that of helium nucleus is (14)113. Find R_,. A 11~ [JEE 2005]

~ (a) atomic number of the nucleus

~ .
~ (b) the frequency ofKa line ofthe X-ray produc~. (R = 1.1x 107 m- 1 and c =3 X 108 mls)
. ~ 8. ?'Given a sample ofRadium-226 having half-life of 4 days. Find the probahility, a nucleus disintegrates
o
~ within 2 half lives. [JEE 2006]
B .'
~ ~r3/4

~-~~~~----~~----~---------------------
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 (D) 114

§
E- '~ 17

( '"
'<, . ..t
()I lEE-Physics

9. Match the following Columns [JEE 2006]


Column 1 Column 2
(A) Nuclear fusion {.I 6( (P) Converts some matter into energy
(B) Nuclear fission p v( (Q) Generally occurs for nuclei with low atomic number
(C) l3-decay~ ((iiji (R)General1y occurs for nuclei with higher atomic number
(D) Exothermic nUr~rar reaction p~ ~\ (S) Essentially proceeds by weak nuclear forces
10. In the options given below, let E denote the rest mass energy of a nucleus and n a neutron. The correct
option is [JEE 2007]

.•."...J A}E
236
.. (
92
U) > E (1371)
53 + E (97)
39 Y + 2E(n) (B) E(V;U) < E(I~;I) + E(~~Y) + 2E(n)

(C) E(V;U) < E(lt2Ba) + E(~:Kr) + 2E(n) (D) E(V;U) =E(lt2Ba) + E(~:Kr) + 2E(n)

11. Some laws/processes are given in Column I. Match these with the physical phenomena given in
Column II and indicate your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 x 4 matrix gi ven in .
the ORS. .[JEE 2007]
Column I Column II
(A) Transition between two atomic energy levels (T'~ \ . \? (P) Characteristic X-rays
(B) Electron emission from a material (~ I ~
. (Q) Photoelectric effect
"'J
(C) Mosley's law y (R) Hydrogen spectrum
(D) Change of photon energy into kinetic energy of electrons~ (S) l3-decay
(\_,J 12~ Assume that the nuclear binding energy per nucleon (B/A) versus mass number (A) is as shown in .

;.~\ the figure. Use this plot to choose the correct choice(s) given below: [JEE 2008]
i/

1
B/A

i
t,; 6­

2-11---..... &­
Ii
O~-----ri----~i------~~ ]
100 200 A
1
(A) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the range of 1 < A < 50 will release energy .. i
(B) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the range of 51 < A < 100 will release energy i
w

f" (C) Fission of. a nucl~us


.
lying in the mass range of 100 < A < 200 will release energy when broken ~ ,
into two equal fragments
o
1
­
,
(D) Fission of a nucfeu$ lying in the mass range of 200 < A < 260 will release energy when broken
. ,. :0­
g
i
"

,
into two equal fragments §.
18 E
.... ;':',
('

£
Modern Physics-2

~3. A radioactive sample S1 having an activity of 5jlCi has twice the number of nuclei as another sample
S2 which has an activity of 1OjlCi. The half lives of S 1 and S2 can be : [JEE 2008]
(A) 20 years and 5 years, respectively
(B) 20 years and 10 years, respectively
(C) 10 years each
(D) 5 years each
Paragraph for Question Nos. 14 to 16

Scie,ntists are working hard to develop nuclear fusion reactor. Nuclei of heavy hydrogen, ~H, known

as deuteron and denoted by D, can be thought of as a candidate for fusion reactor. The D-D reaction

is tH +t H -?~ He + n + energy . In the core of fusion reactor, agas of heavy hydrogen is fully ioni~d
, , .

into deuteron nuclei and electrons. This collection of ~H nuclei and electrons is known as plasD1a.
,
The nuclei move randomly in the reactor core and occasionally come close enough for nuclear fusion
to take place. Usuall'y, the temperatures in the reactor core are too high and no material wall can be
used to confine the plasma. Special techniques are used which confine the plasma for a time to before
tAe particles flyaway from the core. Ifn is the density (number/volume) of deuterons, the product nto
is called Lawson number. In one of the criteria, a reactor is termed successful if Lawson number is
.'
greater than 5 x 10 14 s/cm3 • It may be helpful to use the following:

e2
Boltzmann constant k = 8.6 X 10-5 eV/K; -4- = 1.44 x 10-9 eVm~
nEo '
t In the core of nuclear fusion reactor, the gas becomes plasma because of [JEE-2009]

~~
..5'14.
CS
(A) strong nuclear force acting between the deuterons
J (B) Coulomb force acting between the deuterons
,(C) Coulomb force acting between deuteron-electron pairs

~
CD) the high temperature maintained inside the reactor core
15. Assume that two deuteron nuclei in the core of fusion reactor at temperature T are moving towards
:;

~
each other, each with kinetic energy 1.5 kT, when the separation between them is large enough to
. ;.
neglect Coulomb potential energy. Also neglect any interaction from other particles in the core. The

.~~

, minimum temperature T required for them to reach a separation of 4 x 10-15 m is in the range
,[JEE-2009]
(A) 1.0 x 109 K < T < 2.0 X 109 K (B) 2.0 x 109 K < T< 3.0 X 109 K
(C) 3.0 X 109 K<T < 4.0 x 109 K ,(D) 4.0 X 109 K <T < 5.0 x 109 K

-
19 ,

"'~.>"
~,
­
.7

,
( -"
lEE-Physics

16. Results of calculations' tor four different designs of a fusion reactor using D-D reaction are given
';'i:

below. Which ofthese'is\most promising based on Lawson criterion? [JEE-2009]


(A) deuteron density:: 2.0 X10 12 cm-3 , confinement time:: 5.0 X 10-3 s
(B) deuteron density = 8.0 x 10 14 cm-3 ,confinement time:: 9.0 xlO- 1 s
(C) deuteron density =4.0 x 1023 cm-3, confinement time =1.0 x 1O-11. s
(D) deuteron density:: 1.0 x10 24 cm-3 , confinement time == 4.0 x 10-12 S

/-
17. To determine the half life of a radioactive element, a student plots a graph ofe.nld~;t)1 versus 1. Here

d~;t) is the rate of radioactive decay at time t. If the number of radioactive nuclei of this element
;'
{I.••

decreases by a factor of p after 4. 16 years, the value of pis [JEE-2010]

6" ·....··..···f..····.. ~··r·····. H··l..·····..·..r.. · h •••••• j.......···..r

f\,
5 H....····..··r..· . '····I····..·····t·H····..·..i···..···,···!·....·.. ····f
(
IdN(t)1 4" ............ ~ .......... ; ....·.. ·i·..·.·. .
·l......···..·l..··.......·l·
in i!:!
,i.. . . . . .; . . . ·il·. ·....·..·ri

'\_.

--;:rr-- 3 ......·..·....r..·......··t..·. . ·.
(' ; : ; t : :
\

" 2u ·t·..····....t......··..·t..·····..·. ~ ..······~. ·;..·..···n"r!


...... u· ..
: : : j :
1 ! ! ! ! ! !
C 2 345 678
{' Years
I.,

e" 18. The activity of a freshly prepared radioactive sample is 10 10 disintegrations per second, whose mean
life 1s 109 s. The mass of an atoin of this radioisotope is 10-25 kg. The mass (in mg) of the radioacti ve
C sample is [JEE-2011]
3
( 19. A freshly prepared sample ofa radioisotope of half-life 1386 s has activity 10 distintegrations per
second. Given that .en 2 = 0.693, the fraction of the initial number of nuclei (expressed in nearest :s.
( integer percentage) that will dec!,\y in the first 80 s after preparation of the sample is.[JEE-2013] $
('01

( Paragraph for Questions 20 and 2 1 . .f!


, j
The mass of a nucleus ~ X is less than the sum of the masses of (A - Z) number of neutrons and Z Ii
C number of protons in the nucleus. The energy equivalent to the corresponding mass difference is l
C known as the binding energy of the nucleus. A heavy nucleus of mass M can break into two light l'
nuclei of masses m1 anct:m 2 only if (m l 1" mz) < M. Also two light nuclei of masses m3 and m4 can ;f ,
( undergo complete fusiol1iand form a heavy nucleus of mass M' only if em3 + m4) > M'. The masses of]
( some neutral atoms are given in the table below :­ [;lEE Advance-2013] -:: : .
, . 11

C
,' H 1.007825 u 2H
I 2.014102 u 3H
I 3.016050 u ~He
4.002603 u
I
6L' 6.015123 u 7L' 7.016004 u 70Zn 69.925325 u 82Se 81.916709 u
.~
3 1 3 1 30 3·{
C IS2Gd
64 151.919803 u 206Pb 205.974455 u
82
209B'
83 I 208.980388 u
L-_~. _
2WpO
84 209.982876 U
.-­~
2 ~
C (lu:: 932 MeV/c ) .-­~
. .
2
~

20. -. The kinetic energy (in keV) of the alpha particle, when the nucleus ~!O Po at rest undergoes alpha
C, . ~

) decay, IS :~
\- (A) 5319' (B) 5422 (C) 5707 (D) 5818 §
--------------------2200----------~--------E
I
(,
),
,,-,
(
Modern Physics~ 2

21. The correct statement is :~


(A) The nucleus ~Li can emit an alpha particle
(B) The nucleus i!Opo can emit a proton
(C) Deuteron and alpha particle can undergo complete fusion
(D) The nuclei ~g Zn and ;: Se can undergo complete fusion
22. Match List I .of the nuclear processes with List II containing parent nucleus and one of the end
products of each process and then select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists:
List I List II [JEE Advance-2013]
P. Alpha decay 1. 150
8 ~7
15 N +.....

Q. p+ decay 2. 238U
92
234
~90
Th +..... ( ~

R. Fission 3, 185B'
83
184
1 ~82
Pb +.....

S. Proton emission 4. 239p 140


94 U~57
L a+ .....

Codes:
P Q R s
(A) 4 2 1 3
(B) 1 3 2 4
(C) 2 1 4 3
(D) 4 3 2 1

tg>
..­Nw
b
l
j
·J
.1£
"'"

1
w

1
.".­ l
~
"i
0

~.
@
La
~
_.' E 21 .
I~
f
lEE-Physics

ANSWER KEY

1. 23.6 MeV 7. 28 MeV


2. (T1I2 = 10.8 sec) S. 9.00 x 106
D1 40 40
9. Fusion, 24
3. 19K ~ 18Ar+ +le0 + V
(ii) 4.2 x 109 years 10. (a) N =.!..[ a(l e- A1 ) + ANoe Al ]

4. ~
ln2
t-
(InS}
3No
A.

(b) 2' 2No


5. 8/3xlO 18 sec 11. 6 litre
6.' 2.48 X 10-12 m 12. 6.04 x 109 yrs

1. e 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. B
6. B. 7. e 8. e 9. B 10. B
11. A 12. D 13. D 14. e 15. A
16~ B 17. B 18. e 19. e 20. e
21. D 22. B 23. B 24. e 25. D
26. A 27. e 28. B 29. B 30. B
31. B 32. e 33. A 34. e 35. B
36. A 37. e 38. A 39. E 40. e
41. e 42. e 43. B 44. e 45. D

,
{J
I

J
~----------------------------------------~----------------------------------------------~I ~
$
"I ',.,;,' :?J.-'_r.;> ';'~",-.,",;'.'" -, ~

o
)
t--......L-----J..--1.---L-----'_..1...--.J..--/1 i
1E
(I
I" ,) I ,) I .. I') I I." I') 0 ur IU::; IJ
'Ii, l
ii
'l"
~
'(IfI

~r

C
1. ' . ADS. (A)

4.
7.
ADS. (B)
2.
5.
ADS. V =1.546 x 1018 Hz
ADS. (A)

ADS. 0.259
3.
6.
ADS. 1.75n = No(1- e-4A.), 6.95 sec,

ADS. (C) .
S. . ADS. (C)

,
(2
In -4 J
3
I
UJ

?
j
y
9. ADS. (A) P, Q; (B) P, R; (C) S, P; (D) P, Q, R . 10. ADS. (A)
..,
...­

\rII 11. . ADS. (A) R, P; (B) Q, S; (C) P; (D) Q 12. ADS. (B, D) ...­~
.g
13. ADS. (A) 14. ADS. (D) 15. ADS. (A) 16. ADS. (B) a
@
)1
17. ADS. (S) IS. ADs. (1) 19. ADS. 4 20. ADS. (A)
\'Ift 21. ADS. (C) 22. ADS. (C) §

.' 1\

22 E
)11
'~J

(
()

.~
j
J
!

1
J

I CONTENTS~
-Rotational Dynamics
;:
,j • Key': Concepts : - Formulae and Basic Theory 1
c I • Exercise (8·1) Conceptual Subjective Problems 4
) • Exercise.(S-2) Conceptual Subjective Problems 9
'Ir • Exercise (0-1)­ Single Correct MCQ's 12
'} • Exercise (0-2) :, Miscellaneous Type Problems 22
r' ,

"I

/
• Exercise (J-M) Previous 10 years AIEEE Problems 31
) ,
• Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years IIT-JEE Problems 36
Key 46

~)

• Answer

~-, ­

J.. .
j

~-
r
'j
(
)

t-

t-­
~~

r
'. ,

I
r

I'

~
'\ _~tlal Rotational ,Dynamics
,

I KEY CONCEPTS
1

I
1 ::: ;'Types of.motion: (;
1. Translational ~ If all the particles have same velocity at any given time than it is translational
motion. Also rigid body moves parallel to itselfin translational motion.

2. Pure Rotational ~ A rigid body is said to be in pure rotation if every paxtic:;le of the body moves in
a circle and the centres of all the circles lie on a straight line called the axis of rotation.

I 3. Combined translation & rotational ~ A general plane motionis a combination of translation and
,I , rotation.

Relation between linear & angular variables


;I '. (A) Distance S re =
:l (B) Acceleration
dV
a l = dt (rate of change of speed) =r a
,
(tangentially directed)

:J
V2
J ar = -r =co2r (directed towards centre)
, , Angular velocity of a point on rigid body wrt other point on rigid body

all points are rotating with angular velocity co with respect to each other.

1
~I ENERGY OF A RIGID BODY ABOUT A FIXED AXIS
1
Gravitational P.E. U=mgh cm Kinetic energy , K. ="2100 2

, MOMENT OF INERTIA
~ Definition: Property of a rigid body by virtue of which it opposes changein its rotational velocity
( ~ (angular velocity) is known as:MI.

1i
,~
This is always wrltten wrt a axis of rotation. ,
This plays sam.e role in rotational motion as mass plays in translational motion
Difference between mass &:MI is that mass is property of body & is independent of any reference
o from choosenbut:MI depends on the
] (i) axis of rotation '
o~ly
'-
~
;

./ ,(ii) shape ofth~ body ] mass depends on these two things

I
C (iii) size of the body

1 (iv) density of the material of the body

c{
(, mI.
~2.
MI of a point mass: I = mr2
' ~ ' t "d' t"'b t' I '
"

MI lor pom mass IS rl u Ion: yy = mll 2 + m2r22 + ml3


2+ .........

r :a'
"it JFor continuous mass distributiori
('I',
/). . ~ 1~. = 1. dm r2 where r is 1. distance of any element from axis of rotation, ,

:1
(
~

E-·------------~------------~------------------------~---
1
)l
C
£
.jEE~Physics ,
"
I
1,
. Importantpoint
Mloftwo or more than two bodies can be added or subtracted only when all MI are written w.r.t.
same axis.

. Uniform ring I =m.r2

(about an axis passing through centre and perpendicular to the plane.)

MR2
Disc - ­ 2
(about axis passing through centre and perpendicular to plane of disc).
Hollow cylinder (about yy' axis) m.r2 = Solid cylinder (abotJt yy' axis) MR 2
Note: Independent of length of cylinder Solid cylinder (about yy' axis) =-­
ofsame mass. 2 .
y' y'
"
-
I
r i

IT
i,.

~
IC
"- .'

=-32
y
r
Hollow sphere (about a diameter) MR2
r
Solid sphere (about a diameter)
2M
=-R2
.5
r.
Uniform rod ~ass M length .e = mt (about axis passing through one end & perpendicular)..

. ml2
uniform rod =-­
12
L ,I·
f ,
.: 112
Il12 l~
.114 .1
<l-

(about an axis passing at "4 from one end and perpendicular)


1=0 (uniform rod (about axis passing through rod) ·11
1
·8
Parallel-axis theorem: , , ~

Used to find moment of inert:ia about an axis which parallel to the aXis. passing through C.M. I

~=IcM +Md ~
2
. .
ICM -+ NIT of the rigid body about an axis through C M , ~ C
Ip -+ MI of the rigid b~dy about an axis which is parallel to the above axis throl,lgh CM &is at 1 r
distance d from the .axis through CM ! y
Theorem of perpendicular axis =
I I +I ' . ' ' " . ,. 1~
. This theorem is applicable only for the larinnar bodies (Le. plane bodies). (e.g. ring, disc, not sphere) ~
. Ix & Iy are MI of body about a common pt: 0 in two mutually 1. directions in .the plane of body I ),
('
'-"

Iz is MI of body.about a axis 1. to X.& Y. axis'& passing through pt. 0 . . , l ! J~,


. .
U.l j
i
~~----~----------------~-------------------------'E
2
j
J
(
~~..7
,
1 ill
\ Rotational Dynamics

Radius of gyration: k = .J ~. I is Ml about the axis, for which k is written.

Torque: 't=F I sine


;\:
­
Vectorial representatidii & understanding of torque: t=rxF •
o
r ./F
A'
"'Torque due to force of gravity: t=~x(Mg)
, Relation between torque and angular acceleration of a rigid body:
't =10. 'text =Ia where 't'and I are both written about axis of rotation.
, Angular momentum of a: particle: L =r x P.

,Angular momentum of a system of particle:

(a) .For collection of point masses'L =l:Lj


(b) For rigid body L axis = I~is CD
Here Lax1s means component ofangular momentum along the axis

Relation between torque and angular momentum: text =~ 'taxis =


dL axis "
dt
Conservation of angular momentum:
If external torqu~ about a axis is zero then angular momentum ofthe system about that axis will
=
remains conserved. So if 'taxis =0 =::) Laxis constant
COMBINED ROTATION AND TRANSLATION
d'Lambert's theorem says that "every possible motion of a rigid body can be represented as a
combination of translational motion of the centre of mass ,and rotation about an axis through the
centre of mass". '
,I
\J ~KineticEnergy
!2,
L
2 +1.1 00 2
KE= 2 MVem 2 em
i Angular momentum ' " ,
\
I! '
1
Theorem: Angular momentum of a body about any point or axis A = L- of body about C.M.
'
(
!
11
(parallel to axis A) + [ of C.M. about axis A. I
[ = Lbody-em I + I[em I
~Instantaneous Point/Axis of rest '
J ~ ,Axis about which combined rotation & translatiomH motion of a body can be represented as pure
~
~J 1
rotation.
Note:
"
f
~
~1 s \ 1
( . , , ' 1. The axis is ..L to the pl~ne of motion 2.' Can not be used for acceleration 3. KE = 2 11A0R 002
)
(
~Equilibrium & Toppling, ,,',
~I ~ necessary condition,s:forequilibrium of an obJect:
~ 1. The resultant external force must eq~al zero. l:F =0

~t ' ~'. ,

f ~" 2. The resultant external torque'about any axis must be zero: tt=O
)
): El-"---------------"""!"""-'---------~-~-
~
~.

/
, lEE-Physics

EXERCISE (S-1)

1., A car accelerates uniformly from rest and reaches a speed of27 mls in 9.00 s. If the diameter of a tire
is 60 cm, find (a) the numbe~ of revolutions the tire makes during this motion, assuming that no
slipping occurs. (b) What is the final rotational speed of a tire in revolutions per second?'
2. A symmetric lamina·of mass M consists .of
a square shape with a semicircular
;
A 7' ........
B.
,, Ij

section over each of the edge of the square as in fig. The side of the square is !
i
'

2a. The moment of inertia of the lamina about an axis through its centre of
mass and perpendicular to the plane is 1.6Ma2• The IJ10ment of inertia of the ( j
j

lamina about the tangent AB in the plane of lamina is _ __ 1


(I
3. Two rods of equal mass m and length [ lie along the x axis and y axis with their centres origin. What j
j
is the moment ofinertia of both about the line x=y :
4~ What is the moment of inertia Id of a uniform solid cube of side a and mass M, pivoted about an axis, f
\

perpendicular to one of the sides and through the center of the cube?

a
...........
(
~L
'';'-c.", a a

".
s. Aiorce of F = 2i + 3) N is applied to an object that is pivoted about a fixed axle aligned along the z
;. '.
on
~

coordinate axis. If the force is applied 'at the point r =4i+sJ m, find (a) the magnitude of the net i
torque ~bout the z axis and (b) the direction of the torque vector ' t . ' ,1
6. In an
,
experiment with a 'beam balance on unknown mass m is balanced by two known massi'm is !2
balanced by two known masses of 16 kg and 4 kg as shown in figure. -~
, ]
/2 ~

~
, 1
12 ,~

~. 1 1 1
1 c
$
ffi
Find the value of the unknown mass m. ~
7., Figure shows a vertical force'applied tangentially to a uniform cylinder ~
...o \.J
- " I

of weight F g• The coefficient of static friction between the cylinder and ~


both surfaces is O.SOO. In terms ofFg' find the maximum force P that e9 '/,--,
~

can be applied that does not cause the cyIinderJo rotate. ~


------~----~-------------E
!
Rotatio'nal Dynamics

8. A3.0 kg bobbin consl~ts


.,:,
of a central cylinder ofradius 5.0 cm and two end plates
each ofradius 6.0 cm. It is placed on a slotted incline, where friction is sufficient

to prevent sliding. A\b]ock of mass 4.5 kg is suspended from a cord wound

around the bobbin and passing through the slot under the incline. If the bobbin is

in static equilibrium, ~hat is the angle of tilt ofthe incline?

9. In the following figure r J and r2 are 5 cm and 30 cm respectively. If the moment of inertia of the
wheel is 5100 kg-m 2 then what will be its angular acceleration? .

"
10. A unifonn rod ofmass m and length L is held at rest by a force F applied at ,
it's end as shown in the vertical plane. The ground is sufficiently rough. Find
( (a) ForceF
,.- (b) Nonnal reaction exerted by the ground
\.
(c) Fric~ion force exerted by the ground (magnitude and direction)
I
\,
11. In the figure A &,B are two blocks of mass 4 kg & 2 kg respectively
attached to the two ends of a light string passing over a disc C of mass
40 kg and radius 0.1 m. The disc is free to. rotate about a fixed
horizontal axes, coinciding with its own axis. The system is released
l:
from rest and the string does not slip over the disc. Find:

/
(i) the linear acceleration of mass B .

(ii) the number of revolutions made by the disc at the end of lOsec. from the start.

(
"
(iii) the tension in the string segment supporting the block A.

. . , .

(' 12. A solid sphere ofradiuS'3R, a solid disc ofradius 2R and a ring ofradius R (all are of mass m)roll down
,.­ ~ a rough inclined plane. Their acclerations are a,b and c respectively. Find the ratio of alb and b/c.
"( ~13. A solid unifonn disk of mass m rolls without slipping down a fixed inclined plane with an acceleration
.
!l!
a. Find the frictional force on the disk due to surface of the plane:
",

(
"
1 ]
14• A mass m is attached to a pulley through a cord as shown in the figure~ The
pulley is a solid disk with radius R. The cord does not slip on the disk. The

i mass is released from rest at a height h from the ground and at the instant the

t mass reaches the groutid, the disk is rotating with, angular velocity ro. Find
~
! the mass of the disk.
115. A unifonn circular disc has radius R 'and mass m. A particle also of mass m is
!$ fixed at a point A on the wedge of the disc as in fig. The disc can 1."otate freely

r
~ about a fixed ,horizontal chord PQ that is at a distance RJ4 from the centre C

"­ ~o of the disc. The line AC is perpendicular tdPQ. Initially the disc is held
. !i!:;
Ii
vertical with the point A at its highest position. It is then allowed to fall so

"
-=<
t £_'4

'0
that it starts rotating abou't PQ. Find the linear speed of the partic1e at it reaches
'"
g its lowest position.
z

E 5

f
, JEE-Physics

16. Two m.asses each of m are attached at mid point B & end point C of massless ~r-=-==-
rod AC which is hinged at A. It is released from horizontal position as s~own. B
LI2
Find the force at hinge A when rod becomes vertical c
17~ A ring of mass m and radius R has three particles attached to the ring as shown in the figure. The
centre of the ring has a speed vo' Find the kinetic energy of the system. (Slipping is absent)
!

18. 'A thin unifonn


, of mass M and length L is hinged at its upper end, and r~leased from
.rod, . rest in a
horizontal position. Find thetension at a point located at a distance 113 from the hinge point, when the
rod becomes vertical.

~·~F
'19. A person pulls along a rope wound up around a pulley with a constant force.
F for a time interval of t seconds. If aand b are the radii of the inner and the '
outer circumference (a < b), then find the ratio of work done W/Wzby the
person in the two cases shown in the figure. . Case I Case, II
20. A unifonn circular disc can rotate freely about a rigid vertical axis through its centre O. A man stands .

at rest at A on the edge due east of O. The mass of the disc is 22 times the mass of the man. The man

starts walking anticlock'Wise.When he reaches the point A after completing one rotation relative to the

disc, what will be his position?

21.' A particle of mass lOkg is moving with a unifonn speed of 6m1sec. in x-y plane along the line

3y =4x + 10, what is the magnitude of its angular~omentu:tn about the origin in kg - m2/s?

22. ,Aunifonnring is rotating about vertical axis with angular velocity ro initially. ,
A point insect (S) having the same mass as that of the ring starts walking ~
~.
from the lowest point PI and finally'reaches the point P2(as shown in
figure). What is the final angular velocity of the ring? , f
!
]

1~711
23. A block of mass m is attached to a pulley disc of equal mass m, radius

r by means of a slack string as shown. The pulley is hinged about its

c~ntre on a horizontal table and the block is projected with an initial

velocity of 5 mls. Find the' velocity when the string becomes taut.'

,24. A thin unifonn straight rod of mass 2 kg and length 1m is free to rotate i'
i~
"about its upper end when at rest. It receives an impulsive blow of 10
Ns at its lowest point, nOfI!1al to itsJeilgth as shown in figure. Find the
kinetic energy of rod just after impact. T
-
IONS I-
e.
~

~
\.,---">

'j

----~~----------~~6~:-~----------~----~

Rotational Dynamics

~i
25. A uniform rod AB of length L and mass m is suspended freely at A and
'b hangs vertically at rest when a particle of same mass m is fired horizontally

with speed v to strikb the rod at its mid point. If the particle is brought to rest

after the impact. Then find the impulsive reaction at A. B

26. A uniform rod of length /is given an impulse at right angles ID its length as shown. Find the ~J

I
distance of instantaneous centre ofrotation from the centre of the rod. x

im ulse

27. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R rotates about a fixed vertical axis. passing through its centre'
with angular velocity ro. A particle of same massm and having velocity 2roR towards centre of the
disc collides with the disc moving horizontally and stiCks to its rim. Find
I .(a) the angular velocity of the disc.
,I (b) the impulse on the particle due to disc.
(c) the impulse on the disc due to hinge.
:I
,I 28. A straight rod AB of mass M and length L is placed on a frictionless horizontal surface. A horizontal
force having constant magnitude F and a fixed direction starts acting at the end A. The rod is initially
perpendicular to the force. Find the initial acceleration of end B
I 29•. A spool of inner radius R and outer radius 3R has a moment or inertia =]\1R2

I about an axis passing through its geometric centre, where M is the mass of

the spool. A thread wound on the inner surface of the spool is pulled

I =
horizontally with a constant force Mg. Find the acceleration of the point on
. the thread which is being pulled assuming that the spool rolls purely on the
floor.
i
30. Portion AB of the wedge shown in figure is rough andBC is smooth. A solid cylinder rolls without
(I slipping from A to B. Find the ratio of translational kinetic energy to rotational kinetic energy, when
the cylinder reaches point C.

( I: !~'
I
(I

\" i
rSi

1,
.g . '
AB=BC C
.

(
~31. A solid uniform disk of mass m rolls without slipping down a fixed inclined plane with an acceleration
v
'-I .J! a. Find the frictional force on the disk due to surface of the plane:
'~I ~32. A solid cylinder C and a hollow pipe P of same diameter are in contact when they are released from

(I 1 rest as shown in the figure on a long incline plane. Cylinder C and pipe P roll without slipping.
(
"'-,
1
:s.
Determine the clear gap (in m) between them after 6 seconds.

) ~
\..
I ~
o
~
.~
e
~

(
~l E~ ----..~----------------~------~------------~--~;---------------------------~--~~------~--~-----
.. .7

{
lEE-Physics

=
33. A spool of inner radius.R and 'outer radius 3R has a moment of inertia MR2 about an axis passing
through its geometric centre, Where M is the mass of the spool. A thread wound on the inner surface
=
of the spool is pulled horizontaily with a constant forge Mg. Find the acceleration of the point on the
thread which is being pulled assuming that the spool rolls purely on the floor.

34. A ring of mass m and radius R has three particles attached to the ring as shown in the figure. The
centre of the ring has a speed vo~Find the kinetic energy of the system. (Slipping is absent)
~ {
1
.,
J
'f

i
t

, ,
,!
j
I
/)
...'"
:J'
~
~.
.~
~
1
·8fI
.0
.~
Q

'"
.~
~
a!
a]
~
~
~'0
~
.,
;;
1:.. .
~
l!I'"
!f
~E
8

£'

Rotational Dynamics

EXERCISE (S-2)

1. Find the MI of a rod about an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular to the length whose
linear density varies as A. =ax where a is a constant and x is the position of an element of the rod
relative to its left end. The length of the rod is i.
2. A hole of radius Rl2 is cut from a solid sphere of radius R. If the mass of the remaining plate is M ,
then find moment of inertia of the body about an axis through 0 perpendicular to plane.

I
@
3. Two thin circular disks of mass 2kg and radius lOcm each are joined by a rigid massless rod of length

,>1I
2Ocm. The axis of the rod is al?ng the perpendicular to the planes of the disks through their centre.
The object is kept on a truck in such a way that the axis of the object is horizontal and perpendicular
I'
( to the direction of motion of the truck. Its friction with the floor of the truck is large enough so that the
,-I object can roll on the truck without slipping. Take x-axis as the direction of motion of the truck and
,I z -axis as the vertically upwards direction. If the truck has an acceleration of 9m1s 2 calculate:

/!
(I
,I
o 08
1« 20cm .,

/' (a) the force of friction on each disk


, 1- - (b) The magnitude and the direction of the frictional torque acting on each disk about the centre of
/'
mass 0 of the object. EXl?ress the torque in the vector form of unit vectors in the x-y andz
j directions.
(

,I
,
!
t~ A block X of mass 0.5kg is held by a long massless string on a frictionless inclined plane of inclination
(
30° to the horizontal. The string is wound on a uniform solid cylindrical drum Y of ~ass 2kg and of
,I
1"
,

.radius 0.2 m as shown in the fig. The drum is given an initial angular velocity such thatthe block X
1 =
starts moving up the plane. (g 9.8 mls2)

x~AY
(i) Find the tension in the string during the motion
(!
"
I
l
(H) At a certain instant of time the magnitude of the angular velocity of Y
~,'-
is 10 rad/sec.
,J
~

] Calculate the distance travelled by X from that instant of time until it comes
) £ to rest.
'-
I ~~
s
A solid sphere of mass m and radius R is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Asudden blow is given
(/ ~ horizontally to the sphere at a height h = 4R15 above the centre line. IfI is the impulse of the blow then
o
f i find
"­ ~
(
I ~
~
(a) the minimum time after which the highest point B will touch the ground
w (b) the displacement of the centre of mass during this internal.
"I
I

"I
r
~'~
g­ -~~--~------~--------~--~------------------------~----
9

~- '

(
.JEE~Physics

6.. A rectangular rigid fixed block has a lDng hDrizDntal edge. A sDlid hDmDgeneDus cylinder .of radius
.R is placed hDrizDntally at ~est withits length parallel tD the edge such that the axis .of the cylinderand
the edge .of the blDck are in the same vertical plane as shWDn in figure. there IS sufficient friction
present at the edge SD that a very small displacement cause the cylin4er tD rDll .of the edge withDut
slipping. Detennine

i (a) the angle 8c thrDugh which the cylinder rDtates befDre it leaves cDntact with the edge,
(
(b) the speed .of the centre .of mass .of the cylinder befDre leaving cDntact with the edge, and
(c) the ratiD of the translatiDnal tD rDtatiDnal kinetic energies .of the cylinder when its centre .of mass is
in hDrizDntalline with the edge. /

7. A uniform slender bar AB .of mass m is suspended frDm two springs as shDwn. If spring 2
/ '
breaks, determine at that instant ;
(a) the angular acceleration Of the bar. !'

(b) the acceleration .of pDint A .


(c) ~he acceleratiDn .of pDint B .

~~='y
A~B===
I~ L ~I 14 _._ .14 . . ~l~ . .,
/'

8. A unifDrm rDd AB, .of mass 4kg and length L= "'3 mis released frDm rest in thepDsition shDwn.
KnDwing that :g
'1-'
p= 30°, determine the values (immediately after release) .of <1
!Q,
lij'
(a) the angular acceleratiDn of the rDd . .~
(b) the acceleratiDn .of end A . ~
(c) the reactiDn .of the inclined plane at A. Neglect the mass &. frictiDn .of the rDller at A 'i!
·08
.~ .

l.i I

..... , j x
. inclined
fixed
. plane
f
:t]
L I
~
~
~
B

I""
,til

--------------------------~--------~.l~O~--------------~--~------------~~· ~L
( '.
'0
/'~
Rotational Dynam ics

9. A bar of mass m is held as shown between 4 disks, each ofmass m' & radius r= 75 mm Determine
the acceleration of the bar immediately after it has been released from rest, knowing that the
normal forces exerted on the disks are sufficient to prevent any slipping and assuming that;
=
(a) In 5 kg and m' = 2 kg .

,; (b) the mass of m' of the disks is negligible.

(c) the mass of m of the bar is negligible.

A A

B B

(i) (ii)


10. Two heavy metallic plates arejoined together at 900 to each other. A laminar sheet of mass 30 Kg is
hinged at the line ABjoining the two heavy metallic plates. The hinges are frictionless. The moment of
inertia of the laminar sheet about an axis parallel to AB and passingthrough its centre of mass is.L2 Kg­
m2• Two rubber obstacles P and;Q are fixed, one on each metallic plate at a distance 0.5 mfrom the line
.. AB. This distance is chosen so that the reaction due to the hinges on the laminar sheet is zero duringthe
impact. Initially the laminar sheet hits one of the obstacles with an angular velocity 1 radls and turns
back. If the impulse on tre sheet due to each obstacle is 6 N-s. . [IIT-JEE'2001J

/
i:....

/
'- ! (a) Find the location of the centre of mass of the laminar sheet from AB.
~ (b) At what angular velocity does the laminar sheet come back after the first i.mpact ?
.!!j
.~ (c) After how many impacts, does the laminar sheet come to rest?
!!
( 11.
"
!S' A uniform disc of mass m and radius R rotates about a fixed vertical axis passing through its centre
1 with angular velocity roo A particle of same mass m.and having velocity 2roR towards centre of the
\.
I
.l! disc collides with the disc moving horizontally and sticks to its rim. Find
1: (a) the angular velocity of the disc.

!1 ,
(b) the impulse on the particle due to disc.

(c) the impulse on the disc due to hinge.

( ~ ;:;
:s Jj

~
~
;;
'.,;,

(
'l.
• .

~
(
e
'-. '"~

E
;; 11 . ·1:

(
, lEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-1)

!!
~' j :

1. ' Two points of a rigid body are moving as shown. The angular velocity of the body is:
v
<:: • V


u u 2u 2u
(A) 2R (B) R (C)'R (D) 3R

2. A cord is wrapped around a wheel which is,initially at rest as shown in

figure. The free end A of the cord is pulled with constant acceleration of

a = 4t rnls 2• where tis in seconds. The angular velocity of wheel at t = 2 s is

(A) 40 ~adls (B) 20 radls


(C) 10 radls (0) 30 radls '

'3. 'A laminar rigid body in confined to move in its own plane. At some instant velocities of any tow
points on the body are shown in following figures. Which of the following physical situation cannot
- ,

be possible? :s<;­

V" =-vjJ
j /
I
"

! [.
1
~
(A) '(D) '~ (!
tl
l!
"~
~
~ t
4. A cylindrical drum is pushed along by a board of length L. There '§
~
is no slipping at any instant. During the process of pushing the, ~

board, the drum rolls over the ground through a distance of 0.5L. ~
~
Displacement of the board is Q
~ 'I' '

(A) 0.75 L (B) 015 L (C) 0.25 L \-,-(1»'1.. i'" y

~
12 E

(
I (.
Rotational Dynamics
: "
5. A circular roller ofrndius 0.5 m is in contact at the top and bottom A A 6m/s
, **'
points of its circumference with two conveyor belts AA and BB,

as shown in the figure. If the belts run at 6 mls and 4 mls both B
B 4m/s
towards right, the v and aJ of the roller. r!!AAjM_§w
•••
(A) 2 rad/s, 1 mls (B) 10 rad/s, 9 mls

JCr2 rad/s, 5 mls (D) 10 rad/s, 5 mls

'jY A disc of radius R i~/olling purely on a flat horizontal surface, with a constant

i,
I
angular velocity. Th~ angle between the velocity and acceleration vectors of
pointPis
(A) zero (B) 45 0 (C) 1350 . (D) tan-l (112)
fr
,7. A uniform thick walled cylinder, a uniform thin walled cylinder, and a uniform solid cylinder all
--- have the same mass and outer radius. Rank them according to decreasing (greatest to least) moment
of inertia.

Thick-wailed Thin-walled Solid


cylinder cylinder cylinder

(A) Thick, thin, solid .(B) Solid, thick, thin .)QYfhin, thick, solid (D) Solid, thin, thick

8. . Consider a solid disk with an axis of rotation through the center


... ;'
(perpendicular to the diagram). Two holes are cu~ out near the

center and the material is placed near the rim. If moment of

inertias of the disks are denoted by IA and IB, whi~h of the

,
.~ . following is correct?
'7
5'1
~ (A) IA > IB .,jJ3}IA < IB

J (C) IA =IB (D) More information is required.

19
s .. A closed cylindrical tube containing some water (not filling the entire tube) lies in a horizontal plane.
. .

iI . If'the .
tube is rotated about a perpendicular
.
bisector, the moment of inertia. of water about the axis.
( ~ ~AA) Increases

I l \.. -., (B) Decreases


(
I .< ,
1. (C) Remains constant . .
{

\
i (D) Increases if the rotation is clockwise and decreases if it is anticlockwise.

,tt I and In be moments of inertia of abody about two axes A and B ~espectively. The axis A passes
fiJ
~11).".': )
I
f A

(
I J .~:y, through the centre of mass of the body but B does not. .' . . .
"I I ~
,.~ (A) IA < In . . (B) IfIA < In' the axes are parallel
. .
.
(
8z (C) If the axes are parallel, IA < In (D) If the axes ~ not parallel, IA ~ IB
'I . .

'I E 13
?
"-d
(
JEE- ics
11~ Two particles of masses 3 kg and 6 kg are connected by a 3 m light rod. Its minimum non-zero
moment of inertia is
(A) 27 kg-m2 (B) 20.25kg-m2 \...~g-m2i(D) 12 kg-m2

12. A rectangular slab of mass Mhas uniforIn thickness and density. and has dimensions shown. The slab
is pivoted about its upper left comer. and rotated in its plane. What is its moment of inertia about this
axi?S. (.;

(A) ~M(a2 +b2) ~a2+b2)


5 ..
(C) ~M(a~ +b2 ) (D) 12M(a2 +b2 ).

~
13.', Find the moment of inertia of a plate cut in shape of a right angled triaJl.gle of
massM. side AC :: BC = a about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the
..

plate and passing through the mid point of side AB

2 Ma2 2 (D) 2Ma 2 C B


(A) Ma (B
)~ (C) Ma
12 6 . 3 3
. ~ ....• "'..,~-...... . . , . '

.
<~ ~. i4.qf~t I be the moment of inertia of a unifonn square plate about an axis AB that paSses through ·its centre
\~:",,,,;;;;.- and is parallel to two ofits sides. CD is a line in the plane of the plate that passes through the centre of the
plate and makes an angle 9 with AB. The moment of inertia of the plate apout the axis CD is then equal
to
(A) I (B) I sin29 (C) Icos29 (D) Icos2(9/2)

15. Moment of inertia of a uniform semi-circular disks of mass m and radius. r about various axes are
indecated in the figure. Which of the following is/are correct?
2
{t:.'v1 _mr2 m.\....-f::'_mr
~/ ' 1 - - - ~·2--
2 4
.~

'l3_mr2 (D) 14 = 5mr2 j.


Y --­
4 4
.j
16~ Three· bodies have equal masses m. Body A is solid cylinder of radius R. body B is a square l~~a 1 J- ""­

.of side R. ~d bo~y C is a solid s~here of radius R. Which bo~y has ~e smallest ~6ment of in~~ia
about an axIS passmg through theIr centre of mass and perpendicular to the plane (m case of lamIna) ~
f
~
P
(A) A

about a tangential aXis is


(B)B . (C)C '. . (D) A and C both .' ~
. 17. The ratio of the radii of gyration of a spherical shell and a solid spherepf the same mass and radius
!i !
i.
11
f (A) "3: "7 (B) "5 : "6 J.CYV25:"21 . (D) "21: "25' .~
.~
ij" 18 . A rigid body can be hinged about any point on the x-axis. When it is hinged such that the hinge is at I
if
=
x. the moment of inertia is givenby I 2X2 - 12x + 27. The x-coordinate of centre of mass is '. ~
(A) x =2 (B}x =0 (C) x =1 .(D) x =3 .
,I·
Iii ~
I! ~

14 ·,'.l
E

(',;
Rotational Dynamics

19. A heavy rod of length L and weight W is suspended horizontally by two


vertical ropes as shown. The first rope is attached to the left end of the rod
while the second rqpe is attached a distance Ll4from right end. The tension
11 21~/~,
: ;-~'!l . '" L -'"
in the second rope'ls:
(A)(1/2)W ("'( (B)(1I4)W (C)(1I3)W (D)(2/3)W

20. A meter stick is supported by a knife edge at the 50 cm mark and has masses of 0.40 and 0.60 kg
. hanging from the 20 cm and 80 cm marks, respectively. Where a third mass of 0.30 kg should be
hung to keep the stick balanced?
(A) 20 cm (B) 70 cm (C) 30 em (D) 25 cm
. . . '

"21.
r.:
A woman who weighs 500 N is standing on a board that weighs 100 N. The board is supported at
each end, and the support force at the right end is 3 times bigger than the support force at the left end.
If the board is 8 m long, how far from the right end is the woman standing?
(A) 4.0 m ( B ) 2.0 m (C) 2.7 m (D) 1.6 m

22~ A non uniform sphere can be kept on a rough inclined plane so that it is in equilibrium. In the figure
below the dots represents possible locations of centre of mass. In which one of the positions must the
centre of mass be located so that sphere stays motionless?

,1

:t~~i\~
t:
!'
",23. A thin hoop of weight 500 N and radius 1 m rests on a rough inclined plane
" !- as shown in the figure. The minimum coefficient of friction needed for this
9!J'

~
configuration is

( .~
'-
s 1 1
~ . (A) 3.fj (B) .fj
·8
~
I
'-
]en 1 1 ,~

(
~
1; '(C) "2 (D) 2.fj
Ii
iii!: 1:;
]24. A uniform 2 kg cylinder rests on a laboratory cart as shown. The coefficient
! of static friction between the cylinder and the cart is 0.5. If the cylinder is 4
~ ·cm in diameter and 10 em in height, which of the following is closest to the
( ~
;; minimum acceleration of the cart needed to cause the cylinder to tip over?
!fi (A) 2 mls2 (B) 4 mls 2 (C) 5 mls 2' (D) 6 mls2
..,~
.),~
1~ 0
, z

E 15
~' ,,' 1\
, . j - '-.'" ) '1\ l" 1<)
JEE-Physics. ., ~ ~I{~l' c ~
'. Iess PIvot
2S • A ~oI1'd cone hangs f rom a.f'nctlOn ~~~.~ "."f
. at the ongm 6, as sown.
h If ~ ~Jand
1,

kare unit vect0!S, and a, b, and c are positive constants, which of the following
z
forces F applied to the rim of the cone at a point P results in a torque 't' on the cone
with a negative component 't'z? ..J)' • z»Y

(A) F =ak, P is (O,b,-c) (B) F = -ak, P i$ (O,-b;-c)

(C) F =a j , P is (-b,O,~) (D) None' .; .


. .
26. A pulley is'hinged at the centre and a massless and w;,ry thin thread is wrapped around it. The thread
is pulled with a constant force F starting from rest. As the time increases,

~F
(A) its angular vel<?city increases, but force on hinge remains constant
(B) its angular velocity remains same, but force on hinge increases
(C) its angular velocity increases and force on hinge increases
(D) its angular velocity remains same and force on hinge is constant

27~ A uniform pole of length L and mass M is pivoted on the ground with a

frictionless hinge. The pole makes an angle awith the horizontal. The mo:fu.ent

of inertia of the flag pole about one end is (1/3)ML2. If it starts falling from

this position shown in the accompanying figure, the linear acceleration of the
free end of the pole would be;
1l:
(A) (213) gcose (B) (213) g (C)g (D) (3/2) gcose

28. Figure shows a smooth inclined, plane fixed in a cat accelerating on a horizontal road. The angle of,
. . . .
incline e is related to the acceleration a of the car as a =g tane; If the sphere is set in pure rolling on the
incline.
(A) it will continue pure rolling.
, (B) it will slip down the plane.
(C) its linear velocity will increase.
- a ~
...6
!ll"
'~
!
. (D) its linear velocity will slowly decrease. i

29.
,
,
A wheel of radius 20 cm is pushed to move on a rough horizontal surface. It is found to move through ~
.
I
~

~ ;; ~

a distance of 60 cm during the time it completes one revolution about the centre. Assume that the j

"
'.... . /

linear and the angular accelerations are uniform. The frictional force acting on the wheel by the ]'

, ' . ~ ,

surface is !
IJ.I

(A) in forward direction., ~ ·0

(B) in backward direction. ~


'~ .' ;;
!iilliI

. (C) in the direction of angular acceleration vector.


~ ~

r1 (D) Zero '" ~


~
r ;,;
E
f: 16
i
J
Rotational Dynamics
I
.i
30• A solid cylinder and a solid sphere, both hav{ng the same mass and radius, ate released from the top
of an incline. Both roll without slipping. The statements that hold true in this motion is
.(A) The force of friction that acts on the two is the same.
(B) The force of friction is greater in case of a sphere than for a cylinder.
(C) The force of friction is greater in case of a cylinder than for a sphere.
,_ .1
I CD) The force of friction will depend on the nature of the surface of the body that is moving and that
of the inclined surface and is independent of the shape and size of the moving body.
3i. A cylinder rol1s up an inclined plane, reaches some height, and then rolls down (without slipping
,,
.
throughout these motions). The directions of the frictional force acting on the cylinder are
(A) up the incline while ascending and down the incline descending.
(B) up the incline while ascending as well as while descending..
(C) down the incline while ascending and up the incline while descending.
(D) down the incline while ascending as well as while descending.
32. Inner and outer radii of a spool are r andR respectively. A thread is wound over its inner cylinder and
and the spool is placed over a rough horizontal surface. Thread is pulled by a force F as shown in fig.
then in case of pure rolling
(A) Thread unwinds, spool rotates anticlockwise and friction act leftwards
. (B) Thread winds, spool rotates clockwise and friction acts leftwards
F.
(C) Thread winds, spool moves to the right and friction act rightwards

CD) Thread winds, spool moves to the right and friction does not come into existence.

33. A uniform sphere mass 10 kg and radius 0.1 m is placed on a rough horizontal surface. A 20 N force
is applied on the sphere horizontally passing through centre of mass. For pure rolling, the force of
friction is
(A) 30 N in forward direction (B) 30 N in backward direction
(C) 4017 N in forward direction CD) 4017 N in backward direction'
34. A ring of mass m and radius R is placed on rough horizontal floor. A constant horizontal force F is
applied on its top point. If the ring rolls without slipping the correct statement is
~
~

f
.1! ;"
(A) Static friction actsJn forward direction.

(B) Kinetic friction aC~$in forward direction.

CD) No friction acts

in
(C) Static friction acts backward direction.

Q'
'-. .j!'

( i ~ 3'5'
~. ~ Awheel of mass 2 kg having practically all the mass concentrated along the circumference of a circle of
, tl

I f radius 20 em, is rotating on its axis with an angularvelocity of 100 rad/s. The rotationa:I kinetic energy of
the wheel is
ll
{ ; ! . !t
\. '3.\ (A) 4 J (B) 70 J (C) 400 J CD) 800 J
~ .1

S 36:· .Four rigid bodies, each with same mass and radius, are spinning freely with the.same angular speed.

~ Which object requires the most work to stop it?


("-... ~
t.t'\
(; (A) A homogeneous sphere spinning about a diameter
~
(B) A hollow sphere spinning about a diameter
~
!:!.
(C) A hoop spinning about an axis along a diameter. .
I!l'"o· (D) The work required is the same for al1 four objects.
z
E 17
JEE-Physics

37. A rod is hinged at its centre and rotated by applying a constant torque starting from rest. The power

developed by the external torque as a function of time is :

Pextf / Pe'" i ./ Pextj ~ Pextl--- .


I
(A) ~e (B) ~e (C) ~e (D)~e
I,
38. A ring rolls without slipping oil a horizontal surface.
B
Which of the following statements is/are correct?

(A) Section BC has the same kinetic energy'as section DA; . A c


(B) S.ection BC has greater kinetic energy than section CD...
(G) Section ABC has greater kinetic energy than section ADC.

.(D) The sect.ions AB, BC, CD and DA have the same kinetic energy.

39. A homogeneous solid sphere rolls along a level surface without slipping. What is the ratio of rotationl:!.l
!
to linear kinetic energy? I
W~, ~m ~m ~~
40. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder about its axis is given by (1/2)MR2. If this cylinder rolls I
without slipping, the ratio of its rotational kinetic energy to its translational kinetic energy is ,I
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 2 (C) 1 : 2
,
(D). 1
: 3
41~ Three mass particles A, Band ,C having masses m, 2m and 3m respectively
are rigidly attached to a ring of mass m and radius R which rolls on a horizontal

surface without slipping. At 11 certain instant the velocity of the centre of the A

ring is Vo as. shown in the figure. The kinetic energy of the system is

.::,-.
Wim~ ~)~~
\'. ~

(C) tmv; (D) 9mv!


42. A cylinder is pulled by constant force F on horizontal ground with the help

of a light cord wrapped around it s shown in the figure. The cylinder rolls

without slipping. When mass centre ofthe cylinder moves a·distance x,what

are its rotational and translational kinetic energies?


!
(A) ~ and 2Fx ~) 2~X and ~ (C) , 2Fx and ­ 4Fx (D) 4~X and 2Fx sl
3 3 3 3 ~.,
;1

43. A small sphere A of mass m and radius r rolls without slipping


inside a large fixed hemispherical bowl of radius R (» r) as
1
1
·i
shown in figUre. If the sphere starts from rest at the top point of .~
]
. the hemisphere, find the nonnal force exerted by the small sphere ~
on the hemisphere when it is at the bottom B of the hemisphere. B ~

10
(A) '7mg ~)7mg
17.
(C)
5
'7 mg
7
(D) 'Smg
:i '-.~

s
44. Pamc1e ofmass m is projected with a velocity vo making an angle of45 with horizontal. The ~agnitude ~
0

of angular momentum of the projectile about the point of projection at its maximum height is i;
0

mv3 mv 3 mv3 '3 9


(A) ./2g ~) 2.J2g
. .
(C) 4.J2g· (D) ~~ ,~
,@
(

E ~r
~fl:
n '
~(
18 L/
1\ ,/ IA ,iJ

, '"':.
,~,

Rotational. Dynamics

45. A particle of mass 2 kg located at the position. (1 +J) m has a velocity 2 (+1 - J+ k) mls. Its angular
momentum about z-axis in kg-m2/s is:
(A) zero (B) +8 (C) 12 (D)-8

46. A ball ot mass m moving with velocity v, collide with the wall elastically as
shown in the figure. After impact the change in angUlar momentum about Pis:.
P'Td
(A) 2 mvd (B) 2 mvd cose 1
(C) 2 mvd sin e CD) zero
47. A uniform disc is rolling on a horizontal surface. At a certain instant B is the point of contact and
Ais at height 2R from ground, where R is radius ,of disc .'
A
(A) The magnitude of the angular momentum of the disc about B is thrice that about A
(B) The angular momentum of the disc about A is antic10ckwise
(C)The angular momentum Of the disc about B is clockwise
.

CD) The angular momentum of the disc about A is equal to that of about B
.

48. Two uniform spheres of mass Mhave, radii Rand 2R. Each sphere is rotating about a fixed axis
through a diameter. The rotational kinetic energies of the spheres are Identical. What is the ratio of the,
, '. ' Lm
magnitude ofthe angular momenta of these spheres? That is, L =
I R

I (A) 4 ; (B)2J2 (Ci2


. \
(0) J2
,I "'49. Torque acting on a uniform
_~.i,
circular wheel changes
. '
its angular momentum from [ to 4[0 in 4 s.
\I
0

Which of the followi~g is necessarily correct?


(A) Torque vector I~,'3[o
,. /4 (B) Average torque vector is 3[0/4 .
,I (C) If torque is constant it equals to 3[0/4
{
I CD) Torque vector cannot be deiced from the given information.

" r '50. If there is no external force acting on a nonrigid body, which of the following quantities must remain

? . ~l
I constant?

\~ ~ ..
I
i!' (A) Angular momentum (B) Linear momentum.
1f '
, \ (C) Kinetic energy (D) Motnentof inertia
'lSI.
1
A figure skater is spinning at an angular frequency OJ. She then pulls in her arms, reducing her
.S!
~
moment of inertia by a factor of two. Compared to her initial rotational kinetic energy, her final
] rotational kinetic energy is,
( i: (A) twice as, large. ' (B) four times as large.
t
, ,

" (C) one fourth as large. (D) one half as large.

'fl 52. A turntable rotates freely, without a motor, and without friction or air resistance, with a mouse sitting ,

at its center. The angular velocity of the turntable with the mouse is ro, its angular momentum is L, and
(1 $
its moment of inertia is 1. The mouse now walks to the edge of the turntable~ As the mouse does so,
I
~ for the combination of the mouse and turntable,
~;;
( ~ lii!1iI
(A) ro increases, butL and I remains the same;
~i
lZ. (B) ro and I increase but L remains the same;
IS
'"~ (C) ro decreases, L ~mains the same, and I increases;
~l
CD) ro and L decrease, but I increases. '
~~~::~==~--~~--VI9~~~--------------
,
JEE-Physics
53. A man, sitting firmly over a rotating stool has his anns streched. If he folds his anns, the work done by
the man is
lj (A) zero (B) positive
r
; (C) negative (D) may be positive or negative.,
i
I 54. A thin circular ring a mass M and radius r is rotating about its axis with an angular~peed 00. Two
I
I' particles having mass m each are now attached at diametrically opposite points. The angular speed of
Ii,
H the ring will become
fi roM roM (C) ro(M -,2m) .(D) ro(M + 2m)
I:
I'
;
(A) M+m (B) M+2m M+2m M
~.

55. A child with mass m is standing at the edge of a disc with moment of inertia I, radius R, and initial
\,

d
t>(
angular velocity 00. See figure giVen below. The child jumps off the edge of the disc with. tangential

()V
l!
" velocity v with respect to the ground. The new angular velocity of the disc is,
r
. ~I(j)' -my' 1(1 +mR 2)00 2 -mv2

(A) , I ' (B) • '
{: .
·r
,J (
;t
~. (C) loo-,mvR (D) (I + mR 2)00 - mvR \

r, 1 I ( ,
1 ,
~ '1
56. A uniform circular, disc placed on a rough horizontal surface has initially a
iil
i'f
~(

~;:
~~ ~
,
velocity Vo and an angular velocity 000 as shown in the figure. The disc comes

to rest after moving some distance in 'the direction of motion. Then


Yo is
roo 0 ,
{±,' ('

. 1 3
(A) '2 (B) 1 (C) '2 (D) 2

57. A hollow smooth unifonn sphere A of mass Om' rolls without A B


sliding on a smooth horizontal sulface. It collides head on ~
elastically with another stationary smooth solid sphere B of the . ~.' ~

:1
same mass m and same radius. The ratio of kinetic energy of 'B'
'
.
II
i
to that of'A' just after the collision is : '~
:r .
'f';~'
(
~,:: (A) 1 : i (B) 2 : 3 " (C) 3 : 2 (D) None
, ~ 0

L
i,i;
58. A unifonn rod lying on a horizontal frictionless table is struck elastically by a block moving~ith 'i
:. .',
uniform velocity v as shown in the figure. Which ofthe following statements is/are correct? .'
!a
'i'
(A). Total kinetic energy remains
,
conserved. . ' '
I; ~b
(B) Total kinetic energy of translation motion remains conserved. ,'1 ~
111
;:1
(C) Total linear momentum of the block-rod system remains conserved.
• ~,
.' I I '
_______
1> r ."
f~
;,~
(D) Total angular momentum of the block-rod system remams conserved. ;
'~~ ( ,
j 59~ A mass m is moving at speed v perpendicularto a rod of length d and mass M = 6m which pivots around! 'C.J
q
a frictionless axle running through its centre. It strikes and sticks to t1)e end ofthe rod. The angular speed ~s
t "
ofthe system right after the collision is '~
,l.:""'
~

, (C) vld (D) 3v/(2rl)

---------------------------~--------------~~~-----------------------------------------;E
(A) 2vld (B) 2vl(3rl)
1
.
.jI~' ,
I, ~
20 ~
i&
('
Rotational' Dynam ic.s

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1.~ 2.~ 3.~a 4. (t.i.l~~~?(~)':'fPl
I

5.~ . 6. rA'mmIl(!iihl .
"'~IIIJi!'I!'l!I"l~
7•. mI!~ 8. aulltiCJ
I
·9·~m~ 10.~ ·ll·~Em 12. 16im1lCm
\
13.~ 14.~ 15·~m 16. ~1tQIb1

17.~ 18.~ 19•. IE1IIEm 20. E3lma?iJlUI .


.r-' !
!
·21.~ 22.~ 23. P)11UI¢D 24. E3It»1Cd
25.~ 26.~ 27. iZlmEJiID . 28. 1AltB2Icm
I
29·m~· 30·IZIm~ 31. «j})J§l<cm 32. rm~E.

33.~5J 34·~m 35. IQIl!mraNI . 36. mIImElI


I.
.31.~ 38.~ 39. r<AlJBBr:m 40. lGmlt£u.
I 41 •. ~ 42.~ . 43. IZPBcm . 44. IABDItD
45. ammm 46. ~C)l1'>.J 47. iA1IlpltBt.m 48•. JaJIli2CliRi

49. n,am->lt1l so. rmmlll>l '51. ~IiCIf!?3 52. taImI<~D


53·~tm 54.~~ ·55·~m mJ 56. {t.i.ll'.~3'i?\(!)y(f!)J
i
57·~Pl 58. ~*lPi 59. IOCUICIII

'"q.
'"
~

1
(

~0
I . ."l!I .
0

J
~
t

i,
/'
"'- .

.r

"
(
S

",

~
f
• O.
\ .!il.
II

~
'"I!I
~
E 21
,
'-.'
/
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-2)

.~

J!
( 1.) A ring rolls without slipping on the ground. Its centre C moves with a constant speed u. P is any point II
\..- --,/' on the ring. The speed of P with respect to the ground is v.'

-rr
~~lO:'i;v
.
s 2u .
'(B) v;: u, ifCP is h~rizontal
...A-C) y =u, if CP makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal and P is below the horizontal level of C.
..,fofv =fiu, if CP is horizontal, ,
2. A wheel of radius r rolling on a straight line, the velocity of its centre being v. At a certain instant the

point of contact of the wheel with the grounds is M andN is the highest point on the wheel (diametrically

opposite t() M).The incorrect s~atement is:

(A) The velocity of any point P of the wheel is proportional to MP. '
(B) Points of the wheel moving with velocity greater than v form a larger area of the wheel than
points moving with velocity less than v.
(C) The point of contact M is instantaneously at rest.

(D~1'he velocities of any two parts of the wheel which are equidistant from centre are equal.

...~ , , '

3. A square plate is rotating about an axis that is normal to the plane ':

of the plate. At 'an instant elocities of two of its opposite comers

are shown in the figure.


:g

.....-iA) Angular velocity .of the plat,e is 1 radls.


~

~he intantaneous axis of rotation passes through a point: that is on l~~


m~
!!i'

diagonal AC and 1 cm away form A.


A
I
!
'i
'(C)VelocityofcornerDis Vo =- h(3':i+]) mlS., ,~

.I
,~ J

(D) Velocity of corner A relative to B is fn the positive y-dii_rection. t


l'§
4. ABCD is a square plate with centre O. The moments of inertia of the plate l
2 S

" !!l
about the perpendicular axis through 0 is I and about i:he axes 1,2,3 & 4
, ,
<K ...13:;;
,
.

;;
(3 !!l'
, ,are 1),12, 13 & 14 respectively. It follows that: ~~
, .,
!;1l
~) Iz=I3 ~(B)I=}I+I4
...--.Aey I =12 + 14 .. ~jll =13
~
,'"
~ , ' ,
~ ''-./

~~ E
Rotational Dynamics

Question No.5 to 6 (4 questions)


The figure shows an isosceles triangular plate of mass M and base L. The

5.
angle at the apex is 90°. The apex lies at the origin and the base is parallel to
X-axis
The moment of inertia of the plate about the z-axis is
sIt.x
..........,..........

(C)·~L7
~
(A) ML2 . (B) ML2 " .CD) none of these
;;::.. •...
".
12 24 6

~ The moment of inerthl,lOf the plate about the x-axis is


. ML2
(~)"MJ;} '" (B) ML2
(C) ---'-'
ML2
CD) ­ 6
,-.' 8 32 24
7.. The moment of inertia of the plate about its base parallel to the x-axis is

(A) ML2 (B) ML2 : . (C) yr;, CD) none of these


18 36 \_/-~ 24
8. The moment of inertia of the plate about the y-axisis

(A) ML2 (B) ML2 t,'CC) ML2 CD) none of these


6 8 -- . 24
9. ) body is in equilibrium under the influence of a nUmber offorces. Each force has a different line of
\'-....,;-~ action. The minimum number of forces requiredis . .
(A) 2, if their lines of action pass through the centre of mass of the body.
(B) 3, if their lines of action are not parallel.
(C) 3, if their lines of action are parallel.
.·CD) 4, if their lines of action are parallel and all the forces have the same magnitude.
~.10~) A rod of weight w is supported by two parallel knife edges A and B and is in equilibrium in a
G . . .
(.

'.
J--/ horizontal position. The knives are at a distance d from each other. The centre of mass of the rod is at
.~
a distance x from A.
! !
i!
,) ·8 wx . . .' wed-x)
'~~;
~ ,., (A) the normal reaction at A is d . . . ..JB) the normal reaction at A is , d

tf
(

'.
wx wed-x)
. (C)the normal reaction at B is d (D) the normal reaction at B is d
lii "
".
{
! 11. A block with a square base measuring a and height h, is placed on an inclined plane. The coefficient
w
.of friction is J.l. The angle of inclination (€l) of the plane is gradually increased. The block will .
(
\,
! a a

I (A) topple before sliding if J.l > h (B) topple before sliding if J.l < h
{
\..

....
"

~
a . . a
~. : (C) slide before toppliI1~ if J.l > 'h. CD) slide before toppling if J.l < h
'>,-,

E 23

/.
lEE-Physics

Question No. 12 to 14 (3 questions)


In figure, the winch is mounted on an axle, and the 6-sided
nut is welded to the winch. By turning the nut with a
wrench, a person can rotate the winch. For i~stance, turning
the nut clockwise lifts the block off the ground, because
more and more rope gets wrapped around the winch. ~
. Wrench turns winch clockw,!j
Three students agree that using a longer wrench makes . <' .
'\
it easier to turn the winch. But they disagree about why.
All three students are talking about the case where the winch
.
is. used, over a 10 s time interval,
I.

to lift the block one metre off the ground .


.Student 1 By using a longer wrench, the person decreases the average force he must exert on the
wrench, in order to lift the block o~e metre in 10 s.
Student 2 : Using a longer wrench reduces the work done by the person ashe uses the winch
"
to lift the block 1m in lOs.

Student 3: Using a longer 'wrench reduces the power that the person must exert to lift the block'

1m in lOs.

12. Student 1 is :­
(A) correct, because the torque that the wrench must exert to lift the block doesn't depend on.the
wrench's length'
(B) correct, because using a longer wrench decreases the torque it must exert on the winch
(e) incorrect, because the torque that the wrench must exert to lift the block doesn't depend on the
wrench's length '
(D) Incorrect, because using a longer wrench decreases the torque: it must exert on the winch ..
13. Which of the following is true about student 2 and 3 :- :s
(A) Student 2 and 3 are both correct i
!!i'
(B) Student 2 is correct, but student 3 is incorrect
(e) Student 3 is correct, but student 2 is incorrect f
l'
(D) Student 2 and 3 are both incorrect .j
14. If several wrenches all apply the same torque to a nut, which graphbest expresses the relationship j
between the force the person must apply to the wrench, and the length of .the wrench :-f
J

(1) J
L . length
(2) JL=
' .length
(3) J~
',length
(4) J~
length
l'
J
:s.
~
~
~
;
\,/

(A) 1 (B) 2 (e) 3 (D) 4 '",


~
~
-----------:-~~2:;-:-4------:--.:....-----~:,··- E~':I

{
Rotational Dynamics

15. A block of mass m is suspended with the help of a light cord wrapped over a cylindrical pulley of'
mass M and radius R as shown in the figure. The system is released from rest. Magnitude of torque on
the pulley
(A) decreases on inc:reasing mass of the pUlley.
(B) increases on increasing radius of the pulley.
(C) is proportional to the mass of of the hanging block.

(D) is independent of mass and radius of the pulley and depends on mass of the hanging block.

16. A yo-yo is resting on a perfectly rough horizontal table. Forces FI' F2 and.F3 are applied separately
as shown. The correc't statement is
(A) when F3 is applied the centre of mass will move to the right.

.(B) when F2 is applied the centre of mass will move to the left.

(C) when FI is applied the centre of mass will move to the right. .... "'1 I 'F I
I'
(D) when F2 is applied the centre of mass will move to the right.

" 17. . If a cylinder is rolling down the incline with sliding.


(A) after some time it may start pure rolling
(B) after sometime it will start pure rolling

.(C) it may be possible that it will never start pure rolling

(D) none of these


'.'

18. A disc of circumference s is at rest at a point A on a horizontal surface when

a constant horizontal forcebegins to act on its centre. Between A and B there

is sufficient friction to prevent slipping, and the surface is smooth to the right

of B. AB = s. The disc moves from A to B in time T. To the right of B,


G:=A. . B

(A) the angular acceler;ation of (he disc will disappear. linear acceleration will remfiin unchanged
t , ~ .(B) linear acceleration of the disc will increase
i
(

(C) the disc will make one rotation in time T12


(
1 (D) the disc will cover a distance greater than s in further timeT.
( f Question No. 19 and 20 (2 questions) .
.~ A disc of mass m and radius R is placed over a plank of same mass m.
.i There is sufficient fricti~n between disc and plank to prevent slipping. A'
(
l . force F is applied at the centre of the disc.
! 19. Acceleration of the plank is :­
( 1
F 3F F 3F

( I
I>l

(A) 2m .$) 4m (C) 4m (D) 2m

~
:

( ~ 20..
Q Force of friction between the disc and the plank is :­
~
( li!
F F F 2F
~ (A) 2" (B) '4 (C) - (D) '3
( I!!'"
·3
~

E 25
(
\i.~,
JEE-Physics

Question No. 21 and 22 (2 questions)

In the following problems, indicate the correct direction of friction force acting on the cylinder, which

is pulled on a rough surface by a constant force F.

21. A cylinder of mass M and radi us R is pulled horizontally by a force F.The friction force can be given
by which of ~e following diagrams :­

M'~F

t€:::L.. F
(A) f~- (B )<9:; (C)(9-F
1"'0 .
(D) cannot be interpreted

22. A cylinderis placed on a rough plank which in.turn is placed on a smooth surface. The planl< is pulleQ,
with a constant force F. The friction force can be given by which of the following diagrams :­

~F

(A) Iii) (B)U (C) 0 '. (D) canotbe interpreted:)


I • j j

/=0

23. A plank with a uniform sphere placed on it rests ona smooth horizontal plane. Plank is pulled to right
by a constant force F. If sphere does not slip over the plank. Which of the following is correct.

I I I IT~III I r;i
(A) Acceleration of the centre of sphere is less than that of the plank~
(B) Work done by friction acting on the sphere is equal to its total kinetic energy.
(C)
. Total kinetic energy of the system
. is equal to work done by the force F
(D) None of the above
24. A block of mass m moves on a horizontal rough surface with initial velocity v. The height of the
centre of mass of the block is h from the surface. Consider a point A on the surface. i
(A) angular momentum about A ismvh initially
,
~ ~

(B) the velocity of the block decreases at time passes. . ~


(C) torque of the forces acting on block is zero about A ., I
(D) angular mometum is not conserved about A. , : '1
, . , . . J:,~,.ij ,
25. The torque t on a body about a given point is found to be equal to, Xx L where A is a constiirl,t j
,vector and L is, the angular momentum of the body about that point. From this it follows that ~
(A) dEldt is perpendicular to L at all instants of time J; !
(B) the components of Lin the direction of A does not change with time ., 1
(C) the mag~itude of L does 'not change with time ! ,;
(D) L does not change with time . ,
, ~

26. Aman spinning in free space changes the shape of his 'body,ego by spreading his arms or curling llP. ~
By doing this, he can change his !.
(A) moment of inertia (B) angular momentum ~
Ul

(C) angular velocity . (D) rotational kinetic energy ~


26 .. ' E
'·'1

Rotational Dynamics
27. A hollow sphere of radius
. . R and
.
,
mass m is fully filled with .non viscous liquid of mass m. It is rolled
down a horizontal plane such that its centre of mass mOves with a velocity v. If it purely rolls
.,~ ;

(A) Kinetic energy of the sphere is ! mv 2

(B) Kinetic energy ot the sphere is ; mv 2


.J i
. 8 .
(C) Angular momentum of the sphere about a fixed point on ground is 3" mvR

. 14
(D) Angular momentum of the sphere about a fixed point on ground is mvR ""5
28. A unifonn bar of length 6a and mass 8m lies on a smooth horizontal table as shown in figure. Two
point masses m and 2m moving in the same horizontal.plane with speed 2v and v respectively, strike
the bar and stick to the bar after collision. After the collision, which of the following values are
correct? .i!: ,
Ii _,um@ _ 2v
.

(A) Speed of m~ss center 0 =


=
(B) Angular speed O.2v/a v .L1';j8

m
,'"
\ (C) Angular speed = 0.6v/a -®-···-t·· il
2m
~i
(D) Kinetic energy = 3mv /5
~,
2 ~

29. A sphere of mass Mand radius R is attached by a light rod of length .e to a point P. The sphere rolls
without slipping on a circ1.Jlar track as shown. It is released from the horizontal position. The angular
momentum of the system about P when the rod becomes vertical is :

(A)
~.
MV-:;-gl [l+R] ~[ I+SR
(B) MV-:;-gl 2']
i (C) M ~
.!
'"
11 .
10 7 .
-:;-gl [I +SR]
.
(D) none of the above

I Question No. 30 and 31 (2 questions)


(
"
( 1 A unifonn rod is fix~ 'to arotating turntable so that its lower end is on the

I
~ ..
axis of the .turntable and it makes an angle of 20 0 to the vertical. (The rod is .. .

thus rotating with unifonn angular velocity about a vertical axis passing through

f
1
one end.) If the turntable is rotating clockwise as seen from above.

30 What is the direction of the rod's angular momentu;m vector (calculated about its lower ,~nd)?

-

~ u (A) vertically downwards (B)down at 20 0 to the horizontal


L ~.
.(C) up at 20 0 to the horizontal (D) vertically upwards
~-o 31.. . Is there a torque acting on it, and if so in what direction?
i . (A) yes, vertically (B) yes, horizontally
~
IS 0
'" (C) yes at 20 to the horizontal (D) no
~
~

E 27
JEE-physics

Question No. 32 to 35 (4 questions)


A ring of mass 'M and radius R sliding with a velocity v0 suddenly enters into .rough surface where'
the coefficient offriction is ~, as shown in figure.

, ' 3 v2
(A) The linear distance moved by the centre of mass before the ring starts rolling is -8'
0
, ~g
... ~

(B) The net work done by friction forceis - imv~


2 ~
(C) The· loss is kinetic energy of the ring is mvo
4
..
Sl
~'
,~,
. , " 2 ! '
(D) The gain in rotational kinetic energy is+ mv 0 !
8 ~
o
Paragraph for Question No. 36 to 38 ]
':~I!
, A spring having initial unstretched leng,th.eois lying on a smooth table. It's one end is fixed and the ~
"~

other one is fastened to asmall particle ofmass m. The particle is imparted an initial speed Vo horizontally i

in adir~tion perpendicular to the spring. In the course of the motion in horizontal plane, the maximum f

, elongation of the spring is t:..e = tr/ 10. (Given: m = 2,1 kg, .eo =21 cm, Vo = 1.1 mls). !

. Vo/
J
m~
I
~

---~----------------------------~--------------~~--------------------~---------------------------
~ ~E~

! ,f
.r "
Rotational Dynamics

36. In the course of motion, which of the quantities relating to spring block system are conserved?
(A) kinetic energy (B) momentum (C) angular momentum (D) potential energy
37. Which of the following is correct about initial situation and situation at maximum elogation ?
(A) the orientiation of spring in both positions should be perpendicular to each other.
(B) the velocity at maximum ext~nsion should be zero
(C) the velocity at maximum extension as well as at initial position should be perpendicular to spring.
(D) Acceeration should be zero at the maximum extension as well as at initial position.
38. Student-A: at maximum extension mv'(io +- AR) mVoio'=
mvl2 1 1 1
Student-B: at maximum extension kAR =: (Ro + LS.R)· Student-C: 2' mvo2 =2'mv' 2 + 2' kAi2,

where v' is velocity at instant of maximum extension:


(A) Only Student-A and B are correct (B) Only Student-A and C are correct
(C) Only Student-B and C are correct (D) All are correct
MATRIX MATCH . l'YPE QUESTION .

39. Column-I depicts various situations wher{ some sudden events are taking place. Coluinn-IT describes
changes in various parameters of systems immediately after the events taking place in column-I.
Column I Column II
(A) Joker is standing on revol ving (P) Linear momentum remains conserved.
platform and batman throws the
ball andjoker catches the ball w:jile
it was moving horizontally. .

'"...
'D

'" t
~ ~
'il
'-.
!] Joker, ball and platform is system.
(B) Joker throws tHe ball horizontally· (Q) Mechanical energy is conserved
(
'I
!!l and perpendicular to his motion while
" .I standing on the revolving platform.
~
·t
!
'i
~
$

(
".
.
i~
t
\. ~
l!:­
I
'D
III
Joker, ball and platform is system.
~
~
,,
'" E 29

f
lEE-Physics

(C) Joker jumps horizontally towards (R) Mechanical energy increases.


right from the cart which is
moving at speed v on smooth
horizontal floor.

Joker and cart is the system


(D) Joker drops himself vertically (S) Mechanical energy decreases.
from the moving cart with
no horizontal velocity'relative
'to cart.

ooth (T) v or co changes

Joker and cart is the system

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1.~ 2.~ 3.1A>~ ~."."."
4.~
!

5.,,~ 6.~ 7.r~· 8.~ ~


!Ii!
9. gil• • 10. ~.'"
c. 11.~ 12.~~ 'I

13: romlltCU 14·r,mmZ¢D 15.~· 16.~ ]


17·[6B!Em 18·Em:X~ 19.~. 20·~m j

21•. £?~ 22.~ 23.~ 24.R:~


~
~
"il
25. ICAIOUlr:ImJ 26.~ 27.~ 28.~ ~
1
29. a.I"e.51 30.~ 31.~ 32 • ~
A
i
34.~ ~.
35.~ ~.\'i'Jli'l'\~
36 .~~

~
37·aulft D 38.~ 39.
{\,i;I;'.~,~,\GJ\f,')<'u

L-__________________________________________~________________________________________~I~
. I
'"

~ E·

['
Rotational Dynam'ics'

EXERCISE (J-M).

1~ Initial angular velocity of a circular disc of mass M is (.0\. Then two small spheres of mass m are
attached gently to two diametrically opposite points on the edge of the disc. 'What is the final angular '
velocity of the disc? [AIEEE .. 2002]

M+m) rol
(1) ( ~ ---m-
(2) ( M+m) rol . ( M
(3) M+4m
)(01 M
(4).. ( M+2m
)(01
. ,

2. Moment of inertia of a circular, wire of mass M and radius R about its diameter is- [AIEEE .. 2002] .
(1) MR2/2 (2) MR2 (3) 2MR2 (4)MR2/4
3. A particle of mass m moves along line PC with velocity vas shown.What is the angular momentum
'of the particle about 0 ? [AIEEE .. 2002] .

(l)mvL (2) mv.e (3)mvr (4) zero


A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron plate of thickness t and another disc Yof radius 4R
:a
:f"" is made from an iron plate of thickness tl4. Then the relation between the moment of inertia Ix andIy
"<l
::;:. i s - ' [AlEEE .. 2003]
( ~
'-~

,..
19
.~
(1) Iv= 32 Ix (2)Iv= 16Ix (3) Iv Ix = (4) Iv 64 Ix =
".
! s. A particle perlorming uniform circular motion has angular momentum L. If its angular fr~uency is
] doubled and its kinetic energy halved, then the new angular momentum is- [AIEEE .. 2003]
~

~
L
.~ (1) 4 (2) 2L (3)4L . (4) 2"L
!1 6
.
~ .
Let F be the for~e acting on particle having position vector 1
'

and 1. be the torque of this force


about the origin. Then- [AIEEE .. 2003]
(
\
I~ ~ ~
. (1) r • t = 0 and F .
~ ~
t ¢ 0 '(2)~~'
r.'t'¢Oan d~~
F ... =O
(
", li
!;g
'0
~
(3) r."
~
¢
~ ~
0 and F d '

¢ 0
~ ~
(4) r ... =0 and ~
F ...
~
=0
,

~
E 31
f
~-.
JEE-Physics

7. Which of the following statements is false for a particle moving in a circle with a constant angular

speed? [AIEEE • 2004]

(1) The velocity vector is tangent to the circle


(2) The acceleration vector is tangentto the circle
(3) the acceleration vector points to the centre of the circle
, '

(4)The velocity and acceleration vectors are perpelldicular to each other


8. A solid sphere is rotating in free space. If the, radius of the sphere is increased keeping mass same

which one of the following will not be affected? . [AIEEE • 2004]

(l) moment of inertia (2) Angular momentum


(3) Angular velocity (4) Rotational kinetic anergy
9. One solid sphere A and another hollow sphere Bare of same mass and same outer radii. Their
moment of inertia about their diameters are respectively IAand IB such that- [AIEEE - 2004]

(1) IA =IB (2) IA > IB (3) IA <IB (4) .!a. = dA


'Is ds
where dA and ~ are their den~ities. ,
10. An annularring with inner and outer radii Rl and R2 is rolling without slipping with a uniform angular
speed. The ratio of the forces experienced by the two particles situated on the inner and outer parts of

the ring .!i is.. [AIEEE • 2005]


F2

(1) R2
Ri ' (2) (~~r (3) 1
Ri
(4) Rz'

11. The moment of inertia of uniform semicircular disc of mass M and radius r about a line perpendicular
to the plane of the disc through the centre is- [AIEEE - 2005J
i
(l)!Mf2 ' , (2) ~W (3)Mr2 (4) ~Mr2 ~'
, " ' , ~,

12. A spherical
"
ball of mass, 20 kg
'
is stationary at the top of a hill 'of height 100 m. It rolls
,
down a smooth 8
8
" surface to the ground, then climbs up another hill of height 30 m and finally rolls down to ahorizoIitall '
base, at a height of 20 m above the ground. The velocity attained by the ball is- [AIEEE - 2005]i 1 ~
, ~

n5 '
(1)40V"1m1s , (2)20mls (3)10mls (4) 10.J3Q mls
~
~'
,(

, b
13. A coin is placed on li\horizontal platform which undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angtiidr 1:
frequency roo The amplitude of oscillation is gradually increased. The coin will leave contact with the
platform for the first time: ' [AIEEE - 2006]
i,1
"
(1) at the mean position of the platform' (2) for an amplitude of glro 2
<
i
, (3) for an amplItude of g2/ro 2 (4) at the highest position of the platform, , ~
14. Four point masses, each of value m, are placed at the cornerS of a square ABeD ofside f.. The moment
an
of inertia ofthis system about axis passing through A and parallel to BD is ' ' [AIEEE • 2006] @
I
~

.J3 mf.2
-----~------~~~~~------~~~
(1) 2ri1f.2 (2) (3) 3It1f.2 (4) mf.2,'

n E '-.../

(
Rotational Dynamics

15. A force of -Fk acts on 0, the origin of the co-ordinate system. The torque about the point·
i\. (l,-l)is: [AIEEE-2006]
(1) F(i-J) z

x~Y
(2)-F(i+J)

. (3) F(i+j)
(4)- F(i-j)

16. A thin circular ring of mass m and radius R is rotating about its axis with a constant angular
velocity ro, Two objects each of mass M are attached gently to the opposite ends of a diameter of
the ring. The ring no,W rotates with an angular velocity rot =: tAIEEE. 2006]
(J)m
(1) m(m+2M) (2) (l}(m-2M)
(3) (m+M)
(4).~
m (m+2M) (r'n+ 21vl1

17. For the given uniform square lamina ABeD, whose centre is °: [AlEEE. 2007]
(1) .J2 lAC =IEF F.
01 t •• C
(2) lAD 3IEF = ...
..•-fO
I.' .'

(3) lAC = IEF A"/ i 'B


EI
(4) lAC =.J2IEF
18. A circular disc of radius R is removed from a bigger circular disc of radius 2R, such that the

. circumference of the discs coincide. The centre of mass of the new disc is ~ from the centre of the

bigger disc. The value of a. is- [AIEEE - 2007]


~
~ (1) 1.3 (2) 1-2 (3) 1-6 (4) 1­4
~

, 19. . A ~und
unifonn oody of radius R. M moment ~ass an~ 1, ofi~ertia roll~
do;,n (without slipping) an
& mchned plane making an angle e WIth the honzontal. Then Its acceleration IS- [AIEEE - 2007]
1 .
.g
:l
(1) gsin9 (2)gsin9 (4) : gsin9
j . 1-MR2 /1

.i~
1+I1MR2 1+MR2/I

\.
20...... Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a central forc,e is constant d.ue to- [AIEEE .. 2007]
,
(
. (1) constant force (2) constant hnear mOmentum

( .
:s .. (3) zero torque (4) constanttorque

(
J21. Co~sider a uniform square plat of side 'a' and mass 'm'. the moment ofinertia of this plate about an
\
~
!
. axis perpendicular to its plane and
. .
passing through one of its corners is [AIEEE .. 2008]
~ 5 . 1 2 7
2
. 2 .
(1) -ma2 . "(2) -ma . (3) -ma (4) gma2
I!l'" . 6 12 12
~

!'" E---------~--~3""3~----~--
"
__-,·
<; ,
,~ i ~
lEE-Physics
22. A thin unifonn rod of length I and mass m is swinging freely about a horizontal axis passing through

its end. Its maximum angular speed is roo Its centre of mass rises to a maximum height of:

[AIEEE - 2009]

1/20)2 1 120)2 , 1 p(fJ2 1/(fJ


(1) 29 (2) ~g (3)'3
9 (4)69

23. A small particle of mass m is projected at an angle S with the x-axis with an initial velocity voin the
vosin8
x-y plane as shown in the figure. At a time t < 9 , the angular momentum of the particle is:
1 :

"'" taX

'(1) ~mg Vo t2 cos SI (2) - mg Vo t2 cos Sj [AIEEE - 2010]

. 1 .' A

(3) mg Vo t cos 'Sk (4) - 2mg Vo t2 cos 9k

Where i, } and k are unit vectors along x, y and z-axis respectively.


24. .A pulley ofradius 2 m is rotated about its axis by a force F =(2Ot - 5t2),newton (where t is measured
in seconds) applied tangentially. If the moment of inertia of the pulley about its axis of rotation is 10 or>

kg m2, the 'number of rotations made by the pulley before its direction of motion it reversed, is:- }
. ~

, ' ' ~

(1) more than 6 but less than 9 (2) more than 9 [AIEEE·2011J .~
,
!!i'
n
(3) less than 3
,
(4) more than 3 but less than 6 1
0
25. A thin horizontal circular disc is rotating about a vertical axis passingthrough its centre. An insect 1
,is at rest ata point near the rim of the disc. The insect now moves along a diameter of the disc to I,
.reach its other end. Euring the {journey of the insect, then angular speed ofthe disc :-[AIEEE-2011] l
(1) continuously increases . (2) first increases and then decreases . ' j
(3) remains unchanged ' ( 4 ) continuously decreses , I i
26. A particle of mass 'nil is projected with avelocity v making an 'angle of 30° with the horizontal. The I
, magnitude of angular momentum of the projectile about the point of projecti<;>n when the particleis ~
atits maximum height 'h' is :- '[AIEEE-2011] ~
~

ci) 1mv9
3 ,.: ~
2 mv 3
(2) zero (3) ../2g .J36
(4)' 1 mv '<>

9- Ul
g ~"

:c;

34 E

4"
Rotational Dynamics

27. A diatomic molecule is made of two masses ml and m2 which are separated by a distance r. If we
calculate its rotational energy by applying Bohr's rule of angular momentum quantization, its energy
will be given by : (n is an integer) [A-IEEE-2012]
(mI +m 2')n 2h2 (m I +m 2 )2n

2h2 n 2.h2 4 2n 2 h2
(1) 2m1m2r2 (2) 2m12 2
m r2 2(3) 2(m 1 +m.2 )r2 ( ) (in +m )r2
' 1.2

28. A hoop of radius rand mass m rotating with an angular veiocity roo is placed on a rough horizontal
surface. The initial velocity- of the centre of the hoop is zero. What will be the velocity of the centre
of the hoop when it ceases to slip? [JEIi, Mains-2013]
. (1) reno (2) ~ (3) ~ (4) rroo
4 3 2
{';

29. A bob of mass m attached to an inextensible string of length R. is suspended from a vertical support.
The bob rotates in a horizontal circle with an angular speed ro radls about the vertical. About the point
of suspension: [JEE Mains.2014]
(1) Angular momentum changes in direction but not in magnitude
(2) Angular momentum changes both in direction and magnitude
(3) Angular momentum is conserved
(4) Angular momentum changes in magnitude but not in direction.
30. A mass 'm' is supported by a massless string wound around a·uniform hollow cylinder of.mass m
and radius R. If the string does not slip on the cylinder, with what acceleration will the mass fall on
r(flease? [JEE Mains..2014]

m
on

i<1$
::jl

(
\ ..
I
1!
0
'ji
(1) 5g
6
(2) g
IERIm

(3} 2g
3
(4)!
. 2

t
~
( .1:
f
\. .
i
."
~

(, I
;;

!iI'01

I
Ie
~
'"
~,

( S '
Z

I
\.
E ,------'-'-'- - -- - -_. --:-35. .;.
".,
i
'-.
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (J-A)

1. Adisc is rolling without slipping with angular velocity roo P and Q are tWo points equidistant from the
centre C. The order of magnitude of velocity is . . . [IIT-JEE 2004] .
(A)vQ>vc >vp
(B) vp>vc >vQ
(C) vp =ve ' vQ=vc/2

(D)vp<vc>vQ · .. . . . . .. .

2. .A sphere is rolling without slipping on a fixed horizontal plane surface. In the figure, A is the poin~ of
contact, B is the centre of the sphere and C is its topmost point. Then [IIT-JEE 2009]
(A) VC-vA=2(vB-vC)·· (B) Vc -VB = VB -VA

(C) Ivc -VA! =:= 2!VB- Vcl . (D) !vc"'-VAI = 4/vB/


Paragraph for Questions 3 and 4
. The general motion of a rigid body can be considered to be a combination of (i) a motion of its .
. centre of mass about an axis, and eii) its motion about an instantaneous axis passing through the·
centre of mass. These axes need not be stationary. Consider, for example, a thin .uniform disc' welded
(rigidly fixed) horizontally at.its rim to a massless .stick, as shown in the figure. When the disc­
stick system is rotate4 about the origin on a horizontal frictionless plane with angular speed 0), the
motion at any instant can. be. taken as a combination of (i) a rotation of the centre of mass of the
disc about the z-axis, and (ii) a rotation of the disc through an instantaneous vertical axis passing
through its centre of mass (as is seen from the changed orientation of points P and Q). Both these
motions have the same angular speed 0) in this case. i
z' j
old
~
ro ~
~

Q--... P .. ,. _(' ~
<"'......) •••••• ............
-.~ ":.f 'y

1
.
.
.
. .
. .
.~
.

.Now consider two sirriilar systems as shown in the figure: case (A) the disc with its face vertical
'
.
. . ..•.r
]
is

and· parallel to x-z plane; Case (B) the disc with its face making an angle of 45 0 with x-y plane ~
and its horizontal diameter parallel to x·axis. Inboth the cases, the disc is welded at. point P, and ~
the systems are rotated :ith constant angular speed 0) a:out the z-~is. . . [IIT-JEE 2012] I (
'..

' . , ~.

ro. ~~ro P I
I }{ .y I \V .y ~~
I / ...... ~
e
~

. ~.
x case (a) . case (b)
--~--~~------~~3366.--~::~~----------~

, "­
Rotational Dynamics

3. Which of the following statements regarding the angular speed about the instantaneous axis (passing
through the centre of'mass) is correct?
. CtJ
(A) It is .J2CtJ for· both the cases. (B) It is ro for case (a); and .J2 for case (b).

(C) It is 00 for case (a); and .J2CtJ for case (b). (D) It is ro for both the cases.
4. Which of the following statements about the instantaneous axis (passing through the centre of mass)
is correct?

. (A) It is vertical for both the cases (a) and (b). .

(B) It is vertical for case (a); and is at 45 to the x-z plane and lies in the plane of the disc for case
0

(b). .
(C) It is horizontal for case (a); and is at 45 0 to ,the x;.z plane and is normal to the plane of the
disc for case (b).
(D) It is vertiCal for case (a); and is at 45 0 to the x-z plane and is normal to the plane of the disc
for case (b). . . . .
. 5. The figure shows a system consisting of (i) a ring of outer radius 3R rolling clockwise. without
slipping on a horizontal surface with angular speed 00 and (ii) an inner disc of radius 2R rotating
anti-clockwise with angular speed 00/2. The ring and disc are separated by frictionless ball beating.
The system is in the x-z plane. The point P on the inner disc is at a distance R from the origin,
. where OP makes an angle of 30 0 with the horizontaL Then with respect ~o the honzontal surface,
[lIT.JEE 2012]

z
I

~ •.

~
~ x

r
( ::;: 10

J
~
~
.~
(A) the pOint 0 has a linear velocity 3RCtJf
/\ 1
~.
' Ph ' llRCtJl ~ +7
.J3 RCtJ··k"
(,
\. .. j

i . the pOlI~t
(B) as ai 'mear
. vel
OCttY4
(.
i I
\.
~ RCtJk
!
c
~;: ~I
(C) the pOint P has a linear velocity 1: RCtJf -

' (3 - - RCtJl~. + --lRCtJk" .


.J3)

10.
,. P h· as a I'mear veI
(D) .the· pomt

~'~~f OCtty
'0 .. . 4· 4

t
III
.~
!
E .. ~.
I '.

(
JEE-Phl.sics'

6. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass density p is bent into a circular loop with centre at 0
as shown. The moment of inertia of the loop about the 'axis XX' is: [lIT-JEE'(Scr)'2000]
B

~
'V
(A) pV/87t2 (B) pJ)/167t2 (C) 5pV1167t2 CD) 3pL3/87t2
7. One quarter sector is cut from a uniform circular disc of radius R. This sector has mass M. It is made
to rotate about a line perpendicular to its plane and passing through the center of the original disc. Its
moment of inertia about the axis of rotation is ' [ l I T-JEE 2000]
"-':1
1
(A) - MR2
2 I'I~
~
, 1
(B) -MR2
4
1 '
(C) - MR2 '<l\
8
CD) .J2 MR2
8. A disc has m~s 9m. A hole of radius Rl3 is cut from it as ~hown in the
figure. The moment of inertia of remaining part about an axis passing thr9;Ugh
the centre '0' of the disc arid perpendicular to the plane of the disc is:
[IIT-JEE'200S (Scr)]
40 CD) ,31 mR2
(A) 8 mR2 (B)4mR2 " (C),9'mR
2
9
9. A solid sphere of mass 'M, radius Rang having moment of inertia about an axis Pl:issing through the on
, " ,­
'centre of mass as I, is recast into a disc of thickness t, whose moment of inertia about an axis passing :;­
through its edge and perpendicular to its plane remains I. Then, radius of the disc will be ~
~

1
" ,

(A) 2R/;J1S (B) R~2/1S , ' (C)4R/.J15 (D)Rl4 [IIT-JEE2006]

10. Four solid spheres each of diameter .J5 cm and mass 0.5 kg are placed with their centers at the f
,9
"

,1,­

, comers ofa square of side 4 cm. The moment of inertia of the system about the diagonal of the square ~ ,
is N x l<r' kg-m2, then N is ' [IIT.;JEE 2011] .I
11. A lamina is made by removing a small, disc of diameter 2R from ~ f ''--./

abigger disc of uniform mass density and radius 2R, as shown / ,( "Ib \ "\ , ! ~,
in the figure. The moment ~f iriertiaofthis lamina about axes,
p!
;, 1 \.- >

{
, passing through 0 and P is I~ and Ip respectively; Both these 1..."
,

·'m:I'
~,
axes are perpendicular to the piane of the lamina. The ratio
1
I; ~
, on
(;

,
IS)
!illiI
(
>"- ...../

c
to the nearest integer is[IIT-JEE 2012] ,e
I,,,,
'1'111
.',8
' i :z;

38 E , i~-,
"'-'/
g
Rotational Dynamics

12.
;;:;. A cubical block of side L rests on a rough horizontal surface with coefficient of friction J.l.. A horizontal
, ,
force F is applied on the block as shown. If the coefficient of frictionis sufficiently high so that the
block does not slide before toppling, the minimum force requi'red to topple the block is:
[lIT-JEE' (Scr) '2000]

(A) infinitesimal (B) mg/4 (C) mg/2 (D) mg(l '-J.l.)


13. A cylinder roils up an inclined plane, reaches some height, and then rolls down (without' slipping
, throughout these motions). The directions of the frictional force acting on the cylinder are
(A) Up the incline while ascending and down the incline while descending [lIT·JEE 2002]
(B) l1P the incline while ascending as well ,as descending
(C) down the incline while ascending and up the incline while descending
(D) down the incline while ascending as well as descending
'14. Three particles A,B, and C each of mass m, are connected to

each other by three massless rigid rods to form a rigid,equilateral

triangular body of side t. This body is placed on a horizontal

frictionless table (x-yplane) and is hinged to it at the point A, so

that it can move without friction about the vertical axis through

A (see figure). The body is set into rotational motion on the table
B-f
L.-· ..-,
about A with a constant angular velocity co. [IIT-JEE 2002] .

(a) Find the magnitude of the horizontal force exerted by the hinge on the body.
(b) At time T, when the side BC is m parallel to the x-axis, a force F is applied on B along.BC
:';!

(as shown).Obtain the x-component and the y =component of the force exerted by the hinge on the
body, immediately after time T.
15. A block of mass m i:s held fixed against a wall by a applying a horizontal force F. Which of the.
following option is i~correct: [lIT-JEE'2005 (Scr)] .
:a (A) friction force = ill'S
i
"d
::. (B) F will not produce torque
~, 1-" 2a
f (C) normal will not produce torque I..-LI'
·El
! (D) normal reaction = F ~. ':'.a .: t
1
~ ,t)6. A cylinder of mass m ,and radius R rolls down an inclined plane of inclination e. Calculate the linear
l' acceleration of the axis of cylinder. [lIT·JEE 2005]
~, '
( f17. Two identical ladders, each of mass M and length L are resting on the rough . _P
I
I' .
\ ~ horizontal surface as shown in the figure. A block of mass m hangs from P.
'. Ifthe system is in equilibrium, find the magnitude and the direction offrictional

I force at A and B. [lIT-JEE 2005] .

~ 18. A solid cylinder is rolling down a rough inclined plane of inclination e. Then

( .
~Q (a) The friction force is dissipative
.
( lil... (b) The friction force is necessarily changing
~ (c) The friction force will aid rotation but hinder translation
Ii e...
I

~ (d) The friction force is reduced ife is reduced


) ~

l,.,'
t
E 39

,
, JEE-Physics

'19. There is a rectangular plate of mass M kg of dimensions (a x b). The plate is held in horizontal
position by striking n small balls each of mass m per unit area per unjt time. These are striking in the
shaded half region of the plate. The balls are colliding elastically with velocity v. What is v? It is
given n = 100, M = 3 kg, m = 0.01 kg; b = 2 m; a = 1m; g = 10 rnls 2• [JEE 2006]

20. Statement-1 :. Two cylinders, one hollow (metal) and the other solid (wood) with the same mass abd
ldentical dimensions are simultaneously allowed to roll without slipping down an inclined plane from
the same height. The hollow cylinder will reach the bottom of the inclined plane first.
and' '
Statement-2 : By the principle of conservation of energy, the total kinetic energies of both the cylinders
are identical when they reach the bottom of the incline. [JEE 2008J
(A) Statement-l is True, State1llent-2 is True; statement-2 is a correct explanation for statement~1
(B) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; statement·2 is NOT a corred explanation for statement-l
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False ;;1

(D) Statement-l is False, StatemenT-2 is True


21. A bloqk of base 10 cm x 10 cm and height 15 cm is kept on an inclined plane. The coefficient of
friction between them is .J3~ The inclination 6 of this inclined plane from the horizontal plane is
gradually increased from 0°. Then:- [IIT.;.JEE 2009]
(A) at 6 =30°, the block will start sliding down the plane
(B) the biock will remain at rest on the plane up to certain 6 and then it win topple'
(C) at 6=60°, the block will start sliding down the plane and.continue to do so at higher angles
, (D) at 6=60°, the block will start sliding down the plane and on further;-increasing e, it will topple at i
. <
~n6 ~
011'
stick ::It
22. A boy is pushing a ring of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m with a ::!!
~

. stick as shown in the figure. The stick applies a force of 2N on ~


's .
the ring and rolls it without slipping with an acceleration of 0.3 !
2
mls • The coefficient of friction between the ground and the ring
is large enough that rolling always occurs and the coefficient of j
1
, friction between the stick and the ring is (PIlO). Thevalue ofP is Ground ~ (

[lIT-JEE 2011] ~ '[


~
23. Two solid cylinders P and Q of same mass and same radius start rolling down a fixed inclined plane 1
, ~

from the same height at the Same time. Cylinder P has most of its mass concentrated near its surface, $.
while Q has most of its mass concentrated near the axis. Which statement(s) is(are) correct? I
(A)
.
Both cylinders.P and Q reach the ground"at the same time. [IIT-JEE 2012] ~ ~

(B) Cylinder P has larger acceleration than cylinder Q. ~


(C) Both cylinders reach the ground with'same translational kinetic energy.
,
~ ~

(D) Cylinder Q reaches the ground with larger angular speed. ~


\~

.-" E
40
. Rotational Dynamics

24. A ball moves over a fixed track as shown in the figure. From A to B the ball rolls without slipping.
Surface BC is frictionless. K A, KB and Ke are kinetic energies of the ball at A, Band C, respectively.
Then [lIT-JEE 200()]

·hAl~ B~I~
~))g

(A)hA>he; KB>Ke (B) hA>he; Kc>KA


=
(C) hA he; KB Ke = (D) hA < he; KB > Ke

. . ,25. A small object of uniform density rolls up a curved surfage with an initial
.
I

3v 2 f
velocity v. It reaches upto maximum height of 4g with respect to the initial
,~._
I
............._••J

position. The object is . [JEE 2007]


(A) ring (B) solid sphere (C) hollow sphere (D) disc
26. A metal rod oflength IL' and mass 'm' is pivoted at one end. A thin disk of mass 'M' andradius 'R'
.« L) is attached at its center to the free end of the rod. Consider two ways the disc is att~ched: (case
A). The disc is not fre~ to rotate about its center and (case B) the disc is free to rotated about its center.
The rod-disc systetlt-performs SHM in .vertical plane .after being released from the same displaced
;

position. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true? [IIT-JEE2011] ,

" (A) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in case B

(B) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in case B


. if· ,
J,·~n~
...

,.
(C) Angular frequency for case A> Angular frequency for case B

(D) A~gular frequency for case A< Angular frequency for case B
01 , .
l27
~
A r~d AB of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal frictionl,ess surface. A particle of mass In

"
~ travelling along the surface hits the end 'A' of the rod with a veloqity Vo in the direction perpendicular
~
~
'iii
to AB. The collision is completely elastic. After the collision the particle comes to rest.
/ J ~ (a) Find the ratio rnIM. [IIT-JEE' 2000]
1
(b) A point P on the rod is at rest immediately after the collision. Find the.'distance AP ..

I
l- 28.
(c) Find the linear speed of the point P at a time nU(3vo) after the collision.
An equilateral triangle ABC formed from a uniform wire has two small identical

~1 .'5
,] beads initially located. at A. The triangle is set rotating about thevertical axis AD.
Then the beads are released from rest simultaneously and allowed to slide down,
Cj
- I
I
I
:$ one long AB and the other along AC as shown. Neglecting frictional effects, the ~
g
(
(
\
i
g5,
quantities that are conserved as the beads slide down, are
(A) Angular velocity and total energy (kinetic and potential)
(B}Total angular momentum and total energy .
[IIT-JEE 2000]

9':
B' C
a,
\0. !
(C) Angular velocity and monient ofinertia about the axis of rotation. o

! !!l (D) Total angular momentum and moment of inertia about the axis of rotation·.

~. -~~~--=-~----~~------~------------~--~-----------
t \

"
.
;.·1'
.~ . Ei,.. 41
lEE-Physics

29. Two heavy metallic plates are joined together at 90° to each other. A laminar sheet of mass 30 Kg.is
hinged at the line AB joining the two heavy metallic plates. The hinges are frictionless. The nioment~f
inertia of the laminar sheet about an axis parallel to AB and passing through its centre ofmass is 1.2 Kg­
m2• Two rubber obstacles P and Q are fixed, one on each metallic plate at a distance 0.5 m from the line
AB. This distance is chosen so that the reaction due to the hinges on the laminar sheet is zero during the
impact. Initially the laminar sheet hits one of the obstacles with an angular velocity 1 radls and turns
back~ If the impulse on the sheet due to each obstacle is 6 N-s. [lIT-JEE' 2001]

(a) Find the locati"on of the centre of mass of the laminar sheet from AB.
(b) At what angular velocity does the laminar sheet come back after the first impact?

. (c) After how many impacts, does the laminar sheet come to rest?

30. A circular platform is free to rotate in a horizental plane about a vertical axis passing through its
centre. A tortoise is sitting at the edge of the platform. New, the platfoI1llis given an angular veloc~ty
000, When the tortoise move along a chord ofthe platform with a constant velocity (with respect to the .
platform), the angular velocity of the platform oo(t). will vary with time t as [IIT-jEE 2002~
OOCt)L=. . OOCt)c··... ooCt)~ .. OOCt)b·...
000 00 0 . 00 0 00 .
0
(A) . . (B) (C) (D)
t t t <, ; t

31. A particle is moving in a herizontal uniform circular motien. The angular mementum of the particle is
conserved about the point: . [IIT-JEE'(Scr)2003]
(A) Centre of the circle (B) Outside the circle . ..

I
(C) Inside the circle (D) Point .on circumference }
"<I
32•. Two parti,cles each of mass M are connected by a massless rod oflength I. The rod is lying on . !.
the smooth sufrace. If one of the particle is given an impulse MV as shown. in the figure then i
angular velocity of the rod weuld be [nT-JEE'(Scr)2003] !
(A) vII (B) 2vll ]
-- .•S!
(C) v/21 (D) None Mv M.l g .
~
33. A child is standing with folded hands at the center of a platform rotating about its central axis. T~e ~
. kinetic energy of the system is K. The child now stretches his arms so that the moment of inertia of the t.
system doubles. The kinetic energy of the system now is [JEE' 2004 (Scr)] ~...
(A) 2K (B) Kl2 (C) Kl4 (D) 4K .~
. ~

34.· Aherizontal circular plate is rotating about a vertical axis passing through its centre with an angular i
velocity 000, A man sitting at the c~ntre having two blocks in his hands stretches out his hands so that ~
the moment of inertia ofthe system doubles. If the kinetic energy of the system is K initially, its final ~
. kinetic energy will be [lIT-JEE 2004] ~-
(A) 2 K (B) Kl2' (C) K (D) Kl4 ~
. ~

42 E
(-I
(,
Rotational Dynamics

35. A particle'moves in circular path with decreasing speed. Which of the following is correct
(A) L is constant [I1T.JEE'2005 (Scr)]
(B) orily direction of Lis constant
a
(e) acceleration istowards the centre
(D) it will move in a spiral and finally reach the centre
36. A wooden log of mass M and length L is hinged by a frictionless nail at O. A bullet of mass 111 strikes
with velocity v and sticks to it. Find angular velocity of the system immediat~ly after the collision
about O. [I1T-JEE 2005]

M~~_~
. v

Comprehension For O. 37to 39 (3 Questions)


Two discs A and Bare mounte'd coaxially on a vertical axle. The discs have moments of inertia I and
21 respectively about the common axis. Disc A is imparted an initial angular velocity 2 00 using the
entire potential energy of a spring compressed by a distance Xl' Disc B is imparted an angular velocity
00 by a spring having the same spring .constant and compressed by a distance x2. Both the,.discs, rotate
in the clockwise direction. [JEE 2007]
37. The ration x/x2 is
1 1
'":L
(A) 2 (B) 2 (e) J2 (D) J2
38. When disc B is brought in contact with disc A, they acquire a common angular velocity in time t. The
average frictional torque on one disc by the other during this period is·

.2100 9100 9100 3100

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~
39~ The loss of kinetic energy the above process is
i
l 2 2
1002 100 2
.oj

~
~
(A) 100
2.·
(B) 100
3 .
(e) 7 (D)~
.
~ 40.
,"

If the resultant of the external forces acting on a system of particles is zero, then from an inertial frame,
I1
1'.
one can surely say that .[lIT·JEE 2009]
.Il
(A) linear momentum of the system does not change in time
~ (B) kinetic energy ,of the system does not change in time
~.
.!! (e) angular momentum of the system does not change in time ..
~ (D) potential energy of the system does not change in time
1;
,. 1 41. A thin ring of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m is rolling without slipping on a horizontal plane with
r
\. ' 1·
!
velocity 1 mls. A small ball ofmass 0.1 kg, movingwith velocity 20 mls in the opposite direction, hits '
m
the ring at a height of 0.75 and goes vertically up with velocity 10 mls. Immediately after the
c collision . [lIT·JEE 2011]

,1
i
;;;
1l
(A) the ring has pure rotation about its suitionary eM
20m1s
hOm/s

(B) the ring comes to a complete stop .


(j I;
~
IS, e

'"Q,
au (e) friction between the ring and the ground is to the left
~
"-' . ~
!.l
I. ..). E (D) there is no. friction
between the ring and
_the.ground
\, 43

{
JEE-Physics

42•. A thin uniform·rod; pivoted at OP, is rotating in the horizontal plane


. with constant angular· speed 00. as shown in the figure. At time t = 0,
00
. a small insect starts from 0 and moves with C0nstant speed v with respect
v----+
to the rod towards the other end.·If reaches the end of the rod at t=.T 01 •
and stops. The angular speed of the system remains 00 throughout. The

magnitude of the torque (lrD .on the system about 0, as a function of

time is best represen~ed by which plot? [lIT-JEE 2012]

I~ I~ I~ I~
(A) (B) (C) CD) . j
T v T v T v T
43. . A small mass m is attached to a massless string whose other end is fixed at P as shown in the figure.
The mass is undergoing circular motion in. the x-y plan~ with centre at 0 and constant angular speed .
00. If the angular momentum of the system, calculated about 0 and P are denoted by Lo and Lp
respectively, then ~ [IIT-JEE 2012]
(A) Lo and Lp do not vary with time . P

(B) Lo varies with time while Lp remains constant .................

:' 0 m

'. (C) ·~oremai~sconst~mt while Lp varies with time ····..·..··f..···::;::tro

.(D)·Lo and Lp· both vary with time


44•. A unifonn cirCUlar disc of mass 50 kg and radius 0.4 m is rotating with an angular velocity of
. 10 tad S-1 about its own axis, which is vertical. Two uniform circular rings, each of mass 6.25 kg
and radius 0.2 m, ·are gently placed symmetrically on the disc in such a manner that they are touching
each' other along the rods of the disc and are horizontal. .Assume that the friction is large enough.
such that the rings are at rest relative to the disc and the system rotates about the original ax~s. The
new angular velocity (in rad 8-1) of the system i s . UIT-JEE Advanced 2013]
45. Ahorizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m and mass 0.45 kg is free to rotate ~
about its axis. Two massless spring toy-guns, each carrying a steel ball of ~
. . ~

mass 0.05 kg are attached to the platform at a distance 0.25 m from the centre on ~ (
its either sides along its diameter (see figure). Each gun simultaneously fires the ~
balls horizontally and perpendicular to the diameter in opposite directions. ., I '~
After leaving the platform, the balls have horizontal speed of 9 ms-1 with respect to the ground~ The i .
rota~onal speed of thl:? platform in rad s-1 after the balls leave the platform is [lITMJEE Advanced;2014] l. (
46. A uniform circular disc of mass 1.5 kg and radius 0.5 m is initially at rest on a 'horizontal frictionless]
. surface. Three forces of equal magnitude F = 0.5 N are applied simultaneously along the three sides'
of an equilateral triangle XYZ with its vertices on the perimeter ofthe disc (see figure). One second!
after ap~l ying the forces, t~e angular speed of the disc in rads~1 is [lIT-JEE Advanced 2014] Y
~
:S
~
~6
!il';l

x :=y ~F e~
\0
PJ
.t:l

--~----~--------__----------~------------------~A'"~----------------------'---------------------~--_i
..
" 6
. '......
I
J ANSWER KEY
I
~)l~_~~t~,~~ ~l:~&~i]T~~~~~~~~@~l~hl~~~~~
!
405 45
3. Ans. m[2
I

1. Ans.,(a) -2 (b) ­
1t 1t
rev/sec. 2. Ails. 4.8 Ma2
12
4.Ans. lcube ='L1pfote
I

"
:~, "
'5. Ans. 2.00 N'm, (b) k .6. Ans. 8 kg , 7. Ans. (3/8) Fg 8. Ans. 30°

;9. Ans. 10-3 radls 2 10. Ans. (a)


mgcos
2
a (b)mg 1
(eos
.2
2
a) ' (c)
mgsinacosa
2
,
, a 15 b 4
11. Ans. (i) 10/13m1s2, ,({ft50Q0I261t, (iii) 480113N 12. Ans. - = - and - = ­
.. :,l~,
b 14 c 3

13. Ans. 112 rna 14. Ans.. M=2m( -g--l


2 h )
15. Ans. v = .jSgR
. 2 R 002 '.

16. Ans. 28mg


, 2
17. Ans. 6mvo. 18. Ans. 2mg 19. Ans. a2lb2 .
5

tv
20. Ans. 60° east of south, 30° south of east. 21. Ans.' 120 22. Ans. 3"
[2
23. Ans. 10/3 mls 24. Ans. 75 J ,25.Ans. mv s ~
·26. A n. 12x
4.
. ' m.
27.. Ans. (a) 00/3, (b) -3-mooR, (c) -3-mroR
.JYi
28. Ans'. 2F/M 29. Ans. 16 mls"
30. Ans. 5 31. Ans.lI2 rna 32. Ans. 0015 33. Ans.16 mls"
34. Ans. 6 mv~

al 4
::;~
1 1. Ans. 36
2
2. Ans. 57/140MR3. " "
Ans. 6N, -0.6j±0.6k


!""

::0
4~ Ans. 1.63 N, 1.224 m
' '1tRm 1tR
5. Ans. (a) t = 2I; (b) s:= 2

1 6. Ans. (a) 8c =eos- 1


=.J4/7 gR , (c) KT/KR =6
(417), (b) v

7. Ans. (i)(a) 3 gIL (ew)(b){ 1i + 3) g = 1.323 g L 49.1° (c) (1 i - 2 j) g = 2.18 g


11
, I .~ L -66.6°
~
~
1i
(ii)(a) glL(ew) (b) - (1) g' I (c) - ( 1 i + j) g =1.323 g L -130.9°
11

( !!!
"- - $
i
..
o
, 7
60 2 80
7
2
8. Ans. (a) -rad Is (b) -m Is' (c)

9; Ans. (i)(a) 5g/~-!- (b) g -!-


204 N
{;;
7vp
13 g ' , 2
(c) 0 (ii) (a)17 -!- (b) g -!- (c) } -!­
eli:
c ~ 10~ Ans. (a) l =O.lm; (b) 00' =lradls; (c) laminar sheet will never come to rest
.( ~
II
. ' " .JYi ' .JYi
',t:l.
- '"

11. Ans. (a) 00/3, (b) -mooR, (c) -mooR


'" I -
,
(. . g
l1:
3 """""
;':j
3
~ ~ - .',

( E 45

r------c-­

'--­
"":":;IIM

lEE-Physics

1. B 2. A 3. B 4.D 5. C 6. B 7. C S.B 9. A
10. C 11. C 12.B 13.B 14. A 15. A,B,C 16.B 17. C lS.D
( "

19. D 20. C 21. D 22. C 23. D 24. B 25. C 26. A 27.D


28. A 29. A 30.B 31. B 32.B 33.B 34. D 35. C 36. C·
37.B 3S. B,C 39.D 40. C . 41. D 42.C 43.B 44. C 45. D
46.B 47. A, B, C .>4S.C 49. B,C 50. A,B 51. A .52. C 53.B
54.B 55.D 56. A 57. C 5S. A,C,D, 59. B

1. A,C,D 2. D 3. A,B 4. A,B,C,D: 5. C 6. A 7. C


S.C 9. B,C,D 10. B,C 1l.. A,D 12. A 13. D 14. D
15.B· 16. C 17. A,C lS. B,C,D 19. C 20.B 21. A
22.B 23. A,B,C 24. A,B,D . 25.A,B,C 26. A,C,D 27. C . 2S. A,B,D.
29.D 30.B 31.B· 32. A,B,C 33. C 34. B,C~ 35. A,C,D
36. C. 37. C 3S. B 39. (A)- 'CST); (B). (R) ; (C)· (PRT) ; (D). (PQ)

:s.
I.A 2. BC' 3. D 4.A 5.AB 6.D 7. A . S.B ~
oil
9.A. 10.9 11.3 12. c 13.B ;:;
~
. F 1.6. a _ 2gsin a .~
14. (a).,j3 'mlro 2 (b) (Fnet)x = ­ 4"' (Fnet)y =.,j3 mlro2 15. C uxls - 3 I
i
cot a 'i
17.f=(M+m)g-2­ lS.CD 19.1Omls 20.D 21. B 22.4 23. D
j
1:
mI' 2L vo 1:..,
24.AB 25. D 26. AD .27. (a) M ~ 4 ; (b) x =3; (c) 2.J2. 28.B ~

29~ (a).e = O.1m; (b) ro' = lradls ; (c) laminar sheet will never come to rest
. :.
30. B 1
$
3mv ~
31. A 32. A . 33.B 34. B 35.B 36. ro = (3m +M)L 37.C ~ ( ,
t.....
~
38. A., 39.B 40. A 41. AC orC 42.B 43. C '10

44. S 45.4 46. 2'


~
'"
III

~
46
E
I
!'

I CONTENTS"'.
Centre of Mass, Momentum &: Collision
-Key-Concepts Formulae and Basic Theory 1
o· :Exercise (S) . Conceptual Subjective Problems 9
• Exercise (0-1) Single Correct MCQ's 14
Vt

.I.
• Exercise (0-2)
Exercise (J-M)
Miscellaneous Type Problems 26
. Previous .10 years AIEEE Problems 32'
• Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years IIT-lEE Problems 35
) •. AnswerK~y 39
<.

"

:1'

,.
1.,

(
"-.

\.-.
.)

j
~..

I.
, ,

,i

, }

Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

;t
Centre of (Mass, Momentum & Collision
Methods of Impulse and Momentum
And
System of Particles

1. Impulse of a Force
The magnitude and direction of a force and the time interval in which the for~e acts decide effect of
the force on the change in momentum of the body. '
Linear impulse or simply impulse of a force is defined as integral of the force with respect to time.
Ifaforce F acts on a body, its impulse in a time interval from tl to tris given by the following equ~tion.

1= l' Fdt
/
Variable or constant force .

I =F(t,-t;)=F(At) Constant force

For one-dimensional forc~, impulse equals to area between force-time graph and the time axis.

1/ ~

If several forces F;, F; , F; ......• I., act on a body in a time interval, the total ~rppulse Inc! of all thes~ I
j
forces equals to impulseofthe net force.

~ I-net = J,rtl F;dt:*


- .' J,rll F- ' rtl -'
2 dt+ .............. + J F"dt =
[I (F;- +F;- + ............. +F"- )dt

ill I, ',II (/ (/

'ie
'0
j 2. Impulse Momentum Principle •
....
The net impulse of all the forces acting on the body in a time interval equals the change in the
J-;. momentum of the body i~ that time interval.
if:

1i

3 loot = P,"'"7 PI = mv,-mvi


(
',- ii;!
In Cartesian component form, the above equation can be expressed as
c 1­~ I nel.:( = Pft - Pix = mv,x -mvlx
I"
"- ~
~, I ne!,), = PlY - Piy = mv/y' - mV{I'
~
(
j I net.z = P,z:'" Plz =mvft,-mv lz .
'@
'-
~ . If we are using a non-inertial ,reference frame, impulse of corresppnding pseudo force must also be
2 considered in addition to impulse of the physical forces. . ,
,-,
E r
(
JEE,.Physics 1
3. .Momentum .,utd Kinetic Energy Ii
Amoving particle possesses momentum as well as kinetic energy. For aparticle of ~ass m moving
with velocity v, magnitude of
.
its momeritum p and its kinetic energy K
" "
bear: th.e following relation.
"." . ' . :

';-..
. 2
K=L
2m

4. Internal and external Forces for a System of Particles


The forces, which particles or the bodies included in a system apply on each other, ar~ known as
all
internal forces 8l1d other forces applied on them by particies .or bQdies not inc1uded.in the system
l
~~ , are known as external forces.
"

s. Principle of COJ!AServation of linear momentum ~


Total momentum of a system of particles cannot change under the action of internal forces.

If net impulse of aU the external forces in a time interval is' zero, the total momentum of the system

remains.unchaRged.

LPiuitial = LPtinal
Since force, impulse and D;1omentum are vectors, component of momentum of a system in a particular
direc.ti(;m is conserved, if net impulse of all external forces in that direction vanishes.
If IOel,x =0 LPft= LPIx

If lner,y'= 0 LPfy= LPI;

If lnel.:!. ,= 0 LPft = LPlz

6. Collision or Impact
.Impact or coilision is interaction ofvery small duration between two ,bodies in which the bodies apply
rehitively very large forceson each other,
~
~
r( '
Central and Eccentric Impact
In central impact the mass centers of the both the bodies are located on the common normal and in
]
'0
eccentric impact, the mass Centers of both or 'anyone of the bodies are not onthe common normal.

Common Tangent Common Ta~gent


j
&
"

.
Common NOltllal '
,~
Centrallmpac~
/.

Eccentric Impact
IIi;!
....
I::r';$', ~
LIi
Head..()uand Oblique Collision . ,~.. . '~
In head-on c~llision the velocities vectors of the colliding bodies are directed along the common ~
nonnai, and in obliqqe collision the velocity vectors of both or that of anyone of the bodies are not ~ ~'I

along the common normal. ,..;' i., 2' Ij.


11,

, J 2 i: '
'o.f.o.;;. .'"
:,l~.· ..,
r, ..
'

Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collisio,;

6.1 ,Head-on Collision


During a collision, both the bodies push each other and first they get deformed till the deformation
, reaches a maximum value andthen they tries to regain their original shape due to elastic behaviors
of the materials fonning the"balls.
A B A B A B

Restitution
Period
lnsiant when Instant ofmaximum lilstant when
, impact starts defgnnation Impact ,ends

,> , Total momentum of the collidin'g bodies remains conserved.


mAvA+mBvB = (mA +mB)u =mAuA+mBuB

Coefficient ofRestitution
The ratio of magnitudes of impUlse of restitution force to that of deformation force on a body is
defined as the coefficient of restitution ,e.

Impulse, of restitution force


e= '.' , '
ImpUlse ofdeformation force,
,
, It also equals the ratio of velocity of separation to that of approach.
, ,

,r _Velocity of separation _ VB -VA


e - ­
Velocity of approach uI! -u A

,l Elastic and inelastic collision


1M
,
'".'.,
Perfectly InelastiC Impact e=0

:- -)
Lni
\0'
,,"'

, After the collision, the bodies stick to each other.

I g Kinetic energy decreases

1
'0
Perfectly Elastic Impact e= 1
~ Kinetic energy remains unchanged.
~ •
~

6.2 Oblique Central Impact'

~
t ..
'This ,kind of collision can be analyzed by resolving the velocities before and after the impact

along the common tangent and the common normal.

1
:$.
'~

~
/ ',' n iI-.....;-•...,.. • un...
Li .~

( , '"~
u", UBI
VAl VB'
~:
~'

t:
@. Immediately before Impact Immediately before Impact
"''' :fl :
0'
o
"
'--..{, z' :.. .. ~ ,

r E 3'
",,>

c
lEE-Physics
... ~
'::,al,
.~.
Component along the t-axis . If surfaces of the bodies undergoing impact are smooth, the
t-component of velocities of each of the bodies remains
unchanged. :\
VAl = utlI and VOl = U/JI 1
Component'along the n-axis For components of velocities along the n-axis, the impact I
can be treated s~me as head-on central impact. 'J
The component along t~e n-axis of the total morpentum of
the two bodies is conserved l
mOvOn + rnA VAn = mOu:0 1I +mAu An
'. \­
Concept of coefficient of restitution e is applicable only I
for the n-component vdocities.
J
VOn, -:-V An = e(u A11 .... U on )

6.3 Obliqu,e collision when one or both the colliding bodies a~e., constrained in motion . f
J
In oblique collision, we have discussed how to analyze impact Of bodies that were free to move
, (
/ '
before as well as after the impact. Now we will se wh~t happens if one or both the bodies
II
undergoing oblique impact are constrained in motion. / '
\

Component along the t-axis Ifsurfaces of the bodies undergoing impact are sm.ooth, the f
I •

i-component of the momentum of the body that is free to


move before and after the inwact remain conserved.
\I'
If both the bodies are constrained, the t-component of neither
. one remains conserved. . ,.
Momentum Conservation Wemay find a'dir~ction in which no ext~~al force acts on C I
(
both the bodies. The component .of total momentum of both
the bodies along this direction remains conserved.
'(
'"
rr
/

~
Coefficient of restitution .' Concept ofcoefficient of restitution e is applicable only for ~
the n-:component velocities. . . " ~
'0

~
(

1'"
~ 7. Concept of Center of Mass of a System of Pariicles !
Center of mass of a rigid body or system of particles is a point;wnosetranslation motion is identiq~l ~
t.o the translation motion ofthe rigid body orthe system of particle. '. .... 11 ]
I'
i"_.j

The coricept of mass center is used to represent gross translation of the system. Therefore, total linear t
momentum of the whole system must be equal to the linear momentum o!the system due to translation i.
ofits mass c e n t e r . ' ~

7.1 Center of Mass of System of Discrete Particles.


. . .
*"!
Let at an instant particles of a systemhaving masses m l , m 2, .. ..m i, .... .. and mn are atlocations ~.
~, ~, ..... ,~ ,....... and r" respectively. The position veClor r::.of center of ~ass is given by =_

. . c
the following equation. . ~ .
·,·4··.. ..., . '" " " .' .,.... ,'. _,. t;
:..--:........~ ........-..,......

Centre of Mass, Momentum & Col/ision

r = ml~ +m2~ + ............... +ml~ + .................... +mllr" = Lm/~


c "M ' M

Cartesian coordinate y ,z ) of the mass center are components of the posi tio~ vector
(x , ~' of
, ,c c c '
"the mass center. '

Lm/x/ . '£m/Yi . Lm/z/


Xc =--x;;--, Yc =--x;;--' zc'=-U­

7.2 Center of Mass of an Extended Body or Continuous Distribution of Mass


Position vector r., of the center of mass' of a continuously distributed mass M is given by the
,I foHowing equation.

_ jrdm
r=-­
,c M'
Cartesiancoordinate (xc' Yc' z) of the mass center are components of the position vector r.. of
the mass center.

i 'Jxdm. " jydm; jzdm


1
xc -- ' M
--, Yc= M Zc = M

Center of mass of a uniform body lies on its axis of symmetry.


I
7.3 Centre of mass of some common objects
,
I
/I System Location of the Center of Mass
~
(I ,
, 1.
:2
, Co

g
....
Two,particle,system £~_.._:~...:'..~r.c ...~Z
ml
l
• •••
mZ
'1i, = m.
m2 r
":"l 2
' m,.r
+ m and r2 = m + m
1 2

~,
Center of mass of ,a two~particle
'

I E '0

a system 'divides the distance be­


tween them into reciprocal ratio of
(l :I the mass~s. '
\,' ~
~

\1 ]
c: i y+ A ' rsinq'
1,1 A thin uniform arc x =-­ q
, C

c ~
(I , ~ X Yc =0
'1'
I" "
,0 ,~
~
\.. ! .!!!

,I ~
',-' lfl
J 2
E
'l 5
JEE-Physics

2rsinq
Sector ofa thin uniform disk y
. Xc = 3q

Yc= 0

J'

. .A thin hemisphericalshell y Xc= 0

r l
x
Yc ="2

Zc= 0 I
A homogeneous hemisphere Xc= 0
.~
' ....,; .
.
"'~~;~" .
3r ,
Yc= ~

Zc =0

y
A thin hollow rightcone Xc= 0
Lt')

~
h ~
Yc= 3'
]
'0
= 0 g
...a
Zc

!
:i­
c.
....

...~
• A homogeneous right cone Xc = 0

h
I
Ili
.... Ie
Yc= '4 ~
::c:
~
....
0
N
,e.
Ie
I.r'
Zc= 0 C3 L'0
~
~
0
if' •
2: 1""'-'

6 E 1"
.'-'
/r"
V

/ "",
'U
enfr:e ot Mass, Momentum & Collision

8. Center of Mass Frame of Reference


A reference frame attached with a system with its origin at the center .of mass .of the system is knDwn
as center of mass frame .of referen.ce. It mDves tDgether with the mass center.
I,
• Sum .of mass moments in center .of mass frame vanishes.

Mass mDment of a particle is prDduct .of mass of the particle and its positiDn vectDr.

-
r.m1ftlc =0 Dr ml~/e + mi2le +............... + ml~/C +.........;.......... + min'e
~
=0-

• TDtallinear mDmentum of the system in center .of mass frame vanishes.


~ -
k<mjv/lc =-0' Dr
hi, m1v- 1/c +m2-v2lc +............... + mivi/c
- + .................... +mnV-
nlc =0­
,,/~~
, ',;!,"(
• TDtal wDrk done by pseudD fDrces in center .of mass frame is zerD. "~"1'~\,
. t:
<Ii" '

9. Application of Newton's Laws of Motion to a System of'Particles


,NewtDn's secDnd law representing' translatiDn mDtiDn of the, s,ystem .of particles 'particle can be
{represented by the fDllDwing equatiDn.

~Z:;
, k<r =~(". mia/- ) ,='u::: =-,-
k< IVJ.ac
dfic
l
, dt
10. ApplicationofMethods ofImpulse and Momentum to a System of Particles
, ' .
Sum .of linear mDmenta .of all the particles equals tD the linear mDmentum d?e tD translatiDn of mass
center. Principle .of impulse and mDment suggests net impulse .of all the external fDrces equals to
change in momentum .of mass center. . ,

r. JF;dt = Pcf,- Pc/


11. Application of Methods of Work and Energy to a System of PartiCles
t 11.1 Kinetic Ene~gy of a System of Discrete Particles

...&
~netic energy .of a system .of discrete particles 'is defi~ed as sum of kinetic energies .of all the
~ particles .of the system. . ' . "
0
~
c:
...
I.':S , , 1
i
.&: K =-r.m/v;
IF>

&
Ii Let velDcity .of z'th particle .of mass ml is VI' the center .of mass is mDving with ve,lDcity ve and
velDcity .of z'th particle relati ve tD the center .of mass frame is vllc ' '
I~ 1 2 1 2
- {':
V
....
IJll
K = -r.m,vc +-r.m1vllc
...
~ 2 2
~
0
iN
'S,
, The first term .on the right hand side is kinetic energy due to translation .of the mass center and
.,
,S the secDridterm is kinetic energy of the system relati ve tD the center .of mass fra.1J'le .
!R
lfl
Q

\..-
E 7 ­
\ .. ,
• • ' / ""'-'oiI.

The value of the first term can change only when net external force act on the system.

The value of tt:e second term can'change even in absence of external forces.

Kinetic energy of a system of two particles is given by the .following equation.

l(
K = 2 m, + ml
)2'1 2
Vc +21-fVreI

Here symbol ,uisknown as reduced mass of the two-particle system and symbol vreI is magnitude
of velocity of either of the particles relative to the o.ther.
\ :
m1m2
,u = m + m
I 2.
and· VreI =

11.2 Kinetic Energy of a Continuous distribution of Mass


lv, - vll = IV2 - VII
r
!
!

If the system consists of continuous distribution of mass, instead of discrete particles, expression
of kinetic energy becomes

1 2
.' 2 v dm
K=- f
11.3 Work Energy Theorem'for a System of Particles
The work of all the external and internal forces equals the change' in kinetiC energy of the

system.

w,-+.[ =Kf ~K,

11.4 .Conservation
. '
of Mechanical Energy , .
'. '. .
If total work of all internal non-conservative forces and external forc,es is zero, the mechanical
~
m

1 I i
I
I· .
\ ~.
energy of the system remains conserved.. ' . . ] !. ~
i i ~

~ L·/

K,+U, == K f +Uf 11,


.c'
8
'" 6i../
& ~
r~~'
1 ,~

I
~
~-/

L
~ .
i
:I: ~,
.....
iii ~j
~ ~'

S
iY
<:c
~
~
t;
! ~0,
2'-.../
8 E
~.
"-'"

Centre of Mass,' Momentum & Collision

EXERCISE (S)
t,

Impulse and Impulse Momentum Principle


1." A bullet of mass m strikes an obstruction and deviates off at 60° to its original direction. Ifits speed is
also chang~d from u to v ~;find the magnitude of the impulse acting on the bullet. .

I
2., V
elocity of a particle of mass 2 kg varies with time t according to the equation v~ (211 +4J)mls:
/1 !
Here tis in seconds. Find the impulse impartedto the particle in the time intervaLfrom t= Oto t = 2s.
l 3.
. , .
A steel ball of mass 0.5 kg is dropped from a height of 4mon to a horizontal heavy steel slab. ' '
.

The collision is elastiC and the ball rebounds ..to its original height.
(a) Cal~ulate the impulse delivered to the ball during impact.
(b) If the ball is in cci~tact with the slab for ()'002s. find the average reaction force on the ball
during impact.
4. A particle A of mass 2kg lies on. 'the edge of a table of height 1m. It is connected by a light
inelastic string of length. 0.7m to a second particle B of mass 3kg whiqh is lying on the table
0.25m from the edge (line joining A & B is perpendicular to the edge).If A is pushed gently so'
that it start falling from table then. find the speed of'B when it starts to move. Also find the
.' impulsive tension in the string at that moment.
I , '

MQQ;tentum and Principle of conservation of momentum . ,',. ,


5. g'1f~ A spaceship is moving with constant speed Vo in gravity free space along +Y-axis suddenly shoots,' '
(,r out one third Of its part with speed 2v o alortg + X-axis. Find the speed of the remaining part.
. . ' .

~ 6.;,:' ',. A 24 kg projectile is fired at an angle of 53° above the horizontal with an initial speed of
1", ~ SOmis. At the highest point in its trajectory. the projectile explodes into two fragmentS of equal mass,
~ the first of which falls vertically with zero initial speed.
'Q

a1l (i) How far from the point of firing does the second fragment strike the ground? (Assume the ground is level.) •

~
1;',
(ii) How much energy was released during the explosion?

\. ~ 7. ,;: Three carts move on a friictionless track witl:I inertias and velocities as shown. The carts collide and
·3 stick together after succe:;;sive' collisions.

: ('I,!

ml =tklg =
m2 1 kg .m3 == 2 kg
= 1 mls ,.v2,~ lmls " ..' , v3 =2 m/s -+ve
~ VI
s
.J ~)) C",1)) )j~ll 1:: d"1i111i~IImJII.
{
"- :i!
~
(
;
...
0
j)j) JJJ ill lJ j

-"-- '
s~
iii (i) Find 16ss of mechanical energy when B & C stick together.
~
~ .' (ii) Find magnitude of impulse experienced by A when it sticks to combined mass (B & C).
,E ~
'~ . .I"'~""'~

L
JEE-Physics

8. Three particles A, Band C ofequal mass move with equal speed v along the medians of an equiHiteral .
triangle as shown in fig. They collide at the centroid G of the triangle. After the collision, A comes
to rest, B retraces its path with the speed v. What is the velocity of C?

",
·8,t
:J~'
\/l.*'

t'~:;;~!: •

Colljsion'
B~C

9. After an elastic:collision'between t~o balls of equal masses, one is obseryed t() have a speed of 3 mI .I
s along the positive, x-axis and the other has a speed of2 mls along the negative x-axis. What wer:e the I
original velocities ofthe balls? . . '
10. A ball of mass m moving at a speed V makes.a.
~ ,
head. on

collision with an
.
identical ball at rest.The
kinetic energy of the balls after the collision is 3/4 of the original K.E. Calculate the coefficient of
restitution.
'1. A ball falls on the ground from a height ofZ.O m and rebounds upto 'a height of 1.5m. Find the
0efficient of resti tution.
;». A bt:.Jy is thrown vertically upwards fr:om ground with a speed of 10 mls. If coefficient of restitution
=
of gh. und, e 112. 'Find (i) the total diSUl.,nce travelled by the time it almost stops. (ii) time elapsed
(afterthe ball has been thrown)when it is at its subsequent maximurn height for the third time.

Concept of Mass centre I.


13. Four'patticlesofmass 5, 3, 2, 4kg are at the points (1, 6), (-1,5), (2,-3), (~1, -4). Find the coordinatest
of their centre of mass. '
14. A rigid body consists of a 3 kg mass connected to a 2 kg mass by a massless rod. The 3kg mass is t
. .

located at ~
. "" f\ . ,.. ,1\.

=(2i + 5j}mand the 2 kg mass at ~ =(4i + 2!) m.


'

Find the length


"

of rod and the 1t


,coordinates of the centre of mass. ~
.' ~ "~
15. A man 'has constructed a toy as shown in figure. If density of the material of the sphere is 12 times ~

• of the cone compute the position of the centre of mass. [Centre of mass ofa cone of height h is at ~

'"
~
,

'. height of h/4 from its base.] ;, i


.) ]
t
I'
I
'f ~
~.
!',
:20

J'_I_\
~
4R
0,

N,

S
~
&
" ~, !
.
""I'''I">''~.''~ • . ... "
10. :E
:r
Centre of Mass" Momentum & Collision
..

16. ,', Detennine the centre of gravity of a thin homogeneous plate having the fonn of 3: rectangle with
sides rand 2r from which a semicircle with a radius r is cut out of figure. ' ' , '

)x

'r

"
l,
l 17~ "The figure'shows the'positibns atidvelocities of two partiCles. If the particles move uhder the mutual
attraction of each other, then find the position of centre'of-mass at t= 1 s.
5rn/s
lkg
~

x=2in

~......--.
3rn/s
lkg ,
x=8m
• •
18.;: The linear mass density ofa ladder oflength increases unifonnly froD;l one end A to the oth~r end B~ ,
e
('10)' FOrni anexptession for linear mass density as a function of distance,x from end A where linear ~".

mass density A.o' Th~ density at one end being twice thatt,fthe other end. ' ":·...1

1
(ii) Find the positionof the centre of mass from end A.
19. A block of mass M with a semicircular track of radius :R. rests on a horizontal frictionless stirface~
, A uriifonn cylinder of radius r andm~ssrri is released from rest atthe'top 'poiht A (see Fig). The
cylinder slips on the semicircular frictionless track. How far has the blbckmpved when the cylinder
,'I ',reaches the bottom (point B) of the track? How fast is the block moving when the cylinder reaches

,t the bottom of the track? :(


\
'" 'I "" Of>
:' ~:j, ~

I ~,
'

(/' '0~ B
.,'
(
,

~ .,
j
.-­
20.; A small sphere of radius R is held against the inner surface of a larger sphere of radius 6R. The
~ , ,', m~se~ of large and sm~ll spheres are 411 and M respectively.'This arrangement is placed on a h~rizon:tal
\j table.There is no fricii<?n,betweenany surfaces of contact. The small sphere is now released. Find
thecO-ordinates of the ,centre ofth~ larger sph~re when the smailer sph~re reach'~s the other extreme
I ~
position.

y
'

j
;:;;
~, M.R
~ 01 (~R<¥ 'IX
/ iii
'.. lfl
CI
~,
"
E .......... I .. '
".",.",'.,",11

('

~
JEE-Physics

. .
· Application of Newton 's Laws of Motion to'a System of Particles
=
21. In the arrangement shown in the figure, mA = 2 kg and mB 1 kg. String is light and inextensible.

Find the acceleration of centre of mass of both the blocks. Neglect friction everywhere.

.. ~
· 22~ Bullets of mass 10 g each are fired from a machine gun at rate of 60 bullets/minute~ .The muzzle
. velOCity of bullets is 100 mls. The thrust force due to firing bullets experienced by the person holding
the gun stationary is'-:' . .
T
, I

·· lVIethods of ImpUlse and Momentum and System of Particles


,~ "

.
23. Two particles, eac~ 'Of mass m, are connected by a light inextens~ble string of length 2.t InitiaU y they.

lie on a sm'ooth horizontal table at points A and B distant .e apart. The particle at A is projected across

the table with velocity u. Find the speed with which the second particle begins to move if the direction

·.~fu is:- (i) alongBA.· (ii)perpendiCulartoAB. . .

In ellCh case calculate (in termS of m & u) the impulsive tension in the string.
24. .S.and Jrops from a stationary hopper at the rate of 5 kgls on to a conveyor belt moving with a constant

speed of2m1s. What is the fo~erequired to keep the belt moving and what is the power delivered by

'themotormoving the belt? . .

t.. ,

~'+1.ethodsofWorkEnergy and System of Particles


• .

25. Two cars initially at rest are free to move in the x direction. Car A has mass 4 kg and car B has mass .
+.t.
t •

.2 kg. They ar~ tied together, compressing a spring in between them.·When the spring holding them f,.: lor)

t.ogether is burned, carA moves 9ff with a speed of 2 mls ..' ~ t'
(i)
,
With-what speed does car B leave.
'0
~ ~.' ~

.. :(ii) How milch energy was stored in the spring before it was burned. S'
". 2.6. A small block of mass 2 m initially rests at the bottom of a fixedcircul~, vertical track, which has a .~
• radius of R. The 'contact surface between the mass and the loop is frictionless. A bullet of mass m l
strikes'the block horizontally with initial speed vo and remain embedded ,iIi theblockas the block and j
th~ bullet circle the loop. Determine each of the following in tenns of m, YO' Rand g. '. 'i
.
. " . . '

.
. .
'-:"
, / . '
.
. . Ittl
~
':0:
;;;
....
" ., "
~
:ii
d "
2m ;iB:;
o
I'~j
/

,,"' .. .' . ~
E I
,

",..........,._ 12 ,

(~.
\.../
Centre of Mass 1 Momentum & Collision

(i) The~pe~d of the masses immediately after the impact.


(ii) The minimum initial speed of the bullet if tlie block and the bulletare to successfully execute a
complete ride on the loop . I .

'27. A sphere A is released from rest in the position shown and strikes the. block B which is at rest. If·

= =
e 0.5 between A and B and I-\: 0.5 between B and the support, detennine th~tnaximum displacement

of B after the impact.

"'---""'-TTY
Ahkg 900 '
+
\
\
'...........

' ..~·,41-1 Y

( ­ . . ' . ' ..
\
28. Mass ml hits & sticks with m2 while sl,iding horizontally with velocity valong the common line ofcentres
of the three equal masses (m l =m2 =m3 == m). Initially masses m2 and m3 are'stationary and the spring is
unstretched. Find the
\,"

(i) ,velocities Of mi' m2 imd m3 immediately after impact.


~~
'1:~

m, m2' mJ
(ii) maximum kinetic'energy of m3. II IIIJ/~III
Frictionless
(iii) minimum kinetic energy of m2•

(iv) maxim:um compressiqn of ,the spring.


.
=
'

29. .:,.Three

identical balls each of mass m 0.5 kg are connected with each other as shown . in figure '

::;i~nd rest over a smooth horizontal table. At moment t =,0, ball B is imparted a hori.zontal velOCity
t:v0 =9ms-1• Calculate velocity of A jllst befo~ it collides with ball C.
,r .
\
t !~
;! t]

~ ~
1
'0
1:'

J:! ~

rJ
, ii

m
o
J4/.e ~l!~ .t ~·9~

l
~ I

d.... Il:l
S ;~ i
;

'::1
, .,.,....
:\- fd ,It/
,Ii
~ 'Ip'·1

'--/ m.
(

f ~
•... ,Jd
10
" .~ 1!
J] 1
< E . u '1'1'1'
i'
I'
~iI
·fi·{
JI;.1

"
I;
lEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-1)

Impulse and Impulse Momentum Principle

1. Your car's airbag protect you in the ,event of a head-on collision with a brick wan because:
(A) It reduces the amount of momentum that you lose.
(B) It reduces the amount of kinetic energy that you lose.
(C) It reduces the average force you experience during the col1ision. ~'

(D) It reduces the amount of impulse you experience during the co1lision. Ie
I

2. Velocity of a particle of mass 5 kg changes from (31 - 2]) mls to (61 + 2] + 4k) mls. What is the (
I

impulse of the net external forces acting on'the particle?


(A) (i5i +20k)N,'s' (B) (-15f ~20k)N's
(C) (-15i +20] +20k )N's (D) (15i+20j+20k)N's '

3. A 5l<.g block placed on a smooth horizontal plane is acted upon by a horizontal force, which varies ,
i~ "!. accerding ~2 the graph shown in the figure. If the block moves from rest, what 'Yill be its speed after
,.j'.
.
.\':\'':.
~.
7 s?

20 t···-; .._.,....,.....,....j-.---r--:--r
I I I • t
t I • • ,

..... ,.................... .,- .............. _,. ............... -- ..

• I I I
I , t t , t •
:
g. .:!'.::::
t t • , f •

l
, ~~.··IO • ,·.. "' . . i·-·.. -:- ......... ·~-· ..... ~· ... -... ~
£ i' ': : '! : .i' : ,~
. . . ·-i-·.
I t .
. -i "·--1"· ---~:- ---t -_.. -1---- i
,. • I • ,
f ­

I t i t t t l

I
, t I , • t I
t I f ' , l
o.n
2 3 4 .s 6 7 'R /',
Time(s) $ ,,'.J
... i
~
iI"
;t'
, "

(A) 12m1s (B) 15 mls , " ,(C)17m1s ,(D)2hnls,,]


, " " C
4. A unidirectional force acts on a: particle of mass 5.0 kg iri free space. The force increases linearlyifrom ~
5 N to 15 N in 20 s. Momeritum of the particle when the force Ceases to act is \\1 ~
-:;.
(A) 100 N-s (B) 200 N-s (C) 300 N-s, (D) 400 N-s ~ ,
5. A boy hits a baseball with a bat and imparts an impulseJ to the bali. The boy hits the ball again with l
.
'
the same average force, except that the ball and the bat are in contact for twice the amount of time as i
in the first hit. The new impulse equals: ' I
(A) half the original impulse (B) the original impulse ~
(C)wice the original impulse (D) four times the original impulse '~
6. A 'force exerts an impulse Ion a particle changing its speed from u to 2u. The applied f~rceand the, ~
'initial vel~city are oppositely directed along the same line. The work done by the force is ~
~,
3 1
(A),2 Iu (B)-Iu
'" ,,2,
(C) I u (D) 2~ u
...... 1I. . . . .
!'
14 '·E
c;~ntre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

7. A ball of mass m collides horizQntally with a stationary wedge on a rough horizontal surface, in the
two orientations as shown. Neglect friction between ball and wedge. Two student comment on system
of ball and wedge in these situations ,

~
it:,

rough rough
YL" ' , x
(I) (II)

, .! Saurav: Momentum pf system in x-direction will change by si~nificant ~ount in both cases. ,
Rahul: There are'no impulsive externaI' forces in y-direction in both cases hence the total
momentum of system in y-directiori can be treated as conserved in both caSes.
r~-~

(A) Saurav is wrong and Rahill is correct (B) 5aurav is coirectand Rahul is wrong ,
,-~

(C) Both are correct (D) Both are wrong


"
~. Two balls of same mass, are dropped from the same height h, on to the floor. The first ball bounces

\
to a height hl4, after the
colli~ion & the second ball to a height hl16. The impulse applied by the
first & second ball on the floor are II and 12 respectively. Then
(A) SII = 61~ , (B) 61 1 = SI2 ' (C) II = 212 (D) 21\ = 12

9. A ball is dropped from height Sm. The time after which ball stops rebounding if coefficient ofrestitution
"
=
" between ball and ground e 1/2, is
(A) 1 sec (B) 2 sec (C)3 sec (D) infinite

Momentum and Principle of conservation momentum


F
10. If the kinetic energy of an object is quadrupled, by what factor will its momentum change?
,- t (A) Two (B) four (C) eight (D) sixteen
',- $
1 11.
"5
A system ofN particle's is free from any' external forces.'
,
.
(i) Which of the following is true for the magnitude of the total momentum of the'system?
r ~
a (A) It must be zero
~
~ (B )It could be non~zero, but it must be constant
l

"
j (C) It could, be non-zero, and it might not be, consta.nt
(D) The answer depends on the nature of the internal forces in the system "
( I
::£
(ii) Which of the following must be true for the sum of the magnitudes of the momenta of the
~ individual particles in the system?
,"~
g '"
:.:
iii
(A) It must be zero
'- ~ (B) It could be nQn-zero, but it must be constant
S
Cl • i; (C)It could be non-zero, and it might not be constant
§ (D) It could be zero~ even ifthe magnitude of the total moinenttlm is not zero
~\O

,~

~
E'
-~~~--~--~--------~~-j------------------------
~"'. , 15

c
Jt:C';'Y,hys ICS

12. A rifle of mass 5.0 kg fires a 20 g bullet with a velocity of 500 mls. What is the recoil velQcity ofthe
gun?
(A) '1.0 mls . (B) 1.5 mls (C) 2.0 mls-" ' (D) 2.5 mls
. .
13. A 7S kg swimmer dives horizontally off a SOO kg raft. If the diver's speed immediately after leaving
the raft is 4 mis, what is the correspondirig raft'speed?
, (A) 0.2 mls . (B) 0.4 mls (C) 0.5 mls (D) 0.6 mls ..

14. . An ~steroid in space initially at rest explodes into two pieces, A and B. which then move in opposite·
directions. Piece A has less mass than pieceB. Ignore all external forces. Identify correct statements.

'-:~t~ .)

(A) Piece A has greater speed after the explosion.


I
~4?
(B) Piece B has greater magnitude of momentum after the explosion.
(C) Piece A has lesser kinetic energy after the ~xplosion .

. (D) Both have the' same kinetic energy after the explosion.

15~ Two,putty
.
balls A and;B of,masses 2 arid 3 'kg moving with velocities\\ = (lOi +sj +5k) mls and
' .
':- --,

. .
V2 =(-:5i + 5}) :p1/s respectively. If after the collision they stick
. . .
together•. the velocity ofthe combined
;

o~j~ctis

(A) i +sJ+2k mls (13) 21+ J+Sk mls . (C) sl + 2J + k. inIs (D).51- 2J + kinls
. 16. An open water-tight railway wagon of mass S x 103 kg coastS at an initial velocity 1.2 mls without
friction on Ii raHway track. Rain drops fall vertically downwards into the wagon. The velocity of the
wagon after it has collected 103 kg of water will be (~
, ,i
(A) 0.5 mls . (B) 2 mls (C)l mls (D) 1.S mls '. :2

17.
, ' ,I

A small block of mass 2.0 kg starts sliding down -the inclined face of a 10 kg wedge placed on a
frictionless horizontal floor. At ari instant velocity of the wedge is 2.0 mJs, towards the left. What is the
f
~

~
, . a
velocity of the block relati ve to the wedge atthis instant? \,;' ~ I •

l
$

~

- 2.0 mls

J
(A) 10 mls down the plane
!e
1
(B).15 mls down ~he plane ~
19
(C) l2.5m1s down the p l a n e . . " ~ '",
(D) Cannot be determine.dbecause. it is not mentioned that friction between the block and the inclined ~
face is present or not. . ' , . . . . '. . .. '. ,Z:
fr'1/
. .. . ' E .
16

f'.
V
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collisicm

, ColJision
18. The diagram to the right shows the velocity-time graph for two masses Rand S that collided elastically. '

(m/s)
1.2

0.8
0.4

2 3 4
t(milli sec)

Which of the following sta,tements is true?

,(I) Rand S moved in the same direction after the collision.

(II) Kinetic energy of the system (R & S) is minimum at t 2 milli sec. =


(III) The mass of R was greater than mass of S.
, (A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) I. II and III

19~ In an inelastic collision. choose INCORRECT statement :­

(A) the velocity of both the particles may be same after the collision
(B) kinetic energy is not conserved
(C) linear momentum of the system is conserved.
(D) velocity of separation will be more than velocity of approach.
20. A block of masse 2 kg moving with velocity 4 mls in the positive x':'direction collides with another
block of mass 3 kg moving with velocity 1 mls in the negative x-direction. The collision is head on
and perfectly elastic. Velocities of both the blocks after the impact are
(A) -21 mls and 1mls respectively -21 mls and 31m1s respectively
(B)
(C) -31 mls and 21 mls respectively (D) 3[ mls and 21 mls respectively
,
21. A smooth sphere is moving on a horizontal surface with a velocity vector (2 i + 2]) mls immediately l
i,
"
< :e. before it hita vertical wall. The wall is parallel to vector <J+ k) and coefficient of restitution between ;~
"!l
~
the sphere and the wall is e = 1/2. The velocity of the sphere after it hits the wall is
I,

-- I .J
, I,

'a
(A) i- J (B) -i+2] (C) -f -.: J (D) 2i -]
...~ 22. Three blocks A, Band C of equal masses are placed'in a straight line on a frictionless horizontal floor.
~...
.e-
o.;
Coefficient of restitution for impact between A and B is 0.5 and that for impact between Band Cis
"
r'
]... one, The block A is initially given a velocity uA towards the right as shown.
collisions between the three blocks. ­
_ -Find total number of
'6'
"',

('
\.~
I
~
50
;:;
U')
­ u..

;;
/
'"-- (A) Two (B) Three
~
\.c

iii (C) Four (D) Cannot be decided from the given information.
~ "}
\. 18 -I

82;
E
I',;
1.7
(~-- ,J
JEE-Physics

23. Three blocks are initially placed as shown in the figure. Block A has mass m . B -;v
C
and initial velocity v to the right. Block B with mass m and block C with 1IlW!l\\ij\\\\m~\\.·

mass 4m are both initially at rest. Neglect friction. All collisions are elastic. ' I •

The final velocity of block A is


, (A)l6v to the left (B) 1.4v tothe left (C) v to the left (D) O.4v to the right
24. A ball is projected from ground with a velocity Vat an angle e to the vertiyal. On its path it makes an
elas,tic collison with a vertical wall and returns to ground. The total time of flight of the ball is
2vsine 2vcosS (C) vsin2S vcose
(A) (B) (D)
g g g g
25. A ball of'~ass 1 kg ~trikes a. heavy platform, elastical1~, moving 'f91011~/S

upwards WIth a velocIty of 5m1s. The speed of the ball Just b e f o r e ,

:he collision is 10 mls downwards. Then the impulse imparted by the m/~:
15 1(';1

J?latform on the .ball is . _\1" •.•. :;'J~1III1


(A) 15 N-s (B) 10 N-s (C) 20 ·N-s (D) 30 N-s ,
26. In a one-dimensional collision between two particles, their relati~e ~elocity is VI before the collision
and v2 afterthe,collision
fA) ,VI = V2 if the collision is elastic (B )vI = -:- v 2 if the collision is inelastic
;~) ;v'21 = IVI Hn all cases (D)Vl =-kv 2 in all,cases, where k;?!.1

,; i. TWt~ billjard balls undergo a head~on c,ollisioJl. Ball 2 is twice as heavy as ball 1. Initially, ball '

1 moves with a speed v towards ball 2 whichis at rest. Immediately after the collision, b~lll travels

at a speed, of v/3 in the same direction: What type of collision has occured?

(A) inelastic (B )!lastic


(C) completely inelastic (D) cannot be determined from the information given'

2S.· A ball strikes it smooth horizontal ground at an angle of 45°, with the vertical. What cannot be the

possible angkof its velocity with the vertical after the collision. (Assumee S 1 ). "<Y
!

(A) 45° (B) 30° (C) 53° . (D). 60°


29. Two disks A of mass 3 kg and B of mass 1 kg can slide on a frictionless horizontal surface. Disk A :& J
(Ji:,.'

collides with disk B, which is at rest before the collision.


, , ! 1
o

~
y

A I B i
;7,
.....
~
x ; "
p.

j "
, ,
Immediately befor~ impact
" I
~
" '--'''_'~M'
. If cQ~ffi~ientof restitution is O~5, velocity vectors VA and VB of the disks after the impact ar~
... - . . . . '
~, , ~.
:!l
vA =(25i +3J)mls~~d-~B··=:4.5i mls
o
. (A) . (B) VA =(-2.5i +3J)mls and VB =4.51 mls '"
~
/
\.j
. ,
iii
(C) vA;'" (3.51 t3})Illfs and,v Lsi mls .
B
=: (D) VA =(-3.51 + 3J).mls and VB =1.51 mls IS
2
Fr.--~
"'"

18 E
{
~.
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision
'I

30. As shown in the figore a body of mass m moving vertically with speed
3,mls hits a smooth fixed inclined plane :;tnd rebounds with a velocity .

jl
:' Vr
, vfin the horizontal direction. If L of inclined is 30°,the velocity vf will
: ...._·Om
be (j,

:~;, ';

(A) 3 mls '\13) J3 rrvs (C) 1/.J3 mls ' (0) this is not possible
31. ' '" A small ball falling vertically downward with constant velocity
4m1s strikes elastically ~ massive inclined cart'moving with
, velocity 4m1s horizontally as shown. The velocity of the rebound '

of the ball is '

(A) 4",,2 mls (B) 4",,3 mls

""'(C) 4 mls (D) 4",,5 mls

32. 'A disk 'A of radius r moving on perfectly smooth surface at a A '
B
speed v undergoes an elastic collision with an identical stationary
disk B. Find the velocity of the disk B after collision if the impact '

·.. .· ·. ·;;,rr
v

parameter is r12 as shown in the figure .

(A) J15 v (B) 4


v
(C) 2
v (D) Jiv
4 2
Concept of Mass Center and Its Calculation
33. A uniform square plate ABCD has a mass of 10 kg. If two point masses of 5 kg each are placed at the
corners C and D as shown in the adjoining figure, the centre of mass shifts to the mid-point of
A Y' B

X'

.;,

.'"(A) DC (B) OD (C)OY (D) OJ{


·" :lS
( j 34. A 1 kg uniform meter stick has two objects attached to it. one of 1 kg at the 30 cm mark and the other '
... of 4 kg at the 70 cm mark. At what mark on the meter stibk is the center of mass of the system?
!
\.. I
'0 " (A) 38 cm (B) 50 cm '(C) 57 cm . CD) 60 cm
~
c::
§ 35~ A uniform metal rod oflength4m is bent at 90°, so as to form two arms of equal length. the centre of Ill!
..
'!il

...ilii
mass of this bent rod is !II
II

l (A) On the bisector of the angle, 0.707 m from the vertex II


< j (B) On the bisector of the angle, 0.5 m from the vertex
.....
(C) On the bisector of the. angle, 0.4 m from the vertex I
I
(
'... i;
CD) On the bisector ofthe.~ngle, ",,2 rrrfrom the vertex, ,

~ 36. Mass center of a system o(three particles of masses 1,2 and 3 kg is at the point(1 m, 2 m, :3 m) 'arid
;'j
'iii
!
'.... ­
:2
.0....
IJ)

...'"
mass center of another group of two particles of masses 2 kg and 3 kg is at point (-1 m, 3 ro, ..;.2 m).
Where a 5 kg particle should be placed, so that mass center of system of all these six particles shifts to
'II
I
~.
I,'
. mass center of the first group ? 1/
iii
ro,
.;0.,

'~
(A) (1 m, -3 m, 2m) , (B) (3 m, 3 m, 2 m) (C)(-l m, 2m, ~ m) (D) (3 1 m,.8 m)

;,!
f'
I'

" 'E
19 _T" .~.:'
'Ii!
;rl
'ie,'

(,'
lEE-Physics

, '

37. From a 16 x 8 em rectangular uniform plane sheet exactly one quarter of the sheet is removed as
shown in the figure. If the origin be taken as the centre of the sheet considered as shown in the figure
the coordinates of the centre of mass of the remaining sheet is

(A) (4/3,2/3) (B) (0,2/3) (C) (-2, -1) (D) (-4/3, -2/3); ,
38. From a .circle of.radius a, an isosceles right angled triangle with the hypotenuse as the diameter of the
circle is removed. The distance of the centre of gravity of the remaining portion from the centre of the
circle is
i
,
a (B) (1t-l)a a a ;
(A) 3' 6 (C) 3 (1t-:-l) , (D) 3(1t+l)

39. Centre of mass of two thin uniform rods of same length but made tip of differen~ materials & kept as ,
shown, can be, if the meeting point is the origin of co-ordinates

, (A) (LI2, U2) (B) (2U3, U2) (C) (LI3, U3) , (D::XU3, U6)
40. Consider following statements
[1] CM of a uniform semicircular disc of radius R = 2R11t from the centre " >

\B
[2] CM of a uniform' semicircular ring of radius R = 4R13n from the centre "!- ,
.§' ,
[3] CM 'of a 'solid hemisphere of radius,R = 4R13n from the centre
=
[4] CM of a hemisphere shell of radius R ,W2 from the centre
1
'0
~
I
Which statements are correct? ~
,i
(A) 1,2,4, (B)I,3,4 , (C) 4 only (D) 1,2 only l
,.
i 41. Consider a system of two particles of masses ml a,nd m2 • The first particle is shifted by am.0l.\l\t 8~. !"
:i
-"J
How much the second particle should be shifted in order to keep the location of mass center unch~nged? l (,~
(A) -
m18~ 'mI8~
(B) - -
m2
(C) -
M. m28 i i '
(D) - ­
Ii
~ ~,~, ~
42.
' ; '
i
An isolated particle of mass m is moving in horizontal pla~e (x-y), along the x-axis, at a ,certain
, ~ (
,

suddenly explodes into two fragment of masses '4 and 4' An instant' i
, ' , ,m ~ ~~
height above the ground. It
later, the smaller fragment is at y = +15 cm. The larger fragment at this instant is at ;- . =
(A)y -5 cm = =
' (B) y +20 cm (C) y = +5 em (D) y = -20 cm ~

f
20 EC
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

43. Two interacting particles fonn a closed system whose centre of mass is at rest: .

ml

Figure illustrates the positions of both p~icl~s at a certain moment and the trajectory of the particle of
mass mT' Select the trajectory of the particle of mas& m2 if m2 =m l,
mz
}.
(A) (B) (C) CD)
m2

44. Two identical.particles initially at rest move towards each other. At an instant, when speed of one is.
v and that of other is 2v, speed of mass center is
(A) v (B) 0.5v (C) 1.5v (D) 3v
Application of Newton's Laws of Motion to System of Particles .
:'::.:;

45~~ A block is placed over a smooth wedge that is placed on a frictionless horizontal plane as shown.
When the block is released, the mass center of the system

(A) will not accelerate. (B) will accelerate vertically down.

'r
i
/
,~
(C) has a downwards and a leftward component of acceleration.
(D) has a downwards a,nd a rightward component of acceleration.
( 1 461
'0
A block is placed over"a smooth wedge that is placed on a rough horizontal plane as shown. The
~ block is released. The mass center of the s y s t e m ' ~
I
~ (A) will not accelerate.!
j (B) will accelerate vertically down .
.-;. '·4

I (C) has a downwards and a leftward component of acceleration.


"
/
!\.. I 4?~ (D) has a downwards and a rightward component of acceleration.
=
Shown in the figure is a system of three particles having masses m 1 kg, m =2 kg and m 4 kg =
connected by two springs. At an instant, accelerations of these partihles are 1.Jvs2, 2 m/8 2 and 0.5 ml
(
~ 82 respectively as shown? The external force at this instant acting on the system is
'<.

["
~
~ J mls2 2m1s1
,,-. ?;"it·
~
io

\~
~ (A) 1 N rightward (B) 3 N leftward (C) 3 N rightward ~ (D) Zero
~
\ .. ,
E 21

('
<\
lEE-Physics

48. Two particles bearing mass ratio n : 1 are interconnected by a light inextensible string that passes over
a smooth pulley. If the system is released, then the acceleration of the centre of mass of the system is

, (B) (n+I)2 g n-l


2
.(D) (n+l)
(A) 2(n-l)g
n-l
- (C) ( n+l ) g 1:1-1 g
49. Two particles of masses 2 kg and 1 kg are connected by a 3 m long light rigid rod. The partioles are
moving on circular paths with angular velocity 1 radls in free space about a point on the rod thtihs 1
m away from the 2 kg particle. Net external force on the system is II
(A) Zero (B) 2 N (C) 4 N (D) More information is requ~red.
50. A system of particles consists of several particles. Total mass of all the particles is 10 kg. To apply
Newton's laws of motion to one of the particles of mass 2 kg in centre of mass frame, you have to
assume a pseudo force of (4i- 2}) N acting on it. What is the net external force "iF acting on the
whole system?
(A) "iF == (lOf No 20})N (B) ZF == (-lOi +20})N
(C) ZF~(20i-1O})N (D) ZF =(-20i +lO})N
51. Ifboth the blocks as shown in the given arrangement are given together a horizontal velocity towards
right. If aem be the subsequent acceleration of the centre of mass of the system of blocks then aem
equals
5
(A) 0 m1s 2 .' (B) 3" mls 2
--';

fl=O.2
7
(C) -mls 2 , (D) 2 mls 2
3 1\',';
i'"
Methods ofImpulse and Momentum and System of Particles . ,
52. Two particles approach each otherwith different velocities. After collision, one of the particles has a
momentum p in their centre of mass frame. In the same frame, the momentum of the other one is
(A) zero (B) -p (C) - P12 (D) more information required
53. A man weighing 80 kg is standing at the centre of a flat boat and he is 20 m from the shore. He walks '" "

,8 m on the boat towards the'shore and then'halts. The boat weight 200 kg. How ,far is he from the ~ t-'~

, '"
shore at the end of thistime? ' ' ~
(A) 11.2 m (B) 13.8 m (C) 14.3 m (D) 15.4 m ~
i5
54. A balloon of mass M with a light rope and monkey of mass m are at rest in the air. If the monkey i
climbs up the rope of length L to reach the top of the rope, the distance by ·which the balloon descends ~
~ll~ ~
&
A ML. mL . C· (m+M)L (M+m)L ~ '-./
( ) (m + M) (B) m + M () m. (D) M ~
55•. In free space, a shell moving with ,velocity 60 mls along the positi ve x-axis of an inertial frame, when
passes the origin, explodes into two pieces of mass ratio 1 : 2. Velocity of the mass center after the
I
~'
explosion is ,:', ~
(A) 20 mls (B) 60 mls (C) 90 mls (D) None ,of the ~fubve ~ (,/
56. In the previous problem, two seconds after the explosion, the lighter pjece pass~s the point (140ri),60 ~
m). Where is the second particle at this instant? j i' 9
(A)(140 m, -120 in) (B) (140 m, -30 m) (C)(110 m, -120 m) (D)(110 m, -30 fu) ~ '(/
, " 0
I i,~ ,~
i 22 , E
. ~ v
/ '
\...."
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

57. In the previous problem, what is velocity of the heavier piece in center of mass frame?

(A) (51 + 15J) mls (B) -(51 +lSJ)mls (C) (lOt + 30J) mls CD) -(101 +30J)mls
58. A rocket of mass 4000 kg is set for vertical firing. How much gas must be ejected per second so that
I the rocket may have initial upwards acceleration of magnitude 19.6 mls 2• [Exhaust speed of fuel =
, 980mls.]
(A) 240 kg S-I (B) 60 kg s"-! (C)120 kg S-I CD) 80 kg S-I
59. A uniform rope of linear mass density Iv and length t is coiled on a smooth horizontal surface.
One end is pulled up with constant velocity v. Then the aven~ge power applied by the external
agent in pulling the entire rope just off the· ground is :

,
, '

l
./ Ii
2 , 1
(C) -1 AV3 4- Uvg
I

'; (A).!. ;tev2' U g CD) A.egv+-AV3


I
!
i
). 2 + -"
2
(B) 'A£gv 2 -2' 2

! Methods of Work and Energy and System of Particles


6Q~' Assuming potential energy 'V' at ground level to be zero.
I
!
(,'.

~ Solid qylind:!r .
i s

, . ~c.
!
,I $
I
1
I ~ '0

~ All objects are made up of same material then choose INCORRECT statetnent:­
I, m"ii'"
I s, =
. Up Potential energy of solid sphere UQ
~ Potential energy of solid cube
if

UR =Potential energy of solid cone Us =Potential energy ~f solid cylinder


j
.... (A) Us > Up (B) U Q > Us .. (C) Up >UQ CD) US > U R
[
"'-. 1
{
i 61. Several particles interacting due to their mutual forces ofinteraction set free in free space. Which of
~. !ll
..., the following statements is INCORRECT? . ."
....
~
....
(A) The total kinetic energy of the system incre~ses .
~
<:> (B) The potential energy of'the system decreases.
'"....J!I
d (C) Their total linear momentum increases.
@ . ' . .
~ CD) Their total linear momentum and angular momentum about any po~nt in space remains'Constant.
~
". E 23

lEE-Physics

62. Few boys are standing on a flatcar that being pulled at constant speed. They start walking on the flat
cal;. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) If net momentum of the boys relative to the flat car is in the direction of motion of the flat car,
the total kinetic energy of the system consisting of the flat-car and the boys increases.
(B) If net momentum of the boys.relative to the flat car is in opposite direction ·of motion of the flat
car, the total kinetic energy of the system consisting of the flat car and the boys decreases.
(C) If net momentum of the boys relative to the flat caris zero, the total kinetic energy of the system
consisting of the flat car and the boys does not change.
CD) Irrespectiye of amount of net momentum relative to the car, the total kinetic energy of the
system consisting of the nat car and theboys increases.
63. An experiment involves an elastic collision between two particles. In a reference frame fixed with the
-laboratory, one of the particles was observed at rest before the collision. Which of the folloViing
statement is correct?
(A) Total kinetic energy is conserved in laboratory as well as center of mass frame of referenc~,\ but
it is observed more in the fonner one.
(B) Total kinetic energy is conserved in laboratory as well as center of mass frame of reference, but
. it is observed more in the latter one.
(C) Total kinetic energy is conserved in laboratory as well as cent~r of mass frame of reference, and
it is observed equal in both of them.
CD) Total kinetic energy is conserved in laboratory frame but no\ in the center of mass frame of
reference. i

64~ An ideal spring is permanently connected between two blocks of mass M and,m. The system can
move over a smooth horizontal table along the length of the spring as shown in the figure. The blocks
, are brought nearer to compress the spring and then released. In the subsequent motion choose
INCORRECr :­

(A) initially th~y move in opposite directions with velocities proportional to their masses '"
~
'i III'"
(B) the ratio of.their velocities remain constant ,F -"

(C) linear momentum and mechanical energy of the system remains conserved
1
"5
'"
CD) the two blocks will oscillate about their centre of mass, which remains stationary ':' ~
65. The two block-spring system consisting of two identical blocks and a massless spring is plac~d on j (.
frictionless horizontal ground. One the blocks is given velocity Vo by a sharp impulse. ~ (.
~ "-/
]

Maximum I'otential energy, the spring can store during subseque~t motion is I
(A) l11V~ (B) tmv; (C) tmv; CD) tmv; j
iii
66. A particle of massm moving with velocity v makes head-on elastic collision with a stationary particle §
to

of mass 2m. Kinetic energy lost bythe lighter particle during period ofdefonnation is ~
@

(A) tmv 2
(B) I~ mv 2
(C) tmv 2
(D) tmv 2
e
2
24 Ii E
;
Y<,3q
Cf1ntre of Mass, Momentum & Collision
I,
67. One end of a linear spring of mass m is attached to a fixed support and other end is pulled at constant
1I v:.
speed What is kinetic energy of the spring?
i (A) tmv2 (B) tmv 2 (C) tmv 2 . (D) tmv 2
!,1
it 68. Three identicill particles each of mass min free space are observed moving with velocities -vi, vi
4
I arid vJ at an in~tant. If their mutual forces of interaction are conservative, what can be maximum


if'~ I'
increase in potential energy of the system during subsequent motion?
. (A) t m v 2 ,I.. (B) tmv 2 . (C) tmv2 . (D) t mv2
I

1
1 ~9. Two particles of mass m, constrained to move along the circumferen<~e of
1
a smooth circul~ hoop of equal mass m~ are initially located at opposite v.
ends of a diameter and given equal velocities v0 shown in the figure.
The entire arrangement is located in gravity free space. Their speedjustbefore
.collision is
l

'I
1 2 (D)J7 .
(A) J3 Vo (B)J3 (C) J3vo
2 Vo 3 Vo

I
/ I
'- i
! FILL THE ANSWER HERE
:- I
\I li~~
". ~~~~ 2.~ 3 'J..~
1I?t\Y~~ 4.~
ij
5·~m 6.~ '7. ~.E>m 8.~
, 1
,I ~~;
9.~
... . ./ . .¥~. ~~" ~
10.~
'a~~~
11;(i)~ (ii)~
I
12.~
... '.
.:')~:.
,13. m'III:<t>D 14.~ 15.~
1
,J
' . "

18.~ 19.~
~
.~;f:?'~ 17. rP~1m1
\'i:ZO~
.~~ 21.~ 22 .~~~
,~y~
23.~

(..fit. 24~" c'8'


• . . ..... 25.~
~~..A~WAWi
26.~ 27.~
.,.~ 11 '28.~ 29.~. 30.~~ 31.~.
~
,
j
~
;J

~ 32.~~
­ 33.rm®~ 34.~ 35'~'
.~.. ~
II· § 36~
I ~ 'L~W~&WA 37•. [®~ . 38.
42.~
ml®1tOm 39~~

(, & 40.·~, 41.~


~~~~ 43.~

~t ] 44·~l
45·~m 46.~. 47.rt;\'~'
~~~~

,J
cl.
'1
lli
48.~

52.~
49.~a.®l
53.~·
50.~~
54.~
51.~

55.~
( ::;
~I ~ 5.6.~ ·57.~ 58.~ 59.~

C'! ~. 60·lDmI.a<tm 61.~ 62·~m 63.~~


!l!
(I ~ 64.~ ·65.~ . 66·mI!>~1 67·~Dl
I· ~ 68.~
69·mt~
I Z
/

,I E 25
( 1
~
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-2) i'

1. The bob a simple pendulum of thread pulled aside and held in level with the point of suspension 0 J
with its thread slacked as shown in the figure. When the bob is released, it first falls vertic·ally under 1
""t
gravity until the thread becomes straight, thereafter it starts swinging on a circular arc of radius equal
to thread length. To analyze subsequent motion, you should apply

°V
(A) . work kinetic energy principle to find speed immediately before the thread becomes straight
after the vertical fall of the bob.
(B) impulse momentum principle to find change in speed in time interval from the instant the thread
becomes straight and'when the bob starts swinging on circular path.
(C) work kinetic energy principle to find change in speed between positions where it starts swinging
on circular path and its lowest position. .
(0) newtons laws to find ten&ion in the thread at any point on circular arc while the bob is swinging.
2. A system of two blocks A and B are connected by an inextensible massless

strings.as shown. The pulley is massless and frictionless. Initially the system

is at rest when, a bullet of mass 'm' moving with a. velocity 'u' as shown

hits the block 'B' and gets embedded into it. The impulse imparted by tension

force to the block of mass 3m is


A

(A) 5mu 4mu 2mu 3mu


4 '5
(B ) ~
(C) -5- l' (D) 5
Question N<? 3 to 5(3 questions) ,
t'
A 1 kg block is given a velocity of 15 mls towards right Over a very long rough plank of mass 2
kg as shown in figure. t

;r e'I
. tn ~-"',

Ji (

"kg, mI,
1
'3

~
2kg

3. The correct graph showing linear momentum of 1 kg (i.e. PI) and .of 2kg (i.e. pz> versus time is: ~"
p., and P.

(A)~"· (B)
,and P2

(C)
P,
~ (D).
[2.. :.. _- ~ .JI '
I and P.

.,.~ t
~
- -..........t '
" J, J
.t $

' , . , , " . ' ,~


4. If coefficient of friction between the two blocks is equal to 0.4, then magnitude of initial slope of PI ~
. " . .. ~
versus t and P2 v~rsus t (in SI unit) will be :~ ~
~
(A) 4 and 2 (B) 2 and 4 (C) 4 and 4 (0) 2 and 2 ' g

..,
!
26 . E'~,

c'" ,
Centre of Mass, Momentum &. Collision

is.
3
Momentum of both the blocks are equal ,at time t =..............secorids :

!i (A) 1.75 (B) 1.875 (C) 2.5 . (0) 1.25


./6. A cannon of mass '5m (including a shell of mass m) at rest on a smooth horizontal ground, fires
the shell at an angle e with the horizontal at a velocity li relative to cannon. Find the horizontal
· distance of the point where shell strikes the ground from the initial position of the cannon: .

4u2 sin2B 2
u sin2B 3u 2 sin2B 8u 2 sin2B
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5g 5g 5g 5g

7. Two balls A and B having masses 1 kg and 2 kg, moving with speeds 21 mls and 4 mis respectively
in opposite direction',
.
collide head on. After collision A moves with. a speed of 1 mis in the same
'

direction, then correct statements is :

.(A) The velocity of Bafter collision is 6 mis opposite to its direction of motion before collision. '

(B) The coefficient of restitution is 0.2:


(C) The loss of kinetic energy due to collision is 200 J.

(0) The impulse of the force between· the two balls is 40 Ns.

=
A particle moving with kinetic energy 3 joule makes an elastic head o~ collision with a stationary

particle. Mass of the stationary particle is double of the moving particle.

(A) The minimum kinetic energy of the system is 1 joule.·


(B) The maximum elastic potential energy of the systemis'2joule.
(C) Momentum and total kinetic energy of the system are conserved at every instant:
(D) The ratio of kinetic energy to potential energy' of the system first decreases and then increases.
9. In a one dimensional collision between two identical particles A and B, B is stationary and A has
momentum p before impact. During impact, B gives impulse J to A.
(A) The total momentum of the'A plus B' system is p before and after the impact, and (p-J) during
the impact.
~ · (B )During the impact A gives impulse of magni tude J to B
'$
r
"
1
'0 (C)The
, . coefficient of resti tution is
2J
-P - 1
r ~
,- ·eJ

( ~cf'" ~) ,
.,
. P
J
(D) The coefficient of restitution is """" + 1

\. j 'io. 'Two massless string of length 5 m hang from the ceiling very

c t near to each other as shown in the figure. Two balls A and B of

(
i
l:l:!
, masses 0.25 kg and 0.5 kg are attached to the string.The ball A

'i is released from rest at a height 0.45 m as shown In the figure.


!!i The colli.sion between two balls is completely elastic. Immediately
~
S after the collision, the kinetic energy ofbal1.B is! J. The veloci ty
d
@
of ball Ajust after the collision is

~ ·(t.\) 5 mis to the right (B) 5 mis to the left (C) 1 mis to the right (D) 1 mis to the left

'-..
E n
YSICS

11. A particle of mass m, kinetic energy K.and momentum p collides head onelastically with another
particle of mass 2 m at rest. After collision:
Column I Column II
(A) Momentum of first particle (P) 3/4p
(B) Momentum of second particle (Q). - Kl9
(C) Kinetic energy of first particle (R) -p/3

8K
(D) Kinetic energy of second particle (S)
9
(T) None
y.
12. An object comprises of a unifonn ring·of radius R and its uniform Bi

~x
chord AB (not necessarily made of the same material) as ~hown.
Which of the following can not be the· centre ofmass of the object
(A) (RI3, R/3) . (B) (R/3, R/2)
(C) (RI4, R/4) ,. (D)(R/.fi, R/.fi)·
13. A shell is fired from the ground with velocity u at an angle 8with the horizontal. Before it reaches the

highest point, it explodes into two fragments A and. B. Fragment A i,mmediately comes to an

.instantaneous rest and then falls vertically down. Where would the mass center of the two pieces be,

when the fragment A hits the ground?

. . u 2 sin (20) '. ..


(A) On the ground at dis~ance g. away from t~e point ~f projection.

.. ' u 2 sin (28) ,


(B) Somewhere in the air at horizontal distance . from the point of projection.
. .. g .
. .. ' . u 2 sin (28) . .... .
(C) Somewhere in the air at horizontal-distance less than g from the. point ofprojectionr
~
~
..
. . . u2 '(
sm 2 .8 ) · .... t
(D) Somewhere in the air at horizontal distance more than from the point of projection. ~
. g .
,
0
.
Question No. 1~ to 16 (3 questions) S

One particle of mass 1 kg is moving along positive x-axis with velo~iJY 3 mls. Another particle of 1

mass 2 kg is moving along y-axis with 6 mls. At time t = 0, f kg m,ass is at (3m, 0) and 2 kg at ~

(0, 9m), x-y plane is the horizontal plane. (Surface is smooth for question 1 and rough for question j

2 and 3) . . ....
14. The centre of mass of the two particles is moving in a straight line which equation is : 1
(A) Y =x + 2 . (B)y= 4x + 2. (C) Y = 2x - 4 . . (D) y = 2x + 4 ~

15. If both th~ particles have the same value of coefficient of friction Il = 0.2. The centre of mass will ~ '-.'
stop at time t = ...... s : ~

....
(A) 1.5 (B) 4.5 (C) 3.0' (D) 2.0 . ~
16. Co-ordinates of centre of mass where it will stop finally are a
9. '-(
I
"r
(A) (2.0 m, 14.25 m) (B) (2.25 m, 10 m) (C) (3.75 m, 9 m) . (D}{1.75 m, 12 m)!. "~I/
----~------~----------~~----------------~-------E·
.~ 1(
'-,

( "
'-..-/
Centre of Mass, Momentum. & C"allis;on

17. If net force on a system of particles is zero, then


Column I Column II
(A) "Acceleration of centre of mass
" (p)" Constant (non-zero)
(B) Velocity of c~p.tre of mass (Q) Zero
\)(r.'·

(C) Momentum of centre of mass"


) ,',
May be zero
(R)
CD) Velocity of an "individual particle of the system(S) May be constant
18. In each situation of column-I, a systeII! involving two bodies is given. All strings and pulleys are
light and friction is absent everywhere. Initially each body of every system is at rest. Consider the
, " ,

in column - I with the corresponding results in column-II


-
system in all situation of column I from rest till any collision occurs. Then match the statements
.' .

Column I Column II
(A) The block plus wedge system is placed over smooth (P) "Shifts towards right
horizontal surface. After the system is released from.
rest, the centre of mass of system

~
(B) The string connectirig both the blocks of mass m is (Q) Shifts downwards
horizontal. Left block is placed over smooth horizontal
table as shown. After the two block system is released
from rest, .the centre of mass of system !",

§]

,
(C) The block and monkey have same mass. The monkey (R) Shifts upwards

, i starts climbing rip the rope. After the monkey starts


'- 1
'0"
"I!!
climbing up, the centre of mass of monkey+blo'ck system.

~
(
8.
~
-;,
6-~
l CD) Both block of mass m are initially at rest.The left block
I
1Jj:
~
is given initial v~locity u downwards~ Then, the centre of ."
mass of two block system afterwards
(S) Does not shirt

t'-~
\..... :S
:!l
~

(

'''''--­
~
@

";
E
<([ ~.
,
'-­

-~~ l
JEE-:Physics

19. Three man A, B & C of mass 40 kg, 50 kg & 60 kg are standing on a plank of mass 90 kg, whi6h
, is kept on a SJ:Ilooth h.orizontal plane. If A & C exchange their positions then man B will shift

(A) 113 m towards left w.r.t. ground (B) 113m towards right w.r.t. ground

(cy wiiI not move w~r.t.ground ' (D) 5/3 m towards left w.r.t. ground

20. Two ~locks A (5kg) and B(2kg) attached to the ends of a spring constant 1120N/m are placed on a
smooth horizontal plane with the spring undeformed. Simultaneously velocities Of3in1s and lOrnls
along the 1im~ of the spring in the saine direction are imparted to A and B then

--
3m/s . .

A~B --'
lOm/s'

(A) when the extension of the spring is maximum the velocities of A and B are zero.

(B)he maximum extension of the spring is 25. cm.

(C)naximum ext~nsion and maximum compression occur alternately.

(0) ~he minimum speed ofB is O.


. '

Question No. 21 to 23 (3 questions) ," . .' . .


. A small ball B of mass m is suspended with light inelastic string of length L ~A
from a block Aofsame mass m which can move on smooth horizontal surface . L 9 .. L .
as shown in'the figure. The ball is displaced by angle 9 from' equilibrium \) u=O
. position & then released. .. . ' .' B'
21. The displacement
.' of block when ball reaches the equilibrium position is
. . .
. LsinO
(A) . 2 (B) Lsin9 (C) L (0) none of these

22. Maximum velocity of block during subsequent motion 'of the system after release of ball is '"
'8.
(A::XgI (l--coS9)]1t2 . (B) [2gl(l--cos9)]112 &
(C) [glcos9]112 " (0) informations areinsufficicnt to decid~ 1..
."0
23. The displacement of centre of mass of A + B system till the string becomes vertical is
a
~.

L .
(A) zero
L
(B)-(1-cos9) (C) -(I-sin 9) (0) none of these
j
2 2 l
Question No. 24 and 25(2 questions) j
A uniform chain of length 2L is hanging in equilibrium position, if end B is
given a slightly downward displacement the imbalance causes an acceler,ation. I~
Here pulley is small and smooth & string isinextensible ~::c: .
....
24. The acceleration of end·B when it has been displaced by di~tance x, is'· ~
~
~..
x 2x x· Q ..

(A) L g .(B) Tg (C) "2 g (o)g A B·


g
g
z"

""so E
['
\......­
1 Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

2pi The velocity v of the string when it slips out of the pulley (height of pulley from floor> 2L)
"
"

(A)Jg~ (B) ~2gL (C) ~gL (D) none of these

261 Two blocks A and B of mass m and 2m respectively are connected by a massless spring of spring
constant K. This system lies over a smooth horizontal surface. At t = 0 the block. A has velocity u
, , towards right as shown while the speed of block B is zero, and the length of spring is equal to its
,
;
, naturallerigth.
B K A ..
1II111~~~'
Smooth horizontal surface
Column-I Column-II
(A) The velocity ofblock A (P) can never be zero
(B) The velocity ofblock B (Q) may be zero at c~itain instants of time
(C) The kinetjc energy of system of two block (R) is minimum at maximum compression
of spring
"
\,
(D) The potential energy of spring .(8), is maximum at maximum extension
. of spring

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


2.~ ~~.
3·.A..\Q{~w~
l·'~m
4~~ 5.·~ 6.~ 7.~
/
\. 8~V~
.~~~~

119.~.
Ji .
JO~~ 11. 12.. ~_

1
'5
/'
".. ~
8
j 113. ~®J 14. mL~'I~
.• ; ,I,
d , '''f , .
'15'~
..'-" "'~
,
16.~
~A~AW~

'"
& I :' 18.·~~
~ 17'~~ 19. ~~:m 20.~~
('
\ i
i
~ ·22•. ~
~ 21.~ 23.~ 24'~~~
~ , /:.::~:

L
\.
~
",
25:'
,.;,~
..
,, D 26.
8
@
.t!l
~
;"1.: .• ,

".
E, ,,' , . . . " ' 3 1
"-,
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (J-M)

1. . Two identical particles move towards each other with velocity 2v and v respectively. The velocity of
centre of mass is- [AIEEE - 2002]
. (1) v (2) v/3 (3) v/2 (4) zero

2. Consider the following two statements :w' [AIEEE • 2003]


A : Linear momentum of a system of particles is zero.
B: Kinetic energy of a system of particles is zero.

Then­
(1) A does not imply Band B does not imply A (2) A implies B but B does not imply A
(3) A does not imply B but B implies A (4) A implies Band B implies A

3. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii Rand 2R respectively are released in free space
with initial separation between their centres equal to 12 R. It they attract each other due to gravitational
force only, then the distance covered by the smaller body just before collision is- [AIEEE· 2003]
(1) 2.5 R (2) 4.5 R (3) 7.5 R .(4) 1.5 R
. .
. . .
4. A body A of mass M while falling vertically downwards under gravity breaks into two parts; abody
1 2
Bof mass 3" M and, a body C of mass 3" M. The centre of mass of bodies B and C taken together
shifts compared to that of body A towards- [AIEEE - 2005]
(1) depends on height of breaking '(2) does not shift
(3) body C (4) body B .

5. The block of mass M moving on the frictionless horizontal surface collides with the spring of spring :g
. . constant k anq compresses it by length L. The maxiI!lum momentum of the block after collision is- j
. . [AIEE~ • 2005] j /'

kI}
Md

:rtHl.II.vu~
ML2
'0

~
i
i
'iii
(1) .JMk L (2) M (3) ·zero
(4) - k .]
, 1
2 . . '0

6. A mass m moves with a velocity v and collides inelastically with another identical mass. After collision
. . v" '.. . . . ' .. ' :. .
I
~
L

.the 1st mass moves with velocity .J3 iti a directi'on perpenciicular to the initi.al direction of moinort. ~
. . .. ' 0
. .' . . "
Find the speed of the second mass after collision- [AIEEE·2005] ~
2 v @ L
(1) v (2) ...J3v (3) ..fj v (4) ..fj ~
32 E

G
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision
~
7. ',A T shaped object with dimensions sh<?wn in the figure. is lying on a smooth floor. A force F is
applied at the point P parallel to AB, such that the object has only the translational motion without
, rotation; Find the location ofP with respect to C. ' [AIEEE - 2005]
to e !Io
.Al 18

i
t-!~

C
1
2 3 4
(1)31. , (2) "21. (3) 31. (4) I.
"

8. A bomb of mass 16 kg at rest explodes into two pieces of masses 4 kg and 12 kg. The velocity of the
12 kg mass is 4 ms- I . The kinetic energy of the other mass is~ [AIEEE - 2006]'
(l)l44J (2)288J (3) 192J (4)96J

9. ,'Consider a two particle system with partiqles having masses m1 and m2' If the first particle is pushed
towards the centre of maSS through a distance d, by what distance should the second particle be
!

,,. moved, so as to keep the centre of mass at the same position? [AIEER - 2006]
< m2 m'
ml d (3) _I d (4) d
(1) m d (2) liz +m m2
I 1 2

10. A circular disc of radius Ris removed from a bigger circular disc of radius 2R such that the,
circumferences of the discs coincide. The centre of mass of the new disc is aR from the centre of the
bigger disc. The value of a is: - [AIEEE - 2007]
(1) 1 / 3 : " ( 2 ) 1/2 (3) 1/6 (4) 1/4

11. A block of mass 0.50 kg is moving with a speed of 2.00 ms- I on a smooth surface. It strikes another
<

~ .~<'. mass of 1.00 kg and then they move together as a single body. The energy loss during the collision
,
• ill'" < , 'is :-
, [A IEEE - 2008]
'1
'0
(1) 0.16 J (2)1.00 J «3) 0.67 J (4) 0.34 J
1l
8 12. A thin rod of length tL' is lying along the x~axis with its ends at x = 0 and X= L. It linear derisity

Ij '. (mass!length),Varies with x ask (~r where n can be zero or any positive number. If the position X CM

t of the centre of mass of the rod is plotted against In;, which of the following graphs best approximates

. · ·.
i the depence of X CM on n? [AIEEE - 2008]
( ~ x",., x",., x",., )(""

';f~ ~I
E
~
:s
~
(1)~ (2) . (3) i ........:....... ,(4) E···········
..

i ",' .........

I,
lfl
.
n !t==n o n o n

8z

E ~.
,JEE-Physics

13. Consider a rubber ball freely falling from a height h = 4.9 m onto a horizontal elastic plate. Assume
that the duration of collision is negligible and the collision with the plate iS'totally elastic.Then the
velocity as a function of time and the height as a function of time will be ;- [AIEEE • 2009] ,

v~
~,
(1): '" ':'.,
..... .
YDcu.
i , '

,
v~
(2) : --':, .-~ --'-'-,
-VI _"U" . -.... ~ - - ­
:Dcu.,
(3)
v~
-+v .-.

~, ' . "
YJlCL
h

",," , " ' (4)


:V~-'-"-""
0
,..._..-, '
" YDcu.
h

, -v," "-"_'
. --- ' ' I

Directions: This Questions contain Statement·1 and Statement-2.


Of the four choices given after the statements, choose the one that best discribes the two ~
statements.
, ,

14. Statement· 1 : Two particles moving in the same direction do not lose alhheir energy in a completely

inelastic collision. , ,

Statement·2 : Principle of conservation of momentum holds true for all kinds of collisions.

," [AIEEE - 2010]


(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
(2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is the correct explanation of Statement-1
(3)Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is not the cop-eet explanation of Statement-l
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true

15.' This question has Statement I and Statement II. Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose

the one that best describes the two Statements. [JEE-Mains 2013]

Statement· I: A point partic1eof mass m moving with speed v collides with stationary point partic'le

fI
of mass M. If the maximum energy loss po~sible is given as f(±mv 2
) then f = (M: m)' ,
Statement - II : Maximum energy loss occurs when the partiCles get stuck together as a result of the ~
' •
co11I S l o n . ,
' . E
...
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
, 0
~,' ~
, (2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is th~ correct explanation of Statem~nt-l ~
(3) Statement--l i.s true, Statement-Zis.true; Statement-2 is not the correet explanation of Statement-l j ",
(4) Statement-lIS false, Statement-2ls true ~
l
j
I
I
on
.....
~

I
"r ~
~ E
"-'
Centre of Mass, Momentum & Collision

EXERCISE (J-A)

'.
St:raight Objective Type

1. ,Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected, by a spring of negligible mass and placed on a
frictionless horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 mls to the heavier block in the
, direction of the lighter block. The velocity of the centre of mass is : [IIT-JEE(Scr) 2002]
(A) 30 m l s ' " '(B) 20 mls (C) 10 mis' (0) 5 mls '

2. Two small particles of equal masses start moving in opposite directions from a poin~ Ain a horizontal
circular orbit. Their tangential velocities are v and 2v, respectively, as shown in the figure. Between
collisions, the particles move with constant speeds. After making how many elastic collisions, other
than that at A, these two particles will 'again reach the point A? [IIT-JEE-2009]
.
A

(A)4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1

3;' Look at the drawing given in the figure which has been drawn with ink of unifonn line-thickness.
The mass of ink used to draw each of the two inner circles, and each of the two line segments is m.
t The mass of the ink usea to draw the outer circle is 6m. The coordinates of the centres of the different'
$. parts 8.I,'e: outer circle (0, 0), left inner circle (-a, a), right inner circle (a. a), vertical line (0, 0) and
'1
'0
horizontal line (0, -a); The y-coordinate of the centre of mass of the ink in this drawing is
~
[IIT-JEE-2009]
, ~
-- :y
T
"
'1
1
'
!l-'
,
~
,
j
, i

~
--
.\'I'
:2
U;
~
~ 'a ' a a , a,
iii: (A) 10 (B) 8" (C) 12 (0) '3
~
I
f
'-j; ~
f
E , 35
"J 1
JE'E-Phys;cs .

J • ~

Multiple Correct Type Questions


4. T~o balls, having linear momenta PI ;:: pi .and P2 =-pi, undergo a collision in free space. There is
no external force
.
acting on the balls. Let P'. and P'2 be their final momenta. The following option(s)
.
is(are) NOT ALLOWED for any non-zero value of P. al' ~, bl' b2 , c 1 and c2 • [IIT-JEE 2008]

(A) p'1=ali+bIJ+c1k; p'2=a2i+h2J (B) p')=c1k; P'2=c2k


(C) p'l=:a,i+ba+c)k. p'2=a 2i+b 2..J-c)k (D) p',=a)i+ba; p'2=a 2i+b)J
'

5.· A point mass of 1 kg collides elastically with a stationary pOint mass of 5 kg. Aftr their collision, the
1 kg mass reverses its direction and moves with a speed of2 mls. Which of the following statemet(s)
is (are) correct for the system of these two masses ? [IIT-JEE 2010]
(A) Total momentum of the system is 3 ·kg mls .

., (B) Momentum of5 kg mass after collision is 4 kg m/s.

(C) Kinetic energy of the centre of mass.is 0.75 J.


, (D) Total kinetic energy of the system is 4 J. .'.

6. A small block of mass of 0.1 kg lies on a fixed inclined plane PQ which makes an ~ngle e'with.
the horizontal. A horizontal. force of 1 N acts on the block through its center of mass as shown
2
in the figure. The block remains stationary if (take g = 10 mls ) .. [iIT-JEE 2012]

I'
....- - - - - -....--'.., P j / -.

(A) e = 45°
!
].' ,.. ~
(B) 8 > 45° and a frictional force acts on the blOCk towards p. .~
(C) 8 > 45° and a frictional force acts on the block towards Q i
Ui
(D) e < 45° and a frictional force acts on the block towards Q

7. A p~icle of mass m is projected from the ground with an initial speed Uo at an angle&. with': 'the t
. J
. . .. ~

i
'

horizontal. At the highest point of its trajectory, it makes a completely inelastic collision with another
identical particle, which was thrown
.
vertically upward from the ground with the same initial.
speed ~B
uo' The angle that the composite system makes with the horizontal immediately after the collision ~
is :- [IIT-JEE 2013] g
.1t ~
(B) ~+a,
1t 1t @; (
(A) 4 (C) --a (D) "2 '-'
. 4 2 .
!
36 E
Centre of Mass, Mo';'entum & Collis;~1on

Linked Comprehension Type Questions


-
'Comprehension Q.8 to Q.I0 (3 Questions) [IIT-JEE
, A small block of mass M moves on a frictionless surface of an inclined plane, as shown in figure.
angle of the incline sudd~nly changes from 60° to 30° at point B. The block is initially at rest at A.
. ;: Assume that collisions between the block and the incline are totally inelastic (g =10 mls2 )
A

c
I~ .Ij 'PI
.J3m .3.J3rn

8. , The speed of the block at point B immediately after it strikes .thesecond incline is :
W~~ .~~~ ~~~ ~£~

9." ;The speed of the block-at point C, immediately before it leaves the second incline is:
; .!

:(A) .J120 mls (B) :JI05 mls (C) .J9O mls (D) J75 mls
10. If collision between the block and the incline is completely elastic, then the vertical (upward) component
of the velocity of the block at point B, immediately after it strikes the second incline is :
(A) ~ mls (B) £ mls (C) a (D) -£ mls

:fl' Subjective Type Questions

i
{ ~ 11. A car P is moving with a uniforn). speed of 5(3 112 ) mls towards a carriage of mass 9 Kg at rest kept on
" .'6 the rails at a point B as shown in figure~
.Ill
"
~.

~. ..:
pb
t.
~ A B

I
s
The heightAC is 120 m. Cannon balls of 1 Kg are fired from the car with an initial velocity 100 mI
:: f> at an angle 30° with the hQrizontal. The first canon ball hits the. stationary carriage after a time to and
l ~. , sticks to it. Determine to' At to' the second cannon ball is fired. Ignore the resistive force between the
j rails ~nd the carriage. If the second ball also hits and sticks to the carriage. What will be the horizontal
( !§
~ velocity of the carriage just' after the second impact?
(
\... j [lIT-JEE 2001]
@

~z

"'- - > e • • '.~"


37
"
.... ..... " 'r'

(
JE~~_Phys ics

Mm Three objects A, Band C are kept in a straight line on a frictionless horizontal surface. These have
4. '. masses m, 2m and m, respectively. The object A moves towards B with a speed 9 rnIs and makes an .!
.elastic collision with it. Thereafter, B m3kes completely inelastic collision with C. All motions occur
~n the same straight line. Find the final speed (in rnIs) of ~e object C. [IIT-JEE-2009]

GJ A
12m'!
B
rmJ
c

I.

13. A bob ofmass m, suspended by a string oflength .e I is given a minimum velocity required to complete

a full cirCle in the vertical plane. At the highest point; it collides elastically with another bob of.:mass

m suspended by a string of length .e2, which is initially at rest. Both the strings are massless and

inextensible, If the second bob, after collision acquires the minimum speed required to complete

l
a full circle in the vertical plane, the ratio .e~ is. [lIT-JEE 20131

14. A tennis ball is dropped on 'a horizontal smooth surface. It bounces back to its original position

after hitting the surface. The force on the ball during the collision is proportional to the length of

compression of the ball. Which one of the following sketches describes the variation of its kinetic

. energy K with time t most appropriately? The figures are only illustrative and not to the scale.
[liT-JEE Advanced 2014]
'\.,

K K
(A) (B)

t t

K K
(C) (D)
~
t $
1
'0
1: /
.~
J(
l
l
J
~
~
~
..­
.ill'
eS
'j' @
lfi
9z

~R E ',./ r­
~.
'. .
Centre of Moss, Momentum &. CoIIJ~~,on

ANSWER KEY

1. Jv 2 +U 2 -uv 40 13 21. !m/s2


.~ ~
12. -m -sec 9
A 3 ' 4
2. 8i 22. 1 Newton
. 3. JW kgm/s 13. (~, :!) 23.
u u.J3
- ­
4. .1.2 m/s, 3.6 N-s 2' 4
24. 10 Newton, 20 Joule
5~
-.J13
14. .j]j,
(14 19)
5'5 25. 4 m/s, 24 Joule
Ivl=Tvo
15. 4R
6~ 10800 Joule 26. Vo J45ij.
3 ' vo = 4SgR
7. 3 Joule, 1.5 N-s 2r
8~ v 16. 3( 4-1t) 27. 1m I· ., ,

9. 2m/s&3m/s
17. x=6 . (v2' 2'
v0 ) " 1 mv 2
28. (1) , (n) 9 '
"'.0 + AO.e x ' ~.e
1
10 .. e=--.

11.
.
.J3
e=­
2
.fi 118. . A =

. ·.. 119•
v=~
. 12m 2g(R_ r)
M2+Mm
9
mv .
(iii) 722 (iv) Xo =

29. 6mJs
n mv
6k
.

20. [(L + 2R), 0]

·i I.e
2.D 3. D 4. B·· 5. C 6. B
$ 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. A 11. (i) B (ii) C
(
, ie 1 .': ,~,

'0 12. C 13. D 14. A 15. A 16. C 17.·B


~
c
18~D 19. D 20.B 21. B 22.B 23. A
(
, "!!l"i 24. B 25. D 26. D 27. C 28. B 29. A
,

f
30~B

·36. D
31.D
·37. D
32. A
38. C
33. C
39. D
34. D
40. C
35. A
41. B.

1
So
42. A
48. C
43. B
49. A
44. B
50. D
45. B
51. D
46. D
52.B
47. C
53.C
It!
s . 54o'B 55.B 56. D 57.B 58. C· 59. C
(
:l:!
"(.~ ;;;
... 60. C· 61. C . 62. D 63•. A 64. A 65. C
. J!l
" d 66. C 67. C 68. C·' 69~ A
g
\.. l!l
Q
~
E
39

/
~ ..
J£-:rP~ysics

1. ABCD 2•. D 3. D 4. C 5.B 6. A


7. ABC 8. ABD 9. BC 10. D .
11. (A) - (R) ; (B) - (T) ; (C) - (T) ; CD) - (8) 12. BD 13. C . 14. B
15. C 16. D 17. (A) - (Q); (B) - (P,R); (C) -: (P,R); CD) - (R, 8)
18. (A) - (Q) ; (B) - (P, Q) ; (C) - (R) ; (D) - (8) 19. B 20. BCD 21. A
.22. A 23.B 24. A 25. C
26. (A) - (Q) ; (B) - (Q) ; (C) - (P,R) ; (D) - (Q, 8)

(
\., "

I.C 2. C 3. A 4. A,D '"'8.


$
5. A, C 6. A, C 7. A 8.B .
1'
'0

9. B 10. C 11. t = 12 sec , v -11


_ 10013 m/s ~
.~
iji "

12.4 mls 13. Ans. 5 14. Ans. (B) I lj


i
i!:tl
..,

~
~

c~
g

!
40·' -~
. ,~
~

I
~
~
f
(

I,
~
i,

,~.

Ii

I CONTENTS""

I. . CIRCULAR MOTION
&
WORK POWER ENERGY
• Key concept 1
• Exercise (S-l) Conceptual Subjective Problems 3
<~ • Exercise (S-2) Conceptual Subjective Problems 7
• Exercise (0~1) Miscellaneous Type Problems 9
'j".'
• Exercise (0-2) Miscellaneous Type Problems 12
"
• Exercise (J - M) Previous 10 years ATEEE Problems 21
• Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years TIT-lEE Problems 25
• Answer Key 28.

\: - '

C' I
;'!
;
,~ <

(
'-J

< ,::~

c
---- ..."''''';'---.­
V)
)
j
_"
~)

.~
I
j
:~i
1,1
,i;

....... _" .. - ..

") 'I
\\

I
/ ')
J
f
~

, ~
~
)
~
if
l{
.... '

),
r
"

l
I
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy
CIRCULAR MOTION & WORK POWER ENERGY

KEY CONCEPTS

• A body moving with constant speed in a circular path is continuously accelerated towards the centre
of rotation. The magnitude of this normal acceleration is given by
, v2
an =--;:: co 2 r

.
'
r

where v is the constant speed (v = O)r) and

r
r is the radius of the circular path

Tangential acceleration: at =cit'


dv G--
a ='\ja; +a~
Q "
-:.'
.. a
n
t~

" ,

"
v2 ~ ::\:::f?- <-~~
• Radius of curvature: r;:: --­
an
(
\,
.. Accor-ding to Newton's second Jaw, a body moving in a ~ircular path with constant speed must be

acted upon by an unbalanced force which is always diret;t(~d towards the ·centre. This necessary

unbalanced force is called the centlipeta! force.

2
/
F
mv ;::
=-,- "
mCO"T
" I r
,I
Centrifugal force is a pseudo force which is observed by an observer in rotating frame.
" ' i - 2 '::,.

'" : I Fcf = mcoframe r

.~ Work(W):
(
_i'F.' The work W done by a constant force F when its point of applicr~l&tm
"
I
1
undergoes a disp lacement s is defined as
w = F.s =: Fs cos e ~"
n~
1 where 9 is the angle between F and s. Work is a scalar quantity and its t«.
s 'OJ

- i:
1
,~
SI units is N-m or joule (J).
(j

l
c:l--, f 'Notc: Only the component (F cos 9) ofthe force F which is along the displacement' contributes to the work
(i
,,~
--~

~
J
1
done.
,. ,
.;
g If F=: F) + Fyj + Fi and s == ~xi + ~Y] + ~zk
~

J then W= F·s == Fx~x


+ Fy~y + Fz ~ z
'"
E 1
JEE-Physics
I

Work done by a Variable Foree: When the magnitude and direction ofa force varies with positiori.
The work. done by such a force for an infinitesimal displacement ds is given by
dW= F'ds

In tenus ofrectangular components,


XB VB 1'.13
WAB = JFxdx+ JI\,dy+ JI~dz
XA VA ZA

• Work Done by a Spring Foree: The work done by the spring force for a displacement from xi to XI' is
given by

,W.s. =---k
1
2
(2
X,' -x·
2) I

• Work Energy theorem: , '


, Work done on a body can produce a change in its kinetic energy_ W9rk is required to produce motion
and it is also required to destroy motion.' ,
, . ,,~~ W=AK=Kf-K j

,,:\~A"~A~ Conservative Force: The force which does work in complete independence ofthe path followed the
\JrO~ >0 body is called a conservati ve force. The gravitational force, spring force and electrostatic force are the
'\ examples ofconservative forces.
• No'n-Conservative Force: The work done by a non-conservative force not only depends on the initial
and final positions but also 'on the path followed. The common examples of such forces
are : frictional force and drag forCe offluidS.

• Potential Energy: The potential energy is defined only for: conservative forces.
B
Ua-U A =- Jr"'c. ds
A

~
dU '? \.
Conservative force: Fe =::- -dx
,f
v,

:;
u,.~ ..
~?
'G;

dU J I
At equilibrium, dx = 0
.r.
,~

.•
~
,

, x
.,
~

~ .
f
~~
~
'

d2 U (
The pointB is the position ofstable equilibrium, because -2> 0 ~' )../

,~
~;

dx

r
!I
h
d2 U
}'
~l
/
\. /

The pointC is the position ofunstabJe equilibrium, because - '-2 < 0 .~ '"R,
dx ~

~
I, r
'~d
;;

~ F
E \",/

--. 2'

It "'\.
o
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

EXERCISE (S-1)

KI\fEMATTCS OF CIRCULAR MOTION


1. A particle moves in a circle or radius 1.0 cm at a speed given by v=. 2.0 t where v is in cmls and tin
seconds.
," (a) Find the radial acceleration of the particle at t:::: Is .
. c,d.

(b) Find the tangential acceleration at t =Is.


(c) Find the magnitude of the acceleration at t =1 s.
2. A particle is travelling in a circular path of radius 4m. At a certain instant the particle is moving at '
20m/s and its acceleration is at an angleof37° from the direction to the centre of the circle as seen from
the particle
(i) At what rate is the speed of the pal1icle increasing?

(ij) What is the magnitude of the acceleration?

3. Two particles A and B are moving in a horizontal plane antielockwise on two different concentric
circles with different constant angular velocities 200 and 00 respectively. Find the relative velocity
, (in m/s) of B w.r.t. A after time t =. rt/oo. They both start at the position as shown in figure· (Take
00 = 3radlsec, I' =
2m)

,_·t--,

. "
..
,-.r"
. ,,1 ,
~ .:A .;B
"

.x
"
;;.

.
. ,
, . - , ••'t • -'
.
~
~

t 4. Find angular velocity of A with respect to 0 at the instant shown in the figure.
r' j .
t ! ( d ) v

.
!
1 '
~
d !
...
······~···-·····-·-··-I·T ··-····--··~·

( '! i
~
J.
~O(fiXed)
,
~
-~ i 1z
1- 1
C~
-"
J1
1 s. A stone is thrown horizontally with the velocity 15m/s. Determine the tangenti~1 and normal
accelerations of the stone in 1 second after it begin~ to move.
(
""i'!.
;"
16.
~
A body is projected with a velocity 10 ms- I at an inclination 45 0 to the horizontal. Minimum radius of
r ~ curvature of the trajectory described by the particle is .

~~~-----------------3~~--------~-------
,,,~

/'
S
~.

'-e
.Jct-Physics
DYNAMICS OF CIRCULAR MOTION
7. A block of mass m moves with speed v against u smooth, fixed

vertical circular groove of radius r kept on smooth horizontal

surface.

Find:

. (i) normal reaction of the floor on the block.


(ii) nonnal reaction of the vertical wall on the block.
8. A. cyclist speeding at 18 km/h on a level road takes a sharp circular turn of radius 3 m without

reducing the speed. The co-efficient of static~ friction between the tyres and the road is O. L Will the

cyclist slip while takin~ the turn ?

9. . A mass m rotating freely in a horizontal circle of radius 1 m on a


frictionless smooth table supports a stationary mass 2m, attached
to the other end of the string passing through smooth hole 0 in
~m
table, hanging vertically. Find the angular velocity of rotation.
10., A circular platfonn rotates around a vertical axis with angular
velocity co :: 10 radls. On the platform is a ball of mass 1 kg,
attached to the long axis of the platform by a thin rod of length 10
cm (n:: 30°). Find normal for~e exerted by the ball on the
platform (in newton). Friction is absent.
11. . A circular racetrack of radius 300 m is banked at an angle of 15°, If the coefficient of friction between
the wheels of a race-car and the road is 0.2, what is the (a) optimum speed of the race- car to avoid
~ I

. wear and tear on its tyres, and (0) maximum permissible speed to avoid$lipping ?
12. A block of mass' m::: 20 kg is kept at a distance,R :: 1m from central a~is ,. of l:otation of a round turn
table (A table whose surface can rotate about central axis). Table starts from:rest and rotates with constant
angular acceleration, n:: 3 radlsec 2• The friction coefficient between block and table is I-t:: 0.5. At time

t::::'" sec from starting of motion (i.e. t:: 0 sec) the block is just about to slip. Find the value of x.
3
13. A stone is fastened to one end of a string and is whirled in a vertical circle of radius R. Find the
minimum speed the stone can have at the highest point of the circle.
~

y;:~ "
CALCULA TION OF WORK 'iI
.t
14. The sign of work done by a force on a body is important to understand. State carefully if the following 1t \.­
quantities are positive or negative: (NCERT) ~
(a) work done by a man in lifting a bucket out of a wel.! by means of a rope tied to the bucket. .~ "'f'
(b) work done by gravitational force in the above case, ~
(c) work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane,
t
.~

(d) work done ~y an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform I
~c
velocity,
(e) work done by the resistive force ofair on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
i
ii

~
Iii

4 E
.rCUlar Motion & Work Power tnergy

15. A particle of mass 2kg moves on a smooth horizontal plane under the action of a singIe force F= (31 + 4]) .
newton. Under this force it is displaced from (0,0) to (-1m, 1m). Find the work done by F (in Joule)
16. A body of mass 2 kg is kept on a rough horizontal surface as shown in the figure. Find the work done
=
.. by frictional force in the time interval t = 0 to t 5 sec.
ON

l . .,# 10 N

2kg

Il'" O.S

17. The net fore exerted on a particle acts in the +x direction. Its magnitude increases linearly from zero
at x =·0, to 24.0 N at x = 3.0 m. It remains constant at 24.0 N from x = 3.0m to x = 8.0m and then
decreases linearly to zero at x = 13.0m. Determine. the work done to move the particle from X = 0 to
x = 13.0.

WORK ENERGY THEOREM


18. A point mass of0.5 kg is moving along x~axis as x = t2 + 2t, where, x is in meters and t is in seconds.

r Find the work done (in J) by all the forces acting on the body during the time interval [0, 2s].

\
19. A block is released from rest from top of a rough curved track as shown in figure. It comes to rest at

. some point on the horizontal part. If its mass is 200 gm, calcul~te negative of work by friction is ,~ :'
.. joules.

2m~._ _ _~
20. AsmaJl block of mass m is lying at rest at point P of a wedge having a smooth semi circul~r track of
radius R The minimum value ofhorizontal acceleration ao of

wedge so that mass can just rea.ch the
point Q, is·

3,) p
.«Ut{\\'Km\\\\t\\Mmmtm««OOhli\\

~
CONSERV ATIVE.FORCES
( :' 21. A massT)1 slides from rest at height h down a smooth curved surface which qecomeshorizontal at
~
zero height (see figure). A spring is fixed horizontally on the level part of the surface. The spring
" 1
/

r 1
constant is k N/m.. When the mass encounters the spring it compresses it by an amount x = h/lO. If
=
m 1 kg,· 1:1 ;; 5m then find k 1100.
"

·2
( j
~
~

.~

1
51
J '!',;
. 'R
"
"" ~
E----~------~--~~5~~------~~--~--
"

~
1,,­

c
JEE-Physics

22. For what minimum value of m I the block of mass m will just leave the contact with surface '!

23. In the figure shown, pulley and spling arc ideal. Find the potential energy stored in the spling (m I > m2).

24. The potential function for a conservative force is given by U = k( x + y). Find the work done by t~c
conservative force in movi ng a particle from the point A( 1, I) to point B (2, 3).

POWER
25. The elevator E has a mass of 3000 kg when fully loaded and is connected as shown to a counLerwcight
W of mass 1000 kg. Determine the power in kilowatts deli vered by the motor

(a) when the elevator is moving down at a constant speed of 3 mis,


~
:i" '
't,
­
.. j

(b) when it has an upward velocity of 3 mls and a deceleration of 0.5 m/s 2 • :~

.t
FORCE AND POTENTIAL ENERGY .
~
26. The potential energy (in joules) function of a particle in a region of space is given as : J
U = (2x 2 + 3i + 2z) . i ':
Here x, y and z are i!1 metres. Find the magnitude ofx component of force (in newton) acting on the t
. at pomt
partlcle '. P ( 1m, 2m, 3m), 'i:t
27. The P.E. of a particle oscillating on x-axis is given as U =.20 + (x - 2)2 here U is in Joules & x is in ~
meters. Total IJ1echanical energy of particle is 36 J 1
(i) Find the mean position (ii) Find the max. K.E. of the particle ~~: c
6 E

, ,.
v
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

EXERCISE (8-2)

1. The member OA rotates in vertical plane about a hOlizontal axis through


o with a constant counter clockwise velocity (0 =3 rad/s. As it passes
the position 0 =0, a small mass m is placed upon it at a radial distance
r= O.Sm. If the mass is observed to slip at e =37°, find the coefficient
of fIiction between the mass & the member. ''if' )­
2.. Two blocks or mass m l = I Okg and m2=5kg connected to each other by a massless inextensible string
of length 0.3m arc placed along a diameter of a tum table. The coefficient of friction between the table
and m l is 0.5 while there is no friction between m2 and the table. The table is rotating with anangular
velocity of I Orad/sec about a vertical axis passing through its centre. The masses are placed al~ng the
· j diameter of the table on either side of the centre 0 such that m l is at a distance of 0.124 m from O. The
\
masses are observed to be at rest with respect to an observer on the tum table.
(i) Calculate the flictional Force on m l ,

(ii) What should be the minimum angular speed of the tum table so that the masses will slip from this
position.
(iii) How should the masses be placed with the string remaining taut, so that there is no frictional
force acting on the mass mi'
3. Thc speed of an object undergoing uniform circular motion is 4 m/s. The magnitude of the change in
the velocity duling 0.5 sec is also 4 m/s. Find the minimum possible centripetal acceleration (in m/s2)
of the object. [Take 1t =25/8]
4. A thin cii-cular loop of radius R rotates about its vertical diameter with an angular frequency a). Show
that a small bead on the wire loop remains at its lowermost point for co ::;;.Jg I R . What is the angle
made by the radius vector joining the centre to the bead. with the vertical downward direction for
(j) = ~2g i'R ? Neglect friction.
s. A smooth right .circular cone of semi vertical angle a = tan- I (SI12) is
(
\. at rest on a horizontal plane. A rubber ring of mass 2.5, kg which under
a tension of 15N has an extension of 10 cm is placed on the cone as
"
."t­
J)
'.
shown. Find the increase in the radius of the ring in equilibrium.
!?
!~ 6. A ring of mass m can slide over a smooth vertical rod. The ring is
t
1
~
" . 4mg .
~
connected to a spring of force constant K = R'
where 2R is the
(
i
" I.
Q
~
,9 natural length of the spring. The other end,of the spring is fixed to
A
~ the ground at a horizontal distance 2R from the base of the rod. The

~
mass is released at a height of l.SR from ground

j
I
~
(i) calculate the work done by the spring.
(ii) calculate the velocity of the ring as it reaches the ground.

~ ,,

l..
,-, E
;

7
i
~'''I

(.
JEE-Phys;cs

7. The ends of spring are attached to blocks of mass 3kg and 2kg. The 3kg block
rests on a horizontal surface and the 2kg block which is vertically above it is in
equilibrium producing a compression of lcm of the spring. The 2kg mass must ~ i

be compressed further by at least , so that when it is released, the 3 kg


block may be lifted off the ground.
_,'ains of equal masses are drawn along smooth level lines by engines; one of then X cxerts a
constant force while the other Y works at a constant rate. Both start from rest & after a time 1 holh
again have the same velocity v. Find the ratio of travelled distance during the interval.
A ring of mass m slides on a smooth vertical rod. A Jight string is
attached to. the ring and is passing over a smooth peg distant a from
the rod, and at the other end of the string is a mass M (M>m). Th,c

ring is held on a level with the peg and released. Show that it first comes
ll:::(}
2mMa.
to rest after falling a distance M~--m­
. ,.

10. In figure two identical springs, each with a relaxed length of 50 cm


and a spring constant of 500 N/m, are connected by a short cord of
length 10 cm. The upper string is attached to the ceiling, a box that
weighs lOON hangs from the lower spring. Two additional cords, each
85 cm long, are also tied to the assembly; they are limp (i.e. slack).
(i) If the short cord is cut, so that the box then hangs from the springs

and the two longer cords, does the box move up or down?

(ii) How far does the box move before coming to rest again?
11. A block of mass m is held at rest on a smooth horizontal floor. A light frictionless, small pulley is fixed
at a height of 6 m from thc floor. A light inextensible string of length 16 m, connected with A passes
overthe pulley and another identical block B is hung from the string. Initial hcight ofB is5m from the·
floor as shown in Fig. When the system is released from rest, B starts to move vertically downwards and
A slides on the floor towards right.
, .. ~
"(.

"J
.' ~~
!
\

5m
1
/);/IImllllll/II/llllllllllllllllnlllll
6m :'jl i
,
~
r
r
".J
'.

(i) Ifat an instant string makes an angle e with horizontal, calculate reJati~n between velocity u of A and:
vofB.
'f
(ii) Calculate v when B strikes the floor. 1,
.~ (
\....J
.~

~ '.~
"
E -~j
8
'-.,./
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy
1')' .' ~~. 1\
~
':
, !."'""'.
0 .
,'
,--",'

:J
'\ '
~ ".' ,!h
EXERCISE (O-I)

I
KINEMATICS OF CIRCULAR MOTION
1. The second's hand oj' a watch hils length 6 em. Speed of end point and magnitude of difference of
velocitics at two perpendicular positions wi 11 be
(A) 211: & 0 mm/s (B) 2fi rc & 4.44 mmls,
~".,>,-,." " (C) 2J2 IT & 211: mm/s (D) 211: & rc .mm/s 2Ji
2. A car speeds up with constant magnitude or tangential acceleration in circular path moving in
anticlockwise direction. Which of the following figure represents acceleration of the car?
I
(A) (B) <C,). (D)

3. A particle is moving in a circle :


(A) the resultant force on the paJticJc must be towards the centre ::>:;
the cross product of the tangential acceleration and the angular velocity will be zero
(B)
tilC direction of the angular acceleration and the angular velocity must be [he same

(C)
1./
'<fflthe resultant force may be towards the centre

4. A particle is moving on acirclc of radius R with velocity v. Another particle is moving on a concentlie
circle of radius 2R with some velocity v. Then, choose the con'ecl statement(s)
y

) x
J _. 'B
('
\

•R
\ t).
:!
.[
~

/
I (A) Direction of angul~r velocity of B relative to A will be in +z direction
{ (B) Direction of angular velocity orB relative to A will be in -2 direction
"
I' .~ Angular velocity oft'S relative to A is zero always.
(C)
'-.,
,; . ~,AD)
Angular velocity of:B relative to A is zero for the situation shown.

4 5/ A conical pendulum is moving in a circle with angular velocity ro as

f shown. If tension in the string is T, which of following equations are

~ ~-I-I~'
____ I
correct '?
I
::1 (AIl' = mro2[ (B) T sinO =mOJ~[ ,
\
/' 'I1 - - - - ...
',-_ - - . I'I,. \ In
~ ::/rfc) T =mg cosO (D) T = mro 3 I sinO --f----",.",.,.
~

,~

:J

E 9
lEE-Physics

CALCULATION OF WORK
6. A rope is used to lower· vertically a block of mass M by a distance x with a constant downward
acceleration g/2. The work done by the rope on the block is :
(A) Mgx . (B) Y2 Mgx 2 • . (e) - V2 Mgx (P) Mgx2
" 7. A bicyclist comes to a skidding stop in 10 m:"'During this process, the force on the bicycle due to the
road is 200N and is directly opposed to the motion. The work done by the cycle on the road is
(A) + 2000J (B)- 2001 . (e, zero (D) - 20,000J

WORK ENERGY THEOREM


-10m's"
~. In the figure shown all the surfaces are frictionless, and mass of the blQck,
/In =1kg. The block and wedge are held initially at rest. Now wedge is given
,i
a horizontal acceleration of 10 m/s 2 by applying a force on the wedge, S?' that

the block does not slip on the wedge. Then work done by the normal force in

ground frame on the block in ~3 seconds is :

(A) ~OJ (B) 60 J (e) 150 J (D) 100 .J3 J


9. In ashotputevent an athlete throws the.shotput of mass 10 kg with an initial speed or Im/sat45° from
a height 1.S m above ground.. Assuming air resistance to be negligible and acceleration due to gravity
.to be 10 m/s2 , the kinetic energy of the shotput when it just reaches the ground will be
(A) 2.5 J (B) 5.0 J (e) 52.51 (D) 155.0 J
10. In the figure shown, the system is released from rest. Find the velocity of block

Awhen block B has fallen a distance '.C. Assume all pulleys to be massless and

frictionless.

(A) N" (B) /ii'


(C)~Sge (D) None of these

CONSERVATIVE FORCES
)1. The work done in joules in increasing. the extension of a spring of stiffness 10 N/cm from 4 cm to 6
~ cmi~:'
,..-",rAj 1 (B) 10 (e) 50 (D) 100
II: 12. A particle is moved from (0, 0) to (a, a) under a force F = (31 + 4]) y
! from two paths. Path 1 is OP and path 2 i~ OQP. Let WI and W2 be
Pea. a)

the ~Qrk done by this force in these two paths. Then: ~


0,
\1p'
. /-(A)'W I = W2 . (B) WI = 2W2 . 1': ' . .X ':J

'-;;':':lC) W2= 2W 1 • '. (~) W2 = 4W I , 0


Q r­
1
, 1.3~ ,¥block ofmass m IS attached with a massless spnng offorce constant
,---.,........, /1<.. The block is placed over a rough inclined surface for which the'
3
,
J
"
'~
);'
('

\."~
\,. /

"

coefficient offrictionis Jl = 4 . The min~mum value ofM required to· ,f ( t.~


. ~
. ~

~r
move the block up the plane is : (Neglect mass of string and pulley and
friction in pulley)
l (
'-,­
;.

, I
J

;;
'.
~
" 3 ,/ 4
. (B) -S m (e) 2m t."
I"~ ,
3
(D) -2 m
,
!it
~~ .
(
\.../
i ,

. 10\'
~

E '1
I '

'-I

(
: Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

14. When a conservative force does positive work on a body


(A) the potential energy increases ,.JB:Hhe potential energy decreases
(C) total energy increases' V (D) total energy decreases

POWER
! 15. )A body ismoving unidi~~c.Jj.2~a.,U.Y ~under theTn:ri-uence of a source of constant-Hower. Its displacement
(~/'~/ in time t is proportiO'naito \AJ,...~::;:' ~J/':; ,\.,
I (A) t l/2 (B) t ~-rli , CD) t 2
(NCERT)

,16. Two bodies of mass m l and m 2 (m 2 > m 1) are connected by a light inextensible
string which passes through a smooth fixed pulley. The instantaneous power
delivered by an external agent to pull m l with constant velocity v is ,:
tnl
(A) (m 2 - m l ) g/v (B) (m 2 ­ m) v/g
(C)(m2 - m l ) gv (D)(m , - m2) gv '.X1 in2
17. Assume the aerodynamic drag force on a car is proportional to its speed. If the power output from thc
engine is doubled, then the maximum speed of the car.
(A) is unchanged (B) increases by a factor of J2
(C) is also doubled (D) increases,by a factor of four.

r
FORCE AND POTENTIAL ENERGY'
~

',!
18. In the figure shown the pote'ntial energy (U) of a particle is plotted against its position 'x' from origin.
Then Which of the following statement is correct. A particle at :
u
(A) XI is in stable equilibrium \, :,
\ \~, \
(B) x 2 is in stable equilibrium {. (t,'-" \ , '

, ,:~r

(C) X3 is i'n stable eqUilibrium ,~ Jr,

0' ,I.. !. .R ~ x
" (D) None of these
.,....."
19. As a~ particle moves along the x-axis it is acted upon by a

conservati ve, force. The potential energy is shown below as a

function of the coordinate x of the particle. Rank the labelled

regions according to the magnitude of the force,least to greatest.

",
< i
(A) AB, BC, CD ! " (B) AB, CD" BC . I
(C) BC, CD, AB (PJ:BC, AB, CD ABC D H
)'i%"
V'
( .~ .t>
\, (5
'9'
w'
I
\., ,
i
1
.
1
( i.
!~"

j'
t
-1
~.
'" a;K
~

'f:~'-------------~------~~~----------~~~~-----
'.
\. ~, 11

~.

f
'C
JEE-Physics ".A.LLlfM ''',
CAf(ffJ< lNSll1 tJl!
~r;·!.Hi"·rnl~

1',XERCISE (0-2)
l, \
.~.i
\~, l,." \
w.\ l.. .' ~ I
I'

L A ring of radius r and muss per unit length m rotates with un ungularvelocity (J) in free space, The

tension in the ring is :

(A) zero I "


(B) -1}1CO-r" (C)··m(02r~ (D) mrc.!)~

2
" ..
'2. A uniform rod of mass m and length t rotates in a horizontal plane with an angular velocity wabollt
a vertical axis passing through one end.·The tension in the rod at a distance x From the axis is :
1 • 1 • x2 1 '( x) I mal, ,
(A) -mOJ"x (B) -mor e ( C) -1ll(t)~( 1-- (D) .. ' e--.cl
. 2 2 2 ( :...:.-2 t
3. A bead is constrained to move on rod in gravity free space as shoWD;in figure. The rod is rotating

with angular velocity (0 and angular acceleration a about its end. If ~l i$coefFiciem of fJierion. Mark

the correct option. (Rod rotates in the plane of paper.) ..

ro 2 \~::mR~ .
(A)lf J1 = - friction on bead is static in nature ~ ~ 1Y'-\\w'l..
a
, (I) a.
ro-
CB)If J1 > - friction on bead is kinetic in nature
a 99 ..
Bead

(C) If J1 < 0/ friction is static


a
(D) If bead does not slide relative to rod, Friction will not exist between bead and rod,

4., A particle is moving in a circular path. The.ac~~leration and momentum of the paJ1icic at a certain

moment are a=(4i + 3]) m/s:! and p=(8i -- 6]) kg--m/s. The motion of the panicle is
/ ­
. (A) uniform circular motion (B) accelerated ej reu I ar moti on '.

(C) de-accelerated circular motion (D) we can not say anything with IT and Ii only
5. A particle A moves along a circle of radius R=50 cm so that it~ raqius vcctor r relative lO the

point 0 (figure) rotates with the constant angular velocity 10)=0.40 (radls. Then modulus or the

velocity of the particle, and the modulus of its total accelerhiion will be ~

(A) v= 0.4 mIs, a = 0.4 m/s~ \ If·' i···· Y '. \1'-' t ',:;-" ~

(B) v = 0.32 m/s. a = 0.32 m/s! ,,) , '~


o
,

(C) v ::: 0.32 mIs, a = 0.4 m/s 2


. ,(D) v = 0.4 mIs, a = 0.32 m/s 2
\:1 ",' ,.} "~.
\J', () <. ,) ,,' :,,~?:,;).
' .. , J

6. ~., . A rod oflength L is pivoted at one end and is rotated with a u~rf()rm angular velocity in tl horizontal

plane. Let TI .and T2 be the tensions at the points IJ4 and 3U4 away from the pivoted ends, .~

(A) TI > T, ~ /:. . 1


(B) T2 > T~I{) .~ \' ' ". ",-- ,"

=
(C) T 1 T~_ . # .I' , '."\ ::•
'"-_....
(D) The relation between TI & 1'2 depends on whether thc rod rotates clockwise or anticlocKwisc .

12. ;. E ',-.-'

\.....

( ,
v
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy'

7. A palticle 'A' of mass ~o kg is ~oving in the positive x-direction. Its initial Power
(in watts) 4r'''7;
position is x =0 & initial velocity is I m/s. The velocity at x = 10m is :

(use the graph given) 21-'" !

,/{A)4'm/s (B) 2 mls !


r-:-
\J 10 (in m)
(C) 3J2 ml s (D) 100/3 mls ~ I
;;.-
\1,
f .......

' "

,(8. 'J A light spring of length 20 cm and force constant 2 N/cm is placed vertically on a table. A small block
L,,___.i of mass 1 kg falls on it. The length h from the surface of the table at which the block will have the
maximum velocity is :,~' '\ \.\>"

(A) 20 em "--iBfls cm (C) 10 cm (D) Scm t}:>\


.. " 1

9. Two identical blocks A and B are placed on two inclined planes as shown in diagram. Neglect air (',", .\
resistance and other friction. Choose the correct statement:

JI-I- - -~IK MI 21 '0


r
Statement I : Kinetic energy of 'A' on sliding to J will be greater than the kinetic energy of B on ,
falling to M. ;, '
S.tatement II : Accelef~tion of 'A' will be greater than acceleration of'B' when both are released to
~ide on inClined planet· ' , .,
~tatement III: Work done by external agent to move block slowly from position B toOis negative
(A) statement I is true . (B) statement II is true ,
(C) statement I and III are true ~tatement II and III are true
19. On a train moving along east with a constant speed v, a boy revolves a b9b with string of length.e on
smooth surface of a train, with equal constant speed v relative to train. Mark the correct option(s).
," , 'I: ?,~imum speed of bob is2 v in ground fraf!1e.

,I
'.
~

~
. ,L"./ ! . 4niv 2
LS"JTension in string connecting bob is -e-at an instant. 4-- ("17 .............
'v

, ' 2
b mv
1. YTension in string is -e- at all the moments.
,/
1 •. '
'~

.L91Minimum speed of bob is zeroin ground frame. '


(.
'~ 1YAn object moves counter-clockwise along the circular path shown. As it moves
l" along the path, its acceleration vectovcontinuously points towards point O. In ""
",.,-<:J... ......
~ ,,
i " . I" ,
the figure, line AB is a diameter. ,
I
I '\
(
, ,
(A) The object speeds up from A to B and slows down from B to A.
I
A ..........~_ ....m"''''..................1 B

" 0 :
(
~ (B) The object slows down from A to B and speeds up from B to A. ,
,
,., I
I

'"
~
'
""
,~
(C) The object has maximum speed at A and minimum speed at B. .... ....... -(:;::>.... , , '

~~~~~~------~----11~3----~----------------
(D)The object has minimum speed at A and maximum speed at B..

"
, '
,~,


JCC-inys,cs
12. An ant travels along a long rod with a consluntvelocity ii reluti vc to the rod starting from the or:igi n.

The rod is kept initially along the positive x-axis. At l:::: 0, the rod also starts rotating with an angular

velocity ro (anticlockwise) in x-y plane about origin. Then

~ ~

(A) the position of the ant at any time t is r = utr.cos o.Hi + sin rotj]
2 2
(B) the speed ofthe ant at any time tis uJl + ro t

c.o"tu
.
(C) the magnitude of the tangential acceleration of the ant at any time t is'-;--'1"
"I + (In ~

(D) the speed of the ant at any time t is Jl +2w"t 2 u


(0

13. On a circularturn table rotating about its ccnter horizontally with uni form

angular velocity ro radls placed two blocks of mass I kg and 2 kg, on a

diameter symmetrically about center. Their separation is 1m and friction

is sufficient to avoid slipping. The spring between them as shown is

stretched and applied force of 5N. If f, and 1'2 are values of friction on

1 kg & 2kg blockrespectively:­

(A) For ro:::: 2 radls, fl :::: 3N & f2 :::: IN (D) For ro:::: 3 radls, fl :::: 0.5 N & I'J ::::4N

(C) For ro :::: .flO radls, f, :::: 0 & f2 :::: 5N (D) For ro:::: JW radls, fl :::: 0& f2 :::: ON
14. A particle P of mass m is attached to a vertical ~xis
by two stlings AP and BP of $Iength I each. The
separation AB::::1. P rotates around the axis with an angular velocity ro. The tensions in the two suings

f~r
are TI and 1'2
(A) T(=1'2 (B) TI +T2=mro2/

(C) T 1-T2=2mg (D) BP witI remain taut only if ro~ .J~i


15. Diagram shows three particles A, 13 & C. Particle B is moving
in acircleofradius R with constant angular velocity w clockwise
A & C are at rest. Choose the correct statement(s)

(A) Angular velocity of B wrt A is ro clockwise


]
(B) Angular velocity ofB wrt A is ro anticlockwise "~.

(C) Angular velocity of B wrt C is constant & equal to ro


fl
(D) Angular veloci ty of B wrt C is not constant and is ::; w

~ / '.
' .... /

16. A particle is projected from ground at an angle e. At a certain instant the veloci ty vector v of particle ]
makes an angle a. with horizontal. l
dV __
(A) -=g
. dlvl
(B) Modulus 01 -=gsmlX
. J .""-­
dt . dl I
]
v2 cos 2 d ::.
~
(C) Radius of curvature is . (D) Magnitude of radial acceleration is g cosa.
gsm lX ~
--__-------------------------------------------------------E

14
'-... ;

< .,

Circular Motion & Work Power Energy
17. A car is moving with constant speed on a rough banked road.

Figure (i), (ii) and (iii) show the free body diagram of car A, B & C respectivcly:­

lw 7~W
(i) (ii)
~7
lw .
(iii)
CA) Car A has more speed than car C CB) Car A has less speed than car B
(C) FBD for car Ais not possible CD) If 11 > tanG the FBD for car C is not possible
18. A heavy palticle is tied to the end A of a string oflength 1.6 m. Its other end 0 is fixed. It revolves as
" a conical pendulum with the string making 60° with the vertical. Then
411:
(A) its period of revolution is -7'- sec.
Cll) the tension in the string is double the weight of the particle
=
(C) the velocity of the particle 2.8/3 mls
(D) the centripetal acceleration of the particle is 9.~--J3 m/s 2 .
, 19. Tn the shown figure inside a fixed hollow cylinder with vertical axis a

pendulum is moving conically with its axis same as that of the cylinder with

uniform angular velocity. Radius of cylinder is 30 cm, length of string is 50

cm and mass of bob is 400 gm. 'the bob makes contact with the inner

frictionless wall of the cylinder while moving:·

-'. (A) The minimum value of angular velocity of the bob so that it does
not leave contact is 5 radls
t (B) Tension in the string is 5N for all'values of angular velocity

/
6,
(C) For angular velocity of 10 radls the bob pushes the cylinder with a force of 9N
Il
; 1> (D) For angular velocity of 10 radls, tension in the string is 20N
.t
1 20. =
A particle of mass 2 kg is projected with an initial speed u 10 mlsec at an angle e=
30° with the
' .. i horizontal
{'
' ..
1 (A) The magnitude of work done on the particle during the first half of the total time of flight of the
j particle is 25J.
~ .
,f. Cll) The magnitude of work done on the particle during the total time of flight of the particle is 0 J.
~ (C) The magnitude of average power delivered to the particle during the first half of the night is 50
1
it
watt.
l.
~
(D) The radiu& of curvature of the trajectory of the particle at the highest point of the projectile
is 7.5 m.
~
I'
E: 15

(
JEE-Physics

2]. A p~l1ticle is shifted from A to B and then from 13 to C where A, Band C are the midpoinLs or Lhe
corresponding faces of a cube of side 2m. If a force f: =(31 + 4J - 51<) N is continuously acting on thc
y
particle, then select correct altcmali ve is
(A) work done from A to B is 7 J
(B) work done from B to C is I J
B
(C) work done A to C is 8 J r ) 'X

(I) force F, is conserv~tive force


22. Which of the following.is/are conservative force(s)? . z

(A) l = 2r·'; 5"'


(I3}p -_- - 1 (C) p = 3(x i+ Y}) (D) p=~(Yi+ ..\:'})
r (x2 + y.l)JI.l (x2 + /),\12
23. If one of the forces acting on a particle is conservative then:
(A) Its work is zero when the particle moves cxactly once around any closed path.
(B) Its work equals the change in the kinetic energy of the particle.
(C) It obeys Newton's second law.
(D) Its work depends on the end points of the motion, not on the path between.

. COMPREHENSION TYI)E QUESTIONS


Comprehension for Q. 24 to 28

A block or mass m is kept in an elevator which starts moving downward with an acceleration aoHs

shown in figure. The block is observed by two observers A and B for a time intervaltw

n~~'
lloJ All
24. The observer B finds thut the work done by gravity is " ,.

t :.~ ­
I ,., I , I ,
(A) 2" mg-to - 1 mg-t
(B) ---
2
" -
o (C) 2" mgato· (D) -2"m g at o•

25. The observer B finds that work done by norma) reaction N is


~ "
Nat 2 ~I ,:;'
~.,

(A) zero (B)


. -Nat0~ (C)+-2- (D) None of these ~r
t ~'

26. The observer B finds that work done by pseudo force is I ~. \

l
•~
(A) zero (B) -ma\ (C) + malto (D) - mgat o
r \ /
27. According La observer B, the net work done on the block is ~
~ i

I " 1 .[ , I , j ),./
(A) -2" ma-to- (B) 2'
ma\2 (C) - mgato•
2
(0)-- mgato-
2
ij ~
f '.
"1 r:.-.I
28. According to the observer A ~ A
I '

(A) the work done by gravity is zero


(C) the work done by pseudo force is zero
(B) t~e work done by normal reaction is.zero 1~
i'-"
<
'.

·(D) all the above


J .~'''/

Wi t F'_.
16 E \

:M
:ill
I:~ '-Y.

{'
........

Circular Motion & Work Power Energy


Comprehension for Q. 29 to 33

1
Ram and Shyam arc two fast friends since childhood. Shyam neglected studies and now hus no
means to earn money other than a camel whereas Ram becomes an engineer. Now both arc working
in the same factory. Shyam uses camel to transport the load within the factory.

Due to low salary & degradation in health of camel, Shyam becomes wonied and meet his friend
Ram and discusses his problem. Ram collected some data & with some assumptions concluded the
fonowing:
• The load used in each trip is 1000 kg and has friction coefficient 1-\ = 0.1 and Ils =0.2.
• Mass of camel is 500 kg.
• Load is accelerated for first 50 m with constant acceleration, then it is pulled at a constant speed of

5m/s for 2 km and at last stopped with constant retal'dation in 50 m.

• From biological data, the rate of consumption of energy of camel can be expressed as P = 18 x 10'

v+ 10.1 lIs where P is the power and v is the velocity of the camel. After calculations 011 different

issues Ram suggested proper food, speed, of camel etc. to his friend. I':;or the welfare of Shyam, Ram

wrote a letter to the management to increase his salary.

(Assuming that the camel exerts a horizontal force on the load) :

29. Sign of work done by the camel on the load during parts of motion: accelerated motion, uniform
motion and retmted motion respectively are:
;-­
(A) +vc, +ve, +ve (8) +ve, +ve, -ve (C) +ve, zero, -ve (D) +ve, zero, +ve
30. The mtlo ofmagnitude of work done by camel on the load during accelcmted mOlion to retarded motion is '
li
3, (A)3:5 (B)2.2:1 (C)1:1 (D)5:3

!1 i"l

r
r ...""1'
"k "1 • Maximum power transmitted by the camel to load is
'(

-<
~ (A) 6250 Jls (B) 5000 Jls (C) 105 Jls (D) 1250 Jls

~ 32. The ratio of the energy consumed of the camel during uniform motion ror the two cases when it
moves with speed 5 mls to the case when it moves with 10m/s .
.,

.~
19 19 10. . 20
20' ( B) :....... (C) -­
19
..
( l

i.
1.
(A) . 10 . 19 (D)

", 33. The total energy consumed of thc camel during the trip of 21 00 m is
~

~ (A) 2.1 x 106 J (B) 4.22 x 10 7 J (C) 2.22 x to.! J (I) 4.22 X 10(' J
~
~

\
E-----------+'~·------~1~7--------------------
. lEE-Physics

MATRIX MATCH TYPE QUESTIONS

34. A block is placed on a horizontal table which can rotate about its axis.The block is placed at a
certain distance from centre as shown in figure. Table rotates such that particle does not slide. Select
possible direction of net acceleration of block at the instant shown in figure.

Column-I Column-II
(A) When rotation is clockwise with constant (() (P) 1
(B) When rotation is clock wise with decreasing (t) (Q) 2
(C) When rotation is clockwise with increasing (() (R) 3
(D) Just after clockwise rotation begins from rest (S) 4

35. Column-I shows cerlainsituations and column-2 shows information about forces.

Column:: J Column - II

(A)
-
. Situation

F3
(P) FI +F2 + F3 is centripetal force.
(mr;
-
Fz
Front viewofa car
rounding a curve with
t constant speed.

!,
0,
iI
FI .r.
(B) (Q) FI is static friction. '&

!{

F2 l
1
1~
(

Passengers in a rotor not ~


sliding relative to rotor wall
J
;f.
cylindrical rotor is rotating with ]
constant angular velocity about
its symmetry axis. Jili
j
~
,~
:;.

18
E
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

(C)
vro
:
1 FJ (R) PI can be in direction opposite to that shown in figure.
II.

.
~.
:
~:
'
'

1\
Particle kept on rough surface.

ofa bowl, no relative motion

of particle in bowl, bowl has

constant angular velocity

(D) (S)f:1 + F2 =0
f

Car moving on a banked road


with constant speed, no

sideways skidding

(T) PI + F2 + j~ = 0
36. In the figure shown are two blocks A and B of same mass connected with pulley and string to each
other. Initially both of them are at a height of h = 0.5 m from ground. After they arc released they
move in either direction and one of them strike the ground. For, the interval: from releasing to whcn
one ofthem strike, some physical quantities are in column I and their modulus values in Siunits arc
in column II.

'l1
"8

-rf
1
~----'l h
'S
~ 1
{
1
{
~ Column I Column II
l
~ (A) Velocity of Aimmediately before any onc of them strike ground. (P) 1
(
'-.
j (B) Velocity ofB immediately before anyone of them strike ground. (Q) 2
Ii!l
(C) Ratio of work done by gravity on A to workdone by gravity on B. (R) 3

Ij (D) Acceleration of block A before anyone of them strike ground. , (S) 4


(T) 5

" E:~------~~~~~~----~
19

"
~/
JEE-Physics

37. A block of mass m is released from top or a smooth track as shown in the figure. The cnd pan on.tDc
track is·acirclc in veliical plane orradius R: N is normal rcaction orthe track al any point of the Irtlck.
Match the ennies oj' column I with entries of column-II.

Column I Column II
5
(A) h = -.. R (P) Net forcc on the block at C is mg
2
9
(B) h= -R (Q) N" - Nu = 6 mg
2
(C) h=R (R) Block leaves contact before B
(D) h =2R (S) Block will. keep contact with the track is region bctween A & B.
(1') N(.> mg ',i
38. A block of mass m lies on wedge of mass M. The wedge in tum lies on smooth horizontal suri'ace.
Friction is absent everywhere. The wedge block system is released from rest. All situalion given in
column-I are to be estimated in duration the block undergoes a vCltical displacement 'h' stalling from
rest (assume the. block to be still on the wedge, g is acceleration duc to gravity).

Column I Column II
(A) Work done by normal reaction acting on (P) Positi vc
the block is l ~
t-
<\•
.~.,
(B) Work done by normal reaction CQ) Ncgati vc );,.
(exerted by block) acting on wedge is !;
>.
(C) The sum of work donc by normal reaction (R) Zero
..i
on block and work done by normal reaction
(exerted by block) on wedge is
, ~
~

J
:ri
(D) Net work done by all forces on block ·is (S) Less than mgh in magnitude
,
,
~:~

U
"
'j
•.!..

,~ I "/
20
E t
b~-/
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

EXERCISE (.}M)

L The minimum velocity (in ms-· l ) with which a car driver must traverse a flat curve of radius t50
m and coefficient or ftiction 0.6 to avoid skidding is - 1/\ I 1<:1<:E • 2002]
(I) 60 (2) 30 (3) 15 (4) 25
2. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant magnitude \vhieh is always perpendicular to the velocity
or the particle. The motion of the parlicle takes place in a plane, it follows that-IA IEEE - 20(4)
(1) lts velocity is constant (2) Its accelcl'ation is comitunt
(3) Its kinetic energy is constant (4) It moves in a straight line
3. Which of the following statements is false for a particle moving in a circle with a constant angular
speed ? IA n~EE - 2004l
(I) The velocity vcctor is. tangent to the circle
(2) The acceleration vector is tangent to the circle
(3) the acceleration vector points to the centre or the circle
(4) The velocity and acceleration vectors are perpendicular 10 each othcr
~4. An annular ring with inner and outer radii R, and R2 is rolling without slipping with a uniform
angular speed. The ratio of the forces experienced by the two particles situated on the inner and
F
outer parts of the ring f.~ is- [AIEEE - 2005]

(I) ~.f_
R ,2 Rl
Rl
(2) ( R;) (3) I (4) R;-
5. £-:;'or apacticle in unifonn circular motion, the acceleration a at a point peR, 0) on the circle of radiu-s R
is (Here 0 is measured from the x-axis). [/\ IEEE - 2010J
f"
\
v~ ~ v 2 ~ . v~ • vl •
(l) -li"l + -R J (2) _·R-·COSO i + "R, sin \:) j

~
2 2 ,-. v~ 'v? •
~

.~ (3)

v .
_·R"SIn
o·1 + ·R
Ii\

v.,cOS e·J
A

(4) --_·_·cosO i - ---sinO j


t, R R

!1 6. A point P moves in counterclockwise direction on a circular path as shown in the figure. Thc movement
of'P' is such that it sweeps out a length s =t 3 + 5, where s is in metres and t is in seconds. The radius
~
of the path is 20 m. The acceleration of 'I" when t = 2s is nearly: [AJEEE - 20101
f

" l,.
~ y

i
f,
B

1: .~P(X,y)
( I ~,.,
",\::).,_.,.
~ VI"­

f
"-"
1
.:p
0'····.... A ~x
~
~ (1) 14 m/s 2 (2) 13 m/s 2 (3) 12 m/s2 (4) 72'm/s 2

(
~
\.­
E 21
JEE-Physics

7. Two cars of masses m) and m2 are moving in circles of radii r l and r2' respcctively. Thcir speeds
are such that they make complete circles in the same time t. The ratio of their centripetal acceleration
is :- [AIJ':EE. - 20121

(1) 1 ; 1 (2) m) r) : m 2 r2 (3) m l : m2 (4) rl : r 2

8. A spring of force constant 800 N/m has an extension of 5 cm. The work done in extending it from 5-­
cm to 15 cm is- [An~EE - 2002]

(1) 16 J (2) 8 J (3) 32 J (4) 24 J


9. A spring of spring constant 5 x 103 N/m is stretched initially by 5 ern from the unstretchcd position.
Then the work required to stretch it further by another 5 cm is- [A IEEE - 2003-,
(1) 12.50 N-m (2) 18.75 N-m (3) 25.00 N-m (4) 6.25 N-m
10. A body is moved along a straight line by a machine delivering a constantppwer. The distance movcd
by the body in time t is proportional to- - [AIEEE - 2003]
(1) t3/4 (2) t 312 (3) t 1l4 (fI-) t 112

11. -A particle moves in a straight line with retardation proportional to its displacement. Its loss of kinetic
energy for any displacement x is proportional to- - [AIE_EE - 20()4)
(1) x2 (2) eX (3) x (4) loge x
12. A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to VI in time tt. The instantaneous powerdelivered
to the body as a function of time t is- - [A II<':EE - 2004]

mVlt
2 - mv 2 t
(1) t~-- (2) ~vl t (3) mVlf (4) .___L
t2 - t1 tl
I

13. A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half of its velocity after penetrating 3cm. How much furthcr it
will penetrate before coming to rest, assuming that it faces constant resistance to motion?

lAII~EE - 2005]

(1) 3.0 em (2) 2.0 em (3) 1.5 cm (4) I.n ern

14. A body of mass m is accelerated uniformly from rest to a speed v in a time T. The instantancous
power delivered to the body as,a function of time, is given by- [AIEEE - 20051 ~
~

2 2 2
mv t
(I) T2
mv2
( 2) - ... t 2
T2 (3)
1 mv
'2T2 t
1 m~. t 2
(4) '2" 'T2 f
_ i
15. A particle of mass 100 g is thrown vertically upwards with a speed of 5 mls. The work done by the ~
force of gravity during the time the particle goes up is- [A [KEE - 2006]f
.
, j

(1)-0.5J (2)-1.251 (3) 1.251 (4)0.5J 1 ~ C~~


~
~ ~ )
16. A ball 0 f'mass 0.2 kg is thrown vertically upwards by applying a force by hand. Ifthe hand moves 0.2 J- i~

.i~
m while applying thcJorce and the ball goes upto 2m height further, find the magnitude of the force.}
Consider g = 10 m/s2 :
,
[AII~EE • 2006] ~ ~
,- /1
(1)4 N (2) 16 N (3) 20 N (4) 22 N ~ '~~
.i8. ( "
'-.;:
22 E
i1'!'
,'. CARf.f.ft
~.il ALLaM"" U-iSllTUTr.
Circular Motion & Work Power 'Energy
. ~r;;.Mt:mri

17. The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to move along the x-axis is given by V(x) = -~' -: ~2 -) 1.
. (It 21

. The total mechanical energy of the particle is 2 J. Then, the maximum speed (in mls) is­
[AIEEE· 20061
(1) 31 J2 (2) J2 (3) 1/ J2 (4) 2
~ 18. Amass ofM kg is suspended by a weightless string. The horizontal force that is required to displace
it until the string makes an angle of 45° with the initial vertical direction is- [AIEEE· 2006]
Mg
(I) Mg(J2 + I) (2) MgJ2 (3) J2 (4) Mg (J2 - I)

19. .A 2 kg block slides on a horizontal floor with a speed of 4 m/s. IL stri kes an uncompressed spring, and
compresses it till the block is motion less. The kinetic friction force is 15 N and spring constant is 10,
000 N/m. The spring compresses by :- [A[KKE • 20071
(I) 5.5 cm (2) 2.5 cm (3) 11.0 em (4) 8.5 cm
20.' An athlete in the Olympic games covers distance of 100 min 10 s. His kinetic energy can be estimated
to be in the range:- lAJEEE - 20081
( I) 200 J - 500 J (2) 2 x 105 J - 3 X 105 J
(3). 2 x 104 J - 3 X 10. 4 J (4) 2 x 10J J - 5 x 1O~ J
21. The potential energy function for the force between two atoms in a diatomic molecule is approximately

given by U(x)
.
= x~f - x~ , where a and b are constant and x is the distance between the atoms. if the
,,"J dissociation energy or the molecule is D =[U(x =(0) - cquilibl'iuOll, D is :
Dill lAIEKE - 2010J
b2 . b2 b2 . b2
(I) 6~ (2) 2a (3) 12a (4) 4a

22:,r =
.At time t Os particle ~tarts moving along the x-axis. If its kinetic energy increases uniformly with
time "t', the net force acting on it must be proportional to :~ [AIEli.:E· 20111
/'
\.

(1) Ji . (2) constant (3) t (4) -..rt


l
Ili 23 • . This question has Statement-! and Statement-2. Ofthe four choices given after the statements,
1:>
( !:' choose the one that best describes the two statements. [AIEEE - 2012]
\
'r
{
~

I If two springs S, and S2 of force constants k,. and k2' respectively, arc stretched by the same force,
'..
l
~
it is found that more work is done on spring S I than on spring S2­
I(
\.... i Stateme.nt-l: If stretched by the same amount, work done on SI. win be more than that on S2 .
i 'h
;~
£ j
Statement-2: k, < k2
'-- 1 §l
(I) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true and Statement-2 is notthe correct ex pi anation ot Statement-I.
( I ~.
I ~
t
.~

~
(2) Statement-I is false, Statement-2 is true
(3) Statement-l·i,s (rue, Statement-2 is false ...... . .
(4) Statement-! istrue, Statemern-2 is true and Statem~nt-2 is the correct explanation of statement~ L
'
n'~

~~. .

E 23

{
I

(
Jr:r:-rnY:)H.;:)

24. A particle of mass m is at rest at the origin at time t =O. It is subjected to a force F(t) =Foe-hI in the
x direction. Its speedv(t) is depicted by which of the following curves? [AIEEE * 2012]

t --+ t--+ t~ t--+

25. When a rubber-band is stretched by a distance x. it exerts a restoring force of magnitude


F =: ax + bx 2 where a and b are constants. The work done in stretching the unstretched rubber-band
by L is:- [.TEE Mains - 2014]
2
(1) aL2 +-_.-
bY} 1 1
- +bY})
(2) -L(aL - (3) aU + bL3 (4) 2'{aL-+bI})
2 '. 3 223

:1"

i"
t!

t
~

~
9P'

"'. "r~

A i
1 ,1
~

.~
"'-/t
)
.~ ( ~
g \---:S
~
J
[ . r' '"
,'~

~l~
~
~

~
!
;:
j /
~'.
~,

k ~(
~
:r, f
:l '
I, E E
24 ;
\'--/
ulor lVlonon oc YYOrK row~1 L.II~I 9)'

EXERCISE (JA)
ALL ANSWERS OF THE QUESTIONS JEE-2007 ONWARDS ARE AS GIVEN ON
IIT·JEE WEBSITE.

1. Statement-l : For an observer looking out through the window of a fast moving tmin, the nearby
objects appear to move in the opposite direction to the train, while the distant objects appear to be
stationary. [lIT -.TEE 2008J
and
Statemcnt-.2 : If the observer and the object are moving at velocities VI and V2 respectively with
reference to a laboratory frame, the velocity of the object with respect to the observer is V2 - VI .
(A) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-l
(B) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation forStatement-l
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False

CD) Statement-l is False, Statement-2 is True

2. A ball of mass (m) 0.5 kgis attached to the· end of a stringhaving length (L)
0.5 m. The ball is rotated on a horizontal circular path about vertical axis ..
The maximum tension that the string can bear is 324 N. The maximum possible
value of angular velocity of ball (in radiants) is [IIT-JEE-2011J
m
(A) 9 (B) 18 (C) 27 (D) 36
3. Consider a disc rotating in the horizontal plane with a constant R
".
angular speed (j) about its centre O. The disc has a shaded region ~(j)
on one side of the diameter and an unshaded region on the other
side as shown in the figure. When the disc is in the odentation
as shown, two pebbles P and Qare simultaneously projected
at an angle towards R. The velocity of projection is in the

Lx
y-z plane and is same for both pebbles with respect to the disc.

" p
. 1
'8
Assume that (i) they land back on the disc before the disc has completed rotation, Cii) their range
(
~.
,j is less than half the disc radius, and (iii) (j) remains constant throughout. Then
i (A) P lands in 'the shaded region and Q in the unshaded region. [lIT-JEE-2012]
..
~
~
(B) P lands in the unshaded region and Q in the shaded region.
'r
~.
(C) Both P and Q land in the unshaded region.
l CD) Both P and Q land in the shaded region. .
l'
i 4. In a region of only gravitational field of mass 'M' a particle is shifted from A to B via three different
paths in the figure. The work done in different paths are WI' W2 , W3 respectively then
J . [lIT-JEE (Scr.)'2003J
!
.1.
(A)W I =W2 =W3
BK «.

(B) WI =W2 >W3


(
'-' i
iI(
;g (C) WI> W 2 > W3
1,~
( ~~
\!\if. (D) WI <W2 <W3
i'

F 25

s. A particle is placed at the oligin and a force F = kx is acting on it (where k is a positive constant).
If U(O) = 0, the graph of U(x) versus x wi II be (where U is the potential energy function)
, ,. [lIT-JEW 2004(Scr)J

~x U~l. l«X)r ) U(X)l/ _.


(A) ( I\ (B) ~X (C) ~x (D) ~x

6. Statement-l : A block of mass m starts'moving on a rough hOliiontal· surface with a velocity v. II

stops due to friction between the block and the surface after moving through a certain distance. The

surface is now tilted to an angle of 30° with the horizontal and the same block is made to go up on the

surface with the same initial velocity v. The decrease in the mechanical energy in the second situation

is smaller than that in the first situation. IIIT-.JI·~E 20071

. because
Statement-2 : The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface decreases with the i ncrcase .
in the angle of inclination.
(A) Statement-l is True, Statement..,2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-I
(B) Statement-! isTrue. Statement-2 is True; Staternent-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-l
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is. False
(D) Statement-! is False, Statement-2 is True
7. A light inextensible string that goes over a smooth fixed pulley as shown in

the figure connects two blocks of masses 0.36 kg and 0.72 kg. Taking g= 10

m/s2 , find the work done (in joules) by the stting on the block of mass 0.36

kg during the first second after the system is released from rest.

. [liT-.lEE-2009]

F(t)

8. A block of mass 2 kg is free to move along the x-axis. It is at rest


and from t=O onwards iHs subjected to a time-dependent force

F(t) in the x-direction. The force F(t) vaties with 1 as shown in


!
the figure. The kinetic energy of the block after 4.5 second is 4,5s

[IIT-JEE-2010]
t (A) 4.50 J (B) 7.50 J (C) 5.06 J leD) 14.06J
9. A block of mass 0.18 kg is attached Lo a spring of force-constant 2 N/m. The coefficient of frictiqn

between the block and the floor is 0.1. Initially the block is at rest and the spring is un-strctched. An

impulse is given to the block as shown in the figure. The block slides a distance of 0.06 m and comes ,

La rest forthe first time.The initial velocity of the block in mls is V= NIlO. Then N is ,. ~

[I1T-.JEE~201 H ;;r.'
~~

--vCYO~I,!OO J I
1
J
.
. [ - ]. ~
.

10. The work done on a patticle of mass m by a force, K - .--~-.-, i + ______ ._'1... ... _., j (K being a conSLUT1., t !
A I I
~
i

~ )'"_ 2 ),11..
.
2
( X +y
(2
X +Y ;I .f"I
. . :: ~

. of appropriate dimensions), when the p~rtiCle is taken from the poillt (a. 0) LO the poi nt (0, a) along!
a circular path of radius a about the origin in the x-y plane is ;- '
(A) 2K1t (B) K1t K1t
a a
(C) 2a (D) 0 [IIT-.JEE-2013.1 i"ir
i\_/
26 E .,i;
I'

~~.
Ie
~.
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy
11. A particle of mass 0.2 kg is moving in one dimension under a force that dclivprs a constant power
0.5 W to the partiyle. If the initial speed (in ms··· I) of the particle is ZCJ'(), the speed (in ms -I) after
5 sis. . [11'1'-.11<:1':-20131
12. A bob of mass m, suspended by a string of length (I is given a minimum velocity requircd to complete
a full circle in the vcttical plane. At the highest point, it collides elastically with another bob or
mass m suspended by a string of length [1' which is initially at'rest. Both the sttings are muss­
less and inextensible. If the second bob, aftcrcollision acquires the minimum spcd required to complete
t
a full circle in the vertical plane, the ratio ~: is. "[IIT-.Jl~E-2()13]

Paragraph for Questions 13 and 14


A small block of mass I kg is released from rest at .
~
the top of a rough track. The track is a circular arc
of radius 40 m. The block slides along the track •••••••••·£3.······r••••• p
30~.'>··· i
without toppling and a ftictional forcc acls on it in *",,,,,.. #'"
o. I
;
o

:R

the direction opposite to the instantaneous velocity.


The work done in overcoming the friction up to the i:
point Q, as.shown in the figure below, is 150J. (Take 0' =:::::",,: )X

the acceleration due to gravity, g = 10 m S-2)


[.JEE-Advance-2013]
"' 13. The magnitude ofithe nOtmal rea~tion that acts on the block at the point Q is
(A) 7.5 N (B) 8.6 N (C) 11.5 N (D) 22.5 I':J
14. The speed of the block when it reaches the point Q is
(A) 5 ms·· 1 (B) 10 ms"\ (C) 10 J3ms"1 "(D) 20 ms· 1

l:
15. Consider an elliptically shaped rail PQ in the vertical plane with Q~ "
:•...
or = 3 m"and OQ =4m. A block of mass 1 kg is pulled along thc rail I

:
I

I
"

"
.',

••,

; ....
from P to Q with a force of 18 N, which is always parallel to line PQ
..
I "
I "
: \,
4 m: ....
(see the figure given). Assuming no frielionallosses, the kinetic energy '. ; .•.•~..
i ......
of the block when it reaches Q is (n"x 10) Joules. The value of n is
- (take accele~ation due'to gravity =10 ms·-2) [JEE-Advance-2014] 1u.................
! 90°
O""""'-3m----t-
.\.. ..
::.l1 p

!
A
16. A wire, which passes through the hole in a small bead, is
!
~

~ bent -in the form of quarter of a circle. The wire is fixed


,~ " vertically on ground as shown in the figure. The bead is released
: from near the top o~the wire and it slides along the wire without
11 .)

friction: As the bead moves from A to B, the force it applies B


~
(
~
i on the wire is :- [JEE-Advance~2014]
l... ~
~ (A) Always radially -outwards
£
(
] (B) Always radially inwards

1 (C) Radially outwards initially and radially inwards later.


!- (D) Radially inwards initially and radially outwards later.

I .

)"­ E 27 0

',.0
I
L
1. ADs. (a) 4 cm/s2 (b) 2 cm/s 2 (c) £ocm/s 2 2. ADs. (i) 75m/s2, (ii) 125m/s2

v 2g ~
3. ADs. 024 4. ADs. 2d 5. ADS. ,at=.J13' an= .Jlj

2
mv
6. ADs. 5m 7. ADs. (i) Nr: = mg (ji) N w =-r
. 8. ADs. Yes

9. ADs• .fii, radls 10. ADs. 5 11. ADs. (a) 28.3 m/s (b) vmax =38.4 ms·-I.
12. ADs. 2 '13. ADs• .JRg 14. ADs. (a) +ve (b) -ve (e) -ve Cd) +vc (e) -ve

15. ADs. 1 16. ADs. zero 17. ADs. 216 J 18. ADs. 8
19. ADs. 4 20, ADs. g 21. ADs. 4

, 2b fb, fb , ,2 2
2m, g
22. ADS. m l = m/2, ~max = 3J3 V-;' x::;: V3a 23• A DS. 24. ADS. -3k

25. ADs.(a) -30 kW,19.5 kW 26. ADS. 4 27. ADS. (i)x =2, (ii) 16 J

EXERCISE (S 2)' M

1. ADS. 0.1875
2. ADS. (i) 36N, (ii) 1L66radlsec.(iii) 0.1m,0.2m
3. ADS. 0008.33
4. ADS. Consider the free-body diagram of the bead when the radius vector joi ni ng the centre of the wire
makes an angle e with the vertical downward direction; We have mg = N cose and mRsine(02
= =
N sine. ,These equations give cose glR(02. Since cose s 1, the bead remains at its lowermost

, fg {2g 1
, ,
point for (0 S Vi' For (0 = V"R ' cose = '2 i.e. e = 60°
i
5. ADS. Il r = mg411?k
cot a.
• lem 6. ADS. (i) mgRl2, (ii) 2.JgR "i

~
$~
40 ~
7. ADS. 2.5em 8. ADS. 3/4 10. ADS. up, 10 em 11. ADS. u::: v sec e, v::: .J41 m/s
1

:j
i
~

I
EXERCIS'E (0-1) ~
~
1. (D) 2. (e) 3. (D) 4. (D) 5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (e) 8. (e) ~
9. (D)
17. (B)
10. (A)
18. (D)
11. (A)
19. (D)
12. (A) 13. (A) 14. (B) 15. (C) 16. (e)
iN
1 f

r
~

I ~
~
~:
!
28 E ~1
Circular Motion & Work Power Energy

EXERCISE (0-2)
. 1. (C) 2. (D) 3. '(A) 4. (8) 5. (D)
6. (A) 7. (A) 8. (B) 9. (D) 10. (A, G) C-, :p)
11. (B,C) 12. (A, B, C) 13. (A, 8, C) 14. (B, C, D)
15. (A, D) 16. (A,B,D) 17. (A, B) 18. (A, B, C, D)
19. (A, B, C) 20. (ABCD) 21. (ABCD) 22. (A,B,C)
23. (A,C,D) 24. (C) 25. (D) 26. (A)
.. 27. (8) 28. (D) 29. (A)
. 30. (D)
31. (A) 32. (D) , 33. (8)
34. Ans. (A)-R ; (8)-S ; (C)-Q ; (D)-P
35. Ans. (A) P,Q (B) P,Q,S (C) P,Q,R (D) P,Q,R
36. Ans. (A) ~ (Q) ; (B) ~ (P) ; (C) ~ (Q) ; (D) ~ (S)
37. Ans~ (A:) ~ (Q,S,T) ; (B) ~ (Q,S,T) ; (C) ~ (P) ; (D) ~ (R,T)
38. Ans. (A) ~ (Q,S) ; (B) ~ (P) ; (C) ~ (R) ; (D) ~ (P,S) ,
/-,

EXERCISE (J-M)
1. (2) 2. (3) ,3. (2) 4. (4) 5. (4) 6. (1) 7. (4) 8. (2) 9. (2) 10. (2) ,11. (1)
12. (2) 13. (4) 14. (1) 15. (2) 16. (4) 17. (1) 18. (4) 19. (l) 20. (4) 21. (4) 22. (4)
23. (2) 24. (4) 25. (1) #

i'~j
',.; EXERCISE (J-A) ,
1. (B) 2. (D) 3. (C OR D) 4. (A) 5. (A) 6. (C) 7.8 8. (C) 9.4 10. (D)
11. 5 12. 5 13. (A) 14. (8) 15. (5) 16. (D)
f
"

I
,
}
;
,{ ,
( t
\.
1
(. 1
,-"

i
i
I J
!i
~I t
I
Ii
1
'"
E
(
'~
.-.- .. ~ .. 29
~ .

r
I CONTENTS'"
. Newton's laws of Motion

&

Friction
• . Key-Concepts Fonnulae and Basic Theory 1
• Exercise (S-1) Conceptual Subjective Problems 6

• Exercise (S-2) Conceptual Subjective Problems 10


• Exercise (0-1) Single Correct MCQ's 12
• Exercise (0·2) Miscellaneous Type Problems 22 .
• Exercise (J-M) Previous 10 years AIEEE Problems 28
/'
it • Exercise (J-A) Previous 10 years lIT-JEE Problems 32 .
'.
- ;'- ~
\~ . J • Answer Key 35
1 ,.\:
j
(
i
~

r
\.
i
(
(:

\..

\.

\.

;
, '

i,

Newton's Laws -of Motion & Friction

Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

KEY CONCEPTS
~ 1. FORCE
The concept offorce is used to explain mutual interaction between two material bodies as the action
of one body on another in form of push or pull, which brings. out or tries to bring out a change in the
state of motion of the two bodies.

2. GRA VITATIONAL FORCE


It is a force of pull of Earth on a body towards the centre of Earth i.e. in vertical direction. It is a
distributed force but the net force can be assumed to be acting on centre of gravity of body. For bodies
of negligible size in comparison to Earth, it can be assumed to be acting at the centre of mass of the
body.

3. CONTACT FORCE
'- When two bodies come in contact they exert forces on each other. These forces are called contact
forces. There are two components of contact force.
(i) Normal force (N) : It is the component of contact force normal to the surface. It measures how
strongly the surfaces in contact push each other,

~
(ii) Frictional force if) : •
It is the component of contact force parallel to the surface.
'- It opposes the relative motion (or attempted relative motion) f,
of the two surfaces in contact. [< N

4. TENSION fORCE (n ,_
The force of tension at a section of a string is the force of pull applied by one part of a taut string, rope
or chain to its oih~r part through that section,along its length. It is also the force applied by taut string
{
. or cha,in at its end to the objects connected to it, along its length.

Due to hand on the string
/

-,
Due to string on
'-- { !
'"'""­ the hand
( -...­t Due to block
~ z~
~ on the string

'ti
t-::
..
'-
4i
C '
j
:::::.
5. STRING PASSING OVER A PULLEY
( 1 A pulley is a device consisting of a wheel, which can rotate freely on its axel.
'--- ~
~
w A single pulley changes direction of tension force. At present for simplicity,
;l
l j!

we discuss only ideal pulley, which is massless i.e. has negligible mass and
""
-;::;
rotates on its axel without any friction. An ideal pulley offers no resistance to T T
(;
!
...­Nj!
"--
<!l
its rotation, therefore tension force in the string on both sides of it, are equal in
~
...- magnitude. Such a pulley is known as ideal pulley .
'-----" '"0oJ,
0
z
/
"-J E 1
l_,

(
JEE-:Physics

6. SPRING FORCE
When no force acts on a spring, it is in relaxed condition Le. neither compressed nor elongated.
Consider a spring attached to a fixed support at one ofits end and the other end is free. If we neglect
gravity, it remains in relaxed state. When it is pushed by a force F, it is compressed and displacement
x of its free end is called compression. When the spring is pulled by a force F, it is elongated and
displacement x of its free end is called elongation. Various forces developed in these situations are I
:..
shown in the foHowing fjgure.

Relaxed spring Equilibrium or


mean position r

Compressed spring
~I.-' x-­
Force by spring

on the wall

F
Foree by Force by Force by .
wall on hand spring on
spring on spring. hand Elongation
----x· ..
Elongated spring

Force by wall

on spling

Force by spring Force by spring Force by hand


on wall on hand on spring

The force applied by the spring on the wall ,and the force applied by the wall on the spring make a
third law action-reaction pair. Similarly, force by hand on the spring and the force by spring on the
hand make another third law action-reaction pair.
Hooke's Law: How spring force varies with deformation in length x of the spring is also shown in
the following figure ..

~-o
1.- j
ReJa~ed spring Equilibrium or
mean poshlon

Compressed spring
~~~ } '"~
/ ."

,F ~z .~
~
, ~'
Elongated sl,ring
II ' !
- F
~

~ ~
'--"-;.:.
(

\..(
;E
"

;;J.
,:'0,-.
Sprins force'
f Y
C;
Compressions Exlension
J (~
~

)
I \/
~
- 2
~

E
!' '.
b<

c
Newton's Laws of Motion & Fricfion
The force F varies linearly with x and acts in a direction opposite to x. Therefore, it is expressed by the

following equation F =- kx

Here, the minus (-) sign represents the fact that force Fis always opposite to x.

The constant of proportionality k is known as force constant o/the spring or simply as spring constant.

The slope modulus of the graph equals to the spring constant.

SI unit of spring constant is newton per meter or (N/m).

'" Dimensions of spring constant are MT-2.

7. NEWTON'S LAWS OF MOTION

r The First Law

Every material body has tendency to preserve its state of rest, or of unifonn motion in a straight line,
unJess it is compelled to change that state by external forces impressed on it.

• Inertia
The tendency of a material body to pre~erve its present state of unifonn motion or of rest is known
as inertia of the body. It was first conceived by Galileo.
Inertia is a physical quantity and mass of a material body is measure of its inertia.

• Inertial Frame of Reference


The first law requires a frame of reference in which only the forces acting on a body can .be
responsible for any acceleration produced in the body and not the acceleration of the frame of
reference. These frames of reference are known as inertial frames.

The Second Law


The rate of change in momentum of a body is equal to, and occurs in the direction of the net applied
force. A body of mass m in translational motion with velocity v, if acted upon with a net external
"
force F, the second law suggests:
- d
F=-(mv)
dt
...g>.
~
'
If mass of the body is constant, the above equation relates the acceleration a of the body with the net
'. ~ ~ force F acting on it.
~
~ F- =d- (-)
mv =ma­
(
dt
1.
"

\. 'I" The first law provides concept of force and the second law provides the quantitative definition of
(
1 force, therefore the second law is also valid only in inertial frames.
f
w
SI unit of force is newton. It is abbreviated as N. One newton equals 'to one kilogram-meter per
j second square.

i
~.

~'
Dimensions of force are MLT-2
1 N =1 kg-mls 2

~
E 3

(
JEEMPhysics .

The Third Law


Force is always a two-body interaction. The first law describes qualitatively and the second law
describes quantitatively what happens toa body if a force acts on it, but do not reveal anything about
what happens to the other body participating in the interaction ~esponsible for the force.
The third law accounts for this aspect of the force and states that every action on a body has equal and
qj
opposite reaction on the other body participating in the interaction.

8.. CONCEPT OF FREE BODY DIAGRAM (FBD)


'so
A free body diagram is a pictorial representation in which' the body under study is assumed free from
rest of the system i.e. assumed separated from rest of the interacting bodies and is drawn in its actual
shape and orientation and all the forces acting on the body are shown.

How to dra'Y a Free Body Diagram (FBD)


• Separate the body under consideration fromtthe rest of the system and draw it separately in
actual shape and orientatipn.
• Show all the forces whether known or unknown acting on the body 'at their respective points of
application.
For the purpose count every contact where we separate the body under study from other bodies.
At every such point, there may be a contact force. After showing, all the contact forces show all
the field forces.

9. TRANSLATIONAL EQUILIBRIUM , .'


A body in state of rest or moving with constant velocity is said to be in translat16nal equiBbrium. Thus
. . '\

if a body is in translational equilibrium in a particular inertial frame ofreference, it must have, no linear
acceleration. When it is at rest, it is in static equilibrium, whereas if it is moving at constant velocity it
is in dynamic equilibrium.
Conditions for translational equilibrium
For a body to be in translational equilibrium, no net force must
act on it i,:e. vector sum of all the forces acting on it must be zero. ' FJ =ON ~
If se~eral ex ternal forces F;, F2 ..... F; ..... ~ act
simultaneously on a body and the body is in translational
equilibrium, the res,ultant of these forces must be zero.
and

F2
f '"
->.
.

i
i

...
2:F;=O 1

If the forces F; , F'). ..... F; ..... and Fn are expressed in Cartesian


i
~~
components,
~

we have: LF/x =0 2:F;y =0


LF/z =0 I•
~
/
W

- 4
~
E ',,--",I
I

/ '
~
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction e

10. PSEUDO FORCE

The magnitude of this force Fp is equal to the product of the mass m of the object and acceleration a
of the frame of reference. The direction of the force is opposite to the direction of acceleration.
Fp==-ma
It is an imaginary force and assumed to be acting on a body when. we want to applyNLM in a non­
inertial frame.
'"

;lI!
11. FORCE OF FRICTION
Comes into action only when there is a slipping between the two contact surfaces or when an attempt
is made to have it.

The force of friction on each body is in a direction opposite to its motion (existing or impending)'
relative to other body. '

(a) Static friction: The frictional force acting between any two surfaces at rest with respect to each other
is called the force of static friction (0.
~, ~Jl.;V
where Ils is the coefficient of static friction.

(b) Kinetic friction: The frictional force acting between surfaces slipping
f
on each other is called the force of kinetic friction or sliding friction (fk)'
fk= IlkN Rest lll " Relative
Motion
where Ilk is the coeffiCient of kinetic friction.
Il s > Ilk F.

Angle offriction (~): Mathematically, the angle offriction (~) may be defined as the angle betwe~n .
the normal reaction N and the total contact force It
er-·····--·-,N
i
f I R
Thus tan~ = N !
1. l F
.~
Since f == ~, therefore, mg
~z
. :i
,t:i

tan ~ = 11
-;:..

( eo J ,:::.
e eli
I
'-e 'J5.
~
..,j
'e
~e

I
~
E 5

{
'-­
iEE..physics' ,.' "

'"

EXERCISE (S..1)

THE LAWS ...


. 1. The driver of a three.-wheeler moving with a speed Qf 36 km/h sees a child standing in the
middle of the road and brings his vehicle to rest in 5 s just in time to save . the child. What is the
,.;.
average retarding force onthe vehicle? The. mass Qqhethree-wheeler is 400 1,cg,a,nd the mass of
the driver is'50 kg.
2. A uniform rope of mass 2 kg and length 4 m connecting two blocks is placed on frictionless horizontal

ground.The block of mass 3 kg is pulled


, . "-' .
by a.24
,
N force as shown
. ' .
in the figure. What is tension in

newtons at a'point 1 m away from the 1 kg block? .

':" ,"

3. A force F applied to an object of mass ml produces an acceleration of 3.00 m/s 2• The same force
applied to a second object of mass m2 produces an ac<?eleration of 1.00 mls 2 •
(i) What is the value of the ratio m) 1m2 ?
(ii) If ml and mfare combined, finci'iheir acceleration under the action of the force F.

CONSTRAIND MOTION F
4. In the.system shown, pulley and strings are ideal. The vertically
upward pull F is being Tncreased gradually, find magnitude
of F and. acceleration of the,.5 kg· block at the moment the
10 kg block leaves the floor.
s. A 40 kg boy climbs a rope that passes over anideal pulley. The other end' of the rope is at~ached to a J {

60 kg we!ght placed on the ground. What is the maximum upward acceleration the boy can have ! I"
without lifting the weight? If he climbs the rope with upward acceleration ~g. with what acceleration 1
the weight will rise up? . . ~ ! I

' . . J
6. Force F is applied on upper pulley. If F =301 N where 1is time in second. Find the time when J ~
m l loses contact with floor.. t
1
1
....

f
~
j
'"

I9
;l!

...d·,,$' . ,.. 'r


6 E~
"
,~

(
'-.J
Newton's Laws qf Motion & Friction
7. Calculate the relative acceleration of A W.r.t. B if B is moving with acceleration aQ towards right.

... 8. Rod A can slide ihvertical direction pushing the triangular wedge B towards left. The wedge is moving
toward right with)uniform acceleration all' Find acceleration of the rod A.
(·r! .

d
."

9. Find force in ne~ton which mass A exerts on mass B if B is moving towards right with 3 rn/s 2 • Also
find mass of A. (All surfaces are smooth)

~
A 3m/s~
Ikg ­
7· B

.SPRING
10 Find the acceleration of3 kg mass when acceleration of2 kg mass is 2 ms-2 as shown in figure.
\

13kg ~lON
2ms-l~

~
The system shown adjacent is in equilibrium. Find the acceleration of the blocks A, B& C all of equal
" masses m at the instant when
(Assume springs to be ideal)
(
\ ..
(i) T~e spring between ceiling & A is cut.
, (ii) The string (inextensible) between A & B is cut.
~
'!­
go (iii) The spring between B & C is cut.

~z
«I
! j Also find the tension in the string when the system is at rest and in the above 3 cases.

,...
'"
-&
(
.... j
,,::. PSEUDO FORCE
1
( J 12. A box of massm is placed on a smooth horizontal platform as
:!.
w
w
;>
shown in the figure. The platform is made to move in direction
j 30° above the horizontal with acceleration a so that the contact
;:;;
,...~ force between 'th;~'box and the platform becomes 3mgl2. Find
!
t;:; the magn] tude of the accel erati on;"
':<i
ill
0
z
E 7
'.0.,
I

13. A 1kg block B rests as shown on a bracket A of same mass. Constant forces Fl = 20N and Fa = 8N
start to act at time t = 0 when the distance ofblockB from pulley is 5OCm. Time when block Breaches
the pulley is _ _ __

FI ,< --~:;;..,·F2 ;,'

l'

KINETIC FRICTION
14. A block is placed on a rough horizontal plane. Three horizontal forces are applied on the block as .
shown in the figure. If the blockis in eqUilibrium. find the friction force acting on the block.

lOON
... "',l'

.5. In the figure. what should be mass m so that block A slides up with a constant velocity?

~
A

..
k
37"
fl~;S
.

6. Find the acceleration of the blocks and magnitude & direction of frictional force between block A and
table, if block A is pulled towards left with a force of 50 N.

1-x
'j

(i
"'.
ig> ~
g>

j E:i
:J;i'
~'"

~
A thin rod of length 1 rri is fixed in a vertical position inside.a train, which is moving horizontally with ~ t,

constant acceleration 4 rnIs 2 • A bead can slide on the rod, and friction coefficient between them is f ..,
~,
.E
~
-Ii
112. If the bead is released from rest at the top of the rod, find the time when it will reach at the i J
bottom.[g= 10 rnIs 2] 1 1
~
~
A 2 kg block A is attached to one end of a light string that passes over. an an . ~~
ideal pulley and al kg sleeve B slides down the other part orthe string with ~ J
~

;
!
an acceleration of 5 rnIs 2 with respectto the string. Find the acceleration of
'"
·R

the block, acceleration of sleeve and terision in the string. [g = 10 rnIs2]

!
- E~

2
8 E"·~·
,--/

Newton's Laws· of Motion, & Friction

STATIC FRICTION

19. A block of mass 15 kg.is resting on a rough inclined plane as shown

in figure.The block is tied up by a horizontal string which has a tension

of 50 N. Calculate the minimum coefficient of friction between the

block and inclined plane.


I'
20. A force of 100 N is applied on a blockof mass 3 kgas shown in figure. The coefficient of friction
between the' walland'the surface of the block is 114. Calculate frictional force acting on the block.
II

TWO BLOCK SYSTEM


21. Coefficient offriction between 5 kg and 10 kg plock is 0.5. If friction between them is 20 N. What is
the value of force being applied on 5 kg. The floor is frictionless.

'~
• ~
22. A block of mass m lies on wedge of mass M as shown in figure. Answer following parts separately.

(i) With what minimum acceleration must the wedge be moved towards right horizontally so that block

(
m falls freely.
(ii) Find the minimum frictIon coefficient required between wedge M and ground so that it does not
move while block 111: slips down on it.
l
~
I '

<;l
~

~
( ~ 1

(.
1
;
'" ~
'"
~
!
~II.
~
E 9' il
",-,
JEE-Physics

EXERCISE (S..2)

1. Two b,locks of masses 2.0 kg and 3.0 kg are connected by light inextensible string. The string passes I ""
over an ideal pul1ey pivoted to a fixed axel on a smooth incline plane as shown in the fjgure. When
the blocks are released, find magnitude of their accelerations. 4'1'

2. In the figure shown, all surfaces are smooth and block A and
wedge B have mass 10 kg and 20 kg respectively. Find normal
reaction between block A & B; spring force and normal
reaction of ground on block B. (g== 10 m/s2).
• m~~M~:~m<l~~IJ.'r.litiI

~
The blocks are of mass 2 kg shown is in eqUilibrium. At t == 0 ri,!ht spring in figure(i) and right string
in figure (ii) ~reaks. Find the ratio of instantaneous acceleration of blocks?

2kg 2kg

4. In the system shown, find, the initiai acceleration of the wedge of mass 5 M. The pulleys'are ideal and
the cords are inextensible.(there is no friction anywhere).
:a
j
..­
~

j r::I

!J
.l'
~ / '
! 1<ll
5. A ladder is hanging from ceiling as shown in figure. Three men A, Band C of masses 1
40 kg, 60 kg, and 50 kg are climbing the ladder. Man A is going up with A~ i
retardation 2, m/s2 , C is going up with an acceleration of 1 mls 2 and m~n B is
going up with, ~ constant speed of 0.5 m/s. Find the tension in the string
8~ i...
..­
~l!
supporting the ladder. [g ==,9.8 mls2] cu ..­8
~
'l' '.---'
!!I
g
10
E '~f

c
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

'.. 6. The coefficient of static and kinetic friction between the two blocks and also

between the lower block and the ground are Ils=0.6 and ilK = 0.4. Find the

value of tension Tapplied on thelowerblock at which the upper b~ock begins

to slip relative to lower block.

ii: 7. In the figure masses ml' mi and Mare 20 kg, 5 kg and 50 kg respectively. The co-efficient of
friction between M and ground is zero. The co-efficient of friction between m 1 and M and that
between m2 and ground is 0.3. The pulleys and the string are massless. The string is perfectly
"'. horizontal between P 1 and m l and also between P 2 and m 2 • The string is perfectly vertical
between PI and P2.An external horizontal force Fis applied to the mass M. Take g= 10 mJs 2 •

.
(i) Draw a free-body diagram for mass M, clearly showing .
all the forces.
(ii) Let the magnitude of the force of friction between m 1 and M be fl and thatbetweenm 2 and
'ground be f2. Fora particular F it is found that fl = 2 f 2 . Find f( and f2 . Write down equations of
. motion of all the masses. Find F, tension in the string and accelerations of the massf?s.

~ :,

\
.Ii'"
3
!OJ
]

l;;'"

r
]
" JIi!!
,:::.

('
I
lli
;;>

..-.,~
'-..

( :;
'" j
..,
1ii
" I!!.
0
z
"
E 11
'-­
lEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-1)

,",

THE LAWS
1.. A girl pushes her physics book up against the horizontal cei ling
:'.iPh.y'si~13ti()~ / (I
of her room as shown in the figure. The book weighs 20 Nand •
she pushes upwards with a force of 25 N. The choices below list
Girl's push

the magnitudes of the contact force FCD between the ceiJing and

the book, and FBH between the book and her hand. Select the

correct pair.

, (A) FCB = 20 Nand FBli = 25 N (B)F~B = 25 Rand FBH =45 N .


(C) FCB = 5 N and'FBH = 25 N (D) FCB = 5 Nand FBH = 45 N
2. In all the given cases initially blocks in contact are in rest and the forces are applied as shown.
All the surfaces are frictionless.

(i) (li) (iii)

(iv) (v)

In which ofthe following cases, normal ~eaction between the two blocks is zero.
(A) (1), (iv) (B) (ii), (iii) (C) (iii) (D) (v)
3. Figure shows a boy on a horizontal platform A on a smooth horizontal
surface, holding a rope attached to a box B. Boy pulls the rope with a
constant force of 50 N. (boy does not slip over the platform). The ~ ...'"0!­
W
combined mass of platform A and boy is 250. kg and that of box B is 500 ~z
kg. The velocity of A relative to the boxB, 5s after the boy on A begins 1 ~

, /

j.
to pull the rope, will be . ~
] I

(A) 1 mls (B) 1.5 mls (C) 2 m/s (D) 0.5 mls 1 II"!

4. A perfectly straight portion of a uniform rope has mass M and length L. At end A of the segment, thef
tension in the rope is T A and at end B it is T B (TB> TA); Neglect effect of gravity and no contact force J..,
acts on the rope in between points A and B. The tension in the rope at a distance U5 from endA is ~
!
(A) To - TA (B)(TA + T B)/5 (C)(4TA + T B )/5 CD), (TA - T B )/5 ~
. . ' ~

~
"'._./­

12 E
'r~.Am~··"'~1
(~CAREERINSTITUTE N f 'saws
ewon L 0 f M 0·f·Ion & FriC
. f'Ion

5. Three boxes are placed in a lift. When acceleration of the lift is 4 m1s2, the net force on the 8 kg box is
closest to

I>!

I'

(A) 80 N (B) 48 N (C) 40 N


6. A block is being pulled by a force Fon a long frictionless level

floor. Magnitude of the force is gradually increases from zero

....~~
until the block lifts off the floor. Immediately before the block
IIIlII .
leaves the floor, its acceleration is
'" 'Z.- rtM.
\~...-'\.-~
CA) gcose (B) gcote (C) gsine
~y\..fi "./
7. A block B istied to one end of a uniform rope R as shown. The

mass of block is 2 kg and that of rope is 1 kg. A force F = 15 N

is applied at angle37° with vertical. The tension at the mid-point

of rope is

(A) 1.5 N (B) 2N (C) 3N CD) 4.5 N


8. A block restingp,n a smooth inclined plane is acted upon by a

=
force F as shown. If mass of block is 2 kg and F 20 N and sin

37°= 3/5, the acceleration of block is

(A) 2 m/s2 (B) 6 mls2


(C) 8 m1s 2 CD) zero
,
TRANSLATIONAL EQUILmRlUM
( 9. Two balls A and B weighing 7 Nand 9 N are connected by a light cord. The sy~tem is suspended from
a fixed support by
.
connecting the ball A with another Hght cord. The ball B is pulled aside
. by a horizontal
1- force 12N and equilibrium is established. Angles (land ~ respectively are
( i
'..
!z
,/
'..
'" -.::
J
c !
.,>: f
..:.
1
l f
( ~ 12N

~ 00­
/ '"~
........ ~.

l!
E.
,-.


i
E
(A) 30° and 60° (B) 60° and 30°
13
(C) 37° and 53° CD) ~3° and 37°

\....

(
:E-Physics

,
M

In a given figure system is in equilibrium. If WI = 300 N. Then W2 is approximately equal to 1

'l-i

t,\
(A) 500 N (B) 400 N (C) 670 N (D) 300 N

A flexible chain of weight W hangs between two fixed points A & B which are at the same horizontal

level. The inclination of the chain wi,th the horizontal at both the points of supportis S. What is the

tension bfthe chain at the mid point?

w w ,..,/.W·
(A) 2"' c~sec e ,(B) 2"' tanS v:) 2"cote (D) none

!. A string of negli gible mass going over a clamped pulley of mass m supports
a block of mass M as shown in the figure, The force on the pulley by the
clamp is given [JEE (Scr) 2001]
(A) ..fi Mg (B),..fi mg

,(C) J(M +m)2 +m2 g (D) J(M +m)2 +M2 g


J. The pulleys and strings shown in the figure are smooth and of negligible mass. For the system to
remain in equilibrium, the angle S should be . . [JEE (Scr) 2001]

'. '

(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°

,,' '. " ' CONSTRAIND MOTION' . .. i


4Ji A heavy cart is pulled by a constant force F a]ong a horizontal track with the help of a rope that passes $
.' over a fixed pulley, as shown in the figure. Assume the tension in the rope and the frictional forces on J 'z
~
~
the cart remain constant arid consider motion of the cart untiJ it reaches vertically below the pulley. J' ':,;f
?

~ :>
F • 1 IV,
;" t,
",.
2

1 .1
r ­

~
ill

i
/-.
,,,,I!lim~~[" "lmlillalll,m!~IIII'I'Wfi!mml!nm"!llik~1ii

As the cart moves to the right, its acceleration ' "3


/.~ '"
(A) decreases. (B) increases. (C) remains constant. (D) is zero, ~ '-':1£:
.J .3
Co
~
~
~ .~

~--~--~----------~14~--~----------------~

.1 -"-..,
i"" j
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

15. If the arrangement shown in the figure is in equilibrium, mass m of the block is closest to

~
16. In the given figure, find mass of the block A, if it remains at rest, when the system is released from rest.
Pulleys and strings are massless. [g =10 m/s2]

(A)m (B) 2m (C) 2.5m (D) 3m


17. In the arrangement shown, the 2 kg block is held to keep the system at rest.
I .
The string and puUey are ideal. When the 2 kg block is set free, by what
amount the tension in the string changes? [ g = 10 mls2]
(A) Increase of 12 N (B) Decrease of 12 N
(C) Increase of 18 N (D) Decrease of 18N
18. The block A is moving with velocity and acceleration as shown in the figure.
(
"
Find acceleration of block B.
(A) 2a -J,
'­" (B) 2a t
(C) 3a -J,

..'"

(D) 3a t a t1:;
g>
.~
'.. z 19. In the system shown in the figure block B is observed moving down with uniform speed and the
~ j block C is observed moving down with uniform acceleration of 2 mls 2. Find the acceleration of
, 1 block A ..
.~
"t>
(
.!l
~ ~. "'- (A) i.33 mls 2 J
/
1
~
'- :l (B) 1.33 m/s 2t
w
;l
(
'--
J!
.~ (C) 2 m/s 2 t
-"
'"0
/

'"
-"
J!'
(D) Insufficient information
.g

,-
..
t;;
-"
~
0
z
\ .... E 15
\..

C
JEE-Physics

20. In the setup shown, find acceleration of the block C.

\-.

I:?

(A) 3 m/s 2 t (B) 3 m/s2.J, (C) 5 mls 2 t (D) 5 mls 2 .J"


21. In the figure shown block :a moves down with a velocity 10 m/s.
The velocity of A in the position shown is
(A) 12.5 mls
(B) 25 m/s
(C) 6.25'm/s
(D) None of these
22. In the arrangement shown in figure m, = 1kg, m2 ;;:; 2kg. Pulleys are massless and strings are light.
For what v~lue of M the mass m, moves with constant velocity ( Neglect friction)

(A) 6 kg (B) 4 kg (C) 8,kg . (D) 10 kg ,


'23. A rod AB is shown in figure. End A of the rO,d is fixed on the ground. Bl09k is moving with velocity
\, "

J3 mls towards right. The velocity ofend B of rod when rod makes an angle of 60° with the ground
is:

A]:-'eJ3 mlo
}
~ '/
A£. I
ntnllmmmtnmmmnmm
IITIIII .
j
~
~
~

~
~
(A)-/3 mls (B) 2 mls (C) 2-/3'm/s (D) 3 mls
! (/

24. A monkey weighing 10 kg is climbing up a Jight rope and frictionless pulley 1 r •


attached to 15 kg mass,at other end as in figure. In order to raise the 15 kg mass i "-.j

offthe ground the monkey must climb-up


(A) with constant acceleration gl3. J~
(13) with an acceleration greaterthan g/2.
(C) with an acceleration greater than gl4.
1 ''-../

(D) It is not possible, because weight of monkey is Jesser than the block.
,
!i \,.--1

16 E "-'
c
, '.
V
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

25. A boy and a block, both of same mass, are suspended at the same horizontal level,
from each end of a light string that moves over a frictionless pulley as shown. The
boy starts moving upwards with an acceleration 2.5 m/s 2 relative to the rope. If the
block is to travel a total distance 10 m before reaching at the pulley, the time taken
1
10m

~
by the block in doing so is equal to :
m
1
,~ 10
(A) J8s (B)4s (C) Ji s (D) 8s
~
)'!,

SYSTEM ANALYSIS
26. Two monkeys of masses 10 kg and 8 kg are moving along a vertical light rope,the wmJl(fIw/UU

f6rmerclimbing up with an acceleration of2 mls2, while the latter coming down with
a uniform velocity of2 mls. Find tension in the rope at the fixed support.

(A) 180 N
(B) 200 N
/~
(C) 80 N

-(0) 216 N

27. In the system shown, the blocks A, Band C are of weight 4W, Wand W respectively.
The system set free. The tension in the string connecting the blocks Band C is 1!~-!i$!._Mi!-

(A) kw (B) ~w

(C) ;w (0) -W
5
3

28. Four blocks of same mass connected by cords are pulled by force F on a smooth horizontal surface,
as in figure. The tension T I , T z andT3will be
I ,F O'TI 0 T:
l
l!'

~
~ (A) T) =F/4, Tz = 3F/2, T3 =F/4 (B) T J =F/4, T2 =FI2, T3 =F/2

t-
1 (C) TI = 3F/4, T2 = F/2, T3 =F/4 CD) T] =3F/4, T2 =F/2, T3 =F/2

"

/
P',
i1
~ ~ PSEUDO FORCE .
s-
I ~
\.~-
j 29. A~an is standing on a weighing machine with a block in his hand. The machine records w. When he takes
.,;;
the block upwards with some acceleration the machine records WI' When he takes the block down with
J some acceleration,~he machine records w2 .Then choose correct option

~
E-
(A)wJ=w=w2 (B)w[ <w<w2 (C)W2 <W<w 1
-17 ­
(D)w2 w1>w

'<--­

(
JEE-Physics

SPRING

30•. In a given figure two masses ~I & m2 (m2 > m,) are at rest in equilibrium position.
Find the tension in string AB
(A) mig
(B) m2g
(C)(m l +m2)g ~ L....:.J \'

(D)~~)g - .
2 I /'
31. Same spting is attached with 2 kg, 3 kg and 1 kg blocks in three different cases as shown. Ifxl' x2 and v
X3 be the extensions in the spring in these three cases, when acceleration of both the blocks have same

magnitude, then

2 kg 3 kg 2 kg 1 kg 2 kg

(A) x2 > X3 > XI . (B) x2 > XI > X3 (C) X3 > XI > x2 (D) Xl > x2 > X3
32. Two identical partic1es A and B, each of mass m, are interconnected by a spring of stiffness k. One
of them is pulled by a constant a force F. When extension in the spring is x, what.is magnitude of
acceleration of one partiCle relative to the other?

(A)F-Io: (B) F-Io: (C) F-2kx (D) F-2kx

. 2m. m 2m m

33. A small ball ofmass M is held.in equilibrium with two identical springs as shown in the figure. Force
constant ofeach spring is k and relaxed length ofeach spring is /!12. What is distance between the ball and
roof?
.e M .,

II
.e Mg ,
(A)-+~ (B) 2'""'---;:
2 k ( ',­

(C) i+ Mg e Mg
2 2k (D) 2 -2k":
t11'
~
KINETIC FRICTION
:;,;,

F = i + 4J acts on block shown. The force of friction acting on the block is :


l
I
34. A force
I
YLx ~F
,
'"
;!
~
}.l.=O.3 ~
~
j
(A) -1 (B) -l.8i (C) -2.41 (D) .... 31 t:;.

i
18 E

Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

35. The rear side of a truck is open and a box of mass 20 kg is placed on the truck 4 m away from the open
end,!-L = 0.15 and g=lO m/s 2, The truck starts from restwith an acceleration of2m/s2 on a straight road.
The distance mdved by the truck when box starts fall down is
(A) 4 m ", ;; (B) 8 m (C) 16 m CD) 32 m
36. A block is pushed with some velocity up a rough inclined plane. It stops after ascending few meters
and then reverses its direction and returns back to point from where it started. If angle of inclination is
\ 37° and the time to climb up is half of the time to return back then coefficient of flicHon is

I 9
(A) 20 (B)
7
5" (C) 12
7
(D)
5
7
37. A block A of mass m is placed over a plank B of mass 2 m. Plank B ~v
'-'l!.(;t;"'fi n
is placed over a smooth horizontal surface. The coeffiCient offliction ,B
between A and B is 0.5. Block A is given a velocity v0 towards light. '7Tf'lTf•• ••••••

Acceleration of B relative to A is

(A) g (B) g (C) 3g (D) zero


2 4

STATIC FRICTION
38. Block B of mass 100 kg rests on a rough surface offliction

coefficient!-L = 1/3. A rope is tied to block B as shown in figure.

The maximum acceleration with which boyA of 25 kg can

climbs on rope without making block move is:


A
V\l
J.L=1/3 25kg
g (C) g (D) 3g
(A)4 (B) g
3 3 2 4

39. A block of mas~; 2 kg is kept on a rough horizontal floor and pulled with a force F. If the coefficient
offliction is 0.5. then the minimum force required to move the block is

r::
F

I ,~
/"
'(

,
::::;~;'::{'i:~;;;;t:.>:...')j.·x, .f:f.;,<~ '!<!'~~~ "'~';':, f;'~ il'~-"lii~~:""ii'!:;::, '.'s-1";'·

100 100
(A) 10 N UN (C) -8- N

(
lt",
A block of mass)
(B)

. : . kg is at rest on a rough inclined


. plane as shown in the figure. The magnitude of net
(D) 20 N

,~

force exerted bythe surface on the block will be (g=lO m/s2)


(

'"

~
;.
\,
(A):-''' ,~ (B) 19.5 N (C) 10 N
"-,,-'

(
lEE-Physics

n. a
A block of mass m = 2 kg is resting on rough inclined plane of inclination 30° as shown in Jigure.
Thecoefficient of friction between the block and the plane is Il = 0.5. What minimum force F should
be applied perpendicular to the plane on the block, so that block does not slip on the plane (g=lOm/s2)

i
~ . ,.

(A) zero (B) 6.24 N (C) 2.68 N (D) 4/34 N


l2. In the figure shown a ring of mass M and a block of mass m are in equilibrium. The string is light
and pul1ey P does not offer any friction and coefficient of friction between pole'and M is Il. The frictional
force offered by the pole on M is
(A) Mg directed up M .1-;, • L...
(B) Jlffig directed up
(C) (M'-m)g directed down
(D) Jlffig directed down

13. In the arrangement shown in the figure, mass of the block


B and A is 2m and m respectively. Surface between B
and floor is smooth.The block B is connected to the block,
C by means of a,string-pulley system. If the whole system
is released, then find the minimum value of mass of block
C s,o that A remains stationary w.r.t. B. Coefficient of
friction between A and B is Il.

m 2m+l 3m 6m
(A) -;; (B) 11+ 1 (C) II-I. (D) 11+ 1 "

~.4. A block A is placed over a long rough plank B of same mass as

m~"''''ni.::''"''',,'''L,,
shown in figure. The plank is placed over a smooth horizontal
surface. At time t = 0, block A is given a velocity Vo in horizontal l
direction. Let vI and v2 be the velocities of A and B at time t. Then
~
j
'choose the correct graph between vI or v2 and t. ~
1f
\....

-::
-Il
j

"lor v: VI or V2 v l orv 2 1
i
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Ie ;s. to t
I
~
!

l!
lU
-;;;
~

- - - - -.. . . . .---?R~----~-.:...--'~
w E

/'
o
45. A man of mass 50 kg is pulling on a plank of mass 100 kg kept on a smooth floor as shown with force
of 100 N. If both man & plank move together, find force of friction acting on man.

~O~ ~
~oO mm~~'m,w2:mnn~'~nf
\..1=1/6 . '. ,-:

100 100
(A) 3 N towards left (B) 3 N towards right
250 250 .
(C) -3- N towards left (D)3 N towards right
"l
46. A insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly (see the figure). The'coefficient of friction
between the surface and the insect is 1/3.lf the line joining the centre of the hemispherical surface
to the insect makes an angle ex with the vertical, the maximum possible value of ex is given
[UT-JEE 2001]

, (A) cot ex = 3 (B) tan ex =3


w (C) sec ex = 3 CD) cosec ex =3'
!
TWO BLOCK SYSTEM
47. In the figure shown if friction coefficient of block lkgand 2kg
with inclined plane is 111=0.5 and ).12 = 0.4 respectively, then
(A) both block will move together.
(B) both block will move separately.
(C) there is a non zero contact force between two blocks.
(D) none of these
48. In the arrangement shown in figure, coefficient of friction between the two blocks is ).1 = 112. The
force of friction acting between the two blocks is

F1=20N' "
. '4kg
+;;;i::llllllliill
!:F.=2N
11II1;l",
./
\
(A) 8 N (B) 10 N (C) 6 N (D) 4 N
/

!
t
'1

i
\.­

'-~

1
~
~
~
c j
~

§
e 21

\,--,

(
lEE-Physics

, EXERCISE (0..2)

Consider a block suspended from a light string as shown in the figure.


Which of the following pairs of forces constitute Newton's third law pair?
(A) Force with which string pulls on the ceiling and the force with which string pulls
~
on block
(B) Force with which string pulls on the block and weight of the block
(C) Force acting on block due to the earth and force the block exerts, on the earth
(D) Force with which block pulls on string and force with which the string pulls,on the block

If a horizontal support exerts an up~ard force' of 10 N on a block of weight 9.8 N placed on it, which

of the following statements is/are correct. Assume acceleration due to gravit)' to be 9.8 mls2.

(A) The block exerts, a force of 10 N on the support. ' ,


(B) The block exerts a force of 9.8 N on the support.
(C) The block has an upw~rd acceleration.
(D) The block has a downward acceleration.
" Two blocks A and B of mass 2 kg and4 kg respectively are placed on a
.smooth inclined plane
. .

and 2 kg block is pushed by a force F acting parallel to


the plane as shown. IfN be the mag~itude,~f contact force applied on B by

A; which of the following is/are correct?

(A) if F =0 N, N =10 N (B) if F=l 5 N, N=10 N


(C) IfF= 30 N, N= 20 N (D) ifF=45 N, N=30 N
" Two small identical blocks are coimected tothe ends of a string passing
over pulley as shown when the system is released from rest.
(A) block A and B do not move
(B) block A accelerates towards pulley along the string.

~C) block A does not leave contact with table till it reaches to the edge Q

of the table
t ~J
3i,"
(D) Normal reaction of table on block A is less than weight of block A E r
~
·between P and Q and Q it vanishes j

A block A and wedge B connected through a string as shown. The wedge B is moving away from ~

the wall with acceleration 2 mls'}. horizontaily and'acceleration


.
of block A is vertical upwards. Then j

2
(A) Acceleration of A with respect to B is 4 m/s • ' 1
1.
(B) Acceleration of A with respect to B is 2~3 m/s 2 , ~

i~ c~
(C) Angle eis 60°. ~
p ..
(D') Acceleration of A is 2~3 ,mls2. j ;"J
j

~
""
'J,~/

~
n E ~
Newton/sLaws of Motion & Friction

6. Match the situations in column I to the accelerations of blocks in the column II (acceleration due to
gravity is g and F is an additional force applied to one of the blocks?
Column I Column II

g
(A) (P)
5
o

g
(B)
2m m (Q) 3'.

,"

1.
(C)
mfl3m (R)
2

2m
2g
CD) 2m (S)
3
m

(
\. .. "
(T) zero
7. A carpenter of mass 50 kg is standing on a weighing machine placed in a lift of
mass 20 kg. A light string is attached to the lift. The string·passes over a smooth
pulley and the other end is held by the carpenter as shown. When carpenter keeps
} =
the lift moving upward with constant velocity (g 10 m/SZ)
" "
~z (A) the reading of weighing machine is 15 kg
l
~
(B) the man applies a force of 350 N on the string
(C) net force on the.man is 150 N
(
'-­ i
1Ii 8•
CD) Net force on the weighing machine is 150 N
Refer the system shown in the figure. B'lock is sliding down the
1 wedge. All surfaces are frictionless. Find correct statement(s)
~ (A) Acceleration bfblock is gsine
~
(B) Acceleration block is gcose

I
£
~""
(C) Tension in the string is mgcosZe
':(;
~ CD) Tension in the string is mgsinS.cose
~"

E 23 "I~

-Ii
"

;'-.. '

Q •
,
lEE-Physics

9. In the diagram shown in figure (g:::: 10 m/s2)

Column I Column II •
(A) Acceleration of 2 kg block in m1s2 (P) 8

. (B) Net force on 3 kg block in newton (Q) 25

(C) Normal reaction between 2 kg and 1 kg in newton (R) 2


(D) Normal reaction between 3 kg and 2 kg in newton (S) 45
(T) None
10. . A block of mass mis suspended from a fixed support with the help of a cord. Another identical cord
is attached to the bottom of the block. Which of the following statement is lare true?
(A) If the lower cord is puJ]ed suddenly. only the upper cord wiJ] break.
(B) If the lower Gord is pulled suddenly, only the lower cord will break.'
(C) If pun on the lower cord is increased gradual1y, onl y the lower cord wi]) break.
(D) If pu)] on the lower cord is increased gradually, only the upp~r cord wi'n break.

Paragraph for Question No. 11 to 13

200N/m

'''-.'

::/.
E
The figure shown blocks A and B are of mass 2 kg and 8 kg and'they are connected through strings
.
~i

to 'a spring connected


. to.ground.
. The blocks are in equi1ibrium~
(g =1Om/s2) .
~

11. The elongation of the spring is 1


(A) 1 cm (B) 10 cm .
(C) 0.1 cm CD) 1m 1Q

12. Now the block A is pulled downwards by a force gradually increasing to 20 N. The new elongation
, ;'1
of spring is.
~
.(A) 2cro (B) 4 cm (C)20cm
13. Now the force on A is suddenly removed. The acceleration of block B becomes
(D) 40 cm
j
;;; ,
"Ii
(A) 1.0 m 1 s ( B ) 2.0·m/s 2 (C) 3.0 m1s 2 (D) 4..0 m/s 2
~
- 24 E

~ \
'-.../
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

Paragraph for Question. ~o. 14 to 16'


Figure shows a weighing machine kept in a Ii ft. ,Lift is moving upwards with acceleration of2 m/s",
A block is kept on the weighing machine. Upper surface of block is attached with a spring' balance.
Reading shown by weighing machine and spring balance is 0 kg and 20 kg respectively( such that block
just touches weighing machine).

'i:

Spring
Balance
r
it

2
2 ms-

Answer the follO,wing questions. Assume that the weighing machine can measure weight by having
negligible defonpation due to block, while the spring balance requires larger expansion
I
14. Mass of the block in kg and the normal force acting on the block due to weighing machine are

50
(A) 20 kg, zero (B) 3 kg, zero (C) 25 kg, zero (D) 40 kg, 20 N

15. Iflift starts accelerating with 5 m/s2 in upward direction then, reading of weighing machine and spring
balance will be
(A) 2 kg, zero (B) 5 kg, 10 kg (C) 5 kg;20 kg ,(D) zero, 20 kg
16. Find the acceleration of the lift such that the weighing machine shows its true weight
45
(A) - m/s 2 (B) 15.m/s2 (C) 12 m/s2 (D) 10 mls 2
4
" 17. The figure shows a block B of mass 2 kg kept on a smooth horizontal floor in equilibrium with two
(
"
=
identical springs of SJ & S2 force constant k 100 N/m attached to it and to fixed supports as shown.
(
The block is then displaced horizontally from this position by amount x and released. Match the initial
equilibrium conditions & subsequent values ofx in column-I with corresponding acceleration ofthe
} block when released in column II.
~

;;;
E
-::
(
',­
1
1
Column I Column II
I'
(A) SJ and S2 are relaxed and x =2 cm. (P) . 6 m/s 2
,i
\'
<",

SI and S2 are stretched by 1 cm and x = 2 cm (Q) 4 m/s 2


W
/' (B)
\. .!!

I'
,ji
..,:;
!'i
(C) S1 and S2 care c~mpressed by 2 cm and x =4 cm (R) 3 mls 2
\..,
1 (0) SI and S2 are compressed by 4 cm and' x = 1 cm (S) 2 m/s 2
"
/
!
!2 (T) 1 mls 2

'--- E 25
~,

C
JEE-Physics

Paragraph for Question No. 18 to 22

1-'=0.3

18. When F = 2N t the frictional force between 5 kg block and ground is


(A) 2N (B) 0 (C) 8 N CD) 10 N
19. When F = 2N, the frictional force between 10 kg block arid 5 kg block is
. (A) 2N (B) 15 N (C) 10 N CD) None
2(). The maximum F which will not cause motion of any of the blocks is
(A) 10 N (B) 15 N (C) data insufficient CD) None
21. The maximum acceleration of 5 kg block is
(A) 1 mls2 (B) 3 m/s2 (C) 0 (D) None
22. The acceleration of to kg block when F= 30 N is
(A) 2 m/s2 (B) 3 m/s2 (C) 1 mls2 CD) None
2'3. A block is released from rest from a point on a rough inclined place of inclination 37°. The coefficient
offriction is 0.5.
(A) The time'taken to slide. down 9 m on the plane is 3 s.
(B) TheveJocity of block after moving 4 m is 4 mls.
(C) The block travels equal distances in equal intervals oftime.

CD) The velocity of block increases'linearly.

24. A block is kept on a rough horizontal surface as shown, Its mass is 2 kg and coefficient of friction
between block and surface (Il) = 0.5. A horizontal force F is acting on the block. When'

.(A) F =4 N, acceleration is zero.

(B) F= 4N, friction is ION and acceleration is3 mls2• .1


:::iiWillkklMMll,u.. t,
,
(C) F= 14 N, acceleration is 2 mls?.
.

CD) F =14 N, friction is 14 N.

25. A block is kept on a rough surface and applied with a horizontal force as shown which is gradually
increasing from zero. The coefficient of static and kinetic friction are 11"'3 then 1.
t
M:tWc::J::: !z
(A) When F is less than the limiting friction,angle made by net force on the block by the sUrface is i ",-.

less than 30° with vertical. ,j


(B) When the block is just about to move, the angle made by net force by the surface on the block 1
. becomes equal to 30° with vertical. i
(C) When the block starts to accelerate, the angle made by net force by the surface on the block i "
"-j

becomes constant and equal to 30° vertical. " . ~ :.....,_../

(D) The angle made by net force with ~ertical on the block by the surface, depends on the mass of I
the block. . ~

26 E
J""';.
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction
26. A block of mass 1 kg is held at rest against a rough vertical surface by pushing by a force F horizontally.
The coefficient of friction is 0.5. When ~

(A) F =40 N, friction on the block is 20 N. , rli


(B)F= 30 N~ friction,on the block is 10 N.

, (C) F =20 N, friction on the block is 10 N.

(D) Minimum value offorce F to keep block at rest is 20 N.


27. A block placed ona rough horizontal surface is pushed with a force F acting horizontally on the block.
The magnitude ofF is increased and acceleration produced is plo~ted in the graph shown.
(A) Mass of the .block is 2 kg. U(IlI/S')

10'
(B) Coefficient of friction between block and surface is 0.5.

(C) Limiting friction between block and surface is 10 N.


.~ ~ F(N)
=
(D) When F 8 N, friction between block and surface is 10 N.
28. A block placed on rough inclined plane is pushed with a force F. The coefficient of friction is Il = 0.5
arid mass of block is 10 kg.

(A) =
If F 30 N, acceleration of block is zero and friction acting on block is 30 N.
(B) if F = 60 N, acceleration of block is zero and friction acting on block is 60 N.
(C) =
If F 90 N, acceleration of block is zero and friction acting on block is 30 N.
(D) =
If F 120 N, acceleration of block is 2 mls 2 and friction acting on block is 40 N.
MATCH THE COLUMN
29. ,Velocity of three particles A, Band C varies with time t as, VA =(2ti + 6}) m/s; Vs =(3i + 4]) rols
'- and ve =(6i -4d)rols.Regarding the pseudo force match the following table
(
Column I Column II .
~
Do
(A) On A as observed by B (P) Along positive x-direction

,!!!
( !i (B) On B as, observed by C (Q) Along negative x-direction
z
'.:
(
1 (C) On Aas observed by C (R) Along positive y-direction

I1
'-­
(D) On C as, observed by A (S) Along negative y-direction
( \'
(T) Zero
e i
c
I'
),
!'3
~, ]
tU
"-­
i
I
"', !

<- E 27
/
"'---­
(
'L
lEE-Physics ,

EXERCISE (JM)

L. If a body losses half of its velocityon penetrating 3 em in a wooden block, then how mu¢h wHl

it penetrate more before, coming to rest? [AIEEE • 2002]

(l)lcm (2) 2 cm, (3) 3 cm (4) 4 cm l>

Z. When forces F 1,F2,F3 ~ acting on a particle of mass m such thatF2 andF3 are mutually perpendicular,

then the particle remains stationary. If the force F 1 is now removed then the acceleration of the particle

is- [AIEEE • 2002]

(l)F/m (2) F2FimFl (3) (F2 - F3)/m (4) Flm


3. Three identical blocks of masses m = 2 kg are drawn by a force F with an acceleration of
0.6 ms-2 on a frictionless surface, then what is the tension (in N) in the string between the blocks

Band C [AIEEE • 2002]

'~F
/11I1I#/R6

(1) 9.2 . (2) 1.2 (3) 4 (4) 9.8


4. One end of massless rope, which passes over a massless and frictionless pulley P is tied to a hook
C while the other end is ftee. Maximum tension that the rope can bear is 840 N. With what value
of maximum safe acceleration (in ms-2) can a man of 60 kg climb on the rope?[AIEEE ."2002]
(1) 16 "'Wi")'''''''ffi

(2) 6
(3) 4
.:
(4) 8
s. A Hght spring balance hangs from the hook of the other light spring balance and a block of mass
M kg hal)gs from the fonner one. Then the true statement about the scale reading is-[AIEEE • 2003]
(1) both the scales read ¥ kg each
i
Ii'
(2) the scale of the lower one reads M kg and of the upper one zero ~
~
(3) The reading of the two scales can be anything but the sum of thereadirigs will be M kg 1
~
, ,(4)
.
both the scales read Ml2 kg ~i
6. A spring balance is attached to the ceiling of a lift. A man hangs his bag on the spring and the i
spring reads 49 N, when the lift is stationary. If the lift moves downward with an acceleration of { .
5 mls 2, the reading of the spring balance will be- ' [AIEEE - 2003] I ,
i

.2 ./
(1) 24 N (2) 74 N (3) 15 N (4) 49 N ~
j
19
~
28 E "j

c
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

7. A rocket which has a mass of 3.5 x 104 kg is blasted upwards with an initial acceleration of 10
m/s2. Then the initial thrust of the blast is- [AIEEE - 2003]
(1) 3.5 X 105 N,, , (2) 7.0 x 105 N
,
(3) 14.0 x 105 N (4) 1.75 x 105 N

8. Three forces start aoting simultaneously on a particle moving with velocity \t. These forces are
represented in magnitude and direction by the three sides of a triangJe ABC (as shown). The particle
will now move with velocity- [AIEEE - 2003]

(1) Less than \t

~B
I>

(2) greater than \t


(3) Ivl in the direction of largest force BC .

(4) \t, remaining 'unchanged


,9. A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal frictionless surface by a rope of mass m. If a force
P is applied at the free end of the rope, the force exerted by the rope on the block is-
r- Pm Pm PM
(1) M+m (2) M-m (3) P (4) M [AIEEE· 2003]
+m. .
10. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40 g with a velQcity 1200 ms-I. The man holding it, can
exert maximum forCe of 144 N on the gun. How many bullets can he fire per second at the most?
[AIEEE - 2004].
(1) One (2) Four (3) Two (4) Three
11. Two masses m l =5 kg and m2 =4.8 kg tied to a string are hanging over a light frictionless pulley.
What is the acceleration of the masses when they are free to move ?(g =9.8 m/s2) [AIEEE - 2004]
(1) 0.2 m/s 2 ",~"
f

" (2) 9.8 m/s2


. (3) 5 m/s2
I'

(4) 4.8 m/s 2


i 12. A block is kept on a frictionless inclined surface with angle of inclination ct. The incline is given
(

" fj an acceleration a to keep the block stationary. Then a is equal to-


(1) g/tanct
... [AIEEE - 2005]
.

" ~ (2) g cosecct .


:::-8
"'----'>. a
( (3) g ,
"\
1
i (4) g tan ct .. ,'

t,1
1

.J
j 13. A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 g moving at a rate of 20 mls. If the catching process

. is completed in 0.1 S., the force of the'blow exerted by the ball on the hand of the player i.s equal

J to-
(1) 150 N (2).3 N . (3) 30 N
[AIEEE·.· 2006]
(4) 300 N
(
,
!E 29
.

i
JEE-Physics

14. A block of mass m is connected to another block of mass M by a spring (massless) of spring constant
k. The blocks are kept on a smooth horizontal plane. Initially the blocks are at test and the spring
is t,mstretched. Then a constant force F starts acting on the block of mass M to pull it. Find the
force on the block of mass m :- [AIEEE - 2007]

(2) (M+m)F mF MF
(1)' mF
M m (3) (m+M) '(4) (m+M)

15. The figure shows the position-time (x - t) graph of one-dimensional motion of a body of mass 0.4 ~

kg. The magnitude of each impulse is :- [AIEEE - 2010]

t(s)---..
(1) 0.2 Ns (2) 0.4 Ns (3) 0.8 Ns (4) 1.6 Ns
16. <Two fixed frictionless inclined planes making an angle <JOoand 60° with the vertical are shown in
the figure. Two blocks A and B are placed on the two planes. What is the relati ve vertical acceleration
of A with respect toB? [AIEEE - 2010]
(1) 4.9 ms-2 in vertical directjon.

~
(2) 4.9 ms-2 in horizontal direction
(3) 9.8 ms-2 in vertical direction
(4) Zero
17. A mass m hangs with the help of a string wrapped around a pulley on a firctionless bearing. The pulley
has mass m and radius R. Assuming pulley to be a perfect uniform circular disc, the acceleration of
the mass m, if the string does not slip on the pulley, is:- [AIEEE- 2011]

(1)
2
3"g (2) g <
< (3) "23 g (4) g
3
~
18. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient j
of friction between the block ~nd the wall is 0.2. The weight of the block is- [AIEEE- 2003] t
(1) 20 N. ~<
<'
(2)<50 N 1
(3) lOON 1
~<

~2N :
:?

19. A marble blqck of mass 2 kg lying on ice when given a velocity of 6 mls is:stopp~d by friction in lOs. ~<
Then the coefficient of friction is- . [AIEEE - 2003] I
(1) 0.02 < (2) 0.03 (3) 0 . 0 6 ( 4 ) 0.01 ~
2
~ E
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

20. A block rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of
static friction between the block and the plane is 0.8. If the frictional force on the block is ION, the
mass of the block (in kg) is: (taken g =10 m/s2) [AIEEE - 2004]
(1) 2.0 (2) 4.0 (3) 1.6 (4) 2.5

21. A smooth block is released at rest on a 45° incline and then slides a distance d. The time taken to slide

\0
is n times as m'uch to slide on rough incline than on a smooth incline. The coefficient of friction is­
[AIEEE - 2005]

(1) ~k =1 -
1
n2 (2) ~k = )1- n12 1
(3) ~s = 1 - n2 (4) ~s = ~1- n12

22. The upper half of an inclined plane with inclination $ is perfectly smooth, while the lower half is
rough. A body starting from rest at the top will again come to rest at the bottom, if the coefficient of
friction for the lower half is given by- [AIEEE - 2005]
(1)2sin$ (2) 2 cos $ (3) 2 tan $ . (4) tan $

23. Consider a car moving on a straight road with a speed of 100 m/s. The distance at which car can be
stopped, is : [~k =0.5] [AIEEE - 2005]
(1) 800 m (2) 1000 m (3) 100 m (4)400 m

24. The minimum force required to start pushing a body up a rough (frictional coefficient~) inclined plane
is F Iwhile the minimum force needed to prevent it from sliding down is F2• If the inclined plane makes

an angle e from the hOrizontai such that tane =2~ then the ratio .!i
F2
is ;­ [AIEEE - 2011]
I

(1) ·4 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) 3


, . J
(
} 25. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical cross section given by y =~ • if the coefficient
6
~ of friction is 0.5, the maximum height above the ground at which the block Can be placed without
J slipping is :- [JEE Mains'· 2014]

( I (1)
1
-m
1
(2) -m
1
(3) -m
6
2
(4) -rn

I 3 2 3

...

j
~
. .2
8
~
~
E 31

(
Jl:l:-t'nyslcs _rpm ij;i'l,it'!M#I!;mn I

, EXERCISE (JA)

1. A block of mass -V3 kg is placed on a rough horizontal surface F


whose coefficient of friction is 112-V3. The minimum value of
force F (shown in figure) for which the block starts to slide on
the surface is (g=10mls2) [IIT-JEE (Scr) 2003]
(A) 20 N (B) 20-V3 N (C) 1O-V3 N (D) None of these

2.' What is the maximum value of the force F such that the block shown
in the arrangement, does not move? [2003, 2M]
(A) 20 N (B) 10 N

(C) 12 N CD) 15 N
3. Two blocks A and B of equal masses are released from an inclined
plane of inclination 45° at t = O. Both the blocks are initially at rest.
The coefficient of kinetic friction between the block A and the inclined
plane is 0.2 while it is 0.3 for bloc~ B. Initially, the block A is -V2
m behind the block B. When and where their front faces will come
'in a line. [Take g = 10 m/s2]. [IIT-JEE 2004]·
"/'

4. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is placed horizontal1y. A


block ofmass 1kg is placed as shQwn. The co-efficient offriCtion between a=25 mls2 E' >;~
the block and all surfaces ofgroove in contact is Jl = 2/5. The disc has an
acceleration of25 mls2. Find the acceleration of the block with respect to cos 8=415,
disc. [IlT-JEE 2006] sin 9=3/5

,r" "
. . .
5. Two particles of mass m each are tied at the ends of a light string of length l

~ j
2a. The whole system is kept on a frictionless horizontal surface with the
string held tight so that each mass is at a distance 'a' from the center P (as m m 'r
P i&~ ~
sh~wn in the figure). Now,. the mid-point of the string is pulled vertically'
i;j:i' .
-:
...:
upwards with a small but constant force F. As a result, the particles move • a • ", a • -Ii
j

towards each other on the surfaces. The magnitude of acceleration, when the 1
separation between them becomes 2x, is [lIT·JEE 2007] l
F~ F
(B) -'-'-2
X 'Fx (D)~ .Ja2 _x 2 l
-r?'2
(A) 2m va2-~ 2m va 2-x (C) 2m a
2m x
I
~ ,../

32 E
.'-'

c
/" -~
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

6. Statement 1 : A doth covers a table. Some dishes are kept on it. The cloth can be pulled out without
dislodging the dishes from the table. [UT-JEE 2007]
and
Statement 2 : For every action there is an equal and opposite reaction
(A) Statement-! is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-!
(B) Statement-! is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT acorrectex'planation for Statement-!
(C) Statement-! is True, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-lis False, Statement-2 is True
7. Statement-l : It is easier to pull a heavy object that to push it on alevel-ground.
and [lIT-:JEE 2008]
Statement-2 : The magnitude offrictional force depends on the nature ofthe two surfaces in contact.
.(A) Statement-! is True,~tatement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-!
(B) Statement-! is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-!
(C) Statement-! is True, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-! is False, Statement-2 is True
8. A piece of wire is bent in the shape of a parabola y = kx 2 (y-axis vertical) with a bead of mass m on.
it. The bead can slide on the wire without friction. It stays at the lowest point of the parabola when the
wire is at rest. The wire is now accelerated parallel to the x-axis with a constant acceleration a. The
distance of the new equilibrium position of the bead, where the bead can stay at rest with respect to
the wire, from the y-axis is [IIT-JEE-2009]
a a 2a a
(A)_ gk (B) 2gk (C) gk . (D) 4gk

9. A block of mass m is on an incHned plane of angle S. The coefficient

~
of friction between the block and the plane is Il and tanS >Il. The
block is held stationary by applying a force P parallel to the plane.
f The direction of force pointing up the plane is taken to be positi ve.
\;..
. As P is varied from PI =mg (sinS - !.!CosS) to Pz=mg(sinS + Il cosS),
the frictional force f versus P graph will look like [lIT-JEE-20l0]

lg.
~z
j
(A) I
-' )
< ~p (B) I PI P2 ,p

" ~
(
~ '"
J
,
\~
i ij £ 1 ( I ~l Pz
i (C) :) ,P (D) . : ,P­
{
~/
i
~

~
~
!!!
)ij'"
2
'-­
E 33
JEE-Physics

10. A block is moving on an inclined plane making an angle 45° with the horizontal and the coefficient or'
friction is 11. The force required to just push it up the inclined plane is 3 times the force required to just
prevent it from sliding down. If we define N =1011, then N is [I1T-JEE-2011]
11. In the figure, a ladder of mass m is shown leaning against a wall. It is in static equilibrium making
an angle e with the horizontal floor. The coefficient of friction between the wall and the ladder
is III and that between the floor and the ladder is ~. The nonnal reaction of the wall on the ladder
is NI and that of the floor is N 2• If the ladder is about to slip, then :-[JEE Advance 2014]


11.

11,

g
(A) III =0 ~ '¢ 0 and N2 tane= mg (~) III '¢ 0 Ilz =
,0.and Nltane=m2

mg
(C) III '¢ 0 ~. '¢ 0 and N2 =1 + Iltl.l.2 , (D) 11,
,
= 0 112 '¢ 0 and Nt tane= mg
,2
12. A block of mass ml =1 kg another mass m =2kg, are placed together'(see figure) on an inclined
2
plane with angle of inclination e. Various values of e are given in List 1. The' coefficient of friction
between the block m l and the plane is always zero. The coefficient of static and dynamic friction
between the blockm 2 and the -plane are equal to 11 :: 0.3. In List II expressions for the friction on "
block m2 are given. Match the correct expression of the friction in List II with the angles given
in List I, and choose the correct option. The acceleration due to gravity)s denoted by g. .
[useful information: tan (5.5°) ~ 0.1 ; tan (1 1.5°) ~ 0.2 ; tan (16.5°) ~ 0.3] [JEE Advance 2014]

/ :,
'.
f"·

::Jq.
E
'"
~ ,/,
List-I List-II .::::
1
(P) e =5° (1) m2g sin e ~-.::
e = 10° (m. + m2)g sin e
-Ii
(Q) (2)
(R)
(S)
e =15°
e = 20°
(3)
(4)
).tm 2gcos e
Il(m j + m2)g cos e
1
~
:>
w

;J
II

Code: , ~
/'
'"
(A) P-l, Q-l, R-l, S-3 (B) P-2. Q-2, R-2, S-3 ~

(C) P-2,. Q-2, R-2, S-4 (D) P-2, Q-2, R-3, S-3
1!lI
i
z
E
34
r
r"
"-..,,
[-"
Newton's Laws of Motion & Friction

ANSWER KEY

m 1
1. ADs. 900 N 2. ADs. 6 3. ADs. (i) - ' =-3 (ii) a
m2
=3/4 m1s2
'

a
4. ADs. 200 N, 10 m1s2 5. ADs. 0.5g, g 6. ADs. 2 sec 7. ADs. "2o
8. ADs. 3aB 14 9. ADs. 5N, 16/31 kg 10. ADs. 2 ms-2
3 -l, •
11 • ADs • (1') 'aA-
--.L-a
2 - B'' ac-, , (1'1') aA-
-0' T-mgl2'
- - 2gt ' B
a -- 2g-l, ' e
a-- 0, T -- 0',

(iii) a
A
=a =gat ' ea = g-l, ' T=
B
3mg 'T= 2mg
2'
(~

'<
,
12. ADs. g m1s 2 13. ADs. 0.5 s 14. ADs. (1001 -200J)N 15. ADs. 1 kg
r 16. ADs. lOi ",;-. 17. ADS. 1/2 s 18. ADS. 5 m1s 2 downwards, 0 mls2, 10 N
" ~

19. ADs. 0.5 , 20. ADS. 20 N vertically downward 21. Ails. 30 N


msinBcosB
, ,22. ADS. (i) a =g cot e, (ii) J..lmin =m cos 2 B+ M

,r'

;,:
25
(
1. ADS. .L ml S2 2. ADS. 80 N, 48 N, 264 N 3. ADS. '24
\ .. /
,
10
"
I......
,
4. ADS. 2g/23 5. ADS. '1440 N 6.ADs. 40 N
(
\.,

r
\.
~
C!­

a =3/5 m1s2, T = 18 N, F = 60N


O!

~ 17. ADS. (i) F (ii)


z
~
B
;jj

&1
-:: Mg
( -8

<::.
1
( ~
:!.
tll
;>
C
J
l.~
'~
(
\. .. '
'J!
'8
r :;i
'. '0
U.
0
0
Z
(
\. E ,35 t
(.
'-..'

( ~.
· 'lEE-Physics

1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (C) 5. CD) 6. (B) 7. (A) 8. (A) 9. (C)


10. (D) 11. (£) 12. (D) 13. (C) 14. (A) 15. (A) 16. (D) 17. (B) 18. (A)
19. (C) 20. (A) 21. (B) 22. (C) 23. (B) 24. (B) 25. (B) 26. (B) 27. (C)
28. (C) 29. (C) , 30. CD) 31. (B) 32. (D) 33. (C) 34. (A) 35. (C) '36. (A)
37. (C) 38. (B) 39. (B) 40. CD) 41. (C) 42. (A) 43. (C) 44. (B) 45. (A)
46. (A) 47. (B) 48~ (A)

1. (C, D) 2. (A, C) 3. (B, C, D) 4. (C, D) 5. (A, 'C, D)


, 16. (A) (R) (B) (T) (C) (R) CD) (P) .7. (A, B) 8. (A, D)
9. (A) (R) (B) (T) (C) (Q) CD) (T) 10. (B, D) 11. (B)

., 12. (C) 13. (B) 14. (B) 15. (C) 16.(C)

17. (A) (S) (B) (S) (C) (Q) (D)(T) 18. (A) 19. (A) 20. (A)
21. (C) 22. (A) 23~ (A, B, D) 24. (A, C) 25. (A, B, C) .
26. (B, C, D) 27. (A, B, C) 28. (A, C, D) 29. (A) (T) (B) (R) (C) (R) CD) (Q)

1. Ans. (1) 2. Ans. (1) 3. Ans. (2) , 4. Ans. (3)


5. Ans. (1) 6. Ails. (1) 7. Ans. (2) 8. Ans. (4)
9. Ans. (4) 10. Ans. (4) 11. Ans. '(I) 12. Ans. (4)
13. Ans. (3) 14. Ans.(3) 15. Ans. (3) 16. Ans. (1)
17. Ans. (1) 18. Ans. (4) 19. Ans. (3) , 20. Ans. (1)
21. Ans.(1) 22. Ans. (3) 23. Ans. (2) 24. An~. (4)
25. Ans. (3)
.,
'"'!-
Ii'
~z
..::
1
'"
:f
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. 11.313m 4.10mls2 ~
j
5. (B) 6. (B) 7. (B) 8. (B) 9. (A) !i
10.5 1L.(C,D) 12. CD) :1·
:f.
~. (
'--"
~
.
'"
,~ !
(

,"--"

!
/.
!!i
;z
'0
~

, 36
-E ,"--/

C
(J
'J

i!
rf

'c'

ICCONTENTS ~

KINEMATICS

e Exercise (S-l) Conceptual Subjective Problems 1


• Exercise (S-2) Conceptual Subjective Problems 5
o Exercise (0-1) Miscellaneous Type Problems 7
• Exercise (0-2) Miscellaneous Type Problems C 12
/C
" • Exercise (J-M) Previous 10 years AlEEE Problems 17
"
~~- • Exercis'e (J·A) Previous 10 years lIT-lEE Problems 21
('
• Answer Key 23
( C

(
'.j

ec
CC

"

\...,

c
:)

~'3
;; .

'8

'5

'" .,.,."
:Jt
j

Kinemafics
I

./

EXERCISE (8-1)

1. A particle is moving along x-axis. Initially it is located S m left of origin and it is moving away from
the origin and slowing down. In this coordinate system, what are the signs of the initial velocity and
accelerati on. .'

++y

(oml ~+ I v, I · I

2. A particle moving in one-dimension with constant acceleration of 10 m/s 2 is observed to Cover a


" "

distance of 100 m duri ng a 4s interval. How far will the particle move iri the next 4s1
3. A drive~ travelling at speed 36 kmh- I sees the light tum red atthe intersection. If his reaction time is
0.6s, and then the car can deaccelerate at 4ms-2 • Find the stopping distance of the car.
. .
4. A man sees an Object from a Sm height window at 4th floor of Sankalp building going up and then
back down. If the total time the object is in sightis 2sec then calcul ate the height of object in meters
, above the window-it reaches.
s. A body is dropped frorri;~ height of 300m. Exactly at the same instant another body is projected
J from the ground level vertically up with a velocity of ISO ms- I • Find when they will meet.
l
6. A particle goes from A to B with a speed of 40km/h and B to C with a speed of 60kIhlh. If
($
. . . . .1
AB ~ 6BC, the average speed in km/h between A and C is _ _
7." =
A particle starts from rest at t = 0 and x ::: 0 to move with a constant acceleration +2 m/s2, for
""20 seconds. After that, itrnoves with -4 m/s2 for the next 20 seconds. Finally, it moves with positive
~
3- acceleration for 10 seconds until its velocity becomes zero.
'"

:1 ~
1
(;

~
(a) What is the value of the acceleration in the last phase of motion?
(b) W~at is the final x-coordinate of the particle?

(c) Find the total distance covered by the particle during the who·Ie.motion.

~ 8. In the following graph' variation with time (t), in velocity (v). of a particle moving rectilinearly is
i-:: shown. What is average velocity in mls of the particle in time inte~val from 0 s to 4 s?
-Ii
j
~

.~
~ 6 ~u"'""-""-'--'ir---""--
u.
;; Velocity (m!s)
J.
",
21
.'
\... ~

~
1 Tlme(s)
0o 3
( ~'
'-"

.~
\A. E 1
(
'<..

L
JEE-Physics
'I
9. The graph i1lustrates motion of a bucket being lowered.into a well from the top at the instant t=O,
down to the water level, filled with water and drawn up again. Here 'x' is the depth.
x (Ol)
..·-..···-·-"·-·..·-...... ~"....·.......1

30 --'"'<--"'-1
I
I

. t (s)

10 20
Find the average speed of the bucket in mls during whole operation.
10. A particle moves along a straight line, x. At time t = 0, its position is at x = O. The velocity, V, of the
object changes as·a function of time t, as indicated in the figure; t is in seconds, V in mlsec and x in
meters.

+3
~ +2
~.
> +1

0
-
-1
-2
! j
i

-3 ........:._.....................
!
!
!
(

,r

=
(a) What is x at t 3 sec?
(b) What is the instantaneous acceleration (in m/syc 2) at t = 2 sec?
(c) What is the average velocity (in rrilsec) between t == 0 and t == 3 sec.?
(d) What is the average speed (in m/sec) between t 1 and t == 3 sec? =
11. Position y~torofa particle is given by r = 3t 3 j + 4tJ + t 2 k .find avg acceleration of particle from 1- (
'-.
..

t == 1 to t == 2sec. ~
12. The position x o( a particle w.r.t. time t along x-axis is given by X== 9t2 -t3 where x is in metres and t ~ ,"
in second. Find I
~
\..­

(a) Maximum speed along +x direction 1


(b) Position oftuming point }
c
(c) Displacement in first ten seconds i
(d) Distance travelled in first ten seconds 1",
-~ c
13. The velocity of the particle is gi ven as v == 3t3 + t - _1 • Calculate the net force acting onthe body at ;
t2 ,j
time t == 2 sec, if the mass of the body is 5 kg . ,~
/ c
- • l!
14. The. vertical height y and horizontal distance x of a projectile on a certain planet are given by ~ (j
x == (3t)m, y == (4t - 6t2) mwhere t is in seconds. Find the speed of projection (in mls). . ~
!1 i

~;:
2 E .I
( '.
t ,-,/
Kinematics

15. A particle is projected with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle 37° with the vertical. Find (i) time of flight
(ii) maximum height above ground (iii) horizontal range.
16. A particle is projected in the x-y plane with y-axis along vertical. Two second after projection the
velocity of the particle makes an angle 45° with the X-axis. Four second after projection, it moves
horizontally. Find the velocity of projection. ,
17,. A Bomber flying upward at an angle of 53° with the vertical releases a bomb at an altitude of
800 m. The bomb strikes the ground 20 safter its release. Find: [Given sin 53°=0.8; g =10 m/s2]
(i) The vclocity of the bomber at the time of release of the bomb.
(ii) The maximum height attained by the bomb.
(iii) The horizontal distance travelled by the bomb before it strikes the ground
(iv) The velocity (magnitude & direction) of the bomb just when it strikes the ground.
18. A ball is projected at an angle of 30 6 above the horizontal from the top of a tower and strikes the ground
in 5 s at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Find the height of the tower and the speed with which it
was projected.
19. A projectile is thrown with velocity of 50 m/s towards an inclined plane from ground such that it strikes
the inclined plane perp~ndicularly. The angle of projecti on ofthe projectile is 53° withthe horizontal
and the inclined plane is inclined at an angle of 45° to the horizont~l.

), ~
.sJO,450
,//1

(i) Find the time of flight. I,


I'
Ii
(ii) Find the distance between the point of projection'and the foot of inclined plane. I;
;!
20. A ball is projected on smooth inclined plane in direction perpendicular to line of greatest slope with
i
velocity of 8 m/s. Find it's speed after 1 s. I~
I:
1:
.

I~s;
~
( ,.,:
11
II

( 37°
"
.~
~,

~ 21. A ball is thrown horizontally from a point 0 with speed 20 m/s as shown.
9
(
" ,IT
-:;
Ball strikes the incline plane along the normal to it after two seconds. Find value of x, ifP = it/x
.r: (where Pis the angle of incline in degree) .
::;
~ , I
~

~
\. '"
j: ~.~/S
~
J
°2

(
'-.

/ 1
'--­ ~
K
, ..
( /

~

~ 22.
(

" A person decided to walk on an escalator which is moving at constant rate (speed). When he moves
tl
2~ at the rate 1 step/sec, then he reaches top in 20 steps. Next day he goes 2 steps / sec. and reaches top
IiI
n
o/, in 32 steps. If speed of escalator is n steps / sec. Find the value ofn.
, E 3
Ie.,

c
lEE-Physics

23. Two particles P and Q are launched simultaneously as shown in figure. Find the minimum distance
between particles in meters.

IOms·'

J~
r +----uOm
,70ms"

..

24. A man crosses a river by a boat. If he crosses the river in minimum time he takes 10 minutes with a
drift-120 m. If he cros~es the river taking shortest path, he takes 12.5 minutes. Assuming V bl' > v" find
(i) widtn of the river,
(ii) velocity of the boat with respect to water (vw,)
(iii) speed of the current (v,)
25. Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 20 mls relative to air. A person is running in the rain with a
velocity of 5 mls and a wind is also blowing with a speed of 15 mts (both towards east). Find the angle
with the vertical at which the person should hold his umbrella for best protection from rain.
26. A glass wind-screen of adjustable inclination is mounted on a car. The car moves horizontally with a
speed of 6 m/s. At what angle ex with .the vertical should the wind screen be adjusted so that the rain
drops falling vertically with 2 mls strike the wind screen perpendicularly?

~
;J.:
V,

~ ~
/::,i'~
:.~

i""
'~
.E
:::
i
;
,']
~
~

u.
;?
II
~
/'
... '"
~ } ,,~

I
9
~
0
z

4
f --~
E
I
I: "
V
: J'l
Kinematics

EXERCISE (S-2)

1. A juggler perfonns in a room whose ceiling is 3 m above the level of his hands. He ~hrows a ball
vertically upward so that it just reaches the ceiling.
(a) With what initial veiocity does he throw the ball ?
(b) What time is required for the ball to reach the ceiling?
He throws a second ban upward with the same initial velocity, at the instant that thefirst ball is at
the ceiling.
. (c) How long after the second ball is thrown do the two ball pass each other?
(d) When the balls pass each other, how far are they above the juggler's hanps ?

2. A helicopter takes offalong the vertical with an acceleration of 3 m/sec 2 & zero initial velocity ..
In a certain time, the pilot switches off the engine. At the point of takeoff, the sound dies away in
30 sec. Determine the velocity of the helicopter at the moment when its engine is,switched off,
assuming the velocity of sound is 320 m/sec.

3. A fishing boat is anchored 9 km away from the nearest point on shore. A messenger must be sent
from the fishing boat tb a camp, 15 km from the point on shore closest to the boat. If the messenger
can walk at a speed of 5km per hour and can row at 4 km per hour.

\
r\at ,
9km~p
['
15 km
"
f ~
N
l .;, (i)Fonh an expression, relating time taken to reach the camp t with distance x on shore 'Yhere he latlds.
N
"
g, Oi) At what point on shore must he land in order to reach the camp in the shortest possible time?
( w

(' ],4.
:;a: Two inclined planes OAand DB having inclinations 30° and 60° respectively, intersect each othe~ at
j o as shown in figure. p.. particle is projected from point P with velocity u = 10 .../3 mls along a
"r
~

;
.. .f
'direction perpendicular to plane OA. If the particle strikes the plane DB perpendicularly at Q.Calculate
c: !
(i) Time of flight. .A ~B
( -l~
u. Oi) Velocity with which particle strikes the plane DB.
~,
,><
(iii)Maximum height from 0 attained by the particle.
c, " i,..
I J
!II
(iv) Distance PQ.. I.;
~
c ;Z

r l 8z
./
'.N
.
'-I E 5 ,

(
JEE-Physics
S. A hunter is riding an elephant ofhcight 4 m moving in straight line with uniform velocity of2 m/s. A
deer starts running with uniform velocity from a point4--J5 m away in front of the elephant along a line
perpcndicular to velocity of the elephant. If hunter can throw his spear with a speed of 10 mis, relati ve
to the elephant, at what angle e to it's direction of motion must he throw his spear horizontally for a .
successful hit; Also find the speed of the deer.

6. A large heavy box is sliding without friction down a smooth plane of inclination S. From a point P on
the bottom of the box, a particle is projected inside the box. The initial speed Of the particle with respect
to box is u and the direction of projection makes an angle ex. with the bottom as shown in figure.[JJi~E]

1 !

(i) Find the distance along the bottom of the box between the point of projection P and the point Q where
the particle lands. (Assume that the particle does not hit any other surface of the box. Neglect air
resistance).
(ii) If the horizontal displacement of the particle as seen by an observer on the ground is zero, find the speed

of the box with respect to the ground at the instant when the particle was projected..

\7. Two swimmers start a race. One who reaches the point C first on the other bank wins the race. Boy
A makes his strokes in a direction of 37 0 to the river flow with velocity 5 kmlhr relative to water. Boy
B makes his strokes in a direction of 127 0 to the river flow with same relative velocity. River is flowing
with speed of2 kmlhr and is 100 m wide. Who will win the race? Compute the time taken by A and
B to reach the point C if the speeds of A and B on the ground are 8 kmIhr a~d 6 kmlhr respectively.

A
n8: --+2kmlhr
B :2n. ~
,..; -;~

..~o
c
I1
8: '"
'627°
r
.;,
g f 1
i:~
125 m•
300m ... ~ ~ .
~
j

\"
~
,,~
..!:
¥
-:. '"
,1 ~
'--''''';
'"
·t
~u
~
-~
"~~
,/

!;';'~ r "~\i
.,...,~ "-.d
~
~ ~
" IU
...
;;
/
0 l!
1l v.0
""
ih' ( '"'
~
...-;
"--d ,/
l!!
,~ ~
I
~; ',./

~8 '"
."
:.<:
/

'0
"
6
E E
Kinematics

EXERCISE (0-1)

. 1. Abody starts from rest and is uniformly accelerated for 30 s. The distance travelled in the first 10 sis
XI' next 10 s is x2 and the last 10 sis x3 ' Then XI: x2 : x) is the same as
(A) 1 : 2 : 4 (B) 1 : 2 : 5 (C) 1 : 3 : 5 (D) 1 : 3 : 9

2. A particle travels 10m in first 5 sec and 10m in next 3 sec. Assuming constant acceleration what is the
distance travelled in next 2 sec.
(A) 8.3 m (B) 9.3 m (C) 10.3 m (D) None of above

3. A particle has an initial velocity of9 mls due east and a constant acceleration of 2 m/s 2 due west. The
distance covered by the particle in the fifth second of its motion is
(A) 0 (B) 0.5 m (C) 2 m (D) none of these

4. . A physics teacher finds a scrap of paper on which one of his students has written the. fol1owing
equation: 0 2 - 52 =2 x (-9.8) x x
of which of the following problem would this equation be part of thecorrect solution?
(A) Find the speed of an object 5 seconds after it was dropped from rest. .
(3) Find the distance of an object has fallen 5 seconds after it was released from rest on Earth.
(C) Find the heig~t frorp which a ball when released will strike the ground with a speed of 5 m/s.
(D) Find the maximum h~ight to which a ball will rise if it is thrown upward \.vithan initial speed of 5 mls.

,. 5. A ball dropped from thetop of a building passes past a window of height h in - - ­


time 1. If its speeds at the top and the bottom edges of the window are denoted

': ~
~.

;;;
by v I and v2 respectively, which of the following set of equations are correct?
(A)v 2:"'v, = gt and (v 2-v t )t=h r
h
0~vl

=gt and (v + v,)t=2h


,f!'
~
'"
(3) V -V
2 1 2

. (C) v2+ VI =gt and (v 2-\)t=h

'L @~V2
. 1
.~;

(D) None of the above.


1 ~ <;.
'" :f. 6. A ball is thrown vertically with initial velocity 30 m/sec. What will be its position vector at time
l
'.~
1 ~
t =5 sec, taking Origin at 45 m above the point of projection, vertical up as positive y-axis and
( horizontal as x-axis:­
1...
;J
(A) (0, -25) (B) (0, -20) (C) (0, -45) (D) (0,-5)
~
Z; 7. The velocity of a particle moving on the x-axis is given by v = x2 + x where v is in mls and x is in m.
(
~
'-.,

l --
p.
!j
Find its acceleration in mls 2 when passing through the point x =2m
I
,
1 ~ (A) 0 (B) 5 (C) 11 (D) 30
r.\
o/.
~ I E 7
( I
',"-.J'

I"
'L­
,lEE-Physics

8, ,A particle is thrown upwards from ground, It experiences a constant resistance force which can
produce retardation 2 m/s2, The ratio of time of ascent to the time of descent is [g=W m/s2]

(A) 1 : 1 (B) # (C)


2
'3 (D) 1%
9. The engine of a motorcycle can produce a maximum acceleration 5 mls 2 , Its brakes can produce a
maximum retardation 10 m/s2 , What is the minimum time in which it can cover a distance of 1.5 km:
(A) 30 sec ' (B) 15 sec (C) 10 sec (D) 5 sec
10. The graph to the right is aplot of position versus time, For which labeled region is the velocity
positive and the acpeleration negative?

v
j ~

(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

11. A body initially at rest, starts moving along x-axis in such a way so that its acceleration vs displacement
plot is as shown in figure. The maximum velocity of particle is
fa
ImfslL.1
2~ .............
i'
. .
I •

! •. .0,S.! .;1......"1m.........'l(

.... :....•....
I

(A) Imls (B) 6 mls (C) 2 mls (D) none


'I'

12. Suppose a player hits several baseballs. Which baseball will be in the air for the longest time?:
(A) The one with the farthest range.
(B) The one which reaches maximum height.
~.,. i
(C) The one with the greatest initial velocity. ;;
(D) The one leaviT)'g the bat at 45° with respect to the ground. ~:
.g'\..

13~ A ball is hit by a batsman at an angle of 37° as shown in figure. The man standing at P should run at l i '

what minimum velocity s~ that he catches the ball before it strikes the ground. Assume that height of J. '/
man is neglig,ible in comparison to maximum height of projectile. J
:f
1

A
~ 3r
'p
IE
man
B.
JoI
~
1
i
g
c

9m· 10

(A) 3 mls (B) 5 mls (C) 9 mls (D) 12 mls


J
~
;.' ~
~
~,

8 e'T

Kinematics

14. A ball is thrown at an angle e up to the top of a cliff of height L,


from a point at a distance L from the base, as shown in figure.
Assuming that one of the following quantities is the initial speed L

required to make the ball hit right at the edge of the cliff, which
One is it:­ L

(A)
gL 1 I 'gL 1 I gL /gLtan9
2( tan 9-1) (B) cos9' 2(tan9-1) (C) cos9V2(tan9+1) (D) V2 (tan9+1)
\

15, A particle A is projected with speed VA from a point making an angle 60° with the hOrizontal. At the same
. instant, a second particle B isthrown vertically upward from a point directly below the maximum height
point of parabolic path of A with velocity 'lis' If the two particles collide then the ratio of ll/VB should
be ;­
2
(A) 1 (B) J3 (C)
.
J3
2
(D) v3
16. A projectile is fired with a velocity u making an angle 9 with the horizontal. What is the magnitude of
change in velocity when it is at the highest point?
(A) u cos 9 (a) u (C) u sin 9 (D) u cos 9 - u
:1
17. A light body is projected\vith a velocity (lol+20)+ 20k) ms- I • Wind blows along X-axis with an
acceleration of 2.5 ms-ziJf Y-axis is vertical then the speed of particle after 2 second will be
(g = 10 ms-2) • ' .

(A) 25 ms- l
. (B) 10$ ms- I
(C) 30 ms- 1
(D) None of these

18. ,An object moves to the East across a frictionless surface with constant speed. A person then applies
a constant force to the North on the object. What is the resulting path that the object takes?
,I
,(A) A straight line path partly Eastward, partly Northward i

'. '(B) A straight line path totally, to the North


.(C) A parabolic path opening toward the North
(D) A parabOlic path opening toward the East
::l
o.~·19 . A particle moves in the xy-plane and at time t is at the point (e, t3 - 2t), Then
...;
...­0 (A) At t == 213 s, directions of velocity and acceleration are perpendicular
~
r: (B) At t =0,. directions of velocity and acceleration are perpendicular
r
~E
•2
.~ (C) At t = .J2/3 s, particle is moving parallel to x-axis
" 1i
1ii (D) Acceleration of the particle when it is at point (4, 4) is 2i + liJ
" ~
-::
.~

e ...­.!
'"g
20. A particle mOves in the'x-y plane with a constant acceleration g in the negative y-direction. Its equation
of motion is y = ax-bx2, where a and b are constants. Which of the following
. is/are cOrrect?
~
,

( .:i (A) The x-component of its velocity is constant.


....
~
J!

~
0

'"...­....<;
f ....

...-.
(B) At the origin, the y-component of its velocity is a .
'..
~
J/ . ' , .

;:;;
...­.., (C) At the origin, its velocity makes an angle tan-I (a) with the x-axis .
l!l0 J
z CD) The particle moves exactly like a projectile. r:
Ii

E Ii

d
9 i
~

,;
JEE-Physics

21. A ball is thrown from the top of 36 m high tower with velocity
5 mls at an angle 37° above the horizontal as,shown. Its horizontal

J
37°
=
range on the ground is closest to [ g 10 mls2] .,.
(A) 12 m
(B) 1~ m
.
36m ··•
\
(C) 24 m ··••
(D) 30 m

'.......~~............."'..........

22. A stone is projeCted from point P on the inclined plane


\J/ith velocity Vo = 10 mls directed perpendicular to the
plane. The time taken by the stone to strike the horizontal "

e
grollnd S is (Given PO = = 10 meter) .
'"
'.\
\
(A) 1.5 sec, '.
(B) 1.4 sec
::~
dl\ 1nl\!'l'\ \t\1I1:1'i\ l\'mil1«:I'i\ !'l'I\ t\1\ :\'i\l \ 1l\iI \l\tI'\ m\ "\"ml\'"\ "'\ ~\ !~\ -\ -m-\ -\ S
(C) 2 sec
(D) 2.3 sec
23. Time taken by the projectile to reach from A to B is t.

~
Then'the distance AB is equal to B

ut (B) J3ut'
/.- "

i5 0
(A) J3
2 A~
"
(C) J3 ut (D) 2 ut

24. A particle P is projected from a point on the surface of smooth inclined piane (see figure). Simultaneously
another particle Q is released on the smooth inclined plane from the same position. P and Q collide after
t = 4 s. The speed of projection ofF is :­

(A) 5 mls (B) 10 mls (C) 15 mls (0) 20 mls ~


6
25. An elevator car (lift) is moving upward with uniform acceleration of2 m/s2 • At the instant, when its ~
velocity is 2 mls upwards a ball is thrown upward from its floor. The ball strikes back the floor 2 s after ~
its projection. Find the velocity of projection of the ball relative to the lift. " ( '.
(A) 10 mls t ' (B) 10 mls ,J, (C) 12 mls t (0) 12 mls,J, . j
~
26. ',A flag is mounted on a car moving due North with velocity of 20 kmIhr. Strong winds ate blowj~g ~

due East with velocity of 20 kmJhr. The flag will point in direction .
, . .
.
~
·l

(A) East (B) North-East (C) South-East (0) South-West ~


. '.$
'27. ' Wind is blowing in the north direction at speed of2 mls which causes the rain to fall at some angle with ~
the vertical. With what velocity should a cyclist drive so that the rain appears vertical to him : ~
(A) 2 mls south, (B) 2 mls north' (C) 4 mls west (0) 4 mls south j
~
~
2
10 E
Kinematics

2~.
I,
A motor boat is to reach at a point 30° upstream (w.r.t. normal) on other side of a river flowing with
ir velocity 5m/s. The angle 30° is measured from a direction perpendicular to river flow. Velocity of
I;, motorboat with respect to water is 5"3 mls. The driver should steer the boat at an angle
I 'J
(A) 120° with respect to stream_direction.
L
I,
(B) 30° with respect to the perpendicular to the bank.
!
(C) 30° with respect to the line of destination from starting point.
(D) None of these.

... 29. A flag is mounted on a car moving due North with velocity of 20 km/hr. Strong winds are blowing
due East with velocity of 20 km/hr. The flag will point in direction
(A) East (B) North-East (C) South-East CD) South-West
30! Three ships A, B & C are in motion. Ship A moves relative to B is with speed v towards North-East.
ShipB moves relative to Cwith speed v towards the North-West. Then relative toA, Cwill be moving
towards
(A) North ' , (B) South (C) East (D) West

31. A particle is thrown ,from a stationary platform with velocity v at an angle of 60° with the
horizontal. The range obtained is R . If the platform moves horizontally in the direction of target
with velocity v ,the range will increase to :

(A) , 3: ' (B) 5: (C) 2 R (D) 3 R

32. A boatman moves his boat with a velocity 'v' (relative to water) in river and finds to his surprise that'
!
velocity of river 'u' (with respect to ground) is more than 'v'. He has to reach a point directly opposite
to the starting point <i>O ~nothet bank by travelling minimum possible distance. Then . .i

(A) he must steer the boat (with velocity v) at certain angle with river flow so that he can reach the
opposite point on other bank directly. ,
(B) his velocity 'v' must be towards directly opposite point, So, that he can travel rest ofdistance by
walking on other bank to reach the directly opposite point.
(C) boatman should maintain velocity v of boat at certain angle greater than 90° with direction of river
,..--.
flow to minimize drifting and then walk rest of distance on other bank. ,
"
(D) boat velocity 'v' should be at an angle less than 90° with direction of river flow to minimize the
~
/

6.., drift and then walk to the point.


,
\, " 9g>
u,

r 1 FILL THE ANSWER HERE


E
" "
~
11 l·W~®J 2.l'~V~
~, . ,~.~~~A~ 3·~m 4.~
'ill
~~Em 6.~~1 7.~~ 8.~j
~ 5. 1\\ , '" ,,' .c,., ",'
r -:::
\.. j 9.~~~ 10·m~m 11·~®l 12.~
ftW~A
....
f

f
\..,"
I
,;:l
w
13.~~

17.~
;W~~
14·~\¢tA~A~

18.~
~~~~~~
15.[0~

19.~
16.~~

20.~

f
~ 21.~~
. ....... _. 22.[(A)lrmI.~ . 23.~.m 24.~
\.., '"~ ,., " ,

!.... 25.'~~~ 26.~.I<9.J 27·'I6'~m 28.. ~


u.
~
all 29·~m 30.5'~
~~~
'31.~
~~.A~ ,32.~' ~I
8z f·1
'-, J'~ '" \

E 11
li

L
lEE-Physics

EXERCISE (0-2)

~ parachutist jumps out of ~n airplane and accelerates with gravity for 6 seconds. He then pulls the
parachute cord and after a 4 s deceleration period, descends at 10 mls for 60 seconds, reaching the
, ,

,ground. From what height did the parachutist jump? Assume acceleration due to gravity to be
10 mls2 throughout the motion.
(A) 840 m ~20 m (C) 980 m (D) 1020 m
2./ A
train movingwith a speed of 60 kmlhr is slowed down uniformly to 30 kmlhr for repair purposes
7 during running. After this it was accelerated uniformly to reach to its original speed. If the distance
covered du.~ng constant retardation be 2 km anrlthat covered during constant acceleration be 1 km, find
the ti:me iost in the above journey ,
fil min . (B) 2 min (C) 4 min (D) 5 min

y/ , .
The motion of a body is gi ven by the equation
d (t)
~t ~ 6.0 -
.
3 v(t); where v (t) is the speed in

=
mls & t in sec., if the body was at rest at t 0 : ~~ [JEE '95, 2] , .
(A) the terminal speed is 2.0 mls '\J ~ ( ..... 34 "
(B) the magnitude of the initial acceleration is 6.0m/s2 I-- 1-\ \ - t )
(C) the speed varies with time as vet) = 2 (1-e· ) m i s '
31 '
(D) the speed is 1.0 mfs when the acceleration is half the initial value.
4. The position of a particle with time is gi ven by
-'~ l (x, y) = (8t2, 3) fort ~ tl
= (8t tp 3) for t > t,

i!
Choose the CORRECT alternative.

~(A) Particle moves along a straight line paranel to x axis.


::l.,.
;:;
/

11 .
"1L..
<>
--u,g>
I (D) --..,
0
~
I,
! , II I
..
--
~

J
(C) "k. II I
-t---:::
.
-..
..§
~
j ,
t

, ··h '-. :$.


./

,(D)~ ~
1- II I ~ i1 w (:,0
.. 1---~ ~'""'- C OW ~
5. A point moves in x-y plane according to the law x =4sin6t and y=4(1~os6t). The distance traversed ~
by the particle in 4 seconds is (x and yare in metres) ·1 ~
(A) 96 m 'CB) 48 m (C) 24 m~l08 m *
/ \ t<t-S ' \')"t (L'1 . S 3, ~ '-- , E
'0

,r ' ';
Kinematics

6. A particle moves in the x-y plane. It x and y coordinates vary with time t according to equations
x = t2 + 2t and y = 2t. Possible shape of path followed by the particle is
(A) Straight line (B) Circle
,I> (C) Parabola CD) More information is required to decide.
7. A particle is ejected,from the tube at A with a velocity v at an angle
:.

4t 8 with the vertical y:-axis.


;

, A strong horizontal wind gives the particle


.
a constant horizontal acceleration a in the x-directions. If the particle x
strikes the ground at a point directly under its released position and

the downward y-aceeleration is taken as g then
2
2V2 sin Seos S
a_
--
­ h
(A) h= 2v sin 8 cos 8
a
(B) h
g ­
--~\l"I"'Q
CC) h =-sm
g.
2
2v . 8 ( cos8+-'-sm
a. 8
. g
J CD) h=-sm
. a
2
2v . 8 ( cosS+-sm
g .8)
a
I"
Lo! .>'1'
, ~~
8. A particle is projected from a pointP (2 m, 0 m, 0 m) with a velocity 10 mls making an anglell-5° with
the horizontal. The plane of projectile motion passes through a horizontallinePQ which makes,an angle
of 37° with positive x-axis and xy plane is horizontal. The coordinates of the point where the particle
will strike the line PQ is (g = 10 m/s 2 )
~,(A) (10 m, 6 m, Om) (B) (8 m, 6 m, 0 m), (C) (10 m, 8 m, 0 m) CD) (6 m, 10 m, 0 m)

94:(On a particular day rain drops are falling vertically at a speed of


~y>5 m/s. A man holding a plastic board is running to escape from

! 11111 tllll!!11
rain as shown. The lower end of board is at a height half that of

man and the board makes 45° with horizontal. The maximum

I ~ v'"
speed of man so that his feet does not get wet, is

jA)5m/s (B) 5"'2 mls (C) 51"'2 mls (D) ~erQ. W

t31- -\l~' -..... ,

r
11 10. A 2 m wide truck is moving with a uniform speed of 8 mls along \) g~:"!t::::c~7~<_ __
dB
~;
X a straight horizontalroad. A pedestrian starts crossing the road at , ;:1. I
2 m!
~. an instant when the truck is 4 m away from him. The minimum
. 'j: constant velocity with which he should run to avoid an accident
~
li lS:­
. :;J

f
!{, L~
(A) 1.6...J5 mls

(B) 1.2"'5 mls (C) 1.2"'7 mls CD) 1.6"'7 mls


( ,~

~ 11. A chariot with an archer.is moving with a horizontal velocity VI =4) mls in a war field. An enemy
~
o
r = (121 +16)} m w.r.t. the archeJis running with a velocity Vi =(3i +4]) mls .
,
.~
$,1 soldier having positipn
~

~ Archer shoots an arrow with velocity V3 w.r.t. himself that hits the soldier in 2 seconds. Then '''3 is
~
( ~

\.
~ (consider arrow moves in straight line)
~
9
~,
1

(A) (3\ + SJ)m/s II (B) (9i + 16j)m/s is) (9\ + 12j)m/s CD) (31+Sj)m/s
~
,9.
E 13
\ •.:<
lEE-Physics

12. , ,A ~arge rectangular box moves vertically downward withan acceleration a. A toy gun fixed at A and
aimed towards C fires a particle P.
8 ",/(;'
0
~will hit Cif a=g , '
,"
"

(B)P will hit the roof BC, if a> g '" . /.1;/ ,'
(C) Pwill hit the wall CD if a < g
A D
(D) May be either (A), (B) or (C), depending on the speed of projection of P

B~"./A swimmer swims in still water at ~ speed = 5 km/hr~ He enters a 200 m wide river, having river flo\Y
~ = 4 kmlhr at point A and proceeds to swim at an angle of 127 withthe.river flow direction.
0
speed
Another point B is located directly across A on the other side. The swimmer lands on the other bank
=
at a point C, from which he walks the distance CB with a speed 3 km/hr. The total time in which he
reaches from A to B is
(A) 5 minutes ~B) 4 minutes (C) 3 minutes (D) None

14. A baU is thrown from ground such that it just crosses two poles of equal height kept 80 m apart.
The makimUIll height attained by the ball is 80 m ..When the ball passes the first pole, its velocity
!flakes 45 0 with horizontal. The correct alternatives is/are :- (g =10 mls 2
) ~
(A) Time interval between the two poles is 4 s.
(B) Height of the pole is 60 m.
(C) Range of the ball is 160 m.
(D) Angle of projection is tan- I (2) with horizontal.

~
A cubical box dimension L=5/4 metre starts moving

with an acceleration a = 0.5 m/s2 i from the state of ---...


,,' "
rest. At the same time, a stone is thrown from the· /' . ''\ 1­
/ " a

\
/
/
origin with velocity V= v Ii +V2 J-V3 k with respect /
""
/'
to earth. Acceleraii~n due ~o gravity g=10mls2(- h. ' I

/ ·... 0 l;)
The stone just touches the roof of box and finally falls ",/
6' Z ~
at the diagonally opposite point then: E'"
~o
3
'2
5 5
,
.
~ -
CA) VI = (B) v 2 = 5 (C) v3 = 4" (D) v3= 2' "
J
< ~ /" "

Paragraph for Question Nos. 16 to 18 j '- ~

In an air show a unique exercise was conducted. A large number of gliders [without engine] were ~
released in a strong horizontal wind that imparts a constant velocity of 5 Tnls to the gliders. Gliders are 'j
trav~lling in a straight line with a constant separation between each glider. One of the glidersis§
=
painted differently and is ref~rred as marker glider. At t 0, two airplanes were set to move in ~
opposite direactions, one along the wind and other opposite to the wind. Airplane ~ngines maintain a ~
constant speed of 10 m/s relative to. the wind ~
w
~
,.,
~
14 E
Kinematics
:l

fl'!

'nl ..

Wind
Marker Glider
'-~~ -~'~" ~,+~~ -.~~. -t'i~'
.... d=500m ....

(1) (2)
.
Planes started from marker glider. After 10 minutes of flying. both the aIrplanes were signalled by
marker glider to return and meet at its position. Ignore the length of airplane and gliders in calculation.

16. Mark the INCORRECT statement.

(A)Both the planes reach the marker glider simultaneously.

(B) Airplane (1) reaches earlier than other plane


(C) For an observer standing on ground, distance traveled by both the airplanes is same
(D) For an observer on marker glider, distance traveled by each airplanes is same

17. Time takes by airplane (1) to return to marker glider after getting signal.
(A) 10 minutes . (B) 15 minutes (C) 20 minutes CD) 25 minutes

18. Mark the correct statement

c" (A) Number of gliders crossed by airplane (1) is2~

(B) Airplane (1) has crossed more gHders than (2) in entiiejourney.
(C) Airplane (2) has crossed more gliders than (1) in entire journey..
. (D) Number of gliders crossed by airplane 2 is 48
19. Column I Column II
l
(
(A) Time for a boat to cross a river of width eby the shortest (P) Iv + iii
::l
.!t distance (v -velocity of boat with respect to water;
6

~
g, ii -velocity of water) f 1 t\

'u
,.:;
'j e
(B) Time for two particles moving with velocities v and ii CQ) Jv2 _u 2
~
il in opposite direCtions to meet each other.

~ (initial separation of particles is,e)' ~

r '1
"-
'0

;J e
"'If e
(C) Time for a boat to cross ~. river of width in the shortest
(R) Ivl + liil
( .!
!!.
time Cv-velocity of boat with respect to water;
III
;J Q ii -velocity of water) g e
~
""
;> (D) Time for a boat to travel a distancee downstream (S) Ivl
r '"
;;
\ N
(v -velocity of boat with respect to water; .
~ e
'-
"'"
;>

-:;; ii -velocity of water) ~\ ~ (T) J~2 +V2


~
0
z
'" .E 15
~
-~hysics
'Y\~'
:-- Trajectories are shown in figure for three kicked footballs. Initial vertical & horizontal velocity
components are uy and Ux respectively. Ignoring air resistance, choose the correct statement from
Column II for. the value of variable in ,Column 1.
Column I C o l u m n II
(A) time of flight (P) greatest for A only
(B) u/u x (Q) greatest for Conly
(C) U
X
(R) equal for A and B
(D) uxu y (S) equal for Band C

i: ~


::l...
N
6
..;
0
,,-

-:;
, FILL THE ANSWER HERE

J
l·l~ 2.~ 3. ~,~"'ii'i'l
!l.\QI~~J
''Ii.'lrt'i''i''''' 4.[~®J "]
....
~tI5'\~l
'"
-;:.
5• ~@J.~ 6.~ 7.~ 8. ~~?ti"ff"1
~~)~H~ ~
w~
~Ii:i\Ydi"\",\V~
9.~~ 10·~m 11.~ •
12. !rtA"'"%ll~I!'~~I)"i/
~~~jl
j
,;:;
."

~
13.~ 14.~ 15.~, 16.~[<!?l .• ~

w

17.[~~ 18.~~ 19. 20. ~


l!
::I
,,-
'"
(;
,,­N

~
,,­

*
0
;z;

E
16

r '\
\" ..;
Kinematics

EXERCISE (JM)

1. A car moving with a speed of 50 km/h, can be stopped by brakes after at least 6 m. If the same caris
moving at a speed of 100 km/h, the minimum ~topping distance is~ [AIEEE - 2003]

(1) 12 m (2) 18 m (3) 24 m (4)6m

2. ' A ball is released from the top of a tower of height h m. It takes T s to reach the ground. What is the
position of the ball in T/3 s ? [AIEEE - 2004] ,
(1) h/9 m from the ground (2) 7h/9 m from the ground
(3) 8h/9 m from the ground (4) 17hl18 m from the ground

3. An automobile travelling with ~ speed of 60 kmlh, can brake to stop within a distance of 20 m. If the
car is going twice as fast, Le., 120 km/h, the stopping distance will be- [AIEEE - 2004]
(
(1) 20 m (2) 40 m (3) 60 m (4) 80 m
. ' . ,

4. From a building two balls A and B are thrown such that A is thrown upwards and B downwards
(both vertically) with same speed. Ifv A and vB are their respective velocities on reaching the ground,
then- .

(l)vB > vA [AIEEE - 2002]

(2) vA = vB

(3) vA> vB

(4) Their velocities depend on their masses

~. 5.' A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5 ms- I , In 10 s the velocity changes to 5 ms- l
~'.

~.' northwards. The average acceleration in this time is- [AIEEE - 2005]
~'
1
l!l
-;; (1) .J2 ms-2towards north-east (2) 2'1 ms- 2 towards north

l 1

]"', (3) zero ~) .J2 ms-2 towards north-west

:i;'
~6.
~
=
The coordinates of a moving particle at any time t are given by x at3 and y' =pt3. The speed of the
~, particle at time t is given b y - [ A I E E E - 2003]
( !...
;; (1) 3tJa 2 + [32 J:2) 3t2 Ja 2 + [32 (3) t 2 Ja 2
+ [32 (4) Ja 2 +'~2
(
'-, ~
~
!'!
~
7. A particle located at x = 0 at time t = 0, starts moving along the positi ve x-direction with a velocity 'v'
that varies as v =a.rx . the displacement of the particle varies with time as
~ (1)t 2 (2)t (3)t1l2 (4)t3
[AIEEE - 2006]
~
/'

" § ii
i'
.~

E 17 i
, Ii:1
x. '

L
JEE-Physics

8. An object, moving with a speed of 6.25 mis, is decelerated at a rate given by


dv r
-d = -2.5...,v
t .
where v is the instantaneous speed. The time taken by the object, to come to rest, would
be :- [AIEEE • 2011]
(1) 4 s (2) 8 s (3) 1 s (4) 2 s

9. =
The velocity of a particle is v = Vo + gt + ft2. If its position is x 0 at t =0, then its displacement after
=
unit time (t 1) is- [AIEEE • 2007]
(1) Vo + 2g + 3f (2) Vo + g/2 + f/3 (3) Vo + g + f (4) Vo + g/2 + f

=
10. ~e relation between time t and distance x is t ax 2 + bx, where a and b are constants. The acceleration .
"r
\ .~'1A~~is- (,l,k . [AIEEE. 2005]
\,.' <\Ar o,\\o:J (1) - 2abv2 (2) 2bv3 (3)- 2av3 (4) 2av 2
'\j' ~<'r<\A~A. 0

,~. ~~~n. A parachutist after baiJing out falIs 50 m without friction. When parachute opens, it decelerates at 2
. m/s 2• He reaches the ground with a speed of 3m/s. At what height, did he bail out ?[AIEEE· 2005]
(l)91m (2) 182m (3)293m (4) 111m

12. A car, starting from rest, accelerates at the rate f through a distance S, :then continues at constant speed
for time t and then decelerates at the rate f/2 to. come to rest. If the total distance travelled is.15 S, then­
[AIEEE • 2005]
l' 1 . 1
(1) S = ft (2) S = 6"ft2 (3) S = 7~ ft2 (4) S = _ft2
4

=
13. A body is at rest at x=O. At t 0, it starts moving in the positive x-direction with a constant acceleration.
At the same instant another body passes through x = 0 moving in the positive x-direction with a
constant speed. The position of the first body is given by x1(t) after time 't'and that of the second
body by x2(t) after the same time interval. Which ofthe foHowing grl,lphs correctly describes (x 1- x 2)
as a function oftime 't'? [AlEEE-. 2008]

(xt . (xt /
(1)]~'
~
(X1-X2)
..

IJ! lJ, (3)~t (4)t~'


'?i
~
!!i
'"f
~

14. A lift is moving downwards with acceleration a. A man in the lift drops a ball inside the lift. The]
acceleration of the ball as observed by the man in the lift and a man standing stationary on the ground ~ (
are respectively- [AIEEE· 2002] ~~'
(I) g, g (2) g -a, g - a (3) g - a; g ( 4 ) a, g to
.~
.:>.
w

15. A particle has an initial velocity of 3i +4J and an acceleration of 0.41 + 0.3}. Its speed after lOs is:- ~
. [AIEEE • 2009J ~
(1) 7 units' (2) 8.5 units (3) 10 units (4) 7.J2' units . ~
!!I

j
18 :. ,E
i ~;~

f
Kinematics

16. A boy playing on the roof of a 10 m high building throws a ball with a speed of 10 mls at an angle of
30° with the horizontal. How far from the throwing point will the ball be at the height of
10 m from the g r o u n d ? ' [AIEEE - 2003]
[g =10 m/s2, sin30° =1/2, cos 30° = .J3/2]
(1) 5.20 m (2) 4.33 m (3) 2.60 m (4) 8.66 m

17. A ball is thrown from 'a point with a speed Vo at an angle of projection e. From the same point and at
the s~me instant, a person starts running with a constant speed v~ to catch the ball. Will the person be
,,}~,,(~~,
able to catch the ball? If yes, what should be the angle of projection? [AIEEE - 2004]
(1) Yes, 60° (2) Yes, 30° (3) No (4) Yes, 45°

18. A water fountain on the ground sprinkles' water all around it. If the speed of water coming out of the
fountain is v, the total area around the fountain that gets wet is :- [A IEEE - 2011]
tev
4 y2 v2 y4
(1) 2' g2 (2) _Tt g2 (3) Tt-g (4) tegr

19. A projectile is given an initial velocity of (i + 2]) mIs, where i is along the ground and] is along
1,.,1

the vertical. If g =1d inls2, the equation of its trajectory is : [AIEEE - 2013]
(1) y = x - 5x 2 (2) Y =2x - 5x 2 (3) 4y = 2x - 5x 2 (4) 4y =2x - 25x 2

20. A projectile can have the same range R for two angles of projection. Ift1 and t2 be the times of flights
in the two cases, then the product of the two times of flights is proportional to- [AIEEE - 2005]
1 1
(1) R2 (2) R2 (3) R (4)R

iQ.

21. ,A particle is moving with velocity ~ =K(y j + x] ), where K is a constant. J:'he general equation for
r ~ its path is : [AIEEE - 2010]
'-" -;;,

,,-
.~ =
(1) y2 x 2 + constant (2) y =x2 + constant (3) y2 =x + constant (4) xy =constant
, .~
I
,.,
f 22.,
'1i
A ball whose kinetic energy is E, is projected at an angle of 45° to the horizontal. The kinetic energy
0(
.~
of the ball at the highest point of its flight will be- [AIEEE - 2002)
)
:g (1) E (2) EI J2 (3) E/2 (4) zer~
6
.~
S
w

~o 23. A particle is projected at 60° to the horizontal with a kinetic energy K. The kinetic energy at the
Yo
;;; highest point is- [AIEEE - 2007)
~
, -- (2) zero
~ (1) K (3) Kl4 (4) Kl2
~
~
E in
~
JEE-Physics

24. A particle of mass m is at rest at the origin at time t = O. It is subjected to a force F(t) = Foe-bl in the
x direction. Its speed vCt) is depicted by which of the following curves? [AIEEE - 2012]

t~ t ---+- t~ !~

25. A projectile is given an initial velocity of (1 + 2J) mis, where I is along the ground and J is along
=
the vertical. Jig 10 m/s2, the equation of its trajectory is : [JEE~Mains'2013] .
(1) y == x - 5x 2 . (2) y = 2x 7"" 5x 2 (3) 4y = 2x - 5x 2 (4) 4y = 2x - 25x 2

26. From a tower of height H, a particl~ is thrown vertically upwards with a speed u. The time taken by
the partiCle, to hit the ground,is n times that taken by it to reach the highest point of its ,path. The
relation between H, u and n is : [JEE·Mains 2014]
= 2 =
(1) 2g H nu (n - 2) (2) g H Cn - 2)u 2 (3) 2g H n u 2=2 =
(4) g H Cn - 2)2U~

.11!I.. ; i

~7
.
~.'.

.~
.n,
~
Jl
-::'
~....
E
~
~

}
~
f,
\._/
j
g ,
.
L~
;;
~--~
i
",.~J

?
,.
t..._~

!1i
~

'';' t,.
7.

w r,
IAU.EMf"
~/y'
1
'\ '" \~v'""'",

~.~ .,..'" ~~~~~


"'-" //
. \
'\ '")
~< fu~

'V K'mematies

" "'>. y,\/

"" s,.'<' )<; '\


EXERCISE (JA)
if
1. A small block slides without friction down an inclined plane s.tarting from rest. Let Sn be the distance

travelled from time t =n-l to t =" n. Then SS" 11+1


is [IIT-JEE' 2004 (Scr)]

21'/.-1 2n+l 2n-l 2n


(A)~ (B) 2n-l (C) 2~+1 CD) 2n+l
2; A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (A) versus time (t) is as shown in the figure. The maximum
"speed of the particle 'YUl be
"
[lIT-JEE' 2004 (Scr)]

(A) 110 mls (B) 55 mI~


10

01/5
2

II
t(s)

(C) 550 mls (D) 660 mls


3. The velocity displacement graph of a particle moving along a straight line is shown. The most suitable
acceleration-displacement graph will be [IIT-JEE' 2005 (Scr)]

v
V.I·...
" ......
' ......
~~4 ..~
'.'.
' 1" "x
/ "
t,_

~
~.

iT
...•. "
~ ..........
x

'-
(

(~

,,~
~,
'~"
~
,~
~
.~
(A) ........,.
'. x (B)
/'

...../

f.=
,/
1
~ ~

f"" ·
~-"-
~
~ x
i
(-ll
"---,:!. ]
(e) ~.""""
x
(D) ....................

1' t
c~ 4. "~ A train is moving along a straight line with a constant acceleration 'a'. A boy standing in the train
Il:l :>.
{ "? '"
'-~~
l~ throws a ball forward with a speed of 10 mis, at an angle of 60° to the horizontal. The boy has to
;;:; !~ move forward by 1.15 m inside the train to catch the ball back at the initial height. The accelenition of
..,
:< 3 ~
'- J! ,- the train, in m/s2, is '..\~ ':.r ((;.6S . [IIT-JEE 2011]
~ ~
"~
'"'
" ~v
r:;
'-·w
o '" -- ~ CO (' '6' (:,')
o
8;: \~",\\.\') ~
'.f.
"7-

--- ' \./ "

E 21

L
JEE-Physics

5. On a frictionless horizontal surface, assumed to be the x-y plane, a small trolley A is mo.ving along a
straight line parallel to the y-axis (see figure) with a constant velocity of (.fj - I) m/s. At a p~rticular
instant; when the line OA makes an angle of 45° with the x-axis, a ball is thrown along the surface from
the origin O. Its velocity makes an angle ~ with the x~axis and it hits the trolley.
yt

I"
I"
A~A
I"
I"
I"
I"
/

0
k' ,j45° •x

(a) The motion of the ball is observed from the frame of trolley. Calculate the angle e made by the
velocity vector of the ball with the x-axis in this frame. ~ SIJ

(b) Pind the speed of the ball with respect to the surface, if ~ = .~e . [JEE 2002]

6. A large heavy box is sliding without friction down a smooth plane


of inclination e. From a point P on the bottom of the box, a particle
is projected inside the box. The initial speed of the particle with
respect to box'is u and the direction of projection makes an angle
ex with the bottom as shown in figure. [JEE].
(i) Find the distance along.the bottom of the box between the point of projection P and the point Q where
the particle lands. (Assume that the particle does not hit any other surface'of the box. Neglect air
resistance),
(ii) If the horizontal displacement of the particle as seen by an observer on the ground is zero, find the speed
of the box with respect to the ground at the instant when the particle was projected.

::l~.
~
04 /'
~ ,

.,;
o
~-

1~
~

1
~
-;:.
. t;
...:,
.f!
.~
1fie.
~ .
~

!''" ('.
~ /

<0
o .('
, 'Ie ...,
,~
--
:;.1
'"
~ .
n EL
::1:
j ~.l

, :; ~ 'i Kinematics

.d,',>. '\~f~~';-'~';" ·j:,H~:;~&:://ANSWER.· KEy;?t~~;.;~;,~z~~:J;~i~,/2,i;;2·i~t~~1;:7:Liia~1~;~~~f~~~::H~.~;l:{;t~:~:~:~·t;:

1.1 .~ 1 : 1 ­ vel

Because particle is slowing down so velocity & acceleration are in opposite direction.
2.260 in 3. 18.5 m 4. Zero
5. 2 sec. after body is dropped 6. 42km/hr
7. (a) 4 m/s 2, (b) 200, (c) 1000 m 8.3
9.3 10. (a) 3 m; (b) -3 m/s2; (c) 1m/s; (d) 312 mls
A A) 2
11. (27i+2k mls 12.(a)27m/s,(b)108m,(c)-100m,(d)316m

13. 186.25 N 14.5 15. (i) 1.6 sec (ii) 3.2 m (iii) 9.6 m
16. 20./5 m/s' 17. (i) l()Omls (ii)9S0 ~ (iii) 1600m (iv) (SOl -140J)

=50( J3 -1) mis, H =2.5(-./3- 1) m


/-,

18. u 19. (i)7 s, (ii) 175 m


(' 20. 10 m/s 21.4 22. 3 23.6
" 24. 200 m, 20 m/min, 12 m/min 25. tan-I 26.37°

1. (a) Mm I sec (b) ~-5 sec (c) 3


r;:;:: sec (d) -
v60

·4
m
2. 80 mlsec
(

"X{2 +4 ()2
\.

3. (i) t = 9 + 15 - x (ii) 3 km from the camp.


t . 5
~
r' , .. 4. (0 2 s (ii) 10 mls (iii) 16.25 m (iv) 20 m

!
o
5. e= 37°, v 6 mls
=
f •

1 .u ~ . 6 (I)
2
sin2a .."ucos(a+l1)
(II) V = ---'---'--'­
.~
Yo
• g cos e cos e
( . 1 7. B, tA = 165 s, tn = 150 s
\1 ~
~ L -____________________~--------------------~--------------------~

(. J
II 1
(" \ .j
/
li0.
.
~
~, ;;::
U
,,",f
i ., P­

/~ :l l
~~ I p'.
o
'-u.?, 9
~
(

"1 8z
(I;
",,"
~ '~

(
JEE-Physics

5. (n)

9. (A) 10 (I» 11. (A) 12. (B) ­


13. (B) 14. (B) 15.(B) 16. «;)
17.(A) 18. «;) 19.(A, B, (;, I» 20. (A, B, (;, I»
21. (A) 22. «;) 23. (A) 24. (B)
25. (C) 26. «;) 27. (B) 28.«;)
29. «;) 30. (B) 31. (I» 32. «;)

f~ ~.

,
1. (ll) 2. (A) 3.- (A,B,(;,I» 4. (A,I»
5. (A) 6. «;) 7. (I» 8. (A)
9. (A) 10. (A) 11. «;) 12. (A)
13. (B) - ~4. (A, ll,(;,I» 15. (A,B,(;) 16. (B)
17. (A) 18. (A)
19. (A) ~(P,Q); (B) ~(R); «;) -+(8); (I» ~(P,R)
20.

..i'l
~

wi
9 r-·
lJ'
1. E
~

j"
~
~
.~
j
~
1
f
;5"'
~
- '"
;;;
2
u sin2a ucos(a+8) ~
4. 5 5. (a) 45°, (b) 2 mlsec 6 (i) (ii) v = ­
. gcos8 cosB j
~
~.
-0
z

24 e

~'

E
JEE {MAIN +ADVANCED) 2014
CAREER '51!
KOTA' (RAJAslfiAN)'
III
nuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 01 DISCUSSION DATE ,: 03/04/2013


- PHYSICS
:;'1-,

l.(j The figure below shows the forces that three charged particles exert on each other. Which of the four '
situations shown can be correct. ' ,

'! v ,/\ ;\
(I) -fI (II) (Ill) -/4 \- (IV) L ~
~ 7 \
,(A) all of the above (B) none of the above (9Jfr, ill (D) II, III & IV
2. Star 51 emits maximum radiation of wavelength 420 nm and the star S2 emits maximum radiation of
wavelength 560 nm, what is the ratio of the temperature of S, and S2 ?, '
, !!4'4/3' ,(B) (4/3)114 (C) 3/4 (D) (3/4)lfl
3. . According to kinetic theory of gases,
(A) The velocity of moleGules decreases for each collision
(B) The pressure exerted by a diatomic gas is proportional to the mean velocity of the molecule.
(C) The KE.'of the gas decreases on expansion at constant temperature.
' ¢ h e mean transl~tional K.B. of a'diatomic gas increases with increase in absolute temperature.
A.monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T" is enclosed in a cylinder fitted-with a frictionless
piston~ The gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a temperature T2 by releasing the piston suddenly.
JfL, and L2 are th~ lengths of the gas column before and after expansion respectively, then T/T2 is
gi ven by " " ,
i.' tL y/3 (L, ') ( L2 ') (L ')213 ,
(fj.),
'" ",L ')
I, -+:1 ., (B) 1-)
\L., ,
," " (C)
, L1
l--) JldJI,\~
--1.) ,
.. ':: 2, .' ,..::: ... .; ': :~;. ", ) . . ' .
Th.e totalkinetic energy of lransl~t9ry mQ.tion of all the molecules of 5 litres of nitrogen exerting a
i.,,;~ure P is 3000 J. '" i,,' , ' J

" '

(A) Tlie total KE.bf 10 litres of Nz at a pressure of 2P is 3000 J


(B)The,total K.E.of 10 litres of He at a pressure of 2Pis 3000 J
~he totalKE. of 10 litres of 02 at a pressure of 2P is 20000 J
~he totalKE. of io litres of Ne at a pressure of 2P is 12000 J
. .o.gt!cal engineering firm needs to ensure that the separation between two mirrors is unaffected by
temperature changes. The mirrors are attached to the ends of two bars of different materials that are
~ogether at one end as shown in figure. The surfaces of the bars in contact are lubricated. The·
Rdoes not change with temperature change. R1 and R2 are the length of the bars a. t and ~ are
respective thermal coefficients of temperature. Which of the following options is/ate correct: .
.,:'
mirrors
.

f--£.~j

k ..R.. ,.

;i~bricating ' .. E··~ii~ :~,


I. R.: '
I
'I

n:n .e? = R0. 1 , (0<'" /) - '" /) r'!"I\ N /) -,'" /)


RACE
.....-
. JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED, 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
-'-­ ,(­.
Regular Analysis through Conllnuous t:xerel58 PHASE: I

7. Four rods A, B, e, D of same length and material but of different radii r;~ r..fi, r-fj and2rrespectively :­
are held between two rigid walls. The temperature of all rods is increased by same amount. If the rods do
not bend, then
(A) the stress in the rods are in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 : 4.
,fff) the force on the rods exerted by the wall are in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 : 4.

;arThe energy stored in the rods due to elasticity are in the ratio 1 : 2 : :; : 4..

(D) the strains produced in the rods are in the ratio 1 : 2: 3 : 4.


8.· An ice cube of mass 0.1 kg at ooe is placed in an isolated container which is at 227°e. The specific heat
S of the container varies with absolute temperature T according the empirical relations A + BT, where =
A =100 cal/kg.K andB == 2x 1~2 callkg-I{2, If the final temperature of the containeris 27°e, determine
the mass of the container, (Latent heat of fusion for water =8 x 104 callkg. Specific heat of water = 103
callkg·K) O'~
9. A 5m long cylindrical steel wire of radius 2 x 1~3 m is suspended vertically from a rigid support and
carries a bob of mass· 100 kg at the other end. If the bob gets snapped, .calculate the change in temperature
of the wire ignoring radiation losses. )Fpr the steel wire: Yo.ung's modulus = 2.1 x 1011 Pa;
. Density =7860 kg/m3; Specific heat = 420 JJkg-K) .. ()" 00 J..(";f!i3 G· . . . . . . .

r.
" ' ,-I.

10. At 20 0 e a liquid is filled upto Wcm height in a containerofghtss oflength 20 cm


.and c~ss~ sectional area 100 cm2 .Scale is marked on the.surface ofcontainer. This
scale gives correct reading at 20 oe; Find the volume of liquid (incc), actual height E ••••
8 :::§§§E§§
t I
--~~

of liquid (in cm) and reading of scale (in cm)at 40~e C\ll'~::=::E::::::
:§::E§§::::§ I
10em
I .

(Given 'YL =5 x 10":'; K-I, a g = \Olri(!) .••••----•• 't .

~~:~~~~~2
I.
1 x w-SOe-I.)
\ 0" 006 'el"'),
I <0 pC) 0 l-f cJ"")
~,
.
i
':..

'-': .

__ J

i:
I

, ..'

1.~ 3. r40.C'mJ . 4.~

:5.~
7·am~
'R I 10. I '­

it:
ACE
C' JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
'_J

r-.
l
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
',KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

RACE # 02 DISCUSSION DATE: 05/04/2013 PHYSICS


C ';:

1. 1
An electric charge Q = lO-loC is placed at the point (1,2, 3) cm. The electric field intensity due to it

C:
at the point (2,3,4) cm will be :
C (A) 3000 N/C along z-axis (B) 2000 N/C along x-axis
#3000 N/C at an angle 45° to each axis (D) None
2. A point charge -3q is positioned at point (2, -1, 3) of a Cartesian coordinate system. A test point
charge 2q is placed at point (3, 0, 4). Which of the following is the unit vector in the direction of
tl1C force acting on, the test charge? All the coordinates are in meters.

(A) i + J+k ' (B) -(1 + J+k) ,;e(U + J+k)jJ3 (D) -U+J+k)jJ3
c:
I

3. A closed vessel contains a mixture of two .diatomic gases A and B. Molar maSS of A is 16 times' that
C J o f B and mass of gas A contained in the vessel is 2 times that of B. The following statements are given
(0 Average kinetic energy per molecule of A is equal to that of B.
(ii) Root mean square value of translational velocity of B is four times that of A.
(iii) Pressure exerted by B is eight times of that exerted by A.

;t
~f
, (iv) Number of molecules of B in the cylinder is eight time that of A.

(A) only (i), (U) and (iii) are true .JB1Only (ii), (iii) and (iv) are true
(C) only (0, (ii) and (iv) are true (D) All are true

~,I
4. Select the incorrect statement about ideal gas.
(A) Molecules of a gas are in incessant random motion colliding against one another and with the walls
of the container.

~ .JB1f'he gas is not isotropic and the constant (1/3) in equation P =(1I3)p v~s is result ofthis property
iC) T~~me during whichacollision lasts is negligible compared to the time of free path between collisions.
5) ~~flere is no force of interaction between molecules among themselves or between molecules and.
the wall except during collision.
(,
5. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas expands from volume
j VI to V 2 in three different ways, the WQt~ dorie by the gas, WI. if the process pt
, is purely isothermal, W2 if purely isobaric and W3 if purely adiabatic, then:- I
" kKJ W2 > WI >W3 (B)W~ > W3 > WI
:~C) WI > W 2 > W3 (D) WI > W3 > W2 o v, v,
6. .P-V plots for two gases during adiabatic processes are s~ Jwn

in the figure. Plots 1 and 2 should correspond respectively to

1
~;
(A) He and 02

) (B) 02 and He
(C) He and Ar
l CD) 02 and N2
v

)
'c.."

,/
il
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

thrOIl9~$§ ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

7. In a given process on an ideal gas, dW =0 and dQ < O. then for the gas
(A) the temperature will decrease. (B) the volume will increase
(C) the pressure will remain constant (D) the t~mperaturewill increase
8. A container holds 1026 moleculeslm3 , each of mass 3 x 10-27 kg. Assume that 1/6 of the molecules move
with v~locity 2000;mls directly towards one wall of the container while the remaining 5/6 of the molecules
move either away from the wall or in perpendicular direction, and all collisions of the molecules with
the wall are elastic
(A) Number of molecules hitting 1 m2 of the wall every second is 3.33 x 1028 •
(B) Number of molecules hitting 1 m 2 of the wall every second is 2 x 1029 •
(C) Pressure exerted on the wall by molecules. is 24 x 105Pa.
(D) Pressure exerted on the wall by molecules is 4 x 105Pa.
9. Two moles of an ideal monatomic gas is taken through a cycle ABCA as shown in p

the P-T diagram. During the process AB, pressure and temperature of the gas vary
2PII '( ..
such that PT = constant. If T 1 = 300 K, calculate:
(A) the work done on the gas in the process AB and
~I I 'IA
(B) the heat absorbed or released by the gas in each of the processes. TI 2TI

Give answers in terms of the gas constant R.


10. A monoatomic ideal gas of two moles is taken through a cyclic process starting

~ ~
from A as shown in the figure. The vollJme ratio are V=2 and ;
A A
=4. If the
v

::I~:.I;t.
­-
temperature T A at A is 27°C. Calculate:
(i) The temperature of the gas at point B.
(ii) Heat absorbed or rel~~sed by the gas in each process. VA ....... . i
~.,#' JA ~

,-­
(iii) The total work dcme by the gas during the complete cycle. o· fA ~;
B

Express your answer in terms of the gas constant R.


""

,-
­
-
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
l.~ 3.~ 4.~
mtoteDl 7.~ aDEm
~-
5. 8.

9. I . )
I
-
"'j
f, ,
CAREER ....."'......
-KOTA':(RAJASTHAN)'
AC
'Regular Analysis through Continuous
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED} 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 03 DATE : 08/04/2013 PHYSICS

1. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A ~ B ~ C ~ A, as shown in the figure. If the net heat supplied
to the gas in the cycle is 5J. the work done by the gas in the process C ~ A is [JEE(Scr)2002]
v(m3)f~

:c;L
10 P(N/m2)

JA)-5J (B) -10 J (C) -15 J (D) -20 J


2. Which of the following graphs correctly represents the variation of P =-(dV/dP)N with P for an ideal
gas at constant temperature? [JEE (Scr)2002]

. (A) J~P (B) PD.P tcP (C) (D)p~ , p

3. In the figure AC represent Adiabatic process. The corresponding PV graph is [JEE (Scr) 2003]

"1:4T

Pi A(\ , PtsL
A B

~c.v P[~.v
,<A):~v • ,,(B) ~v (C) PI (D)

4~" A point charge Q is placed at origin. Let EA, Ell and Ec be the electric field at three points A (l,0,1),
B(-l,~,l) and.C(~,l,-l) due to charge Q. Then
~EA .L EB c:~~~~dj''~'P{IEBI = IEel (C) EB /I Ee , ~E
/",JJ J, A =-4E
' B

5•.;, .. If a body is charged by rubbing it with another body then its weight :­
," A4 may in'crease slightly ~ay decrease slightly
(C) must increase slightly %~emains precisely constant
Two point charges (Q each) are placed at (0, y) and (0, -y). A point charge q of the same polarity can
move along X-axis. Then:
~the force on q is maximum at x ± y l.fi=
jB)the charge q is in equilibrium at the origin
(C) the charge q performs an oscillatory motion about the origin
~or any position of q other then origin th~ force is di:ected away :rom origin .
Two blocks of mass m and 2 m are slowly Just placed In contact wIth each other Qn a rough fIxed
inclined plane as shown. Initially both the blocks are at rest on inclined plane. The coefficients of
friction between the blocks and inclIned surface are shown. There is no friction between the blocks.
Column I gives four situation~: Cblumn II gives conditions under which statements in column I are true.
Match the statement in column I with corresponding conditions in column II. . '

~2
'1-12

r~~'
"

/ ~,

A <. .frif'/) (/1'0'':'':':;'1'''\


JEE (MAIN + ADVANCEDl2014

RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerolse


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

Column I ~ Column II
(A) The magnitude of acceleration of both blocks are same, if J.t l = J.t2 > tanS
(B) The nonnal reaction between both the blocks is zero, if ~ J.t l > J.t2 > tane
(C) The net reaction exerted ~y i~cli~ed surface o~ each S"7. J.t! < J.t2 < tane
block make same angle With InclIned surface, If ~'V'~' e J.t l = J.t2 < tane
(D) The net reaction exerted by inclined surface on block ~Q, t:...) J.t l < tane; J.tz> tanB
of mass 2 m is double that of net reaction exerted by .,.­
inclined surface on block of mass m, if
8. Two charged particles (+0.4 J.tC) and (- 0.4 J.tC ) are placed in a unifonn electtic field of strength 900 N/C.
After the particles are released, they stay at rest. What is this distance between them in meters? d
9. A side view of a simplified fonn of vertical latch B is as shown. The

lower member A can be pushed forward in its horizontal channel. The

sides of the c~annels are smooth, but at the interfaces of A and B,

which are at 45° with the horizontal, there exists a static coefficient of

friction J.t = 0.4. What is the minimum force F (in N) that must be

applied horizontally,~, toit A to start motion of the latch B if it has a mass

=
m 0.6 kg ?} 'i.,; :1 '.~
10. A cubical box of side 1 meter contains helium gas (atomic weight 4) at a pressure of100 N/m2 • During'
an observation time of 1 second, an atom travelling with the root mean square speed parallel to one of :
the edges of the cube, was found to make 500 hits with a particular wall, without any collision with
=
other atoms. Take R 25/3 J/mol-K and k,~ 1.38 X 10-23 JIK. [JEE'2002]
(a) Evaluate the temperature of the gas \ {:: '; .... ,,).\S .'
(b) Evaluate the average kinetic energy per atom ...-; # 3)( \0 '
(c) Evaluate the total mass of helium gas in the box. D",2.'t'''''
RELEVANT QUESTIONS FROM (HCV)
Chapter 29 (Electric Field & Potential)
Questions for short answers : ALL
Objective-1 : ALL
Objective-2 : ALL
Excercise: 1,5,6, 7,8,12,14,15,17,20,22,23,25,27,28,31,32,33,35,39,42,43, 44 and from 48 to 75
Chapter 30 (Gauss's Law)
Questions for short answers : ALL
i
Objective-1 : ALL
Objective-2 : ALL
.'
"~ "

Excercise:ALL

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1.~ 2.~ 3.~ IFIt\VIi.l"\~~~
4.~~~
S ~~
~ . 6.~~ 7•

Sl 'I J 9. [ 10. I J
RAe E
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUTE , "ENJHUSIAST COURSE
KQTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular AnalysIs through Continuous Exercise, . " 'PHASE: I

RACE # 04 DATE: 10/04/2013 PHYSICS

1. Two long thin rods having charge density AoX and -AoX as shown Pt
(where x is the distanc~ from their respective centres C1 and Cz ) . C1 Jr
- - - - - - -et++ i±+++++++++
are placed close and parallel to each other in such a way that distance +++++++++++;+C
2
between their centres is a. Find out the electric field intensity at a -..
a

point P distant rfrom this system. ( k = 4:eJ

kAoa
(A) data insufficient (B) kAoa
,r
(C) --z;­ (D) 2kAoa
r

·~:::~::~:::t~. . .
2. Consider a finite charged rod. Electric field at Point P (shown) makes an

angle 0 with horizontal dotted line then angle 0 is :­ ~.,.

(A) 60°
,.//"'"
(B) 28° . , ~
.....~....
(C) 44° l.l

(D) information insufficient


4 A point charge 25 JlC is located in the XY plane at the point of position vector fo = (i + ]) m . What is

the magnitude of electric field at the point of position vector Ii =(4i + S]) m ?
(C) 90~
kV
ut1900~ jff) .9 m (D) can't be determined,
m m
4. An equilateral triangle wire frame of side L having 3 point charges at its vertices is kept in x-y plane as
shown. Component of electric field due to the configuration in z direction at (0,0, L) is [origin is
centroid of triangle]
(
9/3 kq
'I (A) 8 r: (B) zero
('
x

J 9 kq
(C) 8 r:' (D) None
:1 Paragraph for Question 5 to 7
'I
(
A block of mass m slides on an inclined plane of suffic.it1nt larg~
size with a slope of 5/1i'6:e': the slope of the hypotenuse ofa S:12:13
) triangle). A massless rope, guidedbJ'8. massless pulley, connects
5
I g

l
f
the block to a second block of mass m/13, which is hanging freely
above a lower table.
12 t
I" If. The two block system is observed to be moying with a constant
(r i j! ' velocity vo' What is the coefficient of sliding friction Jl between J: J

~~c~/;nd plane?
,f

' (B) 1/4 Cft> 112 ' (D) liS 1111\\\\\\ ml\\
l, 6.
I(t\(

After the hanging block hits the table, what is the distance s along the surface of the plane which the top
1
f'
block continues to slide before stopping? (Assume that the plane is long enough that the block does not
fall off), .
f
1
';,.,
fA\ 1t::: .. 2IA,... (~~" 2/?(1 (C) 13vft2/3g (D) lSvn2/2g'
, i' ~

c
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exen:ls8
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

7. What will be the acceleration of blocks as a function oflengthx(<L and hanging from pulley towards
lower block) of uniform string (mass of string in this case is m and total length of string is ~).
(No friction between strin~ incline)
(A) (5L+9x)gl27L }.SJ (5L+8x)gl27L . (C) (SL+3x)g/27L (D) Independent ofx ,
y. A block of mass 1 kg is placed on a rough horizontal surface of coefficient friction J.I. = 0.2. A force is
. applied on the block horizontally whose variation with time is shown in the figure. Match column I with
columnU.
F(N)

8t····..·....···..·····/.

c[ik8J--.F I
1~=O.2
2B
13··.....--·..,
o 12'
j
8

~n .. t(s)

Columnl Column II
(A) Velocity of particle is zero at ,) f.)lii:6 /T (P) t = 1 s
(B) Acceleration of particle is non-zero at .. (Q" {(J5
(Q) t=4s
(C) Friction force =1 N - 1';;11'.) -<o).LS.l 30-i tj(R) t=20s -.,1""
(D) Friction force :s.; F --) ($ P'- . (S) t=25 s
(T) t 30 s =
9. A long container has air enclosed inside at room temperature and atmospheric pressure (lOS pa). Ithas a
, volume of 20,000 cc. The area of cross section is 100 cm2 and force constant of spring is
kspring =1000N/m. We push the right piston isothermally and slowly till it reaches the original position of
the left piston which is movable. What is the final length of air column in cm. Assume that spring is
' initially
relaxed. p'st
1 0 nIP'
- IS ton­ 2

~oO

,.
;0. A thermometer has a spherical bulb ofvolume 1cm having 1cm of mercury. Along cylindrical
3 3 ,

capillary tube is conn~ted to spherical bulb~ Volumetric coefficient of expansion of mercury is ;' ,
1.8 x 10-4 K-l; cross-section area of capillary is 1.8 x 10-4 cm2• Ignoring expansion of glass, how

far apart (in cm) ~n the stem are marks indicating 1K temperature change. ~ \ tf'l-

I'
. '-"
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
1.~... .l 2.·~ 3.mmllcm ~~
4.~ '-"

,5. r1ImEXD1 6. lfAImEZtm 7. 14• •cap"


8. (~~}:: ~ :tOJ r~A{~J{~ 'L 9." 10. 1 . . . . 1_ _ _ ---l ,
',,-./
"

~
J -..NPJ ::'f';J

ALLEM',
CAREER'INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (MAIN +ADVANCED) 2014
ENTHUSIASt COURSE

RACE # 05 DATE : 12/04/2013 PHYSICS

Question No.1 to 2 (2 questions)


The dot in figure represents the ~:qHial state of a gas. An adiabatic divides the p-V diagram into regions
1 and 2 as shown. "i'
r- ),#
i' ,
A?--~


il

tit~
1
1~ v
"
1. For which of the fo1l6wing processes, the corresponding heat supplied to the system Q is positive
(A) the gas moves up along the adiabatic~.".. (B) it moves down along the adiabatic, '
(C) it moves to anywhere in region 1,. 'fr»it-moves to anywher~ in regioQ 2. , /
'r-

2.,
,- '
,- As the gas mo~es-down along the adiabatic, the temperature I
, '
".

- - , (A) increases , .fBJdecreases " , :


\f '(f r~~~rtnaiMBonstah~ " "" . - ~variation depends on type of gas.
3~, t~9j.wnn I~h:0ws'ce~tnthertnodynamlc systems and column II represents thermodynamIc propertIes.
!-
.

Column' I Column II
(A) \Anideal gas i.s fil:ed in a therma,By I '(P) ~n:emal e,~er~ ofthe gas
t, rnsulated cylmdncal vessel of ' IS mcreasmg.
height h which is enclosed by a ­
massless therma.Ily insulating ._ , f'!''f'j~~'f4~-~fi''i'i
~~~~~",~~~~f@

piston. Mercury is filled above ,/' f> gas


the piston as ,- shown. Now gas
is ~owJY supplj~2._heat.
I. Mercury does not spill.
(B) A thermally insulated cylindrical (Q) Pressure ofthe gas is
vessel is enclosed by a light piston. increasing. ' ­
The piston is connected to ceiling
gas
by an ideal spring as-shown in figure.
(' .
Spring is initially relaxed and then
heat is supplied slowly to the ideal
-gas in the vessel. The system is kept
P
in open atmosphere. ". ~ s,'1
(C) A thermally insulated cylindrical (R) Temperature of the gas
'- vessel is enclosed by a light thermally is decreasing,
insulated piston: Some sand is kept on
(
,. gas
top of piston as shown in figure. The
system is kept in open atmosphere.
. Now sand grains are removed slowly o.t'boh't.
(_.,. - one by one! -? Rs _
7(r5)f A good conduct~ng cylindrical ves~el . - (S) Work done by gas is­
GJ is enclosed by a ligh~ thermally., positive.
insulated piston. Some sand is kept
on top of piston assh'own in-figure. gas (T) The process is neither
"
The system is kept in open atmosphere. , isobaric, isochoric, '
Now sand grains are added slo.wly one isothermic or.. adiabatic.
. , ..
,- .
{ .,

('
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED)2!114

IJA~E ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

Figure shows an ideal gas. Its pressure, volume & temperature are Po, V0& To respectively. Thin V-tube
contains mercury. It was observed that there was a difference of40 em in the level of mercury column
-"'" in, two limbs. Now the gas is heated to temperature 1.5 To and simultaneously mercury was added in
./--" limb B to maintain the level ofmercury in limb A at its original position. Find the new difference in the
in
level of mercury limb A & B (in em). [Take: Palm = 76 c~~ ! \

~:'.

.~.• t : :..

B
'~. '" .

5. A metal block is placed in a room which is at 10°C for long time. Now it is heated by an electricpeater
ofpower 500 Wtill its temperature becomes SO°C.1ts initial ~ate ofrise oftemperature i's 2.S°C/seC. The
,heater is switched
" ....
off and now a heater of 1OOW is required to maintain the temperature ofthe block
' ' ( .. ..at ,

SO°C. The heat radiated per second when the block was 30 Qis ,giyeIl; as a. watt. Find the value of
0

,'"
(laO)·.(AssumeNewtonsLawofcoolin~to.beValid)
.
;<5. I
~ ~
PrJ .1hR W)cafx;.tJlJI,
tMS, ~..lOJ5
1 .,- -,

6. Find the efficiency of a cycle consisting oftwo isochoric and two adiabatic'1ine, if the volume of the
ideal gas change~ n = 10 times within the cycle. The working substance is nitrogen. 6 0 ' (Gl
. " ./"-' ,

\, ./

~ 1;

I '

,.\. ,
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
1. G.pEg 2.~ 3. ~~H.}J 'f\<;i);;~~lJ~X~:
~, .. ,.~_ .. _."._~, _ _' _ " " ' m _ _

4. J Is.' , . ' I 6. ,--I_ _---'


I'
i
..
('

RACE

JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014


ALLE.
I CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHAS~: I

RACE # 06 DATE: 15/04/2013 PHYSICS

Paragraph for question nos. 1 to 3

By varying the voltage applied to the kettle,, you can change power
..-,0___
consumption
(r .
P. Depending
. .
on the
P, ;kettle with water can be heated to different maxiinum temperatures. This dependence is shownin
. ' . r . •

Table-l:
Power P (in Watt) o 100 200 300
Temperature T(in °C) 20 40 60 80
Table-2 shows the variation of the temperature with time when the kettle of power 300W is switched
. ­
. off. The heat capacity of the empty kettle Co = 100 J/K, specific heat of water Sw = 4200 J/kg . K. The
density of water p =1000 kg/m3.
Table-2 :
Time t (in sec) o 60 300 600 1200 2400
Temperature T (in °C) 80 75 60 45 30 20.
1. If the power consumption is 400W
,~

(A) The water will cOIn£)tb the b,oiling point and start boiling /

~e water will reach bOiling point but will not boil

(C) The water will not reach boiling point but start boiling
(D) The water will neither reach boiling point nor strut boiling. . /

2. The rate of heat loss at t =600 sec after the heater is switched off (as in table-2 ) is.
(A) 100 W fl3li25 W
(C) 150 W (D) 200 W

3. How many litres of water is present in the kettle?


(A) 1 litre (B) 0.629litre

(C) 0.415 litre ~0.769litre


,0---- An astronomer observed with his telescope two stars, A and B. Star A has a spectral peak at 3500
~, r. . Aand star:a has a spectral peak at 7000 A. If they appear equally bright (emitting equal energy per
i unit time) what is the ratio of radius of the star B to that of A. " 1.f
;;5- A rod of negligible heat capacity has length 40 cm, area of cross-section 1.0 cm2 and thennal cond\lctivity
!
100 W/m~oC. The temperature of one end is maintained at O°C and that of the other end is slbwly and
linearly varied from O°C to 60°C in 10 minutes. Assuming no loss of heat through the sides, find the total .
'- ... .- ..... • • ;-. T\. -_ )(lJll.1:'
,f
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2~14

RACE
.Regular Analysis through Continuous Exen:lse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
, PHASE: I

6.. A tank of water is placed in the open in cold weather until·a 5.0 em thick slab of ice forms Qn its
su,rface. The air above the ice is at -10°C. Calculate the rate offormation of ice in centimeters per
hour on the bottom surface ofthe slab. Take thermal conductivity, density and heat offusion ofice
to be 0.0040 cal/cmoC, 0.92 g/cc and 80 cal/g respectively. Assume that no heat enters or leaves the
water through the walls of the tank.
/!) .2> g.,JW IN-\
Air
Ice~ IIIIIIIIIIIIII~
ter

7. A ·small sphere (emissivity = 0.9, radius = r1) is located at the centre of a spherical asbestos shell
. (thickness =5.0 cm,outer radius =r2). Th~ thickness ofthe shell is small compared to th~ inner and outer
radii ofthe sheIL The temperatw'e ofthe sm8J.i sphere is 800 K, while the temperature ofthe inner surface of

the ~hell is 600 K. The temperature.of small sphere is maintained constant. Assuming that r2 = 10.0 and
. rl

ignoring any air inside the shell, find the temperature (in K) ofthe outer surface ofthe shell.
. ~~
. 17 GI!lH

Take: Kasbcstos = 0.085W/moC, 0'=""3 x 1O-8W/m2k4 E

,.
~, ir

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1. ~ :1:' ~ 3. D~.~
4. '1 I 5·1 16. a . . - I_ _ _ _ ----I

7. [
RACE

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
~CE # 08 /?- DATE: 19/04/2013 PHYSICS
it. A small sphere of mass m =0.5 kg carrying a positive charge q =100jJ.C is connected with a light,
flexible and inextensible string of length e= lOcm and whirled in a vertical circle. If a vertically
=
upward electric field of strength E 105NC-' exists in the space, calculate minimum velocity of
sphere requited at highest point so that it may just complete the circle (g = 10ms-2 ).
'~ XIS j5ms- 1 (B) Ims- I (C) 0.5ms- 1 (D) .j7ms- 1
2. Two elastic rods are joined between fixed supports as shown in the figure. a ,.A ,.)', 1J."A"y.
'-

"
Condition for no change in the lengths of individual rods with the increase 7L, .I
\"
=
of temperature (a. I , a.2 linear expansion co-efficient AI' A2 = cross-section

=
area of rods Yl' Y2 Young modulus) , 1:1' ' 1" L,

L2 a 2Y2 rr:x("AI 'a2Y2


Al
(A) A2=
alYI
-;:;:;y;
'AI
(B) A2
LIalYI
= L2a2Y2
Al
(C) A2 =:' LI alYI r I A2 =, alYl

......2. From the field pattern shown in figure, identify the correct statement related to the ch~ges Q l and Q2:­
1 .­
1
(A) Q = +2.5
Q2 '
(B) ci 1
2
= +2

/,.,.
~:=-2 CD) There is no relation exist between Q1 & Q2

Paragraph for Question No.4 to 6


r'
Multi-layer insulation" or MLI, is thermal insulation composed of mUltiple layers of thin sheets often
used on spacecraft. It is one of the main items of the spacecraft thermal design, primarily intended
• "'=?
to "':;t,

reduce heat loss by thermal radiation. In its basic form, it does not appreciably insulate '8. ainst,ot er
\",/ th~tmallosses such as heat
---- ~,
conducti~n or convection. It is there ore commonly used on sateilites ~nd .
other applications in vacuum where conduction and convection are much less significant aI1:d radiation
dominates. MLI gives many satellites and other space probes the appearance of being covered with gold
fOIl.
The principle behind MLI is radiation balance. To see why it works,. start with a concrete example ­
<"'-. -.

imagine a square meter of a surface in outer space, at 300 K, with an emiss~vity of I, facing away from
the sun or other heat sources. From the Stefan-Boltzmann law, this surface will radiate 460 watts'; Now
'1 imagine we place a thin (but-opaque) layer 1 cm away from the plate, thermally insulated from it, and

,~T
;1
I
also with an emissivity of 1. This new' layer will cool until it is radiating 230 watts from each side, at
,
which point everything is in balance. The new layer receives 4~0 waits from the original plate. 230 watts
')' :
,
~ is radiated back to the ,original plate, and 230 watts to space. The original surface still radiates,460 watts,
I

) but gets 230 back from the new layers, fo!, a net loss of 230 watts. So overall, the radiation losses have
been reduced by half by adding the additional layer.
~f
( , Mor~erscan be added to reduce th0ss further:. The blanket can be further improved by maI?n g

1 theoutside,surfaces highly reflective to thermal radiation, which reduces both absorption and emisslOn.
)

./ ".
The performance of a layer stack can be quantified in terms of its overall heat transfer coefficient U,

which defines the radiative heat flow rate Q between two parallel surfaces witha temperature difference
l,
"-.,'
L1T and area A as

,{
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

.' .
"RACE

Regular ,Analysis Ihfougl! ConUnuous Exercise,


. .
, ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

Theoretically, the heat transfer coefficient between two layers with emissi vities Eland Ez ,under vacuum,
'is

1
(~+-.!.--11.
3
"U=4crT
El Ez

where T is the mean of the temperatures (in K) of the two layers and cr =5.7 X 10-8 Wm-2K-4 is the
Stefan-Boltzmann Constant. If each layer has the same emissivity E on both sides, then a stack of N
layers placed between two higl1-emissivity surfaces will have an overall heat transfer coefficient

1
U=4crr' [NH-IFl]
Clearly, increasing the number of layers and decreasing the emissivity, lower the heat transfer coefficient,
which is equivalerit to a higher insulation value. In this equation, it is assumed that the temperature
.
'difference is small compared to the absolute temperature.
,

/4. ,' Main pllrpose of multilayer insulation is insulation against heat transfer, where heat transfer is mainly
'duelo :­
., ' (A) Conduction' (B) Conduction & radiation
(C) Conduction & convection , ARadiation
:£ In space there is MLI consisting of 50 layers. Each layer has emissivity (E = 0.2) both sides & outer
, mo~t .temp~rature is ,~50~. and inner most tem~erature is 100 K less than outer most then find over all .. '

, he~ansfer coefficIent (m Wm·2Ic-l) :- VJ ' e


~r633 ,.. .', ,'%'f6.33xlO-2 , (C) 12.66 'x 10-3 (D) 6.33 X 10-3 ,

;6., ,For a Particular plate heat transfer due to conduction and radiation are equal. Thickness of a plate is 2mm,
, ' , , 1
mean temperature is 1000 K and emissivity of, inner and outer surface are 1 & 2 respectively. Then

fin~onductivity of plate material (in SI):- {V /tJlT ~ ~rJ· .. .


YJ 0.228' . (B) 11 (C) 1.11 (D) Data IS msufficlent
,/l. Iron has a specific heatihatis'about four times that of gold. A cube of gold and a cube of iron, both
of equal mass andat 20°C, are placed in two different Styrofoam cups, each filled with 100 g of water
at 40°(;. The Styrofoarricupshave negligible h~at capacities. After eqUilibrium has been attained i-:,
(A) The temperature of the gold is.xower than that of the iron. ~ 1; t . ~\tltv\ ~~ t'.J!IfLi
~he temperature ofthe gold ~s ~igher than thatof the iron , ~~J- ~) '/V',.f,Y'V li:'fI'"
(C) The temperatures ~f the water m the two c.u~s are the same. ; ' ; : . ~D\ . \(,l~''r'
(D) (A) or (B) dependmg on how much mass IS mvolved ~ .,,,1 •., ~
p.£~
......
',,-;

FILL THE ANSWER HERE "

~.i~ 2. naZS3P1 3. ~m
m=:.#M:\IW r~
4. DIUltSIDJ

,. "
r

ALLE. R 'A'" "",.""""., ,~~i!Htisjitjlr)1f~~ .


r\
','; ,::.. .<, -~
·',"'0"""":""',"';;;&:':
;'.~:
'" "-."",~,,, :'lfi,,,,,,,Q,:.. ':."',
.f.'!:'.,i:'" :;.i:;;');'

CAREER INSTITUTE .\" , . ~". ',"


,- "

KOlA (RAJASTHAN) RegularAnalysls, through Contl"uousEx~rcl~e ,pij4SE:1


RACE # 09 DATE : 22/04/2013 ,',p,HYSICS
."
1. For the arrangement shown below, the two point charges are in equilibrium. The infinite win~ is fix.ed
. ,'..------"
in the horizontal plane and the two point charges are placed one above and the otl1efbelow thewire.
Considering the gravitational effect of the earth, then nature of qland q2 can be:­
, xI
q!tl'
I,
,,~
1
....... ,,'

(A) q. --; +ve, q2 --; +ve fl ! ' \.;


~ •
AfS) qt --; +ve, q2 --; - ve
+1
''f I: fixed··..•
(~q --; _ ve, q --; - ve ,~2 Jt.1 oo.charged
~). I I 2 :tq! I wIre
(D) ql --;, - ve, q2 --; + ve ,T~,;,,\
2. The figure shows, two point charges q, =2Q (>0) and q2 = -Q. The ch~rges dividethe lin"e joining
them in three parts I, il and ill. . '\ ,"J, ",
I ~'IlI
, ..
~..... .,., ...............

~egion llIhasa local maxima of elein" field . (


+2Q -Q p;... o

. .

. (B) Region I has a local minima of electric field ,

(C) Equilibrium position for a test charge lies in !egio~il" ., ........ :..;~-., ..: '" ,', .

~The equilibrium for constrained motion along the line joining the.charge&i~s.table· for anegati ve
test charge
3. Consider a regular cube with positive point charge +Q in all comers except for one which has a negative
pojpt cha];ge -Q. ~et the distance froI1l any comer'to.the center of the cube be r. What is the magnitude
~- ;J: , , ", " " ," '
of-electric field at' point P, the center of the cube? " ' " " , ',j ,'
,,'
. . , ., .' ,. . I " I .­

(A) E =0 ", ' . ,


. ',' . 'I

(B) E=l kQ/r2 ! p

je{E=2kQ/r2 ,~-------..--­
(D) E=6kQlrl /
, , 'lip
Paragraph for Question 4 to' 6
A cube has side of length L =0.3 m. nis placet! willI oM"col11er,at origin as shown in figure. The electric
, I

field is not unifonnbut is given by E=(-5NC-1 )xl+(3NC-1 )zk

z 52 [fop)
56 (Back) ,.\ I' 1

51 5 3 (Rlght Side),
I 'I !. ,!
)r I 7 ~y
y j.

4. Which of the surfaces have ~:tq ~ux.3 o~: '., ,"


")

.:
D (A) S2' S4 and Ss ~1~,~3'iS4 ~bdi"S6r (0) SI ,S2 anal'S3 (L)~2,B~ and S4
~,1L~ T~ux passing throug.nh ~t,~h surface Ss be T 'will
~ ~0.135 N~m2C-l~._'0;054:N~~2C-1 (C) 0.81 N-+m Col 2 (D) 0.0.54 N-m2 C'.I
6. The total electnc charge InSIde the cube IS ;­
"'-" ('\ J"\('\'t 1'""'1 {("'!\ () 1 ~"c: r . (J)) 0.054 EnG '
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis \llrough Continuous exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

If T denotes the te~perature of the gas, the voluine thennal coefficien~of expansion of an ideal gas at
7.
',constanrpressure IS,
,_/~ 1
#,T. .,vs) T (C) T2 (D) T2

, TwO bodies ofequar mass are heated at the same unifonn rate under identical condi tions. Their temperatures
" " ..'" shown in the following figure.

I T I I
100
_ I
1 11 I B 1 1­
'- ,I I/T T

~ 1 ~
80

cr , / I //

J: '-
1/
/
I
' I
I'
1
I
A T......----<

L.......··'·,

.~.'. I ~ll
~~1
F
/
20 1

.1- I I
T II 1 1I," 1 l
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Time (5)

i'1~~"O·
, (a) What are their melting points? p. ,\ Pi 0
~
,.~t

4Q~~3j~'~~~~~~~1>~~
(b) What is the ratio 'of their latent heats? ,...
(c) What is-their ratio of specific heats? Is it samein solid and liquid states. 1\10
i .• \J~

~'ct ,~'. 1

v'vA\~ ,., ). ti

~)
1J

rV<"J­ 11 R.T·
PdV'l-- f) ~J\.

't.AT
~7 @ v
~
clr
­ 'I
"~I t/f, 'i- &:/ y;z:' ~
,- '\ ~ !,
.~ i

FILL THE ANSWER HERE>" ; ',. . ' i , . '"

11.~~
I::; l'P'.r'IIWlI~I~91
2.~!~
h ~
3.~·
7 If~~.~
4.~
R ~~
j""

\ ,
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ALLE.
CAREER INSTITUTE
,ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
RACE # 10 ,~ DATE: 24/04/2013 ,PHYSICS
1. In a region where electric field is such that it reverses its direction in every to seconds, but its magnitude
• >, remains constant (Eo)' Then for a charge q, having mass m, and initially at rest, the INCORRECT rep­
resentation of graph will be :­

,'"
a v
II :--.
a .:
o

JA)-ao ~B)

"

\':.W'
X ' It
9H ,x
(J.J"I •~i"!i.~'
'w J~F(i'
fI.....
(C) ~·r •

~ !

2.; i A cavity is made in the sphere as shown. A Gaussian surface is choosen as shown. Which of the fol­
lowing statement is true?

f~'

"'r
~r
! (A) qenc1ose d = 0, hence electric field in cavity is zero

(J. (B)
.
qencIosed =0, hence fE.dA 'E·fdA
)" 1q
~)- qencose =0, hence fE.dA ;: : °
",
I d

) CD) None of the above

\,
} Paragraph for Question No.3 to 5
\ ' A charged particle is suspended at the centre of two thin concentric spherical charged shells, made of
It non conducting material. Figure A shows cross section of the arrangement. Figure B gives the net flux
)', ~ through a Gaussian sphere centered on the particle, as a function of the radius r of the sphere.
'" '

l
'i",'
(I ·dj
charged
p~rtlcle-+-+-I A

]"
(

), ~. Whl'lt iR th~ (Ohl'lrl!e on the central oarticle ?

(
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
RAC,E
Re"ular Analysis through Continuous, E'xerclSe
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
P-}lASE : I I
4. Whnt is the charge ()n"spyll A ? I

(A) 5.31 x lO~C jB) -5.31 x~Q-6C (C) -3;54 x lO-6C (D) -1.77 X lO-6C
5. In which range of the values of r is the electric field zero? I

(A) 0 to r A (B) r A to rB , I

, (C) for r > rB }B1 for no range of r, electric field is zero.


6. A container (water equivalent of container is negligible) contains 50 gm of water at OOC. IfH amount I

of heat is' extracted per second from water and keeping the spray closed, then whole water freezes in I,

lO sec. If spray is also working and sprays the water with 2 gm/sec at OOC, then water freezes in tl second
keeping the rate of extraction of heat from water same. Then calculate 6tl"~ot~ f..~.
(Latent heat capacity of ice = 80 caUgm) V
spra~.~~/sec
f '\" .

I.

7. _,.pind the acceleration of the three masses A, Band C shown in figure. Friction coefficient between all
surfaces is 0.5. Pulleys are smooth. . fi>;,/". "
-;;>
i', , oi"(
r, '" ')!

alt '?- ·ft3·


Am EE')':.-r ~.,
frlJX05~~
...,i
' '
J1 .
(
l'

7
1 " ' . ",/

"fb ~!o J~ j.
Gtc.. ').e O. ;to

----~'.' ..
- , '>(. ".A.. .,-'~~ ~<}..\ ? (]

1 0- 'l,-. 2.l'Cl \

'2.. ~
o v

;1

~I

~I

~I

FILL THE ANSWER HERE j


1::= ImmmKWI
2.'~

6. I .1
3.

7. I
;1
~.

[
~
ALLE"
C~REER INSTITUTE I. i.
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise


JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 11 DISCUSSION DATE: 26/04/2013 PHYSICS

1. Which of the following statements are true?

1-~Ole in the wall of a cavity radiator behaves like a black body.

(B) Hole in the wall of a cavity radiator does not act like a black body.
(C) When a body is kept in a surrounding of low temperature it does not absorb any energy from the
surroundings.
'When a body is kept in surrounding of low temperature it simultaneously radiates heat to the
surroundings and absorbs heat from the surroundings. .
2. The volume charge density as a function of distance X from one face inside a unit cube is varying as
shown in the figure. The total flux (in S.l. units) through the cube if (Po 8.85 x 10-12 C/m 3) is =
density (in em))

)--1
1\,
:.
~I

,.~

tf.£~/ ~~ ~
r .i,. _~.' \ n(inm) ~t, 0
",.,.

.~<

(A) 1/4 (B) 112 ;e0/4 (D) 1 ii·


3. A large insulating thick sheet of thickness 2d carnes a uniform charge per unit volume p. A particle of
~,¢:;~':..' ,', ,

I maSS'1li, can'ying a charge q having a sign opposite to that of the sheet, is released from the surface of
(r the sheet. The sheet does not offer any mechanicaL resistance to the motion of the particle. Find the
r
\. "
oscillation frequency y of the -p;rti~i~ i~~ide th~ sh~t. .". ..
)
"-

( I '-~
Y--. 1J!P
-
- 21t mso (B')
1
y = 21t ms
Pqp ~
~=- 1~P--
41t mso~. (D) Y=
1~
1tV~
'-..
.
o
(I 4. Two particles of the same mass carry charges +3Q and -2Q respectively. They are shot into a region
I (
that contains auniform electric field one after the other as shown. The particle have the same initial velocities
in the positive x directi.on. The lines, numbered 1 through 4, indicate possible path for the particles. If
(I : ,I ~!. i

the electric field points in the negative y direction, what will be the resulting paths for these particles?

- {
~. Lx e
1
~
f
'-.
(A) path 1 for +3Q and path 3 for ~2Q
. ~,1'~ A ~_.. ""
(B) path 3 for +3Q and path 3 for -2Q
rrx9_"..... A f:" .. ...l..?on o:.nn nMh 1. for -20
(
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

S. 4
If E.dS':::::0 over a sUIface, then,

(A) tile electric field inside the SUlface and on it is zero.


~ electric field inside the surface is necessarily uniform.
Jefthe number of flux lines entering the surface must be equal to the number of flux lines leaving it.
?all charges,must necessarily be outside the surface.:, ,
6. A uniform surface charge of density 2Eo in SI unit is distributed over x, y plane. W~.&onsider spherical
. , 4.sr- 0 Q,1.~"\ ~ 'U
guasslan surface of radlUs 5m, and center at'(a, b, c) then :- "'l..,1t" {)V ~

;xJIf (a, b, c) = (2, 0, 0) ; ~ = 50 n Nm2/C (B) If (a, b, c) := (0, 4, 0) ; ~ = 30 n Nm2/C


;e(If (a, b, c) =(0, 2, 6); ~ =0 Nm2/C ,jJiifIf (a, b, c) (4, 3, 0) ; ~ 50 nNm2/C = =
{7. In a coordinates system (gravity free) shown in ~gure a +ve charge q (mass m) enters at a point
=
A(O, a) with velocity v at t O. Due to uniformel~tric field in 1st quadrant of system it leaves the region
at B with the same speed v and at time t. Find the magnitude and direction of electric field in space in
vector form. If EF is reversed find the coordinates of particle at time t if again it enters in field at A at
=
t 0 with the same velocity as before C'
C)L
mv
.~
I!- ....

.~ .- fY) '\I
y <t.
.....
'-q,;
A ,v 1
m,q'
a
O. B
, )X
I

v I


I

"

,··i. '..J

"-',
r

[1.:::,'
5.~
4.~
"
(1
RACE
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED},201'4
( ENTHUSIASTCOURS'E
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
(

r
\,
RACE # 12
, ,
DISCUSSION DATE: 29104/2<l13'
.. PHYSICS

1., ' The field of an electricf,ield is a cosine function in xy-plane shown in the
( diagram, then the representation of electric field can be :
( (A) B(x,y) =i +sin(x)]' jB1 B(x,y) =i -cos(x)]
, (C) B(x,y) =i -sin(x)] (D) B(x,y) =i+cos(x)]
2., Consider finite wire having a uniform charge distribution over its length. It is symmetrically enclosed
. by coaxial cylindrical Gaussian surface as. shown in figure. We ap.ply Gauss's law to find electric field
(

(
. ,.and for that purpose, we wish to evaluate 4B.ds ; Which of the following is inc~rrect statement for our
inability to evaluate the integral. ,
/
\

1
'\"

c r
(A) The flux will be due to the components of electric field normal to the wire only.
,kB'rElectric field is varying in magnitude over the surface '
(C) The angle between electric field and area vector is not constant at all the points on the gaussian surface
(
(D) The flux through the circular faces will be non zero
3. A nonconducting sphere of radius R is filled with uniform volume charge density -po The center of this
s'phere is displaced from the origin by d. The electric field E at any point P'having.positibn vector, i
/- .
, iriside the sphere is
" ~:.
p d P (- ­
/~i
fD/'i
(A) 3Eo 3Eo r":"d)

; p ­
(C) .L(d-i) (D), -3-Cd + i)
3Eo .. Eo
4. A charge +Q is located somewhere inside a vertical cone such that the depth ofthe charge from the free
. 3Q
surface of the cone is H. It is found that the flux associated with the cone with the curved surface is 5f: .
. 0
If the charge is raised vertically through a height 2H, then the flux through the curved surface is
\ ..
3Q
(A) 5E
o
/

'," 2Q
/
\.. (B)'5E '
o

4Q

. (C) 5 Eo '

l" ~Zero
e"..
_ JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

E
exercise -
-ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: 1-­

5. ':Elect~c'Pb.terttHd at'apoint P,rdistance away due to a point charge q at point A is V. If twice of this
charge is distributed .
" ' . ,
uniformly
,..
on the-surface of a hollow
' .
sphere of .radius 4r with centre at point A,
the potential at P now is
(A) V (B) VI2 (C) V/4 (D) V/8
6. A ri_ngof r~dius R is having two charges q and 2q distributed on its two half parts. The electric potential
at a point on its axis at a distance 2..fi R from its centre is

-3kq kq _kq kq
(A)-R - (B) 3R (C) R (D) J3R
7. Figure shows three situati6n~ involving a plane that is not frictionless and a block sliding along the plane.
. r . " <, • • • ,~,~~.~H' . . . ,'_,~,

The block begins with the same speed in all three si~uations and slides until the kinetic frictional force
has stopped it. Rank the situations according to the increase in thennal energy due to the sliding (neglecting
losses to surrounding), in order taking the greatest ftrst.

~.
~
~
(i) (ii) (iii)
(AHii)~ (i), (iii) (B) (iii), (i), (ii) (C) (Ii), (iii), (i) (D) (iii), (ii), (i)
8•. ' - 'T~o identical point charges are held on a smooth horizontal floor at a distance d apart by a nonconducting
- stri~gwith te~si6nT;if a_third identical point <;:harge is ftxed vertically above at a-distance of d from
, bbth -the point charges then what will be the 'new tension in the string.

jMT --- (B)-2T (C)'3T/2 (D) None of these

~ ;. r

"\

"

l~·!!~
_ __
2. rAWlnmD IP:\)~
4.~:III!IIoIS

,. &i$I .!!iI~~ o~

~' '\
f~'

KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
R ,~\·n·c···
·'14'"
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
E JEE (Main+'Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 013 ~~ DISCUSSION DATE': 01/05/2013 PHYSICS

Efficiency of a Camot ~ngine


'The Carnot cycle inakesan engine. The p.V diagram helow sketches the operation of a Carnot engine,
where the "working fluid" that expands and contracts within the cylinder is an ideal gas.
p . .

\
\a

,

C·····TL
o " V
Here the high temperature TH and the low temperatu!e TL are temperatures as measured on an ideal gas
thermometer.
/"
One cycle of the Carnot engine acts as follows: .
" Leg 1, : Isothermal expansion at high temperature. As the gas expands, it lifts a big pile of sand, that
is, it does work IWII. We've seen that expansionnomially sends the temperature doWn. To keep the same
temperature, the gas must absorb heat IQII from its 'sUrroundings.
( • Leg 2: Adiabatic expansion. As the gas expands, it lifts a big pile of sand that is, it does work IW21.
" to
The expansion sends the temperature down. Because it's adiabatic, no heat is absorbed or ejected.
. Leg 3 : Isothermal compression at low temperature. As the gas contracts, it lets down a small pile of
sand that is, work IW31 is done on the gas. We've seen that compression normally sends the temperature
up. To keep the same temperature, the gas must eject heat IQ21into its surroundings.
• Leg 4 : Adiabatic compression. As the gas contracts, it lets down a small pile ofsand that is, work IW41
. is done on the gas. The compression sends the temperature up. Because it's adiabatic, no heat is absorbed
or ejected. IQI . " IWI
-f'+ expand t
I I
---.-...;~~- ..... -.- ... --~ , .....

IW.I IWJ

" IQ,14 \"' 'v"'pV'«'W'V,'!" IW,I


(
\..' Ovel'a.1l 9 the gas absorbs some heat and ejects some heat. The gas does some work and some work is
done on it. The net work done by the gas is the work done by the gas minus the work done on the gas.
W'c're interested in getting as large a net work as possible for a given amount of heat absorbed. That
is, we're interested in getting a large efficiency.' .
net work done of gas 1WI 1+ IW2 I-I W3 I-I W4 1
f
Efficiency of one cycle = heat absorbed by gas = QI
" It has been proved using second law ofthermodymimics that efficiency ofCarnot cycle is maximum.
1. From the paragraph what is the e:fficiency ofa Carnot cycle in terms oftemperature ofthe two isothermal '
";' :.. .t.:; .. .
~
process..
T.-L Ti, ,£ ,. ,.
(
R 'A"'C'E'
, ',; ",;, " ",,'

Regular Ana/ylIla til_II" Coni nuou


, " .', ,
.lEE (Mall + Amnced) 2014
ENTH.USIAST COU~E
PHASE: I

,2. ,A carnot cycle is working betwern a source te~perature ofTH= 750 K &TL=300 K and,heat supplied
~~ ~cycle is 800 J. Find work done"in the cycle. ' / _ 7,
1Ji1' 480 J (B) 500 J ' (C) 320 J ' {D)-800 J "
3. If we want to achieve the ~ of cycle to be, 1 then which of condition will satisfy the condition:
(A) TH = 5000,K, TL = 100 K' {B)T~ = 500 K, TL =,50 K
(C) TH = lOOK, TL = 50 K ~Noneoftliese '
4. The two ends of a rubber string of negligible mass and having unstretched length 24 cm are fixed at
the same height as shown. A small object is attached to the'string in its midpoint, thus the depression
(h) ofthe object in equilibrium is 5 em. Then the small object isc~gedandvertical electric field (E 1)
is ~pplied. The equilibrium depression ofthe object increases to 9. c;,m"then the electric field is changed
to E2 and the dep~ssion ofobject in equilibrium increases to 16 cm. 'What is the ratio of electric field
in the second case to that of in the first c~e (EiB;) N(Assume Hooke's law is valid)
kA14.25
(B) 4.20
(C) 4.30
(0) 4.35
'
' "
'
' ;
,
",
,"
',
I( 24 em.)

, ' , '
v'l l' ,
h'
!
i
5. In the following arrangement string 1S light and inextensible. '
All surfaces are smooth. Treating':
a =accelemtiolIl of wedge A
b =. acceleratnon ilJlf Iblook B with resp:t:a to wedge A .~
T = tension in the string
N =normai re~tio\1i on·Mook B appUe& by·wedge A
4a
(A)­
g
--P/~ . (P) j.Jj

8T cS)
(8) mg . {Q)}J3
aN {L (R)·l
. (C) mg

3b 53
(D)­ {S)J
a
6. The following diagram shows the electric field lines'between two opposite charges. The posi~ive charge
.. is indicated by the black circle the negative charge by the whit~circle. AneHectron starting from rest
9

at the indicated'position (X)~ alh"lldl fi~nemoo to high speed by the electric field 9 will Most closely tbll,low
'.. .
which trajectory? .

(A) '¢::_w_.-~ (B)~ (D)~~",~

1.=:! 2.
1
~,~
. FILL THE ANSWER HERE .
=~~~3.
6. ~lI:elIm1
.:!,.,4.lAklatlll1ll.. CDcolcaaj ,:,
1;\
I'

(
"R"
." ,"
", , _ .. ~..;,. ""
A,C"'~',LE'
·'t~~ :,.'j . I ..
~ .. ~ • • . •_ ,,\::-):r:'i~
....
, . ',.", .:.':. ,"~" '_."
JEE (Maln·+ Advancedf2014
ENTHUSIASlCOURSE
RegularAnalysls through Contmuou!! ExerCise .PHASE : I
J RACE # 014 DISCUSSION DATE: 03/05/20 i 3 PHYSICS
-•
'. .~

1. Millikan's oil drop experiment attempts tp me~!?ur~ the charge on a single electron, e by measuring the
:1 . charge oftiny oil drop suspended 1:~ ~n electrostatic field. It is assumed that the charge on the oil drop
I is due to just a small number of excess electrons. The charges 3.90 x 10- 19 C. 6.50 X 10-19 C and
I 9.10 x 10-19 C are measured on three drops of oil. The charge of an electron is deduced tQ be
,I (A) 1.3 x 10-1!) C (B) 1.6 X 10-19 C (C) 2.6 X 10-19 C (D) 3.9 x 10-19 C

:1 Paragraph for Question Nos. 2to 4


,I A body cools in a surrounding of~~_~e.mJ?_:.ra~~_~Q~~. Its heat capacity is 2J/oC. Initial temperature
ofthe body is ~.Oo<;,Assume Newton's law of cooling is valid. The body cools to ~6°C in 10 minutes.
,J --c'~'"
, " . ~.

'] 2.
-
In further 10 minutes it will cool from 36°C to :
I

\-1 '(A.; .34:8°C ~.l °C (C) 32;8°C (D) 33.6°C


/' .. ,

3. The temperature' ot-:tn~ t!)1y in °C denoted bye the variation ofe versu:stime t is best denoted as
,'I

,I

,I
\'1
40 0 C
e
(A) f30 d ............... .
0 r c

(B) 30°0.....•....•... -..

t-+ (0,0) t-+ ,-.


J (0,0)
-- ' ~~) I
'\;...··l

J.•
'..
""
~

...
~

'. \ r:ooc
/~ 40°C 't--"

/.~

:~
"
(C)
ie
t ----.;.
~Ol . ·· . · . · ~
""---'
"lit.
..,0

'\­

,'~\"""".'
(0,0) (0,0) t --'-flo­
r "-<3­ ~
,~I
;- 4. When the body temperature has reached 36°C, it is heated again so that it reaches to 40°C in 10 minutes.
Assume that the rate ofloss of heat at 38°C is the average rate ofloss for the given time. The total heat

~ (. \'- required from a heater by the body is :


(~ (A) 7.2 J (B) 0.728 J (C) 16 J (D) 32 J

:­ 5. A particle is uncharged and is thrown vertically upward from ground level with a speed of 5$ m Is.

.,­~­
As,.....a result, it attainsamaximum
.
heiglith. The particle is then givenapositive charge tq and reaches.the "

saine niaxirrnrin height h when thrown vertically upward with a speed of 13 m/s.Finally,the particle is


\.,
given it negative charge -q. Ignoril'lg air resistance, determine thespeed (in nvs) with which the negatively
~ , .

(
" ,:,~ :~'
,','·:'M'
'R",A'~E ,':
~eg~I~O,naIYsl~ t~rQughCQnl
·.. nUQUS Exercls. " '"

JEE (Main + Advancedl 2014
rENTHU~IAST COURSE
. PMSE: ,.

".
Ii). :', Acircular ring ofradius a with unifomfcharge density Ais in the xy plane with centre at origin. A particle of '
massm and charge q is projected fromP{O, 0, a..J3) on +z-axis towards origin with initial velocity,u. The

minimum value of the vel~city so.. that the particre"d~es not return to P is ~x~m .
. ­

Find ·x' (neglect gravity).

7. The energy radiated by a black body at 2300 Kis found to have the maximum at ~ wavelength 1260 nm,
its' einissive power being 8000 Wm-2• When the body is cooled to a temperature TK, the emissive
power is found to decrease to 500 Wm-2• Find:
(i) the temperature T r'

(ii) the wave length at which intensity ofemission is maximum at th~ temperature T.
8. The figure shows the face and interface temperature ofa composite slab containing offour lay~ts oftwo
materi~ls llavingidenticalthickness. Under steady state condition, find:~h~_y:alueoftemperature e.
r
20°C 10°C a ,,:soc -10°C

kl2klkl2k

k = thermal conductivity

v-:.f"
r
,'.

i:

'-.~

(
\...../

'?'~>":, ::

'4.~
r ·~:·' C
I~ .... . ,
.
8./ I
"
-I - . • •
l' :~ !
C
.. LE,.
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + AdvanCed) 2014
ENTHUSIASTCOtJRS E
PHASE: 1

RACE # 15 /<1J1V' . DISCUSSION DATE: 06/05/2013 PHYSICS

Paragraph for Question 1 to 3


In the given figure three blocks A, B & C are arranged as shown and a horizontal force F is
applied to C. Block A is connected to wall with a horiozntal string. The tension in the string is T
and the friction between A and B that between B & Care fl & f2 respectively. The coefficient of
friction between A &. Band B & C is j.l. The floor is frictionless. The acceleration of block B is a l •
Mass of A, B & C are 2m, m & 3m respectively ..

,[t. If the force F = j.lmg~,the magnitude of.


~= j.lmg .. '. ,(B) f2 = 3 j.lmg ~=j.lmg ~=Ocl)
~~·2. If the J:;rce F = 3 j.lmg
.,
;.
~ = 2j.lmg ~2 = 2.25 j.lmg ~=2j.lmg (D) a l =j.lg .
3. If theprce F = 8 j.lmg . . / '
~: = 2 j.lmg ~f2 = 3j.lmg ~=2j.lmg . ("~j.lg
~4.' Between two isotherm we have a cycle as shown. Find the work done by the gas during the cycle. (in J)
[Take T J = 127°C, Tz == 16°C, n ,= 1 mole] ~Sc
(

~ I 't'~"" 11>
I"t ... 1 "".(·~I\·
" ",/
,I p

r
r v
~I

I, 5. A movable heavy piston is supported by a spring inside a vertical cylindrical

[I]
(
container as shown.' When all air is pumped out of the container, the piston is
,'-1,

in equilibrium as shown in Diagram 1, with only a tiny gap between the piston

- "l' and the bottom of the container. When a portion o( gas at temperature T is
Diagram I Diagram 2
,1 introduced under the piston, the later rises toa height h as shown in Diagram 2.
'~l What would be the heightofthe piston above the bottom ofthecontafnedfthe
1: 1

'I
I
gasis then heated to a temperature 2T ? Assume that the piston moves without
r· .­ ...
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular AnalY515 through Continuous Exerei5e .' .
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
. PHASE: I
I
6. The tungsten filament of an electric lamp has a length 1=0.25 in anddiameterd.= 0.04mm. The power
rating is P = woW. Assuming the radiation from the filament to be 11 = 80% of that Of a blackbody I
radiator at the same temperature, estimate the temperature of the filament.
. ~~~O k.
Stefan constant::: 5.7 X 10-8 W/m2K4. I
7. A positi ve charged sphere of mass m = 5 kg is attached by a spring of force constant

K::: 104 N/m. The sphere is tied with a thread so that the spring is in its natural length.
Another identical, negatively charged sphere is fixed to the floor, vertically below the
positively charged sphere as shown in figure. Initial seperation between spheres is
Xo ::: 0.5 m. Now thread is burnt and maximum elongation of the spring is 0.1 m. If
T1
.
~
+
·l,"

Xo'"
'Q~ ) 1--I
I

charge on each sphere is (a x 25) ~C then find the. value. of a. In;;i~1};~~;tion i


A-i AG - t).::SI~
r I
i
!""
I
}/
I,
,
i
~ ,

.-i'l
. r
I

I~

\.

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

[~1WD 2. (A.~

s. I
3.

6. I
mml\Qm
1. I
(
RACE
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
ALLE.
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

RACE # 16 DISCUSSION DATE : 08/05/2013 PHYSICS

1. Heat is being supplied at a constant rate to a sphere of ice which is melting 'at the rate of 0.1 gm/sec.
It melts completel yin 100 sec. The rate of rise of te~~~~\ure thereafter will be(Assume no Iass of heat.)
.~.8 °C/sec (B) 5.4 °C/sec ~ 3.6 °C/sec (D) will change with time
413 =
2. An ideal gas)undergoes an adiabatic process obeying the relation PV constant. If its initial temperature
is 300 K and then its pressure is increased upto four times of its initial value, then the final temperature
is (in Kelvin):

··~0J2 . (B) 300Vi" (C) 6 0 0 , ~O


~
3. Which of the following systems of charges have zero elebrostatic potential energy? <
,
• ... L·
,---" ....
,""~ --,.~-."

': .~

(B)

IJlC IJlC 2JlC 2JlC

IJlC 2JlC -lJlC


(C) 0 0 2 0 (DJ Nol},(( q({hese
1

em· em r NI~ .fell''''') ___


4. In which of following cases, electric field:~iform? .
~side..~~formlY charged spherical shell '~'"
\}.f'V'i
!d

~
(B) I n;mty inside a uniformly charged sphere
. I.' ~tvI t}.v,~
In front of an infinite sheet of uniform surface charge density iI

" (D) At a distance x from a point charge q.


Paragraph for question nos. 5 to 7
The potential energy at a point, relative to the reference point is defined as the negative of work done
as
by the conservative force the object moves from the reference point to the point considered. The value
of potential energy at the reference point itself can be set equal to zero because we are always concerned
only with differences of potenti~ energy between two points and the associated change of kinetic energy.
A particle A is fixed at origin of a fixed coordinate system. Another particle B which is free to move

.•. \ experiences an force F~ ( - ~~ + ~ Jr due to particle A where r is the position vector of particle B
relative to A. It is given that the force is conservative in nature and potential energy at infinity is zero.
IfB has to be removed froin the influence of A, energy has to be supplied for such a process. The ionization

5.
energy Eo is work that has to be done by an external agent to move the particle from a distance ro to
infinity slowly. Here ro is the equilibrium position .of the particle. .
What is the potential energy funGtion of particle as function of r . i l t) ').. -' F'.
Jd j.J .
lA' a. p .ro/..a.-f..Q. If"'" -~_Q. In) c: +Q.
( .
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
(

(
6. Find the ionization energy 'Eo of the particle B.
(

(D)~
(A) ~
20,
(B) 2~2
a, ~ a,
(

7. If particle Bis transfered slowly from point I\(iz r•• v'2 'b) to point P,(.A-,.A-) in the xy-plane by r'

c.
an external a~~nt, calculate the magnitude of work required to be done by it in the process.
~
c
_,~2 p2
"

~:
'\,'v " . 'f
\!.J31 -}-;-_ (
'1'
<f) 640, (D) None of these '(S'
160,
(
8. In the figure the distance BQ = 3 m & BP =14 m at time t =O. The system of blocks is released from
rest at time t =O. The string connecting B & C is suddenly cut at time t =2 s. Calculate: C
(a) time t, when block B hits the pulley Q and ,';f,. 1- ~. (I
(b) the velocity of block B at this instant -;;- m/~,
The co-efficient of friction between B & horizontal surface is J.l =0.25 [Take g = 9.8 mls 2]
c:
J
C
(

C
. 8kg 2kg

,
If,\.Jqc
t
c
-""­
'\
c

.~ i

c
C
l
C
l
,;'

FILL THE ANSWER HERE (J


1.~ 2·U.~ 3.mDE~ 4. ~'ICJIm1 >1
~]
~. rA~i~ 6. 1rA"'If"BIfl':1tmJ 7. IAllm:Bl'!BJ 8. I ]
""lIlIIII

LIM RACE
JEE (MAIN +ADVANCED) '2014
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis t~rough Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

RACE # 17 DISCUSSION DATi: : 010/05/2013 PHYSICS

1. Three identical point charges are placed on the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC as shown in the
figure. Consider a mediah AD, where point 0 is the centroid. As we move form point A to point D

"
/9 8
I
"
", "
",
" I

".... '" "" ~


A 0.:.............0 .... J: D

, I

.
" : I
...... - I
...... ; t

(. ...... . f
"
" .......... ~
,
I
" I
I"'",.. :

"CC

I,.

\'(A-JElectric field vanishes only once at 0, between points A and D.


\""-MElectric field vanishes two times, first at 0 and then somewhere between 0 & D.
( (C) Electric fieid v;:tnishes two times, first at a point somewhere between A & 0 and then at O.
~ectriC field vector changes direction more than once.
2. Two particles of charge ql and q2 are separated by distance d as shown in figure. Charge ql is situated
at the origin. The ne~~1.~.tric field ~ue toth~ particles is zero at x:=.:cJl.1. With V = 0 at infinity, the location
(
\-.
of a point in terms of d on the x axis (other than at infinity) at which the electrical potential due to the
two particles is zero, is given by :
,
./

Yl-L. .
q~X
/
(
,

(
,/p /d/4 (B) 16 d {C) - 16 d ~ point on the axis
" 3. A car is moving horizontally with acceleration a. A body inside the car is found at rest with the help
/
(
of two horizontal and two vertical strings attached to it as shown in the figure. PI' F2, F3 and F4 are the
tension in the four strings. If FI =40N, F2 =Z8N, P3 =ZON and F4 =4N, then find the accelerationi

of the car in mls2 •

, //
t_.

( .
R :'~'A:"'\
..
.,
,
,. C'·····:'E"··.
~,'"
'{
,
.
Regillar Anal),$ls uilliUSh Continuous E)(erelse
JEE (MAINi' ADVANCED)2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
jjliAsE : I

Paragraph for Question 4 to 6 . I


I

An ideal gas with the ratto 0f its specific heats =y, undergoes a process in which its internal energy
U is given by tt :':: aVii. Whote a and: a are constants. (V =volume Of gas) i

4. If the internal energy of the gas is to increases by L\U, find the amount cif heat L\Q, needed to'be given:­

'HJ':;
.../. A ' , r, v
(A) L\Q =L\U (B) L\Q = Y b,U
a
: .P
. "I'
) I'
,
J

(C) L\Q = = L\U [1+ ~J ~Q = L\U[I+ Y:IJ


5. The work L\W performed by the gas when its inter;nal energy increases by L\U :­

(A) L\W = L\U (B) !.lW = Y L\ U . ~W == (y -1)L\ U (D) L\W =: 0


a . a

6. The mOlar specific heat C of the gas during the process :­

.' R
(A) C = ­
y -1
(B) C= R
a
(C) C = yC v
a .,.JBfC=~ +-
R
y-l a
. .
7. A uniformly charged sphere is placed inside a uniformly charged hollow sphere as shown in figure. 0
is the centre of hollow sphere and C is the centre of solid sphere. The magnitude of charge on both the

spheres is 4 ( Jt }c. The eiectric field at point 'po which lies just outside the hollow sphere is given ,.

C3 ( "
by 3d kN/C . ~h:id the value of a.
~ /' "'

j<,;

F~ r
4. 10EUIWJ

""\
KOTA(RAJASTHAN)
---RACE Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise'
JEE (Main +Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # 18 DISCUSSION DATE: 13/05/2013 PHYSICS

0-@.'V1. A car runs at ~d around the horizontal racetrack shown


'-l '

,
+
~-i'
in the figure. 'Qver which portion of the track is the magnitude of
... \ , \ ~ '< '

the acceleration the greatest?


Ii-.
(A) From 1 to 2 '"(B)From 2 to 3
, JeJProm 3 to 4 CD) From 4 to 1
2. The equation of motion of a longitudinal wave. is

s = 0.15 sin[41tt -(ftxl where x and s are measured
~ \.,

in meters at t in second.
~he distance between two successive points having phase difference 1t is 1 m.
)
:;z
, "
The, ave travels along negative x-axis.
he frequency of the wave is 2 Hz.
~ ~""J '
<\IY"

~I
"
'J'

VI""~,~ ~ ~
, r'f.
. , "'" \
'

~'\q.,., ,
" (D) At t =4 sec as at 20 cm kinetic energy of the particle is zero. "":;, FO" 1­
3. Two waves travelling in a medium in the x-direction are represented by Yl = Asin(at...:.~x) and
y2=A sin(ax+~t-1t/4}, where Y1 and Y2 are the displacements of the p'articles of the medium'l is time
and a, ~ are unequal positive constants. Then :­
:; ~rie ,two waves propagate in the different directions
(B) the two waves propagate in the same direction with same speed,
(C) the two waves propagate in the same direction with different speeds

~~ two waves propagate with different wave speeds.

4. Two mechanical waves, Y1 = 2 sin 21t (50 t -,2x) & Y2= 4 sin 21t (ax + lOOt) propagate in a medium
.h d' "1' "'" (" 'l.- .. ".L. ;r..(.,k.,<X ..' ~" .:> e~' - LY
Wit same spee :-, -+-' "'" ..:::. ' , """"A.." ' ;'!-". '19:::" -<. i"Jt; >;:J

~
( , ~e ratio of theiri~tensities is 1: 16 ~he~atiO of theirintensiti~s \'i' 1: 4' '" 0 ­

. (
"
The value of 'a' is 4'units (D) , The value of la' is 2 units
\, ,

( ~ 5. A block is placed on a horizontal table which can rotate about i.ts axis.
4...
The block is placed at a certain distance from centre as shown in

*8
(
\.,
figure. Table rotates such that particle does not slide. Select possible 3 ..
(
~
direction of net acceleration of block at the instant shown in figure. ,II' I
Column-} , Column-II 2 ,
\. ;' (A) When rotation is clockwise with ~onstaht co ~ h) 1 1

(B) When rotation is clock wise with decreasing ~Q) 2


(C) When rotation is clockwise with increasing co~) 3

/
\...
~ CD) Jus.t a~~: c]o~k;;!~~ rotati0r:, begin! (rom rest PeS) 4

(
\.,
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

A negative charge particle is revolving around a fixed positive charge particle in an elliptical orbit.
Minimum & maximum distance of -ve charge particle from +ve charge particle ar~ r & 2rrespectively.
If maximum kinetic energy of -ve charge particle is 41. Find the work done by electric force during motion
of -ve charge particle fro~ B to A in joule. 2:?­
7. There are 8 drops of a conducting fluid. Each has radius r and they are charged to potential! volt. They
are then combined to form a bigger drop. Find potential of big drop in volt. t-t
8. A bloc~ is released from rest from top of a rough curved track as showri in figure. It comes to rest at
,
some point on the horizontal part. If its mass is 200 gm, calculate negative of work by friction is joules.
-li5
2ml ..·.......'imU\ruul\\\\\\\U\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\fu\fulU\\\\fu\\fu\uJ;J

D '- W
D
t Wi- C!:~
~W6 ~, - tjV .
A k~ - Wet ~ ./J l)
"- _ ~ e-e ~ IS ~ ;)
l&~ 1/ '-I - Wtt l. ,fC- 'kl.­
9-t
"l..
-'1 ,!.,..,

~'r~
A
0J "6 .. ~

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


2.~ 3. m.<l!JEm ' -- 4·D~.~ .

5. 6. IL...----_ _ --I 7·1 )d 8. 1 i . ]

·~@1·~ll:,,~)·· f~)'«GJ,

()
ALLI.
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN).
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
J EE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 019 DISCUSSION DATE: 15/05/2013 PHYSICS

t\ '
1. The displacement of a body executing SHM is given by x = A sin (2nt + 'Tt/3). The first time from
t = a when the velocity is maximum is
~0.33 sec (B) 0.16 sec (C) 0.25 sec CD) 0.5 sec
2. A spring has natu~allength 40 cm and spring constant 500 N/m. A block of mass 1 kg is attached at'
one end of the spring and' other ~nd of the spring is attached to ceiling. The block released from the
position, wpere the. spring.has length 45 cm.
,~

(A) the block will perform SHM of amplitude 5 cm.


Jl3f'the block will have maximum velocity 30.[5 cmlsec.
~~ block will have maximum acceleration 15 mls2

~he minimum potential energy of the spring will be zero.

3. A;small electric dipole is placed in a uniform electric field as shown in the diagram.
f,

..

Considering the situation above, choose the correct statement(s) :

~he torque on the dipole points into the plane;ofthe paper.

(a) ~l1owed to rotate freely about its center, the dipole would initially swing counter~clockwise.
~Work done by the electric field on the dipole, in rotating it from e = 90° to e. = 30° is positive.
r" ~. - t · ,
r,)

(D) The potential energy ofthe dipole is maximum when the electric field is perpendicularto the dipole moment 119
(YlAI'
( 4. Y(x,t) = 0.051 [(4x + 2t)2 + 5] represents a moving wave pulse, where x and y are in meters and t is
in seconds. Then which statement(s) are CORRECJ: ~ %..,
SI'f' '
~lse is moving in-x direction fB1Wave speed is 0.5 mls uffr ~"~~
(f"vG-aximum particle displacement is 1 cm ~is a symmetric pulse t:-... 6 .
...;>'1 lVJ. I L'.( ­ ~
5. The mathematical forms for three sinusoidal traveling waves are givtn by. 'ft,

Wave 1 : y(x,t) = (2cm) sin(3x-6t) .


!'J:.
<t
1- T\ ?J'1
v* .
- ~
s,Qrr(

r Wave 2: y(x,t) = (3cm) sin(4x-12t) \Jv.) I- r~ . . 1;6-t


J . . (p ~
" Wave 3 : y(x,t)::::: (4cm) sin(5x-l1t) '( ~ <ild '/CJ -;z:.
where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Of these waves :
\"
(A) wave 1 has the greatest wave speed and the greatest maximum transverse $tring speed.
(B) wave 2 has the greatest wave speed and wave 1 has the greatest maximum transverse string speed.
\.
(C) wave 3 has the greatest wave speed and the greatest maximum transverse string speed.
~ , .,

'c.

L
ft.( i:.-K )( Y
'l­

~~M , l ( ' ,..",., I~


hIIAh'&) o<r.
~

sp<.i '>{ < 1ltc/v>wJ:: d;....:~... E JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


--.-_~llj
--:::, •
M
(J R
R~ilular Analys~h
.
va>s
ConI nuous ExerclsQ ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

Standing waves are produced on a stretched string of length L with fixed ends. When there is a node
~ 6.
at a distance Ll3 from one end, then ~
¥minimum and next higher number of nodes excluding the ends are 2, 5 respectively
)...... (B) minimum and next higher number of nodes excluding the ends are 2, 4 respectively

'r;;t)'''' (C) frequency produced may be VI(3L) " ~ '" ..,..

~ *~-equ~Cy,prOduced. may be .3V/(2L) ~


?' f X Y ')C 'if X I l
f' [V = velOCIty of waves In the string]

7. A 1.4 kg sphere P connected to one end ofa spring of,force constant 100 N/m, can slide on a rigid smooth
wire frame ABC. The releaxedlength ofspring is 70, cm. The wire frame and the other end ofthe spring J
both are fixed on a wall as shown in the figure. The portion AB ofthe wire frame is a quarter circle
of radius R = 70 cm and portion BC is horizontal. The sphere is released from position A and slides
down the wire frame. Calculate the velocity with which the sphere will strike the wall.
",it) .
~ r wsp-. 'l­ Ll K. &
p .Jjr

B c -t 1([~ -1C(]
8. Fro~n the top oftower ofheight 80 m, a body is projected up with velpcity 50 mls at an angle ofil;lclination
of 37°. If mass ofthe body is m.:::: 0.02 kg and acceleration d~e to gravity is 10 mls2, then find v'

instantaneously power (in watts) supplied by gravitational force on the bodyjust after the 7 s of pr~jection. (~
9. A positively charged particle starts atrest25cm from a.second positively charged particle which is held
stationary throughout the experiment. The first particle is released and accelerates directly a~ay from /
the second particle. ~en the first particle has moved 25cm, it has reached a velocity of 3J2 mls. What
is the maximum velocity (in mls) that the first part~cle will reach? b .
10. A body ~f mass 36 gill moves with SHM ofamplitude A = 13 cm and time period T = 12 sec. At time ......
t = 0, the displacement x is + 13 cm. Calculate the shortest time (in sec.) from initial position to {
x=-6.5 cm. Li .
.,,...

FILL THE ANSWER HERE .


l.~ 2.~cm·· 3.~ 4.~ ',- .

5.D?~ 6~~7·1· ]
~.. I I
( ,
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUTE ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOlA (RAJASTHAm Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
.(
RACE # 20 DISCUSSION DATE : 17/05/2013 PHYSICS
(
\

1. For a system of two di poles P,. and 1'2 as shown in the figure, both dipole are at origin and perpendicular
(
to. each other along x and y axes respectively then
(

i
\ y
....•..• '?
( ••••••• b~a,,,"",,'
'~\
Eis resultant
P:l ." ..:" :.,.p
( electric field
'
( "tt"";'? \'.
",' 1,
0

.'
1,/)45 =t '\
( "D pUR.
I
JlX

c (A) work done in taking electron from P to R on QPR is zero

(
. (~+pJ.. (~-P2) Ii' - - ~+P2 .
(B) tan a = ( ) '.·.(C) tan a = ( .) (D) - E.dr = r;:;
( . 2 ~ -P2 ,;.,:; 2 ~ +P2 .. 4v21rEo r

( 2. " Two particles execute SHM of same amplitude of 20 cm with same period along the same line about
( '; ,.. the same equilibrium position. The maximum distance between the two is 20 cm. Their phase difference
" in radians is
(
21t 1t 1t 1t
( (A) "3 (B) "2 (C) "3 (D) "4
C: 3. ,The potential energy of a particle of mass O.lkg, moving along x-axis, is given by U =5x(x-4)J where
x is in metres. It can be concluded that
(
(A) the particle is acted upon by a constant force.
( (B) the speed of the particle is maximum at x =2 in
( (C) the particle executes simple harmonic motion
. (D) the period of oscillation of the particle is 1t15 s:
(
4. A wave propagates in a string in the positive x-direction with velocity v. The shape of the string at

C t = t, is given by [(x, t.,) = A sin (=: J: then, the wave equation at any instant t is given by

,.
r

(A) g(x,t) =A sin [x-v(,.-to)]' (B) g(x,,) = ASiJ x+ V(I- to) J'
a a
(:

"

g(x,t) = Asin [x~v(t+to)J


\.

(C) (D) g(X,t)=Asin[x+v(t+to)T


~.
,

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

·BA~[; ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

5. A sonometer stringAB oflength 1 m is stretched by a load and the tension T is adjusted so that the string
resonates to a frequency of 1kHz. Any point P of the wire may be held fixed by use of a movable bridge
that can slide along the base of sonometer.
P B
AlA'
I ~ I ~T
(A) If point P is fixed so that AP : PB :: 1 :4, then the smallest frequency for which the sonometer wire
resonates is 5 kHz.
(B) If P taken at midpoint of AB and fixed; then, when the wire vibrates in the third harmonic of its
fundamental, .the number of nodes in the wire (including A and B) will be totany seven.
(C) If the fixed point P divides AB in the ratio 1:2, then the tension needed to make the string vibrate
at 1 kHz will be 3T. (neglecting the terminal effects) I

CD) The fundamental frequency of the sonometer wire when P divides AB in the ratio a: b will b~the .j
same as the' fundamental frequency when P divides AB in the ratio b:a.
~
, 6. A particle is given a certain veloicty vat point P as shown on a hemispherical r:

6tJ ~, ,
' .
smooth surface. The value of v' in mis, such that particle when reaches Q the
. . . . p '. ~R
= ~
"

normal reaction of surface is equal to particle's weight, is [R 1.6 m, ·····JiO~


'.,.-j
~
=
g 10 mls 2] ~ ~.I
cte«t\\ f, I

7. A skier starts from rest at the top of a hill. The skier coasts down the hill and up a second hilI, as the

=
drawing illustrates. The crest of the second hill is circular, with a radius of r 36 m. Neglect friction

and air resistance. What must be the height h (in m) of the first hill s9that the skier just loses contact

";'

with the snow at the crest of the second hill ?


It·

8. A block of mass ~. is being pulled,up the rough incline, inclined at an angle

37° with horizontal by an agent delivering constant power P. The coefficient

offriction between the block and the incline is Jl. Find the maximum speed

(in mls) of the block during the course of ascent. [Take: P 60 W.

m = 1 kg, I-t =0.5]


= I
~ ..

,:_1
~J
3KP
9. Potential at point A due to dipoles is prY then find the value ,of P+ Y?
~"I

r::=::r
FILL THE ANSWER HERE

::r 4.~.l I '-I

- I I "I
I
I "
'I
I
I

--I
R :"A"'W"C"E JEE (Main +' A~~~"c~dl2014
.. " .

A.LLEM
CAREERIN$lTrU'{f,;
.
.
. ... '.: :'

.
. .;:. . ~. .. " .. '. '. :.
ENTHUSIAstt:dUnSE
.. , " ". ..... _ ,.' . . ." '" "".~ ",',.' .
BK')f!11;;!!W$-; W!"WI Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
PHlfSE:1 .;..... coo.

. RACE # 21 DISCUSSION DATE: 27/05/2013 .. P,HXS,ICS

;t ",

1. A bird is singing on a tree and a man is hearing at a distance 'r' from the bird. Calculate the displacemen t
of the man towards the bird so that the loudness heard by man increases by 20 dB. . '.'
(

[Assu~e that the motion ofman is along the line joining the bird and the man]
" .....,;!.

(
r 9r r 3r 4r
I
(' (A) 10 (B) 10 (C)s (D)S
( I
\ I 2. S is a solid neutral conducting sphere. A point charge, q of 1 x 10-6C is placed at
A••••••••.. ~
B
(.1 point A. C is the centre. of sphere and AB is a tang~nt. BC = 3m and AB. ~4m.

..
. .~.

(
(A) The electric potential of the c<;mductor is 1.8 kY.
'1 .,.; ... . "

c (B) The electric potential of the conductor is 2.25 kY.


J
(J (C) The electric potential at B due to induced charges on the sphere is -0.45 kY.
(, (D) The electric potential at B due to induced charges on the sphere is 0.45 kY.
(
i A proton is either released at rest or launched with a certain velocity in a uniform electric field. Which of
I ; . the graphs in figure could possibly show how the kinetic energy of the proton changes during the
(I ;: i

proton's motion?
(I
( K K
(I
cI (AlL, I /
(B)~t (C)~, I /
(D)~t
(
I
(I 4. A small block of mass m is allowed to slide from h =2r on an inclined frictionless track in vertical plane from

(
I rest position as shown in the figure. The total acceleration of block at point Cis -VK g. Find the valueofK.

~ :I~c·
{(( I B 117

5. A particle of mass 2kg moves on a smooth horizontal plane under the action of a single force
) F= (3£ +4]) N; Under this fOfceit is displaced from (0,0) to {1m, l:~). The initial speed.ofthepartic1e is­
)
-V3 mfs and final
. .

spe'~d i's J5k rn!s. Find the value of k.


. .

..
,


~".';'. ".~'
.'

....... " ..

" .:.. ,' :'.;':,:' :~ .

),.. ..." . ': .... ",'~ .............. ".. ~.,.i

I : •

"'.
! ':,'
;
JEE (Main -t Advanced) 2014
''ALLIMr™
CAREER IH$TITUTE
13·ltiJ!:I.,,,,.id'·Jjll RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous E)(lIreise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

6. An 80 kg man is riding on a 40 kg cart travelling at a speed of 2.5 mls on a frictionless horizontal 'plane.
He jumps off the cart, such that, his velocity just after jump is zero with respect to ground. The work
done by him on the system during his jump is given as N4 KJ (Ae integer). Find the value ofA.

7. Second overtones of an open organ pipe A and a closed pipe B have the same frequency at a given
, \ .

temperature. If length of B is 5cm, what is the length of A (in cm).

8. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork forming a standing wave with five antinodes
between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the wire. When this mass is replaced
by a mass 'M' kg, the wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three anti nodes for the same
positions of the bridges. Find the value of M.

Relevant questions from (HCV)

Chapter 11 (Gravitation)

Short Answer type # All

Objective-1 # All

Objective"2 # All

Exercise # 4,5,7,9,11,12,13,15,21 to 39

Chapter 12 (SHM)

Short Answer type # All

Objective-j # All

Objective-2 # All

Exercise # 40 to 42

~
/~
J'i


1.~
r'
2. ~
FILL THE ANSWER HERE

3. ml.t\tE1DJ -
~-
4.

"7 .I---
5.'
.. r
I 6·1 L.-_ _ _- - I

-
\.J
(),{))"Ut.-­

KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise


JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 22 D.ISCUSSION DATE: 29/05/2013 PHYSICS

1. A conducting sphere of radius R, carrying charge Q, lies inside an uncharged conducting shell of radius
2R. If they are joined by a metal wire,
(A) Q/3 amount of charge will flow from the sphere to the shell
(B) 2Q/3 amount of ch~ie will flow from the sphere to the shell
(C) Q amount of charge will
flow from the sphere to the shell

". kQ2 .

(D) 4R amount of heat will beproduced

.2. Two conducting spheres of radii Rand 3R carry charges Q and-2Q. Between these spheres a neutral "
( conduqting sphere ofradius" 2R is connected. The separation between the sphere is considerably large then
(
r-' .
"
r o
,

"
(
r"
(A) The final charge on initially neutral conducting sphere is - ~ ":.~

"
( , "::,..,. . . ; " " ".'"" . ", " ." . 35KQ2
"
r"
(B) The decrease In e1ectnc potentIal energy of sphere of radius R IS 72R
~"

r (C) The decrease in electric potential energy of sphere of radius R is 37 KQ2 "
\"
i"
'-""
(D) The final electric pot~ntial of sphere of radius 3R will be - ~~
(; . .. .
" . ' . .
( 3 ,:11;:- Which of the following statements i~ TRUE for ,a system comprising of two bodies in contact exerting
.... "

frictional force on eachki)ther:


) (A) total work done by static friction "on whole system is always zero. "
J (B) work done by static friction on a body is al ways zero

S "(C) work done by kinetic friction on a body is always negative


"(D) total vv0t:k done by intel11alkinetiC friction on whole system is always negative"
"

~)
4. A block of mass 1m' is supported by string spring combination as shown in the diagram.
The string is sufficiently long. The system is at rest in equilibrium. The block is pulled
"" l:;>y II distan~~" 'x'from ~qui1ibri~m position and released. It perfonns oscillatory motiOn
:arid let'x'::';xo is maximum possible "value for which string is not becoming slacked in
)'
: ;

"subsequentIilotion.tf:~? 2xotheri time for which string becomes slacked in one


' . r'

) complete oscillation ii:~

3*
I "

') .[3;
(A) ,Iv "(B) "VK
(6; . f¥2m
(D) -
{
\c_/ (C) " K
c
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

BA~E ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

5. ~wo particles •A' and 'B' start SHM at t =


O. Their positions as a, function of time are given by
XA = A sin cot XB = A sin (cot + n/3) . .i
Column~I COhi.pm-II:1 r

5n
(A) Minimum time when x is same (P) ­
6co
n
(B) Minimum time when velocity is same (Q)
3co
n
(C) Minimum time after which vA < 0 and vB < 0 (R)
co
n
(D) Minimum time after which xA < 0 and xB< 0 (S)
2co
6. Sound is travelling in a long tube towards right and the graph of excess pressure variation versus posi­
tion (at someinstant) is given below.

~ R Sf T
f:
i
!!
,
I 1- Wave propagation

Ap I•
I
i
! I

;~\. i,
: '1
! i
~
x
..
"f
.:~
Match velocities in column-I with column-II. P,Q,R,S,T are medium particles inside the tube.
Column-I
(A) velocity is towards right
(B) velocity is towards left
(C) velocity is zero
(P)
(Q)
(R)
Column-II
P
~Q
R
"~
,
r~

/:,

.
(D) Speed is maximum (S) S
(T) T 'i'
F /'~
7. A body of ma~s 2.0 kg, free to travel in the x-direction, is subjected
'II
to a force directed in the positive x-direction that varies with position, [~

~'­
as shown in the graph.·The force does 9.0 J of work on the body
as it moves from x =Oto x =5.0 meters. What is the value in newton
=
of F at x 1.0 meters?
=
o
o 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m
X

is
' 1 '


8. A point mass of 0.5 kg is moving along x-axis as x t2 + 2t, where, x 'in meters and t is in seconds.
Find the work done (in J) by all the forces acting on the body during: the time interval [ 0, 2s].
~l
'J
FILL THE ANSWER HERE )
1.~

5.
2.~
6......... .....-,..... ...­
~ ~-
3.~

7. mmmmmmmClmm
4.Wl®'~

-J
--
!@:)h'~ '@Jl~~),(~

JJ,P)Y~ l<t>", (!1j11,~.

8. mmmmmmmmmm t~
-,"' .. , .
(W'!;,~'

(J
;- ff'"
~
CAREER I
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

~~, RACE # 23 DISCUSSION DATE: 31/05/2013 PHYSICS


. . ,I L
, ,

There is a fixed positive charge Q at 0 and A and B are points equidistant from O. A positive charge
,

, "

+q is takeri slowly by an external agent from A to B along the line AC and then along the line CB.

• J'

,I
'.1 ,
(' I Ail' ...... 13

~I "{1\fThe total work done on the charge is zero


jBjjhe work d,one by the electrostatic force from A to C is negati ve
>1 ~The work done by the electrostatic force from C to B is positive
'I (D) The work done by electrostatic force in taking the charge from A to B is dependent on the actual

~l
, path followed.
2. A particle of mass m is atrest in a train moving with constant velocity with respect to ground. Now the
(~
,particle is accelerated by a constant force Fo acting along the direction of motion of train for time to' A
girl in the train and a boy on the ground measure the work done by this force. Which of the following are
,'~ INCORRECT? "
JA:}Both will measure the same work
:~ (B) Boy will measure higher value than the girl
~rl will measure higher vaiue than the boy
:l
\,~
,,~!

~:~~,
, (D) Data are insufficient for the measurement of work done by the force Fo
j •

Figure shows a graph of particle displacement function of x at t =0 for a longitudinal wave travelling in
:'.'

(~ positive x-:direction irFa gas. A,B,C,Ddenote position of particles in space.


( s

~ n . ., y __ ~ x

Column-I Column II
(A) point A pej ?"t (P) Particle velocity is in direction of wave propagation
(B) 'point B 12.... (iY CQ) Maximum magnitude of s'train
, (C) point C &'1"',;'i;: (R)­ Excess pressure is zero
(D) pointD ~ , (S) Maximum density
(T) Maximum magnitude ofexcess pressure
4. 2 kg block is kept on 1 kg block as shown. The friction between 1 kg block and fixed surface is absent
and the coefficient of friction between 2 -kg block and 1 kg block is 11=0.1. A constant horizontal force
F =,4 N is applied on 1 kg block. If the work done by the friction on 1 kg block in 28 is - Xl, then find
the value of X.
g :Y.
~
-2kg ,jl=O.1. .'

\\\1\\\~I1\\\\\\\n
, F=4N lkg " smooth
m\\\\I\\\L\I\\\\\\\\\\\\

/
.~-- .
'JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

~RACE
RegularAnalysls through Continuous exercise
. ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
il1
5. A metal rod of length 1.25 m and mass 'm' is pivoted at one cmd. A solid sphere of samemass and radius
. 0.25 m is attached at its center to the free end of the rod and the sphere is free to rotate about its center.
The rod-sphere system performs SHM in vertical plane after being released from the same displaced
position. Angular frequency' of small oscillations is n fad/s. Find the vahle of n2• .0 I

6. A pendulum has periodT for small oscillations. An obstacle is placed directly beneath the pivot, so that
only the lowest one quarter of the string can follow'the pendulum bob when it swings in the left of its
. resting position as shown in the figure. The penduluIji is released from rest at a certain point A. The time
taken by it to return to that point is nT/4. Find the vf1lue of n?
?
~

'. ,

: ~

\...

/'" -.
\.....

.r'"
'-- .

'~"

:j'd

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

1.~ 2. ~c 3.

i~)l{~;(~)~J)),·\~j

c
,
4.
..
~~mmmmmmmCD
~~Il!I!!\!!II!IlI!!I;5IIIJ!l}IS~JiiA~~P.P9
: 5. mmmmtllm m~ \.....;,

',I.
~ . .E ~
......-::JE='E(':':":M~AI:":':'N-+A:":D~VA~N:"::':CE:":D":"""l2~O
. 1-.4-" "',•
~. ...LIM
CAREER INSTITUTE
,KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
R AC .
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
'..' .' ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE ': I

d,'·.'~ RACE # 24. DISCUSSION DATE: 03/06/2013 PHYSICS'

J
,

1. A block A of mass m kg lies on block B of mass m kg. B in turn lies on smooth horiiontal plane. The
!

~o
. coefficient of friction between A and B is 11. Both the blocks are initially at rest. A horizontal force F is
applied to upper block A at t =0 such that there is relative motion between A and B. In the duration from
t = 0 second till the lower block B undergoes a displacement of magnituae L, ..J.t.;.
;;.r--t f:'

~
c .F 1.~ ~
r --B...J~;L..,_~ M"'~ [<:":" bJ -}!
n....../
M\\\i\\\t\mili\M({\(M«
-~"
u v
,
.
··t

'. ,:;; , w . ~ j-L,


7)l-.
\

o , ~ork done by friction force on block A is negative '6 ~ r'")... t1l


o ~ork done by friction force on block B is positive . S 1>.51... ." w~ ~ ... f!:. i' ..

o . . ' Iw.;~) , 1".>1 t.:­


, (C) W-ork done by friction force on block A plus work done by friction force on block 13: i$ equal to
C 11 mgL in magnitude
c; • JB5\Vork done by for~e F on block A is more than !J.mgL in magnitude
. . ~. ..
C 2. Statement-1: Net work done by all the internal force of a system is iqdependent of choiceoireferen~
C frame if and only if there is no net external force on the system. 'Wo..t.J.' .. "11,.., ~.~. 0'" ~ '.
C ..•.. ,.~
f'--'
'
amI ';;, :,
o~~ /~,
Statement-2: Value_.ofreal force is independent of choice of reference frame.·"'· .. '

- 0 (A) Statement-l is TtllP~Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correctexplap~~:~nJor.:~taternent....1. .


o l,: (B) Statem~rit-1:is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for Statement-L
() , ;ts:C)
Sta ment-l is True, Statement-2 is False.
o '.,1..) ~ .' ':., ~.,, Statement-i IS .Fal~k,Statement-2
\
is True.

0'· '.:':' 3/ ~'A 10ngpHmk ofmas~Mis initially at r~ston a frictionless surface. A small block with mass m and initial
o . - " speed uoslides on top of the larger plank. The coefficient offriction betWeen the block and plapkis /J. Net
0' work done by friction if the top block falls off the plank after sliding over its length L is
o 'Il .' .... L1 ~ FSJ,.~·"'- ~
"'[$-110 11=0 ,I!>, .
o . !«~~ Jt . LOt ?- <-t-SJ- -t tSk­
'. ~ wir "\..-t- (~l)
o 1

()
t' ,
~!J.mgL .
(M+m)
(B) -j.J . ..
M
MgL (C): (mM) gL (D)-!J.MgL
.'
M+m .

-j.J
\ ..

L
JEE (MAIN ADVANCED) 2014

RACE
't
ENTHUSIASJ COURSE
Regular A/lalysls through Continuous EKerQise PHASE: I

,ColumriI.shows f9Ufsystems,forproducing standing waves. Match each system with statements given
jn C~l~mn Ildescribing the nature and different parameters of the standing waves.
Column I Column II

,(A) <2> fL.s. (P) Longitudinal standing wave

'"
(B) E tA piZ..~. (Q) Transverse standing wave
I
'-'r
;.
I
(C) ~ pn (0 (R): Power transfer ca~, take place across point A j
,~>, ~ ~,Nt ~ ,JP,.r;<1
, ' ,1

i < :t~1r..>., 1<= IA <,\I It.5 (S) AU overtones are possible ~' ~ 1 I
. ,'", '>l~ j

" ." , KE of particle A is always zero -:1'6.' /_-" -­


(T) I
2
5.,' ' Electric potential in a particular region of space is V=12x-3x y + 2yz2. The magnitude of electric field
I
, ' at point P (lm, 0, -2m) is found to be x (in N/C). Write value of x/13. I
'
(j. The position vector of apa~iicle is given by r =1.2t i + 0.9(2 j - 0.6((3 -l)k where t is the ti~e in
.r . ,', . ' .:" ,'" , ' , '

'.i:'. s~cbtl(j:S'ftoitr:the'sta:ftor'motion and where F is expressed in metres. For the condition when t
, .. '
=4
,
1
IIJ'
" se~ond, the:'~ower (p =F.v) in watts produced by the force F =(60i - 25j:- 40k) N which is acting I
on ihe particle is 522m. Find the value ofm. )... ~"4 ~
fi\SIK J.S'OPI hu~ h
7. A train of mass 100 m~tric tons is ascending uniformly on an incline of 1 in 250, and the resistance due"':" }"".
to frictiOJ1, etc is ~qual to 6 kg per metric ton. If the engine be 617.
84 'x 104 watts and be working at full '
powef)i'iirl the sp'eed (in mls)at which the train'is going. (g = 9.8 mls2) 8" . ,
J.Yl
~ • ... Ji1 rr )... ;: sO
'\ 4- ,~!
Relevant questions from (HCV)
Chapter 32 (Electric current in conductors) i
P-
fil\~~
J
Short Answer o/pe # All '1 P. '¥ 1!'r;, 9'"rt tSK
Objective-I # All' ~ ~ 'V'"
""'.' ' ., " ,Objective-2 #All t)L. , -It'­ (!) OM,) ,..·g·f..J..\
:bSo)
. E~erc~se # 2,4,5,10" :tI, 14 to 19, 21, 22, 24, 26, 27" 30, 31, 33 to 39, 41, 42,43,46 to 52, 55, ~ [5}(:/Oo) ,
I!!~"&
.'
FILL THE ANSWER HERE

'~".'
l~
. )'fI\UJ..U{
2.~
I 000 ~
11Mb 2. ~.
3.~ 4.
tt~(~ '(Jl \~"l ~1:,!Ji

~mmmwmmmmm~ ~. mmmmmmmmmm
~mmmmmmmmmm
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ALLIM
CAREER INSllTUTE ENTHUSIAST COURSE
c' KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Re~ular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
("
,.-" RACE # 26' DISCUSSION DATE: 07/06/2013 PHYSICS
r"',
,~,'
1. A transverse wave is propagatiDg a~ong +~ direction. At t =: 2 sec, the particle at x=:4 m is at
C , \." '1. Ij,,{}U ,
y =: 2 mm.With the passage of time its y coordinate increases and reaches to a maximum of 4 mm.
(1
The wave equation may be (using 0) and k with their usual meanings)

c :~A) Y
,
=4sin(tV(t +2) + k(x - 2) +6)
1r ,
(B) Y =4sin(a>(t+2)+k(x)+-)
1C

6
C'

c ,(C)y=4sin(a>(t-2)-k(x-4)+ 5;)
.
~1=4sin(a>(t-2)-k(x:-4)+
,
1C)
6
c
2. : Kepler's law deals with elliptical shaped orbits. What additional information can be derived if the orbit
!

,r <
,.,/
is circular instead of elliptical.
(A) The area covered by th.e planet in any unit time is equaL
.":

):B) The magnitude of veI6i~:j ty is constant.


;efrhe radius of curvatuteiat apogee and perigee is same.
C: # The angular velocity of the planet is constant.
C' r Paragraph for Question Nos. 3 to 5

c; The potential energy for a conservative force system is given by U =.ax2 - bx where a and b are
'i"'·

'Oonstants.
c'
r,
\.,..,
3. The expression of force is :­

r'
~.
(A) 2ax-b ~-2ax + b (C) 2ax +b (D) -2ax - b

C) 4. Equilibrium position is ;­

-b I~X=:~
(A) x = b (B) x =2a ~), 2a
(D) x=: -b
() a a
C'
.......

5. Potential energy at equilibrium is :­


0

b2 b2 , b2 b2

"
10'

{'"'<
W 4a
' (B) - 2a (C) 2a (D) 4a
'\.-/.'

(
JEE(Maln + AdvancedU014

RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerelse


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

6. A simple pendulum is swinging in vertical circular path. The bob mayor may not move on complete
circle i.e. it may swing~ or leave the circular path at a point or complete the circle. In the first column of
the given table, possible positions of the bob on the circular path and in the second column direction of
the net force vector on the bob are mentioned. Suggest suitable match.
Column-I Column-II
(Position of the bob on vertical circle) (Net force vector)

(A) Bottom point rp (P)


I
(B) While leaving the circle ~ (Q)
/
\
Somewhe~e in the upper half ,~~
r~"
i'
\
/,."t.~,
'~~~"\,
, ' (
; "
'fJi
(C)
'l··L;.t l l
I ,11
t i\"
"
'r

i-:";
t" I

,ii', , I i
.~' f
r'vJo f .;

~u VJ{lT\
,;'
:

P,'t D
(R)

1
\

""""~'" :
! .

,,' /",
I ,,('

,:,/' I \ " , I,'


(,.t
• '-r: (',dJ, .,,' I
:1 1.;/1 II' , (

I
'.:

(D) Somewhere in the lower half p~<f (S)

(T) ~
~ ~ ~ ,

7. A tube is open at on~ end and closed at the other by a vibration .diaphrag~ which may be ~sumed to be "
:_
a pressure node. It 1S found that when the frequency of the diaphragm IS 2000 Hz a stationary wave,..
pattern is set up in the tube and the distance between adjacent nodes is then 8.0 cm. When the freqJency (~
is gradually reduced the stationary wave pattern disappears but another stationary wave pattern reapp~ars'_
'v 'l- ~ ....,p
at a frequency of 1600 Hz.Neglecting end correction, calCUlate.)
· · ')~()
(i) the speed 0 f sound In rur. ,.::y--' I
~ 0
~ I 1'"'1 "1-.. ,III
) -w(U, ee),..(»> ( ,
,J...- r.' : c.,.
(ii) the distance between adjacent nodes at a frequency of 1600 Hz./O (j'<) (~c>oo) l ~ ,. ~ I <£ (_
(iii) the length of the tube. ~l9 e/> ': ' ' ; 1
(iv) the next lower frequency at which a stationary wave pattern will be 6
0 '\11 o~tlIi~ed.t:; tj<1 ~ ... .2',; ~
" FIL~ THE ANSWER HE ,,' J '_

2.EA~" 3.~, 4.~ ,_

6.~'7·1 ;
!:in~\f~' ;~~,~1J :~~:,~)\ , J
L

L
(-~
,J
(,
(
ALL••
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE

.Regular'Analysls through .Contlnuous Exercise


JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
. ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

(I RACE # 27 . ~f\b DISCUSSION DATE: 10/06/2013 PHYSICS


,I 1.' A block of mass 2 kg is hanging over a smooth and light pulley through a light string. The
(
other end of string is pulled by aconstant force F. The kinetic energy of block increases by
(' . '1 . • 1,. '/1 b,)/./ I',i I'"
I
J'J'
16 Jin 2s, then . J~ If>..:: t) ..; (;;;:.& c" t'v( ,. (1'\ ,v.,."
( .,~ \J e'v 1i...J::J F
J ~ Force F may be 24 N. . . . ,:: ;' ' -'
( F .(. J, 1,·,1 t~, '<t,'"
(B) Force F must be 24 N..
(I i:\ "". " I"·~, ....
(C) Potential energy must be increased.

('(I ~tential energy may increase. v :; /..1

!
Paragraph forQ. 2 to 4
c A wave represented by'equation y =2(mm) sin .[41t(sec- )t-21t(m- )x] is superimposed with another
l l

c wave y =2 (mm) sin [4Jtsec-l )t+21t(m-l )x + 7tl3] on a tight string. .


. . :,1;S ,
Phase difference between two particles which are located at Xl =117 andx 2 =5/12 is
c , ••

2.
c '-<.~'"

( 5n 5n
(
(A) 0 (B) 6" ~1t (0)"3

( 3. Which of the following is not a location of antinode?


(
'~J42 11 5 17
( . . 3 (B) 12 (C) 12 (D) 12
. '~
~
. .. . y.

(,
4. The location having maximum potential energyis'
'- ."
;;Q . rl}l. ­
( (A) 1 1 7 @ f i / 6 (C) 5/12 (D) 23112
C 5. Potential at a point Ais 3 volt and at a point B is 7 volt, an electron is moving towards Afrom B;
( ~It must have some K.E. at B to reach A . l ;'1"" ')",.~~..-.l .. ' -9,::. ( '1 J)

C (B) Y. need not have any K.E. at B to reach A. . F


C .J4' to reach A it must have more than or equal to 4'eV K. E. at B. ~ I,)J'I, : l. I'-{
.j
(D) when it will reach A, it will haveK.E. more then or at least equal to 4 eV ifit was released from rest at B.
6. You are moving a negative charge q < 0 at a small constant speed away from a uniformly charged
. _~'''"''*~'''''-''7''' .-~-~- ..., ..... ,". ~~ ~,. ," ~ , .. ' ' ,.,. -.-- .. ';"'"'~~-' --,--......... --~

. non-conducting spherical shell on which resides a negati~~_~hargeQ .~ q. The electrostatic field of Q is


.,... ,..... ~ '-'" ... " ...~. " ...."." ""'-..~":",_•...,..,w . ,.~ " .•, .." .,..,;,.;~:----"''-'" -,'- . .-'.... '.

E. Let U be the total energy ofthe system, Wa the work c:l(m~"by the force ~a you exert on q and WE the
. '.. \ . .

work done b,y the electrostaticforce FE on q. Then, as q is being moved,


(A) Wa =-WE' therefore U remains c~nstant~Fa =-FE
(C) U'increases ~ decre~ses

(,
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENl'HUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

7. A small object can move.in a vertical plane along a semi-eircle of radius 0.1 m without friction. The'
speed at which the ball must be launched from poillt A so that its acceleration i~ 3g at po~n1)3 is given by
'v' mls. Find the value of v (in mls)., , f" l} . "
A :
'"
""
B

8. A mass m is resting at equilibrium suspended from a vertical spring of natural length ~,'and spring
constant k inside a box as shown: S~\W- ~.l'

\
\

The box begins accelerating upward with . acceleration a. Find th~ maximum speed of the 'mass
, ,~

(in cmls)~relative to the box in subsequent motion. (Given: a = 1 mls2!, m= 3kg, k= 1200 N/m)
9. . A rectangular plate ofmass M, sides £1 and £2 is suspended from a'ceiling by two parallel strin~s of
length £3 each as shown in figure. The plate is displaced slightly in its plane keeping the strings tight.
The angulaFfrequericy of its SlIM is 00. Find the value of 2002 in SI units. -"

[Take: M = 10 kg, £1=0.8 m, e2 = 0.2m, £3= 0.4 m ] 5:9,.

~
e) Ie3

Ie ~
I~
£1

FILL THE ANSWER HERE .


2·~m '3.~ 4.~;·

7. mmmmmClWC2mm
9., I
ALLIM
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main +Advanced) 2014
.ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # 28 DISCUSSION DATE: 12/06/2013 PHYSICS

/I.'In ~h material do the conduction electrons have the lar~~st meahime between cOllisiOns?_
; ..&<)Copper. . (B) AlumInIUm . c... r~J.. r<. '1~ :; '. tI':'\1I _t::.
~.' '4 -.,.. ~ . \.V I),
(C) Nichrome· . (D) Tungsten clr'~~.~ ·f.... ~;.'- .
~ A conductor with rectangular cross section has dimensions (ax2ax4a) as ¥o~~. i~ figure. Resistance.
across AB is x, across CJ) is y and across EF is z. Then
j!:

)C '. G'. z. c K ~. ~
Ar,
r.J:k(; ;J.. )....
B . . (Z-;.8 '..-
)( .11.;-
i -.­ ~.,
,p
, tX
<-~
-""...."....,
A "'"C't ). 0 .

. «·C.D 't\: :k
.~&.,.. "gt)
J; \ ..

(A) x =Y =z (B) x>y>z (C)y>x >z )P) x> z > Y


.
~L I:;:(;;;F' t~~ ~.3..-;.. 'L.
L...~.o. ::>­
,r
\~
Paragraph for Q. 3 to 5
/
\ . ­ In an organ pipe (may be closed or open) of length 1m, standing wave is setup, whose equation for
/c
. . 2~
longitudinal displacement is given by ~ = (0.1 rom) ~os 0.8 (y) cos (400) t where y is measured from the
top of the tube in meters and t in second. ¥

',­

'.
······r····
'y
(
' ..

3. The upper end and the lower ends of the tube are respectively:
%open"": closed .(B) closed - open
, (C) open ­ open '. (D) closed - closed
!
4., The air column is vibrating in . .
(A) First overtone ;B1'Second overtone
,.;!(C) Third harmonic. (D) Fundamental mode
5•.. "Equation ofthestandlng wave in terms of excess pressure is (Bulk modulus of air B = S'x 1O~ N/m2)

CI ~=(1251tN/m2)Sin ~~ (y)cos(400t)

. 2~ .
(B) Pex = (1251tN/m2) cos 0.8 (y) sin (400t)

'.' . ' 2~ .
(C) Pex= (2251tN/m 2) sin;'0.8 (y) cos (200t) .
. .
. .' ..'. ·2~

(D) Pex = (2251tN/m~) cO~;n.R (y) sin (200 t)

,{
R' 'AC E , ,
JEE (Main + AdvanC~dJ.,~014'
" ENTHUSIAST COU6SE
Regular Analy~is through Continuous Exercise ' PHASE:,.'
6. Column;.! describes various spring block arrangements. Column-II giy;es values of different parameters
of SlIM: arid symbols have their usual meaning. '

Column I ' C o l u m n II

" "

(A) Block i~ attached to spring of spring constant


'

(P) w=/f
I
,
k kept at its natural length. A force of 2mg is

, :~~
applied to, the,bl~~¥l~wards left
k :\
() _) r) I~
1'-2mg r ''t''
I
\,C7 ~ ?'~,;¢' I
(B) Block is attached to a vertical spring (Q) A=2mg I
k
of spring constant k and the system is in I
eqUilibrium. A force of2mg is, applied on the
block in vertically downward direction. I
"".::.:,... I
i '1 ,~
:':"A/ ' !'
,/ I ' «':, .1

.f(U, ' i'"


;1

,.F=2mg I

" (C).' Block isattach~dioa vertical spnng (R) Maximum energy stored in
I

l
2
. . 2m
of spring constant k and the system is in spnngls k :I

eqUilibrium. The lift is accelerated upward


with acceleration 2g. '
~ I:
4-­la=2g (S) Separation between relaxed
;1

'-'
length and equilibrium position '(
~~ )I-
;I'-' . , fv'A . 2mg
'1­

, (/'Ij l' c> (i IS - ­


i( '" __, J - ­
k
\1­
"

. 'Tv···· /", .
• ~> ( 1 \ " ' " ,~~ ,
(D) Blockis ailliched to spring ~f ;prirlg constant
/
(T) Minimum energy in spring
k which is at its naiurallength and the surface is zero. 't
/' ~.

of cart is smooth. Now the cart is accelerated


with an acceleration 2g towards right. 1­
(
\
·~,8S ••. ,~. l;t

,
, ~6=mDij?lJ I
~r
7. A point mass of 0.5 kg.is moving along x-axis asx = t2 + 2t, where, x is in meters and t is in seconds.
Find the work done (in J) by all the forces acting on the body during the time in,terval [0, 2s]. ~ . ¥
5. rDmmDl
2.

6.
FILL
.

rmsBcll6J
THE ANSWER
. .. HERE.
3.~·

7.
~

mmmmmmmmta~
'4.~, -{
,,(~;~','P('Rt?l1~j,:~~ ~ ~
(

\.........../

\../
RACE
JEE (Main + Advance~) 2014
~_L'I"
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
;'i
QUESTIONS OF XI ASKli.P IN JEE-ADVANCED~2013 HELD ON 02/06/2013 PHYSICS
1. Two non.:.reactive morio~~tomic ideal gases have their atomic masses in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of
their partial pressures, when enclosed in a vessel kept at a constant temperature, is 4 : 3. The ratio
: of their densities is ;- ' P?-- ~
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 6 : 9 .... ~ 8 : 9 M
2. Two rectangular blocks, having identical dimensions, can be arranged either in configuration I or in .
configuration lIas shown in the figure. One of the blocks has thermal conductivity k and the other
2k. The temperature difference between the ends along the x-axis is the same in both the configurations.
It takes 9s to transport a certain amount of heat.from the hot end to the cold end in the configuration
I. The time to transport the same amount of heat in the configuration II is ::­

. Configuration II
, ,
,
Configuration I ,
2k

r k 2k k
,
x
./

) j,KJ 2.0 s (B) 3.0 s (C) 4.5 s (D) 6.0 s

) . 3. A particle of mass m is projected from the ground with an initial speed Uoat an angle ex. with the horizontal.

At the highest point of its trajectory, it makes a completely inelastic collision with another identical
. particle, which was thrown vertically upward from the ground with the same initial speed uo' The
} angle that the composite system makes with the horizontal immediately after the collision is ;­
~
;~)
" ,
, ,',
~-;
4
. (~) -+ex.
1t
4
(C) --ex.
1t
2
(D) -1t
2
v~
L.
t:" .
./'"
~
, :".
"1; .. ,,:. ,

. ' t ; > M ~ !:>sf ;rtJJ.)I'7')


.~~ .'
x" y ,,] It) ~ 1v1 )l(~ iJ
4. The work done on a Rarticle of mass m by a force, K 3/2 i + 3/2 j (K being a constant

v.... ~
~X ~)I v- '- ~ [ (X2+y2) (X2 +y2) ~ S~. '"I 1r'1'WJ ~
, 'f.. 'Vx' j ) ..91. • b ~~ ~ ~ ':ktJ~J!~
1. : of appropriate dimensions), when the particle is taken from the point (a, 0) to the point (0, a) along a) bY
a circular path of radius a about the origin in the x-y plane is ;- 4S' V'
/"
\,.

(A) 2~1t (B? ~1t (C) ~: )9t0


.'
5. nOne end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and radius 2R is welded to an end of another

.i,rr.yrl' horizontal thin copper wire ,of length L and radius R. When the arrangement is stretched by applying

~ \,jg~ces at'two ends, the ratio of the elongation in, the thin wire to that in the thick wire is ;­
(-1. v 'v ~ ,0.25 (B) 0.50 ~ 2.00 CD) 4.00
"'~. ·tJ A horizontal stretc~ed string, f:xed at two ends:!s vibrating ~n its fifth harmoruc according to the eq~ation,
".. ft~ =
,y(x, t) (O.OIm) sm [(62.8 m I)X]COS [(628 s )t]. Assumtng 1t= 3.14, the correct statement(s) IS (are)
/$.!;: '" ~J&A) The number of nodes is 5. . .'. . .' '.
'j.rfv. I> ~ The length of the string is 0.25 m . ' "

~he maximum displacement of the midpoint of the string, from its eqUilibrium position is O.OIm.

(D) The fundamental freauencv i~ 100 H7.


RACE
. Regular Analysis through Contlnuous Exercise
JEE (MallJ. ;. AdVlllced)
.ENTHUS,IAST
PHASE: I

7. Two non-conducting solid spheres of radii R an.d 2~, having. uniform volume charge densities p
P2 respectively, touch each other. The net electnc field at a distance 2R from the centre of the

sphere, along the line joining the centres of the spheres, is zero. The ratio :~ can be :t
32 32
(A) -4 ~) -25
(C) 25 )f»4
8. The figure below shows the variation of specific heat capacity (C) of a solid as a function of temnernt
is
.(T). The temperature increased continuously from 0 to 500 K at a constant rate. Ignoring any
change, the following statement(s) is (are) correct to a reasonable approximation :­
(A) the rate at which heat is absorbed in the range 0-100 K varies linearly with temperature(,
~heat absorbed in increasing the temperature from 0-100 K is less than the heat required for
the temperature from 400-500 K.
~/here is no change in. the rate of heat absorption in the range 400-500 K

--{l5) the rate of heat absorption increases in the range 200-300 K

(Qr\

/'r;tl:£:.D ...................................:.=.............
~ ,,-----­

100 200 300 400 500


T(K)

9. Two non-conducting spheres of radii Rl and R z and carrying uniform volume charge denS
and -p , respectively, are placed such that they partially overlap, as shown in the figure. At all
in the overlapping region :­

(A) the electrostatic field is zero


(B) the electrostatic potential is constant
.Ee)the electrostatic field is constant in magnitude

jB)1heelectrostatic field has same direction

10. Two vehicles, each moving with speed u on the same horizontal straight toad, are appW(;lvl
other. Wind blows along the road with velocity w. One of these vehicles blows a whistle of
fl' An observer in the other vehicle hears the frequency of the whistle to be f2. The speed
. in still air is V. The correct statement(s) is (are) :.; f
L
'.~ If\the wind blows from the observer to the. sourc~, f2 > ft
JB1'1f the wind blows from the source to the observer, f2 > fl
(C) If the wind blows from observer to the source, fz < ft '-./

(0) If the winil hlow$:l from th.. <Inn""'" to th". oh,,"'.... ,"".. f' .; f'
13\.J
R -.'A········.~·-E·
JEE (Main' '" Advanced). 2014
( ENTHUSIAST COURSE
.Regular
.' .. ' .

Analysis through Con :nuou PHASE: I


(
11... A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass-less spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless
(
horizontal plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. The particle starts moving hori~ontally from
( =
its equilibrium positioQ. at time t 0 with an initial velocity uo' When the speed of the particle is
.'0.5uo' it coIlides elastically with a rigid wall. After this collision:­
( i~thespeed of the partick~when it returns to its equilibrium position is Uo
(

c
(B) the time at which the particle passes through the equilibrium position for the first time is t = nJ¥
( .
(C) the time at w h'IC h t h '
e maXlmum . 0 f th
compressIon '
e spnng . t=3
occurs IS 4n rm
YT
(

( ~e time at which the particle passes through the. equilibrium position for the second time is t =~f' J¥
,
( 12. Two bodies, each of mass M, are kept fixed with a: separation 2L. A particle of mass m is projected
from the midpoint of the line joining their centres, perpendicular to the line. The gravi tational constant
c . is G. The correct statement(s) is (are):­
( (A) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to escape the gravitational field oUhe two bodies
r' [OM
" is 4ft:­
,%The minimum. initial velocity of the mass m to escape the gravitational field of the two bodies
[OM
is 2VL
t (C) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to escape the gravitational field of the' two bodies !
\.

(
IS
. ~2GM

(
L
~he energy of the mass m remains constant
f
:1
,1
( . I:' Paragraph for Questions 13 and 14
.'.~ ! . '~i

( A small bloc;::k of mass.l:k:g is ;released from rest at the top of a rough track. The track is a circular
(
. arc of radius 40 m. The hlbck slides along the track without toppling and frictional force acts on a
it in the direction opposite to the i"nstantaneous velocity. The work done in overcoming the friction

,..
up to the point Q, as shown in the figure below, is 150 J. (Take the acceleration due to gravity,
\.

=
g 10 m 8 )
2
. .

f ~

\...

·········J3...·····r····~ p
J>:

",,,,,,,
."'.... .
30~.')-··· :
.' ~
:
( iR
i.

r
\;. 0' =:::"",,! )X

'" 13. The magnitude of the normal reaction that acts on the block at the point Q is
,-.
%t.5N (B) 8.6 N (C)' 11.5 N (D) 22.' N
RAn.'
throu~~~~ E~:~:e~'
Regular Analysis
JEE (Main +, Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
,PHASE: I :

14., ,The speed of th~ block when it reaches the poirit Q is


, '(Af5 'ms""1 '. "%flO ms- I
,
'(C)10.~ms-:l (0) 20 ms- I
'

15. One mole of a monat,omic ideal gas is taken along two cyclicprocesses E~F4G~E and;g....*F~H~E
as shown in the PV diagram: The processes involved are purely isochoric, isobaric, isothen:nal or adiabatic.

,(. "P

32Po L••••••• F

.,,:
'i ,.'
', .. '

Po~"''''' , 4 >. G
.1. E
,.1,
,Vo ' , V

'>:,~\::t."'NI~tch:the ,pa~h~ iaList I with the ,magnitudes of the work done in the List n and'seleCt the correct
answer uSIng the codes given'blow the'lists.' ",
List I List II
, :
f:".;q,~ E .,'.
1,. 160 PoVo In2
36' f5v: '
"

Q. G ~ H 2. o 0
R.F~H 3. 24 PoVo
~, F~
. ,
/;'
G 4. 31 PoVo j:

'Cod~s: "
P Q R S
.Ai<S 4 3 2 1
(B) 4 3 1 2

"'," i
(C)
'(0)1""
,! "
3
". 4
,1
:,;3
2,
,2
4 . ,
16;::,' Match/List:r 'with ListU arid select the correct answe~ 'U'~ing,the,pode~ ,given below 'the Hsts : r
, ',:,LIstI ' '", ,'",,'
Lis~ II' ' . , ' f
P. Boltzmann constant 1. (~,lI}T-IJ
I

Q. Coefficient of viscosity 2. [ML-IT-I] --,


R. Planck constant 3. [MI.:r..3K-l]
S. Thennal cohductivity 4. [MUr:zK-'l
'-I

~1
Codes:
P Q R S
'-(
(A) 3 1 2, 4

'I
_(B) 3, 2 1 4

)C( 4 2 1
"
3
I

(1)) 4 l' 2 3
I

:1
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

17. A particle of mass 0.2 kg is moving in one dimension under a force that delivers a constant power
0.5 W to the particle. If the initi~l speed (in ms- ) of the particle is zero, the speed (in ms- I) after 5
I

sis. 5 r>! b
18. A unifonn circular disc of mass 50 kg and radius 0.4 m is rotating with an angular velocity of
10 rad s-Iabout its own axis, which is vertical. Two unifonn circular rings, each of mass 6.25 kg
and radius 0.2 m, are gently placed symmetrically on the disc in such a manner that they are touching
each other along the axis of the disc and are horizontal. Assume that the friction is large enough such
.' that the rings are at rest relative to the disc and the system rotates about the original axis. The new

/~
il·angular velociti (in rad S-I) of the system is '6 ~ /~ · '
, ~ 19. A bob of mass m, suspended by a string oflength i l is given a minimum velocity required to complete
~

'. ~
a full circle in the vertical plane. At the highest poipt, it collides elastically with another bob of mass
m suspended by a string of length i 2 , which is in;itiallyat rest. Both the strings are mass-less and·
inextensible. If the second bob, after collision acquires the minimum sped required to complete a full
S'·
circle in the vertical plane, the ratio fe 2
is.

i
" .1

,
\.
,.'

,
~

"

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

~ ~~
(
\ ... 2. ~&/;Yj
, 6. I'AJltiJlt:.Zl1.
\.
lO·mI!!E.J 12. mrnlt7Jl~
\ ..
14.~

10
mmm
~mJllll!llmlJl!l!llllll!tll----

/
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

QUESTIONS OF XI ASKED IN JEE-MAINS-2013 HELD ON 07/04/2013 PHYSICS


,.... ·A 'L 4"

1. This question has Statement I and Statement II. Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose
the one that best describes the two Statements.

Statement· I : A point particle of mass m moving with speed v collides with stationary point particle
i' '
\

of mass M. If the maximum energy loss possible is given as f(~ mv2) then f = (M: m)'
I
\
Statement· II : Maximum energy loss occurs when the particles get stuck together as a result of the
collision.
'ffi}statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, Statement-II is a correct explanation ofStatement-I.
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, Statem.ent-II is a not correct explanation of Statem~nt-I.
\", ,0

(C) Statement-I is true, Statem:ent-II is false.


(0) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true.

2. : A projectile is given an initial velocity of (i + 2}) mis, where i is along the ground and ] is along the

vertical. If g =10 rnls2, the equation of its traj~~ is :


(A) y =x - 5x2 (B) y =2x - 5x2 ~L) 4y =2x - 5x2 (D) 4y =2x - 25x2
3. The amplitude of a damped oscillator decreases to 0.9 times its original magnitude in 5s. In another lOs
it will decrease to a times its original magnitude, where a equals :
(A) 0.7 ' (B) 0.81 (C) ,0.729 (D) 0.6

Refer Page no 242 section 12.12ofHCV

4. A sonometer wire of length 1.5m is made of steel. The tension in it produces an elastic strain of 1%.
,What is the fundamental frequency of steel if density and elasticity of steel are
7.7 x 103 kg/m 3 and 2.2 x 1011 Nlin2 respectively?
(A) 188.5 Hz (B) 178.2 Hz (C) 200.5 Hz (D) 770 Hz

2Pot •••••••....D '

····• ....•
5. P Po~···········,. r (­
'J

Vo
.
2vo
v

The above p-v diagram represents the thermodynamic cycle of an engine, operating with an, ideal
monoatomic gas. The amount of heat, extracted from the source in a single cycle is :

(A) Povo (B) ("213) Povo


, ~;)POVO . (D) 4povo

( ,
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerolse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

. 6. A hoop ofradius r and mass m rotating with an angular velocity COo is placed on a rough horizontal surface.
The initial ve~ocity of the centre of the hoop is zero. Wh;lt will be the velocity of the centre of the hoop
when it ceases to slip?

rco (B) rcoo . , /rco o


(A) 4,o 3 ;c)T CD) rcoo

7.: : An ideal gas enclosed in a vertical cylindrical container supports a freely moving piston of mass M. The
piston and the cylinder have equal cross sectional area A. When the piston is in equilibrium, the volume
ofthe gas is Vo and its pressure is Po. The piston is slightly displaced from the equilibrium position and
released. Assuming that the system is completely isolated from its surrounding, the piston executes a
simple harmonic motion with frequency.

1 AyPo
(A) 21t YoM
1 VoMPo
(B). 2n A2y (C) 2n
. 1)A'YP. MVo CD)
1JMV.
2n AyP o

8. e
If a pIece of metal is heated to temperature and then allowed to cool in a room which is at temperature
.eo the graph between the temperature T of the metal and time t will be closed to :
:''''

(A)~
TI \
o t ....... ·

~):j-~ (C):~ ~):I.~


o~
t- . . t­

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


'-

(- )
!l.mme>m
".m:w.~
2.
~
namEm
~j!\gm!l
3. ~D
., I!'PA~~
4.
o~~
IDWiQIt?j
1..
f }
(J
lEE-Physics
o
0: GRAVITATION:FORMULAE SHEET'
o
c' Universal law of Gravitation:
o. Any two particle in unive~se attra:9t each other due to the property called gravitational mass.
0 ' j
0" •0
ml r , . ,m2
o
o F::: Gm:m2 , where 0=.6.67 x 10- 11 Nm2 kg-2 is called universal gravitational constant.

o * Like electrostatic force, gravitational force is a central force, i.e. it acts along the line joining the two
interacting particles.
o Like electroStaticforce, gravitational iJ;lteractibn is also strictly atwo body interaction, i.e. fcirce between
*
o any two particls is independent ofthe nature ofmedium between them or any third particle present

o ,', ' ..'". ':


nearby. Hence superposition.Pt1?cjple is applicable here also.
"(. " ," I') ,
o * Like electrostatic force, gravitation force is also an inverse square force 1.e. Fcc? .

o G'ravitational field:
Any body creates an effect in the space surroundihg it, called its gravitational field. Any other body
() present in this space interacts witht~isfield and thereby experiences an attracti:v~ gravitational'force.
o Clearly gravitation field an a concept has an exact parallel with the concept ofelectric field. GraVitational
field intensity and gravitational potential are siririlarly defined.

~9
Gravitational field intensity ata point in gravitational field is defined as t..l:.e force per unit mass

experienced by a test mass kept at that point.

- F'
Eo :::.:......
m
. ,
Gravitational Potential at a point in gravitational field is defmed as the work done by an external agent
to
in moving aunit mass from infinite that pointwithout any acceleration. '

~r
(J
3j
j
Clearly the expressions for gravitational field CEo) and gravitational potential 01;y, will turn out to be
exactly ofthe same fonn as their electrostatic counterpart with mass replacing charge and Greplacing
1
J
9 j
(Ko r-
4n EO

91
9t For Fonnula conversion:

YI
() ,
Electrostatics" '
Q
Gravitation
M
r ~ K
y'! G

1
/, 1_-'-:':
\.f'e
{.'
'-~;
,"
'\
__
4 EO
__~~-"-~~~~~ 4nG

JEE-Physics

Point Charge Point Mass


kQ GM
E=­ E
G =r2­
r2
kQ -GM
V=­ V =-­
r G r
Unifonn charged ring Ring ofuniform mass distribution
kQx GMx

E= --;:----=--­
(r2 +X 2 )3/2 onaxis EG= (r2+x2)3/2 onaxis

r r

E is max. when x = J2 EG is max. when x = .fi

kQ '. kQ -GM -GM

v.= ~r 2'+x 2 on axIS • - atcenter


r.
V '= ~ 2
.G r· +x
2 on aXis.
r
at center

Unifonn linear charge . Uniform linear mass

"
, ""
'.
"
'. ''''''''
""\,,,,
""
'" G)"
".. "'.., "" +--;:-(cos.J3-cosa)
·r..····~··C!:£;';r·. krA. sin(CI.+ f}) ········f··A~\\ .
..J .' . p..

•••••••
. GA.(sina_sinj3)


•••••• ." kA.
-(cosf}-cosa)
.'
.~#.. r
r
(A,=mass per unit length)

Infinite Linear charge Infinite linear mass


00 00

~
r2

~
2
rl

A

B
'. .rl
A B
00 00 :a.
.:I.

2KA 2GA j
E=­ E=­ j
r
G r
ir
A~ 2G)'ln( ~)
, r

V -V =-2KAln..l. V,-V
~.
B A rl

Infinite Sheet of charge

E= 28 0
cr

Infinite Sheet of mass


cr
E = -x4nG
. G 2 = 2nGcr
t·I.
~
(cr = mass per unit area) ~
J
--------------~------~--~-
'" /
JEE-Physics

* Note:- Gravitational force is always attractive and hence gravitational potential is always -ve. (for a
repulsive force potential is postive). This can be explained from the sign of Wex! in moving the test charge
from 00 to the point under consideration.
.,
** Since EGPoints from, B towards A potential increases as we move from A to B. Just like electric
potentical gravitationaipotential also increases opposite to field direction.

Uniformly charged hollow shpere Hollow sphere of uniform mass

Charge Q, radius R Mass M , radius R


distance offield point from center r distance offield point from center r

Case I r> R

~
GM

E= kQ

EG=7

V =_GM
G ­
r2 r
V= kQ
r

CaseII r <R

/ ".
~ EG e:: 0

E=b V =_GM
G -
(~
R
V= kQ
r
(
Uniformly charged solid sphere Uniformly solid sphere
( ~.
mass M, radius R mass M, radius R
( , j kQ GM
E = 2,r>R Ea , = -2-,r>R
J r r
.] GM
kQr
/"
~.
I
f.
R 3 ,r<R.

kQ , r>R .
R3 r,r<R

GM
V= V = - - r>R
( r a r '
\..

f kQ (3R 3.....:r2 ),.r> R -GM (3R3 _r2), r> R


~ 2R3 2R 3
j
:iI
1
E~----~------------~~~----~-------------
{
r!,
RACE
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014
() CAREER
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) ReQular AnalysIs through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
()
RACE # 29 DISCUSSION DATE: 16/06/2013 PHYSICS
o We know that the motion of a simple pendulum,swinging in air, dies out eventually. Why does it happen?
o This is because the air drag and the friction at the support oppose the motion of the pendulum and
dissipate its energy gradually. The pendulum is said, to execute damped oscillations. In damped
o 'i
!

oscillations, the energy of the system is dissipated continuously; but, for small damping, the oscillations
() remain approximately periodic. The dissipating forces are generally the frlctional forces. To understand
the effect of such external forces on the motion of an oscillator, let us consider a system as shown in
o figure. Here a block of mass m connected to an elastic spring of spring constant k oscillates vertically. If
o
CJ
the block is pushed do';;n a little and releaSed, its anr1ar frequency of oscilIaiion is ~.
,\

However, in practipe, the surrounding medium (air) will exert a damping force on the motion of the
o block and the mechanical energy of the block-spring: system will decrease. The energy loss will appear
o as heat of the surrounding medium (and the block also). '
()
x . . Rigid support
c
c Spring
",
":.:"" ... ~:. *. "4~ ":.
"

o .
':..:' ;..
.... _~~bk
!.. ..~ .."
'It

c :" ::"::-:: ,;;):(:/ ,",


.' ••.' •••••• ::{ • Surrounding
: .. :.:. ,:..: .• :.; ". medIum
r'
\.../
, ..." ....... '.....

o The damping force depends on the nature of the suhounding medium, If the block is immersed in a
,liquid, the magnitude of darnping will be much greater and the dissipation of energy much faster. The
damping force is generally proportional. to v~lQ.Gity_of the..bob and aQts.....QPl2Qsit~~ction of
, v~locityrIfthe danipini1Qr~noted
, ,byd F , we have F = -b v ---------- (i)
___.-_ _~
'--'-'.,
where the positive constant b depends on characteristics of the medium (viscosity, for example) and the
o( " size and shape of the block, etc. Eq. (i) is usually valjd onIY_!Qr small velocHy.·'·--------" ,
.' ,1,When the mass m atiach~dt~ th~~pring and relea;~d:th;spri~g elo~e a little and the mass will
will
settle at some height. This position, shown by 0 in figure, is the eqUilibrium position of the mass. If the
c mass is pulled down or pushed up a little, the restoring force on the block due to the spring is Fs = -kx,
. where x is the displace~ntQfthemass from its equilibrium position. Thus, the total force acting-on the
mass at any time t, i~.F=-kx -bv,
If aCt) is the acceleration of'mass at time t, then by Newton's Law of Motion applied along the direction
" of motion, we have .
(
,-,
m aCt) == -k x(t) - b v(t) --------------------- (ii)
Here we have dropped the vector notation because vile are discussing one-dimensional motion.
Using the first and second derivatives of x (t) for v (9 and a (t) respectively, we have

'.,'

f
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exen:lse
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 201
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

2
m d x = _ b dx - k X --------------------------- (iii)
de dt
The solution ofEq. (iii) describes the motion of the block under the influence of a damping force which •.
is proportional
. to velocity. The solution . is
found to be of the form .
x(t) =A e-btl2mcos (ro't + $) ------------------ (iv)

where a is the amplitude and ro' is the angular frequency of the damped oscillator given by,

0l'=1km _4mb'. 2 -------.:.------------- (v)


. . .

In this function, the cosine function has a period 2rrJro' but the function x(t) is not strictly periodic
because of the factor e-b tl2m which decreases continuously with time.ij:owever, if the decrease is
in one time period T, the motion represented ~y Eq. (iv) is approximately periodic.
The solution, Eq. (iv), can be graphically represented as shown in figure below. We can regard it as a.
cosine function whose amplitude, which is Ae-btl2m, gradually decreases with time.

10

5

'P'
'5< 0

-5

-100 5 fo t '15 20 25

Now the mechanical energy of the undamp~ oscillator is .!. kA 2 • For a damped oscillator, the aIIlPULUUw

. 2 .

is not constant but depends on time. For small damping, we may use the same expression but regard

amplitude as A e-btl2m.

E()t ='12 k A2e- b tlm'. .)


---- ------,..----------..:.(Vl

Equation (iv) shows that the total energy of the system decreases exponentially with time. Note

small damping means that the dimensionless ratio (.J~ )is ~uch less t~an 1.

=
Ofcourse, an expected, if we put b 0, all equations of a damped oscillator in this section reduce to

corresponding equations of an undamped oscillator. On the basis of the value of ~ =(21)


, '---­
. damned (\~f"iJ1<>t1",.. ~h_ 1...
( JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

/' '.
'. "
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

/ .. e Overdamped (~ > 1): The system returns (exponentially decays) to eqUilibrium without oscillating.
\,~
Larger values of the damping ratio l; return to eqUilibrium more slowly.
• Critically damped (s::: 1): The system returns to eqUilibrium as quickly as possible without oscillating.
This is often desired for the damping of systems such as doors.
s
"r"

• Underdamped (0 < < 1) : The system oscillates (at reduced frequency compared to the undamped,
l
\.
/' case) with the amplitude gradually decreasing to zero.
• Undamped (l; =0): The system oscillates at its natural resonant frequency (roo)'

L The amplitude of a damped oscillator decreases to 0.9 times its original magnitude in 5s. In another lOs
it will decrease to :rN times its original magnitude, where:rN equals: [JEE Mains 2013]
/'
(A) 0.7 (B) 0.81 .60.729 . (D) 0.6
,r-'" 2. The figure shows position time graph for the particle updergoing oscillations. Choose the correct matching
" for the value of l;.

@
~ 00
S .[ \ 2
>< -0.5 --'--\.-

t",
-1.0! V ! )'L ! I I
'".. o
I

2 4 6
I

8
I

10
I

12 ' 14

(A) For (1) ~l; =0; for (2)~ l; =0.5; for (3) ~l; =1.5; for (4) ~l; =1
("
\.
(B) For (1) ~l; =0; for (2) ~l; ~ 1.5; for (3) ->l; = 1; for (4) ~l; == 0.5
Jf1'For (1)~~ =0;for(2)~ l; = 0.5; for (3) ~l; ='1; for (4) ~l; =1.5
(D) For (1) ~~ =1.5; for (2)~ l; =1; for (3) ~l; = 0.5; for (4) ~l; = 0
r' 3~ Which of the phenomel).(m is an example of damped oscillation?
... ,

(A) Stopping of fan aft¢T it has been switched off

fl3'j Working.of a shock absorber in a motor-cycle

(C) Stopping of a ball when it is rolled over a rough surface


~ (D) Reduction ofmaximum height of a nibber ball when rebounded by the floor after successive collision
('. f: J..: . . Viscous force acting on a sphere falling in a liquid of co~efficient of viscosity 11 is given by Fviscous=61CT\rv.
(' W1<w.Jf the spring constant of the system shown in the figure is 300n N/m and mass of the block is 2kg,the
<....;)1 ~~ ~'"' •..\I.atio of natural frequency and damping ratio is given by:- .
/..Jtt ~f{\r' .

~'JJL -:(p ~~
(') .. ~
,-.!JV' 0 U

\..

/
'-- J!4!OO 100
(A)l1r (B)10011r , nr (D) 1t11r

f
t
.. ~

,
JEE (MAIN + ADVANCED) 2014

RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerelst


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE; I
l

A mass of 2 kg on a spring of spring constant 200N/m oscillates with initial amplitude 20cm. After 10
sec the amplitude is lOcm. What will be the amplitude after 30 seconds ? ~
(A) 2 cm %2.5 cm (C) 4 cm (D) 5 cm
.. ~
Calculate the value of damped frequency.

,~
6.
,
.W ,/100.:.. (.en2 )2
. 100
)B) 100 _ (.en2
100
t (C) ,/100- 2.en2
100

(D) None

,
7.~7.
~..., Th.e energy at t =30 second for the above system is given by ~

(A) 0.1250 (B) 0.03125 )91,0.0625 (0) None

'I

8. What must be the value of Sin automobile suspensions?

(A)=O ~<C;<1 (C)t= 1 (D) >1 J

9. It was found that a spring oscillating in a liquid A stops earlier than when it was oscillating in another ,J

liquid B. Which liquid will offer greater resistance to the ball falling in it. .
. ~iquid A . (B)'Uquid B ' . .A

,.;)'1

(C) Both offer same resistance . (D) Nothing can be said r

.f
'.1"
RELEVANT QUESTIONS FROM (HCV,)
. I . ' . :.1
,
Chapter 31 (Capacitors)

Questions for short answers: ALL


r

.
Objective-I : ALL

Objective-2 : ALL \...


I

~-,
Excercise:l, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, ';]8, 21, 24, 25, 26, 2728, 29, iJ, 34,35, 38, 39,
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.. J
~l
(1

I .

'J

~!'

(
~I
.;
:1

',J

~
i
~.
.

rJ
j
EQD..-a
FILL THE ANSWER HERE

3.~m
~

!
1. 2. ~J,4~f~' .~~ 4·DDED \1

5. au.emf?!
,
6·~Em 7. rA1I~mD3 8.~
. (\ .&QIJil,.ItiI$r:;:rllliNl l
( '"
(

RACE

JEE(Main + Advanced) 2014


(
Cf4REER I
ENTHUSIAS1COURSE
c KOTA (RA3ASTHAN)" RegularAnalysis~hroughContinuous Exercise PHASE :1
'DISCUSSI,ON DATE': 19/06;:2013
ei RACE # 30" PHYSICS

( 1.,' a
A unifonn chainof mass M and length L is lying on frictionless table 'in such a way that its 1/3 part is '
(J . hanging vertically down. The workdone in pulling the chain up the table is
~I' ,).,' .

(I
, (A) MgL,
9
, p1~~L ,(C) 2MgL
, 27"
(D) 2MgL
, 3

rI
c
-I' 2. The equation of a plane progressive wave ISY = 0.02 sin 8" [t-;01 When it is reflectedat .rarer

(I
I 'medium
.
(medium
' .
with
. . higher: velocity) at x = 0, its amplitude becomes 75% of its previolls
" .
value.
.
The
.

, 'equatiori of the reflected wave is', '

, , (A) 'Y == O.02Sii181t[t


, ",,20
7'~J' . (B)Y=O,02Si11 8++ :0]
I'
(I ", ,/y = +0.015 sin81r[t + ~J' ,(1) y= -0.015 sin 81r[t +~J',
,~)'" ,'" 20 " 20
, ,
. . ' .

3.' Statement-l: C~nductivity of a metallic conductor decreases with increase in temperature. "

.~ ,"

State~ent-2: Ort increasing temperatu~colliSi~n' 6felectrons becomes more frequent an~r "
of free electrons in, the' metallic conductOr decreases. ' , ','
,,(A)
~"-----=' " ,,~-~,',
Staterrient-l is Tnie"Stateinent.:..2 is True
",
;St~tement-2
" ,
is a 90rtect
, ' ' for "
~xplanation State~ent-:1.

',,(B)'StrJ,temeht-:l is ~rue, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is pot a correct explanation ,for Statement-I.

, " %statem~nt-l is Tnie~'Statement':"2 is False. :' "


. . . ." .',. .
(D)Stateinent-,-1 is False, State!l1ent~2 is True~ , " , ', , , , '
,4. 'When a source ofSouI).d of frequency 600Hz moves with velocity 30 rrils towards a stationary observer, ,
the apparent wavelength is A. If the same source is kept stationary and the observer is moved with same
~el6city 30 ml'$ toward~ the sourc~,thenapparentwavelerigth is A... then find A'- A (in ~m) forspeed of .
sound in air to be 340 mis. $ u-, .
5.' A block is placed on,~ horizontal platfonnvibrating up and down, simple haimonic~l1Y. It is observed that .
. the block loses its contact withthe pl~tforin wh~nits ailg~lar frequency is 5radls.The arripihude of vi-
b'ration can not bel~ssthan'A' cm, then ~~d t~e value.of AktO U") . .

",
t
\;..,
JEE {Mall; + Advanceil) 2014 '

RACE

Regular Analysis through ContlnUoU$ Exercise


EN1'HUsiAST COURSE
PI:IASE:I '

6. A 1:'5 V battery of variable EMF~fnegligible:resistance'is conneetedto a ~~rewifuaresistance of'


900 Q. Figl).re shows the potential' difference across battery as function of time. Find,total charge (in C)
transferred by battery duringthesetwo hours. '
b L.
tJ.V...lV),

'~

.. ,
0 1, 2hr • t,
j'i
'ii:.
........:J\

7. Figure shows an automobile circuit. Howmuch power (in watt) is dissipated by the automobile circuit when '
sWitches A, B,' C and P are all closed. '

Hom, ,
' r.H.on 2.- 0 \0
,\ T- "1;400 Head light
--...!...--E-( -:'-i~, bPi' ~l
,-wMM - . tV ,
. ~&') .~ .
""~:OV
'-
',' \B, '«,C ~ ,\~,
<\<'
,

,',.
, '
,-
",A',
,

r "-, D'
"

'. "

?.rzoh
,v ,Taillight

i
, ~.\

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1.'~
c , '
2. ~"""
A 3:'~

"4·flcTJl:ttmJmmt;mmm, 5. I
~------:--'

6. L ' 17., I ,1
ALLI"
CAREER INSTITUTE
K TA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUS'IAST COURSE
PHASE: I
,"
\..
RACE # 31 DISCUSSION DATE: '24/06/2013 PHYSICS
RACE ON ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENTS
I 1. In the given post office box, the selected resistances P and Q are 1000n and IOn respectively
when the value of R is selected as 311n then 31Sn then galvanometer deflects in same direction. If
(J now 318n is selected it deflects in the opposite direction to the previous deflection. Then' :

/~ I
"-I

"I
.-"
A
.r 1000 100

1
0 p0

o
2
10 B 10

0
2
100
0 Q 0

0
x

1000 Ie
r:pI::E-----,

5 [10
mOO 0
20 20 50
l:;l
\\ !! R W ....u
rJ D 50(l0 2000 2000 1000! 500 200 200 100 M
00.
..:::r:..
'

~ \0 0 m o o 0 C::::J ..,..­
f
J \ '
0

~kl
! '
l~ .
:J t.....

(~,I (a)
0,,(
:'~" .,' (A)JPe unknown resista,nce may lie bet~een 3.11~ and'3.1Sn.

; ;!~the unknown resista~ce may lie between 3.lsn, and 3.1Sn.

,)
(C) unknown resistance is greater thail3.1Sn.
) (D) if the deflection with 3lSn is also in the same direction, to that of 31S0 then it is sure that the
\(' unknown resistance lies between 3.ISn and 3.1Sn. ' '
i:l . Paragraph for Question Nos. 2 & 3
The figure below illustrates two ways of using an ammeter and a voltmeter to measure the resistance R
\;

) of an unknown resistor. If both meters are ideal that is, if the resistance of the ammeter is zero and the
\1 resistance of the voltmeter is infinite the two circuits give the same result. The resistance is simply the
r' , V.'
"t
( ,

voltmeter reading divided by the ammeter reading : R =T .But a real ammeter has nonzero resistance

t
( ,

2.
R A, and a real voltmeter has finite resistance R y •

Suppose that you set up the circuit of figure a and obtain meter readings VI and i l . Express the resistance
']J
( . R in terms of these readings and Ry :­

;r e

~ ;(
):
'( ;
I'
f \
'1
£ .

"-(

\- ,}

V1R y - l.1R2y VIRy +1.1R2y


J VIRy VIR"
~IRy-Vl ~)iRy+~ (C) i1R y + VI (D) i1R y - VI
J

.'
'-- '
I .

(
RACE '
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Analysis through Contlnuous Exerolse PHASE : I

3. :,Nowyou setQP the circuit of figme b and obtain meter readings V2 and i2 • Express R in terms of these
. readings and RA •
E
i
I

/" ...............

~ RA : R
,
". "

!tAuAAIAAAJ
NYunnn
(R=O) I

!..•...........
~ ,i
r..-·-·-·..·..(R-;;~y·!
I i r-<V}-, '! l.
L-.+--I R.. ~
, HI"n . :
fa ......................... _.........}

I
:1
V. 'i "
. V2 'i

(A) i+RA "./~-RA (C) ~+RA . (D) None of these I


2
).fJ 12 V2
Paragraph for Question 4 to 7
x

A~DDOODD$
I. 10.00 100 -10 10 100 1000
B
""
x
i
;".....,

r r
c "
oo[n:bOoDO
o·'\ 1 2· 2 5 I· 10 20 20 50 ' E
, \. I

D 5000 '20002000 Ifoo1 S{,)200 2001000

mo~}] DO}] , ,
A'i ..TK, ~· I. IB'
K,

"
Ii is a compact fomi of the'Wheatstone bridge. It consists of compact resistance so arranged that different
desired values of resistances may be selected in the three rums of Wheatstone bridge, as shown in figure.

Each
. .
of the arms AB and Be contains three resistances of 10, 102 and 103 n.. respectively. These are .!
t
, . R 1 i

called the'ratio rums. Using these resistances the ratio R~ can be made to h~ve any of the following
values : 100 : 1, 10 : 1, 1 : 1, 1 : 10 or 1 : 100.

The arm AD is a complete resistance box containing resistances from 1 to 5000 n. The tap keys Kl and . ' .'

~ are also provided in the post office box. The key KJ is internally connected to the point A and the

key ~ to the point B (as shown by dotted line in the figure). The unknown resistance X is connected

between C and D, the battery between C and the key K J and the galvanOI~eter between D and the key

~. The circuit shown in figure (A) is exactly the same as that of the Wheatstone blidge shown in figure.

Hence,. the value of the unknown resistance is given by. . .

. X=R R'J
. (R J 2

Note, that:
!'
. . , '. R '0'

* The accuracy of the post office box depends on the choice of ratio arm 'D 2 •
c
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
( ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
• ",' ,-, ."y •. . " " ' . - ; .-,

(
* If R2 : Rl is 1 : 1, then the value of the unknown resistance is obtained within :t 10,
c:
(
* . If the ratio ~ : R1is selected as! : 10, thenthe ynkn0Wll resistan<;1' X =~ (1~) is accurately meas~d
;

upto±O.lO.
C
C * If the ratio R2 : R1is adjusted to 1 : 100, then the value of unknown resistance X = R ( 1 ~O) is obtained
to an accuracy of ±O.O 1 O.
C
Them aj::>rroun::::es ofenorare the o::mnecting w ±tes, uncJearresistance pJugs, change .xl res:istance
C due to .:bu]e heating, and the msensi1::::iir.it¥ ofthe Wheatstone hridge •
.. These m ay be :tan oved by usmg thjck connecting w .ires, cJean pJugs, ke§pmg the cin::ux.on fbrver,y
C b~fpeOOds (to avojd .:bu}e h·eating) and ca1cuJating the 00nsit::hT.it¥. .
C ·~On:l~atth&sithr;jt¥~tlL~;in..~:,th~~~ tt:~~ ...l? iS~9:;)cP ~~o~:the
.:resistance S .
C 4. ~nthe po~t Office box, if value of resistance in ratio ~ R2 is choosen as 100, for the first reading what
value ofresistance ~n ratio armR 1 must be choosen?
C ;A) 10 0 (B) 1000 . ' (C) ~OOO 0 . (D) Anyone .
C 5. . !he unkno~ resistanc~ is kno:;vn to.has value between 10 0 to 20 O. Inw~ich c~sg,t~~t office box 1-.A
I,S, ~st senSItive for reSIstance In ratio arm R2 ? 4- ~ ~ ~.~ 0 Sl ~ /r#1.f:.
C )!<J 100 . . (B) 100 n . (C) 1000 n (D) Same in all the case .
6. . Complete the table and hence calculate the approximate value of unknown resistance 'X',
C
R lies In-between X == R (R2/~)
S.No. R1 (0) R2 (0)
C 1(0) . 1I(n) 1(0)· II (0)
1 10 10 16 17
.~ ,,;~5
C 2 100 10 . 163 , 164
3 1000 10 1638 1639·
C 7.' Column-I shows some of the errors/source of errors while Column-II represents possible remedies.
o Mat~h them correctly :­
Column-I· Column-IT
o (A) Joule heatir~g '" . I t b . ( p ) Thick connecting wire
(B) Insensitivity of PO Box f2- (Q) Switching on the circuit for short time
o (C) . Deflection ofgafvanomeier in single3 (R). Adjustment of value of ratio ~ R2
o direction for all values of resistance R (S)' Presence of infinite resistance in
post office box
o 8. The shown circuit of a post office box while using it for measuring the unknown resistanCe. All the keys
except the two 100 ohms in the first row arid both 2 ohm along with the 5 ohm are not used while
o measuring the resistance of t~e unknO\vn wire. Find the resistance of unknown wire in ohm.
o x
R, --1S
o AFt!
R, B

o
o
1
0 0 IT§[{ 0 0 ll92J
~~~~. , '~~~.oo
\' ,,,p,.,...,u - sv
gy.­
5t 1000
'~9OO020()O 1)001 200 200
o 'DD ~Ol]
A,I \g-K<' .II".:.:!JT I8'
o
,
( '. . i

( .
'RACE
JEE (Main + Advanclld) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

9. The circuit diagram given.in the figure shows the experimental setup for the measurement of unknq~n
resistance by using a meter bridge. The wire connected between the points P & Q (PQ = 100 cm) has
uniform cross-sectional area and its resisti vity is directly pro ortional to the distance from .oint P. Null
point is obtained with the jockey 'with, I an m the given position .. Gn mterchanging the positions
Rl and R2 in the gaps the jockey has to be displaced through a distance.6. from the previous position
along the wire to establish the null point. If the ratio of R/R2 =3, find the-value of .6.(in cm). Ignore any
end corrections. [Take -V3 = 1.7] ,. tif.I TC\ .
. 35 ..:9-'
Rl R2

10~ Find out the net emf of the three batteries between A & B when the point P is the null point, measured
by the potentiometer arrangement shown in the figure .

.-----1\ il ~
al i t; J'f,

2V In

::? 6.50 rl~

A I'~ In ).+(~

6V

'Ii
';,
;:,

~ j,

·!l.

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


l.~ 2. 1tfflW~Ii~~'W 3. ~~~,
.,. ' -i\'!i 4.~~~ ~'H
~~~, ~~~J.t ~~~~

5.~ ~[ ~.

8. mmmmmmmmmm 9·mmClmmmmmmm
10. mm~ml~~~':1~~~
~P.".:::~-t~~'·~:~~~~~~~;'y'~·
j,

ALLE
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
I liRA

CAREER .... .".....


,ENTHUSIAST COURSE
I KOTA (RAJAST:HAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
,­ , RACE #. 32 DISCUSSION DAT~' : 26/06/2013 PHYSICS
,I 1~ ,tn the figure, the( L-shaped shaded piece is cut from a metal plate of uniform thickness. The point that
"~I
c()rresponds to the center of mass of the L-shaped piece is :

J
,I,

,I

' -I
J
)
'(A)l . '~-(C)3 (D) 4 i
J. '. Paragraph for question nos. 2 to 4 '," ,'
I

'l
(~-,
A small insect crawls in the direction of electron ruift along bare 'copper wi~e that carries current of ' a
2.56 A. It travels with the drift speed of the electron in the wire of uniform cross section area 1mm2•
, Number of ~ree electrons f?r c~~~r =8; =
1922/cc ~ ~e~istivity of copp~r 1.6 x 10-8 a m . .

2.' How much time would the Insect take to ~~mcm If It crawls at the drift speed of the electrons In the

wire?
J.A'f50 sec (B) 5 sec (C).5000 sec (D) None of these

3!' ,W~tis order of theaver,age time of collision for fre,,'e electrons of copper? "

~ 10.,-14 sec ' 17


(B) 10- sec 11
;(C) 10- sec , (D) lO-S sec
. 4., If th,~ e' sect starts from the point of zero potential at ~,=O, it reaches a point of __, potential after 10 sec.
, '{Af80 IlV' , '(Br- 80 IlV '~(C) 160 J-lV (D) -160J-lV
Paragraph for Ques!ion No 5 to 7
A fan operates at 200 'volt (DC) consuming 1000 W when running at full speed. It's internai wiring has
resistance 1 a. When the fartruns ~t full speed, its speed becomes constant. This is because the torque
,due to magnetic field inside the fan is balanced by th~ torque due to air resistance on the blades of the fan
to
and torque due friction between the fixed part and 'the shaft of the fan. The electrical power going into
the fan is spent (i) in the tntemal resistance as heat, c~l1 it PI & (ii) in doing work against internal friction
, and air resistance producing heat, souQd etc., call it P2 • When the coil of fan rotates, an emf is also
induced in the coil. This.ppposes the external emf applied to send the current into the fan. This emf is
called back-emf, call itie'. ' "
, Answer the following questions when the fan is running at full speed.
, The:current flowing.into the fan and the vaiue of back ~ 'e' is:
,(~) 200 A. 5 volt' (B) 5 A. 200 volt ,,' JI?!J 5 A. 195 volt (D) 1 A. 0 volt
The value of power Ip is ' f ,.
',(1\) 1000 W' , " 1 (B) 975 W ,~5 W (D) 200 W
~~yalue of power 'P2 ' is ' '~
\,:19900 W , jB5
975 W , ' ( e ) 2 5 W .(D) 200 W
~.. ' ' FILL THE ANSWER HERE
2.
At
mm.1
~~I!f ..
3.~ 4.

(
ALLE.
~CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise


JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # '33 DISCUSSION DATE : 28/06/2013 PHYSICS

1. A bob of mass m is attached at one end of a string of length l. Other end of the string is fixed at pointO.
Bob is rotating in a circular path of radius f. in horizontal plane about 0 with constant speed v, as shown
in the figure. The average force exterted by string on the bob during its­
" 'm~
(~) half revolution will: be ne
2
REB)' half reVOlution will be 2mv
." ' " Ttl

2
, (C) one fourth revolution will be .fimv A
, , Ttl

.,.....(:Bfone revolution will be zero

, Paragraph for Qu~tion 2 to 4


A stationary body of mass M explodes into four'identical fragments in free space, 'Three of them fly
mutually perpendicular t~ each other with same kinetic energy K. "
2. "Speed of centre of mass of system after ~xplosion will be

~IJ"'
/ (A) ..J2MK (C) 2.J6MK ,AO)zero'

~~
3. Speed of fourth fragment is

(A»)~ ,~n%>2f§ (C) 6)~ (0) 2)S: '


,:­
, ' M

:­) 4. Total energy released in explosion is


(A) 3K
In the given
(B) 4K' (C) 5K
circuit A, Band C represent circ·uitel~ments.It
)B16K.,
may be battery or resistor. and +, - sign
5. . . '. . . . '

) indicates high potential & low potential respectively,_ Match the entries in column-I with correct entries

'I in column-II.

,
(

~" ~-,

~~
~
'I
)
'~
(A)
~$(B) I'~4'f:~
=W
Column I
~. is <S. . (P)
Column II
Curre~t must be clockwise
(Q) . :B'maybeabattery
~I , (C) If 'B' IS reslstor.;,P
.. ' '. . (R) C' must be a battery .
. ;I (1)
) (D)· If 'c' is resistor .- .$,TJ~' (S) Cun:ent must
.
be antic10ckwtse ,

I'T'\ . '''0 i ..... I1 .,1'h.", h<>1'1'''',",1


'""­
JEE;(~aln+ Advanced) ,2014
":
, ',"
'R'·a'CE
'.: ' . { ,.' i
Regi,lar.Analys~illfoughC:QntiIlU~Us Elmlilia ,<
ENTHUSIAST:COURSE,
PHASE'.: I
(

6. " The centre ,of mass of given system is 'at a distance from geometrical ceritre of bigger body. x "
'Column I ( Q ~\ i.6 (\eY.)P.>t ,Us Column.".I1, "', c
". ' '~i"("~rf\tJl'/" , ' "
.(
(A) (DiSJ6~ one circular cavity) (P) x=O or x > R

,j~

'(B) (Disk w~th two circular cavity) (Q) Centre 'of mass lies outside the bigger body C
, ,

,
'
ft2'
-
,;'
.' ......, ,
"
.
(

. .... Ie
(C) . (Disk with one square cavity) , (R) O<x<R,
, '~f;' c
C
(D) (Disk with one attached ' (S) Centre or mass lies within bigger body
circular mass)

!</b (T) None of these ' c


"7. A square frame is made of four identical unIform rods 'of length 3 m and mass Yl kg each. What is IC
'the moment of inertia ab~ut axis which i~ parallel to' the' diagonal and is passing through a vertex r'
\.
in kg rri. 2 ? ' ' II'\.- ' t ,"
, <ti;, p)~ ').. , I.­

~:

~~:,.,

('''
'-'

,'FILL'THEANSWER HERE
.1~'~ ",3.rxmE:D
,'15.' '._'-'.-'-,_.
• p.~?lqr;~~ ',·mmmmmraa i
r'
"-"

"--../
..._LIM R ":'.A"'·C'' ' ,':' E· JEE (MaIn +Advanced) 2014
" . . . . -~ " .
.~ " ,. " "

CAREER INSTITUTE , '


~~. ".
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis throug~ Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
RACE # 34 DISCUSSION DATE : 01/07/2013 PHYSICS

1. Aprojectile is projected in x-y plane with velocity vo' At top most point of its trajectory projectile
explodes into two identica~fr~ts. Both the fragments la~_~~l!!!1Itane91:l~ly on ground~.stick
there. Taking pOInt orprojection as origin and R as range of projectile if explosion had not taken place.
Which of the following can not be position vectors of two pieces, when they land on ground.

'~&\ ~
~'kV ~ ,

'~P~
~.;. ,

---- .. -.. --_. --­


~ .......
F- ,A
R-:- 3R-:­ /A RA A R"
2 l 'T l (B) Ol,2Ri (C) Rf -Rk,Rf +Rk '-~ 2Ri+ k,Ri -2 k
(A) 2
2. A student was given the experiment to measure the emf of a unknown cell usirigJ29~~~tiometer. He
cheated result and wrote the observation arbitrarilya~d was caught. Whichreadlng hefpeclthe teacher to
arrive at the conclusion that he cheated?
-"1'

,f

.. !
S.N. value of rheostat Nuilpoint
1. , Rl 50cm
2. , R2 60cm
",
3. ' Rs 70cm
4. R4 80 em

lOV (value cheated)


:~
d ,Paragraph for Question 3 to 5
(C) 3 (D) 4

C" Two rods A and B of same cross-sectional area A and'length l connected in series between a source
= =
(TI 100°C) and a sink (T2 nOC) as shown in figUre. The rod is laterally insulated.

A B
Tl
lOO·C
3K LK T2
O·C
x
- .. -.--.~"
I . e
(
3. The ratio of thermal resistance of the rod is

w4 RA 1
) -=-
Ra 3
(B)-=
RA
Ra
3 RA __3
(C) RB - 4
RA
(D) RB - 3
-i
4. IfTAand T~are the temperature drop across the rod A and B then
(
\,
i. ,AA . 1 .
~) TB'-'=3' . (B) Ta
TA ' .. 3
=1 (C)
. TA
TB ='4
3 TA
(D) TB - 3
-i
5. .. IfG~ and Os are the ~emperaturegr.~dielJts ac;ross the rod A and:a th~n
';Ah =! tn\ 3 /~\ GA _ 3 ~,GA 4

c
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
.~"

C.E
~ Continuous exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
:I
. " .'~. '\ ..,:.' ... :.t~ :. c' ....:, .. :' .: , ' . " ',", . , '
6•. ' '.' E~ch ofthe'folu; whe.els in columnl has an outer ring having radius.R and mass m.Othetthan the outer
ring th~ wheels comprise Of some ul1iform rods (each of mass m and length R) or some lamina (having
.. 'the'sarri~ mass,~). Column U giyes r::~f\gyration about axis p~ssing through centre of ring
perpen(ilCu!a,r to Its plane. rr-:-~ k't- J. , .
. ..'.', ColuJnn~I: 'Wheels· 'C..--=-~ Column-II: Radius of gyration .
f!:l\,.l
(A) \l) - P- (P) RJ!

(B)
EBS (Q)
'R [IT
'118

,.'.{~!<' One disc + ring p (R)


R
J2

(D) Outer ring + half disc + one rod 0 ., (S) R~


it !. '

R;,j
,(T) J3 ,
, .
1

7. 'jA cricket ball of mass 160 g is moving horizontally directly towards a batsman. Its speed just before it
'hits the bat is 30 mls. It leaves the bat at 40 mls at 90° to its original direction. Find the magnitude of the l:<
impulse (in N-s) iIl}p~ed to the ball. ' t-J.--.s .$F
8. Two persons A and B each of mass 100 kg are on a frictionless horizontal surface. Person A at rest is
~ ,b~ldi~g.~.~l;?ck,~f mas~ 50kg. sudtienly puslles the block with some velocity (v)toward~ the per~on B .1 r '.
'approachmg 'at'a velocIty of 5 mls. Bcatches the' block & slows down. Now the separatlOn between A\.·
and B becomeS'-'ecmstanCFiiid the'speed v (inm/s);' "'\ ~)~ •. .
(
\.

-
I GO
!

!tJ()'
p'/
'
<1

~jf.:/'
••'. •

"'.
,',
i

./.~;f;
,-,.1,.
';,
,I " "
.: ..

/,

FILL THE
.
ANSW'ER HERE
',:

1.~"'!' 2·am~
5.~¢_ , , 6.
tM}h~~ :,~;<.1}',;\GJ:'f,~l
RACE
d
#35'·
. KOTA'(RAJASTHAN)' !u,.I:A§.I;
~

DISCUSSION DATE :'03/07/2013


JEE (Main +Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIASrCOURSE
PHASE: I '

PHYSICS

Qae#ion No.·1 to 5
; Principle: The electric discharge takes place in air or gases

at pointed conductors. If a hollow conductor is in contact with

an
other mne?cnnductor, then as charge is supplied to the

inner conductor, the hollow conductor continues accepting

'I the charge irrespective of the fact, howsoeverlargeits potential

. may grow. The charge immediately shifts to o~ter surface of

the hollow conductor.

.•• Construction: Figure shows the va.n de, Graffgenerator

schematically. An insulating column supports' highly d


c . polished hollow spherical c(mduc~orS:
" '.... .... ' .
.
~

A long narrOw belt (charge c%)ye)'()r belt) of some insulating

materiallike:r:t:Il?ber, si1~;.2.r~ay~Thpassed over the puleys PI

c and P~. , ' ........ ---7 . .' . . .. ' .' . . '.. . " , . ' ....
.

. The pi.Illey PI isro~~~d b~~an~!~ctI}~ motor so that t\1e belt run overthe puI,leys PI and'P2 continuously.
o Two'metallic combs are used to serVe as a charge spmy and charge collecting comb.. The lower charge a
spraying comb is hel d at a very high PO~!~~y'~PQ!~nt!~!gf.r.!.~~Ily.~Qk;V by conneCting it to~highvol tag;;:-­
'd.c, supply. ., ' . "......._... .

c The arrangement of the ion source, target and high vacuum unit are; ther,e to use the high potential
('
\..../
attained
. -.
for accelerating
' . '
the ions and then. making them initiate
1 .
nuch:;ar reactions between the ions and
target. .. ,'
t"
........ , / : Working:. . . . .
'... .... .

, . . , ' t" ",' . ,

(i) Through the process of corona discharge ~lectric ch.arge sprayed 6n.the" moving insuladng belt
c which resides over its outer surface. As the belt mOyes" this charge is carned upwards mechan{caJlyto
c within the hollow spherical conductor S. Then it is collected again by another sharP metallitcomb
(
through the process ofcorona discharge which immediately transferS it'to the spherical shell. This process
iS'repeated again and againwhiCk~esultS ina contin~:ous increase in the potential of the ho1l6~ spherical
( conQygting-shell. . -.-----.- ,.... - - ' - - ..-.----.. .
.~.,.. ,". :,. .
, . . .'

( (ii) With the increase of charge on the sphere, due to ionisation of the sUlTounding air, its leakage also
becomes faster. The maximum potential to which the sphex:e can be raised is x:eached; when the rate ofloss
C of charge due to leakage becomes equal to the rate at which charge is transferred to the sphere. '
ln order to avoid the leakage of charge from the sph~re, the generator iscompietely enclosed inside an
C
~arth connected steel tank; which is filled with air under pressure.' . .
( • (iii) If the particles such as protons; deuterons etc are' now 'generated in the discharge tube D (whose
C . lower, end is earthed and upper end is inside the hollbwcondilcting spher~ S) then they get accelerated
down the tube, at the other end 't~ey hitthi! target with large kin~tic energy and bring about nuclear
( 4isintegrado;"-' ....... '.. . ' .: ' '. . .' .... . ..'

(
\..
Application: It can be used to accelerate particles like portons, deuterons, a-particles and other ions.
These accelerated particles are calied;"tirojeCtilesll.The.s.~·partlclesafe~used in.nuclear physics for collision
/ .~.~ . .... , . , .' ."..... - , ~~ ..' ..*::~" ,,' ',' .' . _,_.:... ,\.... ". ... .~ .. w.~ _.~~,.".-..-.
.. .... · · · - ­

\..
experiments 3:!}_gtgj:)!."el'll< the atomsfo:r;varj.ous expenmenls innucl~ar physics.. .
._:: -; :.:;."."...... --.. .....,. . '"
"·~;i:-~'~·~·~·: ~ .. .....',.' . . . . ':.'
"'-::~--.- :-'-.~.,:".- . . . ,- . ~'r" ..

~
'i

JE~ (Niain T Advanced) 2014


.; ~,' .
ENTHUSIAST COURSE'"
PHASE: I

,T~1 electUc' p(,t~JHial Of the dome is/V= Bf wh~re Ei~ ~!e9.!tic field jus~ ou.tsid~ th~ dome, an~ ris the
radius~ The charges on the surface 6ruiedome do not affect the electnc fIeld mSloeJhe caVIty. The
,.' potential ~h.at carl-build !:l'p',QI!j~jl9.mejUirDrte,(r1)rffi~ di~I~~trr~'"";treIigth of theai~l which isabout
_. 3Q,oq~~c~=i9.[AJ;'i·l!iE~.,r.2.Q,m.~~nili!,~. When the electric field around the dome reaches the
dielectric strength of the air, air molecules are ionized. This_~!labl~~Jh.~,l:!t~~tg.c:onduct electricity. '
. "~ ...'-- .

belt,
.~",

"Van-'deGraWJ,generators are routinely used in college physics laboratories. When a student gets within
~'few'inches.'ofa Van de Graaff generator, she may dra~ a spark with an instantaneous current of
lO~psa.nd I;em~~~ ~ninjured. A::!nstant!lne~u~_ cun;,nt.is·the,transfer ofoharge_within 1 ~ , \" to V j1: '
, (or '. (I,
1. The 660 V rails on a subway can kill a person uppn contact. A 10,000V Van de Graaff generator,
however, will only give a mild shock. W,hich ofth~following best explains this'seeming paradox?
" ~hegetlyrator provide~,more energy'per charge; but since it has few charges it transfers a lesser
:
of
., 'amount energy. ,'"
. . ~" ,
';,,~, (B) The :generatorprovides more energy, but since there is little energy per charge the current is small.
(C) Most of the energy provided by the'generator is'dissipated in the air because air presents a smaller
, ., ':'{esistance than the hutban,body' :' , :,; , ,
.,. > (D}Most ofthe energy flows directly to the ground without going through the human body since the
generator is grounded: " , . ' ,
2. W..ha"t is the ~aximum pote.nti al 'the d0!De, with a radius g¥10 cm, can sustain in dry air?,! _ ~ F ',..~.."", 4 L, ' ,1
.:;",(1;\}3. kY , : , ' ,(B) 5 kV ' , . ~OO kV ' (D) 500 kV 6 o.!-.::;;.~
'C

3. ")V,hy ,i,s:,thepote:nti~ of the dome limited by the dielectric strength of the air? ;' ,;
f', ,:<A)p!}~~,.the, P9tential ,of the dome reaches the dielectric strength of the air, charge from the belt is
, "repeIleq J)ythe charge on the dome. , : "
'\B):6hce,fu~poi~nthllonh~ d~me reaches the dielectricistrength of the air; the air heats the met~i of the
;, , ' "'St;ifie~"and it is ho ionger a good conductor. ' ', ' !
\~nce the air molecules become ionized, charge on the,dome can leak into the air.

~
, ':, ,:(D) Once the air molecules become ionized, they no longer conduct electricity. ,
,?l. : Whydoesilegative,charge from the outside of the belt continue to build up on the outside of the dome
instead ofbeirrg repelled by the charge:that is already there?

, . (A)Jhepotential is zero inside the dome.,


'~
, ~The conducting dome shields the effects of the charges on the surface.
!j~
" CQYthere'is, only positi ve charge, on the outside of the dome. '

,(D) Charge does not 'bUild up on the 9utside of the dome. )~


5. ' ''What is thework required to move a charge q from the top of the belt to the surface of the dome, if the
,'. 'ajn~ht.Q{charge bnthe domeis Q and q was the only charge on the belt? . }: ~:~
~~
~-
..010 , ( B ) k Q q / Z r ' {C) kQq/r " (D) kq/r "

FILL THE ,ANSWER HERE '

't
mmmia ' :·,'3. ~cm :--,
Il.,mlmED 2.
'-<.d

/' ~,

,-,'
r

RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014 ,
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUT£
ENTHUSIAST COURSE'
It<'ifill;k1!M'ii:WUI Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerc/s,e PHASE: r .

. ".

RACE # 36 DISCUSSION DATE: 10107/2013 PHYSICS

Paragraph for Question.l to 3


m
Asmall disc ofmass m! slides down a smooth hill of height h....
without
- ......
... -.~.~

initial velocity
.,.'--"-and gQts onto a plank of mass M lying
",:. ...
on the
.

r horizontal smooth plane at the base of the hill, as shown in the lh


figu~. Due t~ friction between the disc and t~e pla~k,.the disc Sl~ws
_ .._. ___m_.__~( . M
\

down and ultImately, both move together. Given fnchon coefficient· R_.*W&~M,,,,,ji;

is J-l.. .t,l··'J ~. 1''1' ':·'1 J'.:. .


'. (>.,'-7
r' ..If. Find the common velocity of the disc and the plank: \/" !J·t~l\

f
(A) 2"(2gh)mlm+M " (B) ("(2gh) mlSm+M (C) (3 "(2gh) mlm+M ~*i;)mJ~+M 1,1 ..,
"

2'-.;",. . Find the total work doneby the friction r·!


, 'I "\
).10'·\·',....) 1
(A) - J-l.ghMm/(M+m)
. .
, (B) - ghMmI(M+2m) ~.
ghMm/(M+m) (D) - J-l.ghMm/(M+2m)
, h) ",
U
I', "'
Find the distance moved by the disc with respect to the plank before they start moving t~ getner.
(A) 3MhlJJ.(M-m) ,,(B) MhlJ-l. (M~2m)' JefMhlJ-l.(M+m) (D) MhlJ-l.(M~3h1) ,

A uniform bar AB of mass m and a ball of the same mass are released

from rest from the sa'me horizontal position. The bar is hinged at end A.
There is gravity downwards. What is the distance of the point from point:
t.H-L=~: B"
':J6j¥iii!iii¥j¥ii.;;;;s;;a
f\ ' "
:m(i)C .

B that has the same acceleration as the ball; immediately after release?
2L 'L L 3L
(A) 3 (B)-
'- " 3 (C) "2 (D) 4 '
Two pucks are initially moving along a frictionless surface as shown in the diagram. The pucks have
mass m, < m z and begin with equal magnitude <;>f momentum. A constant force Fis applied to each
puck directly to the right for the same amount of non-zero time. After the pushes are complete, what is
the relationship for the size of the momenta of pucks (Pl and P2) ?
VI
JAfp,< P2
.(B) PI= P2 C I )F <:: L__ >F
V2
(C) PI> P2

(D) Marc information about the masses, sp~eds, force and time are required to answer the question
In the potentiometercirC1,lit of given figure the galvanometerreveals a currentin ,the direction shown
'wherever the sliding con~~ct touch€?s the wire. This could be caused by
.~~'
WEI being too low' ; ~\ . P~,
JQfr being too high Q~
~break in circuit between PO

!
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
,. (1

RACE
Regular Analysis ttirough ConUnuous Exercise
ENTHUSIASrCOURSE
PHASE: I rl

;I
:',:' • 1 .. ,/""i 4
'·'l~
l).f)lJ~ (I

~ Rtv~ --1>1f7>
(I

"

In ' ~"l-
, t:> ('I
10V V 1- Q.-;1< (I

, ' " , ' , ,,~ .:'(:.... ~

, ,~f bo~h ammeter and voltmeter are ideal, then reading of ammeter is zero, reading ofvoltmeter is 0-1
lOV \I
(B) Ifboth ammeter and voltmeter are ideal, then reading of ammeter is 10 A, reading of voltmeter is c
OV ( f

~ a.tiuTI~te(is'non ideal, voltmeter is ide~l, theri reading of ammeter is less than lOA, reading of (I

voltmeter is 10 V
~If a~eter is'ideal,'voltmeter is non ideal, then reading of ammeter is less th'an 10 A, reading c'l
of. voltmeter is le&s than lOV c
8. A galvandmeter has a coil of resis!-~~~'!9.Qn.showing a full-scale deflection at 50 gAo Then select (I
appr9priateaiteJJ1atjv~(s). -- --", '

(I

,~Tlieresistancene~ded to use it as a voltmeter ofrange 50 volt is 10


(B) The resistance needed to use it as a voltmeter of;range 50 volt is lOS n

6
n.

:1

.(aJThe resistanceneeded,to use itasan ammeter of range 10 rnA is 0.5 n "


>1

'" "

(D) The resIstance needed to'use it as an ammeter of range iOmA is LOn ,.


9. ,A pr~jectile is I~UIichedat'angle eto horizontal froIrtL andithits the target T on le~el ground;
"'I

",
c',

(-'

, ColuIP!)' I , Column II
\','1
/ '

(A) Magnitude of radial acceleration (P) Increases'


'I

'(B) Magnitude of tangential acceleration J; (Q) Decreases

" '/
"
. . .

(C) Powerdeli~ered by gravity. P, (R)' First iricreases, then decreases


(

~I
(D) Torque of gravity about T ~ (S) First decreases, then increases
(

('f) None of these


"//
' '--'I
r.1 c,'
,.,,'.

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

~-
5·~• •am,
2·'rAEEm'
6. tmaEm",
3.~
7. r611Z~m
4.
8.
'W~_"'~"
Eam.C.~~
"

9. t~W;:~X(i) J(~{::~-~~Q .,
(i~b'~'~ ,~yr!IteA~j\U ,

:r~trGl,l(~'~~Yi3 ~'u:"

)
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
,
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advancedt2014
ENTHUSIASJ CO.URSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 38. DISCUSSION DATE: 15/,()7/2013 PHYSICS

1. Two blocks'1and 2, on africtionless table, are pushed from the left by ahorizontal force PI ,andon the rightby
\

ahorizontal forceP2 as shown'below. The magnitudes ofthe pushing forces satisfy the inequality Ipt/ > Ip 1.
2
"

FI~F2
IflJm»llfllllll1lllllllllhill
, ,

Which of the following statements is true about the magnitude N of the contact force between the two
'blocks? " ./

(A) N <lpII (B) N >IFII (C) N <lp 21 CD) N>IF21


2. The graph below represents the y-component of the ~elocity of an object
as a function of time. Which of the following co~ld be a r~asonable
description of its motion? (positive y-axis is upwards)
,(A) The object accelerates upward at a constant rate'and then accelerates'
downward until it hits the ground at t = 6 s.
(B) The object accelera~es upward at a constant rate ,and then accelerates () 2 4 6 8
, downward until it reaches it highest pOi,nt at t =6 s.
(C) The object accelerates upward at a non-constant rate and then acceleratese downward until it hits the
ground at t 6 s.' =
/ ' CD) The object accelerates upward at a non-constan(rate and then accelerates downward until it reaches
it highest point at t =6 s.
3. A cart moving with horizontal velocity VI (magnitude VI) eje~ts a ball with, a velo~ity V2 (magnitude v)
in the vertical direction relative to the moving cart. The ball must pass horizontally through a small
stationary hoop fixed at some height h (as shown in figure) and lands on the second hoopthatis fixed
horizontally on the cart ahd centered atthe launch point. Let g be gr:avitational acceleration. Then which
, 'of the follmyingis CORRECT? You may ignore iir resistance, and any rolling friction on the cart
c , v2
/
(A) h=~.

r
'", , 2g

2Vl"2
tV;
(B) d : : ­
g ~~
. ~
(C) Ball moves in verticai d~rection with respect to cart d --""

(D) Vel <><:i ty of ball with ':,pect to ground make, angle e =tan -1 ( ~;) with horizontal
,
4. A particle is moving in a straight line with velocity v ard acceleration a. In which of the following
,graph(s) particle is speeding down? '
( a a
a

~.... ~(D)
"
a

\
(A)' J .v (B)"
/1 ,V(C) , I ,'v
l,

{
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
RA~E
RegUI~r Analysis thrOug~~ exercise. '
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

s. The position vector of a particle is given by r = wi ..: (20 - 5t)} (m) where tis inseconds and r i~ in
meters. Choose the correct statement(s):
(A) Velocity of particle is of magnitude 10 mls
(B) Velocity ofparticle is of magnitude 5 mls
(C) Direction of motion of particle is parallel to x-axis
,:
(D) Direction of motion of particle is perpendicular to x-axis.
6. A boat 'B' is moving upstream with velocity 3 mls with respect to ground. An observer standing on
boat observes that a swimmer'S' is crossing the river pelpendicular to the'direction of motion of boat. If
river flow velocity is 4 mls and swimmer crosses the river (width 100 m) in 50 sec. Then which of the
following statements is/are CORRECT :­

(A) velocity of swimmer w.r.t. ground is .f13 mls (B) ~drift of swimmer along river is zero
(C) drift of swimmer along river will be 150m (D): velocity of swimmer w.r.t. ground is 2 mls
7. Ram & Rahim go for a picnic. They find a beautiful place and rush towards it
simultaneously at t::::; O. At this instant; the positio~s of RaIll and Rahim are
x

x = 0 and x = + 48 respectively. Rain maintains a uniform velocity of +10 mls Ram


throughout the journey whereas Rahim starts from rest and continuously ';
accelerates with +1 mls 2, If the position,.time graph for Ram and Rahim be
depided as shown in' the diagram then choose the correct alternative:- (Assume,
motion along x-axis only) I
, ~ " . : ';i

(A) Initially, Ram and Rahim are atrest with respect to each other.
" ' " .
(B) The minimum separtion qetween Ram ahd Rah~m is AC
, '

(C) The minimum separation between Ram and Rahimis AB


(D) The Speed of Ram and Rahim continuously ~ncreases
8. Treating horizontal ground as' 'XZ plane, Y axis vertically upwards. A projectile is projecte
from position vector 31 + 2] + 2£ (metre) with velocity 1+3] +3k (mls). Find the magnitude of the
velocity (mls)with which it strikes the ground. [g =; 10 mls 2]
Paragraph for Questions 9 and 10 ,
A person of mass mp stands on a scale in an elevator of mass me' The scale reads' the magni tude of the
force F exerted on it from above in a downward direction. Starting at rest at t= 0 the elevator moves
upward,coming to rest again at time t '= to' The downward acceleration of gravity is g. The acceleration,
of the elevator during this period is shown graphically belo~. '

y
::1

! g
{'
'->
( ,
9., What will be the reading on scale when speed of elevator is maximupI :­ \./

(A) m g (B) m g : (C) (m - a)g , (D) (mp+ a)g


p '. e ,'P"
10. , Find the total dIstance traveled by the elevator befo~e coming to rest I

(t\)
2
~~ (B)
2
a~{J
,
(C), a~o
2 ;"
I,

(D)
'2
ato
12.
'~.,.,
r-- ,;, \,,/

'-' . / .

{
'-../
JEE (MaIn + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous e~erclse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

Paragraph for Questions 11 and 12


A particle of mass m enters a region horizontally at time t = 0 with speed
Vo midway between two plates that axe separated by a distance h as
shown in the figure. The particle is acted upon by both gravity and by a
time varying force that points upward and has magnitude. Vo
is
IFI=bt
where b is a positive constant that is sufficiently large such that the
particle hits the top·plate without ever touching the bottom plate.
11. What is the minimum possible value ofb such that the particle does not hit the lower plate?

(A) {2
. 3
m'!?
h
(B)'
. 3
{4 m'g' h

"
(C){m~g' (D);n will never hit the grounp

" 12~!;1 If it will hit the ground then find the maximum possible horizontal distance beforehitting the ground:~

(A) Vo x mg (B). 2mg vo

b b

(C)vo mg (D)It will never hit the ground


2 b .
13. For FAST & FURIOUS Race there is. a track as shown
below. Track is made up of uniform segments AB, BC,
CD ...... ;... & length' of each path segment is same & equal
'to 900m [Radius of a parh., (R) » Height (h)]. Height of 8hl! - ......................................../

1 Ij" 1 . !R... w ..........•..•..••....••••••••..................

AB =2 ,height BC = ',4" Height CD ='8 height DR........

4hll. ................................... .

. All points A,B,C,D,E ....... are in vertical line. Alto K-lO 'c k ......·............
~..........
.~I

and Ferrari both start from point 'A' simultaneously~ Alto


K-10 moves with aconstant speed JiO m I s and Ferrari A
. ·_.· .
2~f~__·..:·~_=
. _·=·
.._=·
.. . .=
=
_·=.....
..·_··.. . .=
. ·__· .= . .=. _
. ._. ._.....~~. . . !
/
\.
starts from rest with uniformlyincreasing speed. Both cars
, iimeet'after travelling 3970 m. When both car have same speed then magnitude of relative horizontal
", ! l~'!velocity is amJs and ratio of vertical components of velocity (Alto K-IO to Ferrari) is p. Then find a x

( p. Take suitable approximation. ,


14. Assume th~t the largest stone of mass 'm' that can be moved by a flowing river depends upon the
velocity of flow v, the density d & the acceleration due to gravity g . If 'm' varies as the Kth power
of acceleration due to gravity,then find the value of 12KI. . ! '

'. 15. A body moving with uniform' acceleration has a velocity of -9 cmJs when its x coordinate
3.00 cm. Ifits x coordinate 3 s later is...:.. 6 cm, what is the magnitUde in cmJs2 of its acceleration?

{
•.lAg.E
JEE (Main .. Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

16. Ball I is thrown towards atower at an angle of 60° with the horizontal with
unknown speed (u). At the same mqment ball II is released from the top of
IIlIUj

IOd
u
tower as shown. Balls collide after .fi seconds and at the moment of collision, '
velocity of ball I is horizontal. If height of the tower is lOd meter, find the
value of d.
y
2m
17. An armored car 2m long and 3m wide is moving at 20 mfs. A bullet Vea , ~O mls
hits it in a direction making an angle tan-1 (1/2) with x-axis the car as
seen from the street. The bullet enters one edge of the comet and 3m
passes out at the diagon'ally opposite corner. Neglecting any
interaction between bullet and car..IUakes t second for the bullet to
cross the car then find the value of t x 20 ? K ')x:
Vbullel

8. A swimmer has to reach from one bankofriver to th~other bank. Velocity of boat in still water is 2.fi
krnfhr. If angle between two directions of head of tile swimmer for which drift is same is 90°, and the
"

corresponding velocity of swimmer with respect to iground is iii and ii 2, then find value of liil - ii21 ~

19. l
For a wire oflength (change in length is LV) it is found experimentally that strain (
,
~l) produ~, in the
wire depends on the following parameters: (i) force applied across the wire (F) (ii) Area of cross seCtion of
the wire (A) and (iii) Young's modulus (Y). The exp~ession comes Qufwith numerical constant as 1 if SI
units are used and is called Hooke's Law. A steel wiieof cross section area 4 cmZis used in a lift rated to
carry 8 persons (60 kg each) safely. Due to high rush, it was decided to replace the lift with another lift
rated to carry 16 persons (60 kgeach) safely. Assuining that Hooke's law is valid for whole range of
working oflift, what must be th~ minimum area of cross-sec~on (cmZ) br the steel wire in 2Bl lift. (Assuming ,
safe working when strain is'less than or equal to first condition) (given [Y] =ML-I
~ .
T-Z)

( .

(
,--.
f '
i\......../

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

1. ~m 2. ~~ ,3. 14'1fP1<mJl?1 ' 4. ~


c
S.~.iIP1 6. ~ ~
7. , ~~~
8. ,. "
\.j
9.~ 'lO.fmmD 11.~ 12.~
13·mmm~mmmmmm ' 14·mClmmmmmmmm
ls·mmmmmmmmmrtl i6·mmmmmmmmmm
17·mmmmwmmmmmJ 18·mmmmmmmmmm '-~

i9.mmmmmmmmmm f
\J

",
(; ~'
,.
" J\
R AC E
"JE,E,{Maln+Advan'Ced)2014
ALLE"
CAREER INSTITUTE
,' , . , : ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise, " •PHA$E : I.

RACE :# 38. DISCUSSION DATE: 15/()7/2013 P-HYSICS

1. Two blocks' i and 2, on africtionless table, are pushed from the left bya ho~zpritaJ force I\ ,and Cn ,the righ tby

a horizontal forceF2 as shown'below. The magnitudes ofthe pusbing fo~es satjsfy theinequalitylFll: > IF21.
11 " ,

,
FI;;;;~;J;;;;;;;;;;/2
mmm HIIhHPl1II ' ,

Which of the following statements is true about the magnitude' Npf£hecontaot force'between the two
biocks ? ' ./ "

(A) N <IFll (B) N>IFll (C) N <IF21 :(D) N>IF21


2. The graph below represents the y~component of the ;Velocity of an object )

as a function of time. Which of the following co~ld be a re:asonable Vy

deScription of its motion ? (Positivey~axis is upwards)


/
(A) The object accelerates upward at a constant rate 'and thep acc~lerates
!
,', downward until it hits the ground at t =6 s . ' ",,'
I",
(B) The object accelerates upward at a constant rate;and, then;accelefates' ,Il ' Z '4 '{i 8 i
~
, downward until it reaches it highest point at t =6 s.' ' , "
(0) The object accelerates upward at a nonMconstant rate an~then~yceler~tese dow~ward until it hits the f
i

ground at t =6 s. , ' ""','


(D) The object accelerates upward at a nonMconstant~ate and then acc~lerates downward un,til it reaches
it highest point at t =,6 s.:
, "~
3. Apart moving with horizontal velocity '\\ (magnitude VI) ejects a ball wilb a velocity v2 (ma.gnitude v2) ",

iil'the vertical direction tet'ative to' the moving cart. The ball must pass h.orizontally througp a small ,'t"

(
stationary hoop fixed at some heigh.t h (as shown in figure) and lands 00 the second hoop that is fixed
\,
h6rizontally on the cart and centered at the launch point;Let gbe :gra~itational accele.ration. Then which .... i

( ot'the follO\ying is CORRECT? You may ignore iirresistance, and'anyrolling friction on the cart
,­ , , v2
i~ "

r
\~
(A) h =
\.
f~'
2V"'2
(B) d=_l_,
g ~V;
..
~V;,
~
-flo
,, (C) Ball moves in vertiCal direction with respect to cart d

(
f'
\...
(D) Velo~ity of ball with respect to ground makes angle e= tan -1 [ : J with horizontal

4. A particle is moving in a straight line with velocity v a"d acceleration a. In which of the following
graph(s) particle is speeding down? '
'8 ,8
a

~......... ~
r a
'.,

(
"
' 'I,'
(A)',.' ~ v (B)"
./ I ,v (C) ..
, ""­
I· . (D)
/ 'v

"

R A"C'E
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
,.,~i:,·". , ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Anal)'$ls,lhroullh Continuous Exen:ls. , PHASE: I

s. r +
The position vector of a particle is given by = wi (20 - 5t).} (m) where t is in seconds and r is in

meters. Choose the correct statement(s) :

(A) Velocity of particle is of magnitude 10mls


(B) Velocity of particle is of magnitude 5 mls
(C) Direction of motion of particle is parallel to x-axis
(D) Direction of motion of particle is perpendicular to x-axis.
6. ,A boat 'B' is moving upstream with velocity 3 i:nJs with respect to ground. An observer standing on

boat observes that a swimmer'S' is crossing the river perpendicular to the direction of motion of boat. If

river flow velocity is 4 mls and swimmer crosses the river (width 100 m) in 50 sec. Then which of the

following statements is/are CORRECT: - ' '

(A) velocity ofswimmer w.r.t. ground is Jfj mls (B )"drift ofswimmer along river is zero
(C) drift of swimmer along river will be 150m ,(D): velocity of swimmer w.r.t. ground is 2m1s "
'7. Ram & Rahim go for a picnic. They find a beautiful place and rush towards it
simultaneously at t :::; O. At this instant: the positions. of Ram and Rahim: are x
x:::; 0 and x:::; + 48 respectively, Ram maintains a unifonn velocity of +10 mls Ram

'throughout the journey whe~as Rahim starts fr6m ,rest and continuously
accelerates with +1 mls 2 , If the PQsition-time graph for Ram and Rahim be
depicted as shown in the diagram then choose the correct alternative ;- (Assume,

motion along x-axis only) I, '

, ~ I •

,(A) Initially, Ram and Rahim are atrest with respect to each other., "

(B) The minimum separtion qetwe~n Ram and Rah~m isAC :j:

(C) Themin~mum separation betweenRam and Rahimis AB


(D) Thespeed of Ram and Rahim continuously ~ncreases
8. Treating horizontal ground as' XZ plane, Yaxi& vertically upwards. A projectile isprojecte
from position vector 31 + 2} + 2k (metre) with velocity 1+ 3} + 3k (mls). Find the magnitude of the
velocity (mls) with which it strikes theground. [g =110 mls21
Paragraph for Questions 9 and 10
A person of mass mp stands on a scale in an elevator of mass me' The scale reads the magnitude oftpe
force F exerted onit from above ina downward direction. Starting at rest 'at t= 0 the elevator moves
upward, coming to test again at time t =to' The downward acceleration of gravity is g. The acceleration
of the elevator during this period is shown graphically belo~. '

9. What will be the reading on scale when speed of elevat.or is maximUifU :­


(A) mpg , ' , (B) meg' ',' (C~ (mp - a)g', (D) (mp'+·a)g ,
10. , Find the total distance traveled by the elevator before coming to rest
~
. i
'2
II""~ at~
2 2
(A'I ato ID\ato .n-o.' ato

c
,RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PRASE: I

'Paragraph for Questions 11 and 12.


A particle of mass m enters a region horizontally at time t =0 with speed
v0 midway between two plates that are separated by a distance has
shown in the figure. The particle is acted upon by both gravity and by a
time varying force that',points upward and has magnitude. h Vo
is
IFI=bt
where b is a, positive constant that is sufficiently large such that the

particle hits the top plate without ever touching the bottom plate. '

11. What is the minimum possible value ofb such that the particle does norhit the lower plate ?

(Al
,
12m'g3
3 h
(B>:143 m'g3
h ,i'

,,-l~ .

(C)1
.
m 'g3
h'
:,'
,j

;-: ~
(D)'It will nev~r,bitthe ground
r' . .....
I"~
'

12. If it Will hit the ground then find the maximum possible horizont~i dist~ce before hitting the ground :­
, 2mgvo
(A) voxmg (B) b
b
(

(C) Vo mg (D), It will never hit the ground


(
2 b '

( 13. For FAST & FURIOUS Race there is, a track as shown
below. Track is made up of uniform segments AB, BC, .............·..·R....·..··...·..·;·~......·..·............7··....:::
( CD ...... ;... & length of each path segment is same & equal

to 900m [Radius of a path (R»> Height (h)]. Height of

-=::::::::::::::::::::::::::~................................ i
c 'hi!i
8 !
......:j
1· 1 1 !Q......................... ,.
............................. I
.....................J.
( AB ='2 height BC == 4 height CD ='8 height DR....... .

i
( . All points A,B,C;D,E ....... are in vertical line. Alto K·IO
and Ferrari both start from point IN simultaneously: Alto k '
2hfl.........u..... ,.~
'..............:. . .~
~ ........
B' ,:. ...,....................... =
,:'

\
hi- ....;
K-IO moves with a constant speed,.JiQ ml s and Ferrari A
( starts from rest with uniformly increasing speed. Both cars
(, meetafter travelling 3970 m.
When both car have samt~ speed then magnitude of relative horizontal
velocity is amls and ratio of vertical components of velocity (Alto K-IO to Ferrari) is p. Then find ax
C p. Take suitable approximation., ,';'.
(\ 14~: Assume that the larges,~ :stone of mass 'ml that can be moved by a flowing ri ver depends upon the
.velocity of flow v, the density d & the acceleration due to gravity g .:·If 1m' varies
, , as the Kthpower
l
of accelerati~~ due to gravity, then find the valu~ of 1
2K I.
I
'-­ 15. A body moving with uniform acceleration has: a velocity 'of -9 cmls when its x coordinate
{
~,
3.00 cm. If its x coordinate 3 s later is - 6 cm, what is the magnitude in cm/s2 of its accel~ra,tion?

( "
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

•.!AJ:2.t. ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

16. Ball I. is thrown towards a tower at an angle of 60°


. with the horizontal with
.unknown speed (u). At the same rP9ment billl II is released from the top of
tower as shown. Balls collide after .J2seconds and at the moment of collision,

velocity of ball I IS horizontal. If height of the tower is 10d meter, find the

value of d.

y
2m
17. An armored car 2m long and 3m wide is moving at 20 mls. A bullet Year 20 m/s
hits it in a direction making an angle tan- I (1/2) with x-axis the car as
seen from the street. The bullet enters one edge of the corner and 3m II I
passes out at the diagonally opposite corner. Neglecting any II ;It ,.
interaction between bullet and car. It takes t second for the bullet to

cross the car then find the value of t x 20 ?


X
VlxJIlel

8. A swimmer has tp reach from one bank of river to throtherbank. Velocity of boat in still water is 2.fi
krnIht. If angle between
.
two directions of'
head of the swimmer for which drift.is

same is 90°, and the . {.

corresponding velocity of swimmer with respect to :ground is iiI and ii 2, then find value of liiI - ii21 ~ .' •

19. For a wire oflength e(ch~ge in length is b.£) it is found experimentally that strai,n ( ~e) produced in the
wire depends on the following parameters: (i) force applied across the wire (F) (U) Area of cross section of ,;
the wire (A) and (iii) Young's modulus (Y). The exp~ession comes out'with numerical constant as 1 ~f SI ~
units are used and is' called Hooke's Law. A steel wire of cross section area 4 cm2 is used in a lift rated to
carry 8 persons (60 kg each) safely. Due to high rush, it was decided to replace the lift with another; lift
.rated to carry 16 persons (60 kg each) safely: Assuining that Hooke's law is valid for whole range of " .
working oflift, what must be the mininlUm area of cross-sec~on (cm2) of the steel wire in 2o:d lift. (Assuniing .
.safe working when' strain is less than or equal to first condition) (given [Y] =ML-I T-2)
i '

( ,
" /,

; /1
'~-j
lJ
FILL THE ANSWER HERE C_,
2. ~ 3. ~JfQIl?1 . 4. ~D ii : (

6.. ~ 7.~· 8.~.m,;;j i L

'-I
9. ~10.~ 1l.1ZE8CEJ 12.~m (

13·mmmmmmmmm~. 14·mmmmmmmmmm '~I


.'

15·mmmmmmm~mm i6·mmC2C2mmmmmm 'il


17·mmmmwmmmmm
;'

_ _ _ _ _ _ _'_
~8·mtil=mmmmlC2mm ;y
)1
~'~2

JIlIii!12lI~E:l!!I

t, ';~

' ..7'

'.
,-'"
;'
f
"':"1'"1: "

ALLEM'MR'
CAREER INSTITUTE
:KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
',' 'A"C'E"
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE'
PHASE: I
RACE # 39 DISCUSSION DATE. : 24/07/2013 PHYSICS

1.f:. rectangular block of lead has dimensions 4 cm x 3 cm x 20 cm. A temperature difference of 100 e 0

can be applied to ariy pair of opposite faces that we choose.


F
A
'11 ---IL- \ ~G
4cIn

D~--······-L. .J
3 eln C 20cIn H
'\
(A) Thelargest amount of heat flows if it flows parallel to line BO..
(B) pre largest amount of heat flows if it f1o\\'is par~llel to line AD.
•{QJThe smallest amount of heat flows ifit flows parallel to AF.
(D) The smallest amount of heat flows if it flows pru'allel to AB.
Paragraph for Question 2 & 3
'Two objects are attached to ropes that are attached to wheels on a common axle' '
so that they rotate together as shown in figure, The total moment of inertia of
the two wheels is 0.25 kg-m2 • The radii of the wheels are RI = 3 R, R2 =R and
- -1
R- In'
12
2. If m1=24 kg, find m2 (in kg) such that there is no an~ular acceleration of the whee!~.
(A) 24 (B) 8 -iQ,72 (D) 48
3. If 12 kg is gently added to the top of m1 in above question, find the angular
acceleration (in rad/sec2) of the wheels,.

~10 (B) 17 (C) 14 (D) 12

4. A body initially moving towards right explodes into two pieces 1 and 2. Direction of motion of the
f pieces is shown in column I and possible mass ratio' are shown in column IT
\,
Column I Column II
~
Ql .- s.
(A) (P) m!>m2
~

(
>.?
V2 '
,
~I ,-5
~
(
"
(Ja)!l (Q) mj=m2
2
Q-VI
(
(C) V2-Q > ,v!<vz P (R) m t <m2
\/ '< ''''7

VI C'...-?> I'i 1 '/ r' "

t ,.
c:S
(
(lJ):\
~
F B!>(L (5) Impossible for any masses
V2
(

'-5. A disc of radius R = 2m moves as shown in the figure, with a velocity of

,.' translation of 6vo of its centre of mass and an angular velocity of 2~o. The
t ... },,!' ,
'lI'}:,
"
,1 ','
'!A~r" ," ••
'1'(;;<.(.,'*";,("'" .,'~ r,l'! fZ;
\,,1' "J\'
I "'-~";' '" . . .

/
it",

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


"ALLI~I'M
~:.~ (lA~.1i ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
I
. I
6. The container A is constantly maintained at 100°C and insulated container B i

~
opper
of the figure initiaUy contains ice at O°C. Different rods are used to connect !
them. For a rod made of copper, it takes 30 minutes for the ice to melt and for A B 1I
I
a rod of steel of same cross-section taken in different experiment it takes 60 steel i
minutes for ice to melt. When these rods are SImultaneously connected in .1
!
x
paralJel, the ice melts in x minutes. Write 10' as your answer. .x,
7. Two identical plates of same metal are welded end to end as shown in figure (A), 20 cal of heat flows ,
through it in 4 minutes when the ends were maintained at different tempeatures. If the plates are welded 1.
as shown in figure (B) and the ends \~If"'~ maintain at same temperature as in first case, the same amount
of heat will flow through the plate!'! in how many minutes ? I

i
!
A B
8. Two blocks A and B of masses 8 kg and 4 kg placed on a smooth horizontal ~ K=400N/mi!J
ground are connected by a massless spring. An imp~lse provides a veloci ty 1I~:\\\\~\==~:\~g
of 3 mls to the block A. Find the velocity of centre Of mass in mls. w
9. What are the size and direction of current i in figure, where all resistances are 4.0 n and all batteries have
an emf of 10 V? (Hjnt: This can be answered USi~~!,~nlY m~ntal calculation) '-r 11 (.~ )
I , II I i II· I i

~{"\~
O~'v\<I
.~. rl ~ "V
Il.p. .
'Iv.'" L ··.I~\O \1
.. -J"1.- ~
Lt7­
~v~

~ .~;

:>D

'!l;,

li ;.,

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


~~"':t7l';"l'i'l'['
1. ~~'.~t~~~~~~~~ 2. r~~w~ __~~
':1A'~~©jWR'\~ 3.g~ 4.~~~~

5. i?lm'
,?
lI'l:
~~'i~~mm~~~m
~,.L,n.zll~~
t~2!!,.;, .• :f.i!~.....~" :!i:.."..6'~~
a..... 9
ti:... ,.,~li\~~" 6·mmm rlJalWtt1
7•.~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~ 8·mmm mm~Cl
9. i I v
~:,,;,'.~~:.

ALLI.
CAREER
_ _- ­ INSTITUTE
- - - _. -. - - - - _.­
.....

KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 40 OISCUSSION DATE : 26/07/2013 PHYSICS

Paragraph for Question No.1 to 3


2 kg and 3 kg blocks are placed on a smooth horizontal surface and connected by spring which is
unstretched initially. The blocks are imparted velocities as sh~wn in the figure.

1.
~"
The maximum energy stored in the spring in the subsequent motion will be

.t (A) 5vo2 (B) 15vo2 (C) zero (D) 10vo2

2. Maximum speed of3 kg block in the subsequent motion will be


(A) VO (B) 2vo (C)3vo (D) 4vo
3. Maximum speed of 2 kg block in the subsequent motion will be
(A) VO . (B)2v
o (C)}vo . (D) 4vo
Paragraph for Question No.4 and 5
(" . Five rods of same material and same length.
are joined
'
as shown. Cross-section
.
of rods ab, ad and bc are
A, 2A and 3A respectively. Ends a and c are maintained at temperatures 200°C and O°C respectively. '

A
2000~O°C
d

4. . For what cross-section x of rod dc there will be no heat flow through rod bd.
(A) 4A (B) 2A (C) 6A (D) 9A
5. t!, If x has the value calculated in above question. Then temperature of junction b or dis:
") (A) 50°C (B) 100°C (C) 90°C (D) 150°C
"'i.e'j '..
( 60'i);! Four different situations of a moving disc are shown in column I and predictions about its final motion
.), and forces acting on it are given in column -II.
" Column I Column II
"

( \ (A) Lfr
2R
v (P) finally disc will roll along the initial direction of velocity (v)

( (B) fry
~~
(Q) finally, disc will roll in qirection opposite to the initi:U direction of velocity (v)

(
/
\.

,-,
I
' (C)
. 2Vfr 1f v
(R) finally, disc stops
ii
1',

"
.,
.
(0)
,
~:G.m,·v
R .
.
(S) Initially friction force acts in the direction opposite to that of initial velocity
~i~~-;'i':;..

RA E
Regular Analysis through EXel'Qlse
JEE (Main i' Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

7. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length eis free to rotate about its upper end in vertical plane. When it
is at rest, it receives an impulse J at its lowest point, normal to its length. Immediately after impact.
Column I Column II
3J 2
(A) Angular velocity of rod (P)
2m
3J
(B) Angular momentum of rod (Qj'
2m

(C) Kinetic energy of rod (R)? 3J


: me
(D) Linear velocity of the mid-point of rod (S) Je

Je

(T)
2
8. Assume body B to be uniform:
Column-I . Column-II
(Torque of normal reaction on body B about centre of mass)

(A)
t:l.
~'-F (P) Clockwise

(Directed towards centre of mass)


~Ugh
(B) ~ (Q) Anti clockwise

(C) (R) Zero

(S) Conclusion cannot be drawn


with the information given
9. A 0.6m radius drum carrying the load A is rigidly attached to a 0.9m radius pulley
carrying the load B as shown. At the time t =0, tQe load B moves with a velocity of
2m1s (downward) ~nd a constant acceleration oft 3m1s2(downward). Over the time
interval 0:5. t :5. 2s, determine
(i) the number of revolutions executed by the pulley.
(ii) the displacement of the load A. . . .
10. A metallic rod of cross-sectional area 20 cm2, with the lateral surface insulated to prevent heat 10ss'traS
one end immersed in boiling water and the other in ice water mixture. The heat conducted through,~he
rod melts the ice at the rate of 1 gm for every 84 sec. The thermal conductivity of the rod is
= =
160 Wm-1 K-I. Latent heat of ice 80 cal/gm, 1 cal 4.2 joule. What is the length (in m) of the rod?

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1. ~lIQ'ItI ~ ~
4.~ <'
1~ 1~

5·.muEa 6.
~t~%;l~Y\~.i(~"~ ~~l
7. 8.

~~IM""'~_""'- ____ ~ __
, ,
1

RACE
.JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous EXercise PHASE: I
,I
J~ACE # 41 DISCUSSION DATE: 29/07/2013 PHYSICS

t:1 Two particles, P of mass 2 m and Qof mass m, are subjected to mutual force of attraction and no other
force acts on them. At t =0, P is at rest at point 0 and Q is moving away from 0 with a speed 5u. At a
later instant t =T (before any collision has taken place), Q is moving towards 0 with speed u, then
(A) impulse acting on the particle P during given time interval is 6 mu
(B) momentum of particle P at t =T is 7 mu
(C) work done by force of attraction during 0 ~ t ~ T is 3 mu2
(D) work done by force of attraction during 0 ~ t ~ T is - 3mu2
2. Illustrated below is a uniform cubical block of mass M and side a. Mark the correct statement (s) :­

a
(
"

c
i

(A) The moment ofinertia about axis A, passing through the centre of mass is IA =~Ma2 I j'
, !

(B) The moment of inertia about axis B, which bisects one of the cube faces is Is = 1~ Ma 2
r
'. J.
(C) The'moment of inerti,a about axis C, along one of the cube edges is Ie= ~ Ma
/ 2
c.,

(D) The moment of inertia about axis D, which bisects one of the horizontal cube faces is r" =1 ! ~ --7
3.~ A cylinder of radius R is spined with angular velocity roo and then placed on an
, 'r
incline having coefficient of friction Jl = tanO (0 is the angle of incline). The

" cylinder continues to spin without falling for time

gy;,!
, "4'1 Rro
_ o
Rmo Rroo 2Rroo ~'"

, (A) 3gsin 0 (B) 2gsin 0 (C) gsin e (D) gsin 0 .

r
\.
4. A uniform rod of length l is placed symmetrically on two walls as shown'in figure. The ro~ :,' ,
equilibrium. IfNI andN2 are the nonnal forces exerted by the walls on the rod then , '!

*J
(
(A)N 1 >N2 Nt
'. ,
(B)N 1 <N2
\, (C) NI == N2 , , . ji~
[
(D) N, and N .. would be in the vertical'directions X
\,
·i~::r~

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


,',

,it; BA
,~l
','

'CE"
;-,,'

,: '""" .,
'"

,it::;
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHlJSIASr COURSE
PHASE: I
I

Paragraph for Questions Q. 5 to 7


I
B
J
Two friends A and B (each weighing 4O'kg) are sitting in a frictionless well
5m/s
TI
having vertical circular smooth wall. They subtend angle 90° at the centre of A~....-...........J

well. 'A' rolls a ball of mass 40 kg in clockwise direction on the platfonn base

towards B along the wall of the well which B catches. Then similarly B rolls

the ball towards 'A' antic10ckwise and A catches it. The ball has a fixed speed

of 5 m/s. (Neglect catching and throwing time).

5. Find the total impulse by the wall of vveil on whole system by the time ball travels from A to B , ' I
(A) 200 kg-mls (B) 400 kg-m/s (C) zero (D) None of these l
6. Find the angular displacement of A till he meets B I
0 0 0
(A) 150 (B) 60 (C) 90° (D) 180

7. When A meets B they catch each other and now they move together i.e. perfectly inelastic collision.
What will be the velocity when they (A+B) throw the ball after catching it

5 50
(A) 2.5 mls (B) '3 mls (C) 11 mls (D) None of these

Paragraph for Question 8 to 10 '

The position vectorofa body of mass m= 4 kgis given as i' = i(t2 - 4tHflJ(-t3 ), where i' is in metee; and
\.
t in seconds.
,i, "
8. The magnitude offorce (F) acting on particle at t =Is is
. (A) 8MN (B) 16J2N (C) 16 N (D) 32 N

9. The magnitude of torque with respect to origin, acting on the particle at t =Is will be
:':::-1"'"
(A) zero (B) 48 Nm (C) 64 Nm (D) 80 Nm

\10. The momentum of particle at an instant when its y coordinate is double of the x coordinate is

(A) -161 (B) -48) (C) -81 -: 12J (D) -16i - 48J

''''.-­

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

·1.~ 2.~ ~~~,''''! 3. ~


A
..
."''''''~'
~ ,,~
4.~
5.~ 6. !7'A'~~
~ 7.~ 8.~
,9.~ 10.~<m
\...
L
dEE (Main +Advanced) 2014"
ALLIM
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA"(RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exerolse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 44 DISCUSSION DATE: 09/08/2013 PHYSICS

1. A particle of mass m moving with a velocity (31 + 2)) mls collides with stationary body of mass M and
finally moves with velocity (-2i + J) mls. Then
(A) Impulse received by m m(Si - S}) (B) Impulse received by m::: m(-Sl - J)
(C) Impulse received by m =m(Si + ]) (D) Impulse received by M m(S! - J)

o~
2. Two masses m and 2m are placed in fixed horizontal circular smooth hollow tube of
radius r as shown. The mass m is moving with speed u and the mass 2m is stationary.
After their first collision, the time elapsed for next collision. (coefficient of restitution
e=1I2)

(A) 21tr (B) 41tr (C) 3m (D) 121tr


u u u u

\- ,.
3. The following set of figures show two cases of collision between two balls. Let ul and Uz be the
velocities before collision and VI' V2 be the velocities after collision.

The coefficient of restitution,

IV VII

2-
e = lUI -u21
Student-A: Equation holds for both cases as e is property of material of the colliding bodies.
Student-B : Equation holds for case II only.
(
(A) Student-A is incorrect, Student-B is correct.
(B) Student-A is correct, Student-B is incorrect.
(C) Both are correct
(D) Both are incorrect
4. A ball of mass m approaches a moving wall of infinite mass with speed v along the nonnal to the wall.
(
", The speed of the wall is u toward the ball. The speed of the ball after 'elastic' collision with wall is:
(A) u + v away from the wall (B) 2u + v away from the wall
(C) I u -vi away from the wall (D) 1 v -2u I ,lwayfrom the wall
t!'
'-- 5. A laminar rigid body in confined to move in its own plane. At some instant velocities of any two points
/ on the body are shown in following figures. Which of the following physical situation cannot be possible?
,
" ­

(A) (B) (C) (D)

"
{
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

6. In Column-I some situations and objects are specified and in column-II some statements are made about ,,
conservation principles of physics. Match the columns.
Column -1 Column-II (Conservation principle)
(A) Earth moving in an elliptical orbit. (P) Conservation of linear momentum
For Earth along any direction in the plane of
motion is possible.

~un~ JEarili
(B) A disc having translation and rotation (Q) Conservation of liner momentum along
motion both (with slipping) on a rough a specific direction in the plane of motion
surface. is possible.
For disc
Disc co 0 V 0* co oR

\I\\\~ :Vo ­
1\\1\\ \\\\\\\\1\\\\\\\\\\
Rough surface radius

of the disc=R

(C) A sphere rolling without slipping on a (R) Conservation of angular moment


curved surface. about any point in the space is possible.
For sphere
. ro

~~=roR )

~-
Rough surface ­
(D) Projection ofa particle from the surface (S) Conservation of angular moment
of earth. . about a specific point in the space
For particle is possible.
V

(T) Conservation of mechanical energy


is possible.

r. A ring of mass M = 4kg and radius R= 1 m is attached to the circumference of a very light rigid disc. The
disc is pivoted in a vertical plane at its centre and has three particles of mass m =2kg, mounted at. its
perimeter, besides the ring as shown in the figure. The system is initially at rest. Find the angular speed ~

(in rad/sec) of the system, when it has swung through 90° in anticlockwise direction.
m
,
'-.j

·····~Ring
'- .'

m ",--,­

,, \
--
JEE (Main + Advanaosij 2014
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous E~erolse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHA!IE: I

8. A particle executing SHM on a straight line. A and B are two points at which its velocity is zero. It
passes through a certain point P (AP < PB) at successive intervals ofO.S and 1.5 sec with a speed of
3J2 mls. Detennine the maximum speed (in mls)
M
9~ For the system shown in figure, M =1 kg, m =0.2 kg, r =0.2 m.
Calculate
(a) the linear acceleration of hoop
(b) the angular acceleration of the hoop of mass M and
(c) the tension in the rope
Neglect the mass of small pulley and the friction between the hoop and the horizontal stuface. Masses of
the pulley and string and friction between the hoop and the horizontal surface are negligible.

Relevant questions from (HeV)


Chapter 38 (Electromagnetic induction)
Short Answer type # All
Objective-I # All
Objective-2# All
Exercise#'
3,8,13,18,20,22,26,27,31,34,35,36,3,7,41,45;46,49,55,57,59,62,63,64,67,71,74,80,90,91,93,94,95,96,98
,---­

L'­ ,I

( FILL THE ANSWER HERE


2' .. 3 ." .- - . - .---.,4:----~-·"--.-,-.."
{
!Il.~;m .~~ .~~ .~
'-.

5.~ 6.~ 7. mmmmmmmmmm


"

(
8. mmmmmmmmmm 9·1
',.
'. ".,"

.... ,"

.......:.:.'

.. :..... , ...... ,'

'.: .•. '.! .


RACE

JEE (Main +Advanced) 2014


ALLIM
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
.KOlA. (RAJAS TPAN). Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
RACE # 45 DISCUSSION DATE': 12/08/2013 PHYSICS

Paragraph for Question 1 to 3


A uniform hollow sphere is released from the top of a fixed inclined plane of inclination 37 0 and height
7m. It rolls without sliding. (g =10 ms-2)

3m

. / ,;) I fixed

1. The acceleration of the centre of mass of the hollow sphere is

30 -2 , 18 2 9 -2 15 -2
(A) -ms (B) Sms- . (C) -ms (0) -ms
7 5 7
2. The spe.ed of the pointof corita~t of the sphere with the inclined plane when the sphere reaches half­
of
Y{;~y the inclinei!> .
/ "
';(A.) J42 ms- 1
(B) 51 ms- 1 , (C) J84 ms- 1
(0) zero

3.' .The,;dmetaken by ,the sphere to reach the bottom is

., "~., .. ::. ~; ;.:~ :''\.:~:~~. .;

. 3 5 5
(A)"Ss (B) -s (C) -s (0) None of these
3 4
Paragraph for Q. 4 to 6
Consider a fixed surface in which, part AB is sufficiently rough for pure rolling and part BC is smooth.

Initially solid sphere of mass lkg and radius 0.5 m is at height h on section AB as (shown in figure.

(
'..

\.
4. What is ratio of rotational kinetic energy to translational kinetic energy when sphefl~ reaches point B?
( (A) 213 (B) 215 (C) 2/4 (0) 2/6
5. What is maximum height from point B on the surface BC to which sphere will reach?
(A) 4.5 m . (B) 7.5 m (C) 5.5 m (D) 10 m
6. What is kinetic energy of sphere when it reaches top most position on section BC? .
[ 'A \ n T "T"\." ,., ..,. 1'''''' . . 1"\ "t"
,
JEE (MaIn + Advallced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

7. I A unifonn rod of mass 200 grams and length L= 1m is initially at rest in vertical position. The rod is
hinged at centre such that it can rotate freely without friction about a fixed horizontal axis passing
through its centre. Two particles ofmass m:::: 100 grams each having horizontal velocity ofequal magnitude
u= 6 mls strike the rod at top and bottom simultaneously as shown and stick to the rod. Find the angular
speed (in rad/s) of rod when it becomes horizontal.

o.i
iIL

~m~
8. Two point masses ill l and IDz are fixed to a light rod hinged at one end. The masses are at distances £1
and £2 respectively from the hinge. Find the time period of oscillation (small amplitude) of this system in

seconds if mt =2IDz.
£t = 15 cm, ,e2
= 30 cm. Fill the ~nswer of x if time period is x (1~) seconds.

I
"~
I
~. .
I

I

I


I'
I

•• f
• .r
I

I

I

9. A unifonn rod AB 'of length L mid mass m is suspended freely at A and hangs vertically at rest when a
particle of sru:ne mass m is fired horizontally with speed v to strike the rod at its mid point. If the particle
is brought to rest after the impact. Then find the impulsive reaction at A.

~l

\~

. ,~

11.~
2~ 4.~
5' , "
.~
6
..,
.~ mmmmm
,...-------.,
Is. mmmmmmmmmm
RACE
JEE (Main +Advanced) 2014
LE"
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise

RACE # 47 PHYSICS

"f'
1. ,Inside a hollow unifornMphere of inner radius R a unifonn rod of length RJ2 is
i,.

released from the state of rest as shown. The mass of the rod is same as that of

h the sphere. Assume friction to be absent everywhere. Horizontal displacement

of sphere with respect to earth in the time in which the rod becomes horizontal, is

( R R R
• 'A)­
! \. 2 \.0) "4 ((;)"2]2 ,,U) 1-~on0 or these
2.; V Lower surface of a plank IS rough and lying at rest on a rough horizontal surface.
" Upper surface of the pi~~ilism06th and has a s~ooth hemisphere

placed over it through a light string as shown in the figure. After the string is

burnt, trajectory of centre of mass of the sphere is :- '

(A) a circle (B) an ellipse ,~straight line./ (D) a parabola


3. Three interacting particles of masses 100 g, 200 g and 400 g each has a velocity of 20 mls magnitude al'ong
the positive direction of x-axis, y-axis and z-axis respectively. Due to force ofinteraction the third particle
stops moving. The velocity of the second particle is (10) + Sk). What is the velocity of the first particle?

(..~' , (AJ20l +20) +70kv' (B) lOt +20} +8k (C) 30t+lO}+7k (D) 151 +S}+60k
, \
\...,4. A wire is bent into the structure as shown in the figure, and placed
'., on a table. It consists of two half rings of radius R and two straight

parts of length nR. The height of COM from the table is.

R
,(A) 2R (B) -;
, n

R
"(C)
, -2 , (PJZ'ero ../

5. Two identical bricks of length L are piled one on top of the other L

r ' on a table as shown in the figure. The maximum distance S the top
, brick can overhang the table with the system still balanced is:

(A) ±L (B) ~L

t
,_., ~L
'~4
if,
(D) ~L
"­ "

(
6. A light rope passes over a light frictionless pulley attached to the ceiling. An object with a large mass
\.,
is tied to one end and an object with a smaller mass is tied to the other end. Both masses are released
from rest. Which of the following statement(s) is/are false for the system consisting of the two moving
masses while string remains taut?
(A) the center of mass remains at rest v ,
,,~ net external force is zero
"..(tithe velocity of thp. l":f':ntf':T of m~!':!': t!':
!

~ ~on~t;:;nt A
8 .......
',,4,.,..&
..;., . JEE (Maln,+ Advancedl2014 ,
ENTHUSIAST COURSE ,

R~g~lar·A~;Y6IS u)roil~~conHnull~~ Exe~1ge; .


'.'

PHASE=.!·

lS~. Two massless strings of length 5 m each hang frqm the ceiling very near to each other
as shown in the figure. Two balls A and B of masses 0.25 kg an4 0.5 kg are attached to the string. The
ball A is released from rest at a height 0.45 m as shown in the figure. The collision between two balls
is completely elastic. Immediately after the collision, the kinetic energy, of ball B is 1 J. The velocity
of ball A just after the collision is .

'./ '-
'-
.
;;"0 '0-'"._'("
! .

0.45m
-~'A\ 1
•••••
" ,j'., ':"

-- -------{...)@ " 'J -, :", ..._ '!.

. (A) 5 ms-1 to the right (B) 5ms-1 to the left',) .•'s..'<?c :' ()<.. >~'!' ().:".
(C) 1 ms- 1 to the r i g h t . J9(1 ms-1 to the left ; t ) '.-:' .~.} ,~, ";' ~

, Comprehension Q.16 to Q.18 (3 Questions) I •. !.'i-I~ [UT-JEE 2008]

A small block of mass M moves on a frictionless surface oian inclined plane, as shown in figure. The
angle ofthe incline suddenly .changes from 600 to 300 at point B. The block is initially at rest at A. Assume
that collisions between the block and the incline are totally inelastic (g = 10 mls 2) . "

i
}

• ,- ,~l '. .1 .'< ­


, 2.. 'SP ... c~ i
.,' /
(! ,. t"
I l'
.1'
(}',44\
.

i(J.' I "
B . " -.)j,..
~, ,~ ~ I.~, i
I!~v -~
(II

' ',. <:"JJ _. ".. (

I '-"1"'.. , ,
""'f1"rc
I
I \/;1 lj]);..· 4 J.. ./ S. r/
• 'r~ I ~

~) i
: .0:-1:.0 ....
.~ 7~.
0
V
.I
I '

\J '1 J1SY"\) ~
I

I
c
I. U~ H
. J3m 3.J3m
/'
16. The speed of the block at point B immediiitely after it strikes the second incline is :
(A) J60 mls . (B) J4s m l s ( C ) J30 mls ,(JY).Jl5 mls
17. The speed of the block at point C, immediately before it leaves the second incline is : t
(A) ~120 mls (B) ~l 05 mls (C) J90 mls (D) J75 mls j'
18. If collision between the block and the incline is completely elastic, then the vertical (upward) component
of the velocity of the block at point B, immediately after it strikes the second incline is :
(A) £0 mls .Jl5 mls
(B) (C) 0 (D) ~..J15 mls 1

. Paragraph for Question 19 to 21 . .


Two blocks (from veryfar apart) are approaching towards each oth~r
:
with velocities as shown in figure. !
'--'
The coefficient of friction for both' blocks is H=({,.2. I
, , "

c ,.. "

10
T iMAr momentum of two block system is
alOm/S,

Mi
~~O.2
' ,10mls

EJ
\\\i\\t\\\\\\fu\fu\\\\\\ili\\\\ in\\\\m
"r
r
In'\ ..."'"..... ponl':tl'lnt -,
JEE (Main + AdYanced) 2014
/"',
\
RACI::
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENT~USIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

20. How much distance will centre of mass travel before coming permanently to rest
(A) 25 m (B) 37.5 m (C) 42.5 m (D) 0
21. Mechanical energy of two block system is
(A) conserved alrthe time (B) not conserved upto 5 s
(C) is conserved upto 5 s (D) none of these
22. Two blocks A & B are hanging across an ideal pul1ey (as shown) mass of A is m and mass ofB is 2m.
A is raised by h =18 cm and released to fall freely under gravity, while B is resting on ground. Some
\ time after, there is jerk in string due to which, the maximum height (in cm) attained by block B is

,., \

r'
&1
,r''1e
'-.J
ne

23. Three objects A, B and C are kept in a straight line on a frictionless horizontal surface. These have masses
m, 2m and m, respectively. The object A moves towards B with a speed 9 mls and makes an elastic
;:
collision with it. Thereafter, Bmakes completely inelastic collision with C. All motions occur on the
same straight line. Find the final speed (in mls) of the object C. [lIT -JEE-2009]

-IS
tf o A
2m
B
GJ
c

4
f'
/ .
<,;:lonent

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


( .~
'~AW~A..~ 2.W':I\~
i,.'W~~~ .3.~ 4.~
('" figure. '!

m~~ 8.~
'\.
~~~..JlL~ 6.~ 7.~<miJ
.'.
\;~ . ~ 10.~ ll.~ 12.~
:!, . ­
~ r4.~. 15.~ 16.~
"
! .

18.~ 19.~ 20.~

'\..
~ 22. mmmmmmmmmm 7.::\ r

(
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

A train of mass M is moving on a circular track of radius 'R' with constant speed v. The length of the I f 11.
train is half of the perimeter of the track. The linear momentum of the train will be r:
.f
:}, (./
,.... ""'" '$i
(A) zero (B) ?Mv (C) MVR ~JMV :I
1t

A ball of mass lkg is dropped from a height of3.2m on smooth inclined plane. The coefficient of restitution \(

for the collision is e


1
='2' The ball's velocity becomes horizontal after the collision. ..
. :
/T)

12. '7'\\

(A) The angle a= tan~1 (Jz) v!. are

1
I.
\" Jt
111,
(B) The speed of the ball after the collision = 4fi mls
l~g
(C) The total loss in kinetic energy during the collision is 8J
spri
(D) The ball hits the inclined plane again while travelling vertically downward.

I .0
A massless inel~tic thread passes over a small frictionless pulley. Two identical

blocks A and Bof mass m = 2 kg are attached with the thread. The system is
r t('~1J

initially at rest. A bullet C also of mass m strikes the block A from below with

initial speed u as.shown in figure and gets embedded in block A at t 0 second.


= (, /:
Then m
r ,(LJ
~elocity
. of centre of mass of. system (block A plus bullet C and block B)
,I,
,L':­
""

utlc
'>0,'

just after collision is uJ2 ./{ n"


11 (C) /­
~) ,
(B) Velocity of centre of mass of system (block A plus bullet C and block B)

.J At th;
just after c.ollision is uJ3 ~
J
"
(D) Ii
(C) Time after which the string become taut again is t=!!... . 13. TV'_J
.' 2g is p"q

II
(D) Maximum height reach by block A pl~ullet C is Hmax = 4g
,. / A bullet of mass m travelling h9rizontally
-,,\, '
wit~
speed u strik~s
a wooden block mass 'M' placed on o~
a smooth horizontal plane. The bullet comes to rest after penetrating a distance 'd' into the block. Then
choose the CORRECT statement{s).

mMu 2
~Totalloss of kinetic. energy is _/ _ _ \ .
m U:
-~ \IU[tlt\l\I\ t~\ \il\ \t«i tl\"'M«M"
\\\\\\\\\dUtfu«ttfuutfu\fu\F\\\ttilithl(
I '14. A sysie

(A/,g

are

pote~ltii
,_.L. ' mMu 2 •
''-.,./

~The value of the resis~ance force (assum~ constant) offered by the wood is 2d (M + m) .

(C) The distance covered by the bullet w.r.t. the ground before it comes to rest w.r.t. block is . dm
M+m mv
(A) ;.1.
(D) The block moves greater distance than the bullet w.r.t. ground. 1.", .
JEE (Main + Advanced) 20',
201.4
_RSE RACE
Regular Analysis through COlltlnlious Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

-
of the
11. We open a file keeping one flap on a table. Each flap is square in shape, of mass m and dimensi
(30 x30) cm2 • Assume that the file does not slip on'the table.
(A) The maximum height attained by the centre of mass of the complete file is 7.5 cm
(B) The maximum height attained by the centre of mass of the complete file is 15 em

.. ltution
(C) The minimum force required to hold the flap at rest at 60° to the horizontal is ~g

(D) The minimum force required to hold the nap at rest at 60° to the horizontal is ~g
12. Two particles A and B of masses M and 2M respectively M 1\
are connected by an ideal spring. The spring is uk
compressed so that the potential energy stored in it is Vo' x
The system is placed on ahorizontal frictionless table and
is given a velocity uk as shown and simultaneously the initial
uk
1\

iI>
tLz
tc
spring is released;. In,.-
the subsequent motion the line from potentialV
. .energy = 0
uk
i
L _
B ..to A always points along the
_.._.. _._--------............ \
total mechanical energy is E. \
unit
.
vector. The initial
2M
"­ initial
velocity
. . 3 2
(A) In)erms of the given quantities E = Vo + 2 Mu
.,/~"
';I
m .{J31 Potential energy is stored in· the spring when A and B have kinetic energy KA and ~ is
;;l
P.E. = E - KA - KB
(C) At some instant of time B is at point P and has a component of velocity in the x-direction of v) ,
At that instant of time, in terms ofthe given quantities, the velocity vector VA of A is VA = -2v) + 12~ ..
(D) In subsequent motion A and B undergo circular motion about centre of mass ,,.
13. Two particles are inter connected by an ideal spring (see figure). The spring is compressed and system
is projected in air under gravity. If the acceleration of ml is a find acceleration of m2 ,

("

r'C.
'/~ 18
,ced on :m l
('

".. Then
ln lg+m2g- mla
>~+a
mlg-mla
'- ..
(A) g m'(C) CD).~.~-"::.;::;.......----!.-
2 m2
"- ..

14. Asystem comprises of tWQ§U1?IIsPlleres witl} same masses IWI. The spring is npn deformed. The spheres
\111\\

are set in motion in gravity free space at the velocities as shown in the diagram. The maximum elastic
C potential Energy stored in the system is. .
~' lt'£
('

" Vo .eo ,
() Cc
'l,...
\Ir;) <0
- I

f f ' \ i'
S
\

t,
~V
m k m 0 ;A ;,. U:. \~ ~ -.,;
'.:r'" 'J~,
.~
ft'\
. -1.m
/mv~
. 2 -i ~. ";;"f
mvo 1 2
vf+m (A) 2..[i (C) -mvo CD) 2mv~ 'I . 'r"
"D~
2 ,':~ ~

'<­
~ ,
)

, J
RACE

JEE (Main + AdvanCed) 2014


CAREER INSTITUTE
LIM ENTHUSIAST COURSE
" It<·jf!1m:'!lt!tim!1~JI Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I
RACE # 48 PHYSICS

1. ',;' ,TWO horiz,ont~l discs of different radi~ are free to r?tate ~,bout their ~e~tral vertical ~/~
~
;i.axes. One IS gIven some angular velocIty, the othens statIOnary. Thell:nms are r""t 7-1'
r\now brought in contact. There is friction between the r i m s . ' .?/
JA) The force of friction between the rims will disappear when the discs rotate with equal angular
d\ speeds
, . (B) The forc~ of friction hetween the rims wlll diRappear when they have equal linear velocities at
, the point of contact.
(C) The angular momentum of the system will be conserved
(D) The rotational kinetic energy of the system will not be conserved
2. Figure shows two identical particles 1 and 2, each of mass m, moving in
opposite directions with same speed v along parallel lines. At a particular
instant, ~ and ~ are their respective position vectors drawn from point
1
v

d'-7
[~
A which is in the plane of the parallel lines. Choose the correct option(s).
[e represents a unit vectp~ coming out of the page] d]

(A) Angular momentum dfparticle 1 about A is mvdl (-e)


,"
2
'(B) Angular momentum ofparticle 2 about A is mvd2 (e)

i (C) Total angular momentum of the system about A is mV(d2 - dJe

~(D) Total angular momentum of the system about A is mv(dt + d2 )(-e)


3.~n the given figure a ball strikes a uniform rod of same mass elastically and rod is hinged at point A.
1Then which of the statemeht(s) is I are correct? '

\~

( (A) linear momentum of system (ball + rod) is conserved.


x
(B) angular momentum of system (ball + rod) about hinged point A is conserved.
(C) kinetic energy of system (ball + rod) before the collision is equal to kinetic energy of system just
after the collision
\.'-<.
(D) linear momentum of ball is conserved. o
I>
4. Statement·1 : A disc A moves on a smooth horizontal plane and
rebounds elastically from a smooth vertical wall (Top view is shown
in figure), in this case about any point on line XY the angular
momentum of the disc remains conserved.
~tatement·2: About any point in the plane, the torque of gravity force and normal contact force by
ground balance each other
(A) Stqtement-l is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is correct explanation for statement-I.
'~,
'(B) S tatement-l is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is NOT the correct explanation for
statement-I. ':.

(C) Statement-l is true, statement-2 is false.


( IT"'\\ ('\4-". ___ ........ L 1 ~ _ ,c_1.


{
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
RACE
Regular Analysis through Contlnuou, Exerc;l.e
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PIIASE : I
, , ,

5. A disc of mass M and radius R rolls on a horizontal surface and then rolls up an inclined
plane as shown in the figtlre. If the velocity of thedisc is v, the height to which the
disc will rise will be­
3v2 3y2

(A)­ (B) 49
2g

y2 y2

(C) 49 (D) 29
6. A wheel is rolling straight on ground without slipping. If the centre of mass
of the wheel has speed v, the instantaneous velocity of a point P on the
e,
rim, defined by angle relative to the ground will be ­

, (A) vcos(fs) (B) 2vcos(fs)'

(C) YSin(%) (D) v (sin S)

7. Which of the following statement(s) are correct?


(A) Friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an inclined surface is always upward along the incline
irrespective of any external force acting on it.
(B) Friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an inclined surface is may be upward or may be
downwards depending on the external force acting on it.
(C) Friction acting on a cylinder rolling without sliding may be zero depending on the external. force
acting on it. , '
. ".
(D) Nothing can be said exactly about it as it depends on the friction coefficient on inclined plane. I
8. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length L is hinged at one end and is free to rotate in the vertical plane. I
A small ball of mass m is fixed to the other end of the rod. A constant horizontal force F = ~g is also l·
acting on the rod at the free end when the rod is released from horizontal position as shown iri figure. ),

, Hinged end
• :-.. F = mg/2 ,I
1
(A) Acceleration of the ball at the instant of releasing the rod 9:

(B) Acceleration of the ball at the instant of releasing the rod 7:


" ",
(C) The vertical component of reaction force exerted by the hinge when the rod has just been
Smg
'r
,z·· '.

released 16 'T
(D) The vertical component of reaction force exerted by the hinge when the rod has just been 'I'
'T
JEE (Main + Advsnciu') 2014

J RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
n:
Paragraph for question nos. 9 to 11
A demonstration often done in physics classes is for a student to hold a spinning bicycle wheel while
standing on a platform that is free to rotate.The wheel's rotation axis is initially horizontal. Then the student
repositions the wheel.so that its axis of rotation is vertical. As he repositions the wheel, the platform
begins to rotate opposite to the wheel's rotation. If we assume no friction acts to resist rotation of the
platform, then the platform continues to rotate as long as the wheel is held with its axis vertical. If the
student returns the wheel to its original orientation, the rotation of the platform stops.

\
l
l
,l
/ I,

I Lp lalform+Student
1­ The platform is free to rotate about a vertical axis. As a result, once the student steps onto the platform,
,I
/ "
the vertical component Ly of the angular momentum of the system (student + platform + wheel) is
conserved. The horizontal components of L ar~ not conserved. The platform is not free to rotate about
l any horizontal axis since the floor can exert external torques to keep it from doing so. In vector language,
we would say that only the vertical component of the external torque is zero, so only the vertical component
J of angular momentum is conserved.
=
Initially Ly 0 since, the student and the platform have zero angular momentum and the wheel's angular
( momentum is horizontal. When the wheel is repositioned so that it spins with an upward angular
momentum (Ly > 0), the ,
rest ofthe system (the student and the platform) must acquire an equal magnitude
of downward angular momentum (Ly < 0) so that the vertical component of the total angular momentum
( I , is still zero.
~I' The student and the wheel apply torques to each other to transfer angular momentum from one part of

(r : ; the system to the other. As the student lifts the wheel, he feels a strange twisting force that tends to
totate him about a horizontal axis. The platform prevents the horizontal rotation by exerting unequal
C,\:i ,normal forces on the student's feet. The horizontal component of the torque is so counterintuitive that,
~

( ~ if the student is not expecting it, he can easily be thrown from the platform.

~'~ ~ The torque exerted by the wheel on the student is :

(- :~ (A) having horizontal component only

'fl
( 1
(B) having vertical component only

tl (C) having horizontal as well as vertical component

]1 (D) there is no torque at any time on the student

(T~ 10. As indicated in paragraph:

, ~, (A) Ground exerts only a torque in horizontal direction

~4
[: (B) Ground exerts only a torque in vertical dir~(';ti()n

(I
JEE (Main + Advancedl 2014
~LLI.IIM
RAC'E
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

-
.AU" ''''STITt/TIl
!!=WIl'!',}!IWmt,m. Regular Af\~lysls thI'Qu9h C"ntinu(\us e..~ereise PHASE: I
---

\ccro:ding to the paragraph


:A) there is no friction between the student and the platform but there is friction between platform and
the ground. ' ; ~
(B) there is friction between the student and the platform as well as between platform and the ground.
(C) there is no friction between the student and the platform as well as between platform and the ground. r
(D) there is friction between the student and the p]atfonn but there is no friction between platform and D
the ground. p
Question No. 12 & 13 (2 questions) tr
A
~'""1
dl'S" hln'l'ng r"d;"s
to "'" .~ _ ~ .1 t.:l UU L"
",I;""pl'ng on a hon'zont~1
D 1· 0... rol1:~g
H,ur ,,,;~J..,.., (" ~, p'_-
.. ~
n '."u.\.~u ...
i:11 \i'\.-£.J) - .........
la.UC
Q!.1,t:l ".
1'"1_ ...... _c ·'le U.:.~~
~Hl..H:;: Vl!..l
.
.",. I.· .
Sl~:.s
m
a velocity v and acceleration a as shown. y n,
Speed of the point P having coordinates (x,y) is: 0'1.1
C;'
18. Th
f 2
v~x2 +~y+R)2 (C) vv x +~Y-:R) . (I?) None
(L
'2
(A) vJX2+/ (B) x
(0,0) ,
R
(C
If v =~haR the angle e between acceleration of the top most point and h~rizontal is: ,
19. Th
(A) 0 (B) 45° (C) tan- l 2 (D) tan-z(~)
Question No. 14 to 17 (4 questions) (:
In the following problems, indicate the correct direction of friction force acting on the cylinder, which
20. 11.
is pulled on a rough surface by a constant force F.
i. A cylinder of mass Mand radius R is pulled horizontally by a force F. The friction force can be given ,

by which of the following diagrams (A


."." M'~F Qu.estif/1
A
lA)'I»F
. . _'. .
(B ) 6:! (C) &F"
1-0
(D) cannot be interpreted n:'
h,

.s. A cylinder is pulled horizontally by a force F acting at a point below the centre of mass of the cylinder, 1ll
r
as shown in figure. The friction force can be given by which of the following diagrams

~F

(A) .•'rC:\ ..
.'f~F (B)&" (C) (9-1' (D) cannot be interpreted
1=0. 21. if
16. , A cylinder is pulled horizontally by a forceF acting ata point above the centre of mass of the cylinder, t\.j
'. as shown in figure. The friction force can be given by which of the following diagrams
(

.
!t V F

F 22. Tl
(if
C
(A) 0-.F
I~
(B)
1=0
~
~J
F
(C)
c'
CD) cannot be interpreted (
.$':;./
.
17. A cylinder is placed on a rough plank which in tum is placed on a smooth surface. The plank is pulled
with a constant force F. The friction force can be given by which of the following diagrams (~
Gl. P3. t(

4
~F , ;
, /

6.,
. _ .. 1..,,,, 'ntprnrftted
JEE (Main .,. Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Cpntinuous Exerci&e
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

Question No. 18 to 20 (3 questions)


A unifonnly dense solid cylinder of mass m and radius R is released fro.m
rest on an inclined plane. Afterreleasing from rest it starts perfonrung pure
rolling (i.e. rolling without slipping). As there is no sIipp.ing the friction
force acts is static it! nature. Therefore the relative velocity between the
points in contact is zero. We know that roHing in combined rotation and
translation. During its downward journey along the incline the cylinder
010Ve'." (ii~t~n.Ge: p. ~lflM the jnr.1inl~. The anRle
~. - of inclination from hotizontal
.
;.
'~;

i.'l~'

is (J. and the coefficient offliction is given as Ii: The acceleration due to
V
~ gravity is. g downwar~s. Air resistance is not present.
~
t:l
\ ~ 18. The acceleration of centre of mass of cylinder is
~
(A) g sin (J. - llg cos (J. (B) g sin (J.

'1
2gsin (J.
(C) 3 (D) none of these

19. The final angular speed of cylinder is

(A) I~ gl sin (J. ~2 gl sina: 1 gl sin (J.


1 3 R2 (B) 3R2 (C)
:3 R2 CD) none of these

20. The minimum coefficient of friction required so that there is no slipping, is


2 tan (J. tan (J.
(A) -- (B) ._. -3---- (C) tan (J. (D) none of these
3
Question No. 21 to 23 (3 questions)
. A square frame ofmass m is made of four identical uniform rods of length L each. This frame is
placed on an inclined plane such that one of its diagonals is parallel to the inclined plane as shown
in figure, and is released.

21. ,The moment of inertia of square frame about the axis passing through the centre and perpendicular
to the plane of frame is
2 2
(A) mL (B)2mL (C) 4mL2 (D) mL2
.. 3 3 3 12
22. The frictional force acting on the frame just after the release of the frame assuming that it does not
't~ ~'
slide is
I
(B) 2mgsinO (C) 3mgsinO (D) 2mgsinO

~J
(A) mg sin 0
3 5 5
23. The acceleration of the center of square frame just after the release of the frame assuming that it
<, does not slide is
" I~=~S~:;'
R',AC E

,,'
JEE (Main + Adllanoedl2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
",,; IIM/lJIMh"i"'M. Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I i i

24. A rigid cylinder IS kept on a smooth horizontal surface as shown. If Column I indicates velocities of
various points (3-centre of cylinder, 2- top point, 4-bottom point, 1- on the.1evel of 3 at the rim) on it
i;
shown, choose correct state of motion from Column II. ~~'{
Column I
vI =i+],v2=2i
Column II 2
L' ~
~

II

(A) (P) Pure rotation about centre x

(B) v1=i+],v3 =-i (Q) Rolling without slipping to left

(C) v2=: i, v3 = 0 (R) Rolling without slipping to right

(D) v4=0,v l=-i-j A "

(S) Not possible


25. ' Consider a square plate of mass 'm' kept on a rough horizontal ground with friction coefficient f.I.;;::(
Two anti parallel forces FI & F2 is applied at height hi & h2 respectively as shown in figure. Column
I gives various values of forces & height of point of application of that force while column II gi ves
various effects.

I
~,J

,!
i

t
;.
i
t
r i

Column I Column II
mg a
,,(A) Fl=Fi= 2; hI;;:: a; h2 ;;:: '8 (P) Normal reaction shifts towards right

mg a
=_.
(B) F1 F ;;:: mg' h ;;:: a' h ;;::-
2'2 '1 '28 (Q) Torque due to friction is into the plane of plate
,
(C) F I= mg'' F2= O'' h I ;;:: a (R) Torque due to friction is out of the plane of plate

(D) F;;::
" 12'2
mg
- ' F ;;::mg' h ,;;:: h ;;::­
'.I 22
a
(S) Toppling of plate occurs r,-;

(T) Friction force is zero. .


I

26. A double pulley shaped device mounted on a horizontal frictionless ax;is


is used to lift a 30 kg box as shown in figure. The outer radius R of the,
F

device is 0.50 m, an the radius r of the hub is 0.20 m. When a constant

horizontal force of magnitude 152 N is applied in the left direction to a


c:
rope wrapped around the outer circumference qf the device, the box, which

c
is suspended from a rope wrapped around the hub, has an upward

(
~M'>ftl .... .,til"\" I"'If malZnitude 0.80 m/s 2 • The rotati(Jnal inertia
"-./
Ii .1 JEE (MaIn + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

PHASE: I

i \
)f ,\ 27. A wheel of moment of iqertia 40 1t kg-mt mounted on an axis, which is not frictionless, is initially at
It 'I
rest. A constant external torque is applied to the wheel giving the wheel an angular velocity of 60 rev!
min. The external torque is then removeq, and the wheel comes to rest 40s later; Find the frictional torque
(in N-m), which is assumed to be constant. [Take 1t2 = 10]
28. A thin uniform rod of length L and mass m=1.6 kg is free to rotate about a smooth axis which passes
through its ~dee A. A point mass m is shot horizontally at a velocity of v'- towards the opposite edge
of the rod (point B). When it hits the rod, it sticks to it. What is the magnitude of the vertical component
of force (in N) applied by the axis on the rod in the horizontal state?: (g=1Om/s2)

L
:) of
:,~

M
m~-9>UB

" f
.~
I
t
\i
16

t~:
/
'\..

(
"'-._ .ri

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

\, 4.~
i
'.
t 1.~ ~',.~ 3.~
!
t
~ s.J:j~m 6.~ 7.~ 8.~
~
i,':
I 9.tm1®~ 10.~ 11.·~. 12.~
I
I

\
13.i~

·17.,~
14·~m
18.~
15.~.
19.~
16.~

·20.~
i
~,. fi 21~.,·~ .22.~ 23.~ 24.
( \
'~ t

.I
i f
5. 26. L . I_ _- - - - ' 27. L . I_ _- - - '

'l

" ALLI"
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (M~in + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: 1
RACE # 49 . PHYSICS

1. Two particles of mass m1 and mz are moving with velocity vI and v2 respectively. Mark the COITect
statement about a perfectly inelastic collision between mt and mz.

(A)Jmpulse by m l to ~ is
in
ml 2 (vI - v2)'

ml+m2

(B) Momentum transfered by m, to m l IS


. mlm"
,"
(-V2 -
_) .

vI
~ ml-r m 2

'. . . mI m2 (- -)
(e) Impulse by m l on m2 In eM frame IS mi + m2 VI - v 2 •

(D) In eM frame both the particles come to rest after perfectly inelastic collision.
2. A heavy homogenous cylinder has mass m and radius R. It is accelerated by a force F which is applied
to the cylinder. The coeffi!;ient of static friction is sufficient for the cylinder to roll without slipping.
Then?

~
2F
tr (A) The frictional force is "3
II
t
. 2F
(B) The acceleration of the centre of the cylinder is 3mR (R + r)

F
(C) It is possible to choose 'r' so that the acceleration of centre of cylinder is greater than ­
. m
(D) The direction of frictional force is always opposite to F

Paragraph for Questions 3 to 5

A small sphere P of mass m is suspended from 0 by a light inextensible q. a~3 ~


,(
thread oflength 2a. XYis a smooth, vertical rigid wall distance a--l3 from
l
point O. Initially P is at rest. It is given a horizontal velocity u = ~6ga so 2 N
as,to strike the vertical wall ?-t N in an inelastic impact. The coefficient of /
"
restitution between the sphdre and wall is 0.5. ,/"
..... ''''" "
3. The velocity with which the sphere will strike the wall is p u y
(A) 2~ at 30° to vertical (B) 2~ at 60° to vertical

(
(C) ~ perpendicular (D) ~2ga at 30° to vertical
" 4. The'magnitude of change in momentum of the sphere on impact is given by
,(


(
\../ (A) {2ji;z)m (B) (5~)m (C) (3~)m (D) mji;z
5. The loss of kinetic,energy on account of the impact is

" (A) 7mga (B) 3mga (C) 3mga (D) 5mga ",

/ 3 2 8 4
"-­
If
~
JEE (Main + Advancedl2014 ,'''''''''''~J
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASe: I
:*.;;' "~
~'h~

10
, Paragraph for question nos. 6 to 8
Two blocks ml and ~ are connected by an ideal spring of force constant k. The blocks are placed on
smooth horizontal surface. A horizontal force F acts on the block mi' Initially spIing is relaxed, both the
blocks are at rest. .

\\~F
6. What is acceleration of centre of mass of system at the instant of maximum elongation of spring
F(m! +m2) F F
(A) Zero (B) mlm2 (C) m! (D) m! + rn 2

7. Which of the following statement is not true in the context of above system. Ih
, (A) Centre of mass reference frame is an inertial frame.
(S) Kinetic energy of the system is minimum in centre of mass frame.
(C) At the instant of maximum deformation both the blocks are instantaneously at rest in centre of mass
reference frame.
(D) Acceleration of centre of mass is constant in ground frame.
8. " What is maximum elongation of spring.

2m}F m;F 2m2F m~F

'(A) (mt+ m2)k (B) 2(m} +m2)2 k (C) k(mj +m2) (D) 2(m1 +m2)2k

9. Consider a shell rolling purely on a horizontal fixed surface. The velocity of the centre of shell is
voi and acceleration of the centre of shell is aoi.
Following representative points are chosen on the shell ¥
P ( on z-axis) s
Q and R ( on x - axis)
S ( on y-axis)
Following symbolic representation has been used
r = position vector of a point wi th respect to 0
Y = veloCity vector of point with respect to ground ' l -r'Jo,
co = angular velocity of the body
a= acceleration of a point with respect to ground
Match the conditions given in column-II with points given in column-I that obey the given condition at
,the instant shown. IJ~~
Column I ,Column n
,~/

(A) P (P) r'a =0


(B) Q (Q) r'Y =0 14:/
(C) R (R) ro'r = 0
(D) S (S) roxr=O
{T\ :':+.:: ,.(\

l "
JEE (Main + Advancedl2014
'\lSE
!
2014 .
·'RACt::
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
-, 10. Two movable wedges (A and B) of mass M each touch the horizontal
plane smoothly. They are free to slide without frictiot;l on the plane. See
r'edon accompanying diagram. A small block C of mass M13 is released from
th the rest at the height h and slides down the left hand wedge. Assume that the

block always slides without friction and jerk. Horizontal momentum to

the right is to be taken as positive.

Column I ColumnIl
(A) When C is sliding down the wedge A (P) Kinetic energy of A increases
(B) When C is sliding up the wedge B (Q) Kinetic energy of B increases .
(C) When C is siiding down the wedge B (R) iiurizuJitai momt';:i1tul11 of A + C sysicin is c~nserved
(D) When C is sliding up the wedge A (S) Horizontal momentum of B+ C system' increases
('1') kinetic energy of A + B + C system increases
11. A yo-yo is resting on a perfectly rough horizontal table. Forces F I , F2, F3 andF4 are applied separately
as shown.

Column I Column II

mass
(A) ~Fl (P) centre of mass accelerates towards left

(B) @! r
.......

eose < (rIR)


F2

e';' ;

'). (Q) center of mass accelerates towards right , .

FS

{§i
.ell is
r e
(C) ........ . (R) friction acts towards left

eose > (rIR)

~F4
(D)~.e (S) friction acts towards right
eose = (rIR)
(777 12. Two identical balls of mass M and radius R are placed in contact with each
other on a frictionless horizontal surface as shown. The third ball of mass M
and radius R/2 moves vertic~ly downward and hits the two balls symmetrically
•t
( with speed .../5 mls and comes to rest. Find the speed of anyone of the bigger
"-:ion at balls after collision if bigger balls are moving horizontally after collisi on.
13. Aball is shotin a long hall having a roof at a height of 15 m with speed of ~
25 mls at an angle of 53° with the floor. The ball lands on the floor at a 530 . 15m
distance shown x = _______ m from the point of projection. Assume .
M H
( collisions as elastic if any) x
"-
~4. The inclined surfaces of two moveable wedges of the same mass
M lie near each other on the horizontal plane as shown in the figure.
A small block of mass m slides down the left wedge from a height .
h. To what maximum heights will the block rise along the right

wedfi!e? N~pl~~t th~ fri~tinn,

\.~ .
JEE (MaIn + Advanlle!l) 2014

·.A'-'.E
Regular Anlilysls throus.Ks Exerolse
·E'lTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
"

;. A particle is thrown from a height h horizontally towards a vertical wall moving


away with a speed v as shown in the figure. lfthe particle returns to the point of A clever d"
projection after suffering two elastic collisions, one with the wall and another Note that tl
with the ground, find the total time of flight and initial separation x between the the bottle
particle and the wall. position is
6. A is ~ fixed point at a height H above a perfectly inelastic smooth horizontal negligibh.
plane. A light inextensible string of length L(> H) has one end attached to A AT L 0 bottle fr'"
and other is to a heavy particJe. The particle is held at the level of A with string H:
john)}»)))),,)))], r
just taut and released from rest. Find the height of the particle above the plane shown
when it is next instantaneously at rest. . "
A mas.
l7. Mass ml hits & sticks with ffiz whUe slidinghorizontally wjth velocity valong the common line ofcentres of 22.
and2k~
, ~e ti't.ree ~ua! masses (ml :; '; mz ~~ m3 ::: m), Initially masses ~ and In:; are stationary and the spring is
length (
unstretched. Find
(intr'~~
(a) the velocities of mp ~ and m3 immediately after impact.
(b) the maximum kinetic energy of m3 •
(c) the minimwn kinetic energy of~. (~~
ml ml
II/tllll
Frictionless
m3

(d) the maximum compression ofthe spring.


1& A big Diwali rocket is projected vertically upward so as to attain a maximum height of 160m. The
rocket explodes just as it reaches the top of its trajectory sending out luminous particles in all possible
directions all with same speed v. The dispJay, consisting of the luminous particles, spreads out as an
,expanding, brilliant sphere. The bottom of this sphere just touches the ground when its radius is 80m.
With what speed (in mls) are the luminous particles ejected by the explosion? "71
~
19~ A small ball of mass 2g is attached to a string of length £ whose other end is fastened to an upright
vertical rod fixed on a wooden board resting on a horizontal table. The combined mass of the board and 23. ~rt
rod is ll\g. The friction coefficient between the board and the table is J..l. The ball is released from rest

with the string in a horizontal position. It hits the vertical rod in a completely inelastic collision. While
e'
the ball swings, the board does not move.

What is minimum value that J..l must have to prevent the board from moving to the left while the ball

swings dow.n ? Using necessary approximation, express your answer as x x 10-3 and fill value of x in

OMRsheet.

m.IlI----,

... '.\.;

20. A unifonn rod ABC of mass M and length £ is placed vertically on a rough horizontal surface. A forc~/,"
F :: 1.2 mg is applied on the rod at pointB at a distance £/3 below centre of rod horizontally as shown· i ~

in figure. Find the initial acceleration of point A (in mis',) . >1


A

c
F

I
i "
.! \'.­

,,->,.
need) 2814
~OURSE
I
RAe!::
Regul~r Analysill throughContinuolIs ExerQllIc
JEE {MaIn + AdvanCed} 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

J:"M~l. A clever design of a bottle holder (a plank with a hole) is shown in the figure.
Note th~t the holder is not fixed to the support; it stands freely, but only when
the bottle is in. Assume that the mass of the bottle is 1kg. The bottle in its rest
=
position is slightly tipped up (ex. 15°). Assuming the mass of the holder to be
\-0 negligible and e=24 cm, and the angle e =53°, The distance of COM of the
bottle from the hole (x) so that the bottle and the holder can stand together as
'7777'm­
shown is given p cm. Fill ~ in OMR sheet. (Take cos 15° =24/25),
1tres of 22. A massless spring of force constant 1000 N/m is compressed a distance of 20cm between discs of Skg
Iring is and 2kg, spring is not attached to discs. The system is given an initial velocity 3m1s perpendicular to
length of spring as shown in figure. What is ground frame speed (magni tude of velocity) of 2kg block
(in mls) when spring regains its natural length.

The
sible
.s an
:Om.
. h 1,"
'g t
and
~st 23. The two ends of a uniform thin rod of length "2R and of mass "2 kg can move without friction along a
li1e vertical circular path of radius R. The rod is released from the vertical position (ab). Find the force (in N)
exerted by an end of the rod on the path when the rod passes the horizontal position(cd) .
.' '111
\ .
III

d~

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

l,~ 2.~ 3·mw~ 4.~


('I

"'l
f
.
5~
-'- :"'- - ".~ ,6·~m 7.~ 8.~

'--I 9.~ 10. ~


. s,
~~ ________ ~"'_.~1i>I ~ta\:.:
11.~ 12. [
{ ,

(
\

13. [' I 14. I 15. I 16. I ·1


17. [ I 18. I 19. I 20., J
?1 r 22. I 23. I
)

.':.
ALLE.
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHANJ
ACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # 50 PW\'$tCS
?, ' ,
1. A sphere of radius RI has charge density p uniform with in its volume, except for a small spherical
hollow region of radius R2 located a distance "a" from centre (Take zero potential at infinity).
, pa
(A) Electric field at A' is -3­
EO

3
pa "
(B) Electric field at 0' is -?-a
.J EO

(C) Electric potential at 0' is 6 ~o [3 (R[ - R~) - a 2 ] ,

(D) Electric potential at any point in hollow region is constant


2. Figure shows a charge configuration with its equipotential surfaces and electric field lines placed in x-y
". plane. Mark INCORRECT statement ;­
(

,~

( , (A) Potential gradient is positive along ( CD )

( ;, (B) Potential gradient is ~egative along (EF)


(C) If a positive charge particle is constrained to move along line AB, it will have constant potential
energy.

(D) A positive charge particle released from rest at C will begin to move in direction (DC)
(
3. In the figure, the magnetic induction at point 0 is :­
(

(
('
'-..,

"

,(A) 110
1 (B) 110 1 + llo I
L
(C) llo I + 1101 (D) !-loI _ !-loI
41tr 4r' 21tr 4r 4m 4r 4m

t'
JEE (Main + Advanced) 20'4

!:::::::::==::::::~ ______________________ RACE


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
~R:e!9U:I:ar~A:n:a~I~:i:s~th:r:ou~9~h~Co::n:tln:u:O:U$::EX:~::ls:e~________________________~::::~______~,-

Paragraph for Question No.4 and 5


In the circuit as shown in figure the switch is closed at t O. =
4. At the instant of closing the switch
(A) the battery delivers maximum current.
(B) no current flows through C S
E[]C ~R2
(C) Voltage drop across Rz is zero.
(D) the current through the battery decreases with time finally becomes zero.
5. A long time after closing the switch
(A) voltage drop across the capacitor is E.
E
(B) current through the battery is R +R
I 2

2 /

R2E
1
(C) energy stores in the ,capacitor is 2"C ( Rl + R2
J
(D) current through the capacitor becomes zero.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 6 & 7

A cylinder fitted with a piston which ,can slide without

friction contains one mole of an ideal gas. The walls of

the cylinder and piston are adiabatic. The cylinder

=
contains a resistor of resistance R 2 kO which is

connected to a capacitor of capacity C =75 mF.lnitially

potential difference across capacitor is ( ~O ) V and


f

switch is open. When switch is closed for (2.4 .en 4) min, the gas expands isobarically and its temperature
• ! ,

increases by 72 K. Heat loss through the wires is negligible. (R = 8.3 J mole-1 K-l, 2-G~) ::z 0.07)

6. Work done by the gas is approximately


\ .", ;
(A) 0.2 kJ (B) 0.4 kJ (C) 0.6 kJ (D) 0.8 kJ l~Li :
7. Increment in internal energy of gas is approximately:­
(A) 1 kJ (B) 2 kJ (C) 3 kJ (D) 4 kJ
Paragraph for Question nos. 8 & 9

There is a fixed semicircular ring of radius R lying in


z /;'fy
y-z plane, with centre of arc at origin and it is uniformly .....'
charged with charge +Q. There is an insulated long
hollow smooth pipe of very small radius fixed along x­ ••••••••..••..........••..•..••••••••....i>X
axis from origin 0 as shown in figure, A small ball .'.'
with charge +q and mass m is projected from 0 in pipe .' .'.' .'
, with negligible velocity, ball can smoothly move in pipe.

Whole arrangement lies in gravity free space.

c
RACE
Regular Analysis through ContInuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Adyanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

8. The maximum acceleration of ball in pipe is :


1 Qq 1 Qq Qq
1
----2
(A) 41tEo mR (B) 12J31tEo mR2 (C) -6J31tEo mR 2 (D) None of these
(
9. The kinetic energy, of particle when its acceleration is maximum is

('
f,
1 Qq (1
(A) 4n: Eo
12J
R - V"3 "(B)
1 Qq ( 1)
41tEo R \'2 . (C) 4n:80
1 Qq ( 1 )
R .J2 (D) None of these

10. A unifonnly charged sphere is placed inside a charged hollow sphere

as shown in figure. 0 is the centre of hollow sphere and Cis the

centre of solid sphere. The magnitude of charge on both the spheres

is 4( ~J ~C. The electricfield at point 'P' which lie just outside


the hollow sphere is given by 3a leN/C. Find the value of a.
(­ Relevant questions from (HCV)
" Chapter 38 (Alternating Current)

Short Answer type # All

Objective-1 # All

Objective-2 # All

Exercise # 3,4,5,9,12,17,18

( ,

,-
I

{ ·l
"-­

(
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
1.~ 2.~ 3.~ 4.~

5.~~ 6.~ 7.~ 8.~


/ ,

9.~ 10. 1 - 1_ _ _ -I

t
·,KO;W. RA!lASTHAN);
CE
is through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHIJSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 51 PHYSICS

1. Four identical plates 1,2,3 and 4 are placed parallel to each other at equal

distance as shown in the figure. Plates 1 and 4 are joined together and the

space between 2 and 3 is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant k = 2.


311111111111111

(
The capacitance of the system between 1 and 3 & 2 and 4 are C1 and C2
4

. . C1 .
respectively. The ratio C IS:
z
5 3 5
(A) -
, 3 (B) 1 (C) 5" (D) "7
2. A dielectric slab of area A passes between the capacitor plates of area 2A with a

constant speed v. The variation ofcurrent i through the circuit as function of time

t can be qualitatively represented as

,"

3.
(A)b (B)~
. .. "

_,t
(C) lr· (D) bn,
A current carrying wire (cun'ent = Z) perpendicular to the plane of the paper produces a magnetic field,
as shown in the figure. A square of side a is drawn with one ofits vertices on ~he centre of the wire. The
integral fB.err along OPQRO has the value

/
<
r'

" J.l.oi (C) J.l.oi (D) J1.oi


("
(A) +J.l.oi (B)
\ 8 4 2
Paragraph for Question No.4 to 8
, .
Consider the circuit in the figure. The switch is initially in position A for a sufficiently long time to
establish a steady state; At t =0, the switch is turned to position B.. The capacitor 2C did not hold any
=
charge before t O. '
R

cr?~c
~
The magnitude of charge which each plate of capacitor C holds before t 0 is =
(A) CE (B) CE/R (C) RCIE (D) RICE
At t -4 co, when a new steady state has been established, the charges heid by capacitors C and 2C will
respectively be
{ A '\ ("'It:<' ClMrl ?('F (B) CEl2 and CE (C) CE/3 and 2CE/3 (D) 2CE/3 and CE
0-;..,

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE

Regular Anal)'5is through Continuous Exercise


ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

6. The current decreases exponentially between t =° =to t co. The time constant is
(A) 9RC (B) 2RC (C) 3RC (D) 3RC/2
°
7. The energy lost between t = to t =co is
(A) CE2/3 (B) 2CE2/3 (C) CE2/9 (D) 8CE2/9
8. The time, at which charge in the capacitor C is reduced to half of the value it had at t = 0, is
(A) 6RC ln2 (B) 3RC ln2 (C) 2RC ln2 (D) 4RC ln2
9. Figure given shows the face of a cathode-ray oscilloscope tube, as viewed from in front. Le. the electron
beam is coming out normally from the plane of the paper. The electron beam passes through a region
where there are electric and magnetic fields,directed as shown. The deflections of the spot from the
center of the screen produced by the electric field E and the magnetic field B separately are equal in
, magnitude. Which one of the diagrams below shows a possible position of the spot on the screen when
both fields are operating?

(AlEB +
.
EB :
. . (elEB ED
l
(B) ......,....
!
(Dl -"-j-""
10. A current carrying wire in the form of 'V' alphabet is kept as shown in the figure. Magnetic field intensity
at point P which lies on the angular bisector of V is

f ..· · · · · , · · ( ) ( )

/i.e
'1",'
"'f~~'
............. 00Q
f

~oi [1- cos a] ~oi [1 - cos a]


(A) Jloi [I-coso.] (B) ~oi [l-cosa]
411:ro 21tfo (C) 4m:o sin a (D) 2m:o sin a

iI,

~ I
,

,!~, I

J ,1

JL.. ~
;~
1
, ·1" . il
)' j , ,
(/
1. EQ'I!Em?J 2.~ 4. ~
~

5·IbmED 6·D.~ 8.~ I:


y
9.~~ 10,~

o-"
{
ALLI"

CAREER INSTITUTE
KOlA (RAJASTHAN)
RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise


JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

RACE # 52
PHYSICS

1. Four wires carrying cun'ent II:: 2A, 12 :: 4A, 13:: 6A and 14:: 8A respectively cut the page perpendicularly
as shown in figure. The value of f:i3.de for the loop shown would be :­

(A) +2/lo-wb/m (l3) -2/lo-wb/m (C) + 10 /lo-wb/m (D) - 10 /lo-wb/m


2. A long straight cylindrical shell has inner radius Ri and outer radius Ro' It carries current i, uniformly
distributed over its cross section. A wire is to be placed paral1el to the cylinder axis. in the hollow region
C"

(r < Rj ).
(A) The magnetic field is zero everywhere in the hollow region. We conclude that the wire is on the
cylinder axis and carries CUlTent i in the same direction as the current in the shell
(B) The magnetic field is zero everywhere'outside the shell (r> Ro)' We conclude that the wire is on the
cylinder axis and cames current i in the direction opposite to that of the current in the shell.
(C) The magnetic field isiero everywhere in the hollow region. We conclude that the wire may be anywhere
in the hollow region hut must be carrying current i in the same direction as the current in the shell
(D) The magnetic field is zero everywhere in the hollow region. We conclude that the wire does not
carry any CUITem
( 3., Statement-1: It does not take energy to set up a magnetic field in a region.
and
Statement-2 : Magnetic field does notdo any work.
. (A) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is acorrect explanation for Statement-I.
(B) Statemenr-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a cOlTectexplanation forStatement-l.
(C) Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False.
(
(D) Statement-I is False, Statement-2 is True.
" 4. A uni form magnetic field B is directed out of the page. A metallic wire has the shape of a square frame
/
and is placed in the field as shown. While the shape of the wire is steadily transformed into a ci rcle in the
" same plane, the current in the frame
(
'\'"

{
,-,

' ' ..
\'"
(A) is directed clockwise (B) does not appear
(
t(");" rt''''''f't",rt f'Al1nt"'''I'!Al'lrU/;Q''' (1)) lc:! ~ltprnl'ltlno
1...'

(,
JEE (Main + Advanced} 2014

:RACE
Regullll' AnalysIs through Continuous Ex.rels•
ENTHUSIAST COURSE' .
PHASE: I

.5. A circular wire loop of radius R rotates with an angular'speed co in a uniform magnetic field~, as shown
in the figure. If the emf 8 induced in the loop is So sincot, then the angular speed of the loop is

.;f
(A) 80 RIB (B) 2nBoIR (C) cJ(BnR2) CD) 8~/(BR2)
(E) tan- i (80 / Bc)
6. In figure. a circular loop is moved at a constant velocity through regions where unifonn magnetic fields
of the same magnitude are directed into or out of the page. (The magnetic field is zero outside the region
surrounded by dashed lines)
(A) At position 4 current induced in the loop is clockwise
(B) At position 3 current induced in the loop is anticlockwise
:e ••• :xxxx ~ I ..................... ,"' ................ ..,

t : :
0-+0 0 Q 0 Q Q
1 :23!4 5:6 7 r"
(C) At position 2 current induced in the loop is clockwise i it. " . : : ~,. . . . . . . . . . . . . .\o • • " ............. <1

(D) At position 5 current induced in the loop is clockwise


7. Figure shows three regions of magnetic field, each of area A, and in each region magnitude of
magnetic field decreases at a constant rate ex. If E is induced electlic field then value of line integral

pE .dr along the given loop is equal to

(A) a.A (B) -a.A (C) 3a.A CD) -3a.A


8. The magnetic flux ~ linked with a coil depends on time t as ~ = at where a and n are constants. The,~mf
D
,

induced in the coil is e


( ,

(A)IfO<n<l,e=O (B) If 0 < n < 1, e :;t; 0


(C) If n == 1, e is constant (D)Ifn> 1, lei increases with time
9. A frame is rotating about hinge at 0 in a unifonn transverse x X'" x )<: )~ 2cx x :< Ji( )': x
magnetic field as shown in the figure. Dimensions of various x )( x x x x x Ix X K X
sections of the rod are shown. Some points are marked on x
)( ,: )( X bx )( X i:

the rod C. Choose the incorrect alternative. ~x:....j-~~-rl


l<.dx ')~
, 0 x x .~ C
(A) Potential difference between 0 and A can never be zero. )(
x x X X
(B) Potential difference between A and C may be zero.
(C) Potential difference between 0 and C does not depend on b.
(D) Potential difference between A and B does not depend on a.

["­
''''::~i'''' ,- ,
.,,~

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


It
ALLE~"M
CAREER IN$TITUTE
·.:.'i ...... f !'7ilU.1;"IIE.·r.
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous E~erelse
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

10. Column-I gives some electrical circuits in steady state, column II gives some statements regrading the
circuits match appropriately. (All Voltmeter & Ammeter are ideal)

Column - I Column - II

R'
(
\
(A) (P) Reading of voltmeter is 2 V
20n
(

(
(B) (Q) Reading of ammeteris 0.1 A
(
2V
c
(

(
10[.1
( (C) (R) Current through R' is zero
2V
C

~
2002V 20n

( 200 2V

2V v ~20n

C
, ~H2V

CD) 2V ~
/ " _7;200 (S) Charge on capacitor is 2/-lC
(
20n~~ 2V

200 2V

(T) Current through R' is non-zero


(

c
(
I:
l It
I.
e I, FILL THE ANSWER HERE

i; [QD:BC.D
1.~~1 2. ~~'1m
. ' 7. ~
3. . '::::::
rs>~ 4.
C i 5.~~ 8.~~

( I· 9'l~~~~
\t!''''.;''\'i:''~~~

<­ I
j,

"I '
,I:
/
R................
"······"C·····E········· JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regulal'.Analyslsthrough. Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

RACE. # 54 PHYSICS

1. In a region there exists a magnetic field Bo along positive x-axis. A metallic wire of length 2a and one
side along x-axis and one side parallel ofy-axis is rotating about y-axis with an angular velocity co. Then
at ~ instant shown.
~) 'Potential difference ilcross PQ is zero. ~ 9.. ~
y

. 1
n ~B
(B) Potential difference across PQ is '2 Bocoa 2 1

",U::!!,:'" ~ x

. (~) Potential difference across QR is ~ Bocoa 2

~otential difference across QR is Bocoa 2


.2•.. Selfinductanceof a coil is 8 H. The power (in watt) consumed by coil (purely iriductive) is given by
P = 8F .where' i ' is current in ampere. The time for the current to change from io to 2io will be .
'

'd"':' -, -S
.
..
, ! ';.­

~
~. .
'A \
~n2
·2
; to
. (B) 5 io '. (D) none of these ..:. 1,... .::1 ( '.:
(C) ,en 2
3. Figure shows an ideal solenoid of radius r l , and a coil of radius r. The plane of the coil is perpendicular
to the axis ofsolenoid'and is placed symmetrically with its centre on the axis of solenoid. Which of the
following graph best'ihdicates the relationship of coefficient of mutual inductance M and the radius of .
coilr
,
(

- .. ~'.~-

·u .~ · .~
(
<.

4.
(A)
. r
. ~)
G
1 . •
r
..4 . i
k r1 r
(D) . ~
r1

: A bound wire in the form of.a coil on an iron core behaves as an inductor, A rheostat having similar
r

~ ~ p~
/
structure has: . . t>..
~nly resistance but no inductance. t .' ~
f
\.
(B) both resistance and inductance. t ~~ ,
(C) it offers resistance only to DC and impedance Z > R to AC.
,
(
(D) it doesn't'have:iron core so no inductance.
(
S, A (current vs time) graph of the current passing through a solenoid
Ic

/
is shown in Fig. If the back emf at t == 3s is e, then the magnitude of n::
.bac~mf att= 7 s is '~" ~

.
IA

·W2e (B) e
"
,.,
"-./
(C) 3e (D) 2.5 e , \ o

(
JEE (Main + Advancedj'201,4
RA~E···
throUgh~S
Regular. Analysis Exercise '
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
, ,'. ' ...

A time varying voltage V =2t volt is applied across an ideal inductor


"'­
2H
of inductance L. -,2H =
........
as-shown
"
in figure. Then select incorrect ~"
. ,'.
statement V=2t . ),-~'. "'" \
(A) current versus time graph is a parabola .~ ~. ~~-: , ., ..:
\,,:>1 ,I ::p. " _.
';;.'"
(B) energy stored in. magnetic field at t 2 s is4J ,.-/' = ," &t., .•t- ',r
'lC)yotential. energy at time t = 1 s in magnetic field is increasing at a rate of 1. Jls 'I;~~~ ;'~\r
~ energy stored in magnetic field is zero all the time---- .
,( '. .<'... I. ' . : r. *x~". '. ~ .

7. The s.elf inductance L of a solenoid of length [and area of cross~section A, with a fixed number of turns
Nincrease~.l:\.s . ~'5" ~k;,' . _ . . . . " L :. i"
(A) [.and A increase. ,// v "~l decreases and A increases. ' ___....
(C) I increases and A decreases. (0) both I and A decrease. ~. t
,
.r .•
, K!
8. In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal. The coil has an inductance of4H

and zero resistance. F is a fuse of zero resistance and will blow when the
:tL~ i
current through it reaches 5A. TIle'swTtchlsCiosed at t O. The fuse will
~
-TL-J_.___
= s I
.!

blow

(f\) almo.st at once (B};lfter 2 sec .

(C) after 5 sec . ~) after 10 sec


9. For "the circuit shoWn, which of the following statement(s) is(~) correct?
; . AIts tIme
J,IX) . constant IS . 1 secon d ~
40 12H

JEfin steady state, current through inductance 'Will be 1A


'. . . ' . . 4.Q
6n 8n t
(C) In steady state, current through 4.Qresistance will be 2/3 A•. ~~,

(O).In steady state; current through S.Qresistance will be zero 40 12V


10. The diagrams show three circuits with identical batteries, identical inductors, and identical resistors. Rank Ii
them according to the current through the batteryjllst after the switch is closed, from least to grelltest.

(1) T .
L/ o---W!v----I/
(2) lJ .
r-­ ....

• I •
?~~"
(j)j
- _----.l /
(3)

(A) 3, 2, 1 G (B) 2 and 3 ties, then 1 (C) 1,2,3

f'
In the circuit shown, the capacitor is initially charged with a 12 V

battery, when switch~~£p~!1.and ~w.i!ch S2 is cl~sed. SI is then.

closed and, at the same tqne, S2 IS openea:-Tne maXimum value of

current in the circuit is .

(A) $).38 rnA (B) 0.84 rnA

.Jf2J0.72 rnA (0) 0.1 rnA

;~1
r
L '"
11­
..;.---­
{?. II ~
r-t."~
L~-··-
I
1.~ 2.~m
FmE. TIlE AN&WER .HERE
.
'.

3.~ 4.~ I"


I. (

I'
,

~,
I

S.~ 6.~ 7.~lmJ £mEI53


9.~ 10. ~ . 11.r&UE'B1
8.
I' #
I
'. KOTA"fRAJASTHAN).'

; '\}
ACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # 55 PHYSICS
,-,"i
'0-"!"
1. A resistanceless conductor moves in uniform magnetic field on a uniform rectangular A
---.E
x x x
loop of resistance R with constant velocity. In moving from CD to EF, current x x x
"x x
"
x )(
through conductor x x
"
x x
X x x~F
"
I' (A) increases & then decreases (B) decreases & then increases D
B
(C) remains constant (D) decreases continuously
r
~ 2. Figure shows a uniform cross-sectional conducting ring of radius r and total resistance
, R in contact with two vertical conducting rails, which are joined at the top. The rails
r
have no friction and resistance. There is a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to II
~ X lC" x
the plane of rails. If ring falls with the velocity v, then
r
4Bvr
("
(A) II = 0; I2 = 4Bvr
R
(B) II : -R ;12 =0
"r

"
8Bvr 4Bvr
(C ) I = - I : - -
4Bvr
(D) I! = R , I2 =
2Bvr
R
x x h x
1 R' 2 . R

(. 3. A bar magnet was pulled away from a hollow coil A as shown in figure. As the south pole came out of
\.

,r'
the coil, the bar magnet next to hollow coil B experienced a magnetic force
!~

Up
4---- LetLL
r
IN 81 ~A jl{ight
\.. Down
r
\..

~B[K]J
r
~
(A) to the right (B) to the left (C) upwards (p) downwards
4. A rodoflength.e is oscillating as a physical pendulum about one ofits end with small angular amplitude a
in a crossed magnetic field B. The maximum emf induced in the rod will be :­

(
(A) Ba~± gJ!3 (B) BaI~g1!3 (C) Ba~jg1!3 (D) Ba~ge3
(
5. A semicircular wire of radius R is rotated with constant angular velocity 0) about an axis passing through
one end and perpendicularlo the plane of the wire, There is a uniform magnetic field of strength B. The
( induced e.m.f. between the ends is

®B

I'
\....
2
(' (A) B O)R 2/2 (B) 2B O)R2 (C) B O)R (D) None of these
'-­

/
ic
J~E(Mal,n + Advancedl2014
RACE
Regular Analysis Ihrough Continuous ExercIse
~NT"USIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

6.
In the fig. ABCD is a fixed smooth conduct,ing frame in horizontal plane. Tis a bulb of power 100 W,
P is a smooth pulley and OQ is a conducting rod. Neglect the self inductance of the loop and resistance
of any part other than the bulb. The mass M is moving down with constant velocity 10m/sec. Bulb lights
at its rated power due to induced e.mJ. in the loop due to earth' smagnetic field. Find the mass M of the
block in kg.

~ i

7.
In all the situations current in loop-I isi l and current in loop-II is i2• Consider the infinite wire as the
side of infinite large loop. Column-II describes the variaticm in current it in different arrangements and ,-I

column-I describes the various effects.

, Column I
Column-II J

(A) Current is clockwise in loop-II. (P) Current il is clockwise and


decreasing at constant rate. 80
I
.1
(B) Current is anticlockwise in loop-II. (Q) Current it is clockwise and
decreasing at constant rate. @)
I
(C) Flux of current it through (R) Current in infinite wire is it
I
loop-II is less than flux of and decreasing at constant rate.
c::>
I
current it through loop-I The wire is perpendicular to II
plane of loop. ?I
;'1

(D) Loop-II tends to reduce (S) Loop-I' having constant current Q[)
its area due to magnetic inclockwise direction moving 'I

, force applied by.magnetic


field ofil
upward with retardation.
Both loops are co-axial.
iCD !
'I

(T) Current in infinite wire is it


/I
upward and decreasing at 'I
10'i
f

constant rate. The wire is


parallel to the plane of loop.
'I
( ,

I U

~-
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
1
2.~ 3.~ 4.~~

S. 6. mmmmmmmmm l

7.

{!:a))'\!~. ,(~\.;~ ;~)i(~);;


~
! '

tl,~1!;~~ iL~;:\~~ ~!~u:~


')

L
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014 ,
LI"
CAREER INSTITUTE
'KOTA' (RAJASTHAN)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise

RACE # 56 PHYSICS

1. In an experiment suppose we want to increase the intensity to

desired result
d

(A) decreasing the distance d between filament (electron gun)

& target metal

(B) increasing the current in filament circuit II~II~II~III-I- - . . . . I


CoUidge Tube
accelerating potential
(C) increasing the size of collinator
(D) increasing the accelerating potential
2. A beam of light has two wavelengths 3100 A and 4133 A with a total intensity of 12.8 W/m2 equally
distributed between the two wavelengths. The beam falls normally on an area of a clean metallic surface
of work function 3.1 eV. Assume that there is no loss of energy by reflection and that each energetically
capable photon ejects one electron. How many electrons will emit per second from the face area?
, (A) 2 x 1019 (B) 10 19 (C) 10 IlI (D) 2 X 10 18
3. Light from a discharge tube containing hydrogen atoms falls on the surface of a plate of sodium. The
kinetic energy of the fastest photoelectrons emitted from sodium is 0.73 eV. The work function for
sodium is 1.82 eV. The energy of the photons causing the photoelectric emission is
CA) 1.82 eV CB) 2.55 eV CC) 0.73 eV CD) 1.46 eV
4. When a hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to first excited state, then
\ ..
CA) its kinetic energy increases by 10.2 eV (B) its kinetic energy decreases by 13.6 eV
"

CC) its potential energy increases by 10.2 eV (D) its angular momentum increases by hl21t
5. A perfectly absorbing, black, solid sphere with constant density and radius R, hovers stationary above
the sun. This is because the gravitational attraction ofthe sun is balanced by the pressure due to the sun's
c
'­ light. Light pressure P is given by the intensity I of the absorbed light divided by the speed of light
c =3 x 108 mls. P =IIc. Assume the sun is far enough away that it closely approximates a point source
of light. The distance from the centre of the sun at which the sphere hovers is:
c'
", (A) proportional to R '.:, (B) proportional to 11R
( (C) proportional to 11R2 (D) independent ofR

/
'J 6. A photo cell is illuminated by a small bright source placed 1 m away. When the same source of light is
placed 2 m away, the electrons emitted by photo cathode
'1
;
,(A) each carry one quarter of their previous energy
) (B) each carry one quarter of their previous momenta
)' (C) are half numerous

) 7.
(D) are one-quarter as numerous
When the voltage applied to an X-ray tube is increased from VI = 10 kV to V2 =20 kV, the wavelength
)' interval between the Ko; line and the short-wave cut off wavelength of the continuous X":'ray spectrum
)' increaseS by a factor 11 = 3.0. Find the atomic number of the element of which the tube's anticathode is
made. '
,) FILL THE ANSWER HERE
\1
c
1.~'

r: ~!HU;I"'\'m't'{1
2.~

6. I'A5Il1lUe.mt
'3.~

7.

I ]
c
}

' ... :' ......,': .


At:LE.
CAREER INSTITUTE ACE JEE (Main -I: Adva,nce~) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE .
"KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise . PHASE : I '

RACE # Sa . THIS. IS 'PAPE:R"1 OF LEADER (TV) HELD ON 22-09-20-13 ". :.PHYSICS

1. Figure shows a real string on a real pulley. The string runs on the pulley without slipping as shown in
figure. The direction of resultant force on an element shown in' figure on the string may be :­
element of string

~v

,, "'

(A) ) (BY/ CC)~ . (D)1


( 2. A particle moves along the arc of a circle of radius R according to the equation 1=a sin(Ot, where 1is the

length of path, and a and (0 are constants. Then the magnitude of the total accelerati0n of the particle at
,, the point 1= 0 will be :­
( a 2(02 a2 (02
\
(A)­ (B) 2R CC) 2a2(02 (D.~ none, of thes€?
, R

(
\ 3. Assuming frictionless'contacts, the magnitude of external horizontal force P applie,d'at the lower end for
equilibrium of the rod (The rod is uniform and its mass is 'm') is equal to .
"
, wall
\

;
('

'I

'I
{'

I
(
(A) mg
.. mg
(B) Tcose. (C) mg tahe CD) mg cote
2
" 2 2
r 4.' If.. rIIIJn, is radius of curvature of trajectory of a projectile at highest point A, then the radius of curvaturer
" - . " . - - - '"

'I
ofthe trajectory -at Bwhere tangent on it forms ex. angle with vertical is .
(I'
'min rmin rmin rrrlin

CA) cos3 a (B) cos 2 a C C ) sin 3a CD) sin 3ex.

1-­ 5. A silver coin ofmass 100 g is glued with the help of glue having braking strength 20N. We. take vertical
I
upward direction to be positive & acceleration of lift vs time graph is gi ven below
-Y

t a(m/sec2)

r
400
y

(
t(sec)
)~

r.

\:.-'
Time when contact between lift & coin being braked :­
."'''' Ir"'t\ .. _ "Af\ 1"1.0"" fTY\ t - 'l()() .,..',..

?
~
If:,
';, "

r
JEE (Main + Advancedl 2014

RACE,
Regular Analysis Ihrough ConUnuous exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
I

6. You are taking a nap on the couch. A pillow is supporting your head so that your head is in equilibrium.

The pillow is dented downward 2 inches from its equilibrium shape. Someone walks into your room so

you lift your head off the pillow. You then let your head fall freely against the pillow. Your head

bounces off the pillow, denting the pillow downward 4 inches before rebounding back upward. The

point at which your head reaches maximum speed during this fall and bounce is when it is

(A)just touching the pillow as it rebounds back upward.


(B) denting the pillow downward 2 inches as it travels downward.
(C) denting the pillow downward 4 inches during the bounce.
(D) just touching the pillow as it travels downward.'
7. Statement-! : A bullet, ejected from the gun, can not open the door, but it punches a hole, but a hand

can. . I)oen the door but can't make a hole.

Statement·2 : The hand exerts more force than bullet but less impulse than the bullet. .
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is correct explanation for statement-I.
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is NOT the correct explanation for statement-I.
(C) Statement-I ir true, statement-2 is false.
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-2 is true
8. In a laboratory a student wishes to measure the coefficient of friction

between a metallic block and a wooden board. The board has a length

L and the block is placed at one end of it. This end of the board is .

raised and the block begins to slip when it is a distance of h from the

lower end of the board as shown in figure. At this angle the block

slides down the length of the board in time t. The coefficient of kinetic

friction between block and board is

(A) flit = (h -~)IJ.L2


2gt 2-h 2
(B) ~k ++ ~~: )/JL'-h' I:
.1'

+- )/,L' -
.

'1

(C) ~, ~~: h' (0) ~,+-~:J/JL'-h'


9. A block of mass m, connected to a spring of spring constant k, rests on a rough
puri' }
incline; the angle of incline is e. The coefficients of friction are J-ls and ~ respectively.
The spring is slowly pulled up the incline until the block starts to move. What is

the value of ~ such that the block comes to rest when the spring is neither extended

or compressed. r·
,

=~(fls -tana) .r
(A) flit (B) flit =(fls - tan e)
r
I~
3 . 1
(C) flit ='2(fls -tana) (D) flit ='2(fls -2tana)

10. A particle of mass m, attached to a string, describes a horizontal circle of radius r on a rough table at ti
f '"
speed vo' After completing one full trip around the circle the speed of the particle is halved. What is the
coefficient of friction? l:f
.' .

(3v~) (5v~) (5v~) (3vn


(A) 1S2...."...' (B) (1 omIT) (C) (81tgr) (D) (I61tgr)

,If'">',
",.-..-----c--" M JEE (Mam + Advanced) 2014,

,~~ RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURS E
PHASE: I

11. In the figure shown a tube has a spring that can be compressed. A latch inside
the tube can hold the spring in the compressed state an lock it. The total mass is
M. A small ball of mass m and speed u collides with the end plate of the spring. +-fl,
If the energy of the spring when compressed is E, what is the minimum energy
required of the particle to acti vate the latch lock.
latch lock

(M+m)E (M+m)2 E 2

(A) M (B) (M+m)E


m (C) M (D)
'M
(M+m )
E

12. The square structure shown in figure consists of four point masses connected by rods of negligible mass.
Mark the CORRECT option regarding the moment of inertia of the structure about the followins axes:

C'
D'
mt U'V
Jr,

m
D c

': !
(A) Axis A, passing through the centre of the structure and normal to its plane IA ma2 =
(B) Axis B, passing through one of the point masses and normal to the plane of the structure IB = 3ma2,
(C) Axis CC', passing through two adjacent point masses Ie 2ma2 and
=
CD) Axis DDt, along the diagonal of the structure ID = 2ma2

Paragraph for Questions 13 and 14


Two horizontal tracks are connected through two circular slopes of equal radii. The tracks and the
slopes are in vertical plane and they join without a break or sharp corner. The height difference between
R
the horizontal tracks is h (h < 2")' Asmall object moves from the track at the top onto the bottom
c
without friction.
1\
C) ~.
~_V, ____ I
II
/'-J
0.1

o !
I -------
,;r--t;---j--­
I I

(j I / I
RlI c I I
I
o \,
I
I
I I
/
/
I
I
II
h

r I I J
10. /
rv
l/
l

What is maximum initial speed ofthe object when it starts in order to touch the path at all times during
its motion.

(A) \/2gR(1-~II
'11)
(B) j3gR( l-~ ') ?'R J (C) \/2gR(1-?~ J (D) JgRll- ~~ j
t
I ~

1I=:=-=:.'l
~AIi"i\iI;I""""':"111
.... A C E
Regular Analysis through ConUnuous Exercise
.'ENTHUSIAST"CO~RSE' ~
PHASE: I i ~

14. If object moves with initial speed calculated in Q. 13 what is nonnal reaction first as it crosses the point l~
. Gthe point ofin't1ection.

(A) mg(l- ~) (B) mg ( 2- ~) (C)mg (l-i~) (D) mg ( 2-2~) .


Paragraph for Questions 15 and 16

A small body is fixed to the end of string of length R and it is constrained to


~
t~

move along a circle on the rough surface of an incline of angle 9. The speed
~f
of the object at lowest point is Vo and vat the at the top most point of circular ~
path.
15. Find coefficient of friction.
I \l
4
~

(A)
v2 _v 2
0 .
2
-tanS (B)
y2 _v 2
0
3gR(1tcosS)
2
+-tan8
1t
;
2gR.1tcosS 1t
II 2('
2 2 2 2 2 2 I
Vo -v --tanS Vo - v --tanS
(C) 2gR(1tsin8) 1t (D) 3gR(1t cos a) 1t

16. After! turns beginning from initial moment the string breaks and the body remains on incline throughout
motion. Find distance traveled by body until stopping, if it does not fall off the inclined.
2;'
v~ -(51tJlcos8+2sina)gR v~ -(21tIlCOs8+2sin8)gR
(A) 2(sin a + j.LCOsa)g (B) (sin8+Jlcos9)g

C v~ -( 21tIlCOs8-2sin8)gR v~ + (51tIlCOsO-2sinO)gR 2.....


() 2(sin8+Jlcose)g (D) 2(sinB-Jlcos8)g
'r
Paragraph for Questions 17 and 18 . "'
A plank of mass M is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Two light id~rltical springs each of stiffne8&
K are rigidly connected to struts at the ends of the plank as shown in the figure. When the springs are
in their unextended position the distance between their free ends is 3£. A block of mass m is placed on
the plank and pressed against one of the springs so that it is compressed to f. To keep the block at rest
it is connected to the strut by means of a light string. Initially the system is at rest. Now the string is
burnt.

17. Maximum velocity of plank is :­

(A) JK(M + m )e (:a) ~I


(M+m) ~t .
(D)
~I
(M+m)
Mm (C) M(M+m)

18. .Maximum kinetic energy of block m is:'


Km 2£2 2Km 2£2
(C) _ (- -
KM.e tn\
2KM.e2
(A) 2M(M+m) (B) M(M..l.....,\
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
q.,\!

E E
uous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

lint 9. The small particle of mass m is given an initial high velocity in the horizontal plane and winds its cord
around the fixed vertical shaft of radius 1m. All motion occurs essentially in the horizontal plane. If the
angular velocity of the cord is 0.8 rad/s when the distance from the particle to the tangency point is 5m,
determine the angular velocity 0) (in rad/s) of the cod after it has turned through an angle 1 rad.

o
f'.'· t

t.'"
::~ ;

J
, { m

20. Three identical steel cylinders are free to slide horizontally on the fixed horizontal shaft. Cylinders 2 and
3 are at rest and are appro~ched by cylinder 1 at a speed 18 m/s. What is the final speed (in m/s) of
cylinder 3. the coefficient of restitution is 1/3.
---
u .. , ~

,,,,,~,,,,/,,,,

2 3
I 21.A man of mass 75 kg is pushing a heavy box on a flat floor. The coefficient of kinetic and static friction
. I
between the floor and the box is 0.20, and the coefficient of static friction between the man's shoes and
/. the flooris 0.80. If the man pushes horizontally, if the maximum mass (in kg) ofthe box he can slip is
.~
lOOx write value ofx ?
22. Two small boats both having a mass of 150 kg including passengers in it are at rest. A sack of mass
50 kg makes 1st boat having total mass of 200 kg. It is thrown to the second boat with a velocity whose
horizontal component is 2m/s, reIative to water. Calculate the distance (in m) between the boat 4.5 sec.
after the throw if the sack spent 0.5 sec. in air. Neglect resistance of air and water.

/
.........
23. In a physics lab, a small cube slides down a frictionless incline as shown in

figure, it strikes elastically and horizontally a cube that is only one-half of its

mass. If the incline is 20 cm high and the table is 90 cm off the floor, big and

s'mall cubes strikes the ground at a distance x & y meter respectively from the
f
H
. y
table. Then - equal to.
x
1
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
'1.~ 2. D>l.®'~~~ 3.~~;
~'4'~~~~~" . . ;..\
)~"'t~'·ft~~:;
4• 1""
J.\.I:M'''. B,&,' Do
~",."J:,~".: "i'..... '
...

5.~~~
~ ~1!'i'\"'~'i'!'i1ilmtr
6. ~~w~j 7. ~~i'i"'!r{@~ 8. ~ffift~Wfl(Qj;
~..fi,~,,~~.,,~ ~S~~~'k' .•ff'!<il· ..~:.

9.~
, ' 10.~~~
~~~~L,!$
~~®"v~~~
11•. i\.~, ".Ji'f>~.A~ 12~~~"''l!'':'i'
.3r'i¥~~~~j~::'
13.~ 14.~ 15·~1~llQm .. 16·m{<ltr~}lwJI
~
~
"~~~1 ;;~'" ~'~ ~m""~ f*:'
17·(0:t~m 18·~~1~I.am 19.~~{ ,2 '~j~i: 5 "J,.si."v•• ,,;w~r. .l
, jl'.~ ~~h>-' o'-<;G:'"W ~~, :fi ~\'.1'~ ~\R~
RA.JV}
?)"."~";":

20·mmmmmmmDlmm 21.l!l<m'~'~'
~.0' "'.'f~·
I m'"'·
.;. (( m"~~<"
2 ! ,3:,

--"'~j~~~~\l~l'~~
~.{m<' ~t~1*
4
.
m'
S'""m·~,',
. 6 ~) ~*»~'i
~.\~L ~~i ~~t"ii4:.1(
~,
~•

{
'..
iI
\ .J

. /,"

",' ..:, ....


.,,'
ALLIM
CAREER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN).
RAe
Regular Analysis through Continuous
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
RACE # 59 THIS IS PAPER·2 OF LEADER (TV) HELD ON 22-09-2013 PHYSICS

1. ~.ball is projected up from ground with velocity vo' A video film is shoot for this projection up to
the time it lands on ground. Now this film is played backward, consider moment of impact with ground
~s' t = O. Mark the CORRECT graph for . time reversal. Taking upward direction as positive.
. ,
,<
v v v v

(A) '" .t (B) ", "t(e) \\ ~t(D)

2. A coin moves in a circular path on a rough rotating horizontal disk which has an I

angular acceleration a.. Coin does not slip on disk. Mark the INCORRECT
~(i)

statement :­
(A) Power delivered by the friction on the coin is positive.
r (B) Power delivered by centripetal force on the particle is zero.
(C) Work done by the contacting fricti onal force on the system (disc + surface)

is negative.

(D) Power is delivered to coin by tangential force only


, ~ 3. A constant force F, say; is pushing the block mt which is connected
with m2 by a light spring till the block m2 will slide. If /ll and /l2 are
the coefficient offriction between ml' ~ and ground respectively.
~EJ::r,~~~~El,
(~here k = stiffness ofthe spring)
\_1:
. '; (!-LIm, + !-L2ffi2)g
(AJ, The
~
maximum compress~on
.
of the spring is equal to
'

',­ . . (2!-Llffil + !-L2 m Jg


(B) The magmtude of F IS equal to ' 2

(e) The magnitude of F = (/llm l + ~~)g


(D) At maximum compressio~ force F equals. force of spring.
4. A particle of mass m is projected from point 0 with a horizontal velocity 'u' at
time t=O. What is its angular momentum relative to point 0 as a function of time?
1. 2 "
(A) --mgut k
2
J
(B) 2mgut2k
................---1;!


t .. r'\
C' (C) -mgut 2k (D) -lmgut 2k
(I., ·5• Two beads A and B move along a semicircular wire frame as shown in figure. The c
(
beads are connected by an inelastic string which aI ways remains tight. At an instant
'" the, speed of A is u, LBAe = 45° and LBOe =75°, where 0 is the centre of the
o (centre)
seI11icircular arc. The speed of bead B at that instant is

(A) .fiu (B) u (e) 2J2


u
(D) #u
(,
JEE (Main .. Advanced] 2014

AC.E
Regular Analysis through Continuou$ Exercise
.ENTHUSIASICOURSE
PHASE: I

6. A rod of mass 1M' - m' carries an insect of mass 'm' at its bottom end and its top end
is connected with a string which passes over a smooth pulley and the other end
of the string is connected to a counter mass M. Initially the insect is at rest. Choose
the CORRECT option (s).
(A) As insect starts moving up relative to rod, the acceleration of centre of mass of M-m
.the system (insect + rod + counter mass) becomes non-zero
(B) As insect starts moving up relative to rod, tension in.the string remains constant and

is equal to Mg

(C) As insect starts moving up relative to rod, the tension in the string becomes more than Mg
(D) Acceleration of centre of mass of the system (insect + rod + counter mass) is zero when insect
moves with constant velocity \
7. Two pa..'ticles A and B iT"CV;:; en a straight linc. A moves with constant positive velocity. Bmoves
=
. with constant positi ve acceleration. At t 0, A and B are moving equally fast. Which of the following
is possible
(A) The distance between them keeps increasing.'
(B) The distance between them first decreases and then increases.
(C) The distance r ·:;tween them first increases, then decrease and finally keeps increasing.
(D) The distance between them first decreases, then increases, then decreases and finally keeps increasing:
8. A molecule capable of vibrations is modeled as two point atoms of mass M
connected by a spring. Initially molecule is not vibrating when it collides
atom M
elastically with a single atom 'of mass M as shown in figure. Mark the
CORRECT option (s) :­ '.

(A) Velocity of centre of mass of system consisting of atom and molecules is 2; 0 •


vo i(···':\M).molecule r,
li;~~

.
(B)Maxlmum energy stored"In spnng IS
. 4Mv~' .. ,
\ir /M.

(C) Velocity of centre of mass of molecule after collision is T'


v
.
(D) Momentum ofmolecule after collision is Mvo'
9. A block suspended from a spring at natural length and is free to move vertically in
the y-direction. Mark the CORRECT statement (s) :­
=
(A) Mass is released when y 0; the maximum value of y reached by the mass m
is2mg/k
(B) Mass is released when y = 0; the maximum value ofy reached by the mass m
bm~ .
(C) Due to air resistance the mass settles down into an eqUilibrium position Yeq' the
1 .
mechanical energy loss is '2 (m2g2/k) ty
(D) Due to air resistance the mass settles down into an equilibrium position Yeq'
the mechanical energy lost is (m2g2/k) .
10. A horizontal force F is applied on a ling of mass m, constrained to mo-v,elon
a horizontal smooth wire. The hanging mass is connected to ring with a
massless rod, it m~intains aconstant angle with vertical. Mark CORRECT
F
I
option :­
ml
m 2F
(A) Force on m, by wire is (m, + mz)g (B) Net force on m2 is m, + m
2
JEE (Main.,. Advanceci) 20
:ALLIMi™
CAREER INSTITUTE
,~
RACE

Regular Analysis through Continuous, Exercise


ENTHUSIAST COURSI
PHASE: I

11. A cart is moving on an incline. A pemiulum bob hangs from ceiling. Four snap shdts:~rpendulun'l b
"\?

and ceiling were taken. Which of the following is CORRECT? In each of the case pendulum bob Vv
at rest relative to cart.

, t
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
s (A) In case (i) cart is accelerated down the incline with acceleration a =g sin e
::> (B) In case (ii) cart is moving with constant speed
(C) In case (iii) cart is moving down with retardation
(D) In case (iv) cart is moving up with retardation
Paragraph for Questions 12 to 14
Two particles, both of mass m, attract each other with the force given below
-()
F a
r =-,?"r A

where a is a positive constant. At a certain moment (t = 0), the distance between the particles is R, and
i' their velocities are as given below
y
1
A

VI = voi
A as shown - <tF­ .!;I" X
V 2 ---2v 0 i
{
V2 VI

<,: Assuming the two-particle system reaches a minimum of kinetic energy at a certain moment and at a
certain finite distance between the particles (in the laboratory frame).(Assume initial kinetic energy of
a;,
system is less than R)'
12. Fin(fthe distance betwy~n the particles at that moment ;­
4aR ,', 4aR 2aR 4aR
(D) 4a - 9mv~R
--~~-
(A) 4a+9mv oR 2 (B) 4a+3mv 0R 2 (C) 4a-9mv2R
' 0
13. The value of that minimal kinetic energy is:­
3 2 I 2 2 2
( (A) -mv o (B) -mvo (C) -,mvo (D) None of these
" 4 4 w;.

l~t Mark the INCORRECT statement :­


, -,
V A

(A) Velocity of centre of mass of system is = - ; i

a
(B) Total energy of particle is - R initial
I
,-,
, 9 ,
(C) Ini tial kinetic energy in centre of mass frame is -;;- mvo
, "-- ... ...
~ ,~~."'"'- ,_....... ":\.' ' ,.} .. -:.'.". '..,.~.,

'" .. ",,, -·~----;:;rrM .lEE ,MaIn .. Advancedl "IHI!


RA~E

ALLEIM ENTHUSIAST COURSE


R.glllarAn.r-~5 ElIerelse
AlliER INSTITUTE
PHASE: I

1S. Column-I shows constrained motion of a particle in vertical plane. The constraint force (tension and
normal reaction) are collectively denoted by F. Match the characteristic shown in column-II with that
in column-I. Consider the motion by the time the particle returns to starting point or comes to
permanently at rest.
Column-I Column-II
I

}
(A) (P) Constraint force may be directed radialy
outward at an instant during subsequent ;I
..::::::n;;:; .c • V0 =.j4 gR motion. I
•.·"i!'.'.i

. A particle is projected inside

a smooth tube, it fits slightly


·.',~.:.1/
loosely inside it.
)/'
~

.,
"~I
J
(B) (Q) F-I-' mg = mac: at a particular instant 'II
,.i '"

during motion. ac is centripetal


acceleration 'r·
.1.1
A bob constrained on a
string. I

i
I

(C) (R) Tangential acceleration decreases speed ,:' ~

of particle for entire motion.

A bob constrained on a rod.

(0) (S) The particle completes circular path


__1']= C ~ vo =..JdgR

A small block is projected inside

a spherical ball along the inner

,.
:) surface. 0') By the time the particle returns to starting
point first time or comes to permanently at
rl'\~t. the im~41se of constraint force is zero.
,lEE li\laln + Advanceil) 2014
!(~;ALLEMIIM ENTHUSIAST COURSE
:>c .',' ,;- ':\ ,CAREER INSTITUTE
~',.~.~ PHASE: I

20
16. A smooth ball is released from rest from a height h = 3 m as shown in the figure. It slides down
the first inclined plane and collides with the second inclined plane.

J
,]
jl!~1
H
, '~ If collision is perfectly inelastic find the speed of the ball just after leaving the inclined plane 1.
ij
17. A pendulum bob of length I and mass m (500 g) is suspended on a smoothly running trolley of mass
(\ flo. M (50 kg). The pendulum bob is given an impulse so as to impart it a horizontal velocity vo' Maximum
K
\ I'
velocity attained by trolley in subsequent motion is 101 vo. Assume that pendulum bob oscillates
I
j subsequently find the value of K2.
I

, tr

.\.t

/ \

18. A unifonn rod hinged at one end, is released from rest in the position making an angle of 45° with the
{ vertical. Find the magnitude of reaction force (in N) at hinge just after its release. Express your answer
-.' after rounding it to nearest integer. Use: mass of rod = 800 gm
19. A boy of mass 10 kg is standing on a 4kg block as shown. The whole system is on smooth level ground.
The boy jumps to the right with a velocity of7 mls relative to the 4 kg block. Find the maximum velocity
(
of 1 kg block (in cmlsec)in the subsequent motion.
(
". ~
~~
(

'-...

lkg 4kg

'r" .'

FILL THE ANSWE:::;:R~H=E::::.:R=E~_ _ _ _ _ _---,


1'J1T'i";76'ii "'#7\,,~.,
1:~~2 2. :r~;~iI'\";"~~t
~.~}J;'d~L /t:~ 3. ;~"
',A
',S·,.
'~"~'"'~'''
,Oi ..• , ~~~"
,' •. " .... '')i,'''-~ 4. ~~~~.~~M~j;{w.~'

5.~ 6. ~lm(~~l 71i~~~


'1)~~\$1W~
8. ~m~~YI)";
it:.~h_"V~\W.'

9.~'\1( ;~~;~~(@'i'
10-llt. 11. ~,..,.itl'(~W<'\');~'i, 12 .~~~~~;:.~~.>'
ll'ffl~W'Ii"'\;\i'~):
("
\...
!'w~{!1,~~ 'dl~~,._.,~~'$ ... _,;-« ;(,.w..~~"~~

14·m~iWj 15 • ':"kilW!~~~~l'~"'k
13·t~~ • ~~~~~~-!~~~
;;~.",,-''':' ~"",,·,.:"-~2-''7·' ,.~;-~~
'1i1;>}'%l'ifN~;·'i'R'f'l'~i~~
t

() l.~'sf:!y~~w.l~~7,
V~~~~'~~~
~~lhilt~l:¥<,~~~,~~,
') .. ~~411~r~~i!f\~m~\
:~j:~~~'itn~~lt'!...,?V'~

16·mmmm~mmmmm, 17.~~lrnmmm~mdlffi!
~ ~r~"'{"/'~ "i~l,·',~.t~,,~~f! <'i~'~ 14""1::;;" f:~.-·-iO!.,i
,.
,/ \, .
'fA ~r;~'j;'~~,~·,~·
":. ('11,. ''1

18·mmwmmmmmm~'
"
I
"

LI

L!

Lf
Jf
,I
I
I
/

I
r

!I
,
I(

'I
I
:.I ­

-~ -.
...LIM RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
,KOTA (RAJASTHAN)' Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: ,

RACE # 60 THIS IS PAPER-1 OF NURTURE (PHASE-P) HELD ON 29-09-2013 PHYSICS

1. A Block 'A' is placed on a smooth horizontal sUlface and a particle C is suspended


with the help of light rod from point B of the block as shown. Now both the
block A and the particle C are given velocity v0 towards left. The block A strikes ~
~""'''''''''' IA
a fixed wall and suddenly stops and sticks to it. Then, (The rod BC is free to
\ rotate about B) ,
(BTl)
···S).:·····
(A) The smallest velocitY Vo for whiCh the particle C will swing in a full circle
about the point B is J4g.e
(B) The smallest velocity v0 for which the particle C will swing in a full circle about the point B is Jii
(C) Velocity of point C at the highest point of the circle (for the smallest value ofvoto complete circle)
is zero
\.

t (D) Velocity of point C at the highest point of the circle (for the smallest value ofvoto complete circle)
is Jii
2. A long plank of mass M is.initially at rest on a frictionless surface. A small block with mass m [ m:= aM]
and initial speed Uo slides, ,(>n the top of the larger plank. The coefficient of friction between the block
and plank is J..L. ..

".
' ... 1l'' 'CM L lrJ..L=O

(A) At the time when the small block ceases to slide, displacement of smaller block with respect to

groundis ~[1_(~)'2]
2pg l+a
(B) At the time when the small block ceases to slide, displacement of smaller block with respect to
. u; (l+a)2
ground is --: - . ­
( 2pg \ a
2
Uo a
(C) Displacement of bigger plank till same instant is -:;---(1 )2
( -pg +a

(D) Displacement of bigger plank till same instantis - 2


0
u2 (l+a)2

, . . ~ a
3. A bob of mass m hangs from the smooth pulley P by a light inextensible string
which is connected with the trolley after passing over the pulley. The trolley is
['
,­ slowly speeding up such that the string swings through a constant angle e. If the p
acceleration of the trolley is maintained as a when the bob does not move relative
to the trolley then ;­
() ,(A) acceleration of the trolley is a = g tan e
r (B) tension in the string is ing
,.
/
(C) force imparted by the string on the pulley is m)g2 + a 2
',.
(D) initial acceleration of the bob is zero.
JEE (Main + Advancedl2014

RACE
Regular Analysis thrwgh Continuous Exe~iie ,
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I '

4. ' A particle is moving along an expanding spiral in such a manner that magnitude of net force on the
particle remains constant. Choose the CORRECT option(s) ;_ A
(A) Linear speed of particle is increasing N
(B) Linear speed of particle is decreasing
(C) Angular speed of particle is increasing

,(D) Angular speed of particle is decreasing

5. Two skaters, initially at rest, are 5m apart. They each have one end of a single rope and each pull on the
rope with a force of 50N for a period of Is. One skater' weighs 80 kg and the other weighs 45 kg.
(Assume no friction between the skates and thejce.)
(A) The two skaters meet at a distance of i.s m from the initial position of the heavy skater 9. 'I
(B) The two skaters meet at a distance of 3.2 m from the initial position of the heavy skater fA
(C) The relat~ve veloc~ty of the skaters when they meet ~s 1.74 mls 10. M
(D) The relative velOCIty of the skaters when they meet 1S 0.76 mls
6. 'Figure shows force representative diagrams of velocity vector and friction vector of a car moving in' ,A
horizontal, without skidding. Mark the cOIfect statement(s) :_ , . 1 1 . ''''It
,(A) Figure (i) and(ii) represent motion along a straight line (A
" (B) Figure (iii) and (iv) represent motion along curved path
(C) In all the cases friction has role of changing the speed of the car
(D) In all the cases friction has role of changing the velocity of car
ua

{ VIr vlr ~v Lil

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

7. A jumper jumps upwards with some acceleration. Choose the CORRECT statement(s) ;­
(A) The forCe exerted by the ground on him while heis attempting to jufup is greater than his weight '
(B) Work is done by normal force on him while he attempts to jump
(C) Since, the feet touching ground,remain/at rest while he is attempting to jump, force exerted by1 t' "

ground on him is equal to his weight i


(D) Since the feettouching ground remain at rest while he is attempting to jump, work done by the force
exerted by ground on him is zero . "
8. A ball of mass ikg is dropped from a height of 3.2m on smooth inclined plane. The coefficient of~'
,
1 1
restitution for the collision is e = '2' The ball's velocity become horizontal after the collision. , ;
1
'j

~2. 1;h~

(A) The angle e = tan- 1


(.1) o
!
i
.
\ ...-'

(~)

~
'--­
(B) The speed of the ball after th,e collision = 4J2 ·mls ~3. The
,
!
(i...1'
,'
(C) The angle e =.tan-l
(1)2' I
!
~4. 'P' ~/

(~)
(0) The speed of the ball after the collision = 3 mls , '..~

J \... .....

,,
:4
RACE
JEE (MaIn + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

'~he Paragraph for Questions 9 to 11


A quarter-round slope of radius R =0.5 m is attached tangentially to a freely rolling trolley of mass
= =
M 3kg, originally at rest. A small-sized body of mass m 2kg slides onto the trolley at velocity
v = 15 mls.

,the '.
kg.

The velocity of the trolley, when the small body leaves contact at P it will be.
9.
(A) 9 mls (B) 6 mls (C) 3 mls (D) 5 mls

'10. Maximum height reached,by the small body is


I. " :~.

, (A) 9.33 m (B) 3.33 m (C) 6.75 m (D) 18.67 m


~in
,f 11. the distance travelled by the trolley from parting to reunion with the body will be
(A) 13.42 m (B) 16.24 m (C) 21.16 m (D) 6.84 m
Paragraph for QUestions 12 to 14
A small slider of mass m is released from rest while in position Aand then slides along the vertical-plane
1
tracie The track is smooth from A to D and rough (coefficient of kinetic friction Ilk =,.fj) from point D
onwards. Then

( " ;
\ ' t
rit j
,I
( by1
1
( '~e~
\" ,~I

, \

d~ ,
\,
c
,'..
,(

2. The normal force NB exerted by the track on the slider just afteritspasses pointE, is '
(A) 0 (B) ffimg (C) 4 mg (D) mg
3. The maximum normal force NMax exerted by the track on the slider during its motion, is
(A) 10 mg (B)mg (C) 6 mg (D) 7 mg
4. The distance "s" traveled along the incline past pointD before the slider stops is
(A) R (B) 2R (C) 3R (D) 4 R
PT
JEE (Main + Advancedl2014 I.m."
ENTHUSIAST,COURSE 'I~
PHASE .1 Ii'EJ

15. Column-I shows certain situations and Column-II shows the descriptions of situations. Match them I r

correctly.

Column·} Column· II

(A) A fire cracker projected vertically up


explodes at top most point of trajectory
°
(P) For observer 1, particle is moving
with constant speed
and is brok~n into several fragments.
Observers observes anyone "fragment
initially moving towards right. Observer
02 is on ground at rest and observer 01 is
at the point of explosion falling freely

e 61 'tl
e~,\\#llJ
.... ,~'s:ll •
:~;~:Jl::~:;::...
Q) ••• 0
18
••• ".:;~1lfJf: ••::;; -- I
IIl-'I~I : ~,,:"Crt ..
e# : \.<D
o'a !.
v..""liimIIHIitTIll?IIH1l

j
J,
i
(B) A particle is projected with speed Vo on (Q) For observer 02' particle is moving with
the inner surface of a smooth cyHnruical constant non-zero acceleration
°
.drum. Observer 1 is falling freely ~ilong
the axis of cylinder initially at rest when
particle is projected from top and observer ..9
02 is on ground at rest
01
Vo
O2

(C) A ball is projected up from a trolley (R) Forobserver PI' particle is moving with CQl1Stant
moving with constant horizontal non-zero acceleration
°
velocity vo' Observer 1 is on trolley
and is stationary relative to trolley
and observer 02 is at rest on ground.

; (
(D) A ball is dropped from a trolley moving (S), Trajectory observed by 01 is a straight'iine
horizontall y with constant acceleration a.
The trolley was at rest when the ball was
dropped. Observer 01 is person dropping
the ball and observer 02 is on ground at rest. i "I
7a~:nnlnJ>;;!~;,!:a
'- j/
(T) Trajectory observed by 02 is a curved path /­

16. The carts in figure are sliding to the right at 2 mls on asmooth level ground. ~I

~;I

~
The spring between them has a spring constant cif 60 N/m and is
(

compressed 60 cm. The carts slide past a flame that burns through the \ \
--'2m/s ~I
string holding them together. The carts are not attached to the spring.
Afterward, what is the speed (in mls) of 200 g cart after it loses contact
with the snriml.
c,

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

. 11 17. Two blocks. each of mass 5kg, are connected by a spring. whose spring constant is 50 N/m. They are
placed onto an inclined plane of angle 37°. The coefficient of friction between the upper block and the
inclined plane is 0.8, while between'the lower block and the inclined platte it is 0.3. After a while. the
=
two blocks move together with the same acceleration. Use g 10 mls 2• Find the extension (in cm) of the
spring.
! Skg

.~.
"

.,

18. A 2 kg block A is attached to one end of a light string that passes over an an ideal pulley and a 1 kg
sleeveB slides down the other part of the string with an acceleration ofB mls2 with respect to the string.
Find the tension in the string (in N).

= =
19. A block of mass m 15 kg is kept at a distanCe R 1m from central axis of rotation of around turn table
(A table whose surface can ,rotate about central axis). Table starts from rest and rotates with constant
angular acceleration. C1.. =2 radlsec 2• The friction coefficient between block and table is Jl =O.B. At time
t sec from starting of motion (Le. t =0 sec) the block is just about to slip. Find the value of Bf .
Relevant. questia,ns from (HCV)

Chapter18 (Geometrical Optics)

mt Short Answer type # All

Objeptive-1 #All .
. Objective-2 # All
Exercise # 2,5,7,8,p,ll'to 20,22 to 46,4'9 tf! 54,56.,59,60,61,62,64 t~ 71;74,76,78,'79

/
\. Relevant q~e~tions from. (HCV)

f Chapter 20 (D,ispersion and Spectra)

'-.
Short Answer type # All
"

(
..
.
. Objective-l # All
Objective-2 # All
f
"" Exercise # All
(

\--­
FILL THE ANSWER HERE
. .1.~ 3.~ 4.~

S·GlieEm 7•.~ 8.~


/'-.
th DiZQI1SJi

9. 11.~~ 12.~
C'
13·fDJIDEm

~~
1

.16·mmmmmmmmmm
17. ~mmmmmmmm~
":~~"mmmmm'mmmmm 19. mmmmmmmmmm ,'; ~~:
, ,
i
. / \

i
j
j
1

.:,:
RACE
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
r" ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
PHASE: I

RACE # 61 THIS IS PAPER-2 OF NURTURE (PHASE-P) HELD ON 29-09-2013 PHYSICS

1. In figure, there are tw~ pendulums with. bobs having identical mass: The
pendulum A is released. from rest in the position shown. If the maximum.
angle e fonned by cord BD with the vertical in the supsequent motion of
s
sphere B is to be equal to the angle eA' what is the required'value of the
ratio l/lA of the lengths of the two cords in tenuS of coefficient of restitution
.e between the two spheres.
2 2
(A) (1-e )
(B) (1+e)2 (e) (1-e ) (0) .2(1-et
4 4 3 3

2. In figure, block B has mass m, cart e has mass M and the coefficient of friction between the block and
the cart is Ps' The minimum value ofP such that the block will not slide, is :­
t- ~,

,
~ (A) p= mg(l+ M) (B) p= mg(l+~) g
(e) p= m ( M ) (0) p=.Mg(l+~)
~
~ Ils m ,:' Il s ' M l-ts m + M .Ils M

3. in pushing a box across the floor, you have to apply a horizontal force just sufficient to get the box
moving. As the box moves, you continue to apply the same force. The acceleration of the box,,is :­
(A) a = I\g (B) a Jlsg =
(e) a = (Ps -I\)g (0) (e) a -I\g =
/, 4. A small block is placed inside a cylinder of radius R that rotates with angular speed 0) about a horizontal
axis as' shown in figure. The maximum angle S reached by the block before it starts to slip is given by
KHuation.

r
'"

/1
:; .J'
, ;

(A) g cosS = Ils (gsin S+ ro


2
R) (B)g sine = Ils (geotS + ro 2
R) , Ii
"I.:Ii
=Ils (geose + ro R)
n
2 2
(D) g tanS = Ils(geosS+ro R) (0) g sinS i"
JEE {Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis Ihrough Continuous exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

5. A mass m is attached to a spring. The spring is stretched to x by a force F and 9.


released. After being released, the mass comes to rest at the equilibrium
,8
position. Determine the coefficient offriction,~, in terms ofF, x, g arid m.

2kx 2mg f mg

(A)~= mg (B) 1\= F (C) ~ = 2mg (D) ~= 2kx

6. A girl slides along a curved water slide, without friction, from aheight h. What is the maximum airborne
height y in tenns of handS?

h ••1'\'...., .....
~s.X!...Jy:···...
hiS ".

. 8h
(A) 4h sin 2 e (B) 3h sin 2 e (C) 2h sin 2 e (D) -sin 2 f) .
5 5 S 5 19·
7. An agent applies force of constant magnitude Fo always in the tangential
direction as shown in the figure. Find the speed of the bob when string e.........
- 'Ii ... "'.............
~Fo
'

becomes horizontal, assuming that it is at rest at its lowest point:­ i ..., ' .
! "" ,. I
(A).~e' . ~ n l '... I
(B) V;;;(1tFo + 4mg)
fi'"
.(. I '
:;:;(1tFo - 2mg) : '...'.
I F
iI '.
.,:' .0

(~)) !C
1tFo ';"~mg) (D) ! (1tFo + 2mg)
ru....
m~·· . . . . •
Fa
••••

. . ~ .. . V
8. A man moves relative to boat at an angle of 45° with the direction of flow of water with a speed Jz as
. . V A

shown in the figure. Water flows with a velocity ; i and the boat moves perpendicular to water.

current relative to water with a velocity


·v
T' If the rain appears to fall vertically with a speed Vo relative
to man, the magnitude of actual. velocity of the rain is :-.
Vbw

~x
Vm~~)~
-... .

./ .. v =(Vojt
2· w

....
. I

(A) ;.fivo· (B) .fjvo (C) 2vo (D) 2fivo

.f'
0
:-) ,
2014
~SE M RAC E JEE(Maln+AdvancedI2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
_ Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

~ 9.' A block of mass m lies on a horizontal frictionless surface and is attached to one end of a horizontal

..

.f-!
spring (with spring constant k) whose other end is fixed. The ,block isinitially at rest at the position
where the spring is unstretched (x =0). When a constant horizontal force F in the positive direction of
the x-axis is applied to it, a plot of the resulting !<lnetic energy of the block versus its position x is shown
in figure. What is the magnitude of F.
orne
K(J)

v "II x(m)

(A) 2N (B)4N (C) 8N (D) 16 N


10~:1 As shown in figure BE~ is a fixed vertical circulartube. A block of mass m starts moving in the tube at
, point B with velocity V towards E. It is just able 'to complete the vertical circle, then choose the
Fo INCORRECT option :~

:. ~.

as E

'. (A)~elocity at B must be ~3Rg . (B) velocity at F must be ~2Rg .

(C) Normal reaction at pointF is 2mg. (D) The normal reaction at point E is 6 mg.
e 11. The K.E. of a particle moving in circle of radius R depends on distance covered as E as 2, where a is =
e
constant & S is distance. The net force act at an angle to the tangent of the circle. Then is given by e
(A) e =tan- I
% (B) e = tan- t %· (C) e =cor- 1
o/zs (D) None of these

A particle of mass m moving with,a speed vcollides elastically with another partIcle m
of mass 2m on a horizontal circular tube of radius R, then select the correct
altemative(s) 2m
21tR
(A) The time after which the next collision will take place is -.-,­
v

(B) The time after which the next collision will take place is directly proportional to m
(C) The tim~ after which the next collis~on will take place is inversely proportional to m

(D)None of these

fo

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through ConlIRUoUS Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

13. In the figure, a block slides along a track from one level to a higher level, by moving through an
intermediate valley. The track is frictionless until the block reaches the higher level. There a frictional
force stops the block in a distance d. The block's initial speed v0 is 8 mis, the height difference his 2 m
and the coefficient of kinetic friction 11 is 0.3. The value of dis

11=0,3
h

(A)4m (B)3m (C)5m (D) 8 m

14. Two sphere each of mass 8V3 kg and radius 5 cm lie in contact in a hemispherical bowl of radi~s 40 cm. ,
There is no friction between any of the contact surfaces. The contact force exerted by one sphere to
19.
another is 1­
l.

(A) 10 N . (B) 20 N (C) 30N (D) None of these


15. Two balls of same mass are dropped from the same height h, on to the floor. The first ball bounces to a
height h19 ,after the collision & the second ban to a height h136. The impulse applied by the first &
.second. bal1 on the. fl60r are I) and 12 respectively. Then
=
(A) 51 1 6~ (B) 61) =5Iz (C) 81) =7Iz (D) 7I, =8lz
2(

Paragraph for Questions 16 and 17

Figure 'shows a smooth hemisphere of radius R fixed to the top of a cart . that can roll smoothly on a . .
.

horizontal ground. The total mass of cart is M and initially it is at rest. A point like ball of mass m /' '

=
\""

is dropped in the hemisphere tangentially from a point h R above its edge. The ball slides all the way
along the hemisphere with negligible friction.
/"

\I c /

6. When ball reaches point B during its subsequent motion horizontal displacement of the ball is ;-'
~
(
.( 2M )R .
(A) M+m
2m )R
(B) (M+m
MR
(C) M+m
mR
(D)M+m (

(
'. =
Velocity of the hemisphere when ball is at its lower most point, if R 0.5 m, M 2kg, m 0.5 kg, is :­ = =
(
(A) 4rn1s (B)2m1s" . (C) 1 mis' (D) 3 mls
(
\.
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

18. A lamina is made by removing a small disc ofdiameter 2R from a bigger disc of unifonn mass density and
radius 2R, as shown in the figure. A second similar disc is made but instead of hole a disc of tri pIe the
density as of first is filled in the hole. Centre of mass is calculated in both the cases and was found at a

2r.

distance r l & r2 from centre 0 respectively. Find the ratio 17 I


1

, •

p p

Case-l Case-2
19. The friction coefficient between the horizontal surface and each of the block shown inthe figure is 0.4.
The collision between the blocks is perfectly elastic. If the separation (in cm) between them when they'
come to rest is x then find the value 8x.
1.0 m/s

. 8cm
.. 20. A pendulum bob is in x-z plane. Length of pendulum bob is 80cm. A cart is moving along y-axis with
velocity 6 m/s from which a ball is to be projected such that it strikes elastically pendulum bob of same
mass, while traveling horizontally in x-z plane. What is the velocity of projection for which tension in
string and velocity of bob simultaneously become zero at horizontal position. Ball is projected from
origin of coordinates. Pendulum bob is located at horizontal distance 20 m from point of projection. If
ball is projected with velocity v) + vyJ + vi. relative to cart express velocity of ball (in mfs) as sum

IVxl+lvyl+lvzl.
z

J
\.,
I
I
;
,j
/ ~

" \ I
I
6m/s y

I
1.
,::lJ .z:=:
of 20m
I
..
• X

1 21. A helicopter is moving vertically upwards with a velocity 10 mfg. When the helicopter is at a height of
J A . ­

! 15 m from ground, a stone is thrown with a velocity (6i + 8 j) mfs from the helicopterw.r.t. the man in
it. Considering the point on ground vertically below the helicopter as the origin of coordinates, and the
ground below as xy plane, if distance (in m) between the helicopter & the stone, at the instant the stone
strikes the ground is d.j3.25 , find the value of d. (Assume helicopter mov.es upwards with constant
',.
velocity).
r"'--c"

/
'l/
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

B.A~l. ENTHUSIAST COURSE


PHASE: I

22. A camlon of mass 10 x 103 kg is rigidly bolted to the earth so it can recoil oilly by a negligible anlount.
The cannon fires a 2.1 x 103 kg shell horizontally with an initial velocity of 550mls. Suppose the
cannon is then unbolted from the earth, and no external force hinders its recoil. What would be .the <~}

velocity (in mls)of a shell fired horizontally by this loose cannon? (runt: In both cases assume that the j
1
burning gunpowder imparts the same kinetic energy to the system.) , ,1

'"
i


J
\ .

...../,.

; ~ ,,~.,

FILL THE ANSWER HERE


1.13E~ 2.~ 3.~ 4.~,.
, r

5·Eam~ 6.~~ 7.~ 8.~;'

10.~ 11.~D .
r.;..~~
12.~ ,

14·~cm IS.~m 16.~

17. 18. mmmmmmmmmm


.19. tati2CJm~mmmttn~!l
"

mmmmmmmmmmm f'

21. mmmmmmmmmm nmmmmmmmmmm ''-.... "

[ '-.
\.. j
RACE
JEE (Main +Advanced) 2Q14
__..LI"
CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
,KOTA (RAJASTHAN) Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise PHASE: I

RACE # 62 , PHYSICS

1. Let nr and nb be respectively the number of photons emitted by a red bulb and a blue bulb of equal
power in a given time.
(A) nr = nb (B) nr < nb (C)nr>n b (D) data insufficient .

I 2~' In a photo-emissive ceil, with exciting wavelength A, the maximum kinetic energy of electron is K. If the
3')..
I exciting wavelength ischanged to '4 the kinetic energy ofthe fastest emitted electron will be:

J (A) 3K14
..
(B) 4¥J3
' .
(C) Jess than4KJ3
.
(D) greater than 4K!3
,

3. When a photon oflight collides with a metal surface, number of electrons, (if any) coming out is
/1 (A) only one (B) only two (C) infinite (D) depends upon factors

} 4., Choose the INCORRECT option(s) :­


(A) Work function for metals is of the order of 2 eV.
:J
(B) Maximum kinetic energy of photo electron depends upon intensity of light
) (C) Maximum kinetic energy of photo electron depends upon frequency of light
. .

J
,

. (D) Slope oigraph of stopping potential vs frequency of inCident radiation varies with change of metal

J 5. When a point light source of power W emitting monochromatic light of wavelength Ais kept at a distance

'.
,I
'a! from a photo-sensitive surface of wave function ~ and area S then

(A) Number of photons striking the surface per unit time is 47thca 2

W')..S

(
'I ,
. .. . . 1
:­'I
(B) The stopping potential needed to stop the most energetic emitted photoelectrons is e'J.. (hc -- A~)

hc
r '
(C) Photo emission occurs only if ')..lies in the range 0 < 'J..:S; T
:­ . . . 1
(D) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted p~oto electron is 'J.. (hc-'J..~ )
6. A hydrogen atom is in a state ofionization energy 0·85 eV. If it makes a transition to the ground state, the
energy of the emitted photon, is :­
(A) 12.75 eV (B) 10.60 eV (C) 9.75 eV . (D) 11.8 eV
7; Consider the electronic energy level diagram OfR-atom. Photons associated with shortest and longest
wavelengths would be emitted from the atom by the transitions labelled.

tD e i
_.' Is fA ~:4
c

n 3
______----:::::::::n-2
n=<l .

. (A) D and C respectively (B) C and A respectively

(C) C and D respectively (D) A and Crespectively


JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

RACE
Regular Analy$ls through Continuous Exercise
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

,·.,8'.:' " Irt'hycitogen"andhy~ogeIlliIse' atoms, th~ ratio of difference of energies E4n-~n and E 2n-En varies
,: ,~ltWits atoIcic,number z and n as: " ,
(A) ~2in2 (B) z4iri4 (C) z In, (D) zO nO
9; 'In ahydrogen atom, the'electron is ion nth excited state. It may come down to second excited state by
emitting ten different wavelengths. What is the value ofn:
(A) p (B) 7 (C) 8 ' (D) 5
10. Difference between nth and (n +l)th Bohr's radius of'H' atom is equal to it's (n-l)th Bohr's radius. the
, valueofnis:
, (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
11. An' electron iIi hydrogen atom after absorbing energy photons canjump between energy states n1 and
'n2 (n2 > 01): Then it may return to ground state after emitting six different wavelengths in emission
spectruin. the energy ofemitted phbtOIis is either equal to, less than or greater than the absorbed photons.
r'
'Then n1 and ti2 are:
(A)~=4,nl =3 (B)n2 =5, n 1 =3' (C) n2 =4, n 1 = 2 (D) n2 = 4, n 1 =1 ,r-,

, ' ,

12. The electron in a hyctrogen atom makes transition from M shell to L. The ratio of magnitudes ofinitial to
final centripetal acceleration of the electron'is
i'~- .

(A)9:4 (B)81:16 ~ .
'(C)4:9
.
" (D) 16: 8i

,--"

(:...'

/"""-...
'-'

"
:,-,

r'·
L

.it'
c

C1

~\~.

":',­

·t.
C
a••'I»J
"

,{'4.~

1.

5·.IClnI , ,:~~ 8.: rGmllcm


. i.

9·1DW1«111I
", l;. ":;:i:':':~':~'.!1:'~~~~~'::,,:.: ",
12. UWlt cm C
~
~, ,~.r:\1~l~~~~;.<P 'C'-,
-'y'

(' ",
1~ •
~

KOTA (RAJASTHAN)'
RACE
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
11 + AdVanCed) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I

,RACE'# :63 PHYSIC S

1. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition n1 ~ n2whose n 1 and n2 are the principal quantum
numbers of the two states. Assume the Bohr model to be valid. The frequency of orbital motion of the
electron in the iil~ti:~l state iV127 of that in the final state. The possible values of n l and n2 are
(A) n1== 4, n2 =2 ~ n1 =3, n2 ==.1 ./ (C) n1 =8, n2 =1 (D) n1 == 6, n2 == 3 ./'
2. The radius of Bohr's first orbit is ao' The electron in nth orbit has a radius:
(A) nao - '(B) acln ~2ao ./ ' , (D) acln2
® An electron collides with a fixed hydrogen atom in its ground state. Hydrogen atom gets excited and the
colliding electronJoses all its kinetic energy. Consequently the hydrogen atom may emit 'a photon
corresponding to the1argest wavelength of the Balmer series. The min. K.E.of colliding electron will be
(A) 10.2 eV (B) 1.9 eV / ue)12.1 eV (D) 13.6 eV
4. The frequency of revolution of electron in nth Bohr orbit is vn' The graph between log n and log (vn I VI)
maybe

,-. ,-.
,-.
<::
~ ? .;­

(A) S' (B) J ~ ,"'" log n ~ (D) S' logn

logn

5. Consider the spectral line resulting from the transition n =2 ~ n = 1in the atoms and ions given below.
The shortest wavelength is produced by : , )( OI~
(B) ~teriuni atom ' ~t 'V"'
.';,
(A) hydrogen atom
(C) singly ionized helium \W1doubly ionized lithium
~ ~
6. In an atom, two electrons move around the nucleus in circular orbits of radii Rand 4R. The ratio of the
time taken bythem to complete one revolution is : (neglect electric interaction)
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 4 : 1 'ft.: 8 v" (D) 8 : 1
7. The electron in hydrogen atom in a sample is in nthex~ited state, then the number of different spectrum
lines obtained in its emission spectrum will be :'''-~''--
(A) 1 + 2 + 3 + .......... +(n - 1) ~ + 2 + 3 + .................... + ( n) v

(C) 1 + 2 + 3 + .......... +(n + 1) (D) 1 x 2 x 3 x ................... x (n- 1)

8. The total energy of a hydrogen ,atom in its ground s:ate is -13.6eV. If the potential energy in the first
excited state is ta~en as zero then the total energy in the ground state will be :
(A) -3AeV ' (B)3A:eV,- " "~ 6.8eV, /' (D) 6.8eV
'(2)" A._:n~1.ltron co1lide~n with a stationary hydrogen atom in ground state

"~ kinetic energy of th~ neutronis less than 13.6eV,collision must be elastic

, (B) {{kinetic energy o(the neutron is less than 13.6eV,c01lision m~y be inelastic.

'((:) inehtstic collision takes place wheriinitial kinetic energy ofneutron is greater than 13.6eV. ~
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

Eexercise
EN1'HUSIAST COURSE
PHAS~ ;I

_:10. ~~~~~g~itllde of aI1g91~~~~entum, orbit radius arid frequency of revQJution of electron in hydrogen .(
_; atP~'correspoiidihgtoq~antu-9l nUmber n are L, r andf res~e~tively. Th~ri according to Bohr's theory
, I. \ : ' "

of hjdrogen atom, ' -­


~L i~ constant for alliorbits' V
.j:

(A), (f2L is constant for all orbits ;;

(C) frL is constant for aH or.bits - (0) frL7. is constant for all orbits '
11. Radius of the' second Bohr-obit of singly ionised helium atom is
(A) 0.53 A " ~06 A ./ " (C) 0.265 A (D) 0.132 A
;! (
n "
¥
12. An ~tron in Bohr'shyqrogen ~tom has an energy of -3AeV. The angular momentum of the electron is :'. ;
\
..JI<fh ITt ~. , (B) h I 2Tt " , '- ,
,j

:/ (
(C) nh 12Tt ( n is an integer) '\ (0) 2h ITt ;

l ('
J (

1 (
j(
. (
(
"

J
I I~
II ,,'
III" ('
I! /
il
r
II
I

I (
r

Ie
,
I
I

I
( !,
','; ,I
,. I
I

,1.
FILL THE'ANSWER HERE
l·ps.em 2. ' ~O) Ifi£( 1t81(cj)} '3. r:Q}~~,{Ui: ~j») 4·mlS• •aa '
s·[&II5IW! 6. lOl6ellP! ,.' '"nuct.a - 8·r:;• •mUJ . I
f'6Il1J liem
'}' "

9. IO·rmlte'_ II·DIB.I!m 12·RRg.ill!ifez~5J I


"[
,.'-'
,.
!{

LEI RACE

JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014


CAREER INSTITUTE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN} Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise' PHASE: I

RACE # 64 PHYSICS

1. 'A diverging beam of light from apointsourc.e S having divergence angle a., falls symmetrically on a
glass slab as shown. The angles of incidence of the two extreme rays are equal. If the thickness of the
glass slab is t arid the refractive index n, then the divergence angle of the emergent beam is
(
s

\

, ,It
(A) zero J ~ . (C) sin-I (lIn) (0) 2sin-'(lIn)'
2. A fish, F in the pond, is at a depth of 0.8 m from water surface and is ~B
moving vertically upwards with velocity 2 ms- I. At the same instant, a' 6m
. bird B is at a height of 6 m from water surface arid is moving downwards ' 13 ms-I
with velocity 3 ms";l. At this instant both are on the same vertical lines'
i . Air
Water
as shownin the figure. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) 0.8m 12 ms- I
correct?

tF =
(J,t 4/3)
" (A)j.Ieight ofB, observed by F (from itself) is equal to 8.00 m.

~'nepth ofF, observedbyB (from itself) is equal to 6.60 m . ./ .

(C) Velocity ofB, observed by F (relative to itself) is equal to 5.00 ms-t.


~elocity of F, observed by B (relative to itself) if equal to 4.50 ms-I , . /
. 3. If electron beam in a Coolidge tube is accelerated by 100 volt and targeted on high atomic number
(z> 30) material. What will be spectrum of energy emitted?
(A) Superimposed continuous and characteristic energy spectrum of X-rays

~nly continuous spectrum in mainly ultraviolet and visible region

(C) Only characteristic energy spectrum ofX-rays


(D) Only characteristic spectrum in visible and ultraviolet region.
4. The filament current in the electron gun of a Coo~idge tube is increase<iand also the potential difference
used to accelefdtethe electron is increased. As a result in theemittedradiation :- ,
(A) pte intensity d~creaseswhTieth~-minimum wavelength increases. " ...

~The'intensity iqqreases while the minimum wavelength decreases At'"'''

(C) The intensity asw~ll as the minimum wavelength increases


(0) The intensity as well as the minimum wavelength decreases
a
S. An x-ray tube is ope~ating at voltage V.Which of the following wavelength depends on V '
. (A)k x-ray . ' "'. '(B) ~ x-ray
~nimum wavelength . . / . (0) maximum wavelength
(6. ' In the Coolidge tube e~periment, the short wavelength limit of the continuous X-ray spectrum is equal
··.t?~·~~~fPIl1· :~.': .: .. ' " " .... ,...., . . .

(~lE~~t,f.()Bs)iccelerat~.througha potential of 12.7SkV in a Coolidge tube

D~~~k'~ccei¢t~tb'thfd#gn'ilPotentialof 18.75 KV'in aCoolidge tube v"

.~i~~~l'~~:\~#~:~~:::=~:::~i~·::;:~~::~:::~~~~eA.rderOf 10 pm

,-,

,....
JEE (Main· + Advanced).2014
RAg····:·.,.,E

,.'
.ENTHUSIAST COURSE:";
./ Regular An.alysls through Cant riuo~$'~E)(erclse . . PHASE~: I;. ;.. .
,,",

.~. 'Which of the following reaction(s) is/are an endoergicreactiori..;-:


(A) 2H + 2H ~ 3H + I H ( B ) zH:+ 2H~ 3He+n
1 1 1 1 ~t I. Z .•

V
.Z 3 4 : ' .. 4 ' . :4 8 '

(C) I H + I H~"",* zHe + n' . ;He + 2He ~ 4Be! . ,',


. .
Mass in'amu.Given mCH)= 1.0073, m(n) = 1.0087, m·UH)~Z.,o141, mU:a:) =3:0160,

m(~He)=3.0160, m(~He)=4.0026 andmnBe)=8.0053


8. Just after a K-capture, which of the following comeftmn the atom?

j,A{Neutrino· \ (B) Antineutrino .J.!CfX-ray photon../ (1) Electron ./

9. ~n el~went A dec~J.,into an element C by a two step process:

",K-tP"h-t Hez4 ang~:~~C + 2e_1o. Then .

.J!QA and C are isotopes . (B) A and C are isobars

(C)B and C are isotopes (D) A and B are isobars


10. Match the entries of column-I with the entries of column-II, which describes the angle of deviation of
ray with angle of incidence.

Column-! Column-II

.'

~
.. "

............ !
,
.
..

(A) A fay is falling on a plane smooth mirror .~ (P) '.

. (B)
,
A ray is going from a rar~r to denser.medium
,\.~~ 'l:,,: ':;'.;
~. (Q)
r~, 1

'~
.
. .. . . . . '.

(C) A ray is going froI? 'a denser to rarer medium f (R)


.
\ / ..
''c/'' .
.' . .. i
'

~
.. :: '. . .'

.~) ;o(IDf· 'A ray is falling parallel slab T (S) . . .

· · · · .·
. ' . i

".

. "FILL THE ANSWER HERE

(T)
L . .

1.~ 2·~(21'·".i" 4.~


5.~· 6.~,.:; .. 8._~.
9.~J. 10.

~
',k:f"i .'.~~'{ cID) (~)C~) ;~I:
\ ..., .. ,:""

CE
0 JEE (Main + Advan.cedl2014 '
ALLI 'ENTHUSIAST:COURSE"·

,
" CAREER INSTITUTE
.. KGTA:(RAJAS1:HAN ~ An:uVS!S through Continuous Exercise . PHASE: I

RACE # 65 PHYSICS

1. In a characteristic X- ray spectra of some atom superimposed on .


e>' "Q
continuous X- ray spectra:
(A) P represents Ka line
:1
j
(B) Q represents Kj3line ~

(C) Q and P represents Ka and Kj3lines respectively


(D) Relat~ve positions of Ka a~d Kj3 depend on the particular atom .
...
....
Which of the following. wavelength fails in a X-ray region?
(A) 10,O(jo A (B) 1000 A j$2)1 A . (D) 10-2 A
3~' The penetrating power of X-ray increases with th~
.,
( . (A) Increase of its vdocity ". (B)IncreliSe irlits-ihtensity' ...
r- " " (C)D~creaseinlts.velocity, • ..... ,~)IncreasesiJ;litsJ~equency.~,." """" ,<)
\
4.· ,The wavelength oithe :Kaline for anelelllent bftl~omic nUl!l~er 57 is'a,. Whatis the wavelength of the
c Ka line forthe element of at~mic number29? ". .
;.:-,
(A) a ' (B) 2ei (C)4a (D) 8a . " '
, . ... .
5. A X-ray tube operates at an accelerating potential of 20 kV. Which of the following wavelengths will be
absent in the~ontinuous spectrumofX~ray.
(A) 12 pm . (B) 45 pm . (C)65 pm " . vtD)95pm', .
c' 6. The "Ka" X-rays emission line of tungsten occurs at A= 0.021 nm.The energy difference between K
- and L levels in this atom is about "
C-'
(A) 0.51 MeV "\B) L2MeV (C) 59 keY .' CD) 13.6 eV i

c' , .

7. For nucleim.ass number A> 120


' . ..:
v'/

o (i) when two nuclei f~'s~together


.
energy is released.'
.
'.'
c; (ii) when nuclei brakes energy is released.-/"
. ;"
(iii) BE/nucleon decrease with increa~e'in ¥,,/~
C:
. (iv) BE decrease on A inc~se
( j, (A) (iii), (iv) . . @) (ii). (iii) (C) (i), (iii) (D) (ii),(iv)
C: 8. The radionuclide ~!·C dacays by ~+ emission.
C
Given that m(~lc)= 11.011434u
(\

['>
mq B}= 11.009305 U

1......"
~e::: 0.000548 u, lu = 931.5 MeV/c2 .' .

c theQ.;,valu'~ of.thisdecay proce~is :~


': ':;;'>;-', ,'. ":" Z,~·
(A)'o.9,62¥eV '''(B)'0;962 xl03 MeV ,,'
.... . ....
/­ (C) O:962eV (D)~rq- ' . ., .,'

~~/ :-~j

,- . '::i- ," .
..- '" .'.~ -' ';"-, •. -:'
. ' ..... -
·RACE
Regular Analysis "Ulrough Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
,ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I l
,

'9.

,M

, The above is a plot·of:binding energy per nucleon Bt" against the nuClear mass M; A, B, C, D. iE, F
correspond to different nuclei. Considerfourreacti()ns:
(i)A+'If~c:-;+e' (ii)C--+A+B+~ (iii)D+E--+F+e (iv)F--+D+E+e
',>Where,'ei.sthe energy 'due to mass deffect ?In,which reactions is e negative (absorbed) ?
(A) (ii)and (ivj:"(B')(ii) ~cl'(iii) '" '~(i)and (iv) . i(D) (i) and (iii) ,
l .
,
.
,", ' , ' , ' '" " :.'.'
' .

"C'l
..
• M 3M :
I. ',10. A. nucleus of mass M + &n is at rest and decays into. two daughter nueleiof mass 4 &4 each. Speed
I
,'1~,
.1
.i
. ' '. ,', " M

,,of light is c.' The speed of daughter nucleus ofmass 4 is:­

!
.!
. ,d! ,rt:m'
(A)C',,~
,~ ..(C)c p!.lm
M ~6~m
M

(B)cM+~m (D)c ,ji


'I
I
I
r
I

I'
t

!
,I!

'1
)

'.J
,g

,"
\,.:'1

~
:l·PQ,em 3. it5:':
~j"
""
t,!j'F@ ",4»"11
:~';",
- -<" ' _.< • 4.~1IIED
"

'''-~
s."I'A1l1uEm ,7•. ~,,; 8.~ /.­
9·14I!Z.eD ,lOir&E~
"'1'
Jr.
. ,._~,.,t.,.,....-,..,

ALLEM
CAREER INSTITUTE
"
R'>A~" •
..: ~
:"',~S"
"
~

-
-
.:
-"'J.,~.
,'"
" ' :" C
.~~ '"
, ' ~.. '-"
--",',
,~, -.f
':" """:E
EN:tROSrA.~lliU'RsE
... .
"

. ""-:'
:_
,
JEE ("ii.l'ilt.:jlii.t;.c~'df~Q' 4 '

'PHASE::1:'::;:;: " '


'
KOTA (RAJASTHAN'
,-­ Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise '

RACE # 67 ",' ,,; ".',,"~~i:;:~H':fS'CS

1. A free nucleus of mass 24 amu, initially at rest emits a gamm~' phot~~ 'rhre~e~~~':~f ~~ep~oton is
7 MeV.,The kinetic energy ofrecoilingnuc1eus is ,approximately equal to [Taky ; laIIl:q=,Q~iMey]
, : " . ' ,-" .• ;.:;.," . .' ,,' .•. '. ' " " '.;.;:. f -;<\·:~i~"/o·'d>.'·{ .':~'

(A) 1.1 keV, '" '(B)2.25keV, , ',(C)3.3 keV, " (D) 4.4 ~eV!" "
2. ' The differenc~ ,between the longest wavelength line'ofthe Brumer-senes ilrt'd sho,rtest,w1'vblength line of
the Lyma~ series'for a hydrogen like atom (AtdmicriuntberZ)'e,qmilto f:.'f..:Thev~ltilat·the~Ydberg
constant forthe given atom k ' ',' , ';, ' " " ' '" , '. , '
5 1 , 5 Z2 ,', , 31' .. 1 , " "
(A) 31 t.A,.Z2 , (B) 36 L1A ' , (C)s L1)~.Z2 ' ' (D) None',:
3. The mean lives of a radioactive sample are 30 years and 66y.~ars for a-e~issi~i(artd p":'e~ission
respectively. If the sample decays both by a-e!llission and ~-emission simultaneously, the time
after which, only one-fourth of the' sample remain is :­
(A) 10 years', . (B) 20 ye~rs '.. '(C)40years (D)45 years
4. The hydrogen noms in its ground state are excited by means of monochromatic radiation of
wavelength 1023 A. The number of lines which can be seen in .the resulting spectrum is :M
(A) t ' (B) 2 '. (C) 3 , (D) 6 .
s. A student makes 10 one-second measurements of thedisintegr(tu~~. of a sample of a long-lived radioacti ve
isotope and obtained the following values 3, 0, 2, 1,2,4,0, 1,2,5. How long should the student want
to establish the rate t~an uncertainity of 1 percent? (Given standard deviation of count rate of a radioactive
decay = ~mean decay rate)
(A) 80 sec :C.-; (B) 160 sec (C) 2000 sec (D) 5000 sec
6. An 8 cm diameter by 8 em-long NaI (TI) detector detects gainl:\ rays of a specific energy from a point
source of radioactivity. When the source is placed just next to the detector at the center of the circular
face, 50 percentOf all emitted gamma rays at that energy are detected. lithe detectoris moved to I meter
away, the fraction of detected gamma rays drops to '
(A) 2 x 10-4 (B) 4 x 10-4 " ',(C) 8n x 10-4 (D) 161t x 10-4
, 1. State~ent-1 : pMpartic1es emitted from radioactive nuclei have continuous energy ranging from zero to

a certain maximum value.

and

Statement-2.! In p-decay a nel;1tron is.coI}:Xfrted iI)to,a.protpn,aI1 <:flectrc)fl and an antineutrino. The total

energy emitted in p-;decay is shared by p~~1;lrtic1eand antineutrino. ' .

(A) Statement-1 is true, Statemei:1(..2 istrue ;Stafement-2 is acorrect explanation for Statement-l
(B) Statement-,! is true, Statement~2 is true, Statement-2is NOTa correct explanation for Statement-1
(C) Statement-l is !rue, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-l is False,Statement-2 is True
8. A thermal neutron strike& an isolate(1nUz38 atom in yacuum.Then

'" "'" (A)" The heatproduced)s roughlyectua1,tPJOOMev~':-':'~'

(B) The heat produced'is roughly equal to20d Mev,", '


(C) The heat produced is roughly equal to 300 M€v.', ", ' -"j' '}
, },

(D) No heat is prod~ced . ,

,r, .
>'." ' •• /

''.',
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014

'E
EXIi(clse-
i'.
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
.' "
PH~E: I

. .. .!

-:9~ , "A.)nhCleus'~ith"i:~ ~b erriiis'the foliowing in a sequence: a, a, p-, p-, a, a,~, a, p-, p-, a, p+, p+,
the'Z, or die: resultiIlg' nucleus is-'
, (1),'6
,..
iA2i18' . ",.-f~ ~' : I .
"(3)82"
. ~
, '(4)74 ." ,

', '
, ':10~;':S(atent~llt~1;:;Ariucleushaving energyE l decay~ by p- emission to daughter nucleus having energy (
,E:z,~\,lr~i~~'~:-"ray'~ are emitted with a continuous energy spectrum having end point energy El - E2 •
(
,:~$th.teDt~Qt~2:~omentQ~, and energy conservation principle are not applicable for nuclear reactions,
dfSt~tem~~t""l'is true, Statement.,..2 is true; Statement-2·is the correct explanation of Statement-l r "
\ ,

,(2)fStatement';';;1 is true; Statement-2 is true; Statement-2 is not the correct explanation of Statement-l
(3):Statem.ent,..;,lJ~ true, Statement-2 is false
{4J'~latel)1ent-l 'is raIse', Statement.,..2 is true
.,', :l";J.. , , . > ,.'"
- I, " .
\ ....

'~. ~ \.
(

C'
eo
.::~~!t
C

;'~;, .
,~ , ¥

, -~ ... ""::: ;.'"

i. ,

'l·.RnEQIPJ 4·~m ~
':'$.::G_lml 6. rAlmilOOl '7'~f:m:" 8t~ J
'9·-,gp-CaUI
, , . ~
)
~,/
;.;E'" JEE {Main + AdVat1~~d.l~Ol~";'I',, \.. "
AL.:~E.
CAR,EER INSTITUTE
"
~~ :~.~. . ENTHUSIASr:tOURSE"" '.
KOlA' (RAJASTHAN) rnl'nllnn l;OntmUOus' Exercise' I"
'PHASE:i< ,',',,'" ,
~ .....
RACE #,68 PHYSICS

1.,). \: A certain radioacti~e sample


~ 1'1 '
is observed to undergo 10000
.
decaysjnHjs,ec.Jn:w'bi~h
"', '. "
of.the'following
. •

, ' Icases can we say that decay rate during this time interval is approximately constant and equal to
1000 dps.
i (A) tl/2 =
10 sec =
(B) tmean 10 sec , (C) tin» 10 sec (D) tm « lOsec
2. 'During p-decay of stationary nucleus; an electronis observed with a kinetic energy of to MeV. From
.
)this, what can be concluded about the Q:- value oUhe
/. .
decay? •' '
=
,: '(A) Q 1.0 MeV (B) Q < 1.0 MeV , (C) Q >1.0 MeV
(D) Nothing can be concluded about theQ.:.valuf.fOf the decay?
3. A radio nuclide AI with decay constant Al transforms into a radio nuclide A2 with decay constant A2. At
, .. :
, . \'.
,,' '. :', ' "

the initial moment the prejiaration contained only the radio nuclide AI' The time interval after which the
activity of radiL'llu~lid~ A2 reachesits,max~mum.valuejs(A2>Ai):" ",'-,
. !

In (A2 -- A.t ) : '~ : ' I n ( A2 - AI ) , In (1..2 +"'\) In (A21 AI)


(A) X; +'A2 ' (B) Al + A2 (C) Al -A2 (D));; ~A "
" 2 . ',I '

4. Rear window ofa,cat:has"a size of 120 x 45 em2. The driver sits a't'a disbmce L :'2m from the rear
window. What should be the minimum size of flat mirror, hanging ata distl:lnce of 0.5 'm in fto~t of the
I .
l'''~
driver so that he has best view of road situationb~hind the car?' , '
" ,,'

(A)(24 cm x 9 cm) (B )(30 cm x 11.25 cm) (C)(40 cm x 15 cm) (D)(20 cm x 7.5 cm)
S. A particle of mass m is moving in yz-pUme ,~ith a uniform vel6d'ty v as shown in figure. It collides
elastically with the wall AB. The change ih its angular rnom~ntum about the origin as it bounces elastically
! ' from the wall.

z
B

r'
"

!( .. y
/
I,
'-, "'
(A) mval (B) .fimvai (C) 0 (D) 2mval
6. A point source of light B is placed a~ a distance L in front of the centre of a

II
mirror of width d hung vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the inirror
(
~,-
along a line parallel to'the mirror at a',dist~n6e,2L'from it as ,sh6wri~ The greatest d
B-
" , ' ,,' '
dist~n~e 9ver~hi~h h~ cim's~e'~e i~agt;of.th~-light so~~~e i~ thenri~or i~ , I~ 'If"., ':, '
, ,:,," '. , . , '[UT-JEE 'ZOOO (S~r)]
(b.) dl2 ' , ;, '" " .,', CB) d "f ',-'"
2L
.r
,
(C) 2d , m) 1£1
·'·:·R'·····'A········C)··'
>.. ..... .' E·.
,- :-:" .-:,' '.'., .~.
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2014
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
.Rugular Analyst. 'through COmlnllOUS !::XlII'Ill5e PHASE: I

7. Two points PandQ He on either&ide of an axis XY' as shown in figure. It is desired to produce
an image of P at Q using a spherical mirror, with XY as the optic axis. The mirrOr must be
(A) concave and positioned to theJeft of P •p
(B)' convex and positioned to the left of P X--------,-.. -'y
(C) concave and positioned to the right of Q '. i.
(D) convex and positioned to the right of Q .:~Q
f
8. A particle isqropped along the axis from a height 2 on a concave mirror of focal
length f as shown in figure. The maximum speed of image is h=f/2 Jg'
3
(A) 00 (B) 4 ~3fg

(C) %~3fg (D) None of these

1 1 '
9. Figure shows - vs - curve· for convex mirror;' Nature of image at
v u. . .

point A is

{A}Real, erect, magnified ..

(B) virtual; invert~d,magnified

l
(

10.
(C) virtual, inverted, diminished
(D) virtual, erect,diminished
In the diagram shown the velocity ofhnage will be along
Ie ". ~ u1

object .:::....

·F

:')bn4g;S \,j

p ::

(A) P (B)Q (C)R .(D)"S /"

FILL THE ANSWER HERE

1.E!.e~
.,. mr.T~WRlti3illi
~~
4.~

5·1mJ.~IWJ· 8·W~
~.

9. o it.!) >. t'll. 10. ~lr.Mlfm~

(

"'.:.-:"'

·R
· . '·
l

.
<a:':::'
....
~
:~.
';:C···-
': .
, - '

.
.'
.
.,- E'
':",-'
JEE (Main -'I- Advanced) 2014

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

KOlA (RAJAST-HAN) Reg~lar Analysl~ through Continuous ExercIse . PHASE: I

. . '-', ... .
PHYSICS
.;'\, l' .':t .J '.

1. A marginal ray is falling on:a concave spherical ~rror as shown in figure. The ratio of longitudinal

(~.) and transverse (y) sphegcal aberration is

." ."\a .

(A)' J3 (B)j§.

..'
c
2
(C).j3. . _(D) CanIt be determined

2. Which of the followingis/are evidence(s) for the existence of neutrons in an atom.7

, (A) .Th~ ratio of the charge to the mass of atorri's nucleus is smaller than that of a hydrogen nucleus.

,,' : '.'.':'" "" . ' "

l. . (B) An atom is always electrically neutral. .


'CG) Isotop~s are prese~t. .~' .
(D) Some at6ms are I1ldi~~ctiv~ in nature.
.... . .
3. The 2ikU:nu61e~shas a binding energy of about 7.6 Me V pernucl~on. If the nucleus were to fission i~to t~

two equal fragments, each would have a kinetic energy of just over 100 MeV. From this, it ~an be
concluded that :­
(A) nuclei near A= 119·has mass less .'
than half that _0(238lJ... , ' .

. \. (B) nuolei near A ~ 119 havemas'ses grea~er than half that of 238U

,(C)quclehnear,.A"=', i 19 must be bound bYab~ut 6.7:MeV I~u~leon

.' (D) ~uclei near A =119inust be bound by ab~ut··8.5 MeVI nucleon

4. A 1t-meson hycirogenatOIp.in a bound state of negatively charged pion (mass of pion = 27 times mass
of electrons) and a proton. If the number of revolutions a 1t-meson makes, x x 1010 in the ground state

r
\. of the atom before it decay (mean life of a pi-meson = 10-8 sec).

r
\.
(A)For n=l radius of 1t-meson atom will be (1.94 x 10-13 m)n2
(B) For n=l velocity in nth orbit is 2.18 x 106 mls
(C) Time of one revolutions is 5.6 x 10-19 s
"
, (D) Number of revolutions before 1t-meson decay is nearly 2 x 10 10
~. A light ray making an angle 300 with the principalaxis (Horizontal) of a concave mirror of focal length


of 30 cm, becomes vertical after reflection. The height of the point of incidence above the principal axis
(

is
II
f
\. (A) 60 cm (B) 30 cm (C) SO cm (D) 15v'3cm
c". A light ray parall~l to ,x-ros.is:.,is. tncidenton a parabolic concav~
,Y. - .....

" __ ,mirrodn X¥ plan~.The f~c~s of this"parabolais'at (1,0). The, unit

vector along the, r~fl~~ted raY'",vVill be.·. ' . " . . . .

;.; .t (X) T ;.' <:.' > "


,~(B) -"j '.I'; .X
'.: ... ..
'- ,i;,41 .. ' -,~, ~
•• 0..:.' ...

"(D) -i . '~
,'(C:) Ji7
JEE (Main + Advancedj 201. '.,

R
Regular Analys.ls
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE: I
'".'
1

, 1'< . .
( "',­
7. An objectis placed in front of aconvexmirroratadistanceof50cm. AqJlanemiiTorisintroduced between' \,
objectandconvex mirrorcoveringthe lowerhalfoftheconvex mirror.1fthe
"
distancebetweenthe object and
theplane mirroris 30cm. it is found that there is no gap betweenthe imagesformed:bythetwo:mirrors . The
radius ofthe convex mirroris:
(A) 12.5 cm (B) 25 cm (C) 50cm (D) 100cm
8. A concave mirror of focal length f is separated by a plane mirror facing the fonner bya distance of 3.6f.
Find where should a point sou~e be kept on their common axis, sothattherealimage coincideswith the
objeCt.
(A) 1.2 f from plane mirror (B) 2.4 f from plane miITor
(C) 1.8 ffrom plane mirror (D)none of these ; .r
y
9. You are given a parabolic mirror whose inner surface is silvered. The'equation
of the curve fonned by its intersection with x-y plane is given by y= x%/4. A
ray travelling in x-y plane along line y= x+3 hits .the: mirror in.second quadrant , .f,!'W • )(
andgets reflected,'The unit vector in the direction of reflected 'my is :":'

J2 -i-jA)
(A) 1 ('" (B) ~(i+}) (C) ..1 (-1 + J) (D) Non~ of these

10. A point object is 'placed on the axis of a concave mirror of focal-length 24 cm such that the image is
formed at a distance of 48 ~m from the pole: Distance of the object from poJe maybe
(A.) 48 cm (B} 16 cm (C) 32 cm (D) 20 cm ,
" "1

I
I
I

(j
FILL THE ANSWER HERE

I
1•. rlif.JmE.~J ' 2. I'G'EEIlml ...
IJ.
IIQ~
lPi4Dk.Q&L..
__ .U" 4•. ~m1
.,
5·fA.I.~. 7. ~E*¢IMI 8·ID!ImD
9; ~ma J
" .,.-,'
ALLE_I
CAR£ER INSTITUTE
KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
IM
R':A':
., ·:,C····· "E
.... .
Regular Analysis through Continuous Exercise
JEE (Main +J\dv~n~e.d)'2014:;>
ENTHUSIASl':CDUll.S,E, .'
PHASE :1'
;E #: 70 PHYSICS

A candle of length 2cro is placed perpendicular to principal axis of a concave mirror of aperture 10

cm and radius of curvature 40 cm at a distance of 30 em from the mirror. A white screen has to placed

. at the focal plane to obtain the image. If the screen is a square sheet of side 6 cm, then in. which of the

set of given arrangements the image can be totally obtained .


.\.~
..
13~
d d 1-
~·I
15cm

.. ;~ (0
3cm
(ii) 1""
2cm
(iii)
4cm
f
J (tv)

Ilcm

(A) (i) and (iii) (B) (ii) and (i v) (C) (i),(ii) & (iv) (D) None of these
2. The distance between an object and its doubly magnified image by a concave mirror is :
(assume f = focal length)

(A) 3/ (B) 2/
2 2
(C) 3/ (D) depends on whether the image is real or virtual
3. A beam of convergent light converges to a point 0.5 m in front of
the Inlrror after reflection at a convex mirror but in the absence of
the mirror the beam converges to a point 0.2 m behind the mirror. ••••••••• IP
The radius of curvature of the mirror is :­ .; ..... ~.

(A) 20 cm (B) 50 cm O.2m


(C) 66.67 em (D) 28.57 cm
4. A concave mirror forms an image of the sun at a distance of 12 cm from it.
(A) the radius of curvature of this mirror is 6 cm. ,

eB) to use it as a shaving mirror, it can be held at a dista.nce of 8-10 cm from the face '
:(C) if an object is kept at a distance of 24 em from it, the image formed \'yill be of the sdtne size as 'the object

(
. j
(0) all the above alternatives are correct. ~.

5. 'K system of coordinates is drawn in a medium whose refractive y

.
H~ ••••••••• ~
P l
index varies as f.t:: 1--
+y
2 , where 0 ::; y ::; 1 and J.t =2 for y <

.'
oas shown in figure. A ray of light is incident at origin at an angle
x

60f with y-axis as shown in the figure. At point P ray becomes


60·
!
( parallel to x-axis. The ~alue of His :­

{(~}-f'
112 112

(A) (B) {~ }
(C) {(J3) - lr'2 (D) (~-1 )

6. Statement-l : As x increases,:the distance of point of intersection


(
\..
of the reflected ray with axis from pole decrease. x
an~\ p C axis
(
Stafement-2 : As the distance x of a parallel ray from axis
~
increases, angle of incidence decreases.
( (A) $tatement-l is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2' is a correct explanation for~titem~t~1.
" (B)$"tatement-l is True, Statemerit.;..2 is True; Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for Statemerit-l.
\..~
(C) ,Statement-l is True, Statement-2 is False.
"­ (P)'Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
.:R'lAC E' .
, , ' .
" :. "
JEE(Maln+ Advanced) 2014
,',ENTHUSIASt
, '
COURSE,
'\I
I
, .' '" • ' ",Regular "nalysis ,lhrOll~h,~ontinuC!u" Exercise . PHASE,: ~ Ii
7. An ',opaque diSC of radIUs 10.00cm floats on the surface of a transparent homogeneous hquid. An "
isotropic light source is lit,at the bottom of the beaker containing the liquid, vertically below the <?entre of
the.disc. A person views the source from ,a point vertically above the center of the disc. TheJiquid is
slowly allowed to drain out through a tap. When the height of the liquid becomes 13.33 cm, the SOUtce
disappears. The refractive index of the liquid is
(A) 4/3 (B) 5/3 '(C) 3/2 (D) 5/4
8. Figure shows a ray of light passing through a glass slab. From figure, choose the correct option :­
(A) 1l1'= 112 J!!
(B) 'Ill <~
(C) ~ < IlJ
(D) III < IlJ ' ;. ,
9. A ray'of light passes through a rectangular glass block placed in a homogdneous . medium. It is refracted ,

and totally internally reflected. Which diagram shows a possible path of this ray?

glass
(A) (B)

(C)
glass ~)~~.- \. ~

10. A vessel of depth H is filled with a non-homogenous liquid whose refractive index varies with

.
the depth Yas: J1 == (1 + ~J What is the apparent depth as seen by an observer from above?

(A) 0.693 H (B) 0.667 H (C) 0.75 H (D) 0.500 H ,,~,

l,.i'
(
'--- .. /

J:,;

FILL THE ANSWER HERE f •


"., "

2.~ ~~
3.~ 4.'~

6.~ 7.~ 8.~

9. Enal@l'!m 10.~
"aa;:,\-:'ct--<~.
i
-<,:,

?H~
,',l:-'«

I.:' ~.'.,.' ':~ "::~:,.~


' ! i : ' ' - "'-_

-. i"",'
JEE(lY!aJn"-ifo: Adyai'utedr~;;.~'<~'''';'
ENTtJUSIASfCOORS£ <
.,;
Regular<Analysis through Continuous exercise <-f r;'< :~HA$E;::I'~:. .,: <<

,'<
StiEETERRATTA
ENTHUSE <COURSE <
". ' . .

GEOMETRICALO'P'TICS
. ,

EXERCISE.{S.~2)
8. <'.


\.

i
I
iI
'­ . «lId Figure) ;
I" (New correct Figure)
( ~. ;

l
I
I
I!
L~ ....·.;...~......;..;..; ....~.,;.......·........ ~; ....... j .......................................................:

4R 4R
23. Ans. 16.8 em New Answer (5/8 em)
( . aa
a a
24.
'
Ans.
.. a, '3
3-' New Answer = 3" > a, 11
Mattei'!., .:
'? ; :". ( . '1' " l' . ':~ : ~:.~:: ?;:','

> ,::;:~·~:::::::E:::::::·
"'s «Old F'IgUl.e,) -:~ .•
...-y ••••
ate.........
x:........
:::::::0':::::::::: (New. correct FIgure)

j[....
___ u . . . . .• . . . .• . . ·l ­ 'l
,<;, •
'......... ...............

::::::::"::'::,:: :::: ::: ..


u __ - Uuuuu "

(
\...,
2R~
«
15R
Ans.4R New Answer =3R, 4
/'
~
. 2
/
\-.
" 26~ Ans. (a) J3 (b) Normalto surface (c) Retrace the path, J3z + x = 10

2 .
New Answer = (a) J3 (b) Normal to surface Be (c) Retrace the path

c!
( \
i
I.'.
I,

R. ·'······CE
j

.' ':A" '. ,.,': . . .


~:
RegyllfAnalyslllhrough Con nuous·Exercllli.
JE£(Pttaln'll Adyancedl2014
ENTHUSI~lCDURSE
. PHAsE:: I
II
'I
I

Ray(l). '. ¥il.

1 '.

27. (Old Figure) Ray(2)


i
'.,
1I.

Ray(1) 1
......••
":~'.""b!
. .I,. ;.., I : ~'l

'. !
aXIS:
(New correct Figure) Ray(2)
X "I I' X
y

(ii) If the point 0 is 1 cm above the axis then what is the position of the image? Consider the 'optical
..;'
r center of the lens to be the origin. (Consider only paraxial rays)
i.

,':
';~

',;1

:"i

;~
~f;
'.~::

.,...
.,
.::

~
.~
.~~
.;~;

¥~
!~~
":i ._.....••.;-•
.. ~

You might also like